Index

210

English is not an official language of the Swiss Confederation. This translation is provided for information purposes only and has no legal force.

Swiss Civil Code

of 10 December 1907 (Status as of 1 July 2020)

The Federal Assembly of the Swiss Confederation,

based on Article 64 of the Federal Constitution1,2 and having considered the Dispatch of the Federal Council dated 28 May 19043,

decrees:

  Introduction

Art. 1 A. Application of the law

A. Application of the law

1 The law applies according to its wording or interpretation to all legal questions for which it contains a provision.

2 In the absence of a provision, the court1 shall decide in accordance with customary law and, in the absence of customary law, in accordance with the rule that it would make as legislator.

3 In doing so, the court shall follow established doctrine and case law.


1 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.

Art. 2 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / I. Acting in good faith

B. Scope and limits of legal relationships

I. Acting in good faith

1 Every person must act in good faith in the exercise of his or her rights and in the performance of his or her obligations.

2 The manifest abuse of a right is not protected by law.

Art. 3 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / II. Good faith

II. Good faith

1 Where the law makes a legal effect conditional on the good faith of a person, there shall be a presumption of good faith.

2 No person may invoke the presumption of good faith if he or she has failed exercise the diligence required by the circumstances.

Art. 4 B. Scope and limits of legal relationships / III. Judicial discretion

III. Judicial1 discretion

Where the law confers discretion on the court or makes reference to an assessment of the circumstances or to good cause, the court must reach its decision in accordance with the principles of justice and equity.


1 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.

Art. 5 C. Federal law and cantonal law / I. Cantonal civil law and local custom

C. Federal law and cantonal law

I. Cantonal civil law and local custom

1 Insofar as federal law reserves the application of cantonal law, the cantons may enact or repeal civil law provisions.

2 Where the law makes reference to practice or local custom, the existing cantonal law is deemed a valid expression thereof, provided no divergent practice is shown to exist.

Art. 6 C. Federal law and cantonal law / II. Cantonal public law

II. Cantonal public law

1 Federal civil law does not restrict the right of the cantons to enact public law.

2 The cantons are entitled within the limits of their sovereignty to restrict or prohibit the trade in certain goods or to declare transactions involving such goods legally invalid.

Art. 7 D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations

D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations

The general provisions of the Code of Obligations1 concerning the formation, performance and termination of contracts also apply to other civil law matters.


1 SR 220

Art. 8 E. Rules of evidence / I. Burden of proof

E. Rules of evidence

I. Burden of proof

Unless the law provides otherwise, the burden of proving the existence of an alleged fact shall rest on the person who derives rights from that fact.

Art. 9 E. Rules of evidence / II. Proof by public document

II. Proof by public document

1 Public registers and public deeds constitute full proof of the facts evidenced by them, unless their content is shown to be incorrect.

2 Such proof of incorrectness does not require to be in any particular form.

Art. 101

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

  Part One: Law of Persons

  Title One: Natural Persons

  Chapter One: Legal Personality

Art. 11 A. Personality in general / I. Legal capacity

A. Personality in general

I. Legal capacity

1 Every person has legal capacity.

2 Accordingly, within the limits of the law, every person has the same capacity to have rights and obligations.

Art. 12 A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 1. Nature

II. Capacity to act

1. Nature

A person who has capacity to act has the capacity to create rights and obligations through his actions.

Art. 131A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / a. In general

2. Requirements

a. In general

A person who is of age and is capable of judgement has the capacity to act.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 141A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / b. Majority

b. Majority

A person is of age if he or she has reached the age of 18.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 151A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / c. ...

c. ...


1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, with effect from 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 161A. Personality in general / II. Capacity to act / 2. Requirements / d. Capacity of judgement

d. Capacity of judgement

A person is capable of judgement within the meaning of the law if he or she does not lack the capacity to act rationally by virtue of being under age or because of a mental disability, mental disorder, intoxication or similar circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 171A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 1. In general

III. Incapacity

1. In general

A person does not have the capacity to act if he or she is incapable of judgement or is under age or is subject to a general deputyship.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 18 A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 2. Lack of capacity of judgement

2. Lack of capacity of judgement

A person who is incapable of judgement cannot create legal effect by his or her actions, unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 19 A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / a. Principle

3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act.

a. Principle1

1 Persons who are capable of judgement but lack the capacity to act may only enter into obligations or give up rights with the consent of their legal representative.2

2 Without such consent, they may only accept advantages that are free of charge or carry out minor everyday transactions.3

3 They are liable in damages for unpermitted acts.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19a1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / b. Consent of the legal representative

b. Consent of the legal representative

1 Unless the law provides otherwise, the legal representative may consent expressly or tacitly in advance or approve the transaction retrospectively.

2 The other party is relieved of any obligation if approval is not given within a reasonable period that he or she fixes or has fixed by a court.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19b1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act. / c. Absence of consent

c. Absence of consent

1 If the legal representative does not grant approval, either party may demand restitution of any performance already made. A person lacking capacity to act is however only liable to the extent that he or she has already benefited from the performance or to which he or she has been enriched at the time of the demand or has alienated the benefits in bad faith.

2 If the person lacking capacity to act has induced the other party to erroneously assume that he or she has the capacity to act, he or she is liable for the damage incurred.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19c1A. Personality in general / III. Incapacity / 4. Strictly personal rights

4. Strictly personal rights

1 Persons capable of judgement but lacking capacity to act exercise their strictly personal rights independently; cases where the law requires the consent of the legal representative are reserved.

2 The legal representative acts for a person lacking capacity of judgement unless a right is so strictly personal that any form of representation is excluded.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 19d1A. Personality in general / IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act

IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act

The capacity to act may be restricted by an adult protection measure.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 20 A. Personality in general / IV. Kinship by blood and by marriage / 1. Blood kinship

IV.1 Kinship by blood and by marriage

1. Blood kinship

1 The degree of kinship2 is determined by the number of intermediary generations.

2 Lineal kinship exists between two persons where one is descended from the other and collateral kinship exists between two persons where both are descended from a third person and are not related lineally.


1 Amended of margin title in accordance with No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819, 1973 92; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 211A. Personality in general / IV. Kinship by blood and by marriage / 2. Kinship by marriage

2. Kinship by marriage

1 Where one person is related to another, he or she is related as an in-law to the latter’s spouse or registered partner in the same line and to the same degree.

2 Kinship by marriage is not ended by dissolution of the marriage or of the registered partnership which created it.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Registered Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 22 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 1. Origin

V. Place of origin and domicile

1. Origin

1 The place of origin of a person is determined by his or her citizenship.

2 Citizenship is governed by public law.

3 If a person is a citizen of more than one place, his or her place of origin is the one in which he or she is or was most recently resident or, in the absence of any such residence, the one in which he or she or his or her ancestors last acquired citizenship.

Art. 23 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / a. Definition

2. Domicile

a. Definition

1 A person’s domicile is the place in which he or she resides with the intention of settling; residence for the purpose of education or the accommodation of a person in an educative institution or care home, a hospital or a penal institution does not by itself establish domicile.1

2 No person may have more than one domicile at a time.

3 This provision does not apply to places of business.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 24 A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / b. Change of domicile, temporary residence

b. Change of domicile, temporary residence

1 A person retains his or her domicile until such time as a new one is acquired.

2 A person’s domicile is deemed to be the place in which he or she is temporarily resident if no previously established domicile may be proven or if he or she was formerly resident abroad and has not yet established a domicile in Switzerland.

Art. 251A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / c. Domicile of minors

c. Domicile of minors2

1 The domicile of a child subject to parental responsibility3 is deemed to be that of the parents or, if the parents have different domiciles, that of the parent with whom the child is resident; in all other cases it is deemed to be the child’s temporary domicile.

2 Children under guardianship are domiciled at the seat of the child protection authority.4


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Term in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). This amendment is taken into consideration throughout the Code.
4 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 261A. Personality in general / V. Place of origin and domicile / 2. Domicile / d. Persons in institutions

d. Persons in institutions

Adults subject to a general deputyship are domiciled at the location of the adult protection authority.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 27 B. Protection of legal personality / I. Against excessive restriction

B. Protection of legal personality

I. Against excessive restriction1

1 No person may, wholly or in part, renounce his or her legal capacity or his or her capacity to act.

2 No person may surrender his or her freedom or restrict the use of it to a degree which violates the law or public morals.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 281B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 1. Principle

II. Against infringements

1. Principle

1 Any person whose personality rights are unlawfully infringed may petition the court for protection against all those causing the infringement.

2 An infringement is unlawful unless it is justified by the consent of the person whose rights are infringed or by an overriding private or public interest or by law.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28a1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 2. Actions / a. In general

2. Actions

a. In general2

1 The applicant may ask the court:

1.
to prohibit a threatened infringement;
2.
to order that an existing infringement cease;
3.
to make a declaration that an infringement is unlawful if it continues to have an offensive effect.

2 In particular the applicant may request that the rectification or the judgment be notified to third parties or published.

3 Claims for damages and satisfaction and for handing over profits in accordance with the provisions governing agency without authority are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28b1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 2. Actions / b. Violence, threats or harassment

b. Violence, threats or harassment

1 To obtain protection from violence, threats or harassment, the applicant may request the court in particular to order the offending party to refrain from:

1.
approaching the applicant or from entering a defined area around the applicant’s dwelling;
2.
frequenting specified locations, notably particular streets, squares or districts;
3.
from making contact with the applicant, especially by telephone, in writing or electronically, or from harassing the applicant in any other way.

2 If the applicant lives in the same dwelling as the offending party, the applicant may ask the court to order the offending party to leave the dwelling for a specified period. This period may be extended on one occasion for good cause.

3 Where justified by the circumstances, the court may:

1.
require the applicant to pay reasonable compensation for his or her exclusive use of the dwelling; or
2.
with the landlord’s consent, transfer the rights and obligations under the lease to the applicant alone.

3bis It shall give notice of its decision to the competent child and adult protection authorities, the competent cantonal authority under paragraph 4 and other authorities and third parties, provided this appears necessary in order to fulfil its responsibilities or for the protection of the applicant, or enables the decision to be enforced.2

4 The cantons shall designate an authority which in urgent cases may order the immediate expulsion of the offending party from the joint dwelling and shall enact rules governing the procedure.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 14 Dec. 2018 on Improving the Protection given to Victims of Violence, in force since 1 July 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 28c–28f1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 3. ...

3. ...


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636). Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 28g1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / a. Principle

4. Right of reply

a. Principle2

1 Any person whose personality rights are directly affected by a representation of events in periodically appearing media, especially the press, radio or television, shall have a right of reply.

2 There is no right of reply in respect of accurate reports of the public dealings of an authority in which the affected person took part.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats and Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 28h1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / b. Form and content

b. Form and content

1 The text of the reply must be succinct and confine itself to the subject matter of the contentious representation.

2 The reply may be refused if it is plainly incorrect or violates the law or public morals.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28i1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / c. Procedure

c. Procedure

1 The author of the reply must send the text to the media company within 20 days of learning of the contentious representation, but at the latest within three months of publication.

2 The media company must immediately inform the author of the reply when it will be published or why it is rejected.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28k1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / d. Publication

d. Publication

1 The reply must be published as soon as possible and in such a manner as to ensure that it reaches the same audience or readership as the contentious representation.

2 The reply must be identified as such; the media company is not permitted to make any addition except to state whether it stands by its representation or to indicate its sources.

3 The reply must be published free of charge.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).

Art. 28l1B. Protection of legal personality / II. Against infringements / 4. Right of reply / e. Recourse to the courts

e. Recourse to the courts

1 If the media company obstructs the right of reply, rejects the reply or fails to publish it correctly, the party in question may petition the court.

2 ...2

3 and 4 ...3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 16 Dec. 1983, in force since 1 July 1985 (AS 1984 778; BBl 1982 II 636).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 29 B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 1. Protection of one’s name

III. Right to use one’s name

1. Protection of one’s name

1 If a person’s use of his or her name is disputed, he or she may apply for a court declaration confirming his rights.

2 If a person is adversely affected because another person is using his or her name, he or she may seek an order prohibiting such use and, if the user is at fault, may bring a claim for damages and, where justified by the nature of the infringement, for satisfaction.

Art. 30 B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 2. Change of name / a. General

2. Change of name

a. General1

1 The government of the canton of residence may permit a person to change his or her name for good cause.2

2 ...3

3 A person adversely affected by a change of name may contest the same in court within one year of learning thereof.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 30a1B. Protection of legal personality / III. Right to use one’s name / 2. Change of name / b. On the death of a spouse

b. On the death of a spouse

A person whose spouse dies may, if that person changed his or her surname on marriage, at any time declare before the civil registrar the wish to revert to the name by which he or she was known prior to the marriage.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 31 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / I. Birth and death

C. Beginning and end of personality rights

I. Birth and death

1 Personality rights begin on the birth of the living child and end on death.

2 An unborn child has legal capacity provided that it survives birth.

Art. 32 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 1. Burden of proof

II. Proof

1. Burden of proof

1 Any person who, in exercising a right, relies on the fact that another person is living or has died or was alive at a particular time or survived another person must produce evidence thereof.

2 If it cannot be proved that, of a group of several deceased persons, one survived another, all are deemed to have died at the same time.

Art. 33 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 2. Evidence / a. In general

2. Evidence

a. In general

1 Proof of the birth or death of a person is established by the records kept by the civil register.

2 If records are missing or shown to be incorrect, proof may be adduced in another form.

Art. 34 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / II. Proof / 2. Evidence / b. Presumption of death

b. Presumption of death

The death of a person is deemed proven, even if no-one has seen the corpse, if that person has disappeared in circumstances in which his death may be considered certain.

Art. 35 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 1. In general

III. Declaration of presumed death

1. In general

1 If it is highly probable that a person is dead because he or she has disappeared in extremely life-threatening circumstances or has been missing for a lengthy period without any sign of life, the court may declare that person presumed dead on application by any person deriving rights from his or her death.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 36 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 2. Procedure

2. Procedure

1 The application may be made when at least one year has elapsed since the life-threatening event or five years have elapsed since the last sign of life.

2 The court must, by suitable public means, call on any person who may provide information about the missing person to come forward within a specified period.

3 The period shall run for at least one year following the first public notice.

Art. 37 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 3. Failure of application

3. Failure of application

If the missing person comes forward within the set period or if news of the missing person is received or if the date of his or her death is proved, the application fails.

Art. 38 C. Beginning and end of personality rights / III. Declaration of presumed death / 4. Effect

4. Effect

1 If no news is received during the set period, the missing person is declared presumed dead and rights derived from the fact of his or her death may be enforced as if death were proven.

2 The declaration of presumed death has retroactive effect from the time of the life-threatening event or the last sign of life.

3 A declaration of presumed death dissolves a marriage.1


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Chapter Two:1  Registration of Civil Status

Art. 391A. Registers / I. In general

A. Registers

I. In general

1 Civil status is recorded in an electronic register (civil register).

2 Civil status includes in particular:

1.
a person’s particulars, such as those relating to birth, marriage, registered civil partnership and death;
2.
a person’s status under the law of persons and family law, such as majority, parentage, marriage or registered civil partnership;
3.
names;
4.
cantonal and communal citizenship;
5.
nationality.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 40 A. Registers / II. Duty to notify

II. Duty to notify1

1 The Federal Council determines which persons and authorities have a duty to furnish the information necessary to record civil status.

2 It may provide that breaches of said duty be punishable by fines.

3 ...2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Repealed by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), with effect from 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 41 A. Registers / III. Proof of undisputed information

III. Proof of undisputed information

1 Where documentary proof of information concerning civil status is required but is impossible or unreasonably difficult to obtain despite making reasonable efforts, the cantonal supervisory authority may accept a declaration made in the presence of the registrar as proof provided such information is not disputed.

2 The registrar shall remind any person making such a declaration of his or her duty to tell the truth and that a false declaration may lead to prosecution.

Art. 42 A. Registers / IV. Rectification / 1. By court order

IV. Rectification

1. By court order

1 Any person who satisfies the court that he or she has a personal interest warranting protection may seek an order for the registration of disputed information concerning personal status or the rectification or removal of an entry. The court shall hear the relevant cantonal supervisory authority, to which it shall notify its judgment.

2 The cantonal supervisory authorities are likewise entitled to make such applications.

Art. 43 A. Registers / IV. Rectification / 2. By the register authorities

2. By the register authorities

The register authorities must of their own accord rectify mistakes resulting from an obvious oversight or error.

Art. 43a1A. Registers / V. Data protection and disclosure

V. Data protection and disclosure

1 In relation to the registration of civil status, the Federal Council is responsible for safeguarding the personality and constitutional rights of persons in respect of whom data is processed.

2 It regulates the disclosure of data to private persons who may show a direct interest warranting protection.

3 It stipulates those authorities, in addition to the register authorities, to whom the data necessary for the performance of their legal duties may be disclosed periodically or on request. The disclosure provisions under cantonal law are reserved.

3bis The register authorities are required to report to the competent authority any criminal offences that come to their attention while carrying out their official duties.2

4 The following bodies have online access to data required for proving the identity of a person:

1.
the issuing authorities under the Federal Act of 22 June 20013 on Identification Documents for Swiss Nationals;
2.4
the federal agency responsible for operating the computerised police search system under Article 15 of the Federal Act of 13 June 20085 on the Federal Police Information Systems and the filtering agencies of the cantonal and communal police forces linked into the search system;
3.
the federal agency responsible for keeping the computerised register of convictions under Art. 359 of the Criminal Code6;
4.
the federal agency responsible for investigations regarding missing persons7;
5.8
the Federal Intelligence Service for the early detection and prevention of threats to internal or external security in accordance with Article 6 paragraph 1 letter a of the Intelligence Service Act of 25 September 20159;
6.10
the authorities responsible for keeping the cantonal and communal registers of residents in accordance with the Register Harmonisation Act of 23 June 200611;
7. 12
the federal agencies responsible for keeping the central registers of insured persons in accordance with Article 71 paragraph 4 letter a of the Federal Act of 20 December 194613 on Old-Age and Survivors Insurance;
8. 14
the federal agencies at the Federal Department of Foreign Affairs responsible for keeping the register of Swiss living abroad in accordance with Article 4 paragraph 1 of the Federal Act of 24 March 200015 on the Processing of Personal Data.

1 Introduced by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).
2 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
3 SR 143.1
4 Amended by Annex 1 No 4 of the FA of 13 June 2008 on the Federal Police Information Systems, in force since 5 Dec. 2008 (AS 2008 4989; BBl 2006 5061).
5 SR 361
6 Now: Art. 365.
7 Currently the Federal Office of Police.
8 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the Intelligence Service Act of 25 Sept. 2015, in force since 1 Sept. 2017 (AS 2017 4095; BBl 2014 2105).
9 SR 121
10 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
11 SR 431.02
12 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
13 SR 831.10
14 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).
15 SR 235.2

Art. 44 B. Organisation / I. Civil register authorities / 1. Civil registrars

B. Organisation

I. Civil register authorities

1. Civil registrars

1 In particular, the registrars shall perform the following tasks:

1.
they maintain the civil register;
2.
they make notifications and provide extracts;
3.
they carry out the preparatory procedure for weddings and conduct the wedding ceremony;
4.
they record declarations as to civil status.

2 Exceptionally, the Federal Council may entrust a representative of Switzerland abroad with these tasks.

Art. 45 B. Organisation / I. Civil register authorities / 2. Supervisory authorities

2. Supervisory authorities

1 Each canton shall appoint a supervisory authority.

2 In particular, the supervisory authority shall perform the following tasks:

1.
it supervises the register offices;
2.
it supports and advises the register offices;
3.
it assists in maintaining the civil register and in carrying out the preparatory procedure for weddings;
4.
it issues directives on recognition and recording of matters relating to civil status that occur abroad and of foreign judicial and administrative decisions concerning civil status;
5.
it provides for the basic and continuing education and training of persons working in the civil register service.

3 The Confederation is responsible for oversight. It may have recourse to cantonal appeal procedures against the decisions of the registrars and the supervisory authorities.1


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 45a1B. Organisation / Ia. Central civil information system

Ia. Central civil information system

1 The Confederation shall operate and develop a central civil information system for running a centralised civil register.

2 The Confederation bears the operating and development costs.

3 The cantons shall pay the Confederation an annual fee for the use of the system for the purposes of managing the register of civil status.

4 The Confederation shall involve the cantons in the development of the system and provide technical support in its use.

5 In cooperation with the cantons, the Federal Council regulates:
1.
the details of the cantons’ involvement in developing the system;
2.
the amount to be paid by the cantons for its use;
3.
the rights of access of the civil register authorities and other agencies with access rights;
4.
how the Confederation and cantons cooperate over running the system;
5.
the organisational and technical measures necessary to safeguard data protection and data security;
6.
data archiving.

6 It may provide for the costs of services for third parties for purposes unrelated to civil status matters to be charged to these third parties.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register) (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639). Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 46 B. Organisation / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 Any person suffering loss caused unlawfully by persons employed in the civil register service in the exercise of their official duties is entitled to damages and, where justified by the gravity of the loss, to satisfaction.

2 The canton is liable; it may have recourse against persons who have caused loss wilfully or through gross negligence.

3 The Government Liability Act of 14 March 19581 applies in relation to persons employed by the Confederation.


Art. 47 B. Organisation / III. Disciplinary measures

III. Disciplinary measures

1 Wilful or negligent breaches of official duty by persons working in civil register offices are subject to disciplinary measures taken by the cantonal supervisory authority.

2 Disciplinary measures shall consist of reprimands, fines of up to CHF 1000 or, in serious cases, removal from office.

3 The right to prosecute is reserved.

Art. 48 C. Implementing provisions / I. Federal law

C. Implementing provisions

I. Federal law

1 The Federal Council issues the provisions on implementation.

2 In particular it regulates:

1.
the registers to be maintained and the information to be recorded;

2. the use of the OASI number in accordance with Article 50c of the Federal Act of 20 December 19461 on the Old-Age and Survivors' Insurance for the purpose of electronic data exchange between official registers of persons;

3. the maintenance of the register;

4.
supervision.2

3 To ensure technically reliable implementation the Federal Council may set minimum requirements for the basic and continuing education and training of personnel in the civil register service and for the function of registrar.

4 It determines the fees charged by the civil register service.

5 It determines the conditions on which it is permissible by electronic means:

1.
to provide civil status information;
2.
to make declarations concerning civil status;
3.
to make notifications and provide extracts from the civil register.3

1 SR 831.10
2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Register Harmonisation Act of 23 June 2006, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2006 4165; BBl 2006 427).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic Civil Register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 49 C. Implementing provisions / II. Cantonal law

II. Cantonal law

1 The cantons define the civil register districts.

2 They enact the provisions necessary for implementation within the framework of federal law.

3 Such cantonal provisions, with the exception of those concerning remuneration of personnel, are subject to approval by the Confederation.

Art. 50 and 51

Repealed


  Title Two: Legal Entities

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 52 A. Legal personality

A. Legal personality

1 Associations of persons organised as corporate bodies and independent bodies with a specific purpose acquire legal personality on being entered in the commercial register.

2 Public law corporations and bodies, and associations that do not have a commercial purpose do not require registration.1

3 Associations of persons and bodies which pursue an immoral or unlawful purpose may not acquire legal personality.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 12 Dec. 2014 on the Implementation of the 2012 Revision of the Recommendations of the Financial Action Task Force, in force since 1 Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 53 B. Legal capacity

B. Legal capacity

Legal entities have all the rights and duties other than those which presuppose intrinsically human attributes, such as gender, age or kinship.

Art. 54 C. Capacity to act / I. Requirements

C. Capacity to act

I. Requirements

Legal entities have capacity to act once the governing bodies required by law and their articles of association have been appointed.

Art. 55 C. Capacity to act / II. Action on behalf of the legal entity

II. Action on behalf of the legal entity

1 The governing bodies express the will of the legal entity.

2 They bind the legal entity by concluding transactions and by their other actions.

3 The governing officers are also personally liable for their wrongful acts.

Art. 561D. Seat

D. Seat

The seat of the legal entity is located where its administration is carried out, unless its articles of association provide otherwise.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 57 E. Dissolution / I. Application of assets

E. Dissolution

I. Application of assets

1 On dissolution of a legal entity, and unless provided otherwise by law, the articles of association, the founding charter or the governing bodies, its assets pass to the state authority (Confederation, canton, commune) to which the entity had been assigned according to its objects.

2 Such assets must be used as far as possible for the original purpose.

3 Where a legal entity is dissolved due to its pursuit of immoral or unlawful objects, the assets pass to the state authority even where contrary provision has been made.1


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 58 E. Dissolution / II. Liquidation

II. Liquidation

The procedure for liquidating the assets of the legal entity is governed by the regulations for cooperatives.

Art. 59 F. Reservation of public law and company law

F. Reservation of public law and company law

1 Public and ecclesiastical corporations and institutions are governed by federal and cantonal public law.

2 Associations of persons which pursue a commercial purpose are subject to the provisions on companies and cooperatives.

3 Common land cooperatives and similar bodies remain subject to the provisions of cantonal law.


  Chapter Two: Associations

Art. 60 A. Formation / I. Corporate group of persons

A. Formation

I. Corporate group of persons

1 Associations with a political, religious, scientific, cultural, charitable, social or other non-commercial purpose acquire legal personality as soon as their intention to exist as a corporate body is apparent from their articles of association.

2 The articles of association must be done in writing and indicate the objects of the association, its resources and its organisation.

Art. 61 A. Formation / II. Entry in the commercial register

II. Entry in the commercial register1

1 Once the articles of association have been ratified and the committee appointed, the association is eligible for entry in the commercial register.

2 The association must be registered if it:

1.
conducts a commercial operation in pursuit of its objects;
2.
is subject to an audit requirement.2

3 The articles of association and a list of committee members must be enclosed with the application for registration.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 62 A. Formation / III. Associations lacking legal personality

III. Associations lacking legal personality

Associations which cannot acquire or have not yet acquired legal personality are treated as simple partnerships.

Art. 63 A. Formation / IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law

IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law

1 Where the articles of association do not provide rules for the association’s organisation or its relationship with its members, the following provisions apply.

2 Mandatory provisions of law cannot be altered by the articles of association.

Art. 64 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 1. Function, convening of meetings

B. Organisation

I. General meeting

1. Function, convening of meetings

1 The general meeting of members is the supreme governing body of the association.

2 The general meeting is called by the committee.

3 General meetings must be convened in accordance with the rules set out in the articles of association and also, as required by law, if one-fifth of the members so request.

Art. 65 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 2. Powers

2. Powers

1 The general meeting of members decides on admission and exclusion of members, appoints the committee and decides all matters which are not reserved to other governing bodies of the association.

2 It supervises the activities of the governing bodies and may at any time dismiss the latter without prejudice to any contractual rights of those dismissed.

3 The right of dismissal exists by law whenever justified by good cause.

Art. 66 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / a. Form

3. Resolutions

a. Form

1 Resolutions are passed by the general meeting.

2 The written consent of all members to a proposal is equivalent to a resolution of the general meeting.

Art. 67 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / b. Voting rights and majority

b. Voting rights and majority

1 All members have equal voting rights at the general meeting.

2 Resolutions require a majority of the votes of the members present.

3 Resolutions may be taken on matters for which proper notice has not been given only where this is expressly permitted by the articles of association.

Art. 68 B. Organisation / I. General meeting / 3. Resolutions / c. Exclusion from voting

c. Exclusion from voting

Each member is by law excluded from voting on any resolution concerning a transaction or dispute between him or her, his or her spouse or a lineal relative on the one hand and the association on the other.

Art. 69 B. Organisation / II. Committee / 1. Rights and duties in general

II. Committee

1. Rights and duties in general1

The committee is entitled and obliged as defined under the articles of association to manage and represent the association.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 69a1B. Organisation / II. Committee / 2. Accounting

2. Accounting

The committee shall maintain the association’s business ledgers. The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on commercial bookkeeping and accounting apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names) (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 Dec. 2011 (Accounting Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 69b1B. Organisation / III. Auditors

III. Auditors

1 The association must submit its accounts to a full audit by external auditors if two of the following figures are exceeded in two successive business years:

1.
total assets of CHF 10 million;
2.
turnover of CHF 20 million;
3.
average annual total of 50 full-time staff.

The association must submit its accounts to a limited audit by external auditors if a member with personal liability or an obligation to provide further capital so requests.

The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on external auditors for companies apply mutatis mutandis.

4 In all other cases the articles of association and the general meeting3 are free to make such auditing arrangements as they deem fit.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220
3 Corrected by the Federal Assembly Drafting Committee (Art. 58 para. 1 ParlA; SR 171.10).

Art. 69c1B. Organisation / IV. Organisational defects

IV. Organisational defects

1 If the association lacks one of the prescribed governing bodies, a member or a creditor may apply to the court for an order that the necessary measures be taken.

2 In particular, the court may set the association a time limit in which to restore the situation required by law and may, if necessary, appoint an administrator.

3 The association bears the cost of such measures. The court may order the association to make an advance payment to the persons appointed.

4 For good cause, the association may apply to the court for the removal of the persons it appointed.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 70 C. Membership / I. Admission, resignation

C. Membership

I. Admission, resignation

1 Members may be admitted at any time.

2 All members have a legal right to resign subject to six months’ notice expiring at the end of the calendar year or, if an administrative period is provided for, at the end of such period.

3 Membership is neither transferable nor heritable.

Art. 711C. Membership / II. Duty to pay subscriptions

II. Duty to pay subscriptions

Members have a duty to pay subscriptions if the articles of association so provide.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 Dec. 2004 (Determination of Subscription Duties for Association Members), in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 72 C. Membership / III. Exclusion

III. Exclusion

1 The articles of association may specify the grounds on which a member may be excluded, but exclusion may also occur without reasons being given.

2 In such cases, the exclusion may not be challenged based on the reasons.

3 Unless the articles of association provide otherwise, exclusion requires a resolution by the members and good cause.

Art. 73 C. Membership / IV. Status of former members

IV. Status of former members

1 Members who resign or are excluded have no claim on the assets of the association.

2 They are liable for the subscriptions due during the period of their membership.

Art. 74 C. Membership / V. Protection of the objects of the association

V. Protection of the objects of the association

No member may be forced against his or her will to accept a change in the objects of the association.

Art. 75 C. Membership / VI. Protection of members

VI. Protection of members

Any member who has not consented to a resolution which infringes the law or the articles of association is entitled by law to challenge such resolution in court within one month of learning thereof.

Art. 75a1Cbis. Liability

Cbis. Liability

The association is liable for its obligations with its assets. Such liability is limited to the assets unless the articles of association provide otherwise.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 Dec. 2004 (Determination of Subscription Duties for Association Members), in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 2117; BBl 2004 4835 4843).

Art. 76 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 1. By resolution

D. Dissolution

I. Manner of dissolution

1. By resolution

The association may be dissolved at any time by resolution of the members.

Art. 77 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 2. By operation of law

2. By operation of law

The association is dissolved by operation of law if it is insolvent or if the committee may no longer be appointed in accordance with the articles of association.

Art. 78 D. Dissolution / I. Manner of dissolution / 3. By court order

3. By court order

Where the objects of the association are unlawful or immoral, the competent authority or an interested party may apply for a court order of dissolution.

Art. 79 D. Dissolution / II. Deletion from the commercial register

II. Deletion from the commercial register

Where the association is registered, the committee or the court shall inform the commercial registrar of the dissolution so that the entry may be deleted.


  Chapter Three: Foundations

Art. 80 A. Formation / I. In general

A. Formation

I. In general

A foundation is established by the endowment of assets for a particular purpose.

Art. 81 A. Formation / II. Form of establishment

II. Form of establishment

1 A foundation may be created by public deed or by testamentary disposition.1

2 The foundation is entered in the commercial register based on its charter and, as the case may be, in accordance with any directions issued by the supervisory authority, and the entry must indicate the members of the board of trustees.

3 The probate authority shall inform the commercial registrar of the creation of the foundation by testamentary disposition.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 82 A. Formation / III. Challenge

III. Challenge

A foundation may be challenged by the founder’s heirs or creditors in the same manner as a gift.

Art. 831B. Organisation / I. In general

B. Organisation

I. In general

The foundation charter shall stipulate the foundation’s governing bodies and the manner in which it is to be administered.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83a1B. Organisation / II. Bookkeeping

II. Bookkeeping

1 The supreme governing body of the foundation shall maintain its business ledgers. The provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on commercial bookkeeping and accounting apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 Dec. 2011 (Accounting Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 6679; BBl 2008 1589).
2 SR 220

Art. 83b1B. Organisation / III. Auditors / 1. Duty of audit and applicable law

III. Auditors

1. Duty of audit and applicable law

1 The board of trustees shall appoint external auditors.

2 The supervisory authority may exempt a foundation from the duty to appoint external auditors. The Federal Council determines the conditions for such exemption.

3 Where there are no special provisions for foundations, the provisions of the Code of Obligations2 on external auditors for public limited companies apply mutatis mutandis.

If the foundation has a duty to carry out a limited audit, the supervisory authority may require a full audit where necessary for a reliable assessment of the foundation’s financial situation.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 SR 220

Art. 83c1B. Organisation / III. Auditors / 2. Supervisory authority

2. Supervisory authority

The external auditors must provide the supervisory authority with a copy of the audit report and all important communications with the foundation.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 83d1B. Organisation / IV. Organisational defects

IV. Organisational defects

1 If the planned system of organisation proves inadequate or if the foundation lacks one of the prescribed governing bodies or one such body is not lawfully constituted, the supervisory authority must take the necessary measures. In particular it may:

1.
set a time limit within which the foundation must restore the legally required situation; or
2.
appoint the body which is lacking or an administrator.

2 In the event that the foundation is unable to organise itself effectively, the supervisory authority shall transfer its assets to another foundation with as similar objects as possible.

3 The foundation bears the cost of such measures. The supervisory authority may require the foundation to make an advance payment to the persons appointed.

4 For good cause, the foundation may request the supervisory authority to remove persons whom it has appointed.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 84 C. Supervision

C. Supervision

1 Foundations are supervised by the state authority (Confederation, canton, commune) to which they are assigned.

1bis The cantons may subject foundations at communal level to supervision at cantonal level.1

2 The supervisory authority must ensure that the foundation’s assets are used for their declared purpose.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84a1Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency

Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency

1 Where there are grounds for concern that the foundation is overindebted or will no longer be able to meet its obligations in the longer term, its board of trustees must draw up an interim balance sheet at liquidation values and submit it to the external auditors. If the foundation has no external auditors, the board of trustees must submit the interim balance sheet to the supervisory authority.

2 If the external auditors establish that the foundation is overindebted or will no longer be able to meet its obligations in the longer term, it must submit the interim balance sheet to the supervisory authority.

3 The supervisory authority shall direct the board of trustees to take the necessary measures. If it fails to do so, the supervisory authority takes such measures itself.

4 If necessary, the supervisory authority shall take legal enforcement measures; the provisions of company law on commencement or deferral of compulsory dissolution apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 84b1

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations) (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191). Repealed by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), with effect from 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 851D. Modification of the foundation / I. Reorganisation

D. Modification of the foundation

I. Reorganisation

At the request of the supervisory authority and having heard the board of trustees, the competent federal or cantonal authority may modify the foundation’s organisation where such a step is urgently required in order to preserve the foundation’s assets or safeguard the pursuit of its objects.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law on Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86 D. Modification of the foundation / II. Amendment of objects / 1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees

II. Amendment of objects

1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees1

1 At the request of the supervisory authority or the board of trustees, the competent federal or cantonal authority may amend the objects of the foundation where the original objects have altered in significance or effect to such an extent that the foundation has plainly become estranged from the founder’s intentions.2

2 Subject to the same requirements, conditions that are detrimental to the objects of the foundation may be revoked or amended.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 86a1D. Modification of the foundation / II. Amendment of objects / 2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition

2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition

1 The competent federal or cantonal authority shall amend the objects of the foundation at the founder’s request or in accordance with his or her testamentary disposition, provided that the charter reserves the right to amend the objects and that at least ten years have elapsed since the foundation was established or since the last amendment requested by the founder.

2 Where the foundation pursues public or charitable objects within the meaning of Art. 56 lit. g of the Federal Act of 14 December 1990 on Direct Federal Taxation2, such new objects must likewise be public or charitable.

3 The right to amend a foundation’s objects is neither transferable nor heritable. If the founder is a legal entity, the right extinguishes at the latest 20 years after the establishment of the foundation.

4 Joint founders may only jointly request an amendment of the foundation’s objects.

5 The probate authority shall inform the competent authority of any testamentary disposition concerning the amendment of the foundation’s objects.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).
2 SR 642.11

Art. 86b1D. Modification of the foundation / III. Minor amendments to the charter

III. Minor amendments to the charter

Having heard the board of trustees, the supervisory authority may make minor amendments to the foundation charter provided these are objectively justified and do not impair the rights of any third party.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 87 E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations

E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations

1 Family and ecclesiastical foundations are not subject to supervision, unless otherwise provided by public law.

1bis They are exempt from the duty to appoint external auditors.1

2 Private law disputes are decided by the courts.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 881F. Dissolution and deletion from the register / I. Dissolution by the competent authority

F. Dissolution and deletion from the register

I. Dissolution by the competent authority

1 The competent federal or cantonal authority shall dissolve the foundation on application or of its own accord if:

1.
its objects have become unattainable and the foundation cannot be maintained by modifying its charter; or
2.
its objects have become unlawful or immoral.

2 Family and ecclesiastical foundations shall be dissolved by court order.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 891F. Dissolution and deletion from the register / II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register

II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register

1 Any interested party may file an application or bring an action for the dissolution of a foundation.

2 Dissolution must be reported to the commercial registrar so that the entry may be deleted.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 8 Oct. 2004 (Law of Foundations), in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 4545; BBl 2003 8153 8191).

Art. 89a1G. Employee benefits schemes

G. Employee benefits schemes2

1 The following additional provisions apply to employee benefits schemes established in accordance with Art. 331 of the Code of Obligations3 in the form of a foundation.4

2 The foundation’s governing bodies must furnish the beneficiaries with the necessary information concerning the foundation’s organisation, activities and assets.

3 If employees pay contributions into the benefits scheme, they are entitled to participate in its administration at least in proportion to their contributions; wherever possible, the employees must elect their representative from among their employer’s personnel.5

4 ...6

5 The beneficiaries may sue the foundation for the distribution of benefits if they have paid contributions into it or if according to the foundation’s regulations they have a legal entitlement to such benefits.

6 For employee benefits schemes providing old age, survivors’ and invalidity pensions which are subject to the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19937 (VBA), the provisions of the Federal Act of 25 June 1982 on Occupational Old Age, Survivors’ and Invalidity Pension Provision (OPA)8 on the following matters apply:9

1.10
the definition and principles of occupational pension arrangements and the insurable salary or income (Art. 1, 33a and 33b);
2.11
the requirement of being subject to OASI (Art. 5 para. 1);
3.
the beneficiaries in the case of survivors’ benefits (Art. 20a);
3a.12
the adjustment of the invalidity pension following the equitable division of occupational pensions (Art. 24 para. 5);
3b.13
the provisional continuation of insurance and of the entitlement to benefits on the reduction or termination of the invalidity pension (Art. 26a);
4.14
the adjustment of plan benefits to inflation (Art. 36 para. 2–4);
4a.15 the agreement on a lump sum payment (Art. 37a);
5.
the prescription of claims and the safekeeping of insurance documents (Art. 41);
5a.16
the use, processing and disclosure of the OASI number for the Old Age and Survivors’ Insurance (Art. 48 para. 4, Art. 85a lit. f and Art. 86a para. 2 lit. bbis);
6.
liability (Art. 52);
7.17
the licensing and duties of the supervisory bodies (Art. 52a–52e);
8.18
the integrity and loyalty of the persons responsible, transactions with close associates and conflicts of interest (Art. 51b, 51c and 53a);
9.
partial or total liquidation (Art. 53b–53d);
10.19
termination of contracts (Art. 53e);
11.
the guarantee fund (Art. 56 para. 1 lit. c and para. 2–5, Art. 56a, 57 and 59);
12.20
supervision and oversight (Art. 61–62a and 64–64c);
13.21
...
14.22
financial security (Art. 65 para. 1, 3 and 4, Art. 66 para. 4, Art. 67 and Art. 72a–72g);
15.
transparency (Art. 65a);
16.
reserves (Art. 65b);
17.
insurance contracts between occupational benefits schemes and insurance institutions (Art. 68 para. 3 and 4);
18.
asset management (Art. 71);
19.
legal recourse (Art. 73 and 74);
20.
criminal provisions (Art. 75–79);
21.
buy-in (Art. 79b);
22.
insurable salary and income (Art. 79c);
23.
provision of information to insured persons (Art. 86b).23

7 For employee benefits schemes providing old age, survivors’ and invalidity pensions but which are not subject to the VBA, such as employer-sponsored welfare funds with discretionary benefits and financing foundations, only the following provisions of the OPA apply:

1.
the requirement of being subject to OASI (Art. 5 para. 1);
2.
the use, processing and disclosure of the OASI number (Art. 48 para. 4, 85a let. f and 86a para. 2 let. bbis);
3.
liability (Art. 52);
4.
the licensing and duties of the auditors (Art. 52a, 52b and 52c para. 1 let. a–d and g, 2 and 3);
5.
the integrity and loyalty of the persons responsible, transactions with close associates and conflicts of interest (Art. 51b, 51c and 53a);
6.
total liquidation (Art. 53c);
7.
supervision and oversight (Art. 61–62a and 64–64b);
8.
legal recourse (Art. 73 and 74);
9.
criminal provisions (Art. 75–79);
10.
tax treatment (Art. 80, 81 para. 1 and 83).24

8 For employee benefits schemes under paragraph 7, the following provisions also apply:

1.
they manage their assets so that security, an adequate yield on investments and the required liquidity for their tasks are guaranteed.
2.
the supervisory authority shall rule on partial liquidation matters related to employer-sponsored welfare funds with discretionary benefits at the request of the foundation board.
3.
they shall respect the principles of equal treatment and fairness mutatis mutandis.25

1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 21 March 1958, in force since 1 July 1958 (AS 1958 379; BBl 1956 II 825). Originally Art. 89bis, until the entry into force of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
3 SR 220
4 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
5 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).
6 Repealed by No III of the FA of 21 June 1996, with effect from 1 Jan. 1997 (AS 1996 3067; BBl 1996 I 564 580).
7 SR 831.42
8 SR 831.40
9 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
10 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Measures to Facilitate the Employment of Older Persons), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 4427; BBl 2007 5669).
11 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
12 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 18 March 2011 (6th InvI Revision, first set of measures) (AS 2011 5659; BBl 2010 1817). Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
13 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
14 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 4635; BBl 2003 6399).
15 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
16 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 23 June 2006 (New OASI Insurance Number), in force since 1 Dec. 2007 (AS 2007 5259; BBl 2006 501).
17 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
18 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
19 Amended by No II of the FA of 20 Dec. 2006 (Change of Employee Benefits Scheme), in force since 1 May 2007 (AS 2007 1803 1805; BBl 2005 5941 5953).
20 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
21 Repealed by No II 1 of the FA of 19 March 2010 (OPA Structural Reform), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3393; BBl 2007 5669).
22 Amended by No II 1 of the FA of 17 Dec. 2010 (Funding of benefits schemes for public corporations), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 3385; BBl 2008 8411).
23 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 25 June 1982 on Old Age, Survivors’ and Disability Insurance (AS 1983 797; BBl 1976 I 149). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 3 Oct. 2003 (1st revision of OPA), No 6, 7, 10–12, 14 (with the exception of Art. 66 para. 4), 15, 17–20 and 23 in force since 1 April 2004, No 3–5, 8, 9, 13, 14 (Art. 66 para. 4) and 16 in force since 1 Jan. 2005, No 1, 21 and 22 in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2004 1677; BBl 2000 2637).
24 Inserted by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).
25 Inserted by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2015 (Employee Benefits Schemes), in force since 1 April 2016 (AS 2016 935; BBl 2014 6143 6649).


  Title Twobis:2  3  Collective Assets

Art. 89b A. No management

A. No management

1 In the case of a public collection for charitable purposes, if no arrangements have been made for the management or use of the collective assets, the competent authority shall take the required measures.

2 It may appoint an administrator for the collective assets or allocate the assets to an association or a foundation with objects that are as similar as possible.

3 The administrator is subject, mutatis mutandis, to the regulations on deputyships in context of adult protection.

Art. 89c B. Jurisdiction B. Jurisdiction

B. Jurisdiction

1 The canton in which the main part of the collective is managed has jurisdiction.

2 Unless the canton provides otherwise, the authority that supervises the foundations has jurisdiction.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Corrected by the Federal Assembly Drafting Committee (Art. 58 Abs. 1 ParlA; SR 171.10).3 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Part Two: Family Law

  Division One: Marital Law

  Title Three:1  Marriage

  Chapter One: Engagement

Art. 90 A. Betrothal

A. Betrothal

1 Engagement is constituted by mutual promises to marry.

2 Minors incur no obligation through betrothal without the consent of their legal representative.1

3 Engagement does not give rise to any actionable obligation to marry.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 91 B. Ending the engagement / I. Gifts

B. Ending the engagement

I. Gifts

1 If the engagement is ended, the engaged parties may demand the return of gifts made to each other, with the exception of the usual occasional gifts, unless the engagement has ended as a result of death.

2 Where such gifts are no longer at hand, restitution is subject to the provisions governing unjust enrichment.

Art. 92 B. Ending the engagement / II. Duty to contribute

II. Duty to contribute

If one of the engaged couple has in good faith incurred expense in anticipation of the marriage ceremony and the engagement is then ended, that party may claim a reasonable contribution from the other where this is not inequitable in the overall circumstances.

Art. 93 B. Ending the engagement / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

Claims arising from the engagement prescribe one year from the ending of the engagement.


  Chapter Two: Requirements for Marriage

Art. 94 A. Capacity to marry

A. Capacity to marry

1 To be able to marry, the prospective spouses must have reached 18 years of age and have the capacity of judgement.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), with effect from 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 95 B. Impediments / I. Kinship

B. Impediments

I. Kinship1

1 Marriage between lineal relatives and between siblings or half-siblings, whether related to each other by parentage or adoption, is prohibited.2

2 Adoption does not remove the impediment to marriage constituted by kinship between the adopted child and his issue on the one hand and his adoptive family on the other.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 96 B. Impediments / II. Previous marriage

II. Previous marriage

A person wishing to remarry must prove that any previous marriage has been annulled or dissolved.


  Chapter Three: Preparation and Wedding Ceremony

Art. 97 A. General principles

A. General principles

1 The wedding ceremony takes place in the presence of the civil registrar after the preparatory procedure has been taken.

2 The engaged couple may marry in the civil register district of their choice.

3 No religious wedding ceremony is permitted prior to the civil ceremony.

Art. 97a1Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals

Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals

1 The civil registrar shall not consider a request for marriage if the bride or groom clearly has no intention of living together but wishes to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals.

2 The civil registrar shall grant a hearing to the prospective spouses and may obtain information from other authorities or third parties.


1 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 98 B. Preparatory procedure / I. Request

B. Preparatory procedure

I. Request

1 The preparatory procedure is carried out at the civil register office at the domicile of the bride or groom at their request.

2 They must appear in person. If they may show that they clearly cannot be required to do so, the preparatory procedure may be carried out in writing.

3 They must furnish documentary proof of identity and personally declare at the civil register office that they satisfy the legal requirements for marriage; they must also produce any necessary consent.

4 Engaged couples who are not Swiss citizens must prove during the preparatory procedure that they are lawfully resident in Switzerland.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 12 June 2009 (Prevention of Marriages in the event of Unlawful Residence), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 99 B. Preparatory procedure / II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure

II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure

1 The civil register office verifies that:

1.
the request has been duly submitted;
2.
the identity of the engaged couple has been established; and
3.1
the requirements for marriage are satisfied, and in particular whether there are any circumstances that suggest that the request clearly does not reflect the free will of the engaged couple.

2 Provided these requirements are fulfilled, the civil register office shall inform the betrothed parties that the preparatory procedure has been completed and of the legally prescribed time limits for holding the wedding ceremony.2

3 After consulting the engaged couple and in conformity with cantonal regulations, the civil register office sets the date of the wedding ceremony or, upon request, authorises that it may be conducted in another civil register district.

4 The civil register office must inform the competent authority of the identity of any engaged couple who have not proven that they are lawfully resident in Switzerland.3


1 Amended by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 28 Sept. 2018, in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 12 June 2009 (Prevention of Marriages in the event of Unlawful Residence), in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 3057; BBl 2008 2467 2481).

Art. 1001B. Preparatory procedure / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

The wedding ceremony may take place within three months following notification of completion of the preparatory procedure.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 28 Sept. 2018, in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2019 3813; BBl 2017 6769).

Art. 101 C. Wedding ceremony / I. Venue

C. Wedding ceremony

I. Venue

1 The wedding ceremony takes place at the wedding venue of the civil register district chosen by the engaged couple.

2 Where the preparatory procedure was conducted in a different civil register district, the engaged couple must produce a marriage licence.

3 If the engaged couple show that they cannot reasonably be required to appear at the official venue, the wedding may take place at another location.

Art. 102 C. Wedding ceremony / II. Form

II. Form

1 A wedding is a public ceremony that takes place in the presence of two adult witnesses who are capable of judgement.1

2 The civil registrar asks the bride and groom individually whether each wishes to marry the other.

3 If both answer in the affirmative, they are pronounced married by mutual consent.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 103 D. Implementing provisions

D. Implementing provisions

The Federal Council and, within the scope of their powers, the cantons shall enact the necessary implementing provisions.


  Chapter Four: Annulment of Marriage

Art. 104 A. General principle

A. General principle

A marriage contracted before a civil registrar may be annulled only on one of the grounds provided in this chapter.

Art. 105 B. Annulment not subject to a time limit / I. Grounds

B. Annulment not subject to a time limit

I. Grounds

Grounds for annulment are:

1.
that one of the spouses1 was already married at the time of the wedding and the previous marriage had not been dissolved by divorce or by the death of the previous spouse;
2.
that one of the spouses lacked capacity of judgement at the time of the wedding and has not regained such capacity since;
3.2
that the marriage was prohibited due to kinship;
4.3
one of the spouses has no intention of living with the other, but wishes to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals;
5.4
a spouse has not married of his or her own free will;
6.5
one of the spouses is a minor, unless the continuation of the marriage is in the overriding interest of this spouse.

1 Footnote relevant to German text only.
2 Amended by No 8 of the Civil Partnerships Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2006 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).
3 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).
4 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).
5 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 106 B. Annulment not subject to a time limit / II. Action for annulment

II. Action for annulment

1 An action for annulment is brought ex officio by the competent cantonal authority at the domicile of the spouses; in addition, any interested party is entitled to bring such action. Provided this is compatible with their duties, the federal and cantonal authorities shall contact the authority competent for the action if they have reason to believe that there are grounds for annulment.1

2 If the marriage has been otherwise dissolved, the authority may no longer seek an annulment ex officio; however, any interested party may seek a declaration of annulment.

3 An action for annulment may be brought at any time.


1 Last sentence inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced Marriages, in force since 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 107 C. Annulment subject to a time limit / I. Grounds

C. Annulment subject to a time limit

I. Grounds

A spouse may seek a declaration of annulment if he or she:

1.
temporarily lacked capacity of judgement at the time of the wedding;
2.
married in error, whether because he or she did not wish to marry at all or did not wish to marry the other person;
3.
contracted the marriage because he or she was intentionally deceived with regard to essential personal attributes of the other spouse;
4.1
...

1 Repealed by No I 3 of the FA of 15 June 2012 on Measures against Forced– Marriages, with effect from 1 July 2013 (AS 2013 1035; BBl 2011 2185).

Art. 108 C. Annulment subject to a time limit / II. Action for annulment

II. Action for annulment

1 An action for annulment must be brought within six months of learning of the grounds for annulment or of the date on which the threat ceased, but in any event within five years of the wedding.

2 The right to bring an action for annulment does not pass to heirs; however, an heir may continue an action already brought.

Art. 109 D. Effects of judgment

D. Effects of judgment

1 A marriage does not become invalid until a court has declared it annulled; prior to such judgment it has all the effects of a valid marriage with the exception of claims under inheritance law, which in any event the surviving spouse loses.

2 The provisions governing divorce apply mutatis mutandis to the effects of a court declaration of annulment on the spouses and their children.

3 The presumption of paternity in favour of the husband does not apply if the marriage is annulled because it served to circumvent the provisions on the admission and residence of foreign nationals.1


1 Inserted by Annex No II 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 on Foreign Nationals, in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 5437; BBl 2002 3709).

Art. 1101

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Title Four:2  Divorce and Separation

  Chapter One: Requirements for Divorce

Art. 1111A. Divorce by joint request / I. Comprehensive agreement

A. Divorce by joint request

I. Comprehensive agreement

1 Where the spouses jointly request divorce and submit a comprehensive agreement on the consequences of the divorce along with any necessary documents and with joint applications in respect of the children, the court shall hear the spouses both separately and together. The hearing may comprise two or more sessions.

2 If the court is persuaded that desire for divorce and the agreement are the product of free will and careful reflection and that the agreement with the applications in respect of the children may be approved, the court shall issue the divorce decree.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 25 Sept. 2009 (Reflection Period in Divorce Proceedings by joint Application), in force since 1 Feb. 2010 (AS 2010 281; BBl 2008 1959 1975).

Art. 112 A. Divorce by joint request / II. Partial agreement

II. Partial agreement

1 The spouses may jointly request divorce and ask the court to decide matters on which they cannot reach agreement.

2 As in the case of comprehensive agreement, the court shall hear the parties on those consequences of the divorce on which they have reached agreement and on their request that the remaining consequences be decided by the court.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1131

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 1141B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse / I. After living apart

B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse

I. After living apart

A spouse may petition for divorce if, at the time the petition is filed or at the time the divorce request is replaced by a divorce petition, the spouses have lived apart for at least two years.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Separation Period in Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1151B. Divorce at the petition of one spouse / II. Irretrievable breakdown

II. Irretrievable breakdown

Prior to the expiry of the two-year period, a spouse may petition for divorce if the marriage has irretrievably broken down for compelling reasons for which he or she is not responsible.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Separation Period in Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).

Art. 1161

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Chapter Two: Separation

Art. 117 A. Requirements and procedure

A. Requirements and procedure

1 Spouses may petition for a separation decree subject to the same requirements as apply to divorce.

2 ...1

3 The right to petition for divorce is unaffected by the separation decree.


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 118 B. Effects of separation

B. Effects of separation

1 By operation of the law, the separation decree implements the marital property separation of property regime.

2 Otherwise, the provisions governing measures for the protection of the marital union apply mutatis mutandis.


  Chapter Three: Consequences of Divorce

Art. 1191A. Civil status of divorced spouses

A. Civil status of divorced spouses

1 A spouse who has changed his or her surname on marriage retains that surname following divorce; he or she may at any time declare before the civil registrar the wish to revert to the name by which he or she was known prior to the marriage.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 120 B. Marital property law and inheritance law

B. Marital property law and inheritance law

1 The provisions of marital property law apply to the division of marital property.

2 Divorced spouses have no rights of inheritance in relation to each other and may not make claims based on testamentary dispositions made before their divorce proceedings were made pending.

Art. 121 C. Family home

C. Family home

1 If a spouse must remain in the family home because of the children or for other compelling reasons, the court may transfer the rights and obligations under the tenancy agreement to that spouse provided this is not inequitable for the other.

2 The previous tenant is jointly and severally liable for payment of the rent up to the date on which the tenancy ends or may be terminated pursuant to the tenancy agreement or by law, but for a maximum period of two years; if an action is brought to recover rent due, he or she is entitled to set off the amount paid in instalments equal to the amount of the monthly rent against any maintenance payments owed to the other spouse.

3 If the home belongs to the family of one of the spouses, the court may, on the same conditions, grant the other spouse a right of residence for a fixed term in return for reasonable compensation or set-off against maintenance payments. Where new and compelling reasons so require, such right of residence may be restricted or revoked.

Art. 1221D. Occupational pensions / I. Principle

D. Occupational pensions

I. Principle

In the event of divorce, any occupational pension assets accrued during the marriage up to the point at which divorce proceedings commence are divided equitably.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 1231D. Occupational pensions / II. Equitable division of termination benefits

II. Equitable division of termination benefits

1 Termination benefits including vested benefits and early withdrawals for purchasing owner-occupied property are divided equally.

2 Paragraph 1 does not apply to one-off contributions from individual property in accordance with the law.

3 The termination benefits to be divided are calculated on the basis of Articles 15–17 and 22a or 22b of the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19932.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 1241D. Occupational pensions / III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age

III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age

1 If, at the point at which divorce proceedings commence, a spouse is drawing an invalidity pension prior to the statutory retirement age, the amount to which he or she would be entitled under Article 2 paragraph 1ter of the Vested Benefits Act of 17 December 19932 following cancellation of the invalidity pension counts as the termination benefits.

2 The provisions on the equitable division of termination benefits apply mutatis mutandis.

3 The Federal Council determines in which cases the amount under paragraph 1 may not be applied in the division because there has been a reduction due to over-compensation.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 831.42

Art. 124a1D. Occupational pensions / IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions

IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions

1 If, at the point at which divorce proceedings commence, a spouse is drawing an invalidity pension after the statutory retirement age or drawing a retirement pension, the court decides at its own discretion how the pension is to be divided. In doing so it primarily takes into account the duration of the marriage and the pension requirements of each spouse.

2 The share of the pension awarded to the spouse entitled thereto is converted into a life-long pension. This is paid to the entitled spouse by the liable spouse’s occupational pension fund or is transferred to the entitled spouse’s own occupational pension fund.

3 The Federal Council regulates:

1.
the actuarial conversion of the share of the pension into a life-long pension;
2.
the procedure in cases in which the retirement benefits are postponed or the invalidity pension is reduced due to over-compensation.

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124b1D. Occupational pensions / V. Exceptions

V. Exceptions

1 The spouses may, in an agreement on the consequences of the divorce, agree not to divide the assets equally or not to divide them at all if there are sufficient retirement pension and invalidity pension funds otherwise.

2 The court may award the entitled spouse less than half of the termination benefits or rule that they should not be divided if good cause exists. Good cause exists above all when equal division would be unreasonable:

1.
in view of the division of marital property or the economic circumstances following divorce;
2.
in view of the pension requirements, in particular with regard to the difference in age between the spouses.

3 The court may award the entitled spouse more than half of the termination benefits if he or she cares for joint children following the divorce and the liable spouse continues to have sufficient retirement and invalidity pension assets.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124c1D. Occupational pensions / VI. Offset of mutual entitlements

VI. Offset of mutual entitlements

1 The spouses’ mutual entitlements to termination benefits or a share of a pension are offset. The pension entitlement is offset before the share of the pension awarded to the entitled spouse is converted into a life-long pension.

2 Termination benefits may only be offset against a share of a pension if the spouses and the occupational pension institutions agree.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124d1D. Occupational pensions / VII. Unreasonableness

VII. Unreasonableness

If, having considered the pension requirements of both spouses, an equitable division of occupational pension assets is unreasonable, the liable spouse shall owe the entitled spouse a lump sum payment.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 124e1D. Occupational pensions / VIII. Impossibility

VIII. Impossibility

1 If the equitable division of pension fund assets is not possible, the liable spouse shall owe the entitled spouse adequate compensation in the form of a lump sum payment or as a pension.

2 A Swiss judgment may be amended at the request of the liable spouse if pension entitlements existing abroad have been offset by adequate compensation pursuant to paragraph 1 and such pension entitlements are then divided up in a foreign decision that is binding on the foreign party liable to pay pension contributions.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 125 E. Post-marital maintenance / I. Requirements

E. Post-marital maintenance

I. Requirements

1 If a spouse cannot reasonably be expected to provide for his or her own maintenance, including an appropriate level of retirement provision, the other spouse must pay a suitable contribution.

2 In deciding whether such a contribution is to be made and, if so, in what amount and for how long, the following factors in particular must be considered:

1.
the division of duties during the marriage;
2.
the duration of the marriage;
3.
the standard of living during the marriage;
4.
the age and health of the spouses;
5.
the income and assets of the spouses;
6.
the extent and duration of child care still required of the spouses;
7.
the vocational training and career prospects of the spouses and the likely cost of reintegration into working life;
8.
expectancy of federal old age and survivor’s insurance benefits and of occupational or other private or state pensions, including the expected proceeds of any division of withdrawal benefits.

3 Exceptionally, a maintenance contribution may be denied or reduced if it would clearly be inequitable, particularly because the spouse otherwise entitled to receive such contribution:

1.
has grossly neglected his or her duty to contribute to the maintenance of the family;
2.
has wilfully brought about his or her own indigence;
3.
has committed a serious criminal offence against the other spouse or a person close to him or her.
Art. 126 E. Post-marital maintenance / II. Modalities of maintenance contributions

II. Modalities of maintenance contributions

1 The court shall fix an amount to be paid periodically by way of maintenance contribution and set the date on which the duty of maintenance commences.

2 Where justified in specific circumstances, a lump sum settlement may be ordered instead of regular payments.

3 The court may attach conditions to the maintenance contribution.

Art. 127 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 1. Special terms

III. Regular payments

1. Special terms

The spouses may wholly or in part exclude any alteration of the regular maintenance payments stipulated in the agreement.

Art. 128 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 2. Adjustment for inflation

2. Adjustment for inflation

The court may direct that the maintenance contribution will automatically increase or decrease depending on specified changes in the cost of living.

Art. 129 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 3. Adjustment by court order

3. Adjustment by court order

1 In the event of a substantial and enduring change in circumstances, the periodic maintenance payments may be reduced, cancelled or suspended for a certain time; an improvement in the circumstances of the party entitled to maintenance may be taken into account only if the payments stipulated in the divorce decree provided sufficient maintenance.

2 The party entitled to maintenance may request that the payments be adjusted in line with future inflation if the income of the other party has increased unexpectedly since the divorce.

3 Within five years of the divorce, the party entitled to maintenance may request that payments be ordered or increased provided the divorce decree states that it was not possible at that time to order sufficient maintenance payments and provided the economic circumstances of the party obliged to pay maintenance have since improved.

Art. 130 E. Post-marital maintenance / III. Regular payments / 4. Expiry by law

4. Expiry by law

1 The duty to pay maintenance expires on the death of either the receiving party or the paying party.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, it likewise expires on the remarriage of the party entitled to receive maintenance.

Art. 1311E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 1. Enforcement assistance

IV. Enforcement

1. Enforcement assistance

1 Where the liable party fails to pay maintenance, an official agency designated by cantonal law shall on request, in an appropriate way and usually without charge, assist the party entitled to maintenance to enforce his or her claims.

2 The Federal Council determines the terms of enforcement assistance.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 131a1E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 2. Advance payments

2. Advance payments

1 Public law may provide for advance payments to be made should the liable person fail to make the necessary maintenance payments.

2 If the state authority makes maintenance payments to the entitled person, the maintenance entitlement with all rights is assigned to the state authority.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 132 E. Post-marital maintenance / IV. Enforcement / 3. Directions to debtors and posting security

3. Directions to debtors and posting security1

1 If the party obliged to pay maintenance fails to do so, the court may order his debtors to make payment in whole or in part to the party entitled to maintenance.

2 If the party obliged to pay maintenance persistently fails to do so, or if there are grounds to suspect that said party is preparing to abscond or is dissipating or concealing his assets, the court may order him to post appropriate security for future maintenance contributions.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 1331F. Children / I. Parental rights and obligations

F. Children

I. Parental rights and obligations

1 The court regulates parental rights and obligations in accordance with the provisions on the legal effects of the parent-child relationship. In particular it regulates:

1.
parental responsibility;
2.
residence;
3.
contact (Art. 273) or the sharing of parenting duties; and
4.
child maintenance contributions.

2 It shall consider all circumstances important to the child's best interests. It shall take account of a joint proposal by the parents and, if feasible, the opinion of the child.

3 It may order that the child maintenance contribution continue to be paid after the child reaches the age of majority.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 134 F. Children / II. Change of circumstances

II. Change of circumstances

1 At the request of either parent, the child or the child protection authority, new arrangements for parental responsibility shall be made by the child protection authority provided this is in the child’s best interests due to a substantial change in circumstances.

2 The requirements for the modification of other parental rights and -obligations are governed by the provisions on the effects of the parent-child relationship.1

3 If the parents agree, the child protection authority reassesses parental responsibility, residence and approves a child support agreement. In the other cases, the court competent to modify the divorce decree decides.2

4 If the court is required to decide on the modification of parental responsibility, residence or the child maintenance contribution for a minor child, it shall if necessary also reassess contact or sharing of parenting duties; in the other cases, the child protection authority shall decide on the modification of contact or sharing of parenting duties.3


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1351491

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 150–158

Repealed


  Title Five:3  General Effects of Marriage

Art. 159 A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses

A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses

1 The wedding ceremony binds the spouses in marital union.

2 They mutually undertake to strive to safeguard the interests of the marital union and to care jointly for the children.

3 They owe each other loyalty and support.

Art. 1601B. Surname

B. Surname

1 Each spouse retains his or her surname.

2 However, the prospective spouses may declare to the civil registrar that they wish bear the surname of the bride or the groom as the family surname.

3 If the prospective spouses retain their surnames, they decide which of the surnames their children will bear. In justified cases, the civil registrar may relieve the prospective spouses of this obligation.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 1611C. Cantonal and communal citizenship

C. Cantonal and communal citizenship

Each spouse retains his or her cantonal and communal citizenship.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 162 D. Marital home

D. Marital home

The spouses jointly decide where to establish the marital home.

Art. 163 E. Maintenance of the family / I. In general

E. Maintenance of the family

I. In general

1 The spouses jointly provide for the proper maintenance of the family, each according to his or her ability.

2 They agree on the contributions each of them will make, notably by providing money, looking after the household, caring for the children or supporting the other’s career or business.

3 In so doing they take due account of the needs of the marital union and of their own personal circumstances.

Art. 164 E. Maintenance of the family / II. Allowance for personal use

II. Allowance for personal use

1 A spouse who looks after the household, cares for the children or supports the career or business of the other spouse is entitled to receive from the latter a reasonable allowance for his or her own personal use.

2 When determining said allowance, account must be taken of the personal resources of the receiving spouse and the need to provide conscientiously for the family, career and business.

Art. 165 E. Maintenance of the family / III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse

III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse

1 Where the contribution made by one spouse to the other’s career or business is significantly greater than required in the light of the latter’s contribution to the maintenance of the family, he or she is entitled to reasonable compensation.

2 The same applies if a spouse has contributed significantly more of his or her own income or assets to the maintenance of the family than he or she was obliged to contribute.

3 However, a spouse is not entitled to compensation if such extraordinary contribution was made under a work, loan or partnership agreement or on the basis of some other legal relationship.

Art. 166 F. Representation of the marital union

F. Representation of the marital union

1 While living together under the same roof, both spouses represent the marital union with regard to the day-to-day needs of the family.

2 A spouse may represent the marital union with regard to the other needs of the family only if:

1.
authorised so to do by the other spouse or by court order;
2.
the interests of the marital union brook no delay and the other spouse is unable to consent due to illness, absence or other similar reasons.

3 Each spouse is personally liable for his or her own actions and, to the extent that these do not exceed his or her powers of representation in a manner apparent to third parties, also renders the other spouse jointly and severally liable for such actions.

Art. 167 G. Spouses’ career or business

G. Spouses’ career or business

In the choice and pursuit of his or her career or business, each spouse must have due regard to the other and to the welfare of the marital union.

Art. 168 H. Transactions by the spouses / I. In general

H. Transactions by the spouses

I. In general

Each spouse may enter into transactions with the other or with third parties unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 169 H. Transactions by the spouses / II. Family home

II. Family home

1 A spouse may terminate a tenancy agreement, alienate the family home or limit the rights in respect of the family home by other transactions only with the express consent of the other.

2 If the spouse cannot obtain such consent or it is withheld without good cause, he or she may petition the court.

Art. 170 J. Duty to inform

J. Duty to inform

1 Each spouse has the right to demand information from the other concerning his or her income, assets and debts.

2 At the request of one spouse, the court may order the other spouse or a third party to furnish the information required and to produce the necessary documents.

3 This does not apply to any information held by lawyers, solicitors, doctors, clergy and their auxiliary staff which is subject to professional confidentiality.

Art. 171 K. Protection of the marital union / I. Counselling agencies

K. Protection of the marital union

I. Counselling agencies

The cantons must ensure that spouses experiencing marital problems may seek help individually or jointly from marriage guidance or family counselling agencies.

Art. 172 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 1. In general

II. Court measures

1. In general

1 If a spouse fails to fulfil his or her duties to the family or if the spouses disagree on matters of importance to the marital union, they may apply jointly or separately to the court for mediation.

2 The court reminds the spouses of their duties and attempts to settle their differences; if the spouses consent, experts may be consulted or they may be referred to a marriage guidance or family counselling agency.

3 If necessary, at the request of one spouse the court will take the steps envisaged by law. The provision governing the protection of the person from violence, threats or harassment applies mutatis mutandis.1


1 Second sentence inserted by No I of the FA of 23 June 2006 (Protection of the Personality against Violence, Threats or Harassment), in force since 1 July 2007 (AS 2007 137; BBl 2005 6871 6897).

Art. 173 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 2. While living together / a. Financial contributions

2. While living together

a. Financial contributions

1 At the request of one spouse, the court determines the amounts to be paid for the maintenance of the family.

2 Likewise, at the request of one spouse, it determines the allowance payable to the spouse who looks after the household, cares for the children or supports the other’s career or business.

3 Payments may be claimed for the future and for one year preceding the request.

Art. 174 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 2. While living together / b. Revocation of powers of representation

b. Revocation of powers of representation

1 If a spouse exceeds his or her power to represent the marital union or proves incapable of exercising it, at the other spouse’s request the court may revoke such power in whole or in part.

2 The spouse making such request may inform third parties of the revocation only by communications in person.

3 The revocation is effective towards third parties acting in good faith only if it has been made public by order of the court.

Art. 175 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 3. Suspension of joint household / a. Grounds

3. Suspension of joint household

a. Grounds

A spouse is entitled to suspend the joint household for as long as his or her personality rights or financial security or the welfare of the family are seriously endangered by living together.

Art. 176 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 3. Suspension of joint household / b. Arrangements for living apart

b. Arrangements for living apart

1 If the suspension of the joint household is justified, at the request of one spouse the court will:

1.1
determine the maintenance paid to any children and the other spouse;
2.
issue directions on the use of the home and the household effects;
3.
order a separation of property where justified in the circumstances.

2 A spouse may also make such request if living together is impossible, in particular because the other spouse refuses to do so without good cause.

3 If the spouses have minor children, the court must take the necessary steps in accordance with the provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 176a1K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 4. Enforcement / a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments

4. Enforcement

a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments

The provisions governing enforcement assistance and advance payments on divorce and consequent to the parent-child relationship apply.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 177 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 4. Enforcement / b. Directions to debtors

b. Directions to debtors1

If a spouse fails to fulfil his or her duty to maintain the family, the court may order his or her debtors to make payment in full or in part to the other spouse.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 178 K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets

5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets

1 To the extent required to ensure the family’s financial security or fulfilment of a financial obligation arising from the marital union, at the request of one spouse the court may make the power to dispose of certain assets conditional on its consent.

2 The court orders the appropriate protective measures.

3 If it prohibits a spouse from disposing of land it must have a note to this effect recorded in the land register.

Art. 1791K. Protection of the marital union / II. Court measures / 6. Change of circumstances

6. Change of circumstances2

1 If there is a change in circumstances, at the request of either spouse the court shall modify the measures or revoke the same if they are no longer justified. The provisions on a change of circumstances in divorce cases apply mutatis mutandis.3

2 If the spouses resume living together, the measures ordered in connection with living apart lapse, with the exception of the separation of property and the child protection measures.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 1801

Repealed


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Title Six:4  Marital Property Law

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 181 A. Ordinary property regime

A. Ordinary property regime

Spouses are subject to the provisions governing participation in acquired property provided they have not agreed otherwise in a marital agreement and provided no extraordinary marital property regime has come into effect.

Art. 182 B. Marital agreement / I. Choice of regime

B. Marital agreement

I. Choice of regime

1 A marital agreement may be concluded before or after the wedding.

2 The prospective spouses or the spouses may choose, set aside or modify their marital property regime only within the limits of the law.

Art. 183 B. Marital agreement / II. Capacity to enter into an agreement

II. Capacity to enter into an agreement

1 A person wishing to enter into a marital agreement must have capacity of judgement.

2 Minors, or adults subject to a deputyship that covers the conclusion of a marital agreement require the consent of their legal representative.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 184 B. Marital agreement / III. Form of the agreement

III. Form of the agreement

The marital agreement must be executed as a public deed and signed by the parties and, where applicable, by the legal representative.

Art. 185 C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 1. By court order

C. Extraordinary property regime

I. At the request of one spouse

1. By court order

1 At the request of one spouse, the court shall order a separation of property where there is good cause to do so.

2 In particular, good cause exists:

1.
if the other spouse is overindebted or his or her share of the common property has been distrained;
2.
if the other spouse is endangering the interests of the applicant or of the marital union;
3.
if the other spouse unreasonably withholds the consent required for the disposal of common property;
4.
if the other spouse refuses to provide the applicant with information concerning his or her income, assets and debts or concerning common property;
5.
if the other spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement.

3 Where a spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement, his or her legal representative may likewise request separation of property for this reason.

Art. 1861C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 187 C. Extraordinary property regime / I. At the request of one spouse / 3. Revocation

3. Revocation

1 The spouses may at any time reinstate their previous marital property regime or implement a new one by marital agreement.

2 If the reason for the separation of property no longer exists, at the request of one spouse the court may direct that the previous marital property regime be reinstated.

Art. 188 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 1. Bankruptcy

II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint

1. Bankruptcy

If a spouse living under the community of property regime is declared bankrupt, separation of property takes effect ex officio.

Art. 189 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 2. Distraint / a. By court order

2. Distraint

a. By court order

If a spouse living under the community of property regime is pursued for a personal debt and his or her share of the common property is distrained, the debt enforcement supervisory authority may request that the court order a separation of property.

Art. 190 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 2. Distraint / b. Request

b. Request1

1 The request is directed against both spouses.

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 191 C. Extraordinary property regime / II. In the event of bankruptcy or distraint / 3. Revocation

3. Revocation

1 If the creditors have been satisfied, at the request of one spouse the court may order the restoration of the community of property regime.

2 By marital agreement, the spouses may opt for the participation in acquired property regime.

Art. 192 C. Extraordinary property regime / III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime

III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime

Whenever the separation of property regime comes into effect, the liquidation of the previous regime is governed by the provisions applicable to the latter, unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 193 D. Protection of creditors

D. Protection of creditors

1 The establishment, variation or liquidation of a marital property regime may not have the effect of releasing an asset with which one of the spouses or the marital union had hitherto been liable to creditors from such liability.

2 If such an asset has been transferred to the other spouse, the latter must pay the debt but may be released from such liability to the extent that he or she may prove that the asset received is worth less than the debt.

Art. 1941E. ...

E. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 195 F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other

F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other

1 Where one spouse expressly or tacitly entrusts management of his or her assets to the other, the provisions governing agency apply unless otherwise agreed.

2 The provisions governing settlement of debts between spouses are reserved.

Art. 195a G. Inventory

G. Inventory

1 Each spouse may at any time require the other’s cooperation in drawing up an inventory of their joint assets in the form of a public deed.

2 Such an inventory is deemed accurate if made within one year of the inclusion of such assets under the regime.


  Chapter Two: Statutory Marital Property Regime of Participation in Acquired Property

Art. 196 A. Ownership / I. Categories

A. Ownership

I. Categories

The marital property regime of participation in acquired property comprises the property acquired during the marriage and the individual property of each spouse.

Art. 197 A. Ownership / II. Acquired property

II. Acquired property

1 Acquired property comprises those assets which a spouse has acquired for valuable consideration during the marital property regime.

2 In particular, the acquired property of a spouse comprises:

1.
the proceeds from his or her employment;
2.
benefits received from staff welfare schemes, social security and social welfare institutions;
3.
compensation for inability to work;
4.
income derived from his or her own property;
5.
property acquired to replace acquired property.
Art. 198 A. Ownership / III. Individual property / 1. By operation of law

III. Individual property

1. By operation of law

By operation of law, a spouse’s individual property comprises:

1.
personal effects used exclusively by that spouse;
2.
assets belonging to one spouse at the beginning of the marital property regime or acquired later at no cost by inheritance or otherwise;
3.
claims for satisfaction;
4.
acquisitions that replace individual property.
Art. 199 A. Ownership / III. Individual property / 2. By marital agreement

2. By marital agreement

1 Under a marital agreement, spouses may declare acquired property to be individual property set aside for professional or business use.

2 Furthermore, spouses may stipulate in a marital agreement that income from individual property does not qualify as acquired property.

Art. 200 A. Ownership / IV. Proof

IV. Proof

1 Any person who asserts that a specific object or asset is owned by one or other spouse bears the burden of proof.

2 If no such proof may be adduced, the object or asset is presumed to be in the co-ownership of both spouses.

3 Until proven otherwise, all assets of a spouse are deemed to be acquired property.

Art. 201 B. Management, benefits and power of disposal

B. Management, benefits and power of disposal

1 Within the limits of the law, each spouse administers and enjoys the benefits of his or her individual property and has power of disposal over it.

2 If an asset is in the co-ownership of both spouses, neither spouse may dispose of his or her share in it without the other’s consent, unless otherwise agreed.

Art. 202 C. Liability toward third parties

C. Liability toward third parties

Each spouse is liable for his or her debts with all his or her property.

Art. 203 D. Debts between spouses

D. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request a time limit within which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 204 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / I. Time of dissolution

E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation

I. Time of dissolution

1 The marital property regime is dissolved on the death of a spouse or on implementation of a different regime.

2 In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or a court order for separation of property, the dissolution of the marital property regime takes retroactive effect as of the date on which the application was filed.

Art. 205 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Taking back property and settling debts / 1. In general

II. Taking back property and settling debts

1. In general

1 Each spouse shall take back any of his or her property that is in the other’s possession.

2 Where one spouse shows an overriding interest in gaining sole possession of an object or asset in co-ownership, and notwithstanding any other legal measures available, he or she may request that said object or asset be allocated to him or her in return for compensation.

3 The spouses settle their debts to each other.

Art. 206 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Taking back property and settling debts / 2. Participation in increased value

2. Participation in increased value

1 Where a spouse has contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of an asset belonging to the other without receiving equivalent compensation, and where at the time of the liquidation that asset has increased in value, then his or her claim corresponds to his or her proportionate contribution and is calculated according to the current value of the asset; if, conversely, the asset has decreased in value, his or her claim corresponds to the original contribution.

2 If such an asset had already been alienated beforehand, the claim is calculated according to the proceeds obtained and is due immediately.

3 By written agreement, spouses may exclude participation in the increased value or vary the proportion thereof.

Art. 207 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 1. Separation of acquired property and individual property

III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse

1. Separation of acquired property and individual property

1 The property acquired during marriage and the individual property of each spouse are separated according to their value at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime.

2 Lump sum pension or invalidity benefits received by a spouse are added to his or her individual property in an amount equivalent to the present value of the pension or invalidity annuity to which he or she would be entitled on dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 208 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 2. Additions

2. Additions

1 The following are added to the property acquired during marriage:

1.
the value of dispositions made without consideration by one spouse without the other’s consent during the five years preceding the dissolution of the marital property regime, save for the usual occasional gifts;
2.
the value of assets disposed of by one spouse during the marital property regime with the intention of diminishing the other’s share.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 209 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property

3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property

1 Where debts incurred in connection with acquired property have been paid out of individual property or where debts incurred in connection with individual property have been paid out of acquired property, there is a claim for compensation when the marital property regime is liquidated.

2 A debt encumbers the property in relation to which it was incurred, and in the event of doubt, it encumbers the acquired property.

3 If assets belonging to one category of property have contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of assets belonging to the other and if the value of the latter has increased or diminished, the claim for compensation corresponds to the proportionate contribution made and is calculated according to the value of the assets at the time of the liquidation or their disposal.

Art. 210 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Calculating the surplus for each spouse / 4. Surplus

4. Surplus

1 The remaining total value of the acquired property, including the assets added in and claims for compensation, and after deduction of the debts encumbering the acquired property, constitutes the surplus.

2 A deficit is disregarded.

Art. 211 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 1. Market value

IV. Valuation

1. Market value

For the purpose of liquidating the marital property regime, assets are stated at their market value.

Art. 212 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 2. Capitalised value / a. In general

2. Capitalised value

a. In general

1 An agricultural enterprise which one spouse continues to operate as owner or in respect of which the surviving spouse or one of the issue makes a justified claim for undivided allocation is stated at its capitalised value when calculating the proportionate added value and the claim for participation.

2 The owner of the agricultural enterprise or his or her heirs may bring a claim against the other spouse for proportionate added value or participation only in the amount they would receive if the business were stated at its market value.

3 The inheritance law provisions governing valuation and the participation of co-heirs in the profit apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 213 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 2. Capitalised value / b. Special circumstances

b. Special circumstances

1 The allocation value may be increased by a suitable amount if justified by special circumstances.

2 Special circumstances include in particular the maintenance requirements of the surviving spouse, the purchase price of the agricultural enterprise including capital investments, and the financial circumstances of the spouse to whom the agricultural enterprise belongs.

Art. 214 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Valuation / 3. Defining juncture

3. Defining juncture

1 For the purpose of valuing the acquired property at hand at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime, the defining juncture is the time of the division.

2 For assets added to the acquired property, the defining juncture is the date on which they were alienated.

Art. 215 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 1. By law

V. Participation in the surplus

1. By law

1 Each spouse or his or her heirs is or are entitled to one-half of the surplus of the other spouse.

2 The claims are set off.

Art. 216 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 2. By agreement / a. In general

2. By agreement

a. In general

1 A different participation in the surplus may be agreed by marital agreement.

2 Such agreements must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of children who are not the common issue of the spouses or those of the issue of such children.

Art. 217 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Participation in the surplus / 2. By agreement / b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order

b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order

In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of marriage or separation of property by court order, agreements varying the statutory participation in the surplus are valid only if the marital property agreement expressly so provides.

Art. 218 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 1. Deferred payment

VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value

1. Deferred payment

1 If immediate payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value would cause serious difficulties for the debtor, he or she may request a deferral.

2 Unless otherwise agreed by the spouses, the participation claim and the share of the increased value bear interest as of completion of the division of property and, where justified in the circumstances, security must be furnished.

Art. 219 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 2. Home and household effects

2. Home and household effects

1 To ensure that the surviving spouse may maintain his or her accustomed lifestyle, at his or her request he or she will be granted a usufruct of or a right of residence in the home in which the spouses lived and which belonged to the deceased spouse, and this will be set off against his or her entitlement, subject to any contrary provision in the marital agreement.

2 On the same conditions, he or she may request that ownership of the household effects be transferred to him or her.

3 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other legal heirs of the deceased spouse, ownership of the home may be granted rather than a usufruct or right of residence.

4 The surviving spouse may not claim such rights in respect of premises in which the deceased practised a profession or ran a business and which are required by one of his or her issue in order to continue said profession or business, subject to the provisions of agricultural inheritance law.

Art. 220 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Payment of the participation claim and the share of the increased value / 3. Claims against third parties

3. Claims against third parties

1 If the assets of the debtor or his or her estate are insufficient to cover the participation claim on division of the property, the entitled spouse or his or her heirs may demand from third-party beneficiaries the return of such dispositions as are to be added to the acquired property up to the amount of the shortfall.

2 The right to bring a claim is extinguished one year after the spouse or his or her heirs learn of the infringement of their rights, but in any event ten years after the dissolution of the marital property regime.

3 Moreover, the provisions governing claims in abatement under inheritance law apply mutatis mutandis.1


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).


  Chapter Three: Community of Property

Art. 221 A. Ownership / I. Categories

A. Ownership

I. Categories

The marital property regime of community of property comprises the common property and the individual property of each spouse.

Art. 222 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 1. General community of property

II. Common property

1. General community of property

1 The general community of property combines the assets and income of the spouses into common property, with the exception of those assets which by law constitute individual property.

2 The common property belongs to both spouses jointly.

3 Neither spouse is entitled to dispose of his or her share of the common property.

Art. 223 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 2. Limited community of property / a. Community restricted to acquired property

2. Limited community of property

a. Community restricted to acquired property

1 By marital agreement, the spouses may restrict community of property to the property acquired during marriage.

2 Revenue from individual property becomes common property.

Art. 224 A. Ownership / II. Common property / 2. Limited community of property / b. Further community of property regimes

b. Further community of property regimes

1 By marital agreement, the spouses may exclude from the community of property specific assets or types of assets, such as land, a spouse’s income from work or assets used to practise a profession or run a business.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, income from such assets does not become common property.

Art. 225 A. Ownership / III. Individual property

III. Individual property

1 Individual property may be created by marital agreement, dispositions by third parties or by law.

2 By law, items for the exclusive personal use of a spouse and claims for satisfaction constitute individual property.

3 A spouse’s statutory inheritance entitlement may not pass to him or her from his or her relatives as individual property where the marital agreement provides that such assets are common property.

Art. 226 A. Ownership / IV. Proof

IV. Proof

All assets are presumed to be common property unless proven to be the individual property of a spouse.

Art. 227 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 1. Everyday housekeeping

B. Management and power of disposal

I. Common property

1. Everyday housekeeping

1 The spouses must manage the common property in the best interests of the marital union.

2 Within the limits of everyday housekeeping, each spouse may incur commitments on behalf of the marital union and dispose of common property.

Art. 228 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 2. Extraordinary housekeeping

2. Extraordinary housekeeping

1 Outside the limits of everyday housekeeping, the spouses may incur commitments on behalf of the common property and dispose thereof only jointly or individually with the other’s consent.

2 Third parties are entitled to presume such consent provided they do not know or cannot be expected to know that it is absent.

3 The provisions governing representation of the marital union are reserved.

Art. 229 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes

3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes

If a spouse practises a profession or runs a business on his or her own using common property with the other’s consent, he or she may conclude all transactions that such activities entail.

Art. 230 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances

4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances

1 Without the other’s consent, a spouse is not entitled to renounce an inheritance which would become common property or accept inheritance of an overindebted estate.

2 If the spouse is unable to obtain consent or if it is withheld without good cause, he or she may petition the court.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 231 B. Management and power of disposal / I. Common property / 5. Liability and management costs

5. Liability and management costs

1 In relation to dealings concerning common property, on dissolution of the marital property regime, each spouse is liable as if he or she were an agent.

2 The costs of management are borne by the common property.

Art. 232 B. Management and power of disposal / II. Individual property

II. Individual property

1 Each spouse administers and disposes of his or her individual property within the limits of the law.

2 If income accrues to individual property, the management costs are borne by such property.

Art. 233 C. Liability toward third parties / I. Full liability

C. Liability toward third parties

I. Full liability

Each spouse is liable with his or her individual property and the common property:

1.
for debts incurred in exercising his or her powers to represent the marital union or in managing the common property;
2.
for debts incurred in the pursuit of a profession or business, provided common property has been used for this or the income therefrom becomes common property;
3.
for debts for which the other spouse is also personally liable;
4.
for debts in respect of which the spouses have agreed with third parties that their common property as well as the debtor’s individual property will be liable.
Art. 234 C. Liability toward third parties / II. Individual liability

II. Individual liability

1 For all other debts a spouse is liable only to the extent of his or her individual property and half the value of the common property.

2 Claims arising from the unjust enrichment of the marital union are reserved.

Art. 235 D. Debts between spouses

D. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request to be granted a time limit in which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 236 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / I. Time of dissolution

E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation

I. Time of dissolution

1 The marital property regime is dissolved on the death of a spouse, the implementation of a different regime or when one of the spouses is declared bankrupt.

2 In the case of divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or a court order for separation of property, the dissolution of the marital property regime takes retroactive effect as of the date on which the application was filed.

3 When determining the composition of common property and individual property, the defining juncture is the dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 237 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / II. Allocation to individual property

II. Allocation to individual property

Lump sum pension or invalidity benefits received by a spouse that have become common property are added to his or her individual property in the capitalised amount equivalent to the pension or invalidity annuity to which he or she would be entitled on dissolution of the marital property regime.

Art. 238 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property

III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property

1 Where debts encumbering one category of property were paid out of assets belonging to the other, respective compensation claims between the common property and the individual property of each spouse arise on the dissolution of the marital property regime.

2 A debt encumbers the property in relation to which it was incurred, but in the case of doubt it encumbers the common property.

Art. 239 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / IV. Participation in increased value

IV. Participation in increased value

Where the individual property of a spouse or the common property has contributed to the acquisition, improvement or preservation of an asset belonging to another category of property, the provisions governing increased value in relation to participation in acquired property apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 240 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / V. Valuation

V. Valuation

For the purpose of valuing the common property at hand at the time of the dissolution of the marital property regime, the defining juncture is the time of the division.

Art. 241 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Division / 1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime

VI. Division

1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime

1 If the community of property regime is dissolved by the death of a spouse or the implementation of a different marital property regime, each party or his or her heirs is entitled to one-half of the common property.

2 A different method of division may be agreed by marital agreement.

3 Such agreements must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of the spouse’s issue.

Art. 242 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VI. Division / 2. In other cases

2. In other cases

1 On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by law or court order, each spouse shall take back from the common property such property as would have been his or her individual property under the participation in acquired property regime.

2 The remaining common property is divided equally between the spouses.

3 Agreements to vary the statutory method of division are valid only if the marital agreement expressly so provides.

Art. 243 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 1. Individual property

VII. Division of the property

1. Individual property

If the community of property is dissolved by the death of a spouse, the surviving spouse may request that such property as would have been his or her individual property under the participation in acquired property regime be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share of the estate.

Art. 244 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 2. Home and household effects

2. Home and household effects

1 If the home in which the spouses lived or any household effects belong to the common property, the surviving spouse may request that such property be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share of the estate.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other legal heirs of the deceased spouse, a usufruct or right of residence may be granted in lieu of ownership.

3 If the community of property is not dissolved by death, each spouse may make such requests where he or she may show an overriding interest.

Art. 245 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 3. Other assets

3. Other assets

If a spouse demonstrates an overriding interest, he or she may also demand that other assets be allocated to him or her and count toward his or her share.

Art. 246 E. Dissolution of the property regime and liquidation / VII. Division of the property / 4. Further provisions

4. Further provisions

In other respects the provisions governing the division of property in co-ownership and the division of estates apply mutatis mutandis.


  Chapter Four: Separation of Property

Art. 247 A. Management, benefits and power of disposal / I. In general

A. Management, benefits and power of disposal

I. In general

Within the limits of the law, each spouse shall administer and enjoy the benefits of his or her own property and has power of disposal over it.

Art. 248 A. Management, benefits and power of disposal / II. Proof

II. Proof

1 Any person who asserts that a specific object or asset is owned by one or other spouse bears the burden of proof.

2 If no such proof may be adduced, there is a presumption of co-ownership.

Art. 249 B. Liability toward third parties

B. Liability toward third parties

Each spouse is liable for his or her debts with all his or her property.

Art. 250 C. Debts between spouses

C. Debts between spouses

1 The marital property regime does not affect the maturity of debts contracted between spouses.

2 However, if payment of debts or the restitution of objects owed by a spouse would cause him or her serious difficulties which might endanger the marital union, such spouse may request to be granted a time limit in which to satisfy the claim; the claim is to be secured where reasonable in the circumstances.

Art. 251 D. Allocation of property in co-ownership

D. Allocation of property in co-ownership

Where one spouse shows an overriding interest in gaining sole possession of an object or asset in co-ownership, and notwithstanding any other legal measures available, he or she may request that said object or asset be allocated to him or her in return for compensation.


  Division Two: Kinship

  Title Seven: Formation of the Parent-child Relationship5 

  Chapter One: General Provisions6 

Art. 2521A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general

A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general

1 The parent-child relationship is formed between child and mother on the birth of the child.

2 It is formed between child and father by virtue of the latter being married to the mother, by recognition or by court declaration.

3 Moreover, the parent-child relationship is formed by adoption.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2531B. ...

B. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2541

1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Chapter Two: Paternity of the Husband7 

Art. 2551A. Presumption

A. Presumption

1 Where a child is born in wedlock, the husband is deemed to be the father.

2 If the husband dies, he is deemed to be the father provided the child is born within 300 days of his death or, if born thereafter, if it is shown that the child was conceived before the husband’s death.

3 If the husband has been declared presumed dead, he is deemed to have been the father provided the child is born within 300 days of the life-threatening event or the last sign of life.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2561B. Challenge / I. Right to challenge

B. Challenge

I. Right to challenge

1 The presumption of paternity may be challenged in court:

1.
by the husband;
2.2
by the child if the spouses cease living together while the child is still a minor.

2 The husband’s challenge is directed against the child and the mother, that of the child against the husband and the mother.

3 The husband has no right of challenge if he consented to impregnation by a third party. The child’s right to challenge paternity is subject to the Reproductive Medicine Act of 18 December 19983.4


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 SR 810.11
4 Amended by Art. 39 of the Federal Act on Medically Assisted Reproduction of 18 Dec. 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 3055; BBl 1996 III 205).

Art. 256a1B. Challenge / II. Grounds for challenge / 1. In the case of conception in wedlock

II. Grounds for challenge

1. In the case of conception in wedlock

1 If a child was conceived in wedlock, the challenging party must show that the husband is not the father.

2 The child is presumed to have been conceived in wedlock if it was born no earlier than 180 days after the wedding and no later than 300 days after the marriage was dissolved as a result of death.2


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 256b1B. Challenge / II. Grounds for challenge / 2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart

2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart

1 If a child was conceived before the marriage was concluded or at a time when the spouses were living apart, no further grounds need be given for the challenge.

2 However, in such cases the paternity of the husband is still presumed where the court is satisfied that he had sexual intercourse with the mother around the date of the conception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 256c1B. Challenge / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

1 The husband must file the challenge within one year of learning of the birth and of the fact that he is not the father or that another man had sexual intercourse with the mother around the date of the conception, but in any event not later than five years after the birth.

2 The child’s challenge must be filed at the latest within one year of attaining the age of majority.2

3 Once these time limits have expired, a challenge of paternity is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2571C. Conflict of presumptions

C. Conflict of presumptions

1 Where a child was born within 300 days of the dissolution of the marriage as a result of death and the mother has since remarried, the second husband is deemed to be the father.2

2 If this presumption is disproved, the first husband is deemed to be the father.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 2581D. Challenge by the parents

D. Challenge by the parents

1 If the husband died or lost capacity of judgement before the time limit expired, his father or his mother may challenge his paternity.

2 In this case the provisions governing a challenge by the husband apply mutatis mutandis.

3 The one-year time limit for bringing the claim begins at the earliest on the date on which the father or mother learns of the husband’s death or loss of capacity of judgement.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2591E. Marriage of the parents

E. Marriage of the parents

1 If the parents marry each other, the provisions governing children born in wedlock apply mutatis mutandis to a child born prior to the marriage, providing the paternity of the husband is established by recognition or court declaration.

2 Recognition may be challenged:

1.
by the mother;
2.2
by the child or, after his or her death, by his or her issue if the spouses ceased living together while the child was still a minor or if recognition did not occur until after the child's twelfth birthday;
3.
by the husband’s commune of origin or residence;
4.
by the husband.

3 The provisions governing challenge of recognition apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Chapter Three: Recognition and Court Declaration of Paternity8 

Art. 2601A. Recognition / I. Admissibility and form

A. Recognition

I. Admissibility and form

1 Where the parent-child relationship exists only with the mother, the father may recognise the child.

2 Where the recognising person is a minor or subject to a general deputyship or if the adult protection authority has issued a related order, recognition requires the consent of his or her legal representative.2

3 Recognition is effected by means of a declaration made before the civil registrar or by testamentary disposition or, if an action to declare paternity is pending, by a declaration made to the court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 260a1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 1. Right to challenge

II. Challenge

1. Right to challenge

1 Recognition may be challenged before the courts by any interested party, namely the mother, the child or, after its death, its issue, and by the commune of origin or domicile of the recognising person.

2 The recognising person is entitled to file a challenge only if he or she recognised the child under threat of imminent and substantial risk to his or her own life, limb, reputation or property or to those of a person close to him or her, or in the erroneous belief that he was the father.

3 The challenge is directed against the recognising person and the child, insofar as they themselves are not the challenging persons.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260b1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 2. Grounds

2. Grounds

1 The challenging person must prove that the recognising person is not the child’s father.

2 However, mother and child are only required to prove this if the recognising person may satisfy the court that he had sexual intercourse with the mother around the time of the child’s conception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 260c1A. Recognition / II. Challenge / 3. Time limits

3. Time limits

1 The challenge must be filed within one year of the date on which the claimant learned of the recognition and the fact that the recognising person is not the father, or that another man had sexual intercourse with the mother around the time of the conception, or on which he or she learned of his or her error or on which the threat ceased, but in any event within five years of the recognition.

2 In all cases, the child may file the challenge at any time prior to the elapse of one year after attaining the age of majority.2

3 Once these time limits have expired, a challenge of recognition is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2611B. Action to determine paternity / I. Right to bring the action

B. Action to determine paternity

I. Right to bring the action

1 Both mother and child are entitled to bring an action to declare the existence of the parent-child relationship between the child and the father.

2 The action is brought against the father or, if he has died, in order of priority against his issue, parents or siblings or, where none exist, against the competent authority of his last domicile.

3 If the father has died, the court must inform his wife that the action has been brought so that she may safeguard her interests.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2621B. Action to determine paternity / II. Presumption

II. Presumption

1 If the defendant had sexual intercourse with the mother during the period between the 300th day and the 180th day before the child’s birth, his paternity is presumed.

2 Paternity is also presumed even if the child was conceived prior to the 300th day or after the 180th day prior to birth provided the defendant had sexual intercourse with the mother during the period in which the child was conceived.

3 There is no such presumption if the defendant shows that his paternity is either impossible or less probable than that of another man.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2631B. Action to determine paternity / III. Time limits

III. Time limits

1 The action is admissible both before and after the birth but must be brought:

1.
by the mother within one year of the birth;
2.2
by the child at any time prior to the elapse of one year after attaining the age of majority.

2 If a parent-child relationship already exists with another man, the action may in any event be brought within one year of the date on which said relationship is annulled.

3 Once these time limits have expired, an action for determination of paternity is admissible provided there is good cause for the delay.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).


  Chapter Four:9  Adoption

Art. 2641A. Adoption of minors / I. General requirements

A. Adoption of minors

I. General requirements

1 A minor child may be adopted if the persons wishing to adopt have raised and cared for the child for at least one year and provided the general circumstances suggest that establishing a parent-child relationship would be in the child’s best interests without being unfair for any other children of the adoptive parents.

2 Adoption is only possible, if the persons wishing to adopt the child are able to provide for the child up to the child’s majority on the basis of their age and their personal circumstances.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264a1A. Adoption of minors / II. Joint adoption

II. Joint adoption

1 Spouses may adopt a child jointly if they have been in the same household for at least three years and both are at least 28 years old.

2 Exceptions from the minimum age may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The spouses must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877)

Art. 264b1A. Adoption of minors / III. Adoption by a single person

III. Adoption by a single person

1 A person who is not married and does not live in a registered partnership is permitted to adopt a child alone if he or she is at least 28 years old.

2 A married person who is at least 28 years old is permitted to adopt alone where the other spouse permanently lacks capacity of judgement or has been of unknown whereabouts for more than 2 years or if the spouses have been separated by court order for more than 3 years.

3 A person living in a registered partnership who is at least 28 years old is permitted to adopt a child alone if his or her registered partner permanently lacks capacity of judgement or has been of unknown whereabouts for more than 2 years.

4 Exceptions from the minimum age may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The person wishing to adopt must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877)

Art. 264c1A. Adoption of minors / IV. Adoption of a stepchild

IV. Adoption of a stepchild

1 A person is permitted to adopt the child of the person:

1.
to whom he or she is married;
2.
with whom he or she lives in a registered partnership;
3.
with whom he or she cohabits.

2 The couple must have been in the same household for at least three years.

3 Persons who cohabit are not permitted to be married or to be bound by a registered partnership.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 264d1A. Adoption of minors / V. Difference in age

V. Difference in age

1 The age difference between the child and the persons wishing to adopt may not be less than 16 years and not more than 45 years.

2 Exceptions may be made if this is necessary for the welfare of the child. The person wishing to adopt must justify the exception.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2651A. Adoption of minors / VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority

VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority

1 If the child is capable of judgement, its consent is required for the adoption.

2 Where the child has a legal guardian or a legal representative, adoption requires the consent of the child protection authority even if the child is capable of judgement.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265a1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 1. Form

VII. Parents’ consent2

1. Form

1 Adoption requires the consent of the child’s father and mother.

2 Such consent must be given by oral or written declaration to the child protection authority of the parents’ or child’s domicile or temporary residence and must be recorded.

3 Such consent is valid even if the persons wishing to adopt are not named or not yet determined.3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 265b1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 2. Time of consent

2. Time of consent

1 Consent to adoption may not be given until at least six weeks after the birth of the child.

2 It may be revoked within six weeks of having been accepted.

3 Where consent, having been revoked, is given again, it is then final.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 265c1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 3. Dispensing with consent / a. Requirements

3. Dispensing with consent

a. Requirements

The consent of a parent may be dispensed with if the identity of that parent is unknown, or if he or she has been of unknown whereabouts for some length of time, or permanently lacks capacity of judgement.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 265d1A. Adoption of minors / VII. Parents’ consent / 3. Dispensing with consent / b. Decision

b. Decision

1 Where the child is entrusted to persons wishing to adopt with a view to subsequent adoption and the consent of one parent is not forthcoming, the child protection authority at the child’s domicile shall , at the request of the legal guardian or a legal representative, an adoption agency or the persons wishing to adopt, decide whether such consent can be dispensed with, as a rule before the child is placed in care.2

2 In all other cases, the decision is made at the time of the adoption.

3 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2661B. Adoption of an adult

B. Adoption of an adult

1 An adult may be adopted if:

1.
he or she is permanently in need of help for physical, mental or psychological reasons and the persons wishing to adopt have looked after him or her for at least one year;
2.
the persons wishing to adopt raised and cared for the person for at least one year while he or she was still a minor; or
3.
there are other good reasons and he or she has lived in the same household with the persons wishing to adopt for at least one year.

2 In all other respects, the provisions governing adoption of minors apply mutatis mutandis, with the exception of the provision on parental consent.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 2671C. Effects / I. In general

C. Effects

I. In general

1 The adoptive child acquires the legal status of a child of the persons wishing to adopt.

2 Previous parent-child relationships are extinguished.

3 The child’s relationship with the parent who:

1.
is married to;
2.
lives in a registered partnership with;
3.
cohabits with;

the adopting person is not extinguished.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 267a1C. Effects / II. Name

II. Name

1 In the case of joint adoption and adoption by a single person, the minor may be given a new first name if there are good reasons for doing so. Prior to this, the child is heard in person in an appropriate manner by the competent authority or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause. If the child is at least twelve years of age, a change of name requires his or her consent.

2 The name of the child is determined in accordance with the provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship. These apply mutatis mutandis to the adoption of the child by the registered partner of its mother or father.

3 The competent authority may authorise an adult to be adopted to continue using his or her existing name if there are good reasons for doing so.

4 The change of name of an adult to be adopted does not affect the naming of persons whose name is derived from the previous name of the person to be adopted, unless they expressly agree to a change of name.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581)

Art. 267b1C. Effects / III. Citizenship

III. Citizenship

The citizenship of a minor is determined by provisions governing the legal effects of the parent-child relationship.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2681 D. Procedure / I. In general

D. Procedure

I. In general

1 Adoption is pronounced by the competent cantonal authority at the adoptive parents’ domicile.

2 The adoption requirements must already be met when the application is submitted.2

3 Once the application has been submitted, the death or loss of capacity of judgement of the person wishing to adopt does not preclude the adoption provided the other requirements are still fulfilled.3

4 If the child attains the age of majority after the application for adoption has been submitted, the provisions governing the adoption of minors continue to apply provided the requirements for adoption were previously fulfilled.4

5 The adoption decision shall contain all the information required for entry in the civil register relating to the first name, surname and citizenship of the adopted person.5


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
4 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
5 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268a1D. Procedure / II. Investigation

II. Investigation

1 An application for adoption may not be upheld until all material circumstances have been thoroughly investigated, where necessary in consultation with the relevant specialists.

2 In particular, the investigation must look into the character and health of the persons wishing to adopt and the child, their mutual relationship, their suitability as parents, their financial situation, motives and family circumstances and the history of the child care relationship.2

3 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).
3 Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268abis1D. Procedure / III. Hearing for the child

III. Hearing for the child

1 The child shall be heard in person in an appropriate manner by the cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause.

2 Minutes shall be kept of the hearing.

3 A child capable of judgement may appeal against a decision to refuse a hearing.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268ater1D. Procedure / IV. Representation for the child

IV. Representation for the child

1 The cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure shall order the child to be represented and appoint a person experienced in welfare and legal matters as the child's deputy.

2 If a child with the capacity to consent so requests, a representative must be appointed.

3 The child may challenge the rejection of his or her request by filing an objection.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268aquater1D. Procedure / V. Taking account of the attitude of family members

V. Taking account of the attitude of family members

1 Where the persons wishing to adopt have issue of their own, the latter’s attitude to the adoption must be taken into account.

2 Prior to the adoption of an adult, the attitude of following persons must also be taken into account:

1.
the spouse or registered partner of the person to be adopted;
2.
the biological parents of the person to be adopted
3.
the issue of the person to be adopted, unless this is inadvisable due to their age or for other good cause.

3 These persons shall, if possible, be notified of the adoption decision.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268b1Dbis. Confidentiality of adoption information

Dbis. Confidentiality of adoption information

1 The adopted child and the adoptive parents are entitled to confidentiality of adoption information.

2 Identifying information about the minor or his or her adoptive parents may only be disclosed to the biological parents if the child is capable of judgement, and the adoptive parents and the child have consented to disclosure.

3 Identifying information about the adult child may be disclosed to the biological parents and their direct descendants if the child has consented to disclosure.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 268c1Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue

Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue

1 The adoptive parents must inform the child of his or her adoption when his or her age or maturity permits.

2 A minor is entitled to information about his or her biological parents, provided it is not possible to draw conclusions about their identity. The child shall be given identifying information only if he or she can show an interest worthy of protection.

3 An adult child may at any time request that the personal details of his or her biological parents and further information about them be disclosed to him or her. The adult child may also request that information about the direct descendants of his or her biological parents be disclosed to him or her if the descendants are of age and have consented to the disclosure.


1 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268d1Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services

Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services

1 Information about the biological parents, their direct descendants and the child may be obtained from the cantonal authority responsible for the adoption procedure.

2 The authority shall inform the person referred to in the request for information about the request and, where necessary, obtain his or her consent to contact the person requesting information. The authority may delegate these tasks to a specialised tracing service.

3 If the person referred to in the request for information refuses to make personal contact, the authority or the authorised tracing service shall inform the person requesting information and draw his or her attention to the personal rights of the person referred to in the request for information.

4 The cantons shall designate a body to provide advice to the biological parents, their direct descendants or the child on request.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 268e1Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents

Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents

1 The adoptive parents and the biological parents may agree that the biological parents be entitled to reasonable contact with the minor. This agreement and any amendments thereto shall be submitted to the child protection authority at the child’s place of residence for approval. The child protection authority or a third party appointed by it shall hear the child in person in an appropriate manner before the decision is taken, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or for other good cause. If the child is capable of judgement, its consent is required for the agreement.

2 If the best interests of the child are at risk or if there is disagreement about the implementation of the agreement, the child protection authority shall decide.

3 The child may refuse contact with its biological parents at any time. The adoptive parents may not pass on information to the biological parents against the child’s will.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2691E. Challenge / I. Grounds / 1. Lack of consent

E. Challenge

I. Grounds

1. Lack of consent

1 Where for no just cause consent has not been obtained, those persons whose consent is required may bring an action to challenge the adoption providing this does not seriously impair the interests of the child.

2 However, the parents are not entitled to bring such action where they may appeal against the decision to the Federal Supreme Court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269a1E. Challenge / I. Grounds / 2. Other defects

2. Other defects

1 If the adoption displays other grave defects, it may be challenged by any interested party and in particular by the commune of origin or domicile.

2 However, a challenge is excluded if the defect has been rectified in the interim or if it relates solely to procedural provisions.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269b1E. Challenge / II. Time limits

II. Time limits

An action to challenge the adoption must be brought within six months of discovering the grounds for the challenge and in any event within two years of the adoption.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 269c1F. Adoption agency services

F. Adoption agency services

1 The Confederation is responsible for supervising child adoption agency activities.

2 Any person engaging in such activities professionally or in connection with his or her professional activities requires an official licence; this does not apply to agency services rendered by the child protection authority.2

3 The Federal Council enacts the implementing regulations and determines the manner in which the cantonal authorities responsible for placing children in foster care with a view to subsequent adoption are to be involved in assessing fulfilment of the requirements for approval of adoption and in carrying out the necessary supervision.

4 ...3


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption, in force since 1 Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Repealed by Annex No 15 of the Federal Administrative Court Law of 17 June 2005, with effect from 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2006 2197; BBl 2001 4202).


  Title Eight: Effects of the Parent-Child Relationship10 

  Section One: Community of Parents and Children11 

Art. 2701A. Family surname / I. Child of married parents

A. Family surname

I. Child of married parents

1 Where the parents are married to each other but bear different surnames, the child takes the surname that the parents decided would be given to their children when they married.

2 Within one year of the birth of their first child, the parents may request that the child take the surname of the other parent.

3 If the parents bear a joint family name, the child takes that name.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 270a1A. Family surname / II. Child of unmarried parents

II. Child of unmarried parents

1 If one parent has parental responsibility, the child takes that parent's surname before marriage. If the parents share parental responsibility, they decide which of their surnames before marriage their children should take.

2 If joint parental responsibility is established after the birth of the first child, either parent may within a year of its establishment declare before the civil registrar that the child should take the other parent's name before marriage. This declaration applies to all common children, regardless of who is given parental responsibility.

3 If neither parent has parental responsibility, the child takes the mother's name before marriage.

4 A change in the allocation of parental responsibility has no effect on names. The provisions on changing names are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship) (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581). Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 270b1A. Family surname / III. Consent of the child

III. Consent of the child

If the child has attained the age of twelve, his or her surname may only be changed if he or she consents.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2711B. Citizenship

B. Citizenship

1 The child acquires the cantonal and communal citizenship of the parent whose surname the child bears.

2 Where a child acquires the surname of the other parent while still a minor, the child acquires the cantonal and communal citizenship of that parent.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 2721C. Support and common welfare

C. Support and common welfare

Parents and children owe each other such support, consideration and respect as the good of the family community requires.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2731D. Contact / I. Parents and children / 1. Principle

D. Contact

I. Parents and children

1. Principle

1 Parents not granted parental responsibility or whose children are not resident with them are entitled to reasonable contact with their minor children, and their children are entitled to contact with them.2

2 The child protection authority may remind parents, foster parents or the child of their duties and issue them with instructions where the exercise or failure to exercise contact entitlements is detrimental to the child or where such reminder or direction is required for some other reason.

3 Contact entitlements must be stipulated if either the father or the mother so requests.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 2741D. Contact / I. Parents and children / 2. Restrictions

2. Restrictions

1 The father and the mother must refrain from any conduct that impairs the child’s relationship with the other parent or makes the task of the person with custody more difficult.2

2 Where contact with the child is not in its best interests, or the parents breach their duties in the course of such contact or have not cared for the child to any meaningful degree, or other good cause exists, the parents’ right of contact with the child may be refused or withdrawn.

3 Where the parents have consented to the adoption of their child or their consent may be dispensed with, their right of contact with the child is extinguished as soon as the child is placed in foster care with a view to future adoption.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 274a1D. Contact / II. Third parties

II. Third parties

1 In extraordinary circumstances, a right of contact with the child may also be granted to other persons and in particular to relatives, to the extent this serves the child’s best interests.

2 The restrictions on parents’ visiting rights apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2751D. Contact / III. Responsible authorities

III. Responsible authorities

1 Responsibility for orders regulating rights of contact with the child lies with the child protection authority at the child’s domicile and with that of his or her place of temporary residence, insofar as the latter has taken or is taking child protection measures.

2 If the court regulates parental responsibility, residence or the child maintenance contribution in accordance with the provisions on the divorce and protection of the marital union, it shall also regulate contact.2

3 Where no orders have yet been issued regulating the father’s and mother’s contact entitlements, no contact may be had against the will of the person granted parental responsibility or with whom the child resides.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 275a1E. Right to information

E. Right to information

1 Parents who do not exercise parental responsibility should be informed of special events in the child’s life and consulted before important decisions affecting its development are taken.

2 They are entitled to obtain information concerning the child’s condition and development from third parties involved in its care, such as teachers and doctors, in the same manner as the person with parental responsibility.

3 The provisions governing responsibility for and limitations on contact with the child apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).


  Section Two: Parents’ Duty of Maintenance12 

Art. 2761A. General / I. Object and scope

A. General

I. Object and scope2

1 Maintenance is provided by caring for and raising the child and in the form of monetary payments.3

2 The parents must, each according to their own abilities, provide for the child’s maintenance, including the costs of caring for and raising the child, his or her education and measures taken for his or her protection.4

3 The parents are released from their duty of maintenance to the extent that the child may reasonably be expected to meet the costs thereof from his or her own earnings or other resources.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 276a1A. General / II. Precedence of maintenance for minors

II. Precedence of maintenance for minors

1 The duty of maintenance towards a minor shall take precedence over other maintenance duties under family law.

2 In justified cases, the court may disregard this rule, in particular in order to prevent any disadvantage to a child entitled to maintenance who is of age.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2771B. Duration

B. Duration

1 The parents’ duty of maintenance lasts until the child attains the age of majority.2

2 If at that juncture the child has not yet had a suitable education, the parents must pay for his or her maintenance, to the extent conscionable in the overall circumstances, until such time as the child can complete a suitable education within the customary timescale.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 2781C. Married parents

C. Married parents

1 For the duration of their marriage, the parents bear the costs of maintenance in accordance with the provisions of marital law.

2 Each spouse must give the other all reasonable assistance in discharging the duty to maintain children born prior to the marriage.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2791D. Court action / I. Right to sue

D. Court action

I. Right to sue2

1 The child is entitled to sue the father or the mother or both for maintenance in future and for one year prior to the bringing of such action.

23 ...3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
3 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 2802841D. Court action / II. and III. ...

II. and III. ...


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 2851D. Court action / IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution / 1. Parents’ contribution

IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution

1. Parents’ contribution

1 The child maintenance contribution should correspond to the child’s needs and to the parents’ financial circumstances and resources; the child’s assets and income must be taken into account.

2 The child maintenance contribution also serves to ensure that the child is cared for by the parents or by third parties.

3 The child maintenance contribution is payable in advance on the dates stipulated by the court.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 285a1D. Court action / IV. Amount of child maintenance contribution / 2. Other payments for maintenance of the child

2. Other payments for maintenance of the child

1 Family allowance credits paid to the parent required to pay maintenance must be paid in addition to the maintenance.

2 Unless the court rules otherwise, any child allowance, social security children’s supplement and similar child support benefits to which the parent subject to the duty of maintenance is entitled must be paid in addition to the child maintenance contribution.

3 Where as a result of old age or invalidity the parent subject to the duty of maintenance subsequently receives social security, children’s supplements or similar child support benefits which replace his or her employment income, he or she must pay said benefits to the child; by operation of law, his or her existing child maintenance contribution is automatically reduced by the amount of such new benefits.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2861D. Court action / V. Change of circumstances / 1. In general

V. Change of circumstances

1. In general2

1 The court may order that the child maintenance contribution be automatically increased or decreased in the event of specified changes in the child’s needs, the parents’ financial resources or the cost of living.

2 If circumstances change considerably, at the request of one parent or the child the court will set a new level of child maintenance contribution or revoke it entirely.

3 Should the child have unforeseen, extraordinary needs the court may order the parents to make a special financial contribution.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 286a1D. Court action / V. Change of circumstances / 2. Shortfalls

2. Shortfalls

1 If it was previously established in an approved maintenance agreement or a decision that no maintenance contribution could be set to provide due maintenance for the child, and should the circumstances of the parent liable to pay maintenance have since improved substantially, the child is entitled to claim payments that were not met by this parent during the previous five years in which payments were owed to provide due maintenance.

2 This claim must be brought within one year of it being known that the circumstances have improved substantially.

3 This claim passes with all rights to the other parent or to the state authority in as far as this parent or the state authority has met the missing share of the due maintenance.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2871E. Maintenance agreements / I. Regular payments

E. Maintenance agreements

I. Regular payments

1 Maintenance agreements are binding on the child only once they have been approved by the child protection authority.

2 Child maintenance contributions stipulated in such agreements may be modified, providing such changes have not been excluded with the approval of the child protection authority.

3 If the agreement is concluded in court proceedings, such approval must be given by the court.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 287a1E. Maintenance agreements / II. Scope of a maintenance agreement

II. Scope of a maintenance agreement

Where maintenance contributions are set in a maintenance agreement, the agreement must specify:

a.
the income and assets of each parent and each child from which the set amount is calculated;
b.
the amount set for each child;
c.
the amount required to cover any shortfall in the due maintenance of each child;
d.
if and to what extent the maintenance contributions will be adjusted to reflect changes in living costs.

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2881E. Maintenance agreements / III. Final settlement

III. Final settlement2

1 Full and final settlement of the child’s maintenance entitlement may be agreed if it is in the child’s best interests.

2 The settlement agreement becomes binding on the child only:

1.
once the child protection authority or, in the case of an agreement reached during court proceedings, the court has approved it, and
2.
once the settlement amount has been paid into the account designated in the approval.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Originally No II.

Art. 2891F. Fulfilment / I. Entitlement

F. Fulfilment

I. Entitlement

1 The right to child maintenance contributions is that of the child and, so long as he or she is a minor, is fulfilled by payment to the child's legal representative or to the person with whom the child resides, unless the court decides otherwise.2

2 However, where the state authority assumes the cost of maintaining the child, such claim and all attendant rights pass to the state authority.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2901F. Fulfilment / II. Enforcement / 1. Enforcement assistance

II. Enforcement

1. Enforcement assistance

1 If a father or mother does not fulfil his or her obligation to provide maintenance, a specialist office designated by cantonal law shall, on application, help the child and the other parent to enforce the maintenance claim appropriately and free of charge.

2 The Federal Council determines the terms of enforcement assistance.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 2911F. Fulfilment / II. Enforcement / 2. Directions to debtors

2. Directions to debtors

If the parents neglect to take due care of the child, the court may order their debtors to make payment in whole or in part to the child’s legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2921F. Fulfilment / III. Security

III. Security

If the parents are persistently neglectful in their duty of maintenance, or if there are grounds to suspect that they are preparing to abscond or are dissipating or concealing their assets, the court may order them to furnish appropriate security for future child maintenance contributions.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2931G. Public law

G. Public law

1 Subject to the duty of relatives to provide support, public law determines who must bear the costs of maintenance if neither the parents nor the child may defray them.

2 Public law also governs the provision of advances to maintain the child if the parents fail to fulfil their duty of maintenance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2941H. Foster parents

H. Foster parents

1 Foster parents are entitled to receive an appropriate fostering allowance unless otherwise agreed or clearly dictated by the circumstances.

2 Where children are fostered by close relatives or with a view to subsequent adoption there is a presumption that no remuneration is due.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 2951J. Rights of the unmarried mother

J. Rights of the unmarried mother

1 Up to one year after the birth at the latest, the mother may file a claim against the father or his legal heirs for compensation:2

1.
in respect of the confinement costs;
2.
in respect of the costs of maintenance for at least four weeks prior to the birth and at least eight weeks thereafter;
3.
in respect of other expenses rendered necessary by the pregnancy or confinement, including the initial equipment for the child.

2 On grounds of equity, the court may award partial or full compensation for such costs if the pregnancy ends prematurely.

3 Third-party payments to which the mother is entitled by law or by contract must be taken into consideration to the extent justified in the circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).


  Section Three: Parental Responsibility13 

Art. 2961A. Principles

A. Principles

1 Parental responsibility serves the best interests of the child.

2 Until such time as they attain the age of majority, children remain the joint parental responsibility of their father and mother.

3 Parents who are minors or subject to a general deputyship may not exercise parental responsibility. When the parents attain the age of majority, they are assigned parental responsibility. If the general deputyship is revoked, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility in a manner appropriate to the child's best interests.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2971Abis. Death of a parent

Abis. Death of a parent

1 If the parents have joint parental responsibility and one parent dies, the surviving parent retains sole parental responsibility.

2 If a parent who has sole parental responsibility dies, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility to the surviving parent or if a legal guardian is appointed for the child, to the person more suited to safeguarding the child's best interests.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 2981Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings

Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings

1 In divorce proceedings or proceedings to protect the marital union, the court shall assign one parent sole parental responsibility if this is necessary to safeguard the child's best interests.

2 It may limit itself to regulating residence, contact or sharing of parenting duties if there is no prospect of the parents agreeing on these matters.

2bis When regulating residence, contact and the sharing of parenting duties it shall take account of the right of the child to maintain regular personal relationships with both parents.2

2ter Where joint parental responsibility is awarded, with respect to the child’s best interests, it shall consider the possibility of the child residing with both parents on an alternating basis, if this is requested by one of the parents or by the child.3

3 It shall request the child protection authority to appoint a legal guardian for the child if neither the mother nor the father can be expected to accept parental responsibility.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298a1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / I. Joint declaration by the parents

Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity

I. Joint declaration by the parents

1 If the parents are not married to each other and if the father recognises the child, or the parent-child relationship is established by court judgment but joint parental responsibility was not ordered at the time of the judgment, joint parental responsibility is established based on a joint declaration by the parents.

2 In the declaration, the parents confirm that they:

1.
are prepared to accept joint responsibility for the child; and
2.
have agreed on residence and contact or on the sharing of parenting duties and on the child maintenance contribution for the child.

3 Before making the declaration, the parents may seek advice from the child protection authority.

4 If the parents make the declaration at the same time as recognising paternity, the declaration is made to the civil registrar. A subsequent declaration must be made to the child protection authority at the child's domicile.

5 Unless and until the declaration has been made, the mother has sole parental responsibility.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1). Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298b1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / II. Decision of the child protection authority

II. Decision of the child protection authority

1 If a parent refuses to make a declaration on joint parental responsibility, the other parent may request the child protection authority at the child's domicile to intervene.

2 The child protection authority shall order joint parental responsibility, unless the mother should retain sole parental responsibility or sole parental responsibility should be assigned to the father in order to safeguard the child's best interests.

3 At the same time as deciding on parental responsibility, the child protection authority shall regulate any other matters in dispute. An action for payment of the maintenance contribution may be brought before the competent court; in such a case the court also decides on parental responsibility and other matters relating to the child.2

3bis In its decision on residence, contact and the sharing of parenting duties, the child protection authority shall take account of the right of the child to maintain regular personal relationships with both parents.3

3ter Where joint parental responsibility is awarded, with respect to the child’s best interests, it shall consider the possibility of the child residing with both parents on an alternating basis, if this is requested by one of the parents or by the child.4

4 If the mother is a minor or subject to a general deputyship, the child protection authority shall assign parental responsibility to the father or appoint a legal guardian for the child, depending on which measure is more suitable to safeguard the child's best interests.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Second sentence amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
4 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298c1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / III. Paternity action

III. Paternity action

If the court upholds a paternity action, it shall order joint parental responsibility unless the mother retains sole parental responsibility or sole parental responsibility is assigned to the father in order to safeguard the child's best interests.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 298d1Aquater. Recognition and court declaration of paternity / IV. Change in circumstances

IV. Change in circumstances

1 At the request of either parent, the child or ex officio, the child protection authority shall reassign parental responsibility if this is necessary to safeguard the child's best interests due to a substantial change in circumstances.

2 It may limit itself to regulating residence, contact or the sharing of parenting duties.

3 An action for a change to the maintenance payments may be brought to the competent court; in such a case the court may make a new ruling on parental responsibility and other matters relating to the child.2


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 298e1Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship

Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship

If the person who adopts the child cohabits with the child’s mother or father, and there is a substantial change in the circumstances, the provision on the change of circumstances applies mutatis mutandis in the case of recognition and judgement of paternity.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 2991Asexies. Step-parents

Asexies. Step-parents2

Each spouse must give the other reasonable support in exercising parental responsibility over the latter’s children and must represent the other spouse as circumstances require.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3001Asepties. Foster parents

Asepties. Foster parents2

1 If a child is placed in foster care with third parties, unless the relevant orders provide otherwise, these third parties exercise parental responsibility over the child in loco parentis to the extent required for the proper fulfilment of their duties.

2 Foster parents must be consulted before any important decisions are taken regarding the child.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 3011B. Scope / I. In general

B. Scope

I. In general

1 The parents raise and care for a child with his or her best interests in mind and take all necessary decisions unless the child has capacity to act.

1bis The parent who is taking care of the child may decide alone if:

1.
the matter is routine or urgent;
2.
the other parent cannot be consulted without incurring unreasonable trouble or expense.2

2 The child owes his or her parents obedience; according to how mature the child is, the parents shall allow the child the freedom to shape his or her own life and, wherever feasible, take due account of the child’s opinion in important matters.

3 The child is not permitted to leave the family home without the parents’ consent, nor may he or she be unlawfully removed from them.

4 The parents give the child his or her first name.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 301a1B. Scope / II. Deciding on the place of residence

II. Deciding on the place of residence

1 Parental responsibility includes the right to decide on the child's place of residence.

2 If parents exercise joint parental responsibility and if one parent wishes to change the child's place of residence, this requires the consent of the other parent or a decision of the court or the child protection authority if:

a.
the new place of residence is outside Switzerland; or
b.
the change of place of residence has serious consequences for the ability of the other parent to exercise parental responsibility and have contact.

3 If one parent has sole parental responsibility and if he or she wishes to change the child's place of residence, he must inform the other parent of this in good time.

4 A parent who wishes to change his or her own domicile has the same duty to provide information.

5 If required, the parents shall agree to modify the rules on parental responsibility, residence, contact and the child maintenance contribution in such a way as to safeguard the child's best interests. If they are unable to agree, the court or the child protection authority decides.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3021B. Scope / III. Upbringing

III. Upbringing2

1 The parents must raise the child according to their circumstances and encourage and safeguard the child's physical, mental and moral development.

2 The parents must arrange for the child, especially if he or she has physical or learning disabilities, to receive an appropriate general and vocational education that corresponds as closely as possible to the child’s abilities and inclinations.

3 To that end, the parents must co-operate as appropriate with school authorities and, where required, with public and charitable youth support agencies.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3031B. Scope / IV. Religious upbringing

IV. Religious upbringing2

1 The parents are free to determine the child’s religious upbringing.

2 Any agreement restricting this freedom is invalid.

3 Once a child is 16 years of age, he or she is free to decide his or her own religious denomination.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3041B. Scope / V. Representation / 1. In relation to third parties / a. In general

V. Representation

1. In relation to third parties

a. In general2

1 By operation of law, the parents are vested with the power to represent the child in all dealings with third parties to the extent they have parental responsibility for the child.3

2 If both parents have parental responsibility, all third parties acting in good faith may assume that each parent acts with the other’s consent.4

3 Parents acting as their child's representative may not provide any financial guarantees, establish any foundations or make gifts on behalf of the client, with the exception of customary occasional gifts.5


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
4 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
5 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3051B. Scope / V. Representation / 1. In relation to third parties / b. Child’s legal status

b. Child’s legal status2

1 A child under parental responsibility may by his or her own acts establish rights and obligations and exercise strictly personal rights under the law of persons.3

2 The child is liable with all his or her assets for any obligations entered into, without regard to the parents’ property rights.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3061B. Scope / V. Representation / 2. Within the family community

2. Within the family community

1 Children with capacity of judgement who are under parental responsibility may, with their parents’ consent, act for the family as a whole, but in so doing engage not themselves but their parents.2

2 If the parents are prevented from acting or if they have interests in a matter that conflict with those of the child, the child protection authority shall appoint a deputy or regulate the matter itself.3

3 In the event of a conflict of interests, the parents' powers become automatically void by law in relation to the matter concerned.4


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3071C. Child protection / I. Appropriate measures

C. Child protection

I. Appropriate measures

1 If the child’s best interests are threatened and the parents are unwilling or unable to remedy the situation, the child protection authority must take all appropriate measures to protect the child.

2 The child protection authority has the same duty with regard to children placed with foster parents or otherwise living outside the family home.

3 In particular it is entitled to remind parents, foster parents or the child of their duties, issue specific instructions regarding care, upbringing or education and appoint a suitable person or agency with powers to investigate and monitor the situation.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3081C. Child protection / II. Deputyship

II. Deputyship2

1 Where circumstances so require, the child protection authority shall appoint a child deputy whose function is to help the parents look after the child by providing advice and practical support.

2 It may assign special powers to the deputy, in particular to represent the child in the paternity action, in safeguarding the child's right to child support and the child's other rights and in supervising contact.3

3 Parental responsibility may be restricted accordingly.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3091

1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), with effect from 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3101C. Child protection / III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence

III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence2

1 Where there is no other way to avert a threat to the child’s best interests, the child protection authority must remove the child from the parents or from any third parties with whom he or she is staying and place the child in a suitable location.

2 At the request of the parents or the child, the child protection authority must do likewise if relations between them have deteriorated to the extent that it is no longer conscionable for the child to remain in the family home and provided no other practical remedy is available in the circumstances.

3 Where a child has lived for some length of time with foster parents, the child protection authority may forbid the parents to take the child back if such action might pose a serious risk to the child’s development.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3111C. Child protection / IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility / 1. Ex-officio

IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility

1. Ex-officio2

1 If other child protection measures have failed or offer little prospect of proving adequate, the child protection authority shall revoke parental responsibility:3

1.4
if the parents are unable to exercise parental responsibility as required on account of inexperience, illness, disability, absence, violent behaviour or other similar reasons;
2.
if the parents have not cared for the child to any meaningful degree or have flagrantly violated their duties towards the child.

2 Where parental responsibility is withdrawn from both parents, a legal guardian is appointed for their children.

3 Unless expressly ordered otherwise, the withdrawal of parental responsibility is effective in respect of all the children, including those born subsequently.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19. Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Amended by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 3121C. Child protection / IV. Withdrawal of parental responsibility / 2. With the parents' consent

2. With the parents' consent2

The child protection authority shall withdraw parental responsibility:3

1.
if the parents so request for good cause;
2.
if the parents have consented to having the child adopted in future by unnamed third parties.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3131C. Child protection / V. Change in circumstances

V. Change in circumstances

1 If circumstances change, the child protection measures in place must be adapted to suit the new situation.

2 On no account may parental responsibility be restored within less than one year of its withdrawal.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3141C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 1. General

VI. Procedure

1. General

1 The provisions on the procedure before the adult protection authority apply mutatis mutandis.

2 In appropriate cases, the child protection authority may request the parents to attempt mediation.

3 If the child protection authority appoints a deputy, it shall state the tasks of the deputy and any restrictions on parental responsibility in the decision.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314a1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 2. Hearing for the child

2. Hearing for the child

1 The child is heard in person in an appropriate manner by the child protection authority or by a third party appointed for this purpose, unless this is inadvisable due to the child's age or other good cause.

2 The record of the hearing contains only the findings of relevance to the decision. The parents are informed of these findings.

3 A child capable of judgement may appeal against a decision to refuse a hearing.


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 6 Oct. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314abis1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 3. Representation for the child

3. Representation for the child

1 If necessary, the child protection authority shall order the child to be represented and appoint a person experienced in welfare and legal matters as the child's deputy.

2 The child protection authority shall consider the appointment of a representative in particular if:

1.
the proceedings relate to the child's accommodation;
2.
the parties file differing applications in relation to regulating parental responsibility or important contact issues.

3 The child's deputy may file applications and appeals.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314b1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital

4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital

1 If the child must be committed to a secure institution or a psychiatric hospital, the adult protection provisions on care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.

2 If the child is capable of judgement, he or she may petition the court directly.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 314c1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 5. Right to notify

1 Any person may notify the child protection authorities if a child’s physical, mental or sexual integrity appears to be at risk.

5. Right to notify

2 If a report is in the interest of the child, persons who are subject to professional confidentiality under the Swiss Criminal Code2 are also entitled to notify the authorities. This provision does not apply to auxiliary persons bound by professional confidentiality under the Criminal Code.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314d1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 6. Duty to notify

6. Duty to notify

1 The following persons, provided they are not subject to professional confidentiality under the Swiss Criminal Code2, are obliged to report if there are clear indications that the physical, psychological or sexual integrity of a child is at risk and that they cannot remedy the threat as part of their professional activities:

1.
specialists from the fields of medicine, psychology, care services, childcare, education, counselling, religion and sport who have regular contact with children;
2.
persons who learn of such a case in their official capacity.

2 The duty to notify is fulfilled when a person notifies a superior.

3 The cantons may provide for further notification obligations.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0

Art. 314e1C. Child protection / VI. Procedure / 7. Cooperation and administrative assistance

7. Cooperation and administrative assistance

1 The persons and third parties involved in the proceedings are obliged to cooperate in ascertaining the facts of the case. The child protection authority issues the necessary orders to protect any interests worthy of protection. If necessary, it shall issue an order for the compulsory enforcement of the duty to cooperate.

2 Persons bound by professional confidentiality in accordance with the Swiss Criminal Code2 are entitled to cooperate without having to be released from this confidentiality requirement beforehand. This provision does not apply to auxiliary persons bound by professional confidentiality under the Criminal Code.

3 Persons bound by professional confidentiality in accordance with the Swiss Criminal Code are obliged to cooperate if the person entitled to confidentiality has authorised them to do so or if the superior authority or the supervisory authority has released them from professional confidentiality at the request of the child protection authority. Article 13 of the Lawyers Act of 23 June 20003 remains reserved.

4 Administrative authorities and courts shall pass on the necessary documentation, reports and information, provided there is no conflict with interests worthy of protection.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 SR 311.0
3 SR 935.61

Art. 3151C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 1. In general

VII. Jurisdiction

1. In general2

1 Child protection measures are ordered by the child protection authorities at the child’s domicile.3

2 If the child lives with foster parents or otherwise outside the parental family home or if there is risk in delay, responsibility also rests with the authorities of the place in which the child is currently staying.

3 If the latter authorities implement a child protection measure, they must inform the authority at the child’s domicile.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315a1C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 2. In marital proceedings / a. Jurisdiction of the court

2. In marital proceedings

a. Jurisdiction of the court

1 If the court is called on to rule on relations between the parents and the children in accordance with the provisions governing divorce or protection of the marital union, it must also order all necessary child protection measures and instruct the child protection authority to implement them.2

2 The court may also modify child protection measures already in place to take account of changes in circumstances.

3 However, the child protection authority retains the power:3

1.
to continue child protection proceedings introduced prior to the court proceedings;
2.
to order such measures as are required immediately to protect the child where the court is unlikely to be able to do so in good time.

1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 315b1C. Child protection / VII. Jurisdiction / 2. In marital proceedings / b. Amendment of court orders

b. Amendment of court orders

1 The court has jurisdiction to amend court orders regarding custody awards and child protection:

1.
during divorce proceedings;
2.
in proceedings to alter the divorce decree pursuant to the regulations governing divorce;
3.
in proceedings to modify measures for protection of the marital union; the regulations governing divorce are applicable mutatis mutandis.

2 In all other cases jurisdiction lies with the child protection authority.2


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3161C. Child protection / VIII. Supervision of foster children

VIII. Supervision of foster children

1 Any person taking in foster children requires authorisation from and is under the supervision of the child protection authority at his domicile or some other body designated by the canton.

1bis Where a child is fostered with a view to subsequent adoption, a single cantonal authority is responsible.2

2 The Federal Council enacts implementing regulations.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Adoption Convention and Measures to Protect Children in respect of Inter-Country Adoption, in force since 1 Jan. 2003 (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795).

Art. 3171C. Child protection / IX. Cooperation in youth support

IX. Cooperation in youth support

The cantons issue such regulations as are required to ensure effective cooperation between the authorities and official bodies in the areas of child protection under civil law, the criminal law relating to young offenders and other youth support activities.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Section Four: Property of the Child14 

Art. 3181A. Management

A. Management

1 As long as they have parental responsibility for the child, the parents have the right and the duty to administer the child’s property.

2 If a parent dies, the surviving parent must file an inventory of the child's property with the child protection authority.2

3 If the child protection authority regards it as appropriate in view of the nature and extent of the child's property and the personal circumstances of the parents, it shall order an inventory to be prepared or regular accounts and reports to be submitted.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3191B. Use of income

B. Use of income

1 The parents are permitted to use the income from the child’s property for the child’s maintenance, upbringing and education and, where equitable, also for the requirements of the household.

2 Any surplus accrues to the child’s property.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3201C. Drawing on the child’s assets

C. Drawing on the child’s assets

1 Settlements, compensation and similar payments may be used in portions to fund the child’s maintenance in accordance with its current requirements.

2 Where necessary to meet the costs of maintenance, upbringing or education, the child protection authority may permit the parents to make use of other parts of the child’s assets in specific amounts.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3211D. Freely disposable property of the child / I. Endowments

D. Freely disposable property of the child

I. Endowments

1 The parents are not permitted to draw on revenue from the child’s assets if, when given to the child, they were designated as interest-bearing investments or savings or use of the revenue by the parents was expressly excluded.

2 Management by the parents is excluded only where expressly so provided when the child is endowed with the assets.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3221D. Freely disposable property of the child / II. Statutory entitlement

II. Statutory entitlement

1 By testamentary disposition the child’s statutory inheritance entitlement may also be excluded from management by the parents.

2 If the testator appoints a third party to administer the bequest, the child protection authority may require the latter to carry out periodic accounting and reporting.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3231D. Freely disposable property of the child / III. Employment income, professional and business assets

III. Employment income, professional and business assets

1 The child manages and enjoys the benefits of all fruits of his or her own labour and of those of his or her assets that are released by his or her parents for use in the child's professional or business activities.

2 If the child lives with its parents in the family home, they may require the child to make an appropriate contribution to his or her maintenance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3241E. Protection of the child’s property / I. Appropriate measures

E. Protection of the child’s property

I. Appropriate measures

1 Where there is no adequate guarantee that the child’s property will be diligently managed, the child protection authority takes the necessary measures to protect it.

2 In particular, the child protection authority may issue instructions regarding such management and, where the periodic accounting and reporting is insufficient, may order the parents to deposit the property or furnish security.

3 Procedure and jurisdiction are regulated mutatis mutandis by the provisions governing child protection.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3251E. Protection of the child’s property / II. Withdrawal of management

II. Withdrawal of management

1 If there is no other way to avert a threat to the child’s property, the child protection authority shall appoint a child welfare advocate to manage it.

2 The child protection authority does likewise if a child’s property that is not managed by the parents is threatened.

3 Where there is serious concern that income from the child’s property or the amounts designated for use or released to cover the child’s needs are not being used as intended, the child protection authority may also appoint a child welfare advocate to manage those assets.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 3261F. End of asset management / I. Return of property

F. End of asset management

I. Return of property

On termination of parental responsibility or the parents’ management, the parents must hand over the child’s property together with a final statement of account to the adult child or to the child’s legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3271F. End of asset management / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 The parents are liable to make restitution as if they were authorised agents.

2 The parents must surrender the proceeds of any property alienated in good faith.

3 The parents do not owe compensation for any authorised expenditures on the child or the household.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).


  Section Five:15  Minors subject to Guardianship

Art. 327a A. Principle

A. Principle

If a child is not subject to parental responsibility, the child protection authority shall appoint a guardian for the child.

Art. 327b B. Legal status / I. Of the child

B. Legal status

I. Of the child

A child subject to guardianship has the same legal status as a child subject to parental responsibility.

Art. 327c B. Legal status / II. Of the guardian

II. Of the guardian

1 A guardian has the same rights as the parents.

2 The provisions on adult protection, and in particular on appointing a and acting as a deputy and the involvement of the adult protection authority apply mutatis mutandis.

3 If the child must be committed to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital, the adult protection provisions on care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.


  Title Nine: Family Community

  Chapter One: Duty of Assistance

Art. 3281A. Persons obliged to lend assistance

A. Persons obliged to lend assistance

1 A person living in financial comfort has a duty to lend assistance to any lineal relatives of older or younger generations who would suffer hardship without such assistance.

2 The duty of maintenance of parents, spouses and registered partners is reserved.2


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Federal Act on Partnerships of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 329 B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance

B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance1

1 The claim for assistance is directed against those with a duty to provide it in order of their inheritance entitlements; the amount is dependent on the degree of assistance required to maintain the indigent claimant and on the circumstances of the person obliged to provide it.

1bis No claim for support may be made if the hardship arises from a restriction in the ability to pursue gainful employment owing to the care of one’s own children.2

2 Where in the light of special circumstances the court deems it inequitable to require a person to fulfil his duty of assistance, the court may restrict such duty or revoke it entirely.3

3 The provisions governing child maintenance entitlement and the transfer of such entitlement to the state authority are applicable mutatis mutandis.4


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
4 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 330 C. Maintenance of foundlings

C. Maintenance of foundlings

1 Foundlings are maintained by the commune in which they have become naturalised.

2 If a foundling’s parentage is established, the commune may require those relatives with a duty of assistance and, as a last recourse, the state authority under such duty to compensate it for the costs incurred in maintaining the foundling.


  Chapter Two: Authority within the Household

Art. 331 A. Requirement

A. Requirement

1 Where by law, agreement or family custom persons living in common household have a head of the family, such person holds authority within the household.

2 The authority extends over all persons living in the household, whether relatives by blood1 or by marriage or employees or persons in a similar position based on a contractual relationship.2


1 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Amended by No II Art. 2 No 2 of the FA of 25 June 1971, in force since 1 Jan. 1972 (AS 1971 1465; BBl 1967 II 241).

Art. 332 B. Effect / I. House rules and welfare

B. Effect

I. House rules and welfare

1 The house rules to which the household members are subject must take due account of the interests of all involved.

2 In particular, the household members must be allowed the freedom required for their education, occupation and religious practices.

3 All property brought in by the household members must be kept safe and sound by the head of the family with the same care and attention given to his own property.

Art. 333 B. Effect / II. Liability

II. Liability

1 If damage is caused by a member of the household who is a minor, suffers from a mental disability, is subject to a general deputyship, or is mentally ill, the head of the family is liable unless he can show that his supervision of the household was as diligent as would normally be expected in the circumstances prevailing.1

2 The head of the family is obliged to ensure that the condition of a household member who suffers from a mental disability or a mental illness does not result in risk or damage to himself or to others.2

3 Where necessary, the head of the family must notify the competent authority with a view to having the requisite precautionary measures put in place.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 3341B. Effect / III. Claims of children and grandchildren / 1. Requirements

III. Claims of children and grandchildren

1. Requirements

1 Adult children or grandchildren who have contributed their labour or income to parents or grandparents with whom they live in a common household are entitled to suitable compensation in return.2

2 In the event of dispute the court determines the amount of compensation, the security required and the payment method.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 334bis1B. Effect / III. Claims of children and grandchildren / 2. Asserting claims

2. Asserting claims

1 The compensation due to children or grandchildren may be claimed on the debtor’s death.

2 It may also be claimed during the debtor’s lifetime if his property is distrained or he is declared bankrupt, the common household ceases to exist or the business changes hands.

3 The claim is not subject to prescription, but must be brought at the latest on division of the deceased debtor’s estate.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Chapter Three: Family Property

Art. 335 A. Family foundations

A. Family foundations

1 A body of assets may be tied to a family by means of a family foundation created under the law of persons or inheritance law in order to meet the costs of raising, endowing or supporting family members or for similar purposes.

2 It is no longer permitted to establish a fee tail.

Art. 336 B. Ownership in undivided shares / I. Formation / 1. Authority

B. Ownership in undivided shares

I. Formation

1. Authority

Members of a family may tie a body of assets to the family by placing all or part of an inheritance or other property under joint ownership in undivided shares.

Art. 337 B. Ownership in undivided shares / I. Formation / 2. Form

2. Form

The agreement establishing joint ownership in undivided shares is valid only if done as a public deed signed by all co-owners or their representatives.

Art. 338 B. Ownership in undivided shares / II. Duration

II. Duration

1 Joint ownership in undivided shares may be constituted for a limited or indefinite duration.

2 If constituted for an indefinite duration, it may be terminated by any co-owner subject to six months’ notice.

3 Where the co-owned asset is an agricultural enterprise, such notice must always expire on a spring or autumn date in accordance with local custom.

Art. 339 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 1. Type of ownership

III. Effect

1. Type of ownership

1 Joint ownership in undivided shares binds the co-owners together in common economic activity.

2 Unless otherwise provided, they enjoy equal rights in the co-owned property.

3 For the duration of their joint ownership in undivided shares, they may neither seek a division of the property nor dispose of their own share.

Art. 340 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 2. Management and representation / a. In general

2. Management and representation

a. In general

1 The affairs of the joint ownership in undivided shares are regulated by all the co-owners acting collectively.

2 Each co-owner may take ordinary administrative actions on his own initiative.

Art. 341 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 2. Management and representation / b. Manager's powers

b. Manager's powers

1 The co-owners may appoint one of their number to act as their manager.

2 The manager represents the co-owners in all external dealings and directs their economic activities.

3 Where representation by the other co-owners is excluded, such exclusion may be invoked against third parties acting in good faith only if the sole representative is entered in the commercial register.

Art. 342 B. Ownership in undivided shares / III. Effect / 3. Common property and personal property

3. Common property and personal property

1 The property under joint ownership in undivided shares is owned collectively by all the co-owners.

2 The co-owners are jointly and severally liable for debts encumbering such property.

3 Except where otherwise agreed, all property belonging to a co-owner besides that owned collectively in undivided shares, and all property inherited or acquired in some other manner without valuable consideration during the co-ownership is the personal property of that co-owner.

Art. 343 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 1. Grounds

IV. Dissolution

1. Grounds

Joint ownership in undivided shares is dissolved:

1.
by agreement or notice of termination;
2.
on expiry of the period for which ownership in undivided shares was established, providing it is not tacitly renewed;
3.
on realisation of a co-owner’s share of the property that has been distrained;
4.
if a co-owner is declared bankrupt;
5.
at the request of a co-owner for good cause.
Art. 344 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 2. Notice, insolvency, marriage

2. Notice, insolvency, marriage

1 If one co-owner gives notice to terminate joint ownership in undivided shares or is declared bankrupt, or if his share is realised after having been distrained, joint ownership in undivided shares may be maintained by the other co-owners provided they reach a settlement with him or his creditors.

2 A co-owner who marries is entitled to request such settlement without giving notice of termination.

Art. 345 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 3. Death of a co-owner

3. Death of a co-owner

1 On the death of a co-owner, heirs who are not also co-owners are entitled only to settlement of his share.

2 Where he is survived by issue entitled to inherit his share, with the consent of the other co-owners such issue may accede to the joint ownership in undivided shares in his place.

Art. 346 B. Ownership in undivided shares / IV. Dissolution / 4. Division

4. Division

1 Division of the collectively owned property or settlement of a withdrawing co-owner’s share is based on the condition of the property when the grounds for dissolution arose.

2 Its implementation may not be requested at an inopportune time.

Art. 347 B. Ownership in undivided shares / V. Revenue-generating co-ownership / 1. Nature

V. Revenue-generating co-ownership

1. Nature

1 The co-owners may entrust the exploitation and representation of the collectively owned property to one of their number on condition that he pay each co-owner a share of the net profit annually.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, such share is determined equitably on the basis of the average revenues generated by the property over a sufficiently long period and with due regard to the work done by the person managing it.

Art. 348 B. Ownership in undivided shares / V. Revenue-generating co-ownership / 2. Special grounds for dissolution

2. Special grounds for dissolution

1 If the collectively owned property is not properly managed or the managing co-owner fails to meet his obligations towards the other co-owners, the joint ownership in undivided shares may be dissolved.

2 Where there is good cause, a co-owner may request the court to authorise him to assume joint management of the property, taking due consideration of the provisions governing the division of the estate.

3 In all other respects, revenue-generating joint ownership in undivided shares is subject to the provisions governing the joint ownership in undivided shares of a collectively managed business.

Art. 349–3581

1 Repealed by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, with effect from 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 3591

1 Repealed by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Federal Government, with effect from 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Division Three:16  The Protection of Adults

  Title Ten: Own Arrangements for Care and Statutory Measures

  Section One: Own Arrangements for Care

  Subsection One: The Advance Care Directive

Art. 360 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 A person with capacity to act may instruct a natural person or legal entity to take responsibility for his or her personal care or the management of his or her assets or to act as his or her legal agent in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement.

2 He or she must define the tasks that are to be assigned and may issue instructions on how these tasks are to be fulfilled.

3 He or she may provide for a replacement for the event that the appointee is not suitable for the tasks, does not accept the mandate or terminates the mandate.

Art. 361 B. Execution and revocation / I. Execution

B. Execution and revocation

I. Execution

1 The advance care directive must be executed in holographic form or publicly authenticated.

2 A holograph advance care directive must be handwritten, dated and signed by the client from beginning to end.

3 On request, the Civil Register Office shall record in the central database the fact that a person has executed an advance care directive and the place where it is kept. The Federal Council shall issue the required provisions, in particular on the access to the data.

Art. 362 B. Execution and revocation / II. Revocation

II. Revocation

1 The client may revoke the advance care directive at any time in either of the ways provided for its execution.

2 He or she may also revoke the advance care directive by destroying the document.

3 If he or she executes a new advance care directive without expressly revoking the previous directive, the new advance care directive replaces the previous one unless it is clearly no more than an amendment to the same.

Art. 363 C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance

C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance

1 Where the adult protection authority learns that a person is no longer capable of judgement, but it is unaware if there is an advance care directive, it shall enquire at the Civil Register Office.

2 If there is an advance care directive, the adult protection authority shall verify if:

1.
the directive has been validly executed;
2.
the requirements for its effectiveness are met;
3.
the appointee is fit for his or her duties; and
4.
if further adult protection measures are required.

3 If the appointee accepts the advance care directive, the authority shall advise him or her of his or her obligations under the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts and issue him or her with a formal document stating his or her powers.


1 SR 220

Art. 364 D. Interpretation and clarification

D. Interpretation and clarification

The appointee may request the adult protection authority to interpret the advance care directive and to add clarification to secondary points.

Art. 365 E. Fulfilment

E. Fulfilment

1 The appointee shall represent the client in accordance with the advance care directive and fulfil his or her duties with due care in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts.

2 Where transactions must be carried out that are not covered by the advance care directive, or if the appointee has an interest in a matter that conflicts with that of the client, the appointee shall notify the adult protection authority immediately.

3 In the event of a conflict of interest, the powers of the appointee cease to apply by law.


1 SR 220

Art. 366 F. Remuneration and expenses

F. Remuneration and expenses

1 If the advance care directive has no instructions on the remuneration of the appointee, the adult protection authority shall specify appropriate remuneration provided this appears justified given the extent of the duties or if the services provided by the appointee are normally remunerated.

2 The remuneration and the required expenses are charged to the client.

Art. 367 G. Termination

G. Termination

1 The appointee may terminate the advance care directive at any time subject to giving two months' written notice to the adult protection authority.

2 For good cause, the appointee may terminate the directive without notice.

Art. 368 H. Intervention by the adult protection authority

H. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 If the interests of the client are endangered or no longer protected, the adult protection authority may take the required measures ex officio or at the request of a closely associated person.

2 It may in particular issue the appointee with instructions, order the appointee to file an inventory, regular accounts and reports or revoke all or some of his or her powers.

Art. 369 I. Regaining the capacity of judgement

I. Regaining the capacity of judgement

1 If the client regains the capacity of judgement, the advance care directive shall by law cease to have effect.

2 If the interests of the client are endangered thereby, the appointee must continue to carry out the tasks assigned to him or her until the client can safeguard his or her own interests.

3 The appointee is bound as if the directive still applies by transactions that he or she enters into before he or she learns that the directive has ceased to apply.


  Subsection Two: The Patient Decree

Art. 370 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 A person who is capable of judgement may specify in a patient decree which medical procedures he or she agrees or does not agree to in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement.

2 He or she may also designate a natural person who in the event that he or she is no longer capable of judgement should discuss the medical procedures with the attending doctor and decide on his or her behalf. He or she may issue instructions to this person.

3 He or she may issue alternative instructions for the event that the designated person is not suitable for the tasks, does not accept the mandate or terminates the mandate.

Art. 371 B. Execution and revocation

B. Execution and revocation

1 The patient decree must be executed in writing, and be dated and signed.

2 Any person who has executed a patient decree may have this fact and the place where it is kept entered on his or her health insurance card. The Federal Council shall issue the required provisions, in particular on the access to the data.

3 The provision on revoking an advance care directive applies mutatis mutandis.

Art. 372 C. Loss of capacity of judgement

C. Loss of capacity of judgement

1 If the patient lacks capacity of judgement and it is not known if there is a patient decree, the attending doctor shall ascertain the position from the health insurance card. The foregoing does not apply to urgent cases.

2 The doctor shall comply with the patient decree unless it violates statutory regulations or there is reasonable doubt that it is based on the patient's free will or still corresponds to his or her presumed will.

3 The doctor shall make a note in the patient records of any reasons why the patient decree was not complied with.

Art. 373 D. Intervention by the adult protection authority

D. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 Any person closely related to the patient may contact the adult protection authority in writing and claim that:

1.
the patient decree is not being complied with;
2.
the interests of the patient are being endangered or no longer safeguarded;
3.
the patient decree is not based on the patient's free will.

2 The provision on intervention by the adult protection authority in the case of an advance care directive applies mutatis mutandis.


  Section Two: Statutory Measures for Persons lacking Capacity of Judgement

  Sub-Section One: Representation by the Spouse or Registered Partner

Art. 374 A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative

A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative

1 Any person who as spouse or registered partner cohabits with a person who is no longer capable of judgement or who regularly and personally provides that person with support has a statutory right to act as that person's representative if there is no advance care directive and no deputy has been appointed.

2 The right to act as representative includes:

1.
all legal acts that are normally required to meet the need for support;
2.
due management of income and other assets; and
3.
the right to open and deal with post, if necessary.

3 For legal acts involving exceptional asset management, the spouse or the registered partner must obtain the consent of the adult protection authority.

Art. 375 B. Exercise of the right to act as representative

B. Exercise of the right to act as representative

The exercise of the right to act as representative is governed by the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency contracts mutatis mutandis.


1 SR 220

Art. 376 C. Intervention by the adult protection authority

C. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 If there is any doubt as to whether the requirements for representation are met, the adult protection authority shall decide on the right to act as representative and if required shall provide the spouse or the registered partner with a document stating his or her powers.

2 If the interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement are endangered or no longer safeguarded, the adult protection authority shall at the request of a closely associated person or ex officio revoke the power of the spouse or registered partner to act as representative partly or fully and shall appoint a deputy.


  Sub-Section Two: Representation in relation to Medical Procedures

Art. 377 A. Treatment plan

A. Treatment plan

1 If a person lacking capacity of judgement has not given instructions on treatment in a patient decree, the attending doctor shall plan the required treatment in consultation with the person entitled to act as representative in relation to medical procedures.

2 The doctor shall inform the representative about all the important aspects of the planned medical procedures, and in particular about the reasons therefor, their purpose, form, methods, risks, side effects and costs, the consequences of not carrying out the treatment and any alternative treatment options.

3 If possible, the person lacking capacity of judgement shall also be involved in making the decision.

4 The treatment plan shall be adapted to ongoing developments.

Art. 378 B. The representative

B. The representative

1 The following persons are entitled in the following order to represent the person lacking capacity of judgement and to grant or refuse consent to the planned out-patient or in-patient measures:

1.
a person appointed in a patient decree or in an advance care directive;
2.
a deputy with a right to act as representative in relation to medical procedures;
3.
any person who as a spouse or registered partner cohabits with the person lacking capacity of judgement or who regularly and personally provides him or her with support;
4.
any person who cohabits with the person lacking capacity of judgement and who regularly and personally provides him or her with support;
5.
issue who regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support;
6.
the parents, if they regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support;
7.
siblings, if they regularly and personally provide the person lacking capacity of judgement with support.

2 If two or more persons have the right to act as representative, the doctor, acting in good faith, may require that each act with the agreement of the others.

3 If a patient decree contains no instructions, the representative shall decide according to the presumed wishes and interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement.

Art. 379 C. Urgent cases

C. Urgent cases

In urgent cases, the doctor may carry out medical procedures according to the presumed wishes and interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement.

Art. 380 D. Treatment of a mental disorder

D. Treatment of a mental disorder

The treatment of a mental disorder of a person lacking capacity of judgement in a psychiatric hospital is governed by the provisions on care-related hospitalisation.

Art. 381 E. Intervention by the adult protection authority

E. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority shall establish a representative deputyship if there is no representative available or the representative does not wish to exercise the right to act.

2 It shall appoint a representative or establish a representative deputyship if:

1.
it is unclear who has a right to act as representative
2.
the persons with a right to act as representative are unable to agree; or
3.
the interests of the person lacking capacity of judgement are endangered or no longer safeguarded.

3 It shall act at the request of the doctor, another closely associated person or ex officio.


  Sub-Section Three: Stays in Residential or Care Institutions

Art. 382 A. Care agreement

A. Care agreement

1 If a person lacking capacity of judgement is cared for in a residential or nursing institution for a longer period, a written care agreement must be drawn up to regulate the services that the institution provides and the costs thereof.

2 In determining the services provided by the institution, account must be taken of the wishes of the person concerned as far as possible.

3 Responsibility for representing the person lacking capacity of judgement in concluding, amending or terminating the care agreement is governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on representation relating to medical procedures.

Art. 383 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / I. Requirements

B. Restriction of freedom of movement

I. Requirements

1 The residential or nursing institution may restrict the freedom of movement of the person lacking capacity of judgement only if less stringent measures are clearly insufficient or prove to be so and the measure serves to:

1.
prevent serious danger to the life or physical integrity of the client or third parties; or
2.
remedy serious disruption to life in and around the institution.

2 Before his or her freedom of movement is restricted, it shall be explained to the person concerned what is happening, why the measure has been ordered, how long it will probably last and who will be responsible for the person concerned during this period. The foregoing does not apply in emergencies.

3 An order to restrict freedom of movement shall be revoked as soon as possible and in every case reviewed regularly to ascertain whether it is still required.

Art. 384 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / II. Records and Information

II. Records and Information

1 A record shall be kept of any measure restricting freedom of movement. This shall contain in particular the names of the person ordering the measure, the purpose, the nature and the duration the measure.

2 The representative in relation to medical procedures shall be notified of the measure restricting freedom of movement and may inspect the record at any time.

3 The persons supervising the residential or nursing institution shall also have a right to inspect the record.

Art. 385 B. Restriction of freedom of movement / III. Intervention by the adult protection authority

III. Intervention by the adult protection authority

1 The person concerned or a closely related person may submit a written request at any time for the adult protection authority at the location of the institution to intervene in relation to a measure restricting freedom of movement.

2 If the adult protection authority establishes that the measure fails to meet the statutory requirements, it shall amend the measure, revoke it or order an official adult protection measure. If necessary, it shall notify the institution's supervisory authority.

3 Any request for an assessment to be made by the adult protection authority shall be passed on to the authority immediately.

Art. 386 C. Protection of privacy

C. Protection of privacy

1 The residential or nursing institution shall protect the privacy of a person lacking capacity of judgement and where possible encourage contacts with persons outside the institution.

2 If no one outside the institution expresses an interest in the client, the residential or nursing institution shall notify the adult protection authority.

3 The freedom to choose one's doctor shall be respected unless there is good cause for not doing so.

Art. 387 D. Supervision of residential and care institution

D. Supervision of residential and care institution

The cantons shall make residential and care institution in which person lacking capacity of judgement are cared for subject to supervision, unless federal regulations already guarantee supervision.


  Title Eleven: Official Measures

  Section One: General Principles

Art. 388 A. Aim

A. Aim

1 Official adult protection measures shall aim to secure the best interests and protection of persons in need.

2 Where possible, they should preserve and encourage the independence of the persons concerned.

Art. 389 B. Subsidiarity and proportionality

B. Subsidiarity and proportionality

1 The adult protection authority shall order a measure if:

1.
support for the person in need offered by his or her family, other closely related persons or private or public services is or proves to be insufficient;
2.
where the person in need is no longer capable of judgement, he or she has failed to make any or sufficient arrangements for his or her own care and the statutory measures are insufficient.

2 Any official measure must be necessary and suitable.


  Section Two: The Deputyship

  Sub-Section One: General Provisions

Art. 390 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 The adult protection authority shall establish a deputyship if an adult:

1.
due to a learning disability, a mental disorder or a similar inherent debility is wholly or partially unable to manage his or her own affairs;
2.
due to a temporary loss of the capacity of judgement or temporary absence is neither able to take care of matters that must be dealt with, nor has appointed a representative.

2 Account must be taken of the burden on and the protection of family members and third parties.

3 The deputyship shall be established at the request of the person concerned (the client) or a closely associated person or ex officio.

Art. 391 B. Scope of responsibilities

B. Scope of responsibilities

1 The adult protection authority shall define the scope of the deputyship's responsibilities according to the needs of the client.

2 The scope of responsibilities shall relate to personal care, the management of his or her assets or legal matters.

3 Without the consent of the client, the deputy may only open his or her post or enter his or her residence if the adult protection authority has expressly granted the power to do so.

Art. 392 C. Dispensing with a deputyship

C. Dispensing with a deputyship

If establishing a deputyship is clearly a disproportionate measure due the extent of the work involved, the adult protection authority may:

1.
do what is required itself, and in particular consent to a transaction;
2.
instruct third parties to carry out individual tasks; or
3.
designate a suitable person or agency that must be consulted and informed on specific matters.

  Sub-Section Two: Types of Deputyship

Art. 393 A. Assistance deputyship

A. Assistance deputyship

1 An assistance deputyship is established with the consent of the person in need if he or she needs assistance in order to deal with certain matters.

2 The assistance deputyship does not limit the capacity of the client to act.

Art. 394 B. Representative deputyship / I. In general

B. Representative deputyship

I. In general

1 A representative deputyship is established if the person in need is unable to deal with certain matters and therefore must be represented.

2 The adult protection authority may limit the capacity of the client to act accordingly.

3 Even if his or her capacity to act has not been limited, the client is bound by the acts of the deputy.

Art. 395 B. Representative deputyship / II. Asset management

II. Asset management

1 If the adult protection authority establishes a representative deputyship to manage assets, it shall specify the assets to be managed by the deputy. It may make all or part of the income, all or part of the capital or all or part of the income and capital subject to the deputy's management.

2 The management powers also cover savings from the managed income or the revenue from the managed capital unless the adult protection authority provides otherwise.

3 Without limiting the capacity of the client to act, the adult protection authority may prohibit him or her from accessing individual assets.

4 If the adult protection authority prohibits the client from disposing of heritable property, it must arrange for a note to be made in the land register.

Art. 396 C. Advisory deputyship

C. Advisory deputyship

1 An advisory deputyship shall be established if the client requires for his or her own protection that certain acts be made subject to the consent of the deputy.

2 The client's capacity to act shall thus be limited accordingly by law.

Art. 397 D. Combination of deputyships

D. Combination of deputyships

Assistance, representative and advisory deputyships may be combined with each other.

Art. 398 E. General deputyship

E. General deputyship

1 A general deputyship is established if a person, in particular due to permanent loss of capacity of judgement, is in particular need.

2 It covers all aspects of personal care, management of assets and legal matters.

3 The client's capacity to act is revoked by law.


  Sub-Section Three: End of the Deputyship

Art. 399

1 The deputyship ends by law on the death of the client.

2 The adult protection authority shall terminate a deputyship at the request of the client or of a closely associated person or ex officio as soon as there is no reason for it to continue.


  Sub-Section Four: The Deputy

Art. 400 A. Appointment / I. General requirements

A. Appointment

I. General requirements

1 The adult protection authority shall appoint as deputy a natural person who has the personal aptitude and knowledge to carry out the planned tasks, who has the time required to do so and who can carry out the tasks in person. Where circumstances require, it may appoint two or more persons.

2 The person may only be appointed with their consent.1

3 The adult protection authority shall ensure that the deputy receives the instructions, advice and support that he or she requires


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 29 Sept. 2017, in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2801; BBl 2017 1811 3205).

Art. 401 A. Appointment / II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons

II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons

1 If the client proposes someone as his or her deputy, the adult protection authority shall agree to the proposal provided the person proposed is suitable and is prepared to accept the deputyship

2 It shall if possible take account of the wishes of family members or other closely associated persons.

3 If the client rejects a specific person as the deputy, the adult protection authority shall respect this wish provided it is reasonable.

Art. 402 A. Appointment / III. Appointment of two or more persons

III. Appointment of two or more persons

1 If the adult protection authority appoints two or more persons as deputies, it shall specify whether their tasks should be carried out jointly or who is responsible for which tasks.

2 Two or more deputies may be required to carry out their tasks jointly only if they agree to do so.

Art. 403 B. Incapacity and conflict of interests

B. Incapacity and conflict of interests

1 If the deputy is unable to act or if the deputy's interests conflict with those of the client, the adult protection authority shall appoint a substitute deputy or regulate the matter itself.

2 In the event of a conflict of interests, the powers of the deputy cease to apply by law in the relevant matter.

Art. 404 C. Remuneration and expenses

C. Remuneration and expenses

1 The deputy is entitled to appropriate remuneration and to the reimbursement of necessary expenses from the assets of the client. In the case of professional deputies, the remuneration is paid and expenses reimbursed by the employer.

2 The adult protection authority determines the level of remuneration. It takes account in particular of the extent and the complexity of the tasks assigned to the deputy.

3 The cantons shall issue implementing provisions and rules on remuneration and reimbursing expenses if they cannot be paid out of the assets of the client.


  Sub-Section Five: Deputyship Tasks

Art. 405 A. Assumption of office

A. Assumption of office

1 The deputy shall obtain the information required to fulfil his or her tasks and shall make personal contact with the client.

2 If the deputyship involves asset management, the deputy shall immediately make an inventory of the assets to be managed in cooperation with the adult protection authority.

3 If justified in the circumstances, the adult protection authority may order a public inventory to be made. This has the same effect for creditors as a public inventory under the law of succession.

4 Third parties are obliged to provide all the information required for the inventory to be made.

Art. 406 B. Relationship with the client

B. Relationship with the client

1 The deputy shall carry out his or her tasks in the interests of the client, take account of the client's opinions, where possible, and respect the client's desire to organise his or her life in a way that corresponds to his or her abilities and accords with his or her wishes and ideas.

2 The deputy shall try to develop a relationship of mutual trust with the client and to prevent any deterioration in the client's debility or to reduce the effect thereof.

Art. 407 C. Client's autonomy

C. Client's autonomy

Even if his or her capacity to act has been revoked, a client who is capable of judgement may through his or her own acts establish rights and obligations under the law of persons, and exercise strictly personal rights.

Art. 408 D. Asset management / I. Tasks

D. Asset management

I. Tasks

1 The deputy shall manage the assets with due care and carry out all the legal acts connected with their management.

2 In particular the deputy may:

1.
accept payments due to the client by third parties thus discharging their obligations;
2.
pay debts where appropriate;
3.
represent the client in attending to his or her everyday needs, if necessary.

3 The Federal Council shall issue provisions on the investment and safe custody of assets.

Art. 409 D. Asset management / II. Personal allowance

II. Personal allowance

The deputy shall provide the client with an allowance from the client's assets which the client is free to spend.

Art. 410 D. Asset management / III. Accounts

III. Accounts

1 The deputy shall keep accounts and submit them to the adult protection authority for approval at regular intervals specified by the authority, and at least every two years.

2 The deputy shall explain the accounts to the client and provide him or her with a copy on request.

Art. 411 E. Reporting

E. Reporting

1 The deputy shall submit a report on the client's situation and the deputyship to the adult protection authority as often as necessary, but at least every two years.

2 The deputy shall if possible consult the client when preparing the report and provide the client with a copy request.

Art. 412 F. Special transactions

F. Special transactions

1 The deputy may not provide any financial guarantees, establish any foundations or make gifts on behalf of the client, with the exception of customary occasional gifts.

2 Assets that are of special value to the client or his or her family shall not be disposed of if possible.

Art. 413 G. Duties of care and confidentiality

G. Duties of care and confidentiality

1 In fulfilling his or her tasks, the deputy shall have the same duty of care as an agent under the provisions of the Code of Obligations1.

2 The deputyship is subject to a duty of confidentiality unless this is contrary to overriding interests.

3 Third parties must be notified of the existence of the deputyship provided this is required for the deputy to duly fulfil his or her tasks.


1 SR 220

Art. 414 H. Amendment of conditions

H. Amendment of conditions

The deputy shall notify the adult protection authority immediately of any circumstances that require the measure to be amended or make the termination of the deputyship possible.


  Sub-Section Six: Role of the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 415 A. Examination of accounts and report

A. Examination of accounts and report

1 The adult protection authority shall examine the accounts and grant or refuse approval thereof; if necessary, they shall require the accounts to be corrected.

2 It shall examine the report and, if necessary, require it to be amended.

3 If necessary, it shall take measures to safeguard the interests of the client appropriately.

Art. 416 B. Transactions requiring consent / I. By law

B. Transactions requiring consent

I. By law

1 The consent of the adult protection authority is required before the deputy may carry out any of the following transactions on behalf of the client:

1.
liquidation of the household, terminating the lease on a dwelling where the client lives;
2.
long-term contracts for the client's accommodation;
3.
acceptance or renunciation of a inheritance if an express declaration is required therefor, as well as contracts of succession and contracts dividing an estate;
4.
the acquisition, sale, pledge and other burdening of immovable property and the construction of buildings that goes beyond ordinary administrative activities;
5.
the acquisition, sale and pledge of other assets and the creation of a usufruct where such transactions do not fall under the conduct of ordinary administration and management;
6.
the acceptance and granting of substantial loans, entering into bill-of-exchange-related liabilities;
7.
life annuity and lifetime maintenance agreements as well as life assurance, provided these do not form part of an occupational pension in connection with a contract of employment;
8.
the takeover or liquidation of a business, involvement in a company with personal liability or a substantial capital participation;
9.
declaration of inability to pay, conduct of legal proceedings, conclusion of a settlement, an arbitration agreement or a composition agreement, subject to the reservation of provisional measures by the deputy in cases of urgency.

2 The adult protection authority's consent is not required if a client who is capable of judgement grants his or her consent and his or her capacity to act is not limited by the deputyship.

3 Contracts between the deputy and the client shall always require the adult protection authority's consent other than in the case of assignments issued by the client that do not involve the payment of a fee.

Art. 417 B. Transactions requiring consent / II. By order

II. By order

The adult protection authority may for good cause order that other transactions should require its consent.

Art. 418 B. Transactions requiring consent / III. Lack of consent

III. Lack of consent

If a transaction has been entered into without the required consent of the adult protection authority, this shall only affect the client to the extent provided for under the provisions of the law of persons on lack of consent from a legal representative.


  Sub-Section Seven: Intervention by the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 419

The client, a closely related person or any person with a legitimate interest may call on the adult protection authority to intervene in relation to acts or omissions by the deputy or by a third party or agency to which the adult protection authority has issued an assignment.


  Sub-Section Eight: Special Provisions for Family Members

Art. 420

If the client's spouse, registered partner, parents, issue, sibling, or de facto life partner is appointed deputy, the adult protection authority may wholly or partly absolve the deputy of the obligations to prepare an inventory, submit regular reports and accounts, and obtain consent for specific transaction if this is justified by the circumstances.


  Sub-Section Nine: Termination of the Office of Deputy

Art. 421 A. By law

A. By law

The office of deputy terminates by law:

1.
on expiry of a term of office set by the adult protection authority, unless the deputy is confirmed in office;
2.
with the end of the deputyship;
3.
with termination of employment as a professional deputy;
4.
in the event that the deputy is made subject to a deputyship, becomes incapable of judgement, or dies.
Art. 422 B. Discharge / I. At the deputy's request

B. Discharge

I. At the deputy's request

1 The deputy may request to be discharged at the earliest after serving a term of four years.

2 Prior to this, the deputy may request to be discharged for good cause.

Art. 423 B. Discharge / II. Other cases

II. Other cases

1 The adult protection authority shall discharge the deputy if:

1.
he or she is no longer suitable to carry out the tasks;
2.
there is other good cause for his or her discharge.

2 The client or a closely associated person may request that the deputy be discharged.

Art. 424 C. Continuation of transactions

C. Continuation of transactions

The deputy must continue with transactions that cannot be postponed until a successor takes over office, unless the adult protection authority orders otherwise. This provision does not apply to a professional deputy.

Art. 425 D. Final report and final accounts

D. Final report and final accounts

1 When the term of office ends, the deputy shall submit a final report to the adult protection authority and if applicable file the final accounts. The adult protection authority may waive this requirement for professional deputies if the employment relationship ends.

2 The adult protection authority shall examine and approve the final report and the final accounts in the same way as the regular reports and accounts.

3 It shall pass on the final report and final accounts to the client or his or her heirs and if applicable to the new deputy and shall at the same time draw the attention of these persons to the provisions on accountability.

4 It shall also inform them whether it exonerated the deputy or refused to approve the final report or the final accounts.


  Section Three: Care-Related Hospitalisation

Art. 426 A. The measures / I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care

A. The measures

I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care

1 A person suffering from a mental disorder or mental disability or serious neglect (the patient) may be committed to an appropriate institution if the required treatment or care cannot be provided otherwise.

2 The burden that the patient places on family members and third parties and their protection must be taken into account.

3 The patient shall be discharged as soon as the requirements for hospitalisation no longer are fulfilled.

4 The patient or a closely related person may request his or her discharge at any time. A decision must be made on the request immediately.

Art. 427 A. The measures / II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily

II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily

1 If a person suffering from a mental disorder who has entered an institution voluntarily wishes to leave the institution, he or she may be detained by the institution's medical management for a maximum of three days if he or she:

1.
is a risk to his or her own life or limb; or
2.
is a serious risk to the life or the physical integrity of others.

2 At the end of the three day period, the patient may leave the institution unless he or she is subject to an enforceable hospitalisation order.

3 The patient shall be notified in writing that he or she may petition the court.

Art. 428 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / I. Adult protection authority

B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge

I. Adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority is responsible for ordering hospitalisation and discharge.

2 In specific cases, it may delegate responsibility for discharge to the institution.

Art. 429 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / II. Doctors / 1. Responsibility

II. Doctors

1. Responsibility

1 The cantons may designate doctors who in addition to the adult protection authority are authorised to order hospitalisation for a period specified by cantonal law. The period may not exceed six weeks.

2 Hospitalisation may not continue beyond the specified period at the latest unless an enforceable hospitalisation order from the adult protection authority applies.

3 The institution decides on discharge.

Art. 430 B. Responsibility for hospitalisation and discharge / II. Doctors / 2. Procedures

2. Procedures

1 The doctor shall examine and interview the patient in person.

2 The hospitalisation order shall contain at least the following information:

1.
the place and date of the examination;
2.
the name of the doctor;
3.
the diagnosis, reasons therefor and the purpose of hospitalisation;
4.
instructions on rights of appeal.

3 An appeal does not have suspensive effect unless the doctor or the competent court orders otherwise.

4 A copy of the hospitalisation order shall be given to the patient; a further copy shall be given to the institution on the patient's admission.

5 The doctor shall if possible notify a person closely related to the patient in writing on his or her committal and on the rights of appeal.

Art. 431 C. Regular review

C. Regular review

1 The adult protection authority shall conduct a review at the latest six months after hospitalisation of whether the requirements for hospitalisation are still being met and whether the institution is still suitable.

2 It shall conduct a second review within the following six months. Thereafter it shall conduct a review as often as necessary, but at least once every year.

Art. 432 D. Authorised representative

D. Authorised representative

Any person committed to an institution may appoint a person that he or she trusts as a representative to support him or her during his or her stay and until the conclusion of all related procedures.

Art. 433 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / I. Treatment plan

E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder

I. Treatment plan

1 If a person is committed to an institution to be treated for a mental disorder, the attending doctor shall draw up written treatment plan in consultation with the patient and if applicable his or her authorised representative.

2 The doctor shall inform the patient and the authorised representative of all matters relevant to the planned medical procedures, and in particular the reasons therefor, their purpose, nature, modalities, risks and side effects, of the consequences of not undergoing treatment and of any alternative treatment options.

3 The treatment plan shall be given to the patient so that he or she may consent. Where the patient is incapable of judgement, account must be taken of any patient decree.

4 The treatment plan is adjusted to take account of ongoing developments.

Art. 434 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / II. Treatment without consent

II. Treatment without consent

1 In the absence of the patient's consent, the chief physician in the department may order in writing the medical procedures planned in the treatment plan if:

1.
failure to carry out the treatment could lead to serious damage to the patient's health or seriously endanger the life or the physical integrity of third parties;
2.
the patient is unable to exercise judgement in relation to his or her need for treatment; and
3.
no appropriate measure is available that is less invasive.

2 Written notice of the order shall be given to the patient and his or her authorised representative together with instructions on rights of appeal.

Art. 435 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / III. Emergencies

III. Emergencies

1 In an emergency, essential medical procedures may be carried out immediately to protect the patient or third parties.

2 If the institution is aware how the person wishes to be treated, it shall take account of those wishes.

Art. 436 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / IV. Pre-discharge interview

IV. Pre-discharge interview

1 If there is a risk that the medical condition will recur, the attending doctor shall attempt to agree with the client before discharge on principles for treatment in the event that the patient is committed to the institution again.

2 The pre-discharge interview must be documented.

Art. 437 E. Medical measures in the case of a mental disorder / V. Cantonal law

V. Cantonal law

1 The cantons shall regulate follow-up care.

2 They may provide for out-patient measures.

Art. 438 F. Measures restricting freedom of movement

F. Measures restricting freedom of movement

Measures restricting the patient's freedom of movement in the institution are governed by the provisions on restricting the freedom of movement of patients in residential or care institutions mutatis mutandis. The right to appeal to the court is reserved.

Art. 439 G. Petition to the court

G. Petition to the court

1 In the following cases, the patient or a closely related person may petition the competent court in writing:

1.
in cases of hospitalisation ordered by a doctor;
2.
in cases where the patient is detained by the institution;
3.
in cases where a request for discharge is refused by the institution;
4.
in cases where a mental disorder is treated without consent;
5.
in cases of measures restricting freedom of movement.

2 The deadline for appealing to the court is ten days from the date on which notice of the decision is given. In the case of measures restricting freedom of movement, an appeal may be made to the court at any time.

3 The procedure is governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on proceedings before a judicial appellate authority.

4 An application for judicial assessment must be passed on to the competent court immediately.


  Title Twelve: Organisation

  Section One: Authorities and Local Jurisdiction

Art. 440 A. Adult protection authority

A. Adult protection authority

1 The adult protection authority is a specialist authority. It is appointed by the cantons.

2 It has a quorum of three members for taking decisions. The cantons may provide for exceptions for specific matters.

3 It also carries out the tasks of the child protection authority.

Art. 441 B. Supervisory authority

B. Supervisory authority

1 The cantons shall appoint the supervisory authorities.

2 The Federal Council may issue provisions on supervision.

Art. 442 C. Local jurisdiction

C. Local jurisdiction

1 The adult protection authority at the place of residence of the client has jurisdiction. In ongoing proceedings, the same authority retains jurisdiction until the case has been concluded.

2 In urgent cases, the authority where the client is actually residing has jurisdiction. If this authority carries out a measure, it shall notify the authority in the client's normal place of residence.

3 In the case of a deputyship due to absence, the authority at the place where the majority of the assets have been managed or have been transferred to the client has jurisdiction.

4 The cantons are entitled to declare the authority in the client's place of origin rather than place of residence to have jurisdiction over citizens of the canton who are resident in the canton, provide the commune of origin is wholly or partly responsible for supporting persons in need.

5 If a person subject to a measure changes place of residence, the authority at the new place shall take responsibility for the measure immediately, unless there is good cause for not doing so.


  Section Two: Procedure

  Sub-section One: Before the Adult Protection Authority

Art. 443 A. Notification rights and obligations

A. Notification rights and obligations

1 Any person may notify the adult protection authority if a person appears to be in need of assistance. The provisions on professional confidentiality are reserved.

2 Any person who while acting in an official capacity learns that a person needs assistance and is unable to provide this assistance in the context of their professional activities is required to notify the adult protection authority. The provisions on professional confidentiality remain reserved.1

3 The cantons may provide for further notification obligations.2


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 444 B. Verification of jurisdiction

B. Verification of jurisdiction

1 The adult protection authority shall verify its jurisdiction ex officio.

2 If it decides that it has no jurisdiction, it shall assign the case immediately to the authority that it regards as having jurisdiction.

3 If it is uncertain as to whether it has jurisdiction, it shall consult the authority that it believes may have jurisdiction.

4 If no agreement is reached after consultation, the authority originally involved shall refer the question of jurisdiction to the appellate authority.

Art. 445 C. Precautionary measures

C. Precautionary measures

1 The adult protection authority shall at the request of a person participating in the proceedings or ex officio take all the precautionary measures required for the duration of the proceedings. It may in particular order an adult protection measure as a precautionary measure.

2 In cases of particular urgency, it may take precautionary measures immediately without hearing the persons participating in the proceedings. At the same time, it shall give these persons the opportunity to express their views, after which it shall review its decision.

3 An appeal against precautionary measures may be filed within ten days of notice thereof being given.

Art. 446 D. Procedural principles

D. Procedural principles

1 The adult protection authority investigates the circumstances of the case ex officio.

2 It shall conduct the required enquiries and gather the required evidence. It may instruct a suitable person or agency to carry out enquiries. If necessary, it shall commission an opinion from an expert.

3 It is not limited by the requests made by the persons participating in the proceedings.

4 It shall apply the law ex officio.

Art. 447 E. Hearing

E. Hearing

1 The client shall be heard in person unless to do so appears inappropriate.

2 In a case involving care-related hospitalisation, the adult protection authority shall normally hear the client normally as a panel.

Art. 448 F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance

F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance

1 The persons participating in the proceedings and third parties are obliged to cooperate in the enquiries into the circumstances. The adult protection authority shall make the arrangements required to safeguard legitimate interests. If necessary, it shall order the enforcement of the duty to cooperate.

2 Doctors, dentists, pharmacists, midwives and birth assistants, chiropractors and psychologists and their auxiliary personnel are only obliged to cooperate if the person entitled to confidentiality has authorised them to do so or if a superior authority or the supervisory authority has relieved them of the obligation of professional confidentiality at their own request or at the request of the adult protection authority.1

3 Members of the clergy, lawyers, defence agents, mediators and former welfare deputies appointed in the case are not subject to the obligation to cooperate.

4 Administrative authorities and courts shall hand over the required files, draw up reports and provide information unless legitimate interests require otherwise.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Child Protection), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 2947; BBl 2015 3431).

Art. 449 G. Assessment in an institution

G. Assessment in an institution

1 If a psychiatric assessment is essential and cannot be carried out on an out-patient basis, the adult protection authority shall have the client admitted to a suitable institution for assessment.

2 The provisions on the procedure for care-related hospitalisation apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 449a H. Appointment of a representative

H. Appointment of a representative

If necessary, the adult protection authority shall order that the client be represented and appoint a person experienced in care-related and legal matters as deputy.

Art. 449b I. Inspection of files

I. Inspection of files

1 The persons participating in the proceedings have the right to inspect the case files, unless legitimate interests require otherwise.

2 If a person participating in the proceedings is refused access to any case files, the information therein may only be used in the proceedings if the authority discloses the content relevant to the case verbally or in writing to the person concerned.

Art. 449c J. Notification duty

J. Notification duty

The adult protection authority shall notify the civil register office if:

1.
it makes a person subject to a general deputyship due to permanent loss of the capacity of judgement;
2.
an advance care directive become effective for a person permanently lacking capacity of judgement.

  Sub-section Two: Before the Appellate Authority

Art. 450 A. Object and right of appeal

A. Object and right of appeal

1 Decisions of the adult protection authority are subject to a right of appeal to the competent court.

2 The following persons have a right of appeal:

1.
persons participating in the proceedings;
2.
persons closely associated with the client;
3.
persons with a legitimate interest in the contested decision being reversed or amended.

3 The appeal must be filed with the court in writing and with a statement of the grounds.

Art. 450a B. Grounds of appeal

B. Grounds of appeal

1 The appeal may challenge:

1.
an infringement of the law;
2.
an incorrect or incomplete finding of legally relevant fact;
3.
an inappropriate decision.

2 An appeal is also competent on the grounds of denial of justice or unjustified delay.

Art. 450b C. Deadline for filing the appeal

C. Deadline for filing the appeal

1 The appeal must be filed within thirty days of notification of the decision. This deadline also applies to persons entitled to appeal who are not required to be notified of the decision.

2 In the case of a decision concerning care-related accommodation, the appeal must be filed within ten days of notification of the decision.

3 An appeal on the grounds of denial of justice or unjustified delay may be filed at any time.

Art. 450c D. Suspensive effect

D. Suspensive effect

An appeal has suspensive effect unless the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority rules otherwise.

Art. 450d E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration

E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration

1 The judicial appellate authority shall give the adult protection authority the opportunity to express its position.

2 Instead of submitting its views, the adult protection authority may reconsider its decision.

Art. 450e F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation

F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation

1 A statement of grounds is not required for an appeal against a decision relating to care-related hospitalisation.

2 The appeal does not have suspensive effect unless the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority rules otherwise.

3 In cases involving mental disorders, the decision must be based on the opinion of an expert.

4 The judicial appellate authority shall normally hear the client as a panel of judges. If necessary, it shall order that the client be represented and appoint a person experienced in care-related and legal matters as deputy.

5 Normally, it decides within five working days of the appeal being filed.


  Sub-Section Three: Joint Provision

Art. 450f

In addition, the provisions of the Civil Procedure Ordinance apply mutatis mutandis, unless the cantons provide otherwise.


  Sub-Section Four: Enforcement

Art. 450g

1 The adult protection authority shall enforce decisions on request or ex officio.

2 If the adult protection authority or the judicial appellate authority in the decision has already ordered compulsory enforcement measures, these may be enforced directly.

3 The person responsible for enforcement may enlist the help of the police if necessary. Normally a warning must be given before direct compulsory measures are applied.


  Section Three: Relationship with Third parties and Duty of Cooperation

Art. 451 A. Duty of confidentiality and information

A. Duty of confidentiality and information

1 The adult protection authority is subject to a duty of confidentiality in the absence of overriding interests.

2 Any person who shows a credible interest may request the adult protection authority to provide information on the existence and the effects of an adult protection measure.

Art. 452 B. Effect of the measures on third parties

B. Effect of the measures on third parties

1 An adult protection measure may be cited in opposition to third parties even if they are acting in good faith.

2 If the deputyship limits the capacity of the client to act, debtors must be notified that contractual performance only relieves them of their obligations payment if it is made to the deputy. Prior to notice being given, the deputyship may not be cited in opposition to debtors acting in good faith.

3 If a person subject to an adult protection measure induces other persons to accept his or her capacity to act in error, he or she is liable to them for any damage caused thereby.

Art. 453 C. Duty of cooperation

C. Duty of cooperation

1 If there is a serious risk that a person in need will endanger himself or herself or commit a felony or misdemeanour that seriously damages another person physically or mentally or causes them material loss, the adult protection authority shall cooperate with the agencies concerned and the police.

2 In such cases, persons subject to official or professional confidentiality are entitled to notify the adult protection authority.


  Section Four: Accountability

Art. 454 A. Principle

A. Principle

1 Any person who is injured by an unlawful act or omission related to official adult protection measures has the right to damages and, if justified by the seriousness of the injury, to satisfaction.

2 The same right applies if the adult protection authority or the supervisory authority behaves unlawfully in relation to other adult protection matters.

3 The canton is liable; the person suffering damage has no right to damages against the person who caused the damage.

4 The canton's right of recourse against the person that caused the damage is governed by the cantonal law.

Art. 455 B. Prescription

B. Prescription

1 The right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on the law of tort.2

2 If the person who caused the damage committed a criminal offence through his or her conduct, the right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes at the earliest when the right to prosecute the offence prescribes. If the right to prosecute is no longer liable to prescription because a first instance criminal judgment has been issued, the right to claim damages or satisfaction prescribes at the earliest three years after notice of the judgment is given.3

3 If the injury is related to the ordering or conduct of a long-term measure, the prescriptive period for a claim against the canton does not begin before the long-term measure ends or is continued by another canton.


1 SR 220
2 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).
3 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 456 C. Liability under agency law C. Liability under agency law

C. Liability under agency law

The liability of a person entrusted with another's care as well as that of a spouse or registered partner of a person lacking capacity of judgement or of a representative in the case of medical measures, insofar as that person is not a welfare deputy is governed by the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 on agency.


1 SR 220


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Amended by No I 3 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).3 Amendment of Title Five in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). See also Art. 8–8b of the Final Title below.4 Amended of Title Six in accordance with No I 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). See also Art. 9–11a of the Final Title below.5 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).6 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).7 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).8 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).9 Originally Chapter Three.10 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).11 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).12 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).13 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1). Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).14 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978(AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).15 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).16 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

  Part Three: Law of Succession

  Division One: Heirs

  Title Thirteen: Statutory Heirs

Art. 457 A. Related heirs / I. Issue

A. Related1 heirs

I. Issue

1 The nearest heirs of a deceased person are his or her issue.

2 Children inherit in equal parts.

3 Predeceased children are replaced by their own issue in all degrees per stirpes.


1 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 458 A. Related heirs / II. Parental line

II. Parental line

1 Where the deceased is not survived by any issue, the estate passes to the parental line.

2 The father and mother each inherit one-half of the estate.

3 A predeceased parent is replaced by his or her issue in all degrees per stirpes.

4 Where there are no issue on one side, the entire estate passes to the heirs on the other.

Art. 459 A. Related heirs / III. Grandparental line

III. Grandparental line

1 Where the deceased is survived by neither issue nor heirs in the parental line, the estate passes to the line of the grandparents.

2 Where the grandparents of the paternal and maternal lines survive the deceased, they inherit in equal parts on both sides.

3 A predeceased grandparent is replaced by his or her issue in all degrees per stirpes.

4 If a grandparent on the paternal or maternal side has predeceased without issue, that entire half of the estate is inherited by the heirs on that side.

5 If there are no heirs in either the paternal or the maternal side, the entire estate passes to the heirs in the other side.

Art. 4601A. Related heirs / IV. Scope of succession rights

IV. Scope of succession rights

The succession rights of relatives end with the line of the grandparents.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4611

1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, with effect from 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 4621B. Surviving spouses and registered partners

B. Surviving spouses and registered partners

Surviving spouses and registered partners receive:

1.
one-half of the estate, where they are obliged to share with the deceased’s issue;
2.
three-quarters of the estate, where they are obliged to share with heirs in the parental line;
3.
the entire estate, where no heirs exist in the parental line either.

1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4634641C...

C...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 4651

1 Repealed by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, with effect from 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). However, see Art. 12a Final Title below.

Art. 4661D. State authority

D. State authority

Where the deceased leaves no heirs, his or her estate passes to the canton in which he or she was last resident or to the commune designated by the law of that canton.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).


  Title Fourteen: Testamentary Dispositions

  Section One: Testamentary Capacity

Art. 467 A. Wills

A. Wills

Any person who has the capacity of judgement and is at least 18 years old has the right to draw up a will disposing of his or her property in accordance with the limits and forms prescribed by law.

Art. 4681B. Contract of succession

B. Contract of succession

1 Any person who is capable of judgement and has reached the age of 18 may conclude a contract of succession as a testator.

2 Persons subject to a deputyship that covers the conclusion of a contract of succession require the consent of their legal representative.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 469 C. Voidable dispositions

C. Voidable dispositions

1 Dispositions made in error or under the influence of malicious deception, threats or coercion are void.

2 However, they become valid if not revoked by the testator within one year of his or her discovering the error or deception or of his or her release from the threat or coercion.

3 If a disposition contains an obvious error with regard to persons or objects and the testator’s true intention may be established with certainty, the disposition shall be rectified accordingly.


  Section Two: Testamentary Freedom

Art. 470 A. Disposable part / I. Scope of testamentary powers

A. Disposable part

I. Scope of testamentary powers

1 A person who is survived by issue, parents, a spouse or a registered partner may make a testamentary disposition of that part of his or her property which exceeds the statutory entitlement of the survivor or survivors.1

2 A person who is not survived by any such heirs may dispose of his or her entire property by testamentary disposition.


1 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4711A. Disposable part / II. Statutory entitlement

II. Statutory entitlement

The statutory entitlement is:

1.
for any issue, three-quarters of their statutory succession rights;
2.
for each parent, one-half;
3.2
for the surviving spouse or registered partner, one-half.

1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Amended by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 4721A. Disposable part / III. ...

III. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 473 A. Disposable part / IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse

IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse

1 By a testamentary disposition, the testator may grant the surviving spouse a usufruct of the entire part of the estate passing to their common issue.1

2 This usufruct shall replace the statutory succession right due to the spouse where the common issue are co-heirs with the spouse. In addition to this usufruct, the disposable part is one-quarter of the estate.2

3 If the surviving spouse remarries, the usufruct ceases to apply to that part of the estate which, on succession, could not have been encumbered by a usufruct under the provisions ordinarily governing the statutory entitlements of the deceased’s issue.3


1 Amended by No I of the Swiss Civil Code of 5 Oct. 2001, in force since 1 March 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
2 Amended by No I of the Swiss Civil Code of 5 Oct. 2001, in force since 1 March 2002 (AS 2002 269; BBl 2001 1121 2011 2111).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 474 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 1. Deduction of debts

V. Calculation of the disposable part

1. Deduction of debts

1 The disposable part is calculated on the basis of the value of the deceased’s assets at the time of his or her death.

2 In calculating this value, the deceased’s debts, the funeral expenses, the costs of sealing and of drawing up the inventory and the maintenance claims of members of the household for one month are deducted from value of the estate.

Art. 475 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 2. Inter vivos gifts

2. Inter vivos gifts

Inter vivos gifts are added to the estate insofar as they are subject to an action in abatement.

Art. 476 A. Disposable part / V. Calculation of the disposable part / 3. Insurance claims

3. Insurance claims

Where a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the deceased was established in favour of a third party by an inter vivos or testamentary disposition or mortis causa or was transferred by the deceased during his or her lifetime to a third party without valuable consideration, the redemption value of such insurance claim at the time of death is added to the estate.

Art. 477 B. Disinheritance / I. Grounds

B. Disinheritance

I. Grounds

The testator has the power to deprive an heir of his or her statutory entitlement by means of a testamentary disposition:

1.1
if the heir has committed a serious crime against the testator or a person close to him or her;
2.
if the heir has seriously breached his or her duties under family law towards the testator or the latter’s dependants.

1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 478 B. Disinheritance / II. Effect

II. Effect

1 The disinherited person may neither participate in the estate nor bring an action in abatement.

2 Unless disposed of otherwise by the testator, the disinherited person’s portion passes to the testator’s statutory heirs as if the disinherited person had predeceased.

3 The disinherited person’s issue retain their statutory entitlements as if he or she had predeceased.

Art. 479 B. Disinheritance / III. Burden of proof

III. Burden of proof

1 A disinheritance is valid only if the testator indicates the reason for the disinheritance in his or her testamentary disposition.

2 If the disinherited person challenges the disinheritance on the grounds that the reason therefor is incorrect, any heir or legatee wishing to benefit from the disinheritance must prove that the reason is correct.

3 Where no such proof may be adduced or no reason for the disinheritance is indicated, the disposition shall be upheld insofar as it does not deprive the disinherited person of his or her statutory entitlement unless it was made by the testator in obvious error regarding the reason for the disinheritance.

Art. 480 B. Disinheritance / IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person

IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person

1 If unpaid debt certificates exist in respect of any of the issue of the testator, the latter may deprive the said issue of one-half of his or her statutory entitlement providing he or she leaves that half to the existing or subsequently born children of the said issue.

2 At the disinherited person’s request, the disinheritance is void if, on commencement of the succession process, the unpaid debt certificates no longer exist against him or her or if their total amount does not exceed one-quarter of his or her share of the estate.


  Section Three: Types of Disposition

Art. 481 A. In general

A. In general

1 Within the limits of his or her right to dispose of his or her property, the testator may dispose of it in part or in full by will or by contract of succession.

2 Any property in respect of which no testamentary disposition has been made passes to the statutory heirs.

Art. 482 B. Burdens and conditions

B. Burdens and conditions

1 The testator may attach burdens or conditions to the disposition, the fulfilment of which may be requested by any interested party once the disposition becomes effective.

2 Immoral or unlawful burdens or conditions render the disposition null and void.

3 Where they are merely onerous to third parties or meaningless, they are deemed not to exist.

4 If an animal receives a bequest by testamentary disposition, this disposition is deemed to be a burden by which the animal must be cared for according to its needs.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 483 C. Naming of heirs

C. Naming of heirs

1 The testator may name one or more heirs to the entire estate or to a fraction thereof.

2 Any disposition by which a beneficiary should receive all or a specified fraction of the deceased’s estate is deemed to constitute the naming of an heir.

Art. 484 D. Legacy / I. Nature

D. Legacy

I. Nature

1 The testator may bequeath a legacy to a beneficiary without naming that person as an heir.

2 He or she may bequeath a specific legacy or the usufruct of the whole or a part of the estate, or he or she may instruct the heirs or other legatees to make payments to that person from the value of the estate or to release that person from obligations.

3 If the testator bequeaths a specific legacy but the object is not part of the estate and no other intention is evident from the disposition, no obligation is placed on the obligor of the legacy.

Art. 485 D. Legacy / II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy

II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy

1 The object must be delivered to the beneficiary in the same condition that it was in at the commencement of the succession process, including damage and growth and with or without encumbrance.

2 With regard to expenditure on and deterioration of the legacy since the commencement of the succession process, the obligor of the legacy has the same rights and duties as an agent without authority.

Art. 486 D. Legacy / III. Relationship to the estate

III. Relationship to the estate

1 Where the legacies exceed the value of the estate or of the bequest to the obligor or of the disposable part, application may be made to have them abated proportionately.

2 If the obligors do not survive the testator, are unworthy to inherit or disclaim their inheritance, the legacies remain nonetheless effective.

3 If the testator has bequeathed a legacy to a statutory or named heir, the latter has the right to claim the legacy even if he or she disclaims his or her inheritance.

Art. 487 E. Substitution

E. Substitution

In his or her disposition, the testator may designate one or more persons to whom the estate or legacy shall pass in the event that the initial heir or legatee is predeceased or disclaims it.

Art. 488 F. Remaindermen / I. Designation of a remainderman

F. Remaindermen

I. Designation of a remainderman

1 The testator is entitled in his or her dispositions to require the named heir, as provisional heir, to deliver the estate to a third party, as remainderman.

2 No such obligation may be imposed on the remainderman.

3 The same provisions apply to legacies.

Art. 489 F. Remaindermen / II. Time of delivery

II. Time of delivery

1 Except where the disposition stipulates otherwise, the time of delivery is deemed to be the death of the provisional heir.

2 Where a different time is specified and that time has not yet occurred on the death of the provisional heir, the inheritance passes to his or her heirs against security.

3 If for whatever reason that time may no longer occur, the inheritance passes unreservedly to the heirs of the provisional heir.

Art. 490 F. Remaindermen / III. Security

III. Security

1 In all cases in which remaindermen are designated, the competent authority must order an inventory to be drawn up.

2 Delivery of the inheritance to the provisional heir is made only against security, except where the testator has expressly released him or her from such an obligation; in the case of immovable property, security may be provided by entering the delivery obligation under priority notice in the land register.

3 If the provisional heir is unable to provide security or jeopardises the remainderman’s expectancy, the inheritance must be placed under probate administration.

Art. 491 F. Remaindermen / IV. Legal status / 1. Of the provisional heir

IV. Legal status

1. Of the provisional heir

1 A provisional heir acquires the inheritance in the same manner as any named heir.

2 He or she becomes the owner of the inheritance with an obligation to deliver it.

Art. 492 F. Remaindermen / IV. Legal status / 2. Of the remainderman

2. Of the remainderman

1 The remainderman acquires the testator’s bequest if he or she is alive at the stipulated delivery time.

2 If he or she dies before then, the inheritance passes to the provisional heir unless the testator has ordered otherwise.

3 If the provisional heir dies before the testator or is unworthy of inheritance or disclaims the inheritance, it passes to the remainderman.

Art. 492a1F. Remaindermen / V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement

V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement

1 If any issue permanently lacks capacity of judgement and if he or she is not survived by issue or a spouse, the testator may designate a remainderman in respect of the residue.

2 The designation of the remainderman ceases to apply by law if the issue, contrary to expectation, becomes capable of judgement.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 493 G. Foundations

G. Foundations

1 The testator is entitled to bequeath all or part of the disposable portion of his or her property to a foundation for any purpose of his or her choosing.

2 However, the foundation is valid only if it conforms to the legal requirements.

Art. 494 H. Contracts of succession / I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies

H. Contracts of succession

I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies

1 The testator may, by contract of succession, undertake to another person to bequeath his or her estate or a legacy to that person or a third party.

2 He or she is free to dispose of his or her property as he or she sees fit.

3 However, testamentary dispositions or gifts that are incompatible with obligations entered into under the contract of succession are subject to challenge.

Art. 495 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 1. Significance

II. Renunciation of inheritance

1. Significance

1 The testator may conclude an inheritance renunciation contract with an heir with or without valuable consideration.

2 The renouncing party is not deemed to be an heir on succession.

3 Unless the contract provides otherwise, the renunciation of an inheritance also applies to the issue of the renouncing party.

Art. 496 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 2. Void renunciation

2. Void renunciation

1 Where certain persons are named in the renunciation contact as heirs in lieu of the renouncing party, the renunciation is void if such persons fail to acquire the inheritance for whatever reason.

2 Where an inheritance is renounced in favour of co-heirs, the renunciation is presumed to be effective only in respect of the heirs of the line descending from their nearest common ascendant and has no effect with regard to more distant heirs.

Art. 497 H. Contracts of succession / II. Renunciation of inheritance / 3. Rights of the creditors of the estate

3. Rights of the creditors of the estate

If the deceased was insolvent on commencement of the succession process and his or her creditors are not satisfied by the heirs, the renouncing party and his or her heirs may be held liable to the extent that they received valuable consideration for the renounced inheritance within the five years prior to the death of the deceased and were still enriched by such consideration on succession.


  Section Four: Formal Requirements of Testamentary Dispositions

Art. 498 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 1. In general

A. Wills

I. Drawing up a will

1. In general

The testator may make his or her will in the form of a public deed or in holographic or oral form.

Art. 499 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / a. Formal requirements

2. By public deed

a. Formal requirements

A will by public deed is made in the presence of two witnesses by a public official, notary public or other person authorised under cantonal law to conduct such business.

Art. 500 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / b. Role of the public official

b. Role of the public official

1 The testator must inform the official of his or her wishes, whereupon the official draws up the deed or causes it to be drawn up and gives it to the testator to read.

2 The deed must be signed by the testator.

3 The official must date and sign the deed.

Art. 501 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / c. Role of the witnesses

c. Role of the witnesses

1 As soon as the public deed has been signed and dated, the testator must declare to the two witnesses, in the presence of the official, that he or she has read the document and that it contains his or her will.

2 The witnesses must sign the deed and in so doing confirm that the testator made said declaration in their presence and that, in their judgment, in so doing he or she was in full possession of testamentary capacity.

3 It is not necessary for the witnesses to be informed of the content of the deed.

Art. 502 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it

d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it

1 If the testator does not read and sign the deed, the official must read it out in the presence of the two witnesses and the testator, who must then declare that the deed contains his or her will.

2 In this case the witnesses must not only attest to the testator’s declaration and their judgment concerning his or her testamentary capacity but must also confirm, by appending their signatures, that the deed was read out to the testator by the official in their presence.

Art. 503 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / e. Persons involved

e. Persons involved

1 Persons who lack capacity to act, have been deprived of their civil rights due to a criminal conviction1 or are unable to read or write, lineal relatives2 or siblings of the testator or their spouses and the testator’s spouse are not permitted to act as authenticating officials or witnesses when making a will in the form of a public deed.

2 No disposition may be made in the will in favour of any authenticating officer or witness or his or her lineal relatives, siblings or spouse.


1 The suspension of civil rights and privileges due to criminal conviction has been abolished (see AS 1971 777; BBl 1965 I 561 and AS 1974 55; BBl 1974 I 1457).
2 Term amended by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).

Art. 504 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 2. By public deed / f. Safekeeping of wills

f. Safekeeping of wills

The cantons must ensure that public officials entrusted with wills either keep the original or a copy of such deeds themselves or else forward them to an authority for safekeeping.

Art. 505 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 3. Holographic will

3. Holographic will

1 A holographic will must be written in the testator’s own hand from start to finish, include an indication of the day, month and year on which it is drawn up, and be signed by the testator.1

2 The cantons must ensure that such wills can be forwarded, whether open or sealed, to an authority for safekeeping.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 506 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / a. Dispositions

4. Oral will

a. Dispositions

1 Where the testator is prevented from using any other form of will by extraordinary circumstances such as the imminent risk of death, breakdown in communications, epidemic or war, he or she is entitled to make a will in oral form.

2 To do so, he or she must declare his or her will in the presence of two witnesses and instruct them to have it drawn up as required in the form of a deed.

3 The witnesses are subject to the same disqualification provisions as apply to wills made in the form of public deeds.

Art. 507 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / b. Conversion into deed

b. Conversion into deed

1 The oral will, including the place, day, month and year, must be written down immediately by one of the witnesses, then signed by both and lodged without delay with a judicial authority together with a declaration that the testator was in full possession of his or her testamentary capacity and that he or she informed them of his or her will in the special circumstances prevailing at that time.

2 The two witnesses may instead have the will recorded by a judicial authority along with the same declaration.

3 If the testator makes his or her oral will while on military service, an officer with the rank of captain or higher may take the place of the judicial authority.

Art. 508 A. Wills / I. Drawing up a will / 4. Oral will / c. Loss of validity

c. Loss of validity

If the testator subsequently has the opportunity to draw up his or her will in another form, the oral will ceases to be valid 14 days after such opportunity arises.

Art. 509 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 1. Revocation

II. Revocation and destruction

1. Revocation

1 The testator may revoke his or her will at any time in one of the forms envisaged for drawing it up.

2 Such revocation may apply to all or part of the will.

Art. 510 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 2. Destruction

2. Destruction

1 The testator may revoke his or her will by destroying the deed.

2 If the deed is destroyed by others wilfully or by accident, the will likewise becomes void inasmuch as its content may no longer be ascertained precisely and completely; claims for damages are reserved.

Art. 511 A. Wills / II. Revocation and destruction / 3. Subsequent wills

3. Subsequent wills

1 If the testator makes a will without expressly revoking a previous will, the later will supersedes the earlier unless it is manifestly no more than a codicil thereto.

2 Likewise, a bequest of a specific object is revoked if the testator subsequently makes a new disposition of the same object that is incompatible with the previous disposition.

Art. 512 B. Contracts of succession / I. Execution

B. Contracts of succession

I. Execution

1 In order to be valid, a contract of succession must meet the same formal requirements as a will executed as a public deed.

2 The contracting parties must simultaneously declare their intentions to the public official and sign the deed before him or her and two witnesses.

Art. 513 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 1. Inter vivos / a. By contract and by will

II. Revocation

1. Inter vivos

a. By contract and by will

1 The contract of succession may be revoked at any time by written agreement between the parties.

2 The testator may unilaterally revoke the naming of an heir or a legacy provided the heir or legatee is guilty of conduct constituting grounds for disinheritance after the contract was concluded.

3 The unilateral revocation must be done in one of the forms prescribed for drawing up wills.

Art. 514 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 1. Inter vivos / b. By withdrawal from the contract

b. By withdrawal from the contract

A person entitled to benefits inter vivos under a contract of succession may declare his or her withdrawal from the contract in accordance with the provisions of the Code of Obligations1 in the event of failure to perform such benefits or to furnish security for them.


1 SR 220

Art. 515 B. Contracts of succession / II. Revocation / 2. Predeceased heir

2. Predeceased heir

1 Where the heir or legatee does not survive the testator, the contract becomes void.

2 Where at the time of the heir’s death the testator has been enriched as a result of the contract of succession, unless otherwise provided, the heirs of the deceased may demand restitution of the amount involved.

Art. 516 C. Restriction of testamentary freedom

C. Restriction of testamentary freedom

If a testator becomes subject to a restriction of testamentary freedom after he or she has made a testamentary disposition, the disposition is not annulled but is subject to action in abatement.


  Section Five: Executors

Art. 517 A. Appointment of executors

A. Appointment of executors

1 In the will, the testator may appoint one or more persons with capacity to act to execute the will.

2 The probate authority shall notify these persons of the appointment ex officio and they must state whether they accept it within 14 days of such notification, silence being deemed tacit acceptance.

3 They are entitled to adequate recompense for their activities.

Art. 518 B. Function of an executor

B. Function of an executor

1 Unless otherwise provided by the testator, the executors have the same rights and duties as an official estate administrator.

2 The executors’ function is to represent the testator’s wishes and, in particular, to administer the estate, settle debts left by the testator, distribute legacies and divide the estate in accordance with the testator’s instructions or as required by law.

3 Where more than one executor has been appointed, these powers are exercised jointly, unless the testator has provided otherwise.


  Section Six: Declaration of Invalidity and Abatement of Dispositions

Art. 519 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality

A. Action for declaration of invalidity

I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality

1 Where contested, a testamentary disposition may be declared invalid:

1.
if it was made by the testator at a time when he or she lacked testamentary capacity;
2.
if it is the product of a lack of free will;
3.
if its content or a condition attached to it is immoral or unlawful.

2 An action of declaration of invalidity may be brought by any interested heir or legatee.

Art. 520 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / II. On grounds of formal defect / 1. In general

II. On grounds of formal defect

1. In general1

1 If the testamentary disposition is formally defective, it is declared invalid on being contested before a court.

2 If the formal defect consists in the certain persons being party to the execution of the disposition who or whose family members are beneficiaries under the testamentary disposition, only the clauses relating to those beneficiaries shall be declared invalid.

3 The right of action is governed by the same provisions as apply in the event of a lack of testamentary capacity.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 520a1A. Action for declaration of invalidity / II. On grounds of formal defect / 2. In holographic wills

2. In holographic wills

If the formal defect in a holographic will consists in the day, month or year not being indicated correctly or at all, the will may be declared invalid only if the precise date cannot be ascertained in some other manner and is necessary in order to determine the testator’s testamentary capacity, the chronological order of multiple wills or any other issue affecting the validity of the will.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 23 June 1995, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 4882; BBl 1994 III 516, V 607).

Art. 521 A. Action for declaration of invalidity / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

1 The right to bring an action of declaration of invalidity prescribes one year after the contesting party learned of the will and the ground for nullity and in any event a maximum of ten years after the commencement of probate proceedings.

2 In all cases, the right to bring an action on grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, immorality or unlawfulness against a beneficiary acting in bad faith does not prescribe until 30 years have elapsed.

3 Invalidity may be invoked as a defence at any time.

Art. 522 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 1. In general

B. Action in abatement

I. Requirements

1. In general

1 Where the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom, those heirs who do not receive the full value of their statutory entitlement may sue to have the disposition abated to the permitted amount.

2 Clauses contained in testamentary dispositions relating to the entitlements of the statutory heirs are deemed merely to be instructions for dividing the estate unless it is evident from the disposition that the testator intended otherwise.

Art. 523 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement

2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement

Where a testamentary disposition contains legacies in favour of several heirs with a statutory entitlement and the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom, such legacies shall be abated among the co-heirs in proportion to the amounts by which they exceed each co-heir’s statutory entitlement.

Art. 524 B. Action in abatement / I. Requirements / 3. Rights of creditors

3. Rights of creditors

1 Where the testator has exceeded his or her testamentary freedom to the detriment of an heir and the latter fails to bring a action in abatement despite being instructed to do so by the bankruptcy administrators or by creditors holding unpaid debt certificates on succession, the administrators or creditors themselves may bring an action in abatement for the amount necessary to cover their claims within the same time limit that applies to the heir.

2 The same right applies in the case of a disinheritance not contested by the person disinherited.

Art. 525 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 1. Of abatement in general

II. Effect

1. Of abatement in general

1 Abatement is applied in equal proportion in respect of all named heirs and legatees unless it is evident from the disposition that the testator intended otherwise.

2 Where the abatement applies to a legacy whose beneficiary is also the obligor of other legacies, subject to the same proviso such beneficiary may request that those other legacies be abated proportionately.

Art. 526 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 2. On specific legacies

2. On specific legacies

Where a specific legacy that cannot be divided without loss of value is to be abated, the legatee may either claim it and pay the balance or claim the disposable amount in lieu of the object.

Art. 527 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 3. On dispositions inter vivos / a. Cases

3. On dispositions inter vivos

a. Cases

The following are subject to abatement in the same manner as testamentary dispositions:

1.
advances against a person’s share of an inheritance made in the form of wedding gifts, settlements or assignments of assets, to the extent these are not subject to hotchpot;
2.
compensation payments in settlement of future rights of inheritance;
3.
gifts that were freely revocable by the deceased or made in the five years prior to his or her death, with the exception of customary occasional gifts;
4.
assets alienated by the deceased with the obvious intention of circumventing the limitations on his or her testamentary freedom.
Art. 528 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 3. On dispositions inter vivos / b. Restitution

b. Restitution

1 A person acting in good faith has a duty of restitution only to the extent that he or she is still enriched by such transactions with the deceased at the time of succession.

2 Where benefits conferred under a contract of succession are subject to abatement, the beneficiary is entitled to reclaim a proportionate amount of the counter-performance made to the testator.

Art. 529 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 4. On assurance claims

4. On assurance claims

Where a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the deceased was established in favour of a third party by a disposition inter vivos or by a testamentary disposition or was transferred by the deceased during his or her lifetime to a third party without valuable consideration, such claim is subject to abatement at its redemption value.

Art. 530 B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 5. On usufruct and annuities

5. On usufruct and annuities

If the testator has encumbered the estate with rights of usufruct and annuities such that their capitalised value over their probable duration exceeds the disposable part of the estate, the heirs are entitled either to seek proportionate abatement of such rights or to redeem them by surrendering the disposable part of the estate to the beneficiaries.

Art. 5311B. Action in abatement / II. Effect / 6. On naming of remaindermen

6. On naming of remaindermen

The naming of a remainderman in respect of an heir entitled to a statutory entitlement is invalid as to that part of the estate; the provision on issue who are incapable of judgement is reserved.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 532 B. Action in abatement / III. Order of abatement

III. Order of abatement

Abatement applies first to testamentary dispositions and thereafter to dispositions inter vivos in reverse chronological order until the statutory entitlement has been reconstituted.

Art. 533 B. Action in abatement / IV. Prescription

IV. Prescription

1 A claim in abatement prescribes one year after the date on which the heirs learned of the infringement of their rights and in any event after ten years have elapsed since the succession, in the case of testamentary disposition, or since the testator’s death, in the case of other dispositions.

2 If the declaration of the invalidity of a later disposition revives an earlier one, the prescriptive periods begin on the date on which invalidity was declared.

3 The entitlement to abatement may be invoked as a defence at any time.


  Section Seven: Claims under Contracts of Succession

Art. 534 A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers

A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers

1 If the testator transfers his or her property during his or her lifetime to the contractual heir, the latter may arrange for a public inventory to be taken.

2 Where the testator has not transferred all his or her property or has acquired property since the transfer, except where otherwise provided the contract applies only to the property transferred.

3 Where such transfer takes place during the testator’s lifetime, except where otherwise provided all rights and obligations arising from the contract pass to the heirs of the named heir.

Art. 535 B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance / I. Abatement

B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance

I. Abatement

1 If the testator during his or her lifetime conferred benefits on a renouncing heir that exceed that heir’s share of the estate, his or her co-heirs may request abatement.

2 However, such benefits are subject to abatement only to the extent they exceed the statutory entitlement of the renouncing heir.

3 Allowance is made for them according to the provisions governing hotchpot.

Art. 536 B. Hotchpot in the case of renunciation of inheritance / II. Reimbursement

II. Reimbursement

If as a result of abatement a renouncing heir is obliged to reimburse the estate, he or she has the choice of either taking the reimbursement upon himself or of placing the entire benefit into hotchpot and participating in the division as if he or she had never renounced.


  Division Two: Succession

  Title Fifteen: Commencement of the Succession Process

Art. 537 A. Requirements for the deceased

A. Requirements for the deceased

1 Succession commences on the death of the deceased.

2 Insofar as dispositions and divisions made during deceased's lifetime are relevant under law of succession, they are taken into account according to the condition of the estate as at the time of his or her death.

Art. 538 B. Place where succession commences

B. Place where succession commences1

1 The succession process commences in respect of the entire estate at the deceased’s last domicile.

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 539 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 1. Legal capacity

C. Requirements for the heirs

I. Capacity

1. Legal capacity

1 Every person is capable of being an heir and acquiring property by testamentary disposition unless by law he or she is deemed incapable of inheritance.

2 Bequests with a designated purpose to groups of persons not constituting a legal entity are acquired by all such persons individually with an obligation to use them as prescribed or, where this is not practical, give rise to a trust.

Art. 540 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 2. Unworthiness to inherit / a. Grounds

2. Unworthiness to inherit

a. Grounds

1 A person is unworthy of inheriting or acquiring anything by a testamentary disposition if:

1.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully caused or attempted to cause the death of the person now deceased;
2.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully rendered the person now deceased permanently incapable of making a testamentary disposition;
3.
by malice, coercion or threat he or she induced the person now deceased to make or revoke a testamentary disposition or prevented him or her from doing so;
4.
he or she wilfully and unlawfully eliminated or invalidated a testamentary disposition in such a manner as to prevent the person now deceased from drawing up a new one.

2 Unworthiness to inherit does not apply if the person now deceased has forgiven the person concerned.

Art. 541 C. Requirements for the heirs / I. Capacity / 2. Unworthiness to inherit / b. Effect on issue

b. Effect on issue

1 Unworthiness to inherit applies only to the person concerned.

2 His or her issue inherit from the deceased as if the person unworthy to inherit were predeceased.

Art. 542 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 1. As heir

II. Capacity to inherit on succession

1. As heir

1 In order to inherit, an heir must be alive and capable of inheriting at the time of succession.

2 If an heir dies after commencement of succession, his or her rights of inheritance in respect of the estate pass to his or her own heirs.

Art. 543 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 2. As legatee

2. As legatee

1 A legatee surviving the testator and capable of inheriting acquires a claim to the legacy.

2 If he or she dies before the testator, his or her legacy is extinguished in favour of the person who would have been obliged to deliver the legacy to him, unless some other intention is evident from the disposition.

Art. 544 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 3. Unborn child

3. Unborn child

1 A child is capable of inheriting from the moment of conception onwards, providing he or she is subsequently born alive.

1bis If it is required to protect the child's interests, the child protection authority shall establish a deputyship.1

2 If the child is stillborn, it is disregarded for inheritance purposes.2


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 545 C. Requirements for the heirs / II. Capacity to inherit on succession / 4. Remaindermen

4. Remaindermen

1 The testator may bequeath his or her estate or part thereof to a person not yet living when succession commences by designating such person a remainderman.

2 Where no provisional heir is named, the statutory heirs are deemed to be the provisional heirs.

Art. 546 D. Presumption of death / I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead / 1. Devolution against security

D. Presumption of death

I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead

1. Devolution against security

1 Where a person has been declared presumed dead, before his or her heirs or legatees succeed to the estate, they must furnish security for the restitution of the property to those with a prevailing claim or to the missing person himself.

2 Such security shall be furnished for five years in the case of disappearance in life-threatening circumstances and for 15 years in the case of absence without sign of life, but never beyond the date on which the missing person would have become 100 years old.

3 The five-year period runs from the date on which the estate is transferred and the 15-year period from the last sign of life.

Art. 547 D. Presumption of death / I. Inheriting from persons presumed dead / 2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution

2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution

1 If the person who is presumed dead returns or other parties assert prevailing claims to the estate, those put in possession of the estate must return it according to the rules governing possession.

2 Provided they acted in good faith, they are liable to parties with prevailing claims only during the period in which action may be brought for reclamation of the estate.

Art. 548 D. Presumption of death / II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead

II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead

1 If it is impossible to determine whether an heir is alive or dead when succession commences because he or she has disappeared, his or her share of the inheritance is placed under official administration.

2 Those who would succeed to the missing heir’s share if he or she were dead may request the court to declare the heir presumed dead one year after his or her disappearance in life-threatening circumstances or five years after the last sign of life and, once such declaration has been made, may apply for release of their shares of his or her inheritance.

3 Such shares are released according to the provisions governing release to the heirs of persons presumed dead.

Art. 549 D. Presumption of death / III. Correlation of the two cases

III. Correlation of the two cases

1 If the heirs of the person presumed dead are already in possession of his or her property and an inheritance passes to him or her, his or her co-heirs may invoke this fact and request that such inheritance be released to them without need for a second declaration of presumed death.

2 The heirs of the person presumed dead may likewise invoke a declaration of presumed death obtained by the co-heirs.

Art. 550 D. Presumption of death / IV. Procedure ex officio

IV. Procedure ex officio

1 Where the missing person’s property or succession rights have been under official administration for ten years or more, or he or she would have reached the age of 100, at the request of the competent authority the declaration of presumed death is pronounced ex officio.

2 If no rightful heirs come forward during the public notice period, the property of the person presumed dead passes to the state authority with right to succeed or, if he or she was never resident in Switzerland, to the canton of origin.

3 The local authority or canton concerned has the same duty of restitution as those put in possession of the estate towards the person presumed dead and parties with prevailing claims.


  Title Sixteen: Effect of Succession

  Chapter One: Measures to Safeguard Succession

Art. 551 A. In general

A. In general

1 The competent authority must of its own accord take all measures necessary to ensure proper succession.1

2 In the cases envisaged by law, in particular, such measures include sealing the estate, drawing up the inventory, appointing the estate administrators and reading out the wills of the deceased.

3 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).
2 Repealed by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, with effect from 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 552 B. Sealing the estate

B. Sealing the estate

The order to seal the estate is given whenever provided for by cantonal law.

Art. 553 C. Inventory

C. Inventory

1 The order to draw up an inventory is given:

1.
where an heir is under guardianship or is to be made a ward of court;
2.
where an heir is permanently absent and without representation;
3.
at the request of one of the heirs;
4.
where an adult heir is or is to be made subject to a general deputyship.1

2 The inventory is drawn up in accordance with the provisions of cantonal law and normally must be completed within two months of the death of the deceased.

3 Cantonal legislation may require that an inventory be drawn up in other cases.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 554 D. Estate administrators / I. In general

D. Estate administrators

I. In general

1 Estate administrators are appointed:

1.
where such an appointment is in the best interests of an heir who is permanently absent and without representation;
2.
where none of the claimants may adequately establish his or her succession rights or the existence of an heir is uncertain;
3.
where not all heirs are known;
4.
in special cases provided for by law.

2 Where the deceased had named an executor, administration of the estate is entrusted to him or her.

3 Where the deceased was subject to a deputyship that covers asset management, the deputy is responsible for administering the estate unless other instructions apply.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 555 D. Estate administrators / II. In the case of unknown heirs

II. In the case of unknown heirs

1 If the authority is uncertain as to whether the deceased is survived by heirs or whether it is aware of all the heirs, the authority must by appropriate public means call on all persons with succession rights to come forward and claim them within one year.

2 If no such person comes forward during this time and if no heirs are known to the authority, the estate passes to the state authority with right to succeed, subject to any action for recovery of inheritance.

Art. 556 E. Probate proceedings / I. Duty to submit the will

E. Probate proceedings

I. Duty to submit the will

1 If the deceased left a will, this must be submitted to the authority without delay even if it appears to be invalid.

2 The public official by whom the will was recorded or with whom it was deposited or any other person who had custody of the will or found it among the personal effects of the deceased is personally responsible on learning of the testator’s death for ensuring that the will is submitted to the authority.

3 Once the will has been submitted, the authority must, where feasible after hearing all interested parties, either release the estate to the statutory heirs on a provisional basis or appoint estate administrators.

Art. 557 E. Probate proceedings / II. Reading the will

II. Reading the will

1 The testator’s will must be opened and read out by the competent authority within one month of its submission.

2 All heirs known to the authority are summoned to attend the reading.

3 If the testator left more than one will, all are to be submitted to the authority and opened and read out by it.

Art. 558 E. Probate proceedings / III. Notification of interested parties

III. Notification of interested parties

1 At the estate’s expense, all interested parties receive a copy of the provisions of the will as relate to them.

2 Legatees of unknown whereabouts are informed by appropriate public notice.

Art. 559 E. Probate proceedings / IV. Release of the estate

IV. Release of the estate

1 One month after notification of the interested parties, at the request of the named heirs the probate authority issues such persons with a certificate confirming them as heirs, subject to action of declaration of invalidity and for recovery of inheritance, providing their entitlement has not expressly been challenged by the statutory heirs or the legatees of an earlier will.

2 At the same time the estate administrator will be instructed, where applicable, to release the estate into their possession.


  Chapter Two: Vesting of the Estate

Art. 560 A. Vesting / I. Heirs

A. Vesting

I. Heirs

1 On the death of the deceased, the estate in its entirety vests by operation of law in the heirs.

2 Subject to the statutory exceptions, the deceased’s claims, rights of ownership, limited rights in rem and rights of possession automatically pass to the heirs and the debts of the deceased become the personal debts of the heirs.

3 Vesting in the named heirs takes effect retroactively from the date on which the succession process commenced and the statutory heirs must relinquish the estate to them according to the rules governing possession.

Art. 5611A. Vesting / II. ...

II. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 562 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 1. Vesting

III. Legatees

1. Vesting

1 The legatees have a personal claim against the obligors of their legacies or, where no-one is specifically named as such, against the legal or named heirs.

2 Unless otherwise provided by testamentary disposition, the claim becomes due once the obligor has accepted the inheritance or is no longer able to disclaim it.

3 If the heirs fail to fulfil their obligation, they may be sued for release of the bequeathed property or, where the legacy pertains to performance of some action, for damages.

Art. 563 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 2. Object

2. Object

1 Where the bequest to the legatee is a usufruct or annuity or other recurring benefit, unless otherwise stipulated, his or her claim is determined according to the provisions of property law and the Code of Obligations.

2 If the legacy is a life assurance claim maturing on the death of the testator, the legatee is entitled to assert that claim directly.

Art. 564 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 3. Relationship between creditors and legatees

3. Relationship between creditors and legatees

1 The claims of the testator’s creditors precede those of legatees.

2 The claims of the heir’s creditors rank equally with those of the testator’s creditors, provided the heir acquired the inheritance without reservation.

Art. 565 A. Vesting / III. Legatees / 4. Abatement

4. Abatement

1 If, after the legacies have been distributed, the heirs pay debts of the estate that were previously unknown to them, they are entitled to reimbursement from the legatees of an amount corresponding to the proportionate abatement of such legacies that the heirs could have claimed.

2 However, the legatees may be held liable only in the amount by which they are enriched at the time such reimbursement is demanded.

Art. 566 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 1. Right to renounce

B. Disclaimer

I. Declaration

1. Right to renounce

1 The legal and named heirs are entitled to disclaim the inheritance passing to them.

2 There is a presumption of a disclaimer if at the time of his or her death the deceased had been officially declared insolvent or was manifestly insolvent.

Art. 567 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 2. Time limit / a. In general

2. Time limit

a. In general

1 The time limit for a disclaimer is three months.

2 For statutory heirs, this limit begins on the date on which they learned of the death, unless they can show that they did not learn of their succession rights until later, and for named heirs it begins on the date on which they received official notification of the testator’s disposition.

Art. 568 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 2. Time limit / b. In the case of an inventory

b. In the case of an inventory

If an inventory has been drawn up as a precautionary measure, the disclaimer time limit for all heirs begins on the date on which the authority notified them that the inventory was complete.

Art. 569 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 3. Passing of right to disclaim

3. Passing of right to disclaim

1 If an heir dies before disclaiming or accepting an inheritance, the right to disclaim passes to his or her heirs.

2 For such heirs, the disclaimer time limit begins on the date on which they learned that the inheritance passed to the deceased heir and ends no sooner than the date on which the time limit for disclaiming the inheritance from the deceased heir expires.

3 Where such heirs disclaim the inheritance and it passes to other heirs who previously had no succession rights, the disclaimer time limit for the latter begins on the date on which they learned of the disclaimer.

Art. 570 B. Disclaimer / I. Declaration / 4. Form

4. Form

1 An heir must declare his or her disclaimer orally or in writing to the competent authority.

2 It must be unconditional and without reservation.

3 The authority keeps an official record of disclaimers.

Art. 571 B. Disclaimer / II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim

II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim

1 If the heir fails to declare that he or she disclaims the inheritance within the relevant time limit, he or she acquires it without reservation.

2 Where an heir has interfered in the affairs of the estate before expiry of the disclaimer time limit or has acted in a manner not conducive to administering the estate or maintaining the deceased’s business activities, or where he or she has appropriated or concealed objects belonging to the estate, he or she is no longer entitled to disclaim the inheritance.

Art. 572 B. Disclaimer / III. Disclaimer by one co-heir

III. Disclaimer by one co-heir

1 Where the deceased has not made a testamentary disposition and one of two or more heirs disclaims the inheritance, his or her share of the estate passes to the other heirs as if he or she had predeceased.

2 Where the deceased has made testamentary disposition, any share of the estate disclaimed by a named heir passes to the testator’s nearest statutory heirs, unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from the disposition.

Art. 573 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 1. In general

IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs

1. In general

1 Where the inheritance is disclaimed by all the nearest heirs, the estate is liquidated by the bankruptcy office.

2 If liquidation produces a surplus after payment of debts, this passes to those entitled to inherit as if they had not disclaimed it.

Art. 574 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 2. Entitlement of surviving spouse

2. Entitlement of surviving spouse

If the deceased’s issue have disclaimed the inheritance, the authority notifies the disclaimer to the surviving spouse, who is entitled to declare acceptance within one month.

Art. 575 B. Disclaimer / IV. Disclaimer by all the nearest heirs / 3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs

3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs

1 When disclaiming the inheritance, the heirs may request that it be offered to their subsequent heirs before the estate is liquidated.

2 In this event, the authority informs the subsequent heirs that the preceding heirs have disclaimed, and if the former fail to declare their acceptance of the inheritance within one month, they are likewise deemed to have disclaimed it.

Art. 576 B. Disclaimer / V. Extension of time limit

V. Extension of time limit

Where there is good cause, the competent authority may grant the legal and named heirs an extension of the time limit or set a new one.

Art. 577 B. Disclaimer / VI. Disclaimer of a legacy

VI. Disclaimer of a legacy

Where a legatee disclaims a legacy, it becomes void in favour of the obligor, unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from his or her disposition.

Art. 578 B. Disclaimer / VII. Security for the heir’s creditors

VII. Security for the heir’s creditors

1 Where an overindebted heir has disclaimed an inheritance in order to withhold it from his or her creditors, the latter or the bankruptcy administrators may challenge the disclaimer within six months unless their claims are secured.

2 If their challenge is upheld, the inheritance is placed in official liquidation.

3 Any surplus serves first to satisfy the challenging creditors and any balance remaining after redemption of the other debts passes to the heirs in whose favour the disclaimer was made.

Art. 579 B. Disclaimer / VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer

VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer

1 Where the deceased was insolvent and his or her heirs disclaim the inheritance, they remain liable to his or her creditors to the extent that in the five years prior to his or her death they received property or assets from him or her which on division of the estate would have been subject to hotchpot.

2 The endowment of newly-weds according to local custom and the costs of raising and educating children are not affected by such liability.

3 Heirs acting in good faith are liable only to the extent they are still enriched.


  Chapter Three: Public Inventory

Art. 580 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 Any heir entitled to disclaim his or her inheritance has the right to request a public inventory.

2 The request must be made to the competent authority within one month in the same form as the disclaimer.

3 A request made by one heir is also valid for the others.

Art. 581 B. Procedure / I. Inventory

B. Procedure

I. Inventory

1 The public inventory is drawn up by the competent authority in accordance with the provisions of cantonal law and consists of a list of all the assets and debts of the estate, together with an appraisal of the value of each item in the inventory.

2 Any person able to provide information on the financial circumstances of the deceased is personally obliged to give the authority all the information it requires.

3 In particular, the heirs must inform the authority of any debts of the deceased that are known to them.

Art. 582 B. Procedure / II. Formal call to account

II. Formal call to account

1 In the course of drawing up the inventory, the authority shall make a formal call to account whereby appropriate public notices are issued calling on all creditors and debtors of the deceased, including creditors under a surety, to come forward and register their claims and debts within a specified time limit.

2 Such notices must alert the creditors to the consequences of any failure to register.

3 The time limit for registering must not be earlier than one month from the date of the first public notice.

Art. 583 B. Procedure / III. Inclusion ex officio

III. Inclusion ex officio

1 Claims and debts evident from the public registers or from the papers of the deceased are included ex officio.

2 The debtors and creditors must be notified of any such inclusion.

Art. 584 B. Procedure / IV. Result

IV. Result

1 On expiry of the published time limit, the inventory is closed and made available for perusal by all interested parties for at least one month.

2 The costs are borne by the estate and, where this is insufficient, by the heirs who requested the inventory.

Art. 585 C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory / I. Administration

C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory

I. Administration

1 While the inventory is being drawn up, only the necessary administrative actions may be taken.

2 Where the authority authorises an heir to continue the deceased’s business activities, the co-heirs may request that security be furnished.

Art. 586 C. Situation of the heirs during the inventory / II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription

II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription

1 While the inventory is being drawn up, no action may be taken to enforce the debts of the deceased.

2 ...1

3 Except in urgent matters, court proceedings may neither be commenced nor continued.


1 Repealed by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), with effect from 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 587 D. Effect / I. Time limit for declaration of intention

D. Effect

I. Time limit for declaration of intention

1 Once the inventory is closed, all the heirs are requested to declare within one month their intentions with regard to acquiring the inheritance due to them.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, the competent authority may set a further time limit for obtaining appraisals, settling disputed claims and the like.

Art. 588 D. Effect / II. Declaration of intention

II. Declaration of intention

1 During the set time limit, an heir may disclaim his or her inheritance or request official liquidation or accept the inheritance either subject to public inventory or without reservation.

2 Where an heir makes no declaration, he or she is deemed to have accepted the inheritance subject to public inventory.

Art. 589 D. Effect / III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory / 1. Liability as per inventory

III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory

1. Liability as per inventory

1 Where an heir accepts the inheritance subject to public inventory, the debts of the deceased listed in the inventory and the assets pass to him or her.

2 The acquisition of the inheritance with all attendant rights and obligations takes effect retroactively from the date on which the succession process commenced.

3 The heir is liable for debts listed in the inventory both with the inheritance and with his or her own assets.

Art. 590 D. Effect / III. Effects of acceptance subject to public inventory / 2. Liability beyond the inventory

2. Liability beyond the inventory

1 The heirs are not liable either personally or with the inheritance towards creditors of the estate whose claims were not included in the inventory because the creditors failed to register them in time.

2 Where such failure to register claims in the inventory was through no fault of the creditor or his or her claims were not included in the inventory despite having been registered, the heir is liable to the extent he or she is enriched by the inheritance.

3 In all cases, creditors may assert claims to the extent these are secured by a lien on the estate assets.

Art. 591 E. Liability for debts subject to a surety

E. Liability for debts subject to a surety

Any debts under a surety given by the deceased are listed separately in the inventory and may be asserted against an heir, even where he or she accepts the inheritance, only in the amount that would be allocated to the surety debt if all debts of the estate were to be redeemed under the rules governing bankruptcy.

Art. 592 F. Acquisition by a state authority

F. Acquisition by a state authority

Where an estate passes to a state authority, a formal call to account is made ex officio and the state authority is liable for the debts of the estate only in the amount of the assets it has inherited from the estate.


  Chapter Four: Official Liquidation

Art. 593 A. Requirements / I. At the request of an heir

A. Requirements

I. At the request of an heir

1 Rather than disclaim the inheritance or accept it subject to public inventory, each heir is entitled to request official liquidation.

2 However, such request may not be granted if at least one co-heir accepts the inheritance.

3 In the event of official liquidation, the heirs are not liable for the debts of the estate.

Art. 594 A. Requirements / II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors

II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors

1 Where the deceased’s creditors have good cause to fear that their claims will not be met and such claims are not satisfied or secured at their request, within three months of the death of the deceased or the reading of the will they may demand the official liquidation of the estate.

2 Subject to the same conditions, legatees may request provisional measures by way of security.

Art. 595 B. Procedure / I. Administration

B. Procedure

I. Administration

1 The official liquidation is carried out by the competent authority or by one or more estate administrators acting at the authority’s behest.

2 It begins with the taking of an inventory and the attendant formal call to account.

3 The estate administrator is under the authority’s supervision and the heirs may appeal to the authority against any measures taken or planned by the administrator.

Art. 596 B. Procedure / liquidation

II. Ordinary

liquidation

1 For the purpose of liquidation, any business activities of the deceased still in operation are brought to a close, his or her obligations are performed, his or her claims are called in, his or her legacies are distributed where possible, his or her rights and duties are determined at law, where necessary, and his or her assets are converted into cash.

2 Land formerly belonging to the deceased is sold at public auction; it may be disposed of by private sale only with the consent of all the heirs.

3 The heirs are entitled even during the liquidation process to request that some or all of the objects and monies that are not required for the liquidation be released into their possession.

Art. 597 B. Procedure / III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office

III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office

If the estate is overindebted, its liquidation is carried out by the bankruptcy office in accordance with the provisions governing bankruptcy.


  Chapter Five: Action for Recovery of Inheritance

Art. 598 A. Requirements

A. Requirements

1 A person who believes that, as a legal or named heir, he or she has a better claim than the current possessor to an estate or a part thereof may assert his or her claim by bringing an action for recovery of inheritance.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, with effect from 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 599 B. Effect

B. Effect

1 If the claim is upheld, the possessor must relinquish the estate or the part thereof to the claimant in accordance with the rules governing possession.

2 The defendant cannot invoke adverse possession in respect of property belonging to the estate.

Art. 600 C. Prescription

C. Prescription

1 The right to bring an action for recovery of inheritance against a defendant acting in good faith prescribes one year after the date on which the claimant learned that the property was possessed by the defendant and that he or she has a better claim to it, but in all cases ten years after the death of the deceased or the date on which the will was read.

2 The prescriptive period for the right to bring an action against a defendant acting in bad faith is always 30 years.

Art. 601 D. Action by a legatee

D. Action by a legatee

The right of a legatee to bring an action prescribes ten years after notification of the testamentary disposition or from the subsequent date on which the legacy became due.


  Title Seventeen: Division of the Estate

  Chapter One: Community of Heirs prior to Division

Art. 602 A. Effect of succession / I. Community of heirs

A. Effect of succession

I. Community of heirs

1 Where several heirs inherit the estate, on succession and until such time as it is divided they form a community in respect of all rights and obligations of the estate.

2 They become joint owners of the property belonging to the estate and have joint power of disposal over the rights of the estate, subject to contractual or statutory powers of representation and administration.

3 At the request of one co-heir, the competent authority may appoint a representative of the community of heirs until the estate is divided.

Art. 603 A. Effect of succession / II. Liability of the heirs

II. Liability of the heirs

1 The heirs are jointly and severally liable for the debts of the deceased.

2 The appropriate compensation due to children or grandchildren for contributions made to the household they shared with the deceased must be added to the debts of the estate unless this would render the estate overindebted.1


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, in force since 15 Feb. 1973 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 604 B. Right to division

B. Right to division

1 Any heir may at any time request that the estate be divided unless he or she is under a contractual or statutory obligation to remain a member of the community of heirs.

2 On application by an heir, the court may order a temporary deferral of the division of the estate or specific parts thereof where immediate division would substantially impair their value.

3 Where one heir is insolvent, his or her co-heirs may apply for provisional measures to secure their own claims immediately upon succession.

Art. 605 C. Deferral of division

C. Deferral of division

1 If on succession the rights of an unborn child need to be taken into consideration, the division of the estate must be deferred until the child is born.

2 In the interim, the child’s mother is entitled to enjoy the benefits of the joint estate to the extent required for her maintenance.

Art. 606 D. Claims of household members

D. Claims of household members

Heirs who were members of the household of and maintained by the deceased at the time of his or her death may demand that they be maintained for a further month at the estate’s expense.


  Chapter Two: Method of Division

Art. 607 A. In general

A. In general

1 Statutory heirs must divide the estate among themselves and with the named heirs according to the same principles.

2 Except where provided otherwise, they are free to decide on the method of division.

3 Co-heirs in possession of estate property or in debt to the deceased must provide precise information regarding such circumstances prior to the division.

Art. 608 B. Instructions concerning the division / I. Testamentary disposition

B. Instructions concerning the division

I. Testamentary disposition

1 The testator is entitled by means of testamentary disposition to give his or her heirs instructions concerning the division and the formation of portions.

2 Such instructions are binding on the heirs, subject to measures to balance out the portions in the event of an inequality not intended by the testator.

3 Unless other intentions on the part of the testator are evident from his or her disposition, any bequest of a given part of the estate to one particular heir is deemed to be merely an instruction concerning the division rather than a specific legacy.

Art. 609 B. Instructions concerning the division / II. Assistance from the authorities

II. Assistance from the authorities

1 At the request of a creditor who has acquired or distrained an inheritance that has passed to an heir or who holds unpaid debt certificates against him or her, the authorities must assist in the division in place of that heir.

2 Cantonal law may provide for official intervention in the division process in other cases.

Art. 610 C. Performing the division / I. Equal rights of heirs

C. Performing the division

I. Equal rights of heirs

1 Except where other provisions apply, all heirs have an equal right to the estate property.

2 They must disclose to each other all circumstances concerning their relationship with the deceased insofar as these pertain to the just and equitable division of the estate.

3 Each heir may request that the debts of the deceased be redeemed or secured prior to division of the estate.

Art. 611 C. Performing the division / II. Formation of lots

II. Formation of lots

1 The heirs form as many portions or lots as there are heirs or stirpes.

2 If they are unable to reach agreement, at the request of one heir the competent authority must form the lots with due regard to local custom and the personal circumstances and wishes of the majority of the co-heirs.

3 The lots are distributed among the heirs either as agreed or by the drawing of lots.

Art. 612 C. Performing the division / III. Allocation and sale of specific objects

III. Allocation and sale of specific objects

1 Where the value of an object belonging to the estate would be substantially diminished if such object were divided, it is allocated in its entirety to one of the heirs.

2 Where the heirs are unable to agree on the division or allocation of an object, it must be sold and the proceeds divided.

3 At the request of an heir, such sale must be carried out at auction and, in the absence of agreement among the heirs, the competent authority decides whether such auction is to be public or only among the heirs.

Art. 612a1C. Performing the division / IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse

IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse

1 Where the house or apartment in which the spouses lived or the household effects form part of the estate, the surviving spouse may request that such property be allocated to him or her against his or her portion.

2 Where justified in the circumstances, at the request of the surviving spouse or the other statutory heirs of the deceased, a usufruct or right of residence may be granted rather than ownership of the home.

3 The surviving spouse cannot claim such rights in respect of premises in which the deceased practised a profession or ran a business and which are required by one of his or her issue in order to continue the profession or business, subject to the provisions of agricultural law of succession.

4 The same provisions apply mutatis mutandis to registered partners.2


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 Inserted by Annex No 8 of the Same-Sex Partnership Act of 18 June 2004, in force since 1 Jan. 2007 (AS 2005 5685; BBl 2003 1288).

Art. 613 D. Special items / I. Items that belong together, family documents

D. Special items

I. Items that belong together, family documents

1 Items which by their nature belong together must not be separated if one of the heirs objects to such separation.

2 Family documents and items of special sentimental value to the family must not be sold if any of the heirs objects.

3 If the heirs cannot reach agreement, the competent authority decides whether to sell such items or to allocate them, against the recipient’s portion or otherwise, giving due regard to local custom and, in the absence of such custom, to the personal circumstances of the heirs.

Art. 613a1D. Special items / I.bis Agricultural inventory

I.bis Agricultural inventory

Where the tenant of an agricultural enterprise dies and one of his or her heirs continues the lease on his or her own, on request he or she may have the entire inventory (livestock, machinery, supplies, etc.) allocated to him or her and charged to his or her portion at its utility value.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 614 D. Special items / II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs

II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs

Claims of the deceased against an heir are charged to the latter’s portion.

Art. 615 D. Special items / III. Pledged estate property

III. Pledged estate property

If as a result of the division an heir receives estate property that is pledged to secure the debts of the deceased, the debt to the pledgee is likewise transferred to him or her.

Art. 6161

1 Repealed by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct 1991 on Rural Land Rights, with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6171D. Special items / IV. Land / 1. Method of allocation / a. Imputed value

IV. Land

1. Method of allocation

a. Imputed value

Land is charged to the heirs’ portions at its market value as at the time of the division.


1 Amended by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 618 D. Special items / IV. Land / 1. Method of allocation / b. Valuation procedure

b. Valuation procedure

1 Where the heirs are unable to agree on the market value, it is estimated by an officially appointed expert.1

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).
2 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, with effect from 15 Feb. 1994 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).

Art. 6191D. Special items / V. Agricultural businesses and land

V. Agricultural businesses and land

The method of including and allocating agricultural enterprises and agricultural land is governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights.


1 Amended by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 620–6251

1 Repealed by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct 1991 on Rural Land Rights with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).


  Chapter Three: Hotchpot

Art. 626 A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs

A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs

1 The statutory heirs are under a mutual obligation to place into hotchpot any property received from the deceased during his or her lifetime as advancements against their share of the estate.

2 Unless the deceased expressly instructed otherwise, anything gifted or granted to his or her issue by way of dowry, endowment or assignment of assets, debt remission and the like is subject to hotchpot.

Art. 627 B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs

B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs

1 If a person ceases to be an heir before or after succession, his or her duty of hotchpot passes to the heirs that replace him or her.

2 The issue of an heir have a duty of hotchpot in respect of advancements made in his or her favour even if those advancements have not devolved on them.

Art. 628 C. Calculation method / I. In kind or by imputation of value

C. Calculation method

I. In kind or by imputation of value

1 When placing property in hotchpot, the heirs may at their discretion do so either in kind or by imputing its value, even if the advancements made in their favour exceed the value of their share of the estate.

2 The above provisions are subject to any contrary instructions issued by the testator and to the co-heirs’ right to abatement of the advancements.

Art. 629 C. Calculation method / II. Correlation with share of the estate

II. Correlation with share of the estate

1 Where advancements to an heir exceed the value of his or her share of the estate, subject to claims in abatement, the surplus is exempt from hotchpot if it may be shown that the deceased intended to favour said heir by such advancements.

2 Exemption from hotchpot is presumed in the case of endowments in the usual order of magnitude made to the issue on their marriage.

Art. 630 C. Calculation method / III. Hotchpot value

III. Hotchpot value

1 Hotchpot is calculated according to the value of the advancements on succession or, where the advanced property has previously been sold, the sale proceeds obtained.

2 Any expenditure on and damage to the property and the natural produce derived therefrom must be allowed for among the heirs according to the rules governing possession.

Art. 631 D. Education costs

D. Education costs

1 Unless it is shown that the deceased intended otherwise, sums expended by him or her on the upbringing and education of individual children are subject to hotchpot only insofar as they exceed the normal amounts.

2 Children still in education or who suffer from disabilities must be granted appropriate advance payments on division of the estate.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 632 E. Occasional gifts

E. Occasional gifts

Customary occasional gifts are not subject to hotchpot.

Art. 6331

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 6 Oct. 1972, with effect from 15 Feb. 1994 (AS 1973 93; BBl 1970 I 805, 1971 I 737).


  Chapter Four: Completion and Effect of Division

Art. 634 A. Agreement / I. Contract of division

A. Agreement

I. Contract of division

1 The division of the estate becomes binding on the heirs once the lots have been formed and received or on conclusion of the contract of division.

2 In order to be valid, the contract of division must be done in writing.

Art. 635 A. Agreement / II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate

II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate

1 In order to be valid, contracts between heirs regarding assignment of shares of the estate must be done in writing.1

2 If such contracts are concluded by an heir with third parties, they do not give the latter any right to participate in the division of the estate, but merely confer a claim on the share allocated to that heir as a result of the division.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 636 A. Agreement / III. Contracts prior to succession

III. Contracts prior to succession

1 Contracts concluded without the involvement and authorisation of the testator between one heir and another or between an heir and a third party regarding an inheritance that has not yet devolved on the heir are not binding.

2 Any performance rendered under such contracts may be reclaimed.

Art. 637 B. Liability among co-heirs / I. Warranty

B. Liability among co-heirs

I. Warranty

1 On completion of the division, the co-heirs are mutually liable for the estate property as if they were purchasers and vendors.

2 They must mutually warrant the existence of claims allocated to them in the division and, except in the case of securities with a market price, are mutually liable as simple guarantors for the debtor’s solvency in the amount at which such claims were brought into account.

3 Claims under such warranty prescribe one year after the division or the subsequent date on which the claims fell due.

Art. 638 B. Liability among co-heirs / II. Challenging the division

II. Challenging the division

A contract of division may be challenged in accordance with the provisions governing challenge of contract in general.

Art. 639 C. Liability toward third parties / I. Joint and several liability

C. Liability toward third parties

I. Joint and several liability

1 Even after the division of the estate, the heirs remain jointly and severally liable with their entire property for the debts of the testator to his or her creditors, providing the latter have not expressly or tacitly agreed to a division or transfer of such debts.

2 The joint and several liability of the co-heirs prescribes five years after the division or the subsequent date on which the debt claim fell due.

Art. 640 C. Liability toward third parties / II. Recourse against co-heirs C. Liability toward third parties / II. Recourse against co-heirs

II. Recourse against co-heirs

1 If an heir has paid a debt owed by the deceased that was not allocated to him or her in the division, or if he or she has paid more of a debt than he or she has assumed, he or she has right of recourse against the co-heirs.

2 Recourse is taken first against the person who assumed such debt in the division.

3 In all other respects, the heirs must bear the debts in proportion to their shares in the estate, unless otherwise agreed.

  Part Four: Property Law

  Division One: Ownership

  Title Eighteen: General Provisions

Art. 641 A. Nature of ownership / I. In general

A. Nature of ownership

I. In general1

1 The owner of an object is free to dispose of it as he or she sees fit within the limits of the law.

2 He or she has the right to reclaim it from anyone withholding it from him or her and to protect it against any unwarranted interference.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 641a1A. Nature of ownership / II. Animals

II. Animals

1 Animals are not objects.

2 Where no special provisions exist for animals, they are subject to the provisions governing objects.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 642 B. Scope of ownership / I. Constituent parts

B. Scope of ownership

I. Constituent parts

1 The owner of an object also has ownership of all its constituent parts.

2 A constituent part is anything which, according to local custom, is held to be an essential part of an object and which cannot be detached without destroying, damaging or altering it.

Art. 643 B. Scope of ownership / II. Natural fruits

II. Natural fruits

1 The owner of an object also has ownership of its natural fruits.

2 Natural fruits are the periodic produce and revenues customarily derived from an object used according to its purpose.

3 Prior to separation, the natural fruits are an integral part of the object.

Art. 644 B. Scope of ownership / III. Accessories / 1. Definition

III. Accessories

1. Definition

1 Any disposition affecting an object also applies to its accessories, unless an exception is made.

2 Accessories are those chattels which, according to local custom or the clear will of the main object's owner, permanently facilitate the management, use or preservation of the main object and are auxiliary thereto by virtue of having been joined to it, adapted to it or otherwise connected with it.

3 If an object is an accessory, it remains so regardless of temporary separation from the main object.

Art. 645 B. Scope of ownership / III. Accessories / 2. Exclusions

2. Exclusions

Chattels do not qualify as accessories if they are intended for temporary use or consumption by the possessor of the main object, are not intrinsically related to it or are connected with it only for storage, sale or hire purposes.

Art. 646 C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 1. Relationship among co-owners

C. Collective ownership

I. Co-ownership

1. Relationship among co-owners

1 Co-ownership exists where several persons own a share in an object which is physically undivided.

2 Unless otherwise stipulated, they are co-owners in equal measure.

3 Each co-owner has the rights and obligations of ownership in respect of his or her share in the object, and said share may be alienated and pledged by him or her, or distrained by his or her creditors.

Art. 6471C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 2. Use and administration rules

2. Use and administration rules

1 The co-owners may agree rules on use and administration that deviate from the statutory provisions and provide therein that the rules may be amended with the consent of the majority of all co-owners.2

1bis Any amendment to the provisions of the use and administration rules on the allocation of exclusive rights of use also requires the consent of the co-owners who are directly affected.3

2 Such rules cannot annul or restrict the rights of each co-owner:

1.
to request such measures as are necessary to preserve the object’s value and serviceability and, where required, to have these ordered by a court;
2.
to take, on his or her own initiative and at the expense of all co-owners, such measures as are urgently needed to safeguard the object against imminent or incremental damage.

1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 647a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 3. Ordinary administration

3. Ordinary administration

1 Each co-owner may attend to ordinary administration and in particular carry out repairs, sowing and harvesting, short-term custody and supervision, may conclude contracts for such purposes and may exercise the powers derived from such contracts and from rental, lease, work and service agreements, including the payment and acceptance of monies on behalf of all the co-owners.

2 With the consent of the majority of the co-owners, the authority to carry out administration may be submitted to a different regime, subject to the statutory provisions governing necessary and urgent measures.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647b1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 4. Major administrative acts

4. Major administrative acts

1 By the consent of a majority of the co-owners together representing a majority share in the object, major administrative acts may be carried out, notably including changes in methods of cultivation or use, conclusion and termination of rental and lease agreements, participation in land improvements and the appointment of an administrator whose authority extends beyond ordinary administrative acts.

2 The provisions governing necessary construction work are reserved.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647c1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / a. Necessary work

5. Construction work

a. Necessary work

Maintenance, reconstruction and renovation work necessary to preserve the object’s value and serviceability may be carried out with the consent of the majority of co-owners where such work does not fall under the authority of each individual co-owner to take ordinary administrative steps.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647d1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / b. Useful work

b. Useful work

1 Renovations and refurbishments aimed at enhancing the value or improving the object’s profitability or serviceability require the approval of a majority of the co-owners together representing a majority share in the object.

2 Alterations which permanently hinder or render unprofitable a co-owner’s use or exploitation of the object for its existing purpose may not be carried out without the consent of that co-owner.

3 Where an alteration would require a co-owner to bear unreasonable costs, in particular because they are disproportionate to the value of his or her share, the alteration may be carried out without his or her consent only if the other co-owners assume such part of his or her share of the costs as exceeds that which he or she may reasonably be expected to meet.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 647e1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 5. Construction work / c. Works to improve appearance or convenience

c. Works to improve appearance or convenience

1 Building works serving merely to embellish the object, improve its appearance or make its use more comfortable or convenient may only be carried out with the consent of all the co-owners.

2 If such works are commissioned with the consent of the majority of the co-owners who also represent a majority share in the object, they may be carried out even against the wishes of a dissenting co-owner providing they do not permanently impair the latter’s right of use and enjoyment and the other co-owners compensate him or her for the merely temporary impairment and assume his or her share of the costs.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993 ; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6481C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 6. Power of disposal over the object

6. Power of disposal over the object

1 Each co-owner is entitled to represent, use and exploit the object insofar as is compatible with the rights of the other co-owners.

2 The alienation or encumbrance of the object and the modification of its designated purpose require the consent of all co-owners, unless they have unanimously agreed some other arrangement.

3 Where mortgage rights or real burdens apply to co-ownership shares, the co-owners are not permitted to further encumber the object itself with such charges.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6491C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 7. Costs and expenses

7. Costs and expenses

1 Except where otherwise provided, the administrative costs, taxes and other expenses arising from co-ownership or in relation to the object in co-ownership are borne by the co-owners in proportion to their shares.

2 If a co-owner has borne more than his or her fair share of such costs, he or she is entitled to compensation from the others to an equivalent extent.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register

8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register2

The use and administration rules agreed by the co-owners, their administrative decisions and all relevant court judgments and orders are also binding on a co-owner’s legal successor and on any person acquiring a right in rem to a co-ownership share.

2 They may be noted next to co-ownership shares of immovable property in the land register.3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 649b1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 9. Exclusion from collective ownership / a. Co-owners

9. Exclusion from collective ownership

a. Co-owners

1 A co-owner may be excluded from the community of co-owners by court order if, as a result of his or her conduct or that of persons to whom he or she granted use of the object or for whom he or she is responsible, his or her duties towards the other co-owners individually or collectively are so seriously violated that continuation of the community of co-owners becomes unreasonable.

2 Where the community comprises only two co-owners, each has the right to sue the other; in other cases, unless otherwise agreed, legal action against one co-owner must be authorised by a majority of all the co-owners excluding the person to be sued.

3 If the court rules in favour of excluding the defendant, it shall order him or her to alienate his or her share and, should he or she fail to do so within the allowed time limit, shall order it to be sold at public auction in accordance with the provisions governing the forced sale of land to the exclusion of the provisions governing dissolution of co-ownership.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 649c1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 9. Exclusion from collective ownership / b. Further entitled persons

b. Further entitled persons

The provisions governing exclusion of co-owners apply mutatis mutandis to usufructuaries and to owners of other rights in rem or personal rights of use entered under priority notice in the land register in respect of co-ownership shares.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 6501C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / a. Right to request division

10. Dissolution

a. Right to request division

1 Every co-owner has the right to request the dissolution of the co-ownership unless this is excluded by an agreement, by division of the object into condominium units or by the dedication of the object to a permanent purpose.

2 Dissolution may be excluded for a maximum of 50 years by means of an agreement which, where the object is land, is valid only if done as a public deed and which may be entered under priority notice in the land register.2

3 Dissolution may not be requested at an inopportune time.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 651 C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / b. Form of partition

b. Form of partition

1 Dissolution is effected by means of physical division, by private sale or sale at auction and division of the sale proceeds, or by transfer of the entire object to one or more co-owners who buy out the others.

2 If the co-owners are unable to agree on the method of dissolution, the court will order the physical division of the object or, where this is impossible without substantially diminishing its value, its sale at public auction or private auction among the co-owners.

3 Physical division giving rise to unequal shares may entail monetary payments to balance out the shares.

Art. 651a1C. Collective ownership / I. Co-ownership / 10. Dissolution / c. Animals kept as pets

c. Animals kept as pets

1 In the event of disputes over ownership of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the court will award sole ownership to whichever party offers the better conditions of animal welfare in which to keep the animal.

2 The court may order the person to whom ownership of the animal is awarded to provide appropriate compensation to the other party; the court determines the amount at its discretion.

3 The court shall take all necessary provisional measures, in particular in relation to the animal’s care in the interim.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 652 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 1. Prerequisites

II. Joint ownership

1. Prerequisites

If several persons bound together into a community by legal provision or contract own an object by virtue of that community, they are joint owners and the rights of each joint owner attach to the whole object.

Art. 653 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 2. Effect

2. Effect

1 The rights and obligations of the joint owners are determined by the rules governing their legal or contractual community.

2 Unless otherwise provided, the unanimous decision of all the joint owners is required in order to exercise ownership rights and in particular to dispose of the object in any way.

3 For the duration of the community, the right to divide the object or make dispositions relating to a fraction of it is excluded.

Art. 654 C. Collective ownership / II. Joint ownership / 3. Dissolution

3. Dissolution

1 Dissolution occurs when the object is alienated or the community is terminated.

2 Unless otherwise provided, division of the object is effected according to the provisions governing co-ownership.

Art. 654a1C. Collective ownership / III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land

III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land

The dissolution of joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and agricultural land is governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11


  Title Nineteen: Land Ownership

  Chapter One: Object, Acquisition and Loss of Land Ownership

Art. 6551A. Subject matter / I. Immovable property

A. Subject matter

I. Immovable property2

1 The object of land ownership is all immovable property.

2 Within the meaning of this Code, immovable property includes:

1.
parcels of land and the buildings thereon;
2.
distinct and permanent rights recorded in the land register;
3.
mines;
4.
co-ownership shares in immovable property.

3 An easement relating to immovable property may be recorded in the land register as an independent and permanent right if it:

1.
is not created in favour of a benefited property nor exclusively for a specific person; and
2.
is established for at least 30 years or for an unlimited period.3

1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 655a1A. Subject matter / II. Dependent property

II. Dependent property

1 A parcel of land may be linked to another parcel of land such that the owner of the main parcel of land is also the owner of the attached parcel of land. The attached parcel shares the same legal destiny as the main parcel and may not be alienated, pledged or encumbered separately.

2 If the parcels are linked for a permanent purpose, the statutory right of pre-emption of the co-owners and the right to demand dissolution may not be claimed.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 656 B. Acquisition / I. Registration

B. Acquisition

I. Registration

1 The acquisition of land ownership must be recorded in the land register.

2 In the case of appropriation, inheritance, compulsory purchase, debt enforcement or court judgment, the acquirer becomes the owner even before registration in the land register but obtains the power of disposal over the immovable property only once he or she has been recorded as the owner in the land register.

Art. 657 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 1. Transfer

II. Types of acquisition

1. Transfer

1 In order to be binding, a contract to transfer land ownership must be executed as a public deed.

2 Testamentary disposition and marital contracts require the forms prescribed by the law of succession and marital property law.

Art. 658 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 2. Appropriation

2. Appropriation

1 Immovable property recorded in the land register may be appropriated only if the register establishes that it has no owner.

2 Appropriation of land not recorded in the land register is subject to the provisions governing ownerless objects.

Art. 659 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 3. Formation of new land

3. Formation of new land

1 If new exploitable land is formed from previously ownerless land as a result of alluvion, filling or ground displacement, changes in the course or level of public waters or in some other manner, such land belongs to the canton in which it lies.

2 The cantons are free to allocate such land to owners of adjoining land.

3 If a person can show that parts of ground have become detached from his or her property, he or she is entitled to take them back within an appropriate period.

Art. 660 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / a. In general

4. Ground displacement

a. In general1

1 Ground displacement from one parcel of land to another does not alter the boundaries of the parcels.

2 Earth and other objects moving from one parcel to the other in the process are subject to the provisions governing driftage or the joining and mixing of chattels.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660a1B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / b. Constant ground displacement

b. Constant ground displacement

1 The general principle whereby ground displacement does not alter land boundaries does not apply to areas designated by the cantons as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.

2 When designating such areas, due consideration shall be given to the characteristics of the land in question.

3 Where a parcel of land forms part of such an area, this fact must be notified in an appropriate manner to the interested parties and recorded in the land register.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 660b1B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 4. Ground displacement / c. Redrawing of boundaries

c. Redrawing of boundaries

1 If a land boundary is rendered impractical by ground displacement, any affected landowner may request that it be redrawn.

2 Any loss or gain in value shall be balanced out.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 661 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / a. Ordinary adverse possession

5. Adverse possession

a. Ordinary adverse possession

Where a person has been wrongly recorded in the land register as the owner of immovable property, his or her ownership may no longer be challenged if he or she has been in possession of it in good faith, uninterruptedly and without challenge for ten years.

Art. 662 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / b. Extraordinary adverse possession

b. Extraordinary adverse possession

1 Where a person has been in possession of immovable property not recorded in the land register uninterruptedly and without challenge for 30 years as if it were his or her property, he or she has the right to be registered as the owner.

2 The same right applies on the same conditions to a person in possession of immovable property whose owner is not evident from the land register or who was declared dead or presumed dead at the beginning of the 30-year adverse possession period.

3 However, such registration may be made only by court order on expiry of a publicly notified period for objections, provided no such objections have been raised or those raised have been dismissed.

Art. 663 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 5. Adverse possession / c. Time limits

c. Time limits

The rules for computing, interrupting and suspending adverse possession time limits are determined mutatis mutandis by the provisions governing prescription of debt claims.

Art. 664 B. Acquisition / II. Types of acquisition / 6. Ownerless and public objects

6. Ownerless and public objects

1 Ownerless and public objects are subject to the sovereignty of the canton on whose territory they are situated.

2 No rights of private ownership apply to public waters or to land not suitable for cultivation, such as rocks and scree, firn and glaciers, or to springs rising therefrom, unless proof to the contrary is produced.

3 The cantons shall enact the provisions required to govern the appropriation of ownerless land, exploitation and common use of public objects such as roads, town and village squares, waterways and riverbeds.

Art. 665 B. Acquisition / III. Right to registration

III. Right to registration

1 By virtue of acquisition, the acquirer gains a personal claim against the owner to be recorded in the land register and, should the owner refuse, the right to have ownership awarded by court order.

2 In the case of appropriation, inheritance, compulsory purchase, debt enforcement or court judgment, the acquirer may obtain such registration on his or her own initiative.

3 Changes to land ownership occurring by operation of law as a result of marital community of property or the dissolution thereof shall be recorded in the land register at the request of either spouse.1


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 666 C. Loss

C. Loss

1 Land ownership is extinguished on deletion of the land register entry and on complete loss of the immovable property.

2 In the case of compulsory purchase, the time at which the loss occurs is determined according to federal and cantonal compulsory purchase law.

Art. 666a1D. Judicial measures / I. Where the owner cannot be found

D. Judicial measures

I. Where the owner cannot be found

1 If the owner recorded in the land register cannot be identified, if his or her address is unknown or if the name or address of one or more of his or her heirs is unknown, the court may on application order the required measures.
2 The court may in particular appoint a representative. On application, it shall stipulate the extent of the powers of representation. Unless it stipulates otherwise, such powers shall be limited to measures to maintain the property.

3 The following may apply for measures to be ordered:

1.
any person with a legitimate interest;
2.
the land register at the location of the immovable property.

4 The ordering of measures does not interrupt the period required to obtain extraordinary adverse possession.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 666b1D. Judicial measures / II. In the absence of the required management bodies

II. In the absence of the required management bodies

If a legal entity or other rights holder that is recorded in the land register as the owner no longer has the required management bodies, and person with a legitimate interest or the land register at the location of the immovable property may apply to the court for the required measures relating to the immovable property to be ordered.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: Substance and Limitation of Land Ownership

Art. 667 A. Substance / I. Scope

A. Substance

I. Scope

1 Land ownership extends upwards into the air and downwards into the ground to the extent determined by the owner’s legitimate interest in exercising his or her ownership rights.

2 Within the limits prescribed by law, it includes all buildings and plants as well as springs.

Art. 668 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 1. Type of boundary

II. Boundaries

1. Type of boundary

1 Land boundaries are established by the land register plans and by boundary markings on the land itself.

2 In the event of discrepancy between the existing land register plans and the boundary markings, the land register plans are presumed correct.

3 The foregoing presumption does not apply to areas designated by the canton as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 669 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 2. Duty to establish boundaries

2. Duty to establish boundaries

Every landowner is obliged, at the request of his or her neighbour, to co-operate in establishing the boundary where it is unclear, whether by amendment of the land register plans or by affixing boundary markers.

Art. 670 A. Substance / II. Boundaries / 3. Co-ownership of boundary markers

3. Co-ownership of boundary markers

Where boundaries are marked by features such as walls, hedges and fences, such features are presumed to be jointly owned by the two neighbouring landowners.

Art. 671 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / a. Ownership

III. Buildings on the parcel of land

1. Land and building materials

a. Ownership

1 Where a person uses materials belonging to another in building work on his or her own land or materials of his or her own on land belonging to another, such materials become an integral part of the parcel of land.

2 However, where such materials are used against the will of their owner, the latter is entitled to demand that the materials be removed and returned to him or her at the landowner’s expense to the extent this is possible without causing disproportionate damage.

3 On the same condition, where the materials were used against the will of the landowner, the latter may demand that they be removed from his or her land at the expense of the builder.

Art. 672 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / b. Compensation

b. Compensation

1 Where the materials are not removed from the land, the landowner must provide appropriate compensation for the cost of the materials.

2 Where the landowner on whose land the building work was carried out acted in bad faith, the court may award full damages.

3 Where the owner of the materials used in the building work acted in bad faith, the damages awarded may not exceed the minimum value of the building work to the landowner.

Art. 673 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 1. Land and building materials / c. Assignment of land ownership

c. Assignment of land ownership

Where the value of the building plainly exceeds the value of the land, the party acting in good faith may request that ownership of both building and land be assigned to the owner of the materials in exchange for appropriate compensation.

Art. 674 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 2. Encroaching buildings

2. Encroaching buildings

1 Buildings and other structures encroaching from one parcel of land onto another remain part of the parcel from which they originate, providing their owner has a right in rem to their existence.

2 The right to encroach on neighbouring land may be recorded as an easement in the land register.

3 If an injured party fails to object in timely manner to an unauthorised encroachment, despite being aware of it, where justified in the circumstances the builder of the encroaching structure, provided he or she acted in good faith, may be granted ownership of the encroaching part thereof or of the land below it in exchange for appropriate compensation.

Art. 675 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 3. Building right

3. Building right

1 Buildings and other structures that are dug into or built onto land belonging to another person or otherwise permanently connected with that parcel of land on or below its surface may have a separate owner provided their existence is recorded as an easement in the land register.

2 The creation of rights to buildings in respect of individual storeys of a building is not permitted.

Art. 676 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 4. Pipes, cables, conduits

4. Pipes, cables, conduits

1 Pipes, cables and conduits for water, gas, electricity and the like located outside the parcel of land which they serve are, except where otherwise regulated, the property of the utility plant from which they come or to which they lead.1

2 Where the provisions of the law of neighbours do not apply, the encumbrance of parcels of land by rights in rem relating to such pipes, cables and conduits belonging to another person is established by way of easement.

3 If the pipe, cable or conduit is visible, the easement is created when the pipe, cable or conduit is laid. In other cases, it is created by entry in the land register.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 677 A. Substance / III. Buildings on the parcel of land / 5. Movable structures

5. Movable structures

1 Sheds, huts, shacks, cabins and the like retain their separate owner if they are constructed on land belonging to another person without the intention of becoming a permanent fixture.

2 Their existence is not recorded in the land register.

Art. 678 A. Substance / IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land

IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land

1 Where a person uses another person’s plants on his or her own land or his or her own plants on another person’s land, the same rights and obligations arise as for the use of building materials or for movable structures.

2 An easement corresponding to a building right may be created in respect of individual plants and plantations for a minimum of ten and a maximum of 100 years.1

3 The servient owner may request the termination of the easement before the end of the agreed duration in the event of the termination of a lease agreement concluded between him or her and the easement beneficiary concerning the use of the land. The court shall determine the financial consequences taking due account of all the circumstances.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 679 A. Substance / V. Landowner’s liability / 1. Acts in excess of ownership rights

V. Landowner’s liability

1. Acts in excess of ownership rights1

1 Where a person incurs or is at risk of damage because a landowner acts in excess of his or her ownership rights, he or she may sue for abatement of the damage or for protection against any imminent damage and for damages.

2 Where a building or installation deprives a neighbouring parcel of land of certain properties, the aforementioned rights apply only if the regulations that applied at the time the building or installation was constructed were not complied with.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 679a1A. Substance / V. Landowner’s liability / 2. Lawful management of the land

2. Lawful management of the land

Where a landowner temporarily causes excessive and unavoidable disadvantages to a neighbour while managing his or her parcel of land lawfully, in particular by building and thus causes damage, the neighbour may only claim damages from the landowner.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 680 B. Limitations / I. In general

B. Limitations

I. In general

1 Statutory restrictions on ownership exist irrespective of whether they are recorded in the land register.

2 Any lifting or modification thereof by agreement is invalid unless executed in the form of a public deed and recorded in the land register.

3 Public law restrictions on ownership may not be revoked or modified.

Art. 6811B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 1. General principles

II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption

1. General principles

1 Statutory rights of pre-emption may also be exercised in the case of compulsory sale at auction, but only at the auction itself and on the conditions that apply to a sale to the highest bidder; in other respects statutory rights of pre-emption may be exercised subject to the conditions that apply to contractual rights of pre-emption.

2 The right of pre-emption becomes void if the land is sold to a person with a right of pre-emption of equal or higher rank.

3 Statutory rights of pre-emption may neither be inherited nor assigned. They take precedence over contractual rights of pre-emption.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681a1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 2. Exercise

2. Exercise

1 Where a purchase agreement is concluded, the vendor must notify persons with a right of pre-emption of the terms thereof.

2 If a person wishes to exercise his or her right of pre-emption, he or she must assert it within three months of learning of the conclusion and terms of the purchase agreement. Such a right may no longer be exercised once two years have elapsed since the entry of the new owner in the land register.

3 During that time a person may exercise a right of pre-emption against any owner of the land.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 681b1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 3. Modification, waiver

3. Modification, waiver

1 An agreement excluding or modifying a statutory right of pre-emption is valid only if executed in the form of a public deed. It may be entered under priority notice in the land register provided the right of pre-emption is held by the current owner of another parcel of land.

2 The beneficiary may waive his or her statutory right of pre-emption in writing once the event that triggers it has occurred.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 6821B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights

4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights2

1 Co-owners have a right of pre-emption against any person acquiring a share who is not a co-owner. If several co-owners exercise their right of pre-emption, the share is allocated to them in proportion to their existing shares.3

2 The owner of a parcel of land encumbered with a distinct and permanent building right shall also have a right of pre-emption in respect of that right over anyone wishing to acquire it, and the holder of the right has a right of pre-emption in respect of the parcel of land it encumbers, providing the land is used in the exercise of his or her right.

3...4


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
3 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
4 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 682a1B. Limitations / II. Restrictions on alienation; statutory right of pre-emption / 5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland

5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland

Rights of pre-emption of agricultural enterprises and agricultural land are also governed by the Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural land Rights.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 6831

1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 684 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 1. Excess detriment

III. Law of neighbours

1. Excess detriment1

1 In exercising their ownership rights, including in particular the right to run a business on his or her land, landowners are obliged to refrain from any excess detrimental to neighbouring properties.

2 In particular all harmful effects that are not justified by the location and character of the land or by local custom such as air pollution emissions of noxious vapours, noise, vibrations, radiation or the deprivation of sunlight or daylight are prohibited.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 685 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 2. Excavation and construction / a. Rule

2. Excavation and construction

a. Rule

1 When carrying out excavation or construction work, the owner is not permitted to damage the adjoining properties by causing their terrain to shift, exposing it to the risk of shifting or by weakening existing structures.

2 Buildings which contravene the provisions of the law of neighbours are subject to the provisions governing encroaching buildings.

Art. 686 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 2. Excavation and construction / b. Cantonal regulations

b. Cantonal regulations

1 The cantons may set minimum separation distances to be observed in excavation and construction works.

2 They have the right to issue further building regulations.

Art. 687 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 3. Plants / a. Rule

3. Plants

a. Rule

1 Overhanging branches and roots encroaching beyond the boundary may be severed and kept by the neighbour if they are damaging his or her property and have not been removed within a reasonable time following his or her complaint in relation thereto.

2 If a landowner tolerates branches overhanging cultivated or developed land, he or she is entitled to the fruit that grows on them.

3 These provisions do not apply to adjoining parcels of woodland.

Art. 688 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 3. Plants / b. Cantonal regulations

b. Cantonal regulations

The cantons are authorised to set minimum separation distances for plantations depending on the type of land and plants involved or to oblige the landowner to permit the overhanging branches or encroaching roots of fruit trees and to regulate or annul his or her right to take the fruit from such branches.

Art. 689 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 4. Flowing waters

4. Flowing waters

1 Every landowner is obliged to receive the waters flowing naturally from a higher-lying parcel of land, such as rain water, melting snow and water from unchannelled springs.

2 No person may alter the natural course of flow to his or her neighbour’s damage.

3 Water flowing to a lower-lying parcel of land and required by that property may be withheld only to the extent that such water is indispensable to the higher-lying parcel of land.

Art. 690 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 5. Drainage

5. Drainage

1 Where a higher-lying parcel of land is drained, the owner of lower-lying parcel of land is obliged to receive such water as previously flowed naturally onto his or her land without being entitled to compensation.

2 If he or she suffers damage as a result of drainage channels, he or she may require the owner of the higher-lying parcel of land to continue such channels through the lower-lying parcel of land at the latter’s expense.

Art. 691 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / a. Duty to permit

6. Pipes, cables, conduits

a. Duty to permit

1 Every landowner is obliged to permit water conduits, drainage pipes, gas pipes and the like and subterranean or overhead cables to traverse his or her land in exchange for full compensation, to the extent that such works would be impossible or prohibitively expensive if they did not traverse his or her land.1

2 The right for pipes, cables and conduits to traverse an adjoining parcel of land may not be claimed on the basis of the law of neighbours in cases subject to compulsory purchase under cantonal or federal law.

3 At the request of the dominant or the servient owner, such rights shall be recorded in the land register as an easement at the expense of the dominant owner. The right for pipes, cables and conduits to traverse an adjoining parcel of land may be cited in opposition to a person acquiring a parcel of land in good faith, even if it is not registered.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 692 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner

b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner

1 The servient owner is entitled to just and equitable consideration of his or her own interests.

2 Where justified by extraordinary circumstances, he or she may request that the piece of the land above which overhead pipes, cables and conduits are to be routed together with a reasonable portion of the surrounding land be purchased from him or her at its full value.

Art. 693 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 6. Pipes, cables, conduits / c. Change of circumstances

c. Change of circumstances

1 If circumstances change, the servient owner may request that the route of the pipe, cable or conduit be altered in accordance with his or her interests.

2 The costs of such re-routing are normally borne by the owner of the dominant property.

3 However, where justified by special circumstances, an appropriate portion of the costs may be charged to the servient owner.

Art. 694 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / a. Necessary right of way

7. Rights of way

a. Necessary right of way

1 Where a landowner does not have adequate access from his or her land to a public thoroughfare, he or she has the right to require his or her neighbours to grant him or her the necessary right of way in exchange for full compensation.

2 This right is in the first place exercised against the neighbour who, in the light of existing ownership and access circumstances, may most reasonably be expected to grant such right of way, and secondly in respect of the neighbour for whom it is least damaging.

3 When determining the route of a right of way, the interests of both parties must be taken into consideration.

Art. 695 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / b. Other rights of way

b. Other rights of way

The cantons reserve the right to enact more detailed provisions which govern the landowner’s right to enter neighbouring land for the purposes of managing his or her own land or carrying out repairs or building works and which regulate rights of way for the purpose of tillage, watering cattle, transit over fallow ground or in the dead season, transit for timber gathering, and the like.

Art. 696 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 7. Rights of way / c. Notation in the land register

c. Notation in the land register

1 Rights of way established directly by law exist without need for registration.

2 However, if permanent they are noted in the land register.

Art. 697 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 8. Enclosure

8. Enclosure

1 The costs of enclosing a parcel of land are borne by its owner, subject to the provisions governing co-ownership of boundary markers.

2 Cantonal law may enact provisions governing the duty to enclose and the manner of enclosure.

Art. 698 B. Limitations / III. Law of neighbours / 9. Duty to maintain

9. Duty to maintain

The costs of any structures required for the exercise of rights under the law of neighbours are borne by the landowners in proportion to their interests.

Art. 699 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 1. Access

IV. Right of access and to ward off danger

1. Access

1 Any person has the right to enter woodlands and meadows and to gather wild berries, fungi and the like to the extent permitted by local custom except where the competent authority enacts specific limited prohibitions in the interests of conservation.

2 Cantonal law may enact more detailed regulations on access to land owned by others for the purposes of hunting and fishing.

Art. 700 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 2. Retrieval of driftage and the like

2. Retrieval of driftage and the like

1 If objects are carried onto another parcel of land by water, wind, avalanche or other force of nature or by chance event, or if animals such as livestock, swarms of bees, poultry and fish stray onto his or her property, the landowner must grant the rightful owner access to his or her land to search for and retrieve them.

2 The landowner is entitled to claim damages for any damage caused and to that end has a special lien as to such objects and animals.

Art. 701 B. Limitations / IV. Right of access and to ward off danger / 3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage

3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage

1 If a person is able to ward off imminent damage or present danger from himself or herself or others only by trespassing on land belonging to another, the latter is obliged to tolerate such trespass to the extent that such danger or damage would be considerably greater than the detriment caused by the trespass.

2 Appropriate compensation is owed for any resultant damage.

Art. 702 B. Limitations / V. Public law restrictions on ownership / 1. In general

V. Public law restrictions on ownership

1. In general

The Confederation, cantons and communes reserve the right to impose restrictions on ownership that are in the public interest, and in particular that relate to building, fire and health regulations, forestry and road services, towpaths, erection of boundary markings and triangulation pillars, land improvements, fragmentation of landholdings, consolidation of agricultural land and building land, conservation of antiquities and natural monuments, preservation of areas of natural beauty and scenic vantage points and protection of mineral springs.

Art. 7031B. Limitations / V. Public law restrictions on ownership / 2. Land improvements

2. Land improvements

1 Where it is possible to carry out land improvements, such as watercourse modifications, drainage, irrigation, reforestation, path-building, land consolidation procedures and the like, only by collective endeavour and such endeavour has been approved by the majority of the landowners owning more than half of the land involved, the other landowners are obliged to participate. Landowners who choose not to participate in the decision-making process are deemed to consent. Participation is recorded in the land register.

2 The cantons regulate the procedure. In particular, they must issue detailed rules on consolidation of landholdings.

3 Cantonal legislation may further facilitate the realisation of such land improvements and may declare that the corresponding provisions also apply to building land and to areas designated as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.2


1 Amended by Art. 121 of the Agriculture Act of 3 oct. 1951, in force since 1 Jan. 1954 (AS 1953 1073; BBl 1951 I 130).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 704 C. Rights to springs and wells / I. Spring ownership and spring rights

C. Rights to springs and wells

I. Spring ownership and spring rights

1 Springs are an integral part of the land and their ownership may be acquired only through ownership of the land from which they rise.

2 Rights to spring water on land owned by others are established as easements by entry in the land register.

3 Groundwater is deemed equivalent to springs.

Art. 705 C. Rights to springs and wells / II. Diversion of springs

II. Diversion of springs

1 Cantonal law may regulate, restrict or prohibit the diversion of spring waters to safeguard the public interest.

2 In the event of conflict between cantons, the final decision rests with the Federal Council.

Art. 706 C. Rights to springs and wells / III. Cutting off springs / 1. Damages

III. Cutting off springs

1. Damages

1 Where springs and wells that enjoy considerable use or whose waters are collected for further use are cut off, diminished or contaminated by building works, installations or other measures to the detriment of their owners or rightful users, such persons are entitled to claim damages.

2 Where the damage was done neither intentionally nor through negligence, or the injured parties are themselves at fault, the court determines the amount and manner of compensation at its discretion.

Art. 707 C. Rights to springs and wells / III. Cutting off springs / 2. Restoration

2. Restoration

1 If springs and wells that are indispensable for the exploitation or habitation of a parcel of land or for the supply of drinking water are cut off or contaminated, those affected have the right to demand that the status quo ante be restored where at all possible.

2 In other cases restoration of the status quo ante may be demanded only where this is justified by special circumstances.

Art. 708 C. Rights to springs and wells / IV. Community of spring owners

IV. Community of spring owners

1 Where springs located near to each other and belonging to different owners form a group rising from a common catchment basin, each of the owners may request that the springs be collectively captured and channelled to the rightful users in proportion to the existing volume of flow.

2 The costs of the common installations are borne by the rightful users in proportion to their respective interests.

3 If one user opposes the request, each user has the right to capture and divert his or her own spring in the normal manner, even if the volume of flow of the other springs is thereby diminished, and is liable to pay compensation only to the extent that his or her own spring is augmented by the new works.

Art. 709 C. Rights to springs and wells / V. Use of springs

V. Use of springs

The cantons have the right to determine the extent to which privately owned springs, wells and streams may also be used by neighbours and other persons for drawing water, watering livestock and the like.

Art. 710 C. Rights to springs and wells / VI. Right to use an essential water source

VI. Right to use an essential water source

1 If a parcel of land lacks the water required for domestic and farming requirements and if such water cannot be obtained from anywhere else except at an entirely disproportionate cost and effort, the owner may request that a neighbour able to spare such water without suffering hardship allow him or her a share of the latter’s spring or well to him or her in exchange for full compensation.

2 When determining which water source is thus affected, the interests of the person required to supply the water are the primary consideration.

3 Where circumstances change, a modification of the arrangement in place may be requested.

Art. 711 C. Rights to springs and wells / VII. Duty to cede / 1. Water sources

VII. Duty to cede

1. Water sources

1 Where landowners make no use of springs, wells or streams, or make very little use thereof in comparison with their potential utility, they may be required to cede them in exchange for full compensation for supplying drinking water, fire hydrants or other uses in the public interest.

2 Such compensation may take the form of water supplied from the new installation.

Art. 712 C. Rights to springs and wells / VII. Duty to cede / 2. Land

2. Land

Owners of drinking water utilities have the right to expropriate the land surrounding their springs to the extent necessary to protect them from contamination.


  Chapter Three:1  Condominium

Art. 712a A. Definition and object / I. Definition

A. Definition and object

I. Definition

1 Condominium is a form of co-ownership of immovable property that gives the co-owner the exclusive right to make sole use of specific parts of a building thereon and design the interior of such parts.

2 Each condominium owner is free to manage, use and design the structure of his or her own parts of the building as he or she wishes but must not obstruct any other condominium owners in the exercise of their own rights or in any way damage the common parts of the building, fittings and installations or impair their functional effectiveness or appearance.

3 Each condominium owner is obliged to maintain his or her parts of the building in the manner required to preserve the sound condition and good appearance of the building as a whole.

Art. 712b A. Definition and object / II. Object

II. Object

1 The object of the exclusive right may be individual storeys or parts of a storey which must be self-contained with their own access and used either as dwellings or as self-contained units of rooms used for business or other purposes, although separate ancillary rooms are allowed.

2 The condominium owner may not be granted an exclusive right to the following:

1.
the land on which the building stands and the building right by virtue of which it is constructed;
2.
the parts of the building that are vital to the soundness, structure and stability of the building as a whole or of the units of other condominium owners or that determine the outward form and appearance of the building;
3.
the fittings and installations that also serve the other condominium owners in the use of their units.

3 The deed of constitution or a subsequent agreement among the condominium owners executed in the same form may stipulate that other parts of the building are common property, failing which they are presumed to be the object of a exclusive right.

Art. 712c A. Definition and object / III. Power of disposal

III. Power of disposal

1 Condominium owners do not by law have first right of refusal in respect of a third party acquiring a share, but such right may be stipulated in the deed of constitution or by subsequent agreement and entered under priority notice in the land register.

2 Similarly, it may be stipulated that the alienation, encumbrance with usufruct or right of residence or letting of a unit is valid only if the other co-owners do not object by resolution made within 14 days of receiving notice of such transaction.

3 The objection is ineffective if made without good cause.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 712d B. Creation and extinction / I. Deed of constitution

B. Creation and extinction

I. Deed of constitution

1 Condominium is constituted by entry in the land register.

2 Such entry may be requested:

1.
on the basis of an agreement between the condominium owners to constitute their shares as condominium;
2.
on the basis of a declaration by the owner of the property or the holder of a distinct and permanent building right to form shares in co-ownership and to constitute the same as condominium.

3 In order to be valid, the constitution of condominium must be executed in the form of a public deed or, where provided for in a testamentary disposition or in a contract of division of estate, in the form prescribed by the law of succession.

Art. 712e B. Creation and extinction / II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property

II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property1

1 The deed of constitution must specify the manner in which the property is divided into condominium units and define the share that each unit represents of the value of the property or of the building right expressed as fractions with a common denominator.2

2 Alteration of the size of a share requires the consent of all directly involved parties and the approval of the assembly of condominium owners; however, each condominium owner is entitled to seek rectification if his or her share has been defined incorrectly in error or is no longer accurate owing to structural modifications to the building or its surroundings.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712f B. Creation and extinction / III. Extinction

III. Extinction

1 Condominium is extinguished on the loss of the property or the building right and its deletion from the land register.

2 Such deletion may be requested in accordance with a termination agreement or by a single condominium owner holding all the shares, but it requires the consent of all persons with rights in rem to the individual units which cannot be transferred to the property as a whole without detriment.

3 Any condominium owner may request termination of the condominium where:

1.
more than half the value of the building has been destroyed and reconstruction would impose an onerous burden on him; or
2.
the building has been divided into condominium units for more than 50 years and can no longer be used in accordance with the regulations due to its poor structural condition.1

4 Condominium owners wishing to maintain the condominium may prevent such termination by buying out the others.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712g C. Administration and use / I. Applicable provisions

C. Administration and use

I. Applicable provisions

1 The provisions governing co-ownership regulate the authority to take administrative action and instruct construction work.

2 Except where such provisions are mandatory, they may be replaced by others set out in the deed of constitution or adopted by unanimous resolution of the assembly of condominium owners.

3 Moreover, each condominium owner is entitled to request that a set of rules governing administration and use be drawn up and noted in the land register, such rules being binding once accepted by resolution passed by a majority of the condominium owners who together represent more than one-half of the property and being subject to amendment by the same majority even if included in the deed of constitution.

4 Any amendment to the allocation of exclusive rights of use in accordance with the regulations shall also require the consent of the condominium owners directly affected.1


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 712h C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 1. Definition and distribution

II. Communal charges and costs

1. Definition and distribution

1 The condominium owners bear the charges in relation to the communal parts of the property and the costs of joint administration in proportion to the value of their shares.

2 In particular, such charges and costs include:

1.
regular maintenance, repairs and renovations of the communal parts of the parcel of land and the building and shared fittings and installations;
2.
administration, including remuneration of the administrator;
3.
public duties and taxes imposed collectively on the co-owners;
4.
interest and capital repayments to lenders to whom the property is pledged or to whom the condominium owners are jointly and severally liable.

3 Where specific parts of the building, fittings or installations are of little or no benefit to certain condominium owners, the allocation of shared costs must take this into account.

Art. 712i C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 2. Liability for cost contributions / a. Statutory lien

2. Liability for cost contributions

a. Statutory lien

1 The community of condominium owners is entitled to establish a lien on each condominium owner’s unit as security for his or her portion of the shared costs over the previous three years.

2 Registration of the lien may be requested by the administrator or, where no administrator has been appointed, by any condominium owner so authorised by majority resolution or court order and by any person for whom the claim for shared costs has been distrained.

3 In other respects, the provisions governing the establishment of a building contractor’s lien apply mutatis mutandis.

Art. 712k C. Administration and use / II. Communal charges and costs / 2. Liability for cost contributions / b. Special lien

b. Special lien

The community of condominium owners has the same special lien that a lessor would have on the chattels located in the condominium owner’s unit as security for shared costs over the previous three years.

Art. 712l C. Administration and use / III. Community’s capacity to act

III. Community’s capacity to act

1 The community of condominium owners acquires under its own name the revenue derived from its administrative activities, including in particular contributions from the individual condominium owners and the resultant funds, such as the renovation fund.

2 The community of condominium owners may sue and collect debts in its own name and may be sued or subjected to debt enforcement proceedings.1


1 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).

Art. 712m D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 1. Competence and legal status

D. Organisation

I. Assembly of condominium owners

1. Competence and legal status

1 In addition to those rights stipulated in other provisions, the assembly of condominium owners has the following rights in particular:

1.
to decide on all administrative matters outside the administrator’s remit;
2.
to appoint the administrator and supervise his or her activities;
3.
to elect a committee or person to whom it may delegate administrative matters, including in particular the tasks of advising the administrator, superintending his or her management activities, and reporting and making recommendations to the assembly on such matters;
4.
to approve the budget, accounts and division of costs among the condominium owners each year;
5.
to establish a renovation fund for maintenance and renovation;
6.
to safeguard the building against fire and other risks and to take out the customary liability insurance and, furthermore, to require any condominium owner who has fitted his or her unit out at extraordinary expense to pay an additional premium unless he or she has arranged supplementary insurance for his or her own account.

2 In the absence of any specific provisions in the law, the assembly of condominium owners and its delegates are subject to the provisions on governing bodies of associations and challenges to resolutions of associations.

Art. 712n D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 2. Convening and chairing meetings

2. Convening and chairing meetings

1 The assembly of condominium owners is convened and chaired by the administrator, unless the assembly resolves otherwise.

2 Minutes are taken of the assembly’s resolutions and held in safekeeping by the administrator or the chairman of the meeting.

Art. 712o D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 3. Voting rights

3. Voting rights

1 Where a unit is owned by more than one person, these persons together have only one vote, to be cast by one of their number as their representative.

2 Similarly, the owner and the usufructuary of a unit must agree on the exercise of their voting rights, failing which the usufructuary is deemed to hold the right to vote on all administrative matters with the exception of building work carried out for merely useful or decorative purposes or to enhance comfort or convenience.

Art. 712p D. Organisation / I. Assembly of condominium owners / 4. Quorum

4. Quorum

1 The assembly of condominium owners is quorate if one half of the condominium owners representing one half of the shares in condominium, and in any event at least two condominium owners, are present or represented.

2 If the assembly is not quorate, a second meeting must be convened which may be held no earlier than ten days after the first.

3 The second meeting is quorate if one third of the condominium owners, and in any event at least two condominium owners, are present or represented.

Art. 712q D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 1. Appointment

II. Administrator

1. Appointment

1 If the assembly of condominium owners fails to appoint an administrator, any condominium owner is entitled to request the court to appoint one.

2 Other interested parties, such as the pledgee or insurer, have the same right to request court appointment of an administrator.

Art. 712r D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 2. Removal

2. Removal

1 By resolution of the assembly of condominium owners, the administrator may be removed from his or her position at any time, subject to claims for compensation.

2 If the assembly of condominium owners refuses to remove the administrator despite good cause to do so, any condominium owner may, within one month, request the court to remove him or her.

3 A court-appointed administrator may not be removed prior to expiry of the period for which he or she was appointed.

Art. 712s D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 3. Duties / a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use

3. Duties

a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use

1 The administrator shall take all action required for collective administration in accordance with the relevant legal provisions, the rules and resolutions passed by the assembly of condominium owners and must of his or her own accord take all measures urgently needed to prevent or remedy damage to the property.

2 He or she divides the communal costs and charges among the condominium owners, makes out the relevant invoices, collects contributions, manages the available funds and applies them as required by law.

3 He or she ensures that the condominium owners exercise their exclusive rights and use the communal parts of the property and the communal fittings and installations in accordance with the relevant legal provisions, regulations and house rules.

Art. 712t D. Organisation / II. Administrator / 3. Duties / b. External representation

b. External representation

1 The administrator shall represent the condominium owners both as a community and as individuals in all external dealings relating to communal administration within the scope of his or her statutory duties.

2 Except in summary proceedings, the administrator must obtain the prior approval of the assembly of condominium owners to act as plaintiff or defendant in civil proceedings unless the matter is urgent, in which case such approval may be obtained retrospectively.

3 Declarations, demands, judgments and court orders addressed to the community of condominium owners are deemed duly notified once they are served on the administrator at his or her domicile or at the place where the property is situated.


  Title Twenty: Chattel Ownership

Art. 713 A. Object

A. Object

Chattel ownership relates to movable physical objects and to forces of nature that may be the subject of legal rights and which do not form part of any immovable property.

Art. 714 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 1. Delivery of possession

B. Forms of acquisition

I. Transfer

1. Delivery of possession

1 Transfer of chattel ownership requires the delivery of possession to the acquirer.

2 A person who in good faith receives possession of a chattel as owner will become its owner even if the transferor is not authorised to alienate it as soon his or her possession of it is protected according to the provisions governing possession.

Art. 715 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 2. Reservation of ownership / a. In general

2. Reservation of ownership

a. In general

1 Reservation of ownership in respect of a chattel transferred to the acquirer is only effective provided it is entered in the official register kept by the debt enforcement office at his or her current domicile.

2 Reservation of ownership is not permitted in livestock trading.

Art. 716 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 2. Reservation of ownership / b. Transactions involving payment by instalments

b. Transactions involving payment by instalments

An object transferred under reservation of ownership may be reclaimed by the owner only on condition that he or she reimburse any payments made for it by the acquirer after deduction of an appropriate rental charge and compensation for wear and tear.

Art. 717 B. Forms of acquisition / I. Transfer / 3. Acquisition without possession

3. Acquisition without possession

1 If as a result of a special legal relationship, the chattel remains in the transferor’s possession, this transfer of ownership is null and void in relation third parties if the underlying intention was to disadvantage them or to circumvent the provisions governing the pledging of chattels.

2 The court shall rules on this at its discretion.

Art. 718 B. Forms of acquisition / II. Appropriation / 1. Ownerless chattels

II. Appropriation

1. Ownerless chattels

Ownership of an ownerless chattel is acquired by the act of taking it into possession with the intention of becoming its owner.

Art. 719 B. Forms of acquisition / II. Appropriation / 2. Escaped animals

2. Escaped animals

1 Captured animals become ownerless if they regain their freedom and their owner fails to search for them immediately and persistently with a view to recapturing them.

2 Domesticated animals become ownerless once they regress to a feral state and no longer return to their masters.

3 Swarms of bees do not become ownerless by virtue of straying onto land belonging to others.

Art. 720 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 1. Reporting, tracing / a. In general

III. Found property

1. Reporting, tracing

a. In general1

1 A person finding a lost object must inform its owner and, if the latter is unknown, either report the find to the police or himself take appropriate steps to publicise the find and trace the owner.

2 He or she has a duty to report the find to the police if the value of the object clearly exceeds ten francs.

3 A person who finds an object in an occupied house or on premises used for public services or public transport must deposit it with the head of the household, the tenant or the supervisor.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 720a1B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 1. Reporting, tracing / b. Animals

b. Animals

1 A person who finds a lost animal must, subject to Art. 720 para. 3, inform the owner or, if the latter is unknown, report his or her find.

2 The cantons designate the authority to which such finds must be reported.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806). Para. 2 comes into force on 1 April 2004.

Art. 721 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 2. Safekeeping and auction

2. Safekeeping and auction

1 A find must be held in appropriate safekeeping.

2 If it requires expensive maintenance or is susceptible to rapid deterioration, or if the police or a public body has held it for more than one year, it may be sold at public auction with the prior authorisation of the competent authority.

3 The proceeds of sale at auction replace the object.

Art. 722 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 3. Acquisition of ownership, return

3. Acquisition of ownership, return

1 A person who has discharged his or her duties as finder acquires ownership of the find if it has not been possible to trace the rightful owner within five years of the announcement or public notice being given of the find.

1bis In the case of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the period is two months.1

1ter If the finder puts the animal in a home with the intention of renouncing its ownership, on expiry of the two-month period the animal home is at liberty to dispose of the animal as it sees fit.2

2 If the find is returned to its owner, the finder is entitled to compensation for all outlays and to a suitable finder’s reward.

3 In the case of a find made in an occupied house or on premises used for public services or public transport, the head of the household, tenant or supervisor is deemed to be the finder but is not entitled to any finder’s reward.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).

Art. 723 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 4. Treasure trove

4. Treasure trove

1 If an object of value is found in circumstances indicating with certainty that it has lain buried or hidden so long that it will not be possible to trace its owner, it is treated as treasure trove.

2 Subject to the provisions governing objects of scientific value, treasure trove belongs to the owner of the land or chattel where it was found.

3 The finder is entitled to an appropriate finder’s reward not exceeding one-half of the treasure’s value.

Art. 724 B. Forms of acquisition / III. Found property / 5. Objects of scientific value

5. Objects of scientific value

1 Ownerless natural specimens and antiquities of scientific value are the property of the canton on whose territory they are found.1

1bis Such objects must not be alienated without the consent of the competent cantonal authorities. They may not be purchased in good faith or acquired through adverse possession. There is no prescriptive period on the canton’s right to recover them.2

2 The owner of the land on which such objects are found is obliged to permit their excavation in exchange for compensation for the damage caused.

3 The finder, and in the case of treasure trove also the owner is entitled to an appropriate finder’s reward not exceeding one-half of the value of the find.


1 Amended by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).
2 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 725 B. Forms of acquisition / IV. Driftage

IV. Driftage

1 If chattels are carried onto a person’s property by water, wind, avalanche or other force of nature or by chance event, or if animals belonging to others stray onto his or her property, such a person has the rights and obligations of the finder of a lost object.

2 If a swarm of bees flies into an occupied beehive belonging to another person, the owner of that hive acquires said swarm without obligation to compensate.

Art. 726 B. Forms of acquisition / V. Processing

V. Processing

1 If a person has processed or reworked an object that does not belong to him, the newly created object becomes the property of that person if the work is more valuable than the material, failing which it belongs to the original owner.

2 Where the person doing such work did not act in good faith, the court may award the newly created object to the original owner even if his or her work is more valuable than the material.

3 Claims for damages and unjust enrichment are reserved.

Art. 727 B. Forms of acquisition / VI. Joining and mixing chattels

VI. Joining and mixing chattels

1 If chattels belonging to different owners are mixed or joined together such that they may no longer be separated without substantial damage or prohibitive labour and expense, those involved acquire joint ownership rights in the new object in proportion to the value of the constituent parts at the time that they were mixed or joined.

2 If one chattel is mixed with or joined to another such that it acquires the character of a secondary component of the latter, the entire object belongs to the owner of the primary component.

3 Claims for damages and unjust enrichment are reserved.

Art. 728 B. Forms of acquisition / VII. Adverse possession

VII. Adverse possession

1 If a person has possessed a chattel belonging to another person uninterruptedly and without challenge for five years believing in good faith that he or she owns it, he or she becomes its owner by adverse possession.

1bis In the case of animals kept as pets rather than for investment or commercial purposes, the period is two months.1

1ter Subject to exceptions prescribed by law, the time limit for adverse possession in the case of objects of cultural heritage within the meaning of Art. 2 para. 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 20032 is 30 years.3

2 Involuntary loss of possession does not interrupt adverse possession provided the possessor regains the chattel within one year or by means of legal action brought within the same time limit.

3 The computation, interruption and suspension of adverse possession time limits are governed mutatis mutandis by the provisions on the prescription of debts.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5806).
2 SR 444.1
3 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 729 C. Loss

C. Loss

Even where possession has been lost, ownership of the chattel is not extinguished until the owner relinquishes his or her right or until another person subsequently acquires ownership.


  Division Two: Limited Rights in rem

  Title Twenty-One: Easements and Real Burdens

  Chapter One: Easements

Art. 730 A. Object

A. Object

1 A parcel of land may be encumbered in favour of another property such that the servient owner must permit the owner of the dominant property to exercise certain rights over it to or may not exercise certain of the rights attaching to his or her property for the benefit of the owner of the dominant property.

2 An obligation to carry out certain acts may only be accessory to an easement. Any person acquiring the dominant or servient property is only bound by such an obligation if it is based on an entry in the land register.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 731 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 1. Registration

B. Creation and extinction

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 An easement is created by entry in the land register.

2 The provisions governing land ownership apply to the acquisition or registration of an easement, except where otherwise provided.

3 Adverse possession of an easement is possible only in respect of parcels of land which may be possessed adversely.

Art. 7321B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 2. Legal transaction

2. Legal transaction

1 The legal transaction creating an easement is only valid if done as a public deed.

2 If in the circumstances the exercise of the easement is limited to part of the dominant property and if the geographical location is not sufficiently identifiable in the certificate of legal title, it must be shown in a diagram in an extract of the plan for the land register.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 733 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 3. Creation in favour of own property

3. Creation in favour of own property

The owner of a property may create an easement on a property in favour of another property which he or she also owns.

Art. 734 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. In general

II. Extinction

1. In general

An easement is extinguished with the deletion of its registration or the complete loss of either the servient or the dominant property.

Art. 735 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Amalgamation

2. Amalgamation

1 If the beneficiary of an easement becomes the servient owner, he or she may have the easement deleted from the land register.

2 If it is not deleted, the easement remains in place as a right in rem.

Art. 736 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. By court order

3. By court order

1 If an easement is of no value to the dominant property, the servient owner may request its deletion.

2 If the dominant property still derives a benefit from the easement but this is minor and disproportionate to the encumbrance, the easement may be partly or wholly cancelled in return for compensation.

Art. 737 C. Nature / I. Scope / 1. In general

C. Nature

I. Scope

1. In general

1 The beneficiary is entitled to take all measures necessary to preserve and exercise the easement.

2 However, he or she is obliged to exercise his or her rights as benignly as possible.

3 The servient owner must not do anything to obstruct the exercise of the easement or render it more difficult.

Art. 738 C. Nature / I. Scope / 2. As defined by land register entry

2. As defined by land register entry

1 The land register entry for an easement defines the scope of the easement, provided it clearly indicates the attendant rights and duties.

2 Within the limits of such entry, the scope of the easement may be inferred from the reason for its creation or from the fact that it has been exercised unchallenged and in good faith for some length of time.

Art. 739 C. Nature / I. Scope / 3. If needs change

3. If needs change

Additional encumbrances may not be imposed on the servient owner if the needs of the dominant property change.

Art. 740 C. Nature / I. Scope / 4. Cantonal law and local custom

4. Cantonal law and local custom

In the absence of any other specific arrangement in a given case, cantonal law and local custom shall govern rights of way, such as footpaths, bridle paths, carriageways, field paths, rights of transit in the dead season or for carting wood, rights of pasture, of transit for watering cattle or for irrigation and similar rights.

Art. 740a1C. Nature / I. Scope / 5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries

5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries

1 If two or more beneficiaries benefit from common fixtures based on the same easement and if no other agreement exists, the provisions applicable to co-owners apply by analogy.

2 The right to leave the community by waiving the easement may be excluded for a maximum of 30 years by agreement in the form specified for the easement agreement. The agreement may be noted in the land register.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 741 C. Nature / II. Duty of maintenance

II. Duty of maintenance

1 The beneficiary is responsible for maintaining any fixtures required for the exercise of an easement.

2 If the fixture also serves the interests of the servient owner, both parties are responsible for its maintenance in proportion to their interests. An alternative arrangement is binding on the acquirer of the dominant and the acquirer of the servient property if there is proof thereof in the land register.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 742 C. Nature / III. Relocation of the encumbrance

III. Relocation of the encumbrance1

1 If only part of a property is affected by the exercise of an easement, the servient owner is entitled, provided he or she can show a legitimate interest and bears the cost, to request that the right be transferred to another location which is no less suitable for the beneficiary.

2 He or she is entitled to do so even if the easement is recorded in the land register as being in a specific location.

3 ...2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7431C. Nature / IV. Partition of a property

IV. Partition of a property

1 If the dominant property is partitioned, the easement normally continues to exist in favour of each part of the dominant property.

2 If according to the documentary evidence or the circumstances the exercise of the easement is limited to individual parts of the property, it must be deleted in respect of the other parts.

3 The revision procedure is governed by the regulations on the deletion and amendment of land register entries.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7441

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: Usufruct and other Personal Servitudes

Art. 745 A. Usufruct / I. Object

A. Usufruct

I. Object

1 A usufruct may be held over chattels, immovable property, rights or assets.

2 Unless otherwise provided, it confers complete enjoyment of the object on the usufructuary.

3 A usufruct of immovable property may be limited to a specific part thereof.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 Jan. 2004 (AS 2003 4121; BBl 2002 4721).

Art. 746 A. Usufruct / II. Establishment / 1. In general

II. Establishment

1. In general

1 A usufruct of chattels or debts is established by transfer to the acquirer and a usufruct of immovable property by entry in the land register.

2 The provisions governing ownership apply to the acquisition of a usufruct of chattels and of immovable property as well as to entry in the land register, except where otherwise provided.

Art. 7471A. Usufruct / II. Establishment / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 748 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 1. Grounds

III. Extinction

1. Grounds

1 Usufruct is extinguished in the event of the complete loss of the object to which it applies and in the case of immovable property on deletion of the entry from the land register where the entry was required to establish the usufruct.

2 Other grounds for extinction, such as the passage of time or the renunciation or death of the usufructuary, confer on the owner only a right to apply for the deletion of the entry.

3 A statutory usufruct ends on cessation of its cause.

Art. 749 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 2. Duration

2. Duration

1 Usufruct ceases with the death of the usufructuary and in the case of legal entities on their dissolution.

2 In the case of legal entities, however, it may not last more than 100 years.

Art. 750 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct

3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct

1 The owner of the object of a usufruct is not obliged to replace or restore the object if it has been destroyed.

2 If it is replaced or restored the usufruct is restored with it.

3 If an object that has been destroyed is replaced, as may be the case with compulsory purchase and insurance indemnities, the usufruct continues on the replacement object.

Art. 751 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / a. Duty

4. Return

a. Duty

When the usufruct ends, the person in possession of the object must return it to the owner.

Art. 752 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / b. Liability

b. Liability

1 The usufructuary is liable for complete loss or deterioration of the object, unless he or she shows that he or she was not at fault.

2 He or she must replace any items which have been used up if such consumption is not intrinsic to the use of the object.

3 He or she is not obliged to compensate for any depreciation caused by the proper use of the object.

Art. 753 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 4. Return / c. Costs

c. Costs

1 If the usufructuary has of his or her own free will incurred costs or made improvements, on return of the object he or she may request compensation in accordance with the provisions governing agency without authority.

2 He or she is entitled to remove any fixtures he or she has installed for which the owner is not prepared to pay compensation; he or she is, however, obliged to restore the object to its previous condition.

Art. 754 A. Usufruct / III. Extinction / 5. Prescription of compensation rights

5. Prescription of compensation rights

The owner’s right to compensation for alterations or depreciation and the usufructuary’s right to compensation for expenditure or to remove fixtures prescribe one year after the return of the object.

Art. 755 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / a. In general

IV. Scope

1. Rights of the usufructuary

a. In general

1 The usufructuary has the rights of possession, use and enjoyment of the object.

2 He or she is responsible for looking after it.

3 In the exercise of these rights, he or she must exercise reasonable care.

Art. 756 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / b. Natural fruits

b. Natural fruits

1 Natural fruits belong to the usufructuary if they have ripened during the period of the usufruct.

2 The person who has cultivated the land is entitled to claim equitable compensation for his or her costs from the person who receives the ripe fruits, whereby this compensation should not exceed their value.

3 Constituent parts of the usufruct other than fruits or produce belong to the owner.

Art. 757 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / c. Interest

c. Interest

Interest on usufructuary capital and other periodic returns accrue to the usufructuary from the day on which the usufruct begins until the day on which it ends, even if they mature at a later date.

Art. 758 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 1. Rights of the usufructuary / d. Assignability

d. Assignability

1 Unless it is a strictly personal right, the exercise of the usufruct may be assigned to another person.

2 The owner is entitled to assert his or her rights directly against such person.

Art. 759 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / a. Supervision

2. Rights of the owner

a. Supervision

The owner may object to any unlawful or inappropriate use of the object.

Art. 760 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / b. Security

b. Security

1 The owner is entitled to request security from the usufructuary providing he or she may show that his or her rights are jeopardised.

2 He or she is entitled to request security without such showing and already before transfer where consumable objects or securities are the object of the usufruct.

3 If securities are the object of the usufruct, their deposit constitutes sufficient security.

Art. 761 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct

c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct

1 A person who has transferred an object as a gift while reserving a personal right of usufruct may not be required to provide security.

2 The obligation to provide security in the case of statutory usufruct is subject to the specific rules governing the legal relationship.

Art. 762 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 2. Rights of the owner / d. Consequence of failure to provide security

d. Consequence of failure to provide security

If the usufructuary fails to provide security within the reasonable time limit set for that purpose, or if he or she persists in using the object unlawfully despite the owner’s objections, the court may dispossess him or her of the object until further notice and appoint a trustee.

Art. 763 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 3. Inventory

3. Inventory

The owner and the usufructuary have the right at any time to request that a publicly notarised inventory of the objects subject to the usufruct be drawn up at their joint expense.

Art. 764 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / a. Preservation of the object

4. Costs

a. Preservation of the object

1 The usufructuary must preserve the object in its original condition and of his or her own accord carry out such repairs and renovations as constitute normal maintenance.

2 If more substantial work or measures are necessary to protect the object, the usufructuary must inform the owner and allow such work to be carried out.

3 If the owner does not attend to the matter, the usufructuary is authorised to take the necessary steps at the owner’s expense.

Art. 765 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / b. Maintenance and administration

b. Maintenance and administration

1 The usufructuary must bear the costs of the normal maintenance and administration of the object, the interest on the attendant debt and taxes and other duties for the duration of his or her rights over the object.

2 If the taxes and duties are payable by the owner, the usufructuary must compensate him or her to the same extent.

3 All other charges are borne by the owner, but if the usufructuary does not advance the owner the necessary funds on request, he or she is entitled to dispose of parts of the usufruct for this purpose.

Art. 766 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets

c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets

In the case of a usufruct of assets, the usufructuary must pay interest on the debts but, where justified in the circumstances, is entitled on request to be released from that obligation by redemption of the debt so that afterwards the usufruct is confined to the remainder of the assets.

Art. 767 A. Usufruct / IV. Scope / 4. Costs / d. Insurance

d. Insurance

1 The usufructuary must insure the object in favour of the owner against fire and other risks to the extent such insurance is required under the duty of care required by local custom.

2 Where this is the case, and also where a usufruct is established on an already insured object, the usufructuary bears the costs of the insurance for the duration of the usufruct.

Art. 768 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / a. Fruits

V. Special cases

1. Land

a. Fruits

1 The usufructuary of immovable property must ensure that it is not exploited beyond the normal limits by the type of use to which it is put.

2 To the extent that fruits are collected beyond such limits they belong to the owner.

Art. 769 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / b. Use

b. Use

1 The usufructuary must not change the intended use of the immovable property in a manner that is significantly detrimental to the owner.

2 He or she must neither transform nor substantially modify the object.

3 He or she may dig quarries, marl pits, peat cuttings and the like only after giving prior notice to the owner and on condition that the intended use of the immovable property is not substantially changed.

Art. 770 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / c. Woodland

c. Woodland

1 The usufructuary of woodland is entitled to farm it within the limits of a reasonable business plan.

2 Both owner and usufructuary may require compliance with a plan which takes due account of their rights.

3 Where there is large-scale loss of woodland caused by storm, snow, fire, insect infestation or other factors, either the exploitation must gradually be reduced or the business plan adapted to the changed circumstances; income realised from the clearing of timber must be invested at interest and serves as compensation for the loss of woodland.

Art. 771 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 1. Land / d. Mines

d. Mines

The provisions governing the usufruct of woodland apply mutatis mutandis to the usufruct of objects, such as mines, whose use involves the extraction of substances from the earth.

Art. 772 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 2. Consumables and valued chattels

2. Consumables and valued chattels

1 In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the usufructuary becomes the owner of consumable objects but is liable to replace the value they had at the beginning of the usufruct.

2 Where any other chattels which have been valued are transferred to the usufructuary he or she may, in the absence of an agreement to the contrary, freely dispose of them but is liable for their replacement if he or she exercises such right.

3 Agricultural equipment, herds of animals, stores of goods and the like may be replaced with objects of the same kind and quality.

Art. 773 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / a. Scope

3. Claims

a. Scope

1 A usufruct of debts entitles the usufructuary to retain the realised revenue.

2 Notices of termination to the debtor and dispositions relating to securities subject to a usufruct must be made jointly by the creditor and the usufructuary; notices of termination by the debtor must be addressed to both.

3 If a debt is at risk, the creditor and the usufructuary have a mutual right to request each other’s consent to such measures as are required to ensure diligent administration.

Art. 774 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / b. Repayments and reinvestment

b. Repayments and reinvestment

1 If the debtor is not specifically authorised to repay either the creditor or the usufructuary, he or she must pay them jointly or deposit the amount.

2 The benefit received, such as the repayment of the principal, if under the usufruct.

3 Both creditor and usufructuary are entitled to a secure, interest-bearing reinvestment of the principal.

Art. 775 A. Usufruct / V. Special cases / 3. Claims / c. Right to assignment

c. Right to assignment

1 The usufructuary has the right to request the assignment of the debts and securities over which he or she has a usufruct within three months of the beginning thereof.

2 Once assignment has been effected, he or she is liable to the former creditor for the value of the debts and securities as at the date of assignment and is required to provide security for that amount unless waived by the creditor.

3 If the creditor has not waived his or her right to security, the assignment becomes effective only once security has been posted.

Art. 776 B. Right of residence / I. In general

B. Right of residence

I. In general

1 The right of residence is the right to live in all or part of a building.

2 It is neither transferable nor heritable.

3 It is subject to the provisions governing usufruct unless the law provides otherwise.

Art. 777 B. Right of residence / II. Rights of the usufructuary

II. Rights of the usufructuary

1 The scope of the right of residence is generally tailored to the personal requirements of the usufructuary.

2 However, unless the right is expressly restricted to the person of the holder, he or she may share the residence with his or her family and household.

3 If the right of residence is limited to part of a building, the holder may use the fittings and installations intended for common use.

Art. 778 B. Right of residence / III. Maintenance costs

III. Maintenance costs

1 If the right of residence is exclusive, the usufructuary bears the costs of ordinary maintenance.

2 If the right of residence is exercised jointly with the owner, the latter bears the maintenance costs.

Art. 779 C. Building right / I. Object and entry in the land register

C. Building right

I. Object and entry in the land register1

1 Immovable property may be encumbered with an easement entitling a third party to erect or maintain a construction above or below ground on such land.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, this right is transferable and heritable.

3 If the building right has the character of a distinct and permanent right it may be recorded in the land register as immovable property.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779a1C. Building right / II. Legal transaction

II. Legal transaction

1 The legal transaction creating a building right is only valid if done as a public deed.

2 If the remuneration for the building right and any other contractual provisions should be noted in the land register, they are also only valid if done as a public deed.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779b1C. Building right / III. Nature, scope and noting

III. Nature, scope and noting2

1 Contractual provisions on the nature and scope of a building right, such as location, design, size and purpose of the buildings, as well as on the use of land which, although not built on, is used in the exercise of the building right, are binding on every new owner of the right and the servient property.

2 Additional contractual provisions may be noted in the land register, if the parties so agree.3


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779c1C. Building right / IV. Consequences of expiry / 1. Reversion

IV. Consequences of expiry

1. Reversion

When the building right expires, any existing construction reverts to the landowner and becomes an integral part of his or her parcel of land.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779d1C. Building right / IV. Consequences of expiry / 2. Compensation

2. Compensation

1 The landowner must pay the holder of the expired right adequate compensation for the buildings which have reverted to his or her ownership, but such compensation is subject to the outstanding claims of creditors to whom the building right was pledged as security and is not payable to the holder of the building right without their consent.

2 If the compensation has neither been paid nor secured, the holder of the expired right or a creditor to whom the building right was pledged as security may request that a mortgage right be registered in place of and with the same rank as the expired right as security for the compensation claim.

3 Such registration must be made within three months of expiry of the building right.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779e1

1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969). Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 779f1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 1. Prerequisites

V. Premature reversion

1. Prerequisites

If the holder of the building right grossly violates his or her right in rem or his or her contractual obligations, the owner is entitled to premature reversion by requesting that the building right with all rights and encumbrances be transferred back to him or her.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779g1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 2. Exercising the right of reversion

2. Exercising the right of reversion

1 The right of reversion may be exercised only provided adequate compensation is paid for the reverting buildings, the amount payable being susceptible to reduction if the holder of the building right is at fault.

2 The building right will not be transferred to the owner until the compensation has been paid or secured.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779h1C. Building right / V. Premature reversion / 3. Other applicable cases

3. Other applicable cases

The provisions governing the exercise of the right of reversion apply to all rights reserved by the landowner to terminate or reclaim the building right prematurely in the event of breach of duty.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779i1C. Building right / VI. Liability for remuneration for the right / 1. Right to establish a lien

VI. Liability for remuneration for the right

1. Right to establish a lien

1 Provided the building right is recorded in the land register, the landowner is entitled to established a lien thereon against each current holder as security for up to three annual payments.

2 Where the remuneration does not consist of equal annual payments, the landowner is entitled to record a statutory lien for an amount aggregating three annual payments.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779k1C. Building right / VI. Liability for remuneration for the right / 2. Registration

2. Registration

1 The lien may be recorded at any time during the existence of the building right and is exempt from deletion in compulsory sale proceedings.

2 The provisions governing recording of a building contractor’s lien apply mutatis mutandis.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 779l1C. Building right / VII. Maximum duration

VII. Maximum duration

1 A building right may be established as a distinct right for a maximum of 100 years.

2 It may be prolonged at any time for a further period of up to 100 years in the same form as that required for its establishment, but any obligation to do so stipulated in advance is not binding.


1 Inserted by section I of the FA of 19 March 1965, in force since 1 July 1965 (AS 1965 445; BBl 1963 I 969).

Art. 780 D. Right of access to water sources

D. Right of access to water sources

1 The right of access to a water source on a parcel of land owned by another encumbers such land with a servitude permitting the drawing and channelling-off of water.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, the right is transferable and heritable.

3 If the right of access to water is distinct and permanent, it may be recorded in the land register as immovable property.

Art. 781 E. Other servitudes

E. Other servitudes

1 An owner may establish other servitudes on his or her property in favour of any person or group if such servitudes meet a particular need, such as rights of access for shooting practice or rights of way.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, such servitudes are non-transferable and their nature and scope is based on the beneficiaries’ normal needs.

3 In other respects they are subject to the provisions governing easements.

Art. 781a1F. Judicial measures

F. Judicial measures

The beneficiaries of an easement recorded in the land register are subject by analogy to the provisions on judicial measures in the event that the owner cannot be found or in the absence of the required management bodies of a legal entity.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Three: Real Burdens

Art. 782 A. Object

A. Object

1 A real burden obliges an owner of immovable property to fulfil an obligation to a beneficiary for which he or she is liable solely with the immovable property.

2 The current owner of another property may be designated as the beneficiary.

3 Other than in the case of public law real burdens, a real burden may have as its object only one obligation, which is determined either by the nature of the servient property or the economic needs of the benefited property.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 783 B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment / 1. Registration and form of acquisition

B. Establishment and extinction

I. Establishment

1. Registration and form of acquisition

1 A real burden is established by recording in the land register.

2 The entry must stipulate a total value for the real burden denominated in Swiss currency which, in the case of periodic payments and in the absence of any agreement to the contrary, shall equal twenty times the annual payment.

3 The provisions governing land ownership apply to the acquisition or registration of real burdens, unless otherwise provided.

Art. 7841B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment / 2. Public law real burdens

2. Public law real burdens

The establishment of public law real burdens and their effect in relation to third parties acting in good faith is governed by analogy by the provisions of cantonal law on statutory liens.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 7851

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 786 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. In general

II. Extinction

1. In general

1 A real burden is extinguished on deletion of the entry or on the complete loss of the servient property.

2 In the case of redemption, replacement or other causes of extinction, the burdened owner acquires a right against the beneficiary for the deletion of the entry.

Art. 787 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / a. By the creditor

2. Redemption

a. By the creditor

1 The creditor may request redemption of the real burden by agreement and also:1

1.2
if the servient property has been divided and the creditor does not accept the transfer of the debt to the divided parts;
2.
if the owner reduces the value of the land without providing other security by way of replacement;
3.
if the debtor is in arrears for three years’ worth of performance.

2 If the creditor requests redemption due to the division of the property, the he or she must give one year’s notice of termination within one month of the transfer becoming legally binding.3


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 788 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / b. By the debtor

b. By the debtor

1 The debtor may request redemption of the real burden by agreement, and also:

1.
if the beneficiary fails to abide by the agreement establishing the real burden;
2.
if the real burden has been in existence for thirty years, even where a longer duration or a charge in perpetuity was agreed.

2 If the debtor wishes to redeem the charge after thirty years, he or she must in every case give notice of termination one year in advance.

3 The real burden may not be redeemed in such manner if it is linked with a perpetual easement.

Art. 789 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Redemption / c. Redemption sum

c. Redemption sum

The redemption sum is equal to the amount recorded in the land register as the total value of the real burden, unless its real value is shown to be less.

Art. 790 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Prescription

3. Prescription

1 A real burden is not subject to prescription.

2 Each individual obligation is subject to prescription from the time it becomes the obligor’s personal debt.

Art. 791 C. Scope / I. Creditor’s rights

C. Scope

I. Creditor’s rights

1 The real burden creditor has no personal claim against the debtor, but only the right to satisfaction from the servient property.

2 However, three years after it if due, each individual obligation becomes a personal obligation for which the property is no longer liable.

Art. 792 C. Scope / II. Debt liability

II. Debt liability

1 If the land changes ownership, the new owner automatically becomes the obligor under the real burden.

2 If the land is divided, the owners of the divided parts become debtors under the real burden. The debt is apportioned over the divided parts of the property in accordance with the provisions on mortgage contracts.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Title Twenty-Two: Mortgages

  Chapter One: General Provisions

Art. 793 A. Requirements / I. Types

A. Requirements

I. Types

1 A mortgage may be created on immovable property in the form of a mortgage contract or a mortgage certificate.1

2 No other types of mortgage are permitted.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 794 A. Requirements / II. Form of the debt / 1. Amount

II. Form of the debt

1. Amount

1 Whenever a mortgage is created, a specific amount denominated in Swiss currency must be indicated as the debt.

2 If the amount of the debt is unspecified, a maximum amount must be indicated up to which the property is liable for all claims of the creditor.

Art. 795 A. Requirements / II. Form of the debt / 2. Interest

2. Interest

1 The interest payable may be set at any level at the parties’ discretion within the legal limits imposed to prevent abusive interest rates.

2 Cantonal law may provide for a maximum permissible interest rate for debts secured by mortgages.

Art. 796 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 1. Property subject to a charge

III. Immovable property

1. Property subject to a charge

1 A mortgage may be created only on immovable property recorded in the land register.

2 The cantons may prohibit or enact special provisions to regulate the creation of mortgages over publicly owned land or over common land and pastures owned by corporations, and over any associated rights of use.

Art. 797 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 2. Specification / a. In the case of a single property

2. Specification

a. In the case of a single property

1 Where a mortgage is created, the immovable property that it encumbers must be clearly specified.

2 Parts of a property may not be made subject to a mortgage unless the division of the property has been recorded in the land register.

Art. 798 A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 2. Specification / b. In the case of more than one property

b. In the case of more than one property

1 A mortgage right may be created on two or more properties for a single debt provided the properties are all owned by the same person or by debtors who are jointly and severally liable.

2 In all other cases where more than one property is made subject to a mortgage as security for a single debt, each of the properties shall be encumbered for a specified portion of the total debt.

3 Unless otherwise agreed, the total amount secured by the mortgage is divided in proportion to the values of the properties.

Art. 798a1A. Requirements / III. Immovable property / 3. Agricultural properties

3. Agricultural properties

The Federal Act of 4 October 19912 on Rural Land Rights applies to the establishment of mortgages over agricultural properties.


1 Inserted by Art. 92 No 1 of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on Rural Land Rights, in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1410; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 SR 211.412.11

Art. 799 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 1. Registration

B. Creation and extinction

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 Subject to exceptions provided by law, a mortgage is created by its recording in the land register.

2 A legal transaction creating a mortgage is valid only if done as a public deed.1


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 800 B. Creation and extinction / I. Creation / 2. In the case of joint ownership

2. In the case of joint ownership

1 In the case of joint ownership of a property, each joint owner may create a mortgage over his or her share.

2 In the case of collective ownership, the property may be made subject to a mortgage only as a whole and in the name of all co-owners.

Art. 801 B. Creation and extinction / II. Extinction

II. Extinction

1 A mortgage is extinguished on deletion of the entry or the complete loss of the property.

2 Extinction as a result of compulsory purchase is governed by federal and cantonal compulsory purchase law.

Art. 802 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 1. Transfer of liens

III. Charges on consolidated land

1. Transfer of liens

1 In the case of land consolidation procedures carried out with the assistance or under the supervision of the public authorities, the mortgage rights assigned are transferred with the same ranking to the land allotted by way of replacement.

2 Where one parcel of land replaces several parcels which are subject to a mortgage as security for different debts, or not all of which are subject to a mortgage, the liens will be applied to the single parcel of land and their ranking preserved wherever possible.

Art. 803 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 2. Redemption by the debtor

2. Redemption by the debtor

The debtor is entitled to redeem liens on parcels of land involved in a land consolidation procedure by giving three months’ notice expiring on the date on which such consolidation takes effect.

Art. 804 B. Creation and extinction / III. Charges on consolidated land / 3. Monetary compensation

3. Monetary compensation

1 Where monetary compensation is received in connection with the consolidation of parcels of land subject to mortgages, such funds are distributed among the creditors according to their rank or, if of equal rank, in proportion to the size of their claims.

2 Such compensation must not be paid to the debtor without the creditors’ consent if it exceeds one-twentieth of the secured debt, or if the new parcel of land no longer provides sufficient security.

Art. 805 C. Effect / I. Extent of security

C. Effect

I. Extent of security

1 A mortgage right encumbers the entire property including all its constituent parts and accessories.

2 If accessories, such as machines or hotel furnishings, are expressly listed in the mortgage agreement and noted as such in the land register, they are treated accordingly unless it is shown that the law precludes their qualification as accessories.

3 Rights of third parties to the accessories are reserved.

Art. 806 C. Effect / II. Rent

II. Rent

1 If the mortgaged property is let, the mortgage covers the rent claims which accrue between the date on which foreclosure proceedings are commenced or the date on which the debtor is declared bankrupt and the date of realisation.

2 Tenants and lessees are bound by the mortgage only once they have been informed of the enforcement proceedings or the bankruptcy has been published.

3 Transactions by the property owner involving claims for unmatured rent and any actions of distraint by other creditors are invalid in respect of any mortgage creditor who initiated foreclosure proceedings before the rent claims matured.

Art. 807 C. Effect / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

Claims for which a mortgage has been recorded in the land register are not subject to prescription.

Art. 808 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 1. In the event of a reduction in value / a. Court order and action by the creditor

IV. Safeguarding powers

1. In the event of a reduction in value

a. Court order and action by the creditor

1 If the owner reduces the value of the mortgaged property, the creditor may request that the court prohibit any further detrimental action.

2 The creditor may be authorised by the court to take appropriate measures and may do so even without authorisation if there is risk in delay.

3 He or she may request compensation for the costs of such measures from the owner and shall acquire a lien on the property for the corresponding amount. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.1

4 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of completion of the measures, it may not cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 809 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 1. In the event of a reduction in value / b. Security, restoration, redemption

b. Security, restoration, redemption

1 If the property has depreciated, the creditor has the right to request that the debtor secure his or her debts or restore the property to its previous state.

2 He or she may also demand security in the case of imminent depreciation.

3 If the debtor does not comply within the time limit set by the court, the creditor may request redemption of such portion of the debt as is appropriate to compensate for the reduced degree of security.

Art. 810 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 2. Depreciation without owner’s fault

2. Depreciation without owner’s fault

1 In the event of depreciation without fault on the owner’s part, the creditor has a right to security or redemption only if the owner is indemnified for the damage.

2 However, the creditor is entitled to take measures to prevent or eliminate the depreciation. He or she shall acquire a lien on the property for his or her costs which does not render the owner personally liable. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.1

3 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of completion of the measures, it may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 811 C. Effect / IV. Safeguarding powers / 3. Disposal of minor portions of the property

3. Disposal of minor portions of the property

If a part of the property worth less than one-twentieth of the secured debt is disposed of, the creditor may not refuse to release this portion from liability under the lien provided a proportionate repayment of the debt is made or the rest of the property provides him or her with sufficient security.

Art. 812 C. Effect / V. Further encumbrances

V. Further encumbrances

1 Any waiver by the owner of right to create further charges over the servient property is non-binding.

2 If, after the mortgage right has been created, the immovable property is encumbered with an easement or a real burden without the mortgage creditor’s consent, the mortgage right takes precedence over the later encumbrances, which will be deleted if, in the event of enforcement proceedings, their existence is prejudicial to the mortgage creditor.

3 However, the beneficiary of the easement or real burden has a claim for payment of the value of his or her right out of the enforcement proceeds, such claim taking precedence over the beneficiaries of encumbrances subsequently recorded in the land register.

Art. 813 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 1. Effect of rank

VI. Rank

1. Effect of rank

1 A mortgage is confined to the rank indicated in the entry.

2 Mortgage rights may be established in a second or any lower rank provided the amount taking precedence is specified in the entry.

Art. 814 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 2. Ranking

2. Ranking

1 If mortgage rights of different rank are created on an immovable property, any deletion does not entitle the beneficiaries of lower-ranking mortgage to advance in rank.

2 The owner may create another mortgage in place of one which has been deleted.

3 An agreement providing for mortgage creditors to advance in rank only has in rem effect where it is recorded as a priority notice in the land register.

Art. 815 C. Effect / VI. Rank / 3. Vacant ranks

3. Vacant ranks

If a subordinate mortgage right is created and no higher-ranking mortgage exists, or if the debtor has not yet made use of an existing higher-ranking right to create a mortgage, or if a precedent claim is worth less than the amount recorded in the land register, in the event of foreclosure, the proceeds are distributed among the actual mortgage creditors according to their rank and irrespective of vacant ranks.

Art. 816 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 1. Mode

VII. Foreclosure

1. Mode

1 In the event of default on the part of the debtor, the creditor has the right to payment out of the proceeds of the sale of the property.

2 Any agreement stipulating that the property subject to the mortgage will become the property of the creditor in the event of default on the part of the debtor is invalid.

3 Where several properties are made subject to a mortgage as security for a single claim, foreclosure proceedings must be brought simultaneously against all such properties, while individual properties are sold only if deemed necessary by the debt enforcement office.

Art. 817 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 2. Distribution of the proceeds

2. Distribution of the proceeds

1 The proceeds from the sale of the property are distributed among the mortgage creditors according to their rank.

2 Creditors of the same rank are entitled to equal satisfaction.

Art. 818 C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 3. Extent of security

3. Extent of security

1 A mortgage right secures the creditor:

1.
for the principal;
2.
for the costs of debt enforcement and default interest;
3.1
for three years’ accrued annual interest due on the date of the application for foreclosure or the debtor is declared bankrupt, plus the interest due since the last maturity date; in the case of a mortgage certificate only the interest actually due is secured by the mortgage.

2 The interest rate originally agreed must not exceed five per cent to the detriment of subordinate mortgage creditors.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8191C. Effect / VII. Foreclosure / 4. Security for maintenance costs

4. Security for maintenance costs

1 If a creditor has incurred expenses necessary for the maintenance of the property, in particular by paying insurance premiums owed by the owner, such expenses are secured by a lien over the property. This lien does not require to be recorded in the land register and takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances.

2 If the amount of the lien exceeds 1000 francs and the lien is not recorded in the land register within four months of the compensatory act being carried out, it may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 820 C. Effect / VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements / 1. Precedence

VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements

1. Precedence

1 If a rural property increases in value due to improvements carried out with the help of the public authorities, the owner may record a lien in the land register as security for his or her share of the costs which takes precedence over all other registered encumbrances on the property.

2 If such land improvement is made without state subsidy, the owner may enter the lien for a maximum of two-thirds of his or her costs.

Art. 821 C. Effect / VIII. Lien in the case of land improvements / 2. Extinction of debt and lien

2. Extinction of debt and lien

1 If a land improvement is made without state subsidy, the debt in relation to the lien must be repaid in annual payments of at least five per cent of the registered amount of the lien.

2 The lien is extinguished for the claim and for each annual payment three years after maturity, and any lower-ranking mortgage creditors advance in rank.

Art. 822 C. Effect / IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments

IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments

1 A payment under insurance policy may be made to the owner of the insured property only with the consent of all the charge creditors.

2 However, it may be made to the owner for the purposes of restoring the property subject to the charge provided adequate security is furnished.

3 In other respects, the cantonal provisions governing fire insurance are reserved.

Art. 8231C. Effect / X. Untraceable creditor

X. Untraceable creditor

Where the name or place of residence of the creditor is unknown, the court may, at the request of the debtor or other interested parties, order the necessary measures in cases where the law requires that a creditor take personal action as a matter of urgency.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Chapter Two: The Mortgage Contract

Art. 824 A. Purpose and nature

A. Purpose and nature

1 A mortgage contract may secure any kind of debt, be it current, future or contingent.

2 The mortgaged property need not be owned by the debtor.

Art. 825 B. Establishment and extinction / I. Establishment

B. Establishment and extinction

I. Establishment

1 A mortgage contract is created in a specific rank even if the secured amount is indeterminate or variable, and it retains such rank notwithstanding any fluctuations in the secured amount.

2 The creditor may request that the land registrar provide him or her with an extract concerning the mortgage contract. Such an extract has only evidential status and does not constitute a negotiable instrument.

3 In lieu of such evidence, a certificate of registration may be appended to the mortgage contract deed.

Art. 826 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 1. Right to have entry deleted

II. Extinction

1. Right to have entry deleted

If the debt is extinguished, the owner of the mortgaged property may request the creditor to authorise the deletion of the entry from the land register.

Art. 827 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Position of owner

2. Position of owner

1 If the property owner is not the debtor of the secured debt, he or she may redeem the mortgage on the same conditions as the debtor may repay the debt.

2 If he or she satisfies the creditor, the claim passes to him or her.

Art. 828 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / a. Conditions and procedure

3. Unilateral redemption

a. Conditions and procedure

1 Where a property is mortgaged for more than its value in respect of debts for which the acquirer is not personally liable, and providing no debt enforcement proceedings are pending, cantonal law may authorise the acquirer to redeem the mortgage rights either by paying the purchase price to the creditors or, where the property was acquired without payment, the amount at which he or she values the property.

2 He or she must give the creditors six months’ notice in writing of his or her intention to redeem the mortgage.

3 The redemption amount is distributed among the creditors according to their rank.

Art. 829 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / b. Public auction

b. Public auction

1 Within one month of the acquirer’s notification, the creditors are entitled to request that the mortgaged property be sold at public auction provided that they advance the costs, such auction to be announced publicly and held within one month of the date on which it was requested.

2 If a higher price than the one offered is obtained at auction, the mortgage is redeemed at that higher price.

3 The costs of the public auction are borne by the acquirer if a higher price is obtained, or otherwise by the creditor who requested the auction.

Art. 830 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Unilateral redemption / c. Official valuation

c. Official valuation

Cantonal law may provide that the redemption amount be determined by an official valuation rather than by sale at public auction.

Art. 831 B. Establishment and extinction / II. Extinction / 4. Termination

4. Termination

Where the owner of the mortgaged property is not also the debtor, notice given by the creditor to terminate his or her claim is binding on the owner only if it is served on both him or her and the debtor.

Art. 832 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 1. Alienation

C. Effect

I. Ownership and liability

1. Alienation

1 The alienation of a mortgaged property does not affect liability under the mortgage contract and of the debtor unless otherwise agreed.

2 However, if the new owner has assumed liability for the secured debt, the previous debtor is discharged unless the creditor notifies him or her in writing within one year that he or she intends to retain him or her as debtor.

Art. 833 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 2. Division

2. Division

1 If part of a mortgaged property or one of two or more mortgaged properties belonging to the same owner is alienated or if the mortgaged property is divided, unless otherwise agreed, liability under the mortgage will be reallocated in proportion to the value of the different parts.

2 If the creditor does not wish to accept such reallocation, within one month of its becoming final he or she may request repayment of his or her debt within one year.

3 Where the new owners have assumed liability for the debts secured by their properties, the previous debtor is discharged unless the creditor notifies him or her in writing within one year that he or she intends to retain him or her as debtor.

Art. 834 C. Effect / I. Ownership and liability / 3. Notice of assumption of debt

3. Notice of assumption of debt

1 If the new owner assumes the debt, the land registrar notifies the creditor accordingly.

2 The one-year time limit for the creditor’s declaration runs as of such notice.

Art. 835 C. Effect / II. Assignment of a debt

II. Assignment of a debt

The assignment of a debt secured by a mortgage contract is valid without entry in the land register.

Art. 8361D. Statutory mortgage right / I. Under cantonal law

D. Statutory mortgage right

I. Under cantonal law

1 Where cantonal law grants the creditor the right to a lien in respect of debts that are directly related to the servient property, the lien is created when it is recorded in the land register.

2 Where statutory liens amounting to over 1000 francs are created under cantonal law without being recorded in the land register and if they are not recorded in the land register within four months of the underlying debt becoming due, or at the latest within two years of the debt arising, on expiry of the period allowed for registration they may no longer be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.

3 More restrictive regulations under cantonal law are reserved.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 8371D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 1. Cases in point

II. With entry

1. Cases in point

1 The right to establish a statutory mortgage right applies to:

1.
the vendor’s claim to the sale price;
2.
the claims of co-heirs and other co-owners in undivided shares arising from the division of immovable property which belonged to the community;
3.
the claims of tradesmen and building contractors who have supplied labour and materials, or labour alone, for construction or other works, for demolition work, scaffolding work or for securing the construction pit or similar on the property whether the debtor is the owner of the property, tradesman or building contractor, tenant or any other person with rights to the property.

2 If a tenant or other person with rights to the property is liable for debts due to tradesmen or building contractors, the claim is valid only if the property owner has consented to the work being done.

3 The beneficiary may not waive such statutory mortgage rights in advance.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 838 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners

2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners

A lien in favour of the vendor, co-heirs or co-owners in undivided shares must be registered within three months of transfer of ownership.

Art. 8391D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / a. Registration

3. Tradesmen and building contractors

a. Registration

1 A tradesman's or building contractor’s lien may be recorded in the land register as of the date of his or her undertaking to perform work.

2 Application for such entry must be made within four months of completion of the work.

3 The lien is entered only if the claim has been acknowledged by the owner or confirmed in a court judgment and may not be requested if the owner provides the claimant with adequate security.

4 If the property is indisputably administrative assets and if the owner's liability for the debt is not based on contractual obligations, the owner shall be liable to the tradesmen or building contractor for debts that are acknowledged or determined by a court in accordance with the provisions on a debt subject to a simple surety, provided a written claim for the debt making reference to the statutory surety was made against the owner no later than four months after completion of the work.

5 If there is a dispute as to whether immovable property constitutes administrative assets, the tradesman or building contractor may apply for the provisional recording of the lien in the land register no later than four months after completion of the work.

6 If it is held in a court judgment that the immovable property constitutes administrative assets, the provisional recording of the lien must be deleted. It shall be replaced by the statutory surety provided the requirements of paragraph 4 are met. The deadline is met with the provisional recording of the lien.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 840 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / b. Rank

b. Rank

If more than one statutory building contractor’s lien is recorded in the land register, such liens confer an equal entitlement to satisfaction from the mortgaged property even if the entries were made on different dates.

Art. 841 D. Statutory mortgage right / II. With entry / 3. Tradesmen and building contractors / c. Privileged claim

c. Privileged claim

1 Where the claims of tradesmen and building contractors are not wholly satisfied by foreclosure, the shortfall must be compensated for by the higher-ranking creditors out of such portion of the proceeds as exceeds the land value, provided it is apparent to such creditors that their liens have encumbered the property to the detriment of the tradesmen and building contractors.

2 If the higher-ranking creditor alienates his or her mortgage security, he or she must compensate the tradesmen and building contractors for any sum of which they are deprived by such alienation.

3 Once an interested party has had the beginning of the work noted in the land register, until the time limit for registration has expired, liens may only be registered in the form of mortgage contracts.


  Chapter Three:2  Mortgage Certificates

Art. 842 A. Mortgage certificate / I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship

A. Mortgage certificate

I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship

1 A mortgage certificate gives rise to a personal debt secured by a mortgage.

2 In the absence of an agreement to the contrary, the mortgage certificate, where applicable, co-exists with the debt to be secured that arises from the basic relationship between the creditor and the debtor

3 The debtor may raise the personal objections arising from the basic relationship against the creditor and his or her legal successors where they do not act in good faith.

Art. 843 A. Mortgage certificate / II. Form

II. Form

The mortgage certificate takes the form of either a register mortgage certificate or a mortgage certificate on paper.

Art. 844 A. Mortgage certificate / III. Position of owner

III. Position of owner

1 The owner of a mortgaged property who is not also the debtor under the mortgage certificate is subject to the provisions governing mortgage contracts.

2 In the case of a mortgage certificate, the owner of the mortgaged property may raise the same objections as the debtor.

Art. 845 A. Mortgage certificate / IV. Sale. Division

IV. Sale. Division

The consequences of the sale and the division of the property are governed by the provisions on mortgage contracts.

Art. 846 A. Mortgage certificate / V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements / 1. In general

V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements

1. In general

1 The mortgage certificate debt must neither relate to the basic relationship nor include conditions or considerations in return.

2 The mortgage certificate may include debt-related ancillary agreements on the rate of interest, repayment instalments and discharge as well as other ancillary provisions relating to the mortgage certificate debt. A reference to a separate agreement is permitted.

Art. 847 A. Mortgage certificate / V. Mortgage certificate debt and ancillary agreements / 2. Notice

2. Notice

1 The mortgage certificate may be discharged by the creditor or the debtor at six months notice at the end of any month unless otherwise agreed.

2 Any agreement may not allow the creditor a shorter period of notice than three months, unless the debtor defaults in making the repayments or paying the interest.

Art. 848 A. Mortgage certificate / VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith

VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith

For any person relying on the land register in good faith, the details of the mortgage certificate debt and the lien accord with the entry.

Art. 849 A. Mortgage certificate / VII. Objections by the debtor

VII. Objections by the debtor

1 The debtor may raise only such objections as arise from the entry in the land register or to which he or she is personally entitled with regard to the creditor or to document of title in the case of a mortgage certificate on paper.

2 Agreements including ancillary provisions on the mortgage certificate debt may only be cited in opposition to an acquirer of the mortgage certificate acting in good faith if they are referred to in the land register and on the document of title in the case of a mortgage certificate on paper.

Art. 850 A. Mortgage certificate / VIII. Authorised person

VIII. Authorised person

On the issue of a mortgage certificate, a person may be granted a power of attorney. This person must make and receive payments, receive notices, consent to releases from liability under the mortgage and in general safeguard the rights of the creditors, debtor and owner with all due care and impartiality

2 The name of the authorised person must be recorded in the land register and on the document of title.

3 If the power of attorney lapses and the persons involved are unable to agree, the court shall make the necessary arrangements.

Art. 851 A. Mortgage certificate / IX. Place of payment

IX. Place of payment

1 The debtor must make all payments at the domicile of the creditor unless otherwise agreed.

2 If the creditor’s domicile is unknown or has changed to the detriment of the debtor, the latter may discharge his or her obligation by depositing payment with the competent authority at his or her own domicile or at the creditor’s former domicile

Art. 852 A. Mortgage certificate / X. Changes in the legal relationship

X. Changes in the legal relationship

1 Where the legal relationship changes to the advantage of the debtor, in particular through the repayment of the debt, the debtor may request the creditor to agree to an amendment being recorded in the land register.

2 In the case of a mortgage certificate on paper, the land register shall note the amendment on the document of title.

3 In the absence of such an entry or the note on the document of title, the effect of the change in the legal relationship has no effect on an acquirer of the mortgage certificate acting in good faith.

Art. 853 A. Mortgage certificate / XI. Discharge

XI. Discharge

If the mortgage certificate debt is discharged, the debtor may request the creditor:

1.
to agree to transfer the register mortgage certificate into the name of the debtor; or
2.
to hand over the document of title to the paper mortgage certificate without cancelling the same.
Art. 854 A. Mortgage certificate / XII. Extinction / 1. In the absence of a creditor

XII. Extinction

1. In the absence of a creditor

1 If there is no longer a creditor, or if the creditor waives his or her lien, the debtor has the option of either having the entry deleted or allowing it to remain in the land register.

2 The debtor also has the right to continue to use the mortgage certificate.

Art. 855 A. Mortgage certificate / XII. Extinction / 2. Deletion

2. Deletion

A mortgage certificate on paper may not be deleted from the land register before the document of title has been cancelled or declared void by the court.

Art. 856 A. Mortgage certificate / XIII. Public call to creditors

XIII. Public call to creditors

1 If the creditor under a mortgage certificate has not come forward for ten years and if no demand has been made for interest during that period, the owner of the mortgaged property may ask the court to make a public call for the creditor to come forward within six months

2 If the creditor fails to come forward within this period and if an investigation concludes that there is a high probability that a valid claim no longer exists, the court shall:

1.
in the case of a register mortgage certificate, delete the lien from the land register; or
2.
cancel the mortgage certificate on paper and delete the lien from the land register.
Art. 857 B. Register mortgage certificate / I. Establishment

B. Register mortgage certificate

I. Establishment

1 A register mortgage certificate is created when it is recorded in the land register.

2 It is recorded in the name of the creditor or of the landowner.

Art. 858 B. Register mortgage certificate / II. Transfer

II. Transfer

1 The transfer of a register mortgage certificate is achieved by recording the new creditor in the land register based on a written declaration from the previous creditor.

2 Payments by the debtor only have a discharging effect if they are made to the person who at the time of payment is recorded as the creditor in the land register.

Art. 859 B. Register mortgage certificate / III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct

III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct

1 The pledging of the register mortgage certificate is achieved by recording the creditor of a charge on chattels in the land register based on a written declaration from the creditor recorded in the land register.

2 A distraint order is executed by recording the restriction on power of disposal in the land register.

3 The usufruct is created by its recording in the land register.

Art. 860 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / I. Creation / 1. Registration

C. Mortgage certificate on paper

I. Creation

1. Registration

1 The creation of a mortgage certificate on paper always requires an entry in the land register and a document of title

2 The bearer or a specific person, in particular the landowner, may be named as the creditor under the paper mortgage certificate.

3 The mortgage certificate shall take effect on registration even if the document of title has not yet been issued.

Art. 861 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / I. Creation / 2. Document of title

2. Document of title

1 The mortgage certificate on paper is issued by the land register issued.

2 It must be signed by the land registrar in order to be valid. Other requirements as to form shall be imposed by the Federal Council.

3 It may be delivered to the creditor or his or her authorised agent only with the express consent of the debtor and of the owner of the servient property.

Art. 862 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / II. Protection of persons acting in good faith

II. Protection of persons acting in good faith

1 For any person relying on the land register in good faith, the rights stated in the document of title duly issued as a mortgage certificate on paper apply.

2 If the wording of the document of title does not correspond to the entry or if there is no entry, the land register is authoritative.

3 A person who has acquired a document of title in good faith is entitled to damages in accordance with the provisions governing the land register.

Art. 863 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / III. Creditor's rights / 1. Claims

III. Creditor's rights

1. Claims

1 A claim arising from a mortgage certificate may not be alienated, pledged or otherwise asserted unless the claimant is in possession of the document.

2 This does not apply to the assertion of a claim in cases where the document of title has been cancelled or not yet issued

Art. 864 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / III. Creditor's rights / 2. Assignment

2. Assignment

1 The assignment of a mortgage certificate debt requires the delivery of the document of title to the assignee.

2 If the title is in the names of a person, the title must also be endorsed and the name of the assignee given.

Art. 865 C. Mortgage certificate on paper / IV. Cancellation

IV. Cancellation

1 Where a document of title has been lost or destroyed without the intention of repaying the debt, the creditor may request the court to cancel the document of title and order the debtor to make payment or that a new document of title be issued for as yet unmatured claims

2 The cancellation is made in accordance with the provisions governing the cancellation of bearer securities but subject to a notice period of six months

3 Likewise, the debtor may request that a lost certificate which has already been redeemed be cancelled.

Art. 866874

Repealed


  Chapter Four: Issue of Bonds secured by a Mortgage Right

Art. 875 A. Bond issues secured by a lien

A. Bond issues secured by a lien

Registered or bearer bonds may be secured by a mortgage:

1.
by issuing a mortgage contract or a mortgage certificate for the entire series and appointing an agent for the creditors and the borrower;
2.
by establishing a mortgage right for the entire bond issue in favour of the issuer and establishing a mortgage on that debt in favour of the bond holders.
Art. 8768831

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


  Title Twenty-Three: Charges on Chattels

  Chapter One: Pledges of Chattels and Special Liens

Art. 884 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 1. Possession by pledgee

A. Pledges

I. Establishment

1. Possession by pledgee

1 Except where otherwise provided by law, chattels may be pledged only by the transfer of possession of the chattel to the pledgee.

2 Any person who in good faith takes a chattel in pledge acquires a general lien over it, provided that third parties do not have rights over the chattel as a result of prior possession, even if the pledger had no authority to alienate it.

3 The general lien is not established as long as the pledger retains exclusive possession of the chattel.

Art. 885 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 2. Pledge of livestock

2. Pledge of livestock

1 A general lien on livestock to secure the claims of lending institutions and co-operatives authorised to carry out such transactions by the competent authority of the canton in which they have their seat may be established without transfer of possession by entry in a public register and notification to the debt enforcement office.

2 The Federal Council regulates the keeping of the register.1

3 The cantons may levy fees for entries in the register and the associated administration; they determine the register districts and the responsible officials.2


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).
2 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 886 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 3. Subordinate pledge

3. Subordinate pledge

A subordinate pledge is established by notifying the pledgee in writing and instructing him or her to deliver the pledged chattel to the subordinate pledgee after his or her claim has been satisfied.

Art. 887 A. Pledges / I. Establishment / 4. Further pledge by pledgee

4. Further pledge by pledgee

The pledgee may only give the pledged chattel in further pledge with the pledger’s consent.

Art. 888 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 1. Loss of possession

II. Extinction

1. Loss of possession

1 The general lien is extinguished once the pledgee no longer possesses the pledged chattel and is unable to demand its return from third parties.

2 The effects of the lien are suspended as long as the pledger has exclusive possession of the pledged chattel with the pledgee’s consent.

Art. 889 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 2. Return

2. Return

1 The pledgee must return the pledged chattel to the entitled party where the pledge is extinguished due to payment of the debt or for some other reason.

2 He or she is not obliged to return the pledged chattel, in whole or in part, until his or her claim has been fully satisfied.

Art. 890 A. Pledges / II. Extinction / 3. Liability of the pledgee

3. Liability of the pledgee

1 The pledgee is liable for the depreciation or loss of the pledged chattel, unless he or she shows that he or she is not at fault.

2 If the pledgee has alienated the pledged chattel or given it in further pledge without authority, he or she is liable for any resulting damage.

Art. 891 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 1. Rights of the pledgee

III. Effect

1. Rights of the pledgee

1 If the debtor is in default the creditor has the right to satisfy his or her claim from the proceeds of the pledge.

2 The general lien provides the creditor with security for his or her claim, including contractual interest, debt enforcement costs and default interest.

Art. 892 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 2. Scope of the general lien

2. Scope of the general lien

1 The general lien encumbers the pledged chattel including its accessories.

2 Unless otherwise agreed, the pledgee must deliver the natural fruits of the pledged chattel to the owner once they are no longer a constituent part thereof.

3 Fruits which are a constituent part of the pledged chattel at the time of its realisation are included in it.

Art. 893 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 3. Rank

3. Rank

1 Where there are several pledges on the same chattel, the pledgees are satisfied according to their rank.

2 Rank is determined by the date on which the pledges were established.

Art. 894 A. Pledges / III. Effect / 4. Default agreements

4. Default agreements

Any agreement stipulating that the pledged chattel will become the property of the pledgee in the event of default on the part of the debtor is invalid.

Art. 895 B. Special lien / I. Requirements

B. Special lien

I. Requirements

1 A creditor has the right to retain chattels and securities which have come into his or her possession with the debtor’s consent until his or her claim has been satisfied, providing such claim is due and intrinsically connected with the retained objects.

2 Between persons engaged in commerce, an intrinsic connection exists where both the claim and the retained objects relate to their commercial dealings.

3 The creditor has a special lien provided that third parties do not have rights as a result of prior possession, even if the chattel which he or she has received in good faith does not belong to the debtor.

Art. 896 B. Special lien / II. Exceptions

II. Exceptions

1 No special lien may be asserted over chattels which by their nature are not realisable.

2 Equally, no special lien may be asserted where to do so would be incompatible with an obligation assumed by the creditor or with instructions issued by the debtor prior to or upon transfer of the chattel or with public policy.

Art. 897 B. Special lien / III. In the event of insolvency

III. In the event of insolvency

1 In the event of the debtor’s insolvency, the creditor has a special lien even if his or her claim is not yet due.

2 If the insolvency did not occur or become known to the creditor until after transfer of the chattel, the special lien may be exercised even if incompatible with a prior obligation or with a special instruction issued by the debtor.

Art. 898 B. Special lien / IV. Effect

IV. Effect

1 If the debtor is in default and fails to provide sufficient security, the creditor is entitled to realise the retained object in the same manner as a pledged chattel after notifying the debtor.

2 Where retained registered securities are to be realised, the debt enforcement or bankruptcy official must take the necessary steps on the debtor’s behalf.


  Chapter Two: Liens on Debts and Other Rights

Art. 899 A. In general

A. In general

1 Debts or other rights may be pledged provided they are assignable.

2 Unless otherwise provided, a general lien on debts and other rights is regulated by the provisions governing the pledging of chattels.

Art. 900 B. Establishment / I. In the case of ordinary claims

B. Establishment

I. In the case of ordinary claims

1 In order to pledge a debt not evidenced in writing or for which only a borrower’s note exists, the pledge agreement must be executed in writing and, where applicable, the borrower’s note transferred.

2 The pledgee and the pledger may inform the debtor of the pledge.

3 In order to pledge other rights, a written pledge agreement must be drawn up and any form required for the transfer must be observed.

Art. 901 B. Establishment / II. In the case of securities

II. In the case of securities

1 In the case of bearer securities, delivery of the certificate to the pledgee is sufficient to establish the pledge.

2 In the case of other securities, the certificate must be delivered and either endorsed or accompanied by a declaration of assignment.

3 The pledging of intermediated securities is governed exclusively by the Intermediated Securities Act of 3 October 20081.2


1 SR 957.1
2 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the Intermediated Securities Act of 3 Oct. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2010 (AS 2009 3577; BBl 2006 9315).

Art. 902 B. Establishment / III. In the case of documents of title to goods

III. In the case of documents of title to goods

1 Where there are documents of title to goods, the goods may be pledged by pledging the documents.

2 Where a special warrant exists in addition to a document of title to goods, pledging the warrant is sufficient to pledge the goods, provided notice of the pledge including the amount of the debt and the maturity date is entered on the document of title.

Art. 903 B. Establishment / IV. Subordinate pledge

IV. Subordinate pledge

A subordinate pledge of a debt is valid only if the prior ranking pledgee is notified in writing of the subordinate pledge by the creditor or by the subordinate pledgee.

Art. 904 C. Effect / I. Extent of security

C. Effect

I. Extent of security

1 Unless otherwise agreed, a pledge of interest-bearing debts or other debts conferring periodic subsidiary benefits, such as dividends, is limited to the current debt and the creditor is not entitled to payments which have already fallen due.

2 However, where such subsidiary rights are evidenced by separate documents, unless otherwise agreed, they are also covered by pledged to the extent that the pledge has been validly established.

Art. 905 C. Effect / II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies

II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies1

1 Pledged shares are represented at general meetings of shareholders by the shareholder rather than the pledgee.

2 Pledged capital contributions to a limited liability company are represented in the members' general meeting by the member rather than the pledgee.2


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).

Art. 906 C. Effect / III. Administration and payment

III. Administration and payment

1 If diligent administration so requires, the creditor may give notice to terminate the pledged claim and collect the debt and the pledgee is entitled to request that such procedures be carried out.

2 Once notified of the pledge, the debtor may make payment to either the creditor or the pledgee, but only with the other party’s consent.

3 Where no such consent is forthcoming, he or she must deposit the amount due.


  Chapter Three: Pawnbroking

Art. 907 A. Pawnbrokers / I. Licensing

A. Pawnbrokers

I. Licensing

1 Any person wishing to operate as a pawnbroker requires a licence from the cantonal government.

2 Cantonal law may provide that such licences are granted only to cantonal or communal bodies and charitable organisations.

3 The cantons may levy fees from pawnbrokers.

Art. 908 A. Pawnbrokers / II. Duration of licence

II. Duration of licence

1 A licences is granted to private pawnbrokers for a specific period only, but may be renewed.

2 A licence may be revoked at any time if the pawnbroker fails to comply with the provisions applicable to his or her business.

Art. 909 B. Pawning / I. Establishment

B. Pawning

I. Establishment

A chattel is pawned by delivering it to the pawnbroker against receipt.

Art. 910 B. Pawning / II. Effect / 1. Sale of pawned chattel

II. Effect

1. Sale of pawned chattel

1 If the pawned chattel is not redeemed by the redemption deadline, the pawnbroker may sell it at public auction after making a prior call for redemption.

2 The pawnbroker has no claim against the pledger.

Art. 911 B. Pawning / II. Effect / 2. Right to surplus

2. Right to surplus

1 If the auction proceeds exceed the pawned amount, the pledger is entitled to the surplus.

2 Several claims against the same pledger may be treated as a single claim for the purpose of calculating the surplus.

3 The claim to the surplus prescribes five years after the sale of the pawned chattel.

Art. 912 B. Pawning / III. Redemption of the pawned chattel / 1. Right of redemption

III. Redemption of the pawned chattel

1. Right of redemption

1 Provided it has not yet been sold, the pledger may redeem the pawned chattel against return of the receipt.

2 If the pledger is unable to present the receipt, he or she is entitled to redeem the pawned chattel after the redemption deadline provided he or she establishes his or her entitlement.

3 As of six months after the redemption deadline, the pledger also has such right even where the pawnbroker has expressly reserved the right to release the pawned chattel only against return of the receipt.

Art. 913 B. Pawning / III. Redemption of the pawned chattel / 2. Pawnbroker’s rights

2. Pawnbroker’s rights

1 On redemption the pawnbroker is entitled to charge interest for the full current month.

2 If the pawnbroker has expressly reserved the right to return the pawned chattel to any bearer of the pawn receipt, he or she may do so as long as he or she does not know and could not reasonably be expected to know that the bearer acquired the receipt unlawfully.

Art. 914 C. Purchase with right of repurchase

C. Purchase with right of repurchase

Commercial purchases with right of repurchase are deemed equivalent to pawnbroking.

Art. 915 D. Rules governing pawnbroking

D. Rules governing pawnbroking

1 Cantonal law may issue further regulations governing pawnbroking.

2 ...1


1 Repealed by Section II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, with effect from 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).


  Chapter Four: ...

Art. 916–9181

1 Repealed by Art. 52 No 2 of the Mortgage Bond Act of 25 June 1930, with effect from 1 Feb. 1931 (BS 2 747; BBl 1925 III 527).


  Division Three: Possession and the Land Register

  Title Twenty-Four: Possession

Art. 919 A. Definition and types / I. Definition

A. Definition and types

I. Definition

1 Effective control over a thing constitutes possession of it.

2 In the case of easements and real burdens, effective exercise of the right constitutes possession.

Art. 920 A. Definition and types / II. Direct and derivative possession

II. Direct and derivative possession

1 Where the possessor transfers an object to a third party in order to confer on him or her a limited right in rem or a personal right, both are considered to have possession.

2 The owner of the object has direct possession and any other possessor has derivative possession.

Art. 921 A. Definition and types / III. Temporary interruption

III. Temporary interruption

Possession is not lost if the exercise of effective control is impeded or interrupted by occurrences of a temporary nature.

Art. 922 B. Transfer / I. Among parties present in person

B. Transfer

I. Among parties present in person

1 Possession is transferred by the delivery of the object itself or of the means by which the recipient may gain effective control of it.

2 Transfer is complete once the transferee is able to exercise effective control over the object with the consent of the prior possessor.

Art. 923 B. Transfer / II. Among absent persons

II. Among absent persons

Transfer among persons who are absent is completed on delivery of the object to the transferee or his or her representative.

Art. 924 B. Transfer / III. Without physical transfer

III. Without physical transfer

1 Possession of an object may be acquired without physical delivery if a third party or the transferor himself retains possession of it in terms of a special legal relationship.

2 The transfer is not binding on the third party who retains possession of the object until he or she has been notified thereof by the transferor.

3 The third party is entitled to refuse delivery to the acquirer for the same reasons for which he or she could have refused delivery to the transferor.

Art. 925 B. Transfer / IV. In the case of documents of title to goods

IV. In the case of documents of title to goods

1 Delivery of documents of title to goods which have been consigned to a carrier or a warehouse is equivalent to the delivery of the goods themselves.

2 However, where a bona fide acquirer of the document of title to goods is in conflict with a bona fide acquirer of the goods, the latter has priority.

Art. 926 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 1. Defence against interference

C. Legal remedies

I. Protection of possession

1. Defence against interference

1 A possessor has the right to use force in self-defence against any unlawful interference.

2 If he or she has been dispossessed of an object by force or by clandestine means, he or she has the right to recover it immediately by expelling the trespasser from the property or, in the case of a chattel, by taking it from a person caught in the act and pursued immediately.

3 In doing so, he or she must abstain from all force not justified by the circumstances.

Art. 927 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 2. Action for restitution

2. Action for restitution

1 A person who wrongfully dispossesses another of an object is obliged to return it, even if he or she claims a better right to it.

2 If the defendant may immediately show a better right entitling him or her to reclaim the object from the claimant, he or she may refuse to return it.

3 The claim is for restitution of the object plus damages.

Art. 928 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 3. Action for trespass

3. Action for trespass

1 A possessor disturbed by trespass may bring an action against the trespasser even if the latter claims to be in the right.

2 The claim is for cessation of trespass, prohibition of further trespass and damages.

Art. 929 C. Legal remedies / I. Protection of possession / 4. Admissibility and prescription

4. Admissibility and prescription

1 An action for restitution or trespass is only admissible if the possessor sues for restitution of the object or for cessation of trespass immediately on becoming aware of the interference in his or her rights and the identity of the trespasser.

2 The action prescribes one year after the date of the trespass or dispossession even if the claimant did not become aware of the interference in his or her rights and the identity of the trespasser until a later date.

Art. 930 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 1. Presumption of ownership

II. Remedies

1. Presumption of ownership

1 The possessor of a chattel is presumed to be its owner.

2 Each previous possessor is presumed to have been the owner of the chattel while it was in his or her possession.

Art. 931 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 2. Presumption of indirect ownership

2. Presumption of indirect ownership

1 The possessor of a chattel who does not purport to be its owner may invoke the presumption that the person from whom he or she received it in good faith is the owner.

2 Where a person possessing a chattel invokes a limited right in rem or a personal right, the existence of such a right is presumed, but such presumption cannot be invoked against the person from whom the possessor received the chattel.

Art. 932 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 3. Action against the possessor

3. Action against the possessor

The possessor of a chattel may invoke the presumption of his or her better right in any action brought against him, subject to the provisions governing wrongful dispossession or trespass.

Art. 933 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / a. Entrusted objects

4. Power of disposal and right of restitution

a. Entrusted objects

A person who takes possession of a chattel in good faith in order to become its owner or to acquire a limited right in rem is protected therein even if the chattel was entrusted to the transferor without any authority to effect the transfer.

Art. 934 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / b. Stolen or lost chattels

b. Stolen or lost chattels

1 A possessor whose chattel has been stolen or lost, or who has otherwise been dispossessed of it against his or her will, may reclaim it from any possessor within a period of five years. Article 722 is reserved.1

1bis The right to recover an object of cultural heritage as defined by Article 2 paragraph 1 of the Cultural Property Transfer Act of 20 June 20032, possession of which has been lost against the owner’s will, prescribes one year after the owner becomes aware of where and by whom such object is being held, but at the latest 30 years after the loss.3

2 If a chattel has been sold at public auction, or on the market, or by a merchant dealing in goods of the same kind, it may be reclaimed from the first and any subsequent bona fide purchaser only against reimbursement of the price paid.

3 In other respects, restitution is subject to the provisions governing possession in good faith.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 2002 (Article of Basic Principles: Animals), in force since 1 April 2003 (AS 2003 463; BBl 2002 4164 5086).
2 SR 444.1
3 Inserted by Art. 32 No 1 of the Federal Act on Transfer of Cultural Heritage of 20 June 2003, in force since 1 June 2005 (AS 2005 1869; BBl 2002 535).

Art. 935 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / c. Cash and bearer securities

c. Cash and bearer securities

Cash and bearer securities cannot be reclaimed from a recipient in good faith even if the possessor was dispossessed of them against his or her will.

Art. 936 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 4. Power of disposal and right of restitution / d. Bad faith

d. Bad faith

1 A person who has not acquired a chattel in good faith may be required by the previous possessor to return it at any time.

2 However, if the previous possessor likewise did not acquire the chattel in good faith, he or she cannot reclaim the chattel from any subsequent possessor.

Art. 937 C. Legal remedies / II. Remedies / 5. Presumption of title to land

5. Presumption of title to land

1 In respect of land recorded in the land register, only the person registered may invoke presumption of title and bring an action for recovery of possession.

2 However, a person who exercises effective control over the land may bring an action for wrongful dispossession or trespass.

Art. 938 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 1. Possessor in good faith / a. Use

III. Liability

1. Possessor in good faith

a. Use

1 A person possessing an object in good faith is not liable to its rightful owner for the consequences of using it in accordance with his or her presumed right.

2 He or she is not obliged to replace what has been lost or damaged.

Art. 939 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 1. Possessor in good faith / b. Indemnity

b. Indemnity

1 Where the rightful owner requests restitution of an object, the possessor in good faith may request indemnification for any necessary or useful expenditure incurred and may refuse to surrender the object until such indemnification is forthcoming.

2 He or she has no right to indemnification of other expenditure, but where none is proffered, he or she may remove anything for which he or she has incurred cost, provided this may be done without damaging the property.

3 Any fruits collected by a possessor are set off against his or her claim for indemnification.

Art. 940 C. Legal remedies / III. Liability / 2. Possession in bad faith

2. Possession in bad faith

1 A person possessing an object in bad faith must return it to the rightful owner and compensate him or her for any damage resulting from such wrongful possession, including any fruits he or she collected or failed to collect.

2 He or she may claim indemnification only of such expenditure as the rightful owner would also have had to incur.

3 As long as a possessor does not know to whom he or she must surrender the object, he or she is only liable for damage for which he or she is at fault.

Art. 941 C. Legal remedies / IV. Adverse possession

IV. Adverse possession

A possessor fulfilling the requirements of adverse possession may count his or her predecessor’s period of possession as part of his or her own provided his or her predecessor’s possession also qualified as adverse possession.


  Title Twenty-Five: The Land Register

Art. 942 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 1. In general

A. Organisation

I. Constituent parts

1. In general

1 The land register is kept as a record of property rights.

2 It consists of the main register, the plans, property directories, supporting documents and property descriptions appended to the main register, and the journal.

3 The land register may be kept on paper or electronically.1

4 Where the land register is kept electronically, legal effect attaches to such data as are properly stored in the system and legible in letters and figures or displayed on plans by means of the technical capabilities of the devices and equipment used by the land register.2


1 Inserted by Annex 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).
2 Inserted by Annex 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 9431A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 2. Registered data / a. Object

2. Registered data

a. Object

1 The following are recorded in the land register as immovable property:

1.
parcels of land and the buildings thereon;
2.
distinct and permanent rights recorded in the land register;
3.
mines;
4.
co-ownership shares in immovable property.

2 The Federal Council issues detailed regulations governing the prerequisites for and method of registration of distinct and permanent rights, mines and co-ownership shares in immovable property.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 944 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 2. Registered data / b. Exceptions

b. Exceptions

1 Immovable property which is not privately owned and is in public use will be recorded in the land register only if rights in rem attaching to such property are to be registered or if cantonal law provides for its registration.

2 If registered immovable property is transformed into property that is not subject to registration, it is deleted from the land register.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immoveable Property Law) and the Code of Obligations (Sale of Immoveable Property), with effect from 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 945 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / a. Main Register

3. Registers

a. Main Register

1 Each item of immovable property has its own folio and number in the main register.

2 The procedure to be followed in the event of the division or consolidation of immovable property is determined by Federal Council ordinance.

Art. 946 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / b. Folio

b. Folio

1 The following data is entered in separate sections on each folio:

1.
ownership;
2.
the easements and real burdens established in favour of or encumbering the property;
3.
the liens with which it is encumbered.

2 Accessories may be noted on the folio at the owner’s request and, once noted, may be deleted only with the consent of all such interested parties as are evident from the land register.

Art. 947 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / c. Joint folio

c. Joint folio

1 Two or more parcels of land may be entered on one folio with the owner’s consent, regardless of whether they are contiguous.

2 The entries on such folio are valid for all the land in question with the exception of easements.

3 The owner may at any time request that entries for individual parcels of land be removed from a joint folio, all rights being reserved.

Art. 948 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 3. Registers / d. Journal, supporting documents

d. Journal, supporting documents

1 Applications for entry in the land register are recorded without delay in the journal in chronological order indicating the applicant and the object of his or her request.

2 Supporting documents are duly classified and archived.

3 In cantons where the land registrar is authorised to draw up public deeds, the supporting documents may be replaced by an official record whose entries constitute public deeds.

Art. 949 A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / a. In general

4. Implementing ordinances

a. In general1

1 The Federal Council prescribes the land register forms, issues the necessary regulations and regulates at its discretion the keeping of auxiliary registers.

2 The cantons may establish special provisions governing the registration of rights in rem on land under cantonal law, but such provisions become valid only when approved by the Confederation.


1 Amended by No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949a1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / b. For electronic registers

b. For electronic registers

1 A canton wishing to keep the land register electronically must obtain the approval of the Federal Department of Justice and Police.

2 The Federal Council regulates:

1.
the authorisation procedure;
2.
the scope and technical details of the electronic land register, particularly the procedure by which entries become effective;
3.
whether and on what conditions electronic communication with the land register is permissible;
4.
whether and on what conditions the public will be given access to unrestricted data recorded in the main register;
5.
data access, the logging of retrieval requests and conditions for the withdrawal of user entitlements in the event of abuse;
6.
data protection;
7.
long-term data security and data archiving.

3 The Federal Department of Justice and Police and the Federal Department of Defence, Civil Protection and Sport define data models and standard interfaces for the land register and official land surveys.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land; AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Amended by No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 949b1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / 4a. ...

4a. ...


1 Not yet in force (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949c1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4. Implementing ordinances / 4b. ...

4b. ...


1 Not yet in force (AS 2018 4017).

Art. 949d1A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register

4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register

1 The cantons which maintain the land register electronically may commission private individuals to:

1.
ensure access to the data in the land register in the retrieval process;
2.
ensure public access to the data of the main register which can be viewed without proof of interest;
3.
to carry out electronic transactions with the land registry.

2 The commissioned individuals are subject to the oversight of the cantons and of the Confederation.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 15 Dec. 2017 (Registration of Civil Status and Land Register), in force since 1 Jan. 2019 (AS 2018 4017; BBl 2014 3551).

Art. 9501A. Organisation / I. Constituent parts / 5. Official cadastral survey

5. Official cadastral survey

1 The entry for and description of each parcel of land in the register are based on the official cadastral survey, and in particular on a plan drawn for the land register.

2 The Geoinformation Act of 5 October 20072 regulates the qualitative and technical requirements of the official cadastral survey.


1 Amended by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, in force since 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 SR 510.62

Art. 951 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 1. Districts / a. Allocation to districts

II. Keeping the register

1. Districts

a. Allocation to districts

1 For land register purposes the cantons are divided into districts.

2 Immovable property is entered in the register for the district in which it is situated.

Art. 952 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 1. Districts / b. Land straddling more than one district

b. Land straddling more than one district

1 Immovable property that lies in more than one district is entered in the register of each district, with reference being made to the register of the other districts.

2 Entries which establish rights are to be made in the register of the district in which the largest part of the property is situated.

3 Entries in this land register will be notified by the registrar to the other land registries.

Art. 953 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 2. Land registries

2. Land registries

1 The cantons are responsible for setting up the land registries, the demarcation of the districts, the appointment and remuneration of officials and supervision arrangements.

2 The regulations issued by the cantons, save for those concerning the appointment and remuneration of officials, are subject to approval by the Confederation.1


1 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 954 A. Organisation / II. Keeping the register / 3. Fees

3. Fees

1 The cantons may levy fees for entry in the land register and for the necessary surveys.

2 No charge may be made for entries relating to land improvements or to land exchanges for the purpose of agricultural consolidation.

Art. 955 A. Organisation / III. Liability

III. Liability1

1 The cantons are liable for any damage arising from the maintenance of the land register.

2 They have a right of recourse against the land register officials and employees and against the immediate supervisory bodies if they are at fault.

3 They may require the officials and employees to provide security.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9561A. Organisation / IV. Administrative supervision

IV. Administrative supervision

1 The management of the land registries is subject to the administrative supervision of the cantons.

2 The Confederation exercises the supervisory control.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956a1A. Organisation / V. Legal protection / 1. Right of appeal

V. Legal protection

1. Right of appeal

1 A ruling issued by the land registry may be contested before an authority designated by the canton; a ruling includes the unlawful refusal to carry out or delay in carrying out an official act.

2 The following persons are entitled to appeal:

1.
any person who suffers particular prejudice due to a ruling issued by the land registry and who has a legitimate interest in its revocation or amendment;
2.
the cantonal administrative supervisory authority it has a right of appeal under cantonal law;
3.
the federal supervisory authority.

3 No appeal may be brought against an entry, amendment or deletion of rights in rem or priority notices executed in the main register.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 956b1A. Organisation / V. Legal protection / 2. Appeal proceedings

2. Appeal proceedings

1 The period within which an appeal to the cantonal appellate authorities must be filed amounts to 30 days.

2 Where the land registry refuses to carry out or delays in carrying out a specific official act, however, an appeal may be filed at any time.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9571

1 Repealed by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 958 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 1. Ownership and rights in rem

B. Registration

I. Land register entries

1. Ownership and rights in rem

The following rights to immovable property are recorded in the land register:

1.
ownership;
2.
easements and real burdens;
3.
liens.
Art. 959 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / a. Personal rights

2. Priority notices

a. Personal rights

1 Personal rights may be entered under priority notice in the land register where such notices are expressly provided for by law, as is the case for a right of pre-emption, right of repurchase, right of purchase, usufructuary lease and tenancy.

2 By virtue of being entered under priority notice, they may be invoked against any rights subsequently acquired.

Art. 960 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / b. Restrictions on powers of disposal

b. Restrictions on powers of disposal

1 Restrictions on powers of disposal may be entered under priority notice for individual parcels of land if they result from:

1.
an official order made to secure disputed or enforceable claims;
2.1
a distraint order;
3.2
a case in which entry under priority notice is envisaged by law, such as a remainderman’s expectancy.

2 On entry under priority notice, the restrictions on powers of disposal become effective against all subsequently acquired rights.


1 Amended by Annex No 4 of the FA of 16 Dec. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1997 (AS 1995 1227; BBl 1991 III 1).
2 Amended by No I 4 of the Federal Act of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 961 B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / c. Provisional entries

c. Provisional entries

1 Provisional entries may be made in the land register:

1.
in order to secure asserted rights in rem;
2.
in the cases where the law permits the applicant to complete his or her application.

2 They are made either with the consent of all interested parties or by court order and the right, provided it is later confirmed, becomes effective in rem as of the date of the provisional entry.

3 The court rules on the application and, provided the applicant satisfies the court of his or her entitlement, approves the provisional entry, precisely specifying its nature, duration and effect and, where necessary, setting a time limit within which the applicant must bring an action to assert his or her rights.1


1 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 961a1B. Registration / I. Land register entries / 2. Priority notices / d. Entry of subordinate rights

d. Entry of subordinate rights

A priority notice in the land register does not preclude the registration of a right with a subordinate rank.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9621B. Registration / II. Noting / 1. Restrictions under public law

II. Noting

1. Restrictions under public law

1 The state authority or another public body must arrange for a public law restriction on ownership ordered in respect of a specific property that imposes a permanent restriction on use or power of disposal or duty relating to the property on the owner to be noted in the land register.

2 Where the restriction on ownership ceases to apply, the state authority or the other public body must arrange for the note to be deleted from the land register. If the state authority or the other public body fails to act, the land register may delete the note ex officio.

3 The Federal Council shall stipulate the areas of cantonal law in which restrictions on ownership must be noted in the land register. The cantons may provide for additional notes. They shall draw up a list of circumstances requiring a note, which must be passed on to the Confederation.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 962a1B. Registration / II. Noting / 2. Of representatives

2. Of representatives

The following may be noted in the land register:

1.
the statutory representative at his or her request or at the request of the competent authority;
2.
the estate administrator, the representative of the heirs, the official liquidator and the executors at their request or at the request of the heirs or the competent authority;
3.
the representative of an owner, charge creditor or easement beneficiary whose whereabouts are unknown at his or her request or at the request of the court;
4.
the representative of a legal entity or other rights holder in the absence of the required management body at his or her request or at the request of the court;
5.
the administrator of a condominium association at his or her request or at the request of the condominium owners meeting or of the court.

1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 963 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 1. Applications / a. For an entry

III. Requirements for entry

1. Applications

a. For an entry

1 Entries in the land register are based on a written declaration by the owner of the immovable property to which the entry relates.

2 No declaration by the owner is required where the acquirer may rely on a provision of the law, a final court judgment or a document having effect equal to that of a court judgment.

3 The officials authorised to execute public deeds may be instructed by the cantons to notify the transactions certified by such deeds for entry in the land register.

Art. 964 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 1. Applications / b. For a deletion

b. For a deletion

1 Amendment or deletion of an entry in the land register requires an declaration in writing by the person whose entitlement results from the entry.

2 Such application may be made by signing the journal.

Art. 965 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 2. Authority / a. Valid proof of authority

2. Authority

a. Valid proof of authority

1 A disposition in the land register, such as an entry, amendment or deletion, may be made only on the basis of documents establishing the right to make such disposition and its legal basis.

2 Authority to request a disposition is established by proof that the applicant is the person entitled by virtue of the entry in the land register or has been duly vested with a power of attorney by said person.

3 The legal basis for the requested disposition is established by proof that the formal requirements have been observed.

Art. 966 B. Registration / III. Requirements for entry / 2. Authority / b. Completion of application

b. Completion of application

1 Where the documentation required for a disposition in the land register is not forthcoming, the application is rejected.

2 However, provided the legal basis is established and the application lacks only certain documents, a provisional entry may be made with the owner’s consent or by court order.

Art. 967 B. Registration / IV. Manner of entry / 1. In general

IV. Manner of entry

1. In general

1 The entries in the main register are made in the order in which applications are received or in which certifications and declarations are signed by the land registrar.

2 Interested parties will be provided on request with an extract of the entry.

3 The formal requirements for entries, deletions and extracts are regulated by the Federal Council.

Art. 968 B. Registration / IV. Manner of entry / 2. For easements

2. For easements

Easements are entered and deleted on the folios of both the dominant and servient properties.

Art. 969 B. Registration / V. Duty to notify

V. Duty to notify

1 The registrar must notify interested parties of all dispositions in the land register made without their knowledge; he or she shall, in particular, notify any acquisition of ownership by a third party to parties with rights of pre-emption which are entered under priority notice in the land register or to parties with rights which exist by law and are evident from the land register.1

2 The time limit for challenging such dispositions begins on receipt of such notification.


1 Amended by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 9701C. Public nature of land register / I. Information and right of consultation

C. Public nature of land register

I. Information and right of consultation

1 Any person showing a legitimate interest is entitled to consult the land register or to be provided with an extract.

2 A person is entitled to obtain the following information from the main register without showing a legitimate interest:

1.
the name and description of the immovable property;
2.
the name and identity of the owner;
3.
the form of ownership and the date of acquisition.

3 The Federal Council shall specify other particulars of easements, real burdens and notices in the register which may be made public without the need to show a legitimate interest. It shall pay due regard to the protection of personal privacy.

4 An objection based on ignorance of a land register entry is inadmissible.


1 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 970a1C. Public nature of land register / II. Publication

II. Publication

1 The cantons may provide that all acquisitions of immovable property be published.

2 They may not publish the consideration involved in a division of estate, an advance against a person’s share of an inheritance, a marital agreement or a liquidation of marital property.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land; AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953). Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2005 (AS 2004 5085; BBl 2001 5679).

Art. 971 D. Effect / I. Need for an entry

D. Effect

I. Need for an entry

1 Where the establishment of a right in rem is subject to entry in the land register, such right has effect in rem only if it has been entered.

2 Within the limits of such entry, the scope of a right may be established by supporting documents or in some other manner.

Art. 972 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 1. In general

II. Effect of entry

1. In general

1 Rights in rem are established and assigned their rank and date by virtue of being entered in the main register.

2 The entry has retroactive effect as of its recording in the journal, provided the supporting documents required by law are included with the application or, in the case of provisional entries, are submitted in good time.

3 In cantons where the registrar draws up public deeds by means of an entry in an official record of title, such a record constitutes entry in the journal.

Art. 973 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith

2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith

1 Any person who, relying in good faith on an entry in the land register, has acquired property or any other right in rem in reliance thereon, is protected in such acquisition.

2 This rule does not apply to boundaries of land in areas designated by the cantons as being in permanent danger of ground displacement.1


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 4 Oct. 1991 on the Partial Revision of the Civil Code (Immovable Property Law) and of the Code of Obligations (Purchase of Land), in force since 1 Jan. 1994 (AS 1993 1404; BBl 1988 III 953).

Art. 974 D. Effect / II. Effect of entry / 3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith

3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith

1 If the entry of a right in rem is unwarranted, a third party who is or ought to be aware thereof may not rely on the entry.

2 An entry is unwarranted if it is without legal basis or was made on the basis of an invalid transaction.

3 A person whose rights in rem are infringed by such an entry may invoke its defectiveness directly against the third party acting in bad faith.

Art. 974a1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / I. Revision / 1. On the division of property

E. Deletion and amendment of entries

I. Revision

1. On the division of property

1 If a property is divided, the easements, priority notices and notes for each divided part must be revised.

2 The owner of the property being divided must advise the land registry which entries to delete and which to transfer to the divided parts. If this is not done, the application must be rejected.

3 Where an entry according to the supporting documents or the circumstances does not relate to a divided part, it must be deleted. The procedure is governed by the regulations on the deletion of an entry.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 974b1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / I. Revision / 2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land

2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land

1 Two or more parcels of land belonging to one owner may only be consolidated if no mortgage rights or real burdens have to be transferred from the individual parcels to the consolidated property or if the creditor consents.

2 If easements, priority notices or notes encumbering the property must be recorded, they may be consolidated only if the beneficiaries consent or if their rights are not prejudiced due to the nature of the encumbrance.

3 If easements, priority notices or notes benefiting the property real estate must be recorded, they may only be consolidated if the owner of the servient property consents or if the encumbrance is not increased by consolidation.

4 The provisions on revision on the division of property apply by analogy.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 975 E. Deletion and amendment of entries / II. Unwarranted entries

II. Unwarranted entries1

1 Where an entry of a right in rem is unwarranted or a correct entry has been deleted or modified in an unwarranted manner, any person whose rights in rem are thereby infringed may bring an action for deletion or amendment of the entry.

2 Rights in rem acquired in good faith by third parties relying on the entry and claims for damages are reserved.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 9761E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 1. Clearly insignificant entries

III. Simplified deletion

1. Clearly insignificant entries

The land register may delete an entry ex officio if the entry:

1.
is limited in time and has lost its legal significance as it has expired;
2.
relates to a non-assignable or non-heritable right of a deceased person;
3.
cannot affect the property due to the local situation;
4.
relates to a property that no longer exists.

1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976a1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 2. Other entries / a. In general

2. Other entries

a. In general

1 If an entry in all probability has no legal importance, in particular because according to the supporting documents or the circumstances it does not relate to the property, then any person encumbered may request its deletion.

2 If the land registry regards the request as justified, it shall inform the beneficiary that it will delete the entry unless he or she files an objection with land registry within 30 days.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976b1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 2. Other entries / b. On objection

b. On objection

1 If the beneficiary files an objection, the land registry shall reassess the request for deletion at the request of the encumbered person.

2 If the land registry concludes that the request should be granted despite the objection, it shall notify the beneficiary that it will delete the entry from the main register unless the beneficiary brings a court action to declare that the entry is of legal significance.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 976c1E. Deletion and amendment of entries / III. Simplified deletion / 3. Public revision procedure

3. Public revision procedure

1 If conditions have changed in fact or law in a specific area and as a result a large number of easements, priority notices or notes have completely or largely lapsed or if the situation can no longer be determined, the authority designated by the canton may order a revision in this area.

2 This order must be noted in the corresponding land register folios.

3 The cantons shall regulate the details and the procedure. They may further simplify the revision procedure or issue regulations that deviate from federal law.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 977 E. Deletion and amendment of entries / IV. Corrections E. Deletion and amendment of entries / IV. Corrections

IV. Corrections1

1 Unless the interested parties consent in writing, the land registrar may correct the register only in accordance with a court order.

2 Instead of correcting an unwarranted entry, the registrar may delete it and make a new one.

3 The land registrar may correct typographical errors of his or her own accord in accordance with regulations to be issued by the Federal Council.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).2 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

  Final Title: Commencement and Implementing Provisions1 

  Chapter One: Application of Former and New Law2 

Art. 1 A. General provisions / I. General rule of non-retroactive effect

A. General provisions

I. General rule of non-retroactive effect

1 When this Code comes into force, the legal effects of circumstances which occurred previously remain subject to those provisions of federal or cantonal law which were applicable when the circumstances occurred.

2 Accordingly, the legally binding nature and consequences of acts which took place before the commencement hereof remain subject to the law which was applicable at the time.

3 However, circumstances occurring after the commencement hereof are subject to the new law, unless this Code provides otherwise.

Art. 2 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 1. Public policy and good morals

II. Retroactive effect

1. Public policy and good morals

1 The provisions of this Code specifically enacted in the interests of public policy and good morals apply when it comes into force to all circumstances, unless this Code provides otherwise.

2 Accordingly, provisions of the previous law which under the new law are deemed to contravene public policy and good morals cease to apply when the new law comes into force.

Art. 3 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 2. Relationships defined by law

2. Relationships defined by law

When this Code comes into force, legal relationships whose content is defined by law irrespective of the will of the parties concerned are subject to the new law, even if previously such relationships were valid.

Art. 4 A. General provisions / II. Retroactive effect / 3. Non-vested rights

3. Non-vested rights

The legal effects of circumstances which occurred while the previous law was still in force and which enjoy no protection under the new law are subject to the latter once it has come into force.

Art. 5 B. Law of persons / I. Capacity to act

B. Law of persons

I. Capacity to act

1 Capacity to act shall be assessed in all cases in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

2 However, any person who has the capacity to act under the previous law when this Code comes into force but who would not have the capacity to act under the new law will also be recognised as having the capacity to act when this Code comes into force.

Art. 6 B. Law of persons / II. Presumed death

II. Presumed death

1 The declaration of presumed death becomes subject to the new law when this Code comes into force.

2 When this Code comes into force, declarations of death or absence under the previous law have the same effects as a declaration of presumed death under the new law, but the consequences that have occurred under the previous law prior to this Code coming into force, such as succession or dissolution of marriage, remain valid.

3 Proceedings ongoing when the new law comes into force shall be restarted in accordance with the provisions of this Code, taking account of the time that has elapsed, or, if requested by the parties, concluded in accordance with the previous procedure, respecting the previous deadlines.

Art. 6a1B. Law of persons / IIa. Central civil register database

IIa. Central civil register database

1 The Federal Council regulates the transition from the former procedure for keeping the civil register to the electronic civil register.

2 The Confederation assumes the capital investment costs up to an amount of 5 million francs.


1 Inserted by No 1 of the FA of 5 Oct. 2001 (Electronic civil register), in force since 1 July 2004 (AS 2004 2911; BBl 2001 1639).

Art. 6b1B. Law of persons / III. Legal entities / 1. In general

III. Legal entities

1. In general2

1 Associations of persons and institutions or foundations that had acquired legal personality under the previous law, retain their personality under the new law even where they would not acquire legal personality under the new law.

2 Existing legal entities that require to be entered in the public register in accordance with this Code must register within five years of the commencement of the new law even if no provision was made for registration under the previous law and are no longer recognised as legal entities on expiry of this time limit.

2bis Religious foundations and family foundation that are not entered in the commercial register when the Amendment of 12 December 2014 (Art. 52 para. 2) comes into force continue to be recognised as legal entities. They must be entered in the commercial register within five years of the Amendment coming into force. The Federal Council shall take the special circumstances of religious foundations into account when determining the requirements for entry in the commercial register.3

3 The status of the legal personality of all legal entities is determined by the new law as soon as this Code comes into force.


1 Originally Art. 6a. Previously Art. 7.
2 Amended by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
3 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 12 Dec. 2014 on the Implementation of the 2012 Revision of the Recommendations of the Financial Action Task Force, in force since 1 Jan. 2016 (AS 2015 1389; BBl 2014 605).

Art. 6c1B. Law of persons / III. Legal entities / 2. Accounting and auditors

2. Accounting and auditors

The provisions of the Amendment of 16 December 20052 relating to accounting and auditors apply from first financial year that begins on or after the commencement of this Code.


1 Inserted by Annex No 1 of the FA of 16 Dec. 2005 (Law on limited liability companies and modifications to the law on companies limited by shares, cooperatives, the commercial register and company names), in force since 1 Jan. 2008 (AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969).
2AS 2007 4791; BBl 2002 3148, 2004 3969

Art. 6d1B. Law of persons / IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking

IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking

The new law applies to proceedings that are already pending when the amendment of 14 December 2018 comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 14 Dec. 2018 on Improving the Protection given to Victims of Violence, in force since 1 July 2020 (AS 2019 2273; BBl 2017 7307).

Art. 71C. Family law / I. Marriage

C. Family law

I. Marriage

1 The new law applies to marriage as soon as the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 has come into force.

2 Marriages subject to grounds for annulment under the previous law may, once the new law has come into force, only be annulled under the new law. However the period that has lapsed before this date will be taken into account in determining time limits.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7a1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 1. Principle

Ibis. Divorce

1. Principle

1 Divorce proceedings are governed by the new law as soon as the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 has come into force.

2 Divorces that had taken full legal effect under the previous law remain valid; the new provisions on enforcement apply to periodic maintenance payments or lump sum settlement that are fixed as an alternative to maintenance or as a maintenance contribution.

3 Any amendment of the divorce decree is carried out in accordance with the previous law with the exception of the provisions on children and procedural matters.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7b1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 2. Pending divorce proceedings

2. Pending divorce proceedings

1 The new law applies to divorce proceedings that are pending on the commencement of the Federal Act of 26 June 19982 and which must be judged by a cantonal authority.

2 New legal requests that are required due to the change in the applicable law are permitted; uncontested parts of the judgment remain binding, unless they are materially so closely connected with the requests that remain to be judged that it makes sense to reassess the entire case

3 The Federal Supreme Court decides in accordance with the previous law in cases where the contested judgment was issued before the commencement of the Federal Act of 26 June 1998; this also applies if the case is referred back to the cantonal authority.


1 Inserted by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).
2AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1

Art. 7c1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings

3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings

For divorce proceedings that are pending on commencement of the Amendment of 19 December 20032 and must be judged by a cantonal authority, the period of separation under the new law applies.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 Dec. 2003 (Period of Separation under Divorce Law), in force since 1 June 2004 (AS 2004 2161; BBl 2003 3927 5825).
2AS 2004 2161

Art. 7d1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 4. Occupational pension

4. Occupational pension

1 The new law on occupational pensions on divorce applies as soon as the amendment of 19 June 2015 comes into force.

2 The new law applies to divorce cases pending before a cantonal court at the time when the amendment of 19 June 2015 comes into force.

3 When the contested decision was made before the amendment of 19 June 2015 came into force, the Federal Supreme Court shall decide under previous law; this also applies when a case is referred back to the cantonal court.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).

Art. 7e1C. Family law / Ibis. Divorce / 5. Conversion of existing pensions

5. Conversion of existing pensions

1 If on divorce under the previous law the court, when deciding on the equitable division of pensions, has awarded compensation to the entitled spouse in the form of a pension that terminates on the death of the liable or the entitled spouse, the entitled spouse may, within one year of the amendment of 19 June 2015 coming into force, demand that he or she be granted a life-long pension in accordance with Article 124a instead, should the liable spouse draw an old-age pension or an invalidity pension after the commencement of the statutory pension age.

2 In the case of decisions made abroad, jurisdiction is determined by Article 64 of the Federal Act of 18 December 19872 on International Private Law.

3 Any pension payments already made under previous law are considered part of the pension awarded.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 19 June 2015 (Equitable Division of Pensions on Divorce), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 2313; BBl 2013 4887).
2 SR 291

Art. 81C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 1. Principle

Iter. Effects the marriage in general

1. Principle

For the effects of the marriage in general, the new law applies as soon as the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 has come into force.


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

Art. 8a1C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 2. Surname

2. Surname

A spouse who changed his or her name on marriage before the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 came into force may declare to the civil registrar at any time that he or she wishes to use his or her name before marriage again.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191). Amended by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 8b1C. Family law / Iter. Effects the marriage in general / 3. Citizenship

3. Citizenship

A Swiss woman who married under the previous law may within one year of the new law coming into force declare to the competent authority of her former canton of origin that she wishes to retain the citizenship that she held as a single woman.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 91C. Family law / II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 1912

II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 19122

The legal effects on marital property of marriages contracted before 1 January 1912 are governed by the provisions of the Civil Code on the application of the previous and new law that came into force on that day.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 For the application of the transitional law, see also the previous provisions of the Sixth Title at the end of the Civil Code.

Art. 9a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 1. In general

IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 19122

1. In general

1 The new law applies to marriages that exist when the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, unless otherwise provided.

2 The legal effects on marital property of marriages that were dissolved before the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 came into force are governed by the previous law.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).
2 See the provisions applicable until 31 Dec. 1987 at the end of this text.

Art. 9b1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / a. Change to the bodies of assets

2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property

a. Change to the bodies of assets

1 Spouses who have hitherto been subject to a union of property regime are now subject to the regulations on participation in acquired property in relation to each other and to third parties.

2 The assets of each spouse become his or her own property or acquisitions in accordance with the regulations on participation in acquired property; separate property in terms of a marital agreement becomes personal assets.

3 The wife reclaims the property she brought into the marriage that became her husband's property or makes a claim for compensation.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9c1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / b. Preferential right

b. Preferential right

In the event of the husband's bankruptcy and the distraint of his assets, the previous provisions on the wife's right to compensation in respect of property that she has brought into the marriage and which is no longer available continue to apply for ten years after the new law comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9d1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property / c. Division of marital property under the new law

c. Division of marital property under the new law

1 After the new law comes into force, the division of marital property between the spouses is governed for the entire duration of the previous and the new statutory marital property regime by the regulations on participation in acquired property, unless the spouses have completed the division of marital property in accordance with the provisions on union of property at the time when the new law comes into force.

2 Before the new law comes into force, either spouse may give written notice to the other that the current marital property regime of union of property must be dissolved in accordance with the previous law.

3 If the marital property regime is dissolved because an action filed before the new law comes into force is upheld, the division of marital property is governed by the previous law.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9e1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 3. Retention of the union of property regime

3. Retention of the union of property regime

1 Spouses subject to the statutory marital property regime of union of property who have not changed this marital property regime by marital agreement may by one year at the latest after the new law comes into force elect to retain the union of property regime by filing a joint written declaration with the marital property register office at their domicile; the marital property register office shall maintain a register of such declarations that anyone may inspect.

2 The marital property regime may only be cited in opposition to a third party if that third party is or should be aware of it.

3 The new regulations on the separation of property apply in future to the spouses' separate property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 9f1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order

4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order

In the case of a separation of property established by operation of the law or by court order, the spouses are subject to the new provisions on the separation of property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 101C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / a. In general

5. Marital agreement

a. In general

1 If the spouses have entered into a marital agreement in accordance with the Civil Code, this marital agreement continues to apply and their entire marital property regime continues to be governed by the previous law, subject to the reservation of the provisions of this Title on separate property, legal effect on third parties and the contractual separation of property.

2 The new regulations on the separation of property apply in future to the spouses' separate property.

3 Agreements on participation in a surplus or deficit in the case of a union of property regime must not adversely affect the statutory inheritance entitlements of children who are not the common issue of the spouses or those of the issue of such children.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / b. Legal effect in relation to third parties

b. Legal effect in relation to third parties

1 The marital property regime may only be cited in opposition to a third party if that third party is or should be aware of it.

2 If the marital property agreement has no legal effect in relation to third parties, the provisions on participation in acquired property apply from now on in relation to such parties.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10b1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / c. Application of the new law

c. Application of the new law

1 Spouses subject to a union of property regime who have changed this marital property regime by marital agreement may by one year at the latest after the new law comes into force elect to make their legal rights subject to the new statutory marital property regime of participation in acquired property by filing of a joint written declaration with marital property register office at their domicile.

2 In this event, contractual participation in the surplus shall in future apply to the total amount of the surplus of both spouses, unless a marital property agreement provides otherwise.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10c1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law

d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law

If the spouses agreed to a separation of property under the previous law, they are subject in future to the new provisions on the separation of property.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10d1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force

e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force

Marital agreements concluded before the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force but which are intended to take effect only under the new law do not require the approval of the child protection authority.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 10e1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 5. Marital agreement / f. Register of marital property

f. Register of marital property

1 After the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, no further entries will be made in the register of marital property.

2 The right to inspect the register continues to apply.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 111C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property

6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property

If a separation of assets under the law of marital property in connection with the new law coming into force causes serious difficulties for a spouse who is liable to pay debts or the replace property that is due, he or she may request additional time to pay; the debt must be secured if this is justified by the circumstances.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 11a1C. Family law / IIbis. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted after 1 January 1912 / 7. Protection of creditors

7. Protection of creditors

If the marital property rights change when the Federal Act of 5 October 1984 comes into force, the provisions on the protection the creditors in the event of a change in the marital property regime govern liability.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, in force since 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 121C. Family law / III. The parent-child relationship in general

III. The parent-child relationship in general

1 As soon as this Code comes into force, the establishment and effects of the parent-child relationship are governed by the new law; the surname and the citizenship acquired under previous law are retained.

2 Children who are subject to parental authority by operation of the new law but who are under guardianship when the new law comes into force must be placed under parental authority no later than one year after that date unless the contrary was ordered under the provisions on the withdrawal of parental of authority.

3 A transfer or withdrawal of parental authority officially ordered under the previous law remains effective after the new law comes into force.

4 When the Amendment of 21 June 2013 comes into force, if parental responsibility is assigned to only one parent, the other parent may within one year of this Amendment coming into force request the competent authority to order joint parental responsibility. Article 298b applies mutatis mutandis.2

5 A parent whose parental responsibility is revoked on divorce may file a request with the competent court only if the divorce was decreed less than five years before the Amendment of 21 June 2013 comes into force.3


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 21 June 2013 (Parental Responsibility), in force since 1 July 2014 (AS 2014 357; BBl 2011 9077).

Art. 12a1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 1. Continuation of the previous law

IIIbis. Adoption

1. Continuation of the previous law

1 An adoption pronounced before the new provisions of the Federal Act of 30 June 1972 on the Amendment of the Swiss Civil Code come into force continues to be governed by the law that came into force on 1 January 19122; consents validly given in accordance with this law remain effective in every case.

2 Persons who are not yet 20 years old when the Federal Act of 7 October 1994 comes into force may still be adopted in accordance with the provisions on minority after attaining majority provided the application is filed within two years of the Federal Act coming into force and of their 20th birthday.3


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972, in force since 1 April 1973 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200).
2 Art. 465 Civil Code in the version of 1 Jan. 1912: 1 An adoptive child and his or her issue have the same rights of succession in respect of the adoptive parents as the issue of their marriage. 2 Adoptive parents and their blood relatives have no rights of succession in respect of an adoptive child.
3 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 12b1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 2. Pending proceedings

2. Pending proceedings

The new law applies to adoption procedures pending at the time the amendment of 17 June 2016 comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12c1C. Family law / IIIbis. Adoption / 3. Application of the new law

3. Application of the new law

The provisions of the amendment of 17 June 2016 on the confidentiality of adoption information, on information about the biological parents and their direct descendants and on the possibility of arranging contact between the biological parents and the child also apply to adoptions which are granted prior to the amendment coming into force or which are pending at the time it comes into force.


1 Inserted by No I 3 of the FA of 30 June 1972 (AS 1972 2819; BBl 1971 I 1200). Amended by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), in force since 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12cbis1

1 Inserted by Annex No 2 of the FA of 22 June 2001 on the Hague Convention on Adoption and on Measures to Protect Children in International Adoption Cases (AS 2002 3988; BBl 1999 5795). Repealed by No I of the FA of 17 June 2016 (Adoption), with effect from 1 Jan. 2018 (AS 2017 3699; BBl 2015 877).

Art. 12d1C. Family law / IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy

IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy

The contesting of a declaration of legitimacy made under the previous law is governed by analogy by the provisions of the new laws on the contesting of recognition following the parents' marriage.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 131C. Family law / IV. Paternity actions / 1. Pending actions

IV. Paternity actions

1. Pending actions

1 Actions pending when the new law comes into force are judged in accordance with the new law.

2 The effects until the new law comes into force are determined by the previous law.


1 Amended by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13a1C. Family law / IV. Paternity actions / 2. New actions

2. New actions

1 If a pecuniary obligation on the father's part is established by court decision or by contract before the new law comes into force, and if the child has not yet reached the age of ten when the new law comes into force, the child may within two years bring an action under the provisions of the new law to have the parent-child relationship declared.

2 If the Defendant proves that he or she is not the father or is less likely to be the father than another person, the right to claim future maintenance lapses.


1 Inserted by No I 1 of the FA of 25 June 1976, in force since 1 Jan. 1978 (AS 1977 237; BBl 1974 II 1).

Art. 13b1C. Family law / IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship

IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship

Any person who attains majority due to the Federal Act of 7 October 1994 coming into force may in any case file an action within one year to declare or challenge the parent-child relationship.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994, in force since 1 Jan. 1996 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169).

Art. 13c1C. Family law / IVter. Maintenance contributions / 2. Pending proceedings

IVter. Maintenance contributions

1. Existing maintenance titles

The child may apply for the revision of any maintenance payments set in an approved maintenance agreement or in a decision before the amendment of 20 March 2015 came into force. If they were set at the same time as maintenance payments to one of the parents, payments shall only be revised if there has been a substantial change in circumstances.

Art. 13cbis2

2. Pending proceedings

1 The new legislation applies to proceedings that are pending at the time of the amendment of 20 March 2015 coming into force.

2 When the contested decision was made before the amendment of 20 March 2015 came into force, the Federal Supreme Court shall decide under the previous law; this also applies when a case is referred back to the cantonal court.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 7 Oct. 1994 (AS 1995 1126; BBl 1993 I 1169). Amended by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).
2 Inserted by No I of the FA of 20 March 2015 (Child Maintenance), in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2015 4299; BBl 2014 529).

Art. 13d1C. Family law / IVquater. Name of the child

IVquater. Name of the child

1 If after the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 comes into force the parents on the basis of a declaration under Article 8a of this Title no longer have the same surname, they may declare within one year of the new law coming into force that their children will take the surname before marriage of the parent who made the declaration.

2 If the parental responsibility of a child of parents who are not married to each other is transferred to both parents or the father alone before the amendment to this Code of 30 September 2011 comes into force, the declaration provided for in Article 270a paragraphs 2 and 3 may be made within one year of the new law coming into force.

3 In accordance with Article 270b, this shall be subject to the child's consent.


1 Inserted by No I of the FA of 30 Sept. 2011 (Name and Citizenship), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2012 2569; BBl 2009 7573 7581).

Art. 141C. Family law / V. Adult protection / 1. Existing measures

V. Adult protection

1. Existing measures

1 The new law governs adult protection as soon as the Amendment of 19 December 20082 comes into force.

2 Persons who have been made wards of court under the previous law shall be made subject to a general deputyship under the new law. The adult protection authority shall adapt to the new law as soon as possible. Unless the authority has decided otherwise in the case of extended parental responsibility, parents are exempt from the obligation to prepare an inventory, report and file accounts regularly and to obtain consent for certain transactions.

3 Other measures ordered under the previous law cease to apply three years after the Amendment of 19 December 2008 comes into force unless the adult protection authority transforms them into a measure under the new law.

4 Where a doctor based on Article 397b paragraph 2 in its version of 1 January 19813 ordered the care-related detention of a mentally ill person, this measure shall continue to apply. The relevant institution shall notify the adult protection authority six months at the latest after the new law comes into force whether it regarded the requirements for hospitalisation to be met. The adult protection authority shall carry out the required enquiries in accordance with the provisions on regular review and if applicable confirm the hospitalisation decision.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725
3 AS 1980 31

Art. 14a1C. Family law / V. Adult protection / 2. Pending proceedings

2. Pending proceedings

1 Pending proceedings shall be continued by the new competent authority after the Amendment of 19 December 20082 comes into force.

2 The new procedural law applies.

3 The authority shall decide whether and to what extent the previous proceedings require to be amended.


1 Inserted by No II of the FA of 6 Oct. 1978 (AS 1980 31; BBl 1977 III 1). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
2AS 2011 725

Art. 15 D. Succession law / I. Heirs and succession

D. Succession law

I. Heirs and succession

1 The succession rights and the related and inseparable effects on marital property under cantonal law of the death of a father, a mother or a spouse are determined, provided the deceased dies before this Code comes into force, by the previous law.

2 The foregoing applies both to heirs and to succession.

Art. 16 D. Succession law / II. Testamentary dispositions

II. Testamentary dispositions

1 The making or revocation of a testamentary disposition carried out before this Code comes into force, if done by a person subsequently deceased who had testamentary capacity under the law that applied at the time, may not be contested on the grounds that the deceased died following the commencement of the new law and would not have had testamentary capacity under its provisions.

2 A testamentary disposition may not be contested due to a formal defect if it complies with the provisions on form that applied when it was made or at the time of death.

3 The contesting of a disposition on the grounds that the testator exceeded his or her testamentary freedom or due to the nature of the disposition is governed in the case of all testamentary dispositions by the provisions of the new law if the deceased died after the commencement of this Code.

Art. 17 E. Property law / I. Rights in rem in general

E. Property law

I. Rights in rem in general

1 Rights in rem existing when this Code comes into force continue to be recognised under the new law subject to the reservation of the regulations on the land register.

2 However, the scope of rights of ownership and restricted rights in rem is subject to the new law after this Code comes into force unless the Code provides otherwise.

3 Rights that can no longer be created under the new law remain subject to the previous law.

Art. 18 E. Property law / II. Right to entry in the land register

II. Right to entry in the land register

1 Rights to create a right in rem that were established before this Code comes into force are recognised as valid provided they correspond to the form required by the former or the new law.

2 The ordinance on maintaining the land register determines what documentary proof is required for the registration of such rights.

3 The scope of a right in rem established before this Code comes into force by a legal transaction remains recognised under the new law, provided it is compatible with the same.

Art. 19 E. Property law / III. Adverse possession

III. Adverse possession

1 Adverse possession is governed by the new law after this Code comes into force.

2 If however adverse possession recognised under the new law has begun under the previous law, the time that elapsed before this Code comes into force is taken into account in the calculating the period of adverse possession.

Art. 201E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 1. Trees on another person's land

IV. Special rights of ownership

1. Trees on another person's land

1 Existing rights of ownership in relation to trees on another person's land continue to be recognised under cantonal law.

2 The cantons shall have the power to limit or revoke these conditions.


1 Amended by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20bis1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / a. Original

2. Condominium

a. Original

Condominium governed by the former cantonal law is subject to the new provisions of this Code even if the storeys or parts of storeys are not divided into self-contained dwellings or business units.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20ter1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / b. Converted

b. Converted

1 The cantons may also make condominium recorded in the land register in forms that accord with the law that came into force on 1 January 1912 subject to the new regulations on condominium.

2 The new law becomes effective when the corresponding amendment is made to the entries in the land register.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 20quater1E. Property law / IV. Special rights of ownership / 2. Condominium / c. Correction of the land registers

c. Correction of the land registers

In order to make the converted condominium subject to the new regulations and to register existing condominium, the cantons may order the correction of the land registers and issue special procedural regulations for this purpose.


1 Inserted by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 21 E. Property law / V. Easements

V. Easements

1 The easements created before this Code comes into force remain valid following the introduction of the land register even if not registered, but until registered may not be enforced against third parties acting in good faith.

2 Obligations ancillary to easements that were established before the amendment of 11 December 20091 came into force and which are based solely on land register supporting documents may continue to be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 22 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 1. Recognition of the existing document of title

VI. Mortgage rights

1. Recognition of the existing document of title

1 Documents of title existing when this Code comes into force remain in force without having to be adapted to the new law.

2 The cantons have the right to require new versions of existing documents of title to be drawn up on the basis of the new law within specific time limits.

Art. 23 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 2. Creation of liens

2. Creation of liens

1 After this Code comes into force, new mortgage rights may only be created in the forms recognised herein.

2 Until the introduction of the land register, the previous cantonal legal forms for their creation remain valid.

Art. 24 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 3. Repayment of securities

3. Repayment of securities

1 The repayment and modification the title, release from liability under a lien and suchlike are subject to the new provisions following the commencement of the new law.

2 However, until the introduction of the land register, the forms are governed by cantonal law.

Art. 25 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 4. Extent of liability under the lien

4. Extent of liability under the lien

1 In the case of all mortgage rights, the extent of liability under the lien is determined by the new law.

2 However, if by virtue of a special agreement the creditor has validly received certain objects with the property pledged, the lien continues to apply to these objects even if they could not be pledged under the new law.

Art. 26 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / a. In general

5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage

a. In general

1 The rights and obligations of the creditor and of the debtor in relation to the contractual effect of liens existing when this Code comes into force are governed by the previous law.

2 In relation to effects that arise by operation of the law which cannot be modified contractually, the new law also applies to existing liens.

3 If the lien applies to two or more parcels of land, liability under the lien continues to be governed by the previous law.

Art. 27 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / b. Rights to security

b. Rights to security

The rights of the lien creditor during the existing legal relationship, such as rights to security, and the rights of the debtor are governed by the new law in relation to all liens from the time at which this Code comes into force.

Art. 28 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage / c. Termination, transfer

c. Termination, transfer

For liens existing when this Code comes into force, the termination of the secured debts and the transfer the document of title are governed by the previous law, subject to the reservation of the mandatory provisions of the new law.

Art. 29 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 6. Ranking

6. Ranking

1 Until the introduction of the land register, the ranking of liens is governed by the previous law.

2 Following the introduction of the land register, the ranking of creditors is governed by the land register law contained in this Code.

Art. 30 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 7. Ranking positions

7. Ranking positions

1 In relation to a fixed ranking position or the right of a creditor to claim a vacant position or an advancement in ranking, the new law applies on the introduction of the land register and in every case from five years after this Code comes into force, subject to the reservation of creditors' existing special claims.

2 The cantons may enact further transitional provisions.1


1 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Legislation by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 31 and 321E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 8. ...

8. ...


1 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), with effect from 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33 E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law

9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law

1 The cantonal implementing legislation may stipulate that in general or in a specific legal relationship a form of mortgage under the previous law shall be regarded as equivalent to a form of mortgage under the new law.

2 If this occurs, the provisions of this Code also apply to such cantonal liens from the date on which the Code comes into force.

3 ...1


1 Repealed by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on the Approval of Cantonal Legislation by the Confederation (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).

Art. 33a1E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien

10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien

1 Land charge certificates and mortgage certificates issued in series remain recorded in the land register.

2 They remain governed by the provisions of the previous law.

3 Cantonal law may provide for the conversion of land charge certificates created under federal law or earlier law into forms of lien under the current law. Conversion may also involve the introduction of personal liability for the owner of the mortgaged property for minor sums.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 33b1E. Property law / VI. Mortgage rights / 11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate

11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate

The landowner and the mortgage certificate creditors may jointly request in writing that a mortgage certificate on paper recorded before the amendment of 11 December 20092 comes into force be converted into a register mortgage certificate.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2AS 2011 4637

Art. 34 E. Property law / VII. Charges on chattels / 1. Provisions on form

VII. Charges on chattels

1. Provisions on form

1 From the date on which the Code comes into force, charges on chattels may only be created in the forms provided for herein.

2 Where a charge on chattels has been created in another form before this time, it is extinguished after a period of six months which begins to run if the debt is due for payment from the date on which the new law comes into force and in other cases from the date on which it becomes due for payment or when termination is permitted.

Art. 35 E. Property law / VII. Charges on chattels / 2. Effect

2. Effect

1 The effects of the charge on chattels, the rights and obligations of the pledgee, of the pledger and of the pledge debtor are governed from the date on which this Code comes into force by the new law, even if the charge was created before that date.

2 An agreement stipulating that the pledged chattel will become the property of the pledgee in the event of default on the part of the debtor that is concluded before this Code comes into force ceases to be valid from that date.

Art. 36 E. Property law / VIII. Special lien

VIII. Special lien

1 A special lien under this Code also extends to objects that were subject to the power of disposal of the creditor before this Code comes into force.

2 It may also be exercised by the creditors in respect of claims that originated before this date.

3 The effect of special liens originating at an earlier date is subject to the provisions of this Code.

Art. 37 E. Property law / IX. Possession

IX. Possession

When this Code comes into force, possession becomes subject to the new law.

Art. 38 E. Property law / X. Land register / 1. Establishment of the land register

X. Land register

1. Establishment of the land register

1 After consulting the cantons, the Federal Council shall draw up a plan for the introduction of the land register. It may delegate this responsibility to the competent department or office.1

2 ...2


1 Amended by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, in force since 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).
2 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 391E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / a. ...

2. Official cadastral survey

a. ...


1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 Oct. 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817)

Art. 40 E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / b. Relation to the land register

b. Relation to the land register

1 As a general rule, the surveying should precede the establishment of the land register.

2 With consent of the Confederation, however, the land register may be established beforehand if adequate descriptions of the properties are available.

Art. 41 E. Property law / X. Land register / 2. Official cadastral survey / c. Time schedule

c. Time schedule

1 ...1

2 The surveying and the introduction of the land register may be carried out successively for the individual districts of a canton.


1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 October 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 421

1 Repealed by Annex No II of the FA of 5 October 2007 on Geoinformation, with effect from 1 July 2008 (AS 2008 2793; BBl 2006 7817).

Art. 43 E. Property law / X. Land register / 3. Registration of rights in rem / a. Procedure

3. Registration of rights in rem

a. Procedure

1 On the introduction of the land register, rights in rem that already exist shall be recorded in the register.

2 For this purpose, an announcement must be made to the public requesting them to give notice of and register these rights.

3 Rights in rem registered under the previous law in public books shall, provided they may be created under the new law, be entered ex officio in the land register.

Art. 44 E. Property law / X. Land register / 3. Registration of rights in rem / b. Consequences of non-registration

b. Consequences of non-registration

1 Rights in rem under the previous law that are not registered remain valid but may not be cited in opposition to third parties who rely in good faith on the land register.

2 The Confederation or the cantons may however enact legislation to have all rights in rem that are not recorded in the land register declared invalid after a specific date subject to prior notice.

3 Unregistered public law real burdens and statutory liens under cantonal law created before the amendment of 11 December 20091 comes into force may for a period of ten years from the date on which the amendment comes into force be cited in opposition to third parties who rely on the land register in good faith.2


1AS 2011 4637
2 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 451E. Property law / X. Land register / 4. Abolished rights

4. Abolished rights

1 Rights in rem that may no longer be established under the land register law such as the ownership of trees on another person's land, liens on usufructs and suchlike are not recorded in the land register but must be noted in an appropriate manner.

2 If such rights have lapsed for whatever reason, they may not be re-established.


1 Amended by No IV of the FA of 19 Dec. 1963, in force since 1 Jan. 1965 (AS 1964 993; BBl 1962 II 1461).

Art. 46 E. Property law / X. Land register / 5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register

5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register

1 The introduction of the land register in accordance with the provisions of this Code may be postponed by the cantons with the authorisation of the Federal Council provided the cantonal provisions on forms of notice, with or without amendments appear to be sufficient to guarantee the effects that the new law requires of the land register.

2 The forms of notice under cantonal law that are intended to guarantee the effects required by the new law must be precisely specified.

Art. 47 E. Property law / X. Land register / 6. Introduction of the property law before the land register

6. Introduction of the property law before the land register

The property law under this Code in general comes into force even if the land registers have not been established.

Art. 48 E. Property law / X. Land register / 7. Effect of cantonal forms

7. Effect of cantonal forms

1 When the property law comes into force and before the introduction of the land register, the cantons may designate the procedures, such those for drawing up documents or registration in the registers for land, liens and servitudes, that will immediately have the effect of being recorded in the land register.

2 Even without or before the introduction of the land register, it may be provided that these procedures have the same effect as being recorded in the land register in the case of the creation, transfer, modification and extinction of rights in rem.

3 However, in the event that the land register itself is not introduced or another equivalent institution established, these procedures do not have the same effect as being recorded in the land register in relation to third parties relying thereon in good faith.

Art. 491F. Prescription

F. Prescription

1 Where the new law specifies a longer period than the previous law, the new law applies, provided prescription has not yet taken effect under the previous law.

2 Where the new law specifies a shorter period, the previous law applies.

3 The entry into force of the new law does not change the date on which an ongoing prescriptive period began, unless the law provides otherwise.

4 Otherwise, the new law governs prescription from the time it comes into force.


1 Amended by Annex No 3 of the FA of 15 June 2018 (Revision of the Law on Prescription), in force since 1 Jan. 2020 (AS 2018 5343; BBl 2014 235).

Art. 50 G. Forms of contract

G. Forms of contract

Contracts concluded before this Code comes into force remain valid even if their form is not in accordance with the provisions of the new law.


  Chapter Two: Introductory and Transitional Provisions

Art. 51 A. Repeal of cantonal civil law

A. Repeal of cantonal civil law

On commencement of the Civil Code, cantonal civil law provisions are repealed unless federal law provides otherwise.

Art. 52 B. Supplementary cantonal provisions / I. Rights and duties of the cantons

B. Supplementary cantonal provisions

I. Rights and duties of the cantons

1 The cantons shall enact the provisions required to supplement the Civil Code, including in particular those governing the competent authorities1 and the establishment of civil registries, guardianship authorities and land registries.

2 The cantons shall enact any such supplementary provisions as are required to implement the Civil Code and may do so provisionally in the form of ordinances.2

3 Cantonal provisions on register law require federal approval.3

4 Notice of cantonal provisions on other matters must be given to the Federal Office of Justice.4


1 Presently the Adult protection authority (see Art. 440).
2 Amended by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333).
3 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).
4 Inserted by No II 21 of the FA of 15 Dec. 1989 on Approval of Cantonal Decrees by the Confederation, in force since 1 Feb. 1991 (AS 1991 362; BBl 1988 II 1333). Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 19 Dec. 2008 (Adult Protection Law, Law of Persons and Law of Children), in force since 1 Jan. 2013 (AS 2011 725; BBl 2006 7001).

Art. 53 B. Supplementary cantonal provisions / II. Substitute ordinances

II. Substitute ordinances

1 Where a canton has failed to enact the necessary provisions in time, the Federal Council shall provisionally enact substitute ordinances and notify the Federal Assembly.

2 Where a canton refrains from exercising its powers in respect of matters for which supplementary legislation is not indispensable, the provisions of the Civil Code remain applicable.

Art. 54 C. Designation of competent authorities

C. Designation of competent authorities

1 Where the Civil Code makes reference to a competent authority, the cantons shall designate such authority, be it existing or yet to be created.

2 Where the Civil Code does not make express reference to a court or an administrative authority, the cantons may designate either as the competent authority.

3 Unless the Civil Procedure Code of 19 December 20081 applies, the cantons regulate proceedings.2


1 SR 272
2 Amended by Annex 1 No II 3 of the Civil Procedure Code of 19 Dec. 2008, in force since 1 Jan. 2011 (AS 2010 1739; BBl 2006 7221).

Art. 55 D. Public deeds / I. In general

D. Public deeds

I. In general1

1 The cantons shall regulate the manner in which public deeds are drawn up on their territory.

2 They enact provisions for the drawing up of public deeds in foreign languages.


1 Amended by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).

Art. 55a1D. Public deeds / II. Electronic copies and legalisations

II. Electronic copies and legalisations

1 The cantons may authorise the authenticating officials to make electronic copies of the public deeds that they issue.

2 They may also authorise the authenticating officials to certify electronically that the electronic copies that they create correspond to the original documents on paper and that the signatures are genuine.

3 The authenticating official must use a qualified electronic signature based on a qualified certificate from a recognised provider of certification services in accordance with the Federal Act of 18 March 20162 on Electronic Signatures.3

4 The Federal Council shall issue implementing provisions that guarantee the interoperability of computer systems and the integrity, authenticity and security of the data.


1 Inserted by No I 2 of the FA of 11 Dec. 2009 (Register Mortgage Certificates and other amendments to Property Law), in force since 1 Jan. 2012 (AS 2011 4637; BBl 2007 5283).
2 SR 943.03
3 Amended by Annex No II 3 of the FA of 18 March 2016 on Electronic Signatures, in force since 1 Jan. 2017 (AS 2016 4651; BBl 2014 1001).

Art. 561E. Allocation of water rights

E. Allocation of water rights

Until such time as federal law regulates the allocation of water rights, the following provision applies:

Rights to public waters may be recorded in the land register as distinct and permanent rights, provided they have been granted for at least 30 years or indefinitely and are not allocated to a dominant property in the form of an easement.


1 See current Art. 59 of the FA of 22 Dec. 1916 on Exploitation of Water Resources (SR 721.80).

Art. 571F.–H. ...

F.–H. ...


1 Repealed by Art. 53 para. 1 item b of the FA of 8 Nov. 1934 on Banks and Savings Banks, with effect from 1 March 1935 (AS 51 117; BS 10 337; BBl 1934 I 171).

Art. 581J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy

J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy

When this Code comes into force, the Federal Act of 11 April 18892 on Debt enforcement and Bankruptcy is amended as follows:

...3


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 SR 281.1
3 For text, see the federal act referred to. For the wording of Art. 132bis, 141 para. 3 and 258 para. 4, see AS 24 233 Final Title Art. 60.

Art. 591K. Application of Swiss and foreign law

K. Application of Swiss and foreign law

1 The Federal Act of 25 June 18912 on the Civil Law Status of Immigrants and Temporary Residents remains in force in respect of the legal status of Swiss nationals abroad and of foreigners in Switzerland and insofar as different laws apply in the cantons.

2 ...3

3 The following provisions are inserted in the Federal Act of 25 June 1891:

Art. 7a–7i

...


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [BS 2 737; AS 1972 2819 II 1, 1977 237 II 1, 1986 122 II 1. AS 1988 1776 Annex No I para. a]. See current IPLA of 18 Dec. 1987 (SR 291).
3 Repealed by No I 2 of the FA of 5 Oct. 1984, with effect from 1 Jan. 1988 (AS 1986 122 153 Art. 1; BBl 1979 II 1191).

Art. 601L. Repeal of federal civil law

L. Repeal of federal civil law

1 When this Code comes into force, any provisions of federal civil law which contradict it are repealed.

2 In particular, the following are repealed: the Federal Act of 24 December 18742 on the Determination and Documentation of Civil Status and Marriage; the Federal Act of 22 June 18813 on Personal Capacity to Act; the Federal Act of 14 June 18814 on the Code of Obligations.

3 The special acts concerning the railways, steamships, the post, telegraph and telephone services, the seizure and compulsory liquidation of railways, the laws relating to factory employment and liability arising from the operation of factories and other enterprises, and all federal laws on matters governed by the Code of Obligations which have been enacted to supplement the Federal Act of 14 June 1881 on the Code of Obligations, remain in force.


1 Amended by No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BS 2 199; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).
2 [AS 1 506]
3 [AS 5 556]
4 [AS 5 635, 11 490; BS 2 784 Art. 103 para. 1]

Art. 611M. Final Provision M. Final Provision

M. Final Provision

1 This Code comes into force on 1 January 1912.

2 Subject to the Federal Assembly’s approval, the Federal Council is authorised to declare individual provisions effective at an earlier date.


1 Last four articles renumbered owing to revocation of the original Art. 58 and 59, in accordance with No I of the Code of Obligations transitional provisions, in force since 1 Jan. 1912 (AS 27 317; BBl 1905 II 1, 1909 III 725, 1911 I 845).


1 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).2 Amended by No I 4 of the FA of 26 June 1998, in force since 1 Jan. 2000 (AS 1999 1118; BBl 1996 I 1).

  Text of the Previous Provisions1  of Title Six

  Title Six: Marital Property Law


1 BS 2 3. These provisions apply as transitional law insofar as provided by Art. 9a ff. Final Title (Revision of Marital Law of 5 Oct. 1984). The provisions have not been translated into English.

  Table of Contents

A. Application of the law Art. 1

I. Acting in good faith Art. 2

II. Good faith Art. 3

III. Judicial discretion Art. 4

I. Cantonal civil law and local custom Art. 5

II. Cantonal public law Art. 6

D. General provisions of the Code of Obligations Art. 7

I. Burden of proof Art. 8

II. Proof by public document Art. 9

Repealed Art. 10

I. Legal capacity Art. 11

1. Nature Art. 12

2. Requirements

a. In general Art. 13

b. Majority Art. 14

c. ... Art. 15

d. Capacity of judgement Art. 16

1. In general Art. 17

2. Lack of capacity of judgement Art. 18

3. Persons capable of judgement but lacking the capacity to act.

a. Principle Art. 19

b. Consent of the legal representative Art. 19a

c. Absence of consent Art. 19b

4. Strictly personal rights Art. 19c

IIIbis. Restriction of the capacity to act Art. 19d

1. Blood kinship Art. 20

2. Kinship by marriage Art. 21

1. Origin Art. 22

2. Domicile

a. Definition Art. 23

b. Change of domicile, temporary residence Art. 24

c. Domicile of minors Art. 25

d. Persons in institutions Art. 26

I. Against excessive restriction Art. 27

1. Principle Art. 28

2. Actions

a. In general Art. 28a

b. Violence, threats or harassment Art. 28b

3. ... Art. 28c–28f

4. Right of reply

a. Principle Art. 28g

b. Form and content Art. 28h

c. Procedure Art. 28i

d. Publication Art. 28k

e. Recourse to the courts Art. 28l

1. Protection of one’s name Art. 29

2. Change of name

a. General Art. 30

b. On the death of a spouse Art. 30a

I. Birth and death Art. 31

1. Burden of proof Art. 32

2. Evidence

a. In general Art. 33

b. Presumption of death Art. 34

1. In general Art. 35

2. Procedure Art. 36

3. Failure of application Art. 37

4. Effect Art. 38

I. In general Art. 39

II. Duty to notify Art. 40

III. Proof of undisputed information Art. 41

1. By court order Art. 42

2. By the register authorities Art. 43

V. Data protection and disclosure Art. 43a

1. Civil registrars Art. 44

2. Supervisory authorities Art. 45

Ia. Central civil information system Art. 45a

II. Liability Art. 46

III. Disciplinary measures Art. 47

I. Federal law Art. 48

II. Cantonal law Art. 49

Repealed Art. 50 and 51

A. Legal personality Art. 52

B. Legal capacity Art. 53

I. Requirements Art. 54

II. Action on behalf of the legal entity Art. 55

D. Seat Art. 56

I. Application of assets Art. 57

II. Liquidation Art. 58

F. Reservation of public law and company law Art. 59

I. Corporate group of persons Art. 60

II. Entry in the commercial register Art. 61

III. Associations lacking legal personality Art. 62

IV. Relationship between articles of association and the law Art. 63

1. Function, convening of meetings Art. 64

2. Powers Art. 65

3. Resolutions

a. Form Art. 66

b. Voting rights and majority Art. 67

c. Exclusion from voting Art. 68

1. Rights and duties in general Art. 69

2. Accounting Art. 69a

III. Auditors Art. 69b

IV. Organisational defects Art. 69c

I. Admission, resignation Art. 70

II. Duty to pay subscriptions Art. 71

III. Exclusion Art. 72

IV. Status of former members Art. 73

V. Protection of the objects of the association Art. 74

VI. Protection of members Art. 75

Cbis. Liability Art. 75a

1. By resolution Art. 76

2. By operation of law Art. 77

3. By court order Art. 78

II. Deletion from the commercial register Art. 79

I. In general Art. 80

II. Form of establishment Art. 81

III. Challenge Art. 82

I. In general Art. 83

II. Bookkeeping Art. 83a

1. Duty of audit and applicable law Art. 83b

2. Supervisory authority Art. 83c

IV. Organisational defects Art. 83d

C. Supervision Art. 84

Cbis. Measures in the event of overindebtedness and insolvency Art. 84a

Art. 84b

I. Reorganisation Art. 85

1. Request by the supervisory authority or the board of trustees Art. 86

2. At the founder’s request or in accordance with his testamentary disposition Art. 86a

III. Minor amendments to the charter Art. 86b

E. Family and ecclesiastical foundations Art. 87

I. Dissolution by the competent authority Art. 88

II. Right to apply for dissolution, deletion from the register Art. 89

G. Employee benefits schemes Art. 89a

A. No management Art. 89b

B. Jurisdiction Art. 89c

A. Betrothal Art. 90

I. Gifts Art. 91

II. Duty to contribute Art. 92

III. Prescription Art. 93

A. Capacity to marry Art. 94

I. Kinship Art. 95

II. Previous marriage Art. 96

A. General principles Art. 97

Abis. Circumvention of the legislation on foreign nationals Art. 97a

I. Request Art. 98

II. Conduct and completion of the preparatory procedure Art. 99

III. Time limit Art. 100

I. Venue Art. 101

II. Form Art. 102

D. Implementing provisions Art. 103

A. General principle Art. 104

I. Grounds Art. 105

II. Action for annulment Art. 106

I. Grounds Art. 107

II. Action for annulment Art. 108

D. Effects of judgment Art. 109

Repealed Art. 110

I. Comprehensive agreement Art. 111

II. Partial agreement Art. 112

Repealed Art. 113

I. After living apart Art. 114

II. Irretrievable breakdown Art. 115

Repealed Art. 116

A. Requirements and procedure Art. 117

B. Effects of separation Art. 118

A. Civil status of divorced spouses Art. 119

B. Marital property law and inheritance law Art. 120

C. Family home Art. 121

I. Principle Art. 122

II. Equitable division of termination benefits Art. 123

III. Equitable division of invalidity pension prior to statutory retirement age Art. 124

IV. Equitable division in the case of invalidity pensions after statutory retirement age and in the case of retirement pensions Art. 124a

V. Exceptions Art. 124b

VI. Offset of mutual entitlements Art. 124c

VII. Unreasonableness Art. 124d

VIII. Impossibility Art. 124e

I. Requirements Art. 125

II. Modalities of maintenance contributions Art. 126

1. Special terms Art. 127

2. Adjustment for inflation Art. 128

3. Adjustment by court order Art. 129

4. Expiry by law Art. 130

1. Enforcement assistance Art. 131

2. Advance payments Art. 131a

3. Directions to debtors and posting security Art. 132

I. Parental rights and obligations Art. 133

II. Change of circumstances Art. 134

Repealed Art. 135–158

A. Marital union; rights and duties of spouses Art. 159

B. Surname Art. 160

C. Cantonal and communal citizenship Art. 161

D. Marital home Art. 162

I. In general Art. 163

II. Allowance for personal use Art. 164

III. Extraordinary contributions by one spouse Art. 165

F. Representation of the marital union Art. 166

G. Spouses’ career or business Art. 167

I. In general Art. 168

II. Family home Art. 169

J. Duty to inform Art. 170

I. Counselling agencies Art. 171

1. In general Art. 172

2. While living together

a. Financial contributions Art. 173

b. Revocation of powers of representation Art. 174

3. Suspension of joint household

a. Grounds Art. 175

b. Arrangements for living apart Art. 176

4. Enforcement

a. Enforcement assistance and advance payments Art. 176a

b. Directions to debtors Art. 177

5. Restriction of power to dispose of assets Art. 178

6. Change of circumstances Art. 179

Repealed Art. 180

A. Ordinary property regime Art. 181

I. Choice of regime Art. 182

II. Capacity to enter into an agreement Art. 183

III. Form of the agreement Art. 184

1. By court order Art. 185

2. ... Art. 186

3. Revocation Art. 187

1. Bankruptcy Art. 188

2. Distraint

a. By court order Art. 189

b. Request Art. 190

3. Revocation Art. 191

III. Liquidation of the previous marital property regime Art. 192

D. Protection of creditors Art. 193

E. ... Art. 194

F. Management of one spouse’s assets by the other Art. 195

G. Inventory Art. 195a

I. Categories Art. 196

II. Acquired property Art. 197

1. By operation of law Art. 198

2. By marital agreement Art. 199

IV. Proof Art. 200

B. Management, benefits and power of disposal Art. 201

C. Liability toward third parties Art. 202

D. Debts between spouses Art. 203

I. Time of dissolution Art. 204

1. In general Art. 205

2. Participation in increased value Art. 206

1. Separation of acquired property and individual property Art. 207

2. Additions Art. 208

3. Compensation operations between acquired property and individual property Art. 209

4. Surplus Art. 210

1. Market value Art. 211

2. Capitalised value

a. In general Art. 212

b. Special circumstances Art. 213

3. Defining juncture Art. 214

1. By law Art. 215

2. By agreement

a. In general Art. 216

b. On divorce, separation, annulment of the marriage or separation of property by court order Art. 217

1. Deferred payment Art. 218

2. Home and household effects Art. 219

3. Claims against third parties Art. 220

I. Categories Art. 221

1. General community of property Art. 222

2. Limited community of property

a. Community restricted to acquired property Art. 223

b. Further community of property regimes Art. 224

III. Individual property Art. 225

IV. Proof Art. 226

1. Everyday housekeeping Art. 227

2. Extraordinary housekeeping Art. 228

3. Use of common property for professional or business purposes Art. 229

4. Renunciation and acceptance of inheritances Art. 230

5. Liability and management costs Art. 231

II. Individual property Art. 232

I. Full liability Art. 233

II. Individual liability Art. 234

D. Debts between spouses Art. 235

I. Time of dissolution Art. 236

II. Allocation to individual property Art. 237

III. Compensation operations between joint and individual property Art. 238

IV. Participation in increased value Art. 239

V. Valuation Art. 240

1. On death or implementation of a different marital property regime Art. 241

2. In other cases Art. 242

1. Individual property Art. 243

2. Home and household effects Art. 244

3. Other assets Art. 245

4. Further provisions Art. 246

I. In general Art. 247

II. Proof Art. 248

B. Liability toward third parties Art. 249

C. Debts between spouses Art. 250

D. Allocation of property in co-ownership Art. 251

A. Formation of parent-child relationship in general Art. 252

B. ... Art. 253

Repealed Art. 254

A. Presumption Art. 255

I. Right to challenge Art. 256

1. In the case of conception in wedlock Art. 256a

2. In the case of conception before marriage or while spouses were living apart Art. 256b

III. Time limits Art. 256c

C. Conflict of presumptions Art. 257

D. Challenge by the parents Art. 258

E. Marriage of the parents Art. 259

I. Admissibility and form Art. 260

1. Right to challenge Art. 260a

2. Grounds Art. 260b

3. Time limits Art. 260c

I. Right to bring the action Art. 261

II. Presumption Art. 262

III. Time limits Art. 263

I. General requirements Art. 264

II. Joint adoption Art. 264a

III. Adoption by a single person Art. 264b

IV. Adoption of a stepchild Art. 264c

V. Difference in age Art. 264d

VI. Consent of the child and the child protection authority Art. 265

1. Form Art. 265a

2. Time of consent Art. 265b

3. Dispensing with consent

a. Requirements Art. 265c

b. Decision Art. 265d

B. Adoption of an adult Art. 266

I. In general Art. 267

II. Name Art. 267a

III. Citizenship Art. 267b

I. In general Art. 268

II. Investigation Art. 268a

III. Hearing for the child Art. 268abis

IV. Representation for the child Art. 268ater

V. Taking account of the attitude of family members Art. 268aquater

Dbis.Confidentiality of adoption information Art. 268b

Dter. Information on the adoption, the biological parents and their issue Art. 268c

Dquater. Cantonal information centre and tracing services Art. 268d

Dquinquies. Contact with the biological parents Art. 268e

1. Lack of consent Art. 269

2. Other defects Art. 269a

II. Time limits Art. 269b

F. Adoption agency services Art. 269c

I. Child of married parents Art. 270

II. Child of unmarried parents Art. 270a

III. Consent of the child Art. 270b

B. Citizenship Art. 271

C. Support and common welfare Art. 272

1. Principle Art. 273

2. Restrictions Art. 274

II. Third parties Art. 274a

III. Responsible authorities Art. 275

E. Right to information Art. 275a

I. Object and scope Art. 276

II. Precedence of maintenance for minors Art. 276a

B. Duration Art. 277

C. Married parents Art. 278

I. Right to sue Art. 279

II. and III. ... Art. 280–284

1. Parents’ contribution Art. 285

2. Other payments for maintenance of the child Art. 285a

1. In general Art. 286

2. Shortfalls Art. 286a

I. Regular payments Art. 287

II. Scope of a maintenance agreement Art. 287a

III. Final settlement Art. 288

I. Entitlement Art. 289

1. Enforcement assistance Art. 290

2. Directions to debtors Art. 291

III. Security Art. 292

G. Public law Art. 293

H. Foster parents Art. 294

J. Rights of the unmarried mother Art. 295

A. Principles Art. 296

Abis. Death of a parent Art. 297

Ater. Divorce and other marital proceedings Art. 298

I. Joint declaration by the parents Art. 298a

II. Decision of the child protection authority Art. 298b

III. Paternity action Art. 298c

IV. Change in circumstances Art. 298d

Aquinquies. Change in the situation after the adoption of a stepchild in a cohabitation relationship Art. 298e

Asexies. Step-parents Art. 299

Asepties. Foster parents Art. 300

I. In general Art. 301

II. Deciding on the place of residence Art. 301a

III. Upbringing Art. 302

IV. Religious upbringing Art. 303

1. In relation to third parties

a. In general Art. 304

b. Child’s legal status Art. 305

2. Within the family community Art. 306

I. Appropriate measures Art. 307

II. Deputyship Art. 308

Repealed Art. 309

III. Revocation of the right to decide on place of residence Art. 310

1. Ex-officio Art. 311

2. With the parents' consent Art. 312

V. Change in circumstances Art. 313

1. General Art. 314

2. Hearing for the child Art. 314a

3. Representation for the child Art. 314abis

4. Committal to a secure institution or psychiatric hospital Art. 314b

5. Right to notify Art. 314c

6. Duty to notify Art. 314d

7. Cooperation and administrative assistance Art. 314e

1. In general Art. 315

2. In marital proceedings

a. Jurisdiction of the court Art. 315a

b. Amendment of court orders Art. 315b

VIII. Supervision of foster children Art. 316

IX. Cooperation in youth support Art. 317

A. Management Art. 318

B. Use of income Art. 319

C. Drawing on the child’s assets Art. 320

I. Endowments Art. 321

II. Statutory entitlement Art. 322

III. Employment income, professional and business assets Art. 323

I. Appropriate measures Art. 324

II. Withdrawal of management Art. 325

I. Return of property Art. 326

II. Liability Art. 327

A. Principle Art. 327a

I. Of the child Art. 327b

II. Of the guardian Art. 327c

A. Persons obliged to lend assistance Art. 328

B. Scope and enforcement of the claim for assistance Art. 329

C. Maintenance of foundlings Art. 330

A. Requirement Art. 331

I. House rules and welfare Art. 332

II. Liability Art. 333

1. Requirements Art. 334

2. Asserting claims Art. 334bis

A. Family foundations Art. 335

1. Authority Art. 336

2. Form Art. 337

II. Duration Art. 338

1. Type of ownership Art. 339

2. Management and representation

a. In general Art. 340

b. Manager's powers Art. 341

3. Common property and personal property Art. 342

1. Grounds Art. 343

2. Notice, insolvency, marriage Art. 344

3. Death of a co-owner Art. 345

4. Division Art. 346

1. Nature Art. 347

2. Special grounds for dissolution Art. 348

Repealed Art. 349–359

A. Principle Art. 360

I. Execution Art. 361

II. Revocation Art. 362

C. Decision on effectiveness and acceptance Art. 363

D. Interpretation and clarification Art. 364

E. Fulfilment Art. 365

F. Remuneration and expenses Art. 366

G. Termination Art. 367

H. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 368

I. Regaining the capacity of judgement Art. 369

A. Principle Art. 370

B. Execution and revocation Art. 371

C. Loss of capacity of judgement Art. 372

D. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 373

A. Requirements for and extent of the right to act as representative Art. 374

B. Exercise of the right to act as representative Art. 375

C. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 376

A. Treatment plan Art. 377

B. The representative Art. 378

C. Urgent cases Art. 379

D. Treatment of a mental disorder Art. 380

E. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 381

A. Care agreement Art. 382

I. Requirements Art. 383

II. Records and Information Art. 384

III. Intervention by the adult protection authority Art. 385

C. Protection of privacy Art. 386

D. Supervision of residential and care institution Art. 387

A. Aim Art. 388

B. Subsidiarity and proportionality Art. 389

A. Requirements Art. 390

B. Scope of responsibilities Art. 391

C. Dispensing with a deputyship Art. 392

A. Assistance deputyship Art. 393

I. In general Art. 394

II. Asset management Art. 395

C. Advisory deputyship Art. 396

D. Combination of deputyships Art. 397

E. General deputyship Art. 398

Art. 399

I. General requirements Art. 400

II. Wishes of the client or his or her closely associated persons Art. 401

III. Appointment of two or more persons Art. 402

B. Incapacity and conflict of interests Art. 403

C. Remuneration and expenses Art. 404

A. Assumption of office Art. 405

B. Relationship with the client Art. 406

C. Client's autonomy Art. 407

I. Tasks Art. 408

II. Personal allowance Art. 409

III. Accounts Art. 410

E. Reporting Art. 411

F. Special transactions Art. 412

G. Duties of care and confidentiality Art. 413

H. Amendment of conditions Art. 414

A. Examination of accounts and report Art. 415

I. By law Art. 416

II. By order Art. 417

III. Lack of consent Art. 418

Art. 419

Art. 420

A. By law Art. 421

I. At the deputy's request Art. 422

II. Other cases Art. 423

C. Continuation of transactions Art. 424

D. Final report and final accounts Art. 425

I. Hospitalisation for treatment or care Art. 426

II. Detention of persons admitted voluntarily Art. 427

I. Adult protection authority Art. 428

1. Responsibility Art. 429

2. Procedures Art. 430

C. Regular review Art. 431

D. Authorised representative Art. 432

I. Treatment plan Art. 433

II. Treatment without consent Art. 434

III. Emergencies Art. 435

IV. Pre-discharge interview Art. 436

V. Cantonal law Art. 437

F. Measures restricting freedom of movement Art. 438

G. Petition to the court Art. 439

A. Adult protection authority Art. 440

B. Supervisory authority Art. 441

C. Local jurisdiction Art. 442

A. Notification rights and obligations Art. 443

B. Verification of jurisdiction Art. 444

C. Precautionary measures Art. 445

D. Procedural principles Art. 446

E. Hearing Art. 447

F. Obligations to cooperate and administrative assistance Art. 448

G. Assessment in an institution Art. 449

H. Appointment of a representative Art. 449a

I. Inspection of files Art. 449b

J. Notification duty Art. 449c

A. Object and right of appeal Art. 450

B. Grounds of appeal Art. 450a

C. Deadline for filing the appeal Art. 450b

D. Suspensive effect Art. 450c

E. Consultation with the lower instance and reconsideration Art. 450d

F. Special provisions in the case of care-related hospitalisation Art. 450e

Art. 450f

Art. 450g

A. Duty of confidentiality and information Art. 451

B. Effect of the measures on third parties Art. 452

C. Duty of cooperation Art. 453

A. Principle Art. 454

B. Prescription Art. 455

C. Liability under agency law Art. 456

I. Issue Art. 457

II. Parental line Art. 458

III. Grandparental line Art. 459

IV. Scope of succession rights Art. 460

Art. 461

B. Surviving spouses and registered partners Art. 462

Repealed Art. 463–464

C... Art. 465

D. State authority Art. 466

A. Wills Art. 467

B. Contract of succession Art. 468

C. Voidable dispositions Art. 469

I. Scope of testamentary powers Art. 470

II. Statutory entitlement Art. 471

III. ... Art. 472

IV. Dispositions in favour of the spouse Art. 473

1. Deduction of debts Art. 474

2. Inter vivos gifts Art. 475

3. Insurance claims Art. 476

I. Grounds Art. 477

II. Effect Art. 478

III. Burden of proof Art. 479

IV. Disinheritance of an insolvent person Art. 480

A. In general Art. 481

B. Burdens and conditions Art. 482

C. Naming of heirs Art. 483

I. Nature Art. 484

II. Duty on the obligor of the legacy Art. 485

III. Relationship to the estate Art. 486

E. Substitution Art. 487

I. Designation of a remainderman Art. 488

II. Time of delivery Art. 489

III. Security Art. 490

1. Of the provisional heir Art. 491

2. Of the remainderman Art. 492

V. Issue lacking capacity of judgement Art. 492a

G. Foundations Art. 493

I. Contracts naming heirs and making legacies Art. 494

1. Significance Art. 495

2. Void renunciation Art. 496

3. Rights of the creditors of the estate Art. 497

1. In general Art. 498

2. By public deed

a. Formal requirements Art. 499

b. Role of the public official Art. 500

c. Role of the witnesses Art. 501

d. Drawing up a will without the testator reading and signing it Art. 502

e. Persons involved Art. 503

f. Safekeeping of wills Art. 504

3. Holographic will Art. 505

4. Oral will

a. Dispositions Art. 506

b. Conversion into deed Art. 507

c. Loss of validity Art. 508

1. Revocation Art. 509

2. Destruction Art. 510

3. Subsequent wills Art. 511

I. Execution Art. 512

1. Inter vivos

a. By contract and by will Art. 513

b. By withdrawal from the contract Art. 514

2. Predeceased heir Art. 515

C. Restriction of testamentary freedom Art. 516

A. Appointment of executors Art. 517

B. Function of an executor Art. 518

I. On grounds of lack of testamentary capacity, lack of free will, unlawfulness or immorality Art. 519

1. In general Art. 520

2. In holographic wills Art. 520a

III. Prescription Art. 521

1. In general Art. 522

2. Bequests in favour of heirs with a statutory entitlement Art. 523

3. Rights of creditors Art. 524

1. Of abatement in general Art. 525

2. On specific legacies Art. 526

3. On dispositions inter vivos

a. Cases Art. 527

b. Restitution Art. 528

4. On assurance claims Art. 529

5. On usufruct and annuities Art. 530

6. On naming of remaindermen Art. 531

III. Order of abatement Art. 532

IV. Prescription Art. 533

A. Claims in respect of lifetime transfers Art. 534

I. Abatement Art. 535

II. Reimbursement Art. 536

A. Requirements for the deceased Art. 537

B. Place where succession commences Art. 538

1. Legal capacity Art. 539

2. Unworthiness to inherit

a. Grounds Art. 540

b. Effect on issue Art. 541

1. As heir Art. 542

2. As legatee Art. 543

3. Unborn child Art. 544

4. Remaindermen Art. 545

1. Devolution against security Art. 546

2. Annulment of presumption of death and restitution Art. 547

II. Succession rights of persons presumed dead Art. 548

III. Correlation of the two cases Art. 549

IV. Procedure ex officio Art. 550

A. In general Art. 551

B. Sealing the estate Art. 552

C. Inventory Art. 553

I. In general Art. 554

II. In the case of unknown heirs Art. 555

I. Duty to submit the will Art. 556

II. Reading the will Art. 557

III. Notification of interested parties Art. 558

IV. Release of the estate Art. 559

I. Heirs Art. 560

II. ... Art. 561

1. Vesting Art. 562

2. Object Art. 563

3. Relationship between creditors and legatees Art. 564

4. Abatement Art. 565

1. Right to renounce Art. 566

2. Time limit

a. In general Art. 567

b. In the case of an inventory Art. 568

3. Passing of right to disclaim Art. 569

4. Form Art. 570

II. Forfeiture of right to disclaim Art. 571

III. Disclaimer by one co-heir Art. 572

1. In general Art. 573

2. Entitlement of surviving spouse Art. 574

3. Disclaimer in favour of subsequent heirs Art. 575

V. Extension of time limit Art. 576

VI. Disclaimer of a legacy Art. 577

VII. Security for the heir’s creditors Art. 578

VIII. Liability in the event of disclaimer Art. 579

A. Requirements Art. 580

I. Inventory Art. 581

II. Formal call to account Art. 582

III. Inclusion ex officio Art. 583

IV. Result Art. 584

I. Administration Art. 585

II. Debt enforcement, litigation, prescription Art. 586

I. Time limit for declaration of intention Art. 587

II. Declaration of intention Art. 588

1. Liability as per inventory Art. 589

2. Liability beyond the inventory Art. 590

E. Liability for debts subject to a surety Art. 591

F. Acquisition by a state authority Art. 592

I. At the request of an heir Art. 593

II. At the request of the deceased’s creditors Art. 594

I. Administration Art. 595

liquidation Art. 596

III. Liquidation by the bankruptcy office Art. 597

A. Requirements Art. 598

B. Effect Art. 599

C. Prescription Art. 600

D. Action by a legatee Art. 601

I. Community of heirs Art. 602

II. Liability of the heirs Art. 603

B. Right to division Art. 604

C. Deferral of division Art. 605

D. Claims of household members Art. 606

A. In general Art. 607

I. Testamentary disposition Art. 608

II. Assistance from the authorities Art. 609

I. Equal rights of heirs Art. 610

II. Formation of lots Art. 611

III. Allocation and sale of specific objects Art. 612

IV. Allocation of the home and household effects to the surviving spouse Art. 612a

I. Items that belong together, family documents Art. 613

I.bis Agricultural inventory Art. 613a

II. Claims of the deceased against his or her heirs Art. 614

III. Pledged estate property Art. 615

Repealed Art. 616

1. Method of allocation

a. Imputed value Art. 617

b. Valuation procedure Art. 618

V. Agricultural businesses and land Art. 619

Repealed Art. 620–625

A. Hotchpot duty of the heirs Art. 626

B. Hotchpot if heirs cease to be heirs Art. 627

I. In kind or by imputation of value Art. 628

II. Correlation with share of the estate Art. 629

III. Hotchpot value Art. 630

D. Education costs Art. 631

E. Occasional gifts Art. 632

Repealed Art. 633

I. Contract of division Art. 634

II. Contracts regarding shares of the estate Art. 635

III. Contracts prior to succession Art. 636

I. Warranty Art. 637

II. Challenging the division Art. 638

I. Joint and several liability Art. 639

II. Recourse against co-heirs Art. 640

I. In general Art. 641

II. Animals Art. 641a

I. Constituent parts Art. 642

II. Natural fruits Art. 643

1. Definition Art. 644

2. Exclusions Art. 645

1. Relationship among co-owners Art. 646

2. Use and administration rules Art. 647

3. Ordinary administration Art. 647a

4. Major administrative acts Art. 647b

5. Construction work

a. Necessary work Art. 647c

b. Useful work Art. 647d

c. Works to improve appearance or convenience Art. 647e

6. Power of disposal over the object Art. 648

7. Costs and expenses Art. 649

8. Binding nature of rules and noting in the land register Art. 649a

9. Exclusion from collective ownership

a. Co-owners Art. 649b

b. Further entitled persons Art. 649c

10. Dissolution

a. Right to request division Art. 650

b. Form of partition Art. 651

c. Animals kept as pets Art. 651a

1. Prerequisites Art. 652

2. Effect Art. 653

3. Dissolution Art. 654

III. Joint ownership of agricultural enterprises and land Art. 654a

I. Immovable property Art. 655

II. Dependent property Art. 655a

I. Registration Art. 656

1. Transfer Art. 657

2. Appropriation Art. 658

3. Formation of new land Art. 659

4. Ground displacement

a. In general Art. 660

b. Constant ground displacement Art. 660a

c. Redrawing of boundaries Art. 660b

5. Adverse possession

a. Ordinary adverse possession Art. 661

b. Extraordinary adverse possession Art. 662

c. Time limits Art. 663

6. Ownerless and public objects Art. 664

III. Right to registration Art. 665

C. Loss Art. 666

I. Where the owner cannot be found Art. 666a

II. In the absence of the required management bodies Art. 666b

I. Scope Art. 667

1. Type of boundary Art. 668

2. Duty to establish boundaries Art. 669

3. Co-ownership of boundary markers Art. 670

1. Land and building materials

a. Ownership Art. 671

b. Compensation Art. 672

c. Assignment of land ownership Art. 673

2. Encroaching buildings Art. 674

3. Building right Art. 675

4. Pipes, cables, conduits Art. 676

5. Movable structures Art. 677

IV. Plants grown on the parcel of land Art. 678

1. Acts in excess of ownership rights Art. 679

2. Lawful management of the land Art. 679a

I. In general Art. 680

1. General principles Art. 681

2. Exercise Art. 681a

3. Modification, waiver Art. 681b

4. In respect of co-ownership and building rights Art. 682

5. Right of pre-emption of farms and farmland Art. 682a

Repealed Art. 683

1. Excess detriment Art. 684

2. Excavation and construction

a. Rule Art. 685

b. Cantonal regulations Art. 686

3. Plants

a. Rule Art. 687

b. Cantonal regulations Art. 688

4. Flowing waters Art. 689

5. Drainage Art. 690

6. Pipes, cables, conduits

a. Duty to permit Art. 691

b. Safeguarding the interests of the servient landowner Art. 692

c. Change of circumstances Art. 693

7. Rights of way

a. Necessary right of way Art. 694

b. Other rights of way Art. 695

c. Notation in the land register Art. 696

8. Enclosure Art. 697

9. Duty to maintain Art. 698

1. Access Art. 699

2. Retrieval of driftage and the like Art. 700

3. Trespass to ward off danger or damage Art. 701

1. In general Art. 702

2. Land improvements Art. 703

I. Spring ownership and spring rights Art. 704

II. Diversion of springs Art. 705

1. Damages Art. 706

2. Restoration Art. 707

IV. Community of spring owners Art. 708

V. Use of springs Art. 709

VI. Right to use an essential water source Art. 710

1. Water sources Art. 711

2. Land Art. 712

I. Definition Art. 712a

II. Object Art. 712b

III. Power of disposal Art. 712c

I. Deed of constitution Art. 712d

II. Layout of the condominium units and shares in the property Art. 712e

III. Extinction Art. 712f

I. Applicable provisions Art. 712g

1. Definition and distribution Art. 712h

2. Liability for cost contributions

a. Statutory lien Art. 712i

b. Special lien Art. 712k

III. Community’s capacity to act Art. 712l

1. Competence and legal status Art. 712m

2. Convening and chairing meetings Art. 712n

3. Voting rights Art. 712o

4. Quorum Art. 712p

1. Appointment Art. 712q

2. Removal Art. 712r

3. Duties

a. Implementation of provisions and resolutions concerning administration and use Art. 712s

b. External representation Art. 712t

A. Object Art. 713

1. Delivery of possession Art. 714

2. Reservation of ownership

a. In general Art. 715

b. Transactions involving payment by instalments Art. 716

3. Acquisition without possession Art. 717

1. Ownerless chattels Art. 718

2. Escaped animals Art. 719

1. Reporting, tracing

a. In general Art. 720

b. Animals Art. 720a

2. Safekeeping and auction Art. 721

3. Acquisition of ownership, return Art. 722

4. Treasure trove Art. 723

5. Objects of scientific value Art. 724

IV. Driftage Art. 725

V. Processing Art. 726

VI. Joining and mixing chattels Art. 727

VII. Adverse possession Art. 728

C. Loss Art. 729

A. Object Art. 730

1. Registration Art. 731

2. Legal transaction Art. 732

3. Creation in favour of own property Art. 733

1. In general Art. 734

2. Amalgamation Art. 735

3. By court order Art. 736

1. In general Art. 737

2. As defined by land register entry Art. 738

3. If needs change Art. 739

4. Cantonal law and local custom Art. 740

5. In the case of two or more beneficiaries Art. 740a

II. Duty of maintenance Art. 741

III. Relocation of the encumbrance Art. 742

IV. Partition of a property Art. 743

Repealed Art. 744

I. Object Art. 745

1. In general Art. 746

2. ... Art. 747

1. Grounds Art. 748

2. Duration Art. 749

3. Replacement on extinction of usufruct Art. 750

4. Return

a. Duty Art. 751

b. Liability Art. 752

c. Costs Art. 753

5. Prescription of compensation rights Art. 754

1. Rights of the usufructuary

a. In general Art. 755

b. Natural fruits Art. 756

c. Interest Art. 757

d. Assignability Art. 758

2. Rights of the owner

a. Supervision Art. 759

b. Security Art. 760

c. Security in the case of gifts and statutory usufruct Art. 761

d. Consequence of failure to provide security Art. 762

3. Inventory Art. 763

4. Costs

a. Preservation of the object Art. 764

b. Maintenance and administration Art. 765

c. Duty to pay interest on usufruct of assets Art. 766

d. Insurance Art. 767

1. Land

a. Fruits Art. 768

b. Use Art. 769

c. Woodland Art. 770

d. Mines Art. 771

2. Consumables and valued chattels Art. 772

3. Claims

a. Scope Art. 773

b. Repayments and reinvestment Art. 774

c. Right to assignment Art. 775

I. In general Art. 776

II. Rights of the usufructuary Art. 777

III. Maintenance costs Art. 778

I. Object and entry in the land register Art. 779

II. Legal transaction Art. 779a

III. Nature, scope and noting Art. 779b

1. Reversion Art. 779c

2. Compensation Art. 779d

Repealed Art. 779e

1. Prerequisites Art. 779f

2. Exercising the right of reversion Art. 779g

3. Other applicable cases Art. 779h

1. Right to establish a lien Art. 779i

2. Registration Art. 779k

VII. Maximum duration Art. 779l

D. Right of access to water sources Art. 780

E. Other servitudes Art. 781

F. Judicial measures Art. 781a

A. Object Art. 782

1. Registration and form of acquisition Art. 783

2. Public law real burdens Art. 784

Repealed Art. 785

1. In general Art. 786

2. Redemption

a. By the creditor Art. 787

b. By the debtor Art. 788

c. Redemption sum Art. 789

3. Prescription Art. 790

I. Creditor’s rights Art. 791

II. Debt liability Art. 792

I. Types Art. 793

1. Amount Art. 794

2. Interest Art. 795

1. Property subject to a charge Art. 796

2. Specification

a. In the case of a single property Art. 797

b. In the case of more than one property Art. 798

3. Agricultural properties Art. 798a

1. Registration Art. 799

2. In the case of joint ownership Art. 800

II. Extinction Art. 801

1. Transfer of liens Art. 802

2. Redemption by the debtor Art. 803

3. Monetary compensation Art. 804

I. Extent of security Art. 805

II. Rent Art. 806

III. Prescription Art. 807

1. In the event of a reduction in value

a. Court order and action by the creditor Art. 808

b. Security, restoration, redemption Art. 809

2. Depreciation without owner’s fault Art. 810

3. Disposal of minor portions of the property Art. 811

V. Further encumbrances Art. 812

1. Effect of rank Art. 813

2. Ranking Art. 814

3. Vacant ranks Art. 815

1. Mode Art. 816

2. Distribution of the proceeds Art. 817

3. Extent of security Art. 818

4. Security for maintenance costs Art. 819

1. Precedence Art. 820

2. Extinction of debt and lien Art. 821

IX. Entitlement to insurers’ payments Art. 822

X. Untraceable creditor Art. 823

A. Purpose and nature Art. 824

I. Establishment Art. 825

1. Right to have entry deleted Art. 826

2. Position of owner Art. 827

3. Unilateral redemption

a. Conditions and procedure Art. 828

b. Public auction Art. 829

c. Official valuation Art. 830

4. Termination Art. 831

1. Alienation Art. 832

2. Division Art. 833

3. Notice of assumption of debt Art. 834

II. Assignment of a debt Art. 835

I. Under cantonal law Art. 836

1. Cases in point Art. 837

2. Vendor, co—heirs and co—owners Art. 838

3. Tradesmen and building contractors

a. Registration Art. 839

b. Rank Art. 840

c. Privileged claim Art. 841

I. Purpose; Relationship with the debt arising from the basic relationship Art. 842

II. Form Art. 843

III. Position of owner Art. 844

IV. Sale. Division Art. 845

1. In general Art. 846

2. Notice Art. 847

VI. Protection of persons acting in good faith Art. 848

VII. Objections by the debtor Art. 849

VIII. Authorised person Art. 850

IX. Place of payment Art. 851

X. Changes in the legal relationship Art. 852

XI. Discharge Art. 853

1. In the absence of a creditor Art. 854

2. Deletion Art. 855

XIII. Public call to creditors Art. 856

I. Establishment Art. 857

II. Transfer Art. 858

III. Pledging, distraint and usufruct Art. 859

1. Registration Art. 860

2. Document of title Art. 861

II. Protection of persons acting in good faith Art. 862

1. Claims Art. 863

2. Assignment Art. 864

IV. Cancellation Art. 865

Repealed Art. 866–874

A. Bond issues secured by a lien Art. 875

Repealed Art. 876–883

1. Possession by pledgee Art. 884

2. Pledge of livestock Art. 885

3. Subordinate pledge Art. 886

4. Further pledge by pledgee Art. 887

1. Loss of possession Art. 888

2. Return Art. 889

3. Liability of the pledgee Art. 890

1. Rights of the pledgee Art. 891

2. Scope of the general lien Art. 892

3. Rank Art. 893

4. Default agreements Art. 894

I. Requirements Art. 895

II. Exceptions Art. 896

III. In the event of insolvency Art. 897

IV. Effect Art. 898

A. In general Art. 899

I. In the case of ordinary claims Art. 900

II. In the case of securities Art. 901

III. In the case of documents of title to goods Art. 902

IV. Subordinate pledge Art. 903

I. Extent of security Art. 904

II. Representation of pledged shares and capital contributions to limited liability companies Art. 905

III. Administration and payment Art. 906

I. Licensing Art. 907

II. Duration of licence Art. 908

I. Establishment Art. 909

1. Sale of pawned chattel Art. 910

2. Right to surplus Art. 911

1. Right of redemption Art. 912

2. Pawnbroker’s rights Art. 913

C. Purchase with right of repurchase Art. 914

D. Rules governing pawnbroking Art. 915

I. Definition Art. 919

II. Direct and derivative possession Art. 920

III. Temporary interruption Art. 921

I. Among parties present in person Art. 922

II. Among absent persons Art. 923

III. Without physical transfer Art. 924

IV. In the case of documents of title to goods Art. 925

1. Defence against interference Art. 926

2. Action for restitution Art. 927

3. Action for trespass Art. 928

4. Admissibility and prescription Art. 929

1. Presumption of ownership Art. 930

2. Presumption of indirect ownership Art. 931

3. Action against the possessor Art. 932

4. Power of disposal and right of restitution

a. Entrusted objects Art. 933

b. Stolen or lost chattels Art. 934

c. Cash and bearer securities Art. 935

d. Bad faith Art. 936

5. Presumption of title to land Art. 937

1. Possessor in good faith

a. Use Art. 938

b. Indemnity Art. 939

2. Possession in bad faith Art. 940

IV. Adverse possession Art. 941

1. In general Art. 942

2. Registered data

a. Object Art. 943

b. Exceptions Art. 944

3. Registers

a. Main Register Art. 945

b. Folio Art. 946

c. Joint folio Art. 947

d. Journal, supporting documents Art. 948

4. Implementing ordinances

a. In general Art. 949

b. For electronic registers Art. 949a

4b. ... Art. 949b

4c. ... Art. 949c

4c. Commissioning private individuals to use the electronic version of the land register Art. 949d

5. Official cadastral survey Art. 950

1. Districts

a. Allocation to districts Art. 951

b. Land straddling more than one district Art. 952

2. Land registries Art. 953

3. Fees Art. 954

III. Liability Art. 955

IV. Administrative supervision Art. 956

1. Right of appeal Art. 956a

2. Appeal proceedings Art. 956b

Repealed Art. 957

1. Ownership and rights in rem Art. 958

2. Priority notices

a. Personal rights Art. 959

b. Restrictions on powers of disposal Art. 960

c. Provisional entries Art. 961

d. Entry of subordinate rights Art. 961a

1. Restrictions under public law Art. 962

2. Of representatives Art. 962a

1. Applications

a. For an entry Art. 963

b. For a deletion Art. 964

2. Authority

a. Valid proof of authority Art. 965

b. Completion of application Art. 966

1. In general Art. 967

2. For easements Art. 968

V. Duty to notify Art. 969

I. Information and right of consultation Art. 970

II. Publication Art. 970a

I. Need for an entry Art. 971

1. In general Art. 972

2. In relation to third parties acting in good faith Art. 973

3. In relation to third parties acting in bad faith Art. 974

1. On the division of property Art. 974a

2. In the case of the consolidation of parcels of land Art. 974b

II. Unwarranted entries Art. 975

1. Clearly insignificant entries Art. 976

2. Other entries

a. In general Art. 976a

b. On objection Art. 976b

3. Public revision procedure Art. 976c

IV. Corrections Art. 977

I. General rule of non-retroactive effect Art. 1

1. Public policy and good morals Art. 2

2. Relationships defined by law Art. 3

3. Non-vested rights Art. 4

I. Capacity to act Art. 5

II. Presumed death Art. 6

IIa. Central civil register database Art. 6a

1. In general Art. 6b

2. Accounting and auditors Art. 6c

IV. Protection of the individual against violence, threats or stalking Art. 6d

I. Marriage Art. 7

1. Principle Art. 7a

2. Pending divorce proceedings Art. 7b

3. Period of separation for pending divorce proceedings Art. 7c

4. Occupational pension Art. 7d

5. Conversion of existing pensions Art. 7e

1. Principle Art. 8

2. Surname Art. 8a

3. Citizenship Art. 8b

II. Marital property law applicable to marriages contracted before 1 January 1912 Art. 9

1. In general Art. 9a

2. Change from a union of property to participation in acquired property

a. Change to the bodies of assets Art. 9b

b. Preferential right Art. 9c

c. Division of marital property under the new law Art. 9d

3. Retention of the union of property regime Art. 9e

4. Retention of separation of property by operation of law or by court order Art. 9f

5. Marital agreement

a. In general Art. 10

b. Legal effect in relation to third parties Art. 10a

c. Application of the new law Art. 10b

d. Contractual separation of property according to previous law Art. 10c

e. Marital agreements concluded with a view to the new law coming into force Art. 10d

f. Register of marital property Art. 10e

6. Repayment of debts in the case of separation of assets under the law of marital property Art. 11

7. Protection of creditors Art. 11a

III. The parent-child relationship in general Art. 12

1. Continuation of the previous law Art. 12a

2. Pending proceedings Art. 12b

3. Application of the new law Art. 12c

Repealed Art. 12cbis

IIIter. Contesting a declaration of legitimacy Art. 12d

1. Pending actions Art. 13

2. New actions Art. 13a

IVbis. Time limit for declaring or challenging the parent-child relationship Art. 13b

1. Existing maintenance titles

2. Pending proceedings Art. 13c

IVquater. Name of the child Art. 13d

1. Existing measures Art. 14

2. Pending proceedings Art. 14a

I. Heirs and succession Art. 15

II. Testamentary dispositions Art. 16

I. Rights in rem in general Art. 17

II. Right to entry in the land register Art. 18

III. Adverse possession Art. 19

1. Trees on another person's land Art. 20

2. Condominium

a. Original Art. 20bis

b. Converted Art. 20ter

c. Correction of the land registers Art. 20quater

V. Easements Art. 21

1. Recognition of the existing document of title Art. 22

2. Creation of liens Art. 23

3. Repayment of securities Art. 24

4. Extent of liability under the lien Art. 25

5. Rights and obligations from the mortgage

a. In general Art. 26

b. Rights to security Art. 27

c. Termination, transfer Art. 28

6. Ranking Art. 29

7. Ranking positions Art. 30

8. ... Art. 31 and 32

9. Equal status of previous forms of lien with those under the new law Art. 33

10. Continued application of previous law to existing forms of lien Art. 33a

11. Conversion the form of the mortgage certificate Art. 33b

1. Provisions on form Art. 34

2. Effect Art. 35

VIII. Special lien Art. 36

IX. Possession Art. 37

1. Establishment of the land register Art. 38

2. Official cadastral survey

a. ... Art. 39

b. Relation to the land register Art. 40

c. Time schedule Art. 41

Repealed Art. 42

3. Registration of rights in rem

a. Procedure Art. 43

b. Consequences of non-registration Art. 44

4. Abolished rights Art. 45

5. Postponement in the introduction of the land register Art. 46

6. Introduction of the property law before the land register Art. 47

7. Effect of cantonal forms Art. 48

F. Prescription Art. 49

G. Forms of contract Art. 50

A. Repeal of cantonal civil law Art. 51

I. Rights and duties of the cantons Art. 52

II. Substitute ordinances Art. 53

C. Designation of competent authorities Art. 54

I. In general Art. 55

II. Electronic copies and legalisations Art. 55a

E. Allocation of water rights Art. 56

F.–H. ... Art. 57

J. Debt enforcement and bankruptcy Art. 58

K. Application of Swiss and foreign law Art. 59

L. Repeal of federal civil law Art. 60

M. Final Provision Art. 61


 AS 24 233, 27 207 and BS 2 3


1 [BS 1 3]. This provision corresponds to Art. 122 of the Federal Constitution of 18 April 1999 (SR 101).2 Amended by Annex No 2 of the Civil Jurisdiction Act of 24 March 2000, in force since 1 Jan. 2001 (AS 2000 2355; BBl 1999 2829).3 BBl 1904 IV 1, 1907 VI 367

Index

210

Code civil suisse

du 10 décembre 1907 (Etat le 1er janvier 2021)

L’Assemblée fédérale de la Confédération suisse,

vu l’art. 64 de la constitution1,2 vu le message du Conseil fédéral du 28 mai 19043,

décrète:

  Titre préliminaire

Art. 1 A. Application de la loi

A. Application de la loi

1 La loi régit toutes les matières auxquelles se rapportent la lettre ou l’esprit de l’une de ses dispositions.

2 À défaut d’une disposition légale applicable, le juge prononce selon le droit coutumier et, à défaut d’une coutume, selon les règles qu’il établirait s’il avait à faire acte de législateur.

3 Il s’inspire des solutions consacrées par la doctrine et la jurisprudence.

Art. 2 B. Étendue des droits civils / I. Devoirs généraux

B. Étendue des droits civils

I. Devoirs généraux

1 Chacun est tenu d’exercer ses droits et d’exécuter ses obligations selon les règles de la bonne foi.

2 L’abus manifeste d’un droit n’est pas protégé par la loi.

Art. 3 B. Étendue des droits civils / II. Bonne foi

II. Bonne foi

1 La bonne foi est présumée, lorsque la loi en fait dépendre la naissance ou les effets d’un droit.

2 Nul ne peut invoquer sa bonne foi, si elle est incompatible avec l’attention que les circonstances permettaient d’exiger de lui.

Art. 4 B. Étendue des droits civils / III. Pouvoir d’appréciation du juge

III. Pouvoir d’appréciation du juge

Le juge applique les règles du droit et de l’équité, lorsque la loi réserve son pouvoir d’appréciation ou qu’elle le charge de prononcer en tenant compte soit des circonstances, soit de justes motifs.

Art. 5 C. Droit fédéral et droit cantonal / I. Droit civil et usages locaux

C. Droit fédéral et droit cantonal

I. Droit civil et usages locaux

1 Les cantons ont la faculté d’établir ou d’abroger des règles de droit civil dans les matières où leur compétence législative a été maintenue.

2 Le droit cantonal précédemment en vigueur est tenu pour l’expression de l’usage ou des usages locaux réservés par la loi, à moins que l’existence d’un usage contraire ne soit prouvée.

Art. 6 C. Droit fédéral et droit cantonal / II. Droit public des cantons

II. Droit public des cantons

1 Les lois civiles de la Confédération laissent subsister les compétences des cantons en matière de droit public.

2 Les cantons peuvent, dans les limites de leur souveraineté, restreindre ou prohiber le commerce de certaines choses ou frapper de nullité les opérations qui s’y rapportent.

Art. 7 D. Dispositions générales du droit des obligations

D. Dispositions générales du droit des obligations

Les dispositions générales du droit des obligations relatives à la conclusion, aux effets et à l’extinction des contrats sont aussi applicables aux autres matières du droit civil.

Art. 8 E. De la preuve / I. Fardeau de la preuve

E. De la preuve

I. Fardeau de la preuve

Chaque partie doit, si la loi ne prescrit le contraire, prouver les faits qu’elle allègue pour en déduire son droit.

Art. 9 E. De la preuve / II. Titres publics

II. Titres publics

1 Les registres publics et les titres authentiques font foi des faits qu’ils constatent et dont l’inexactitude n’est pas prouvée.

2 La preuve que ces faits sont inexacts n’est soumise à aucune forme particulière.

Art. 101

1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

  Livre premier: Droit des personnes

  Titre premier: Des personnes physiques

  Chapitre I: De la personnalité

Art. 11 A. De la personnalité en général / I. Jouissance des droits civils

A. De la personnalité en général

I. Jouissance des droits civils

1 Toute personne jouit des droits civils.

2 En conséquence, chacun a, dans les limites de la loi, une aptitude égale à devenir sujet de droits et d’obligations.

Art. 12 A. De la personnalité en général / II. Exercice des droits civils / 1. Son objet

II. Exercice des droits civils

1. Son objet

Quiconque a l’exercice des droits civils est capable d’acquérir et de s’obliger.

Art. 13 A. De la personnalité en général / II. Exercice des droits civils / 2. Ses conditions / a. En général

2. Ses conditions

a. En général

Toute personne majeure et capable de discernement a l’exercice des droits civils.

Art. 141A. De la personnalité en général / II. Exercice des droits civils / 2. Ses conditions / b. Majorité

b. Majorité

La majorité est fixée à 18 ans révolus.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1de la LF du 7 oct. 1994, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 1093).

Art. 151A. De la personnalité en général / II. Exercice des droits civils / 2. Ses conditions / c. ...

c. ...


1 Abrogé par le ch. I 1de la LF du 7 oct. 1994, avec effet au 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 1093).

Art. 161A. De la personnalité en général / II. Exercice des droits civils / 2. Ses conditions / d. Discernement

d. Discernement

Toute personne qui n’est pas privée de la faculté d’agir raisonnablement en raison de son jeune âge, de déficience mentale, de troubles psychiques, d’ivresse ou d’autres causes semblables est capable de discernement au sens de la présente loi.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 171A. De la personnalité en général / III. Incapacité d’exercer les droits civils / 1. En général

III. Incapacité d’exercer les droits civils

1. En général

Les personnes incapables de discernement, les mineurs et les personnes sous curatelle de portée générale n’ont pas l’exercice des droits civils.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 18 A. De la personnalité en général / III. Incapacité d’exercer les droits civils / 2. Absence de discernement

2. Absence de discernement

Les actes de celui qui est incapable de discernement n’ont pas d’effet juridique; demeurent réservées les exceptions prévues par la loi.

Art. 19 A. De la personnalité en général / III. Incapacité d’exercer les droits civils / 3. Personnes capables de discernement qui n’ont pas l’exercice des droits civils / a. Principe

3. Personnes capables de discernement qui n’ont pas l’exercice des droits civils

a. Principe1

1 Les personnes capables de discernement mais privées de l’exercice des droits civils ne peuvent contracter une obligation ou renoncer à un droit qu’avec le consentement de leur représentant légal.2

2 Elles n’ont pas besoin de ce consentement pour acquérir à titre purement gratuit ni pour régler les affaires mineures se rapportant à leur vie quotidienne.3

3 Ils sont responsables du dommage causé par leurs actes illicites.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 19a1A. De la personnalité en général / III. Incapacité d’exercer les droits civils / 3. Personnes capables de discernement qui n’ont pas l’exercice des droits civils / b. Consentement du représentant légal

b. Consentement du représentant légal

1 Sous réserve de dispositions légales contraires, le représentant légal peut consentir expressément ou tacitement à l’acte par avance ou le ratifier.

2 L’autre partie est libérée si la ratification n’a pas lieu dans un délai convenable, qu’elle a fixé ou fait fixer par le juge.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 19b1A. De la personnalité en général / III. Incapacité d’exercer les droits civils / 3. Personnes capables de discernement qui n’ont pas l’exercice des droits civils / c. Défaut de consentement

c. Défaut de consentement

1 Si l’acte n’est pas ratifié par le représentant légal, chaque partie peut réclamer les prestations qu’elle a fournies. La personne privée de l’exercice des droits civils ne répond toutefois que jusqu’à concurrence des sommes dont elle a tiré profit, dont elle se trouve enrichie au moment de la répétition ou dont elle s’est dessaisie de mauvaise foi.

2 La personne privée de l’exercice des droits civils qui s’est faussement donnée pour capable répond envers les tiers du dommage qu’elle leur a causé.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 19c1A. De la personnalité en général / III. Incapacité d’exercer les droits civils / 4. Droits strictement personnels

4. Droits strictement personnels

1 Les personnes capables de discernement mais privées de l’exercice des droits civils exercent leurs droits strictement personnels de manière autonome; les cas dans lesquels la loi exige le consentement du représentant légal sont réservés.

2 Les personnes incapables de discernement sont représentées par leur représentant légal, sauf pour les droits qui ne souffrent aucune représentation en raison de leur lien étroit avec la personnalité.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 19d1A. De la personnalité en général / IIIbis. Exercice restreint des droits civils

IIIbis. Exercice restreint des droits civils

L’exercice des droits civils peut être restreint par une mesure de protection de l’adulte.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 20 A. De la personnalité en général / IV. Parenté et alliance / 1. Parenté

IV. Parenté et alliance

1. Parenté

1 La proximité de parenté s’établit par le nombre des générations.

2 Les parents en ligne directe sont ceux qui descendent l’un de l’autre, les parents en ligne collatérale ceux qui, sans descendre l’un de l’autre, descendent d’un auteur commun.

Art. 211A. De la personnalité en général / IV. Parenté et alliance / 2. Alliance

2. Alliance

1 Les parents d’une personne sont dans la même ligne et au même degré les alliés de son conjoint ou de son partenaire enregistré.

2 La dissolution du mariage ou du partenariat enregistré ne fait pas cesser l’alliance.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).

Art. 22 A. De la personnalité en général / V. Droit de cité et domicile / 1. Droit de cité

V. Droit de cité et domicile

1. Droit de cité

1 L’origine d’une personne est déterminée par son droit de cité.

2 Le droit de cité est réglé par le droit public.

3 Lorsqu’une personne possède plusieurs droits de cité, le lieu de son origine est celui qui est en même temps son domicile actuel ou qui a été son dernier domicile; sinon, son origine est déterminée par le dernier droit de cité qu’elle ou ses ascendants ont acquis.

Art. 23 A. De la personnalité en général / V. Droit de cité et domicile / 2. Domicile / a. Définition

2. Domicile

a. Définition

1 Le domicile de toute personne est au lieu où elle réside avec l’intention de s’y établir; le séjour dans une institution de formation ou le placement dans un établissement d’éducation, un home, un hôpital ou une maison de détention ne constitue en soi pas le domicile.1

2 Nul ne peut avoir en même temps plusieurs domiciles.

3 Cette dernière disposition ne s’applique pas à l’établissement industriel ou commercial.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 24 A. De la personnalité en général / V. Droit de cité et domicile / 2. Domicile / b. Changement de domicile ou séjour

b. Changement de domicile ou séjour

1 Toute personne conserve son domicile aussi longtemps qu’elle ne s’en est pas créé un nouveau.

2 Le lieu où elle réside est considéré comme son domicile, lorsque l’existence d’un domicile antérieur ne peut être établie ou lorsqu’elle a quitté son domicile à l’étranger et n’en a pas acquis un nouveau en Suisse.

Art. 251A. De la personnalité en général / V. Droit de cité et domicile / 2. Domicile / c. Domicile des mineurs

c. Domicile des mineurs2

1 L’enfant sous autorité parentale partage le domicile de ses père et mère ou, en l’absence de domicile commun des père et mère, le domicile de celui de ses parents qui détient la garde; subsidiairement, son domicile est déterminé par le lieu de sa résidence.3

2 Le domicile de l’enfant sous tutelle est au siège de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant.4


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
4 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 261A. De la personnalité en général / V. Droit de cité et domicile / 2. Domicile / d. Domicile des majeurs sous curatelle de portée générale

d. Domicile des majeurs sous curatelle de portée générale

Le domicile des majeurs sous curatelle de portée générale est au siège de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 27 B. Protection de la personnalité / I. Contre des engagements excessifs

B. Protection de la personnalité

I. Contre des engagements excessifs1

1 Nul ne peut, même partiellement, renoncer à la jouissance ou à l’exercice des droits civils.

2 Nul ne peut aliéner sa liberté, ni s’en interdire l’usage dans une mesure contraire aux lois ou aux moeurs.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).

Art. 281B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 1. Principe

II. Contre des atteintes

1. Principe

1 Celui qui subit une atteinte illicite à sa personnalité peut agir en justice pour sa protection contre toute personne qui y participe.

2 Une atteinte est illicite, à moins qu’elle ne soit justifiée par le consentement de la victime, par un intérêt prépondérant privé ou public, ou par la loi.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).

Art. 28a1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 2. Actions / a. En général

2. Actions

a. En général2

1 Le demandeur peut requérir le juge:

1.
d’interdire une atteinte illicite, si elle est imminente;
2.
de la faire cesser, si elle dure encore;
3.
d’en constater le caractère illicite, si le trouble qu’elle a créé subsiste.

2 Il peut en particulier demander qu’une rectification ou que le jugement soit communiqué à des tiers ou publié.

3 Sont réservées les actions en dommages-intérêts et en réparation du tort moral, ainsi que la remise du gain selon les dispositions sur la gestion d’affaires.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 23 juin 2006 (Protection de la personnalité en cas de violence, de menaces ou de harcèlement), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2007 (RO 2007 137; FF 2005 6437 6461).

Art. 28b1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 2. Actions / b. Violence, menaces ou harcèlement

b. Violence, menaces ou harcèlement

1 En cas de violence, de menaces ou de harcèlement, le demandeur peut requérir le juge d’interdire à l’auteur de l’atteinte, en particulier:

1.
de l’approcher ou d’accéder à un périmètre déterminé autour de son logement;
2.
de fréquenter certains lieux, notamment des rues, places ou quartiers;
3.
de prendre contact avec lui, notamment par téléphone, par écrit ou par voie électronique, ou de lui causer d’autres dérangements.

2 En outre, si le demandeur vit dans le même logement que l’auteur de l’atteinte, il peut demander au juge de le faire expulser pour une période déterminée. Ce délai peut être prolongé une fois pour de justes motifs.

3 Le juge peut, pour autant que la décision paraisse équitable au vu des circonstances:

1.
astreindre le demandeur à verser à l’auteur de l’atteinte une indemnité appropriée pour l’utilisation exclusive du logement;
2.
avec l’accord du bailleur, attribuer au seul demandeur les droits et les obligations qui résultent du contrat de bail.

3bis Il communique sa décision aux autorités de protection de l’enfant et de l’adulte compétentes et au service cantonal visé à l’al. 4, ainsi qu’à d’autres autorités ou à des tiers si cela semble nécessaire à l’accomplissement de leur tâche ou à la protection du demandeur ou si cela sert à l’exécution de la décision.2

4 Les cantons désignent un service qui peut prononcer l’expulsion immédiate du logement commun en cas de crise, et règlent la procédure.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 23 juin 2006 (Protection de la personnalité en cas de violence, de menaces ou de harcèlement), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2007 (RO 2007 137; FF 2005 6437 6461).
2 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 14 déc. 2018 sur l’amélioration de la protection des victimes de violence, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2020 (RO 2019 2273; FF 2017 6913).

Art. 28c à 28f1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 3. ...

3. ...


1 Introduits par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661). Abrogés par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 28g1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 4. Droit de réponse / a. Principe

4. Droit de réponse

a. Principe2

1 Celui qui est directement touché dans sa personnalité par la présentation que font des médias à caractère périodique, notamment la presse, la radio et la télévision, de faits qui le concernent, a le droit de répondre.

2 Il n’y a pas de droit de réponse en cas de reproduction fidèle des débats publics d’une autorité auxquels la personne touchée a participé.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 23 juin 2006 (Protection de la personnalité en cas de violence, de menaces ou de harcèlement), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2007 (RO 2007 137; FF 2005 6437 6461).

Art. 28h1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 4. Droit de réponse / b. Forme et contenu

b. Forme et contenu

1 La réponse doit être concise et se limiter à l’objet de la présentation contestée.

2 La réponse peut être refusée si elle est manifestement inexacte ou si elle est contraire au droit ou aux moeurs.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).

Art. 28i1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 4. Droit de réponse / c. Procédure

c. Procédure

1 L’auteur de la réponse doit en adresser le texte à l’entreprise dans les vingt jours à compter de la connaissance de la présentation contestée mais au plus tard dans les trois mois qui suivent sa diffusion.

2 L’entreprise fait savoir sans délai à l’auteur quand elle diffusera la réponse ou pourquoi elle la refuse.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).

Art. 28k1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 4. Droit de réponse / d. Modalités de la diffusion

d. Modalités de la diffusion

1 La réponse doit être diffusée de manière à atteindre le plus tôt possible le public qui a eu connaissance de la présentation contestée.

2 La réponse doit être désignée comme telle; l’entreprise ne peut y ajouter immédiatement qu’une déclaration par laquelle elle indique si elle maintient sa présentation des faits ou donne ses sources.

3 La diffusion de la réponse est gratuite.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).

Art. 28l1B. Protection de la personnalité / II. Contre des atteintes / 4. Droit de réponse / e. Recours au juge

e. Recours au juge

1 Si l’entreprise empêche l’exercice du droit, refuse la diffusion ou ne l’exécute pas correctement, l’auteur peut s’adresser au juge.

2 ...2

3 et 4 ...3


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 16 déc. 1983, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1985 (RO 1984 778; FF 1982 II 661).
2 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).
3 Abrogés par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 29 B. Protection de la personnalité / III. Relativement au nom / 1. Protection du nom

III. Relativement au nom

1. Protection du nom

1 Celui dont le nom est contesté peut demander au juge la reconnaissance de son droit.

2 Celui qui est lésé par une usurpation de son nom peut intenter action pour la faire cesser, sans préjudice de tous dommages-intérêts en cas de faute et d’une indemnité à titre de réparation morale si cette indemnité est justifiée par la nature du tort éprouvé.

Art. 30 B. Protection de la personnalité / III. Relativement au nom / 2. Changement de nom / a. En général

2. Changement de nom

a. En général1

1 Le gouvernement du canton de domicile peut, s’il existe des motifs légitimes, autoriser une personne à changer de nom.2

2 ...3

3 Toute personne lésée par un changement de nom peut l’attaquer en justice dans l’année à compter du jour où elle en a eu connaissance.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).
3 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), avec effet au 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 30a1B. Protection de la personnalité / III. Relativement au nom / 2. Changement de nom / b. En cas de décès d’un des époux

b. En cas de décès d’un des époux

En cas de décès d’un des époux, le conjoint qui a changé de nom lors de la conclusion du mariage peut déclarer en tout temps à l’officier de l’état civil vouloir reprendre son nom de célibataire.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 31 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / I. Naissance et mort

C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité

I. Naissance et mort

1 La personnalité commence avec la naissance accomplie de l’enfant vivant; elle finit par la mort.

2 L’enfant conçu jouit des droits civils, à la condition qu’il naisse vivant.

Art. 32 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / II. Preuve de la vie et de la mort / 1. Fardeau de la preuve

II. Preuve de la vie et de la mort

1. Fardeau de la preuve

1 Celui qui, pour exercer un droit, prétend qu’une personne existe ou qu’elle est morte, ou qu’elle était vivante à une époque déterminée, ou qu’elle a survécu à une autre personne, doit prouver le fait qu’il allègue.

2 Lorsque plusieurs personnes sont mortes sans qu’il soit possible d’établir si l’une a survécu à l’autre, leur décès est présumé avoir eu lieu au même moment.

Art. 33 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / II. Preuve de la vie et de la mort / 2. Moyens de preuve / a. En général

2. Moyens de preuve

a. En général

1 Les actes de l’état civil font preuve de la naissance et de la mort.

2 À défaut d’actes de l’état civil ou lorsqu’il est établi que ceux qui existent sont inexacts, la preuve peut se faire par tous autres moyens.

Art. 34 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / II. Preuve de la vie et de la mort / 2. Moyens de preuve / b. Indices de mort

b. Indices de mort

Le décès d’une personne dont le corps n’a pas été retrouvé est considéré comme établi, lorsque cette personne a disparu dans des circonstances telles que sa mort doit être tenue pour certaine.

Art. 35 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / III. Déclaration d’absence / 1. En général

III. Déclaration d’absence

1. En général

1 Si le décès d’une personne disparue en danger de mort ou dont on n’a pas eu de nouvelles depuis longtemps paraît très probable, le juge peut déclarer l’absence à la requête de ceux qui ont des droits subordonnés au décès.

2 ...1


1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 36 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / III. Déclaration d’absence / 2. Procédure

2. Procédure

1 La déclaration d’absence peut être requise un an au moins après le danger de mort ou cinq ans après les dernières nouvelles.

2 Le juge invite, par sommation dûment publiée, les personnes qui pourraient donner des nouvelles de l’absent à se faire connaître dans un délai déterminé.

3 Ce délai sera d’un an au moins à compter de la première sommation.

Art. 37 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / III. Déclaration d’absence / 3. Requête devenue sans objet

3. Requête devenue sans objet

Si l’absent reparaît avant l’expiration du délai, si l’on a de ses nouvelles ou si la date de sa mort est établie, la requête est écartée.

Art. 38 C. Commencement et fin de la personnalité / III. Déclaration d’absence / 4. Effets

4. Effets

1 Lorsque la sommation est restée infructueuse, le juge prononce la déclaration d’absence et les droits ouverts par le décès peuvent être exercés de la même manière que si la mort de l’absent était établie.

2 Les effets de la déclaration d’absence remontent au jour du danger de mort ou des dernières nouvelles.

3 La déclaration d’absence entraîne la dissolution du mariage.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).


  Chapitre II:1  Des actes de l’état civil

Art. 391A. Registre / I. Généralités

A. Registre

I. Généralités

1 L’état civil est constaté dans un registre informatisé (registre de l’état civil).

2 Par état civil, on entend notamment:

1.
les faits d’état civil, tels que la naissance, le mariage, la conclusion d’un partenariat enregistré, le décès;
2.
le statut personnel et familial, tels que la majorité, la filiation, le lien matrimonial, le partenariat enregistré;
3.
les noms;
4.
les droits de cité cantonal et communal;
5.
la nationalité.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Enregistrement de l’état civil et registre foncier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 4017; FF 2014 3395).

Art. 40 A. Registre / II. Obligation de déclarer

II. Obligation de déclarer1

1 Le Conseil fédéral détermine les personnes et les autorités qui sont tenues de déclarer les données nécessaires à la constatation de l’état civil.

2 Il peut prévoir que la violation de l’obligation de déclarer est passible de l’amende.

3 ...2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001 (Tenue informatisée des registres de l’état civil), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2004 (RO 2004 2911; FF 2001 1537).
2 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001 (Tenue informatisée des registres de l’état civil), avec effet au 1er juil. 2004 (RO 2004 2911; FF 2001 1537).

Art. 41 A. Registre / III. Preuves de données non litigieuses

III. Preuves de données non litigieuses

1 Lorsque les données relatives à l’état civil doivent être établies par des documents, l’autorité cantonale de surveillance peut admettre que la preuve repose sur une déclaration faite à l’officier de l’état civil, pour autant que les données ne soient pas litigieuses et que la présentation des documents s’avère impossible ou ne puisse raisonnablement être exigée.

2 L’officier de l’état civil invite expressément la personne qui procède à la déclaration à dire la vérité et la rend attentive aux conséquences pénales d’une fausse déclaration.

Art. 42 A. Registre / IV. Modification / 1. Par le juge

IV. Modification

1. Par le juge

1 Toute personne qui justifie d’un intérêt personnel légitime peut demander au juge d’ordonner l’inscription, la rectification ou la radiation de données litigieuses relatives à l’état civil. Les autorités cantonales de surveillance concernées sont entendues et le juge leur notifie sa décision.

2 Les autorités cantonales de surveillance ont également qualité pour agir.

Art. 43 A. Registre / IV. Modification / 2. Par les autorités de l’état civil

2. Par les autorités de l’état civil

Les autorités de l’état civil rectifient d’office les inexactitudes résultant d’une inadvertance ou d’une erreur manifestes.

Art. 43a1A. Registre / V. Protection et divulgation des données

V. Protection et divulgation des données

1 Le Conseil fédéral assure, en ce qui concerne les actes de l’état civil, la protection de la personnalité et des droits fondamentaux des personnes dont les données sont traitées.

2 Il règle la divulgation de données aux particuliers qui justifient d’un intérêt direct et digne de protection.

3 Il détermine les autorités externes à l’état civil auxquelles sont divulguées, régulièrement ou sur demande, les données indispensables à l’accomplissement de leurs tâches légales. Les dispositions de lois cantonales relatives à la divulgation de données sont réservées.

3bis Les autorités de l’état civil sont tenues de dénoncer aux autorités compétentes les infractions pénales qu’elles constatent dans l’exercice de leurs fonctions.2

4 Les autorités suivantes peuvent accéder en ligne aux données nécessaires à la vérification de l’identité d’une personne:

1.
les autorités d’établissement au sens de la loi fédérale du 22 juin 2001 sur les documents d’identité des ressortissants suisses3;
2.4
le service fédéral qui gère le système de recherche informatisé de police prévu à l’art. 15 de la loi fédérale du 13 juin 2008 sur les systèmes d’information de police de la Confédération5 et les services de filtrage des corps de police cantonaux et municipaux raccordés à ce système de recherche;
3.
le service fédéral qui tient le casier judiciaire informatisé prévu à l’art. 359 du code pénal6;
4.
le service fédéral chargé de la recherche de personnes disparues7;
5.8
le Service de renseignement de la Confédération en vue de déceler à temps et de prévenir des menaces pour la sûreté intérieure ou extérieure au sens de l’art. 6, al. 1, let. a, de la loi fédérale du 25 septembre 2015 sur le renseignement9;
6.10
les autorités compétentes pour la tenue des registres cantonaux et communaux des habitants au sens de la loi du 23 juin 2006 sur l’harmonisation des registres11;
7.12
le service fédéral compétent pour la tenue du registre central des assurés prévu à l’art. 71, al. 4, let. a, de la loi fédérale du 20 décembre 1946 sur l’assurance-vieillesse et survivants13;
8.14
les services fédéraux compétents pour la tenue du registre des Suisses de l’étranger prévu à l’art. 4, al. 1, de la loi fédérale du 24 mars 2000 sur le traitement des données personnelles au Département fédéral des affaires étrangères15.

1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001 (Tenue informatisée des registres de l’état civil), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2004 (RO 2004 2911; FF 2001 1537).
2 Introduit par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2012 concernant les mesures de lutte contre les mariages forcés, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2013 (RO 2013 1035; FF 2011 2045).
3 RS 143.1
4 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe 1 ch. 4 de la LF du 13 juin 2008 sur les systèmes d’information de police de la Confédération, en vigueur depuis le 5 déc. 2008 (RO 2008 4989; FF 2006 4819).
5 RS 361
6 RS 311.0. Actuellement: art. 365.
7 Office fédéral de la police
8 Introduit par l’annexe ch. II 4 de la LF du 25 sept. 2015 sur le renseignement, en vigueur depuis le 1er sept. 2017 (RO 2017 4095; FF 2014 2029).
9 RS 121
10 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Enregistrement de l’état civil et registre foncier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 4017; FF 2014 3395).
11 RS 431.02
12 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Enregistrement de l’état civil et registre foncier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 4017; FF 2014 3395).
13 RS 831.10
14 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Enregistrement de l’état civil et registre foncier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 4017; FF 2014 3395).
15 RS 235.2

Art. 44 B. Organisation / I. Autorités de l’état civil / 1. Officiers de l’état civil

B. Organisation

I. Autorités de l’état civil

1. Officiers de l’état civil

1 Les officiers de l’état civil ont notamment les attributions suivantes:

1.
tenir les registres;
2.
établir les communications et délivrer les extraits;
3.
diriger la procédure préparatoire du mariage et célébrer le mariage;
4.
recevoir les déclarations relatives à l’état civil.

2 À titre exceptionnel, le Conseil fédéral peut conférer certaines de ces attributions à des représentants de la Suisse à l’étranger.

Art. 45 B. Organisation / I. Autorités de l’état civil / 2. Autorités de surveillance

2. Autorités de surveillance

1 Chaque canton institue une autorité de surveillance.

2 Cette autorité a notamment les attributions suivantes:

1.
exercer la surveillance sur les offices de l’état civil;
2.
assister et conseiller les officiers de l’état civil;
3.
collaborer à la tenue des registres et à la procédure préparatoire du mariage;
4.
décider de la reconnaissance et de la transcription des faits d’état civil survenus à l’étranger et des décisions relatives à l’état civil prises par des autorités étrangères;
5.1
assurer la formation et la formation continue des personnes qui travaillent dans le domaine de l’état civil.

3 La Confédération exerce la haute surveillance. Elle peut saisir les voies de droit cantonales contre les décisions des officiers de l’état civil et celles des autorités de surveillance.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 20 juin 2014 sur la formation continue, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 689; FF 2013 3265).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001 (Tenue informatisée des registres de l’état civil), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2004 (RO 2004 2911; FF 2001 1537).

Art. 45a1B. Organisation / Ia. Système d’information central de personnes

Ia. Système d’information central de personnes

1 La Confédération exploite et développe un système d’information central de personnes pour la tenue du registre de l’état civil.

2 Elle finance l’exploitation et le développement du système.

3 Les cantons lui versent un émolument annuel pour l’utilisation du système dans le domaine de l’état civil.

4 La Confédération associe les cantons au développement du système. Elle leur fournit un soutien technique pour son utilisation.

5 Le Conseil fédéral règle en collaboration avec les cantons:

1.
les modalités de l’association des cantons au développement du système;
2.
le montant de l’émolument des cantons pour l’utilisation du système;
3.
les droits d’accès des autorités de l’état civil et des autres autorités qui disposent d’un droit d’accès;
4.
la collaboration opérationnelle entre la Confédération et les cantons;
5.
les mesures techniques et organisationnelles nécessaires pour assurer la protection et la sécurité des données;
6.
l’archivage des données.

6 Il peut prévoir que les coûts engendrés par des prestations en faveur de tiers à des fins qui ne relèvent pas du domaine de l’état civil sont facturés aux bénéficiaires.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001 (Tenue informatisée des registres de l’état civil) (RO 2004 2911; FF 2001 1537). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Enregistrement de l’état civil et registre foncier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 4017; FF 2014 3395).

Art. 46 B. Organisation / II. Responsabilité

II. Responsabilité

1 Quiconque subit un dommage illicite causé, dans l’exercice de leur fonction, par des personnes qui travaillent dans le domaine de l’état civil a droit à des dommages-intérêts et, pour autant que la gravité de l’atteinte le justifie, à une somme d’argent à titre de réparation morale.

2 La responsabilité incombe au canton; celui-ci peut se retourner contre les auteurs d’un dommage causé intentionnellement ou par négligence grave.

3 La loi du 14 mars 1958 sur la responsabilité1 s’applique aux personnes engagées par la Confédération.


Art. 47 B. Organisation / III. Mesures disciplinaires

III. Mesures disciplinaires

1 L’autorité cantonale de surveillance punit disciplinairement les personnes employées dans les offices de l’état civil qui contreviennent, intentionnellement ou par négligence, aux devoirs de leur charge.

2 Les peines sont le blâme, l’amende jusqu’à 1000 francs ou, dans les cas graves, la révocation.

3 Les poursuites pénales sont réservées.

Art. 48 C. Dispositions d’exécution / I. Droit fédéral

C. Dispositions d’exécution

I. Droit fédéral

1 Le Conseil fédéral édicte les dispositions d’exécution.

2 Il fixe notamment les règles applicables:

1.
aux registres à tenir et aux données à enregistrer;
2.
à l’utilisation du numéro d’assuré au sens de l’art. 50c de la loi fédérale du 20 décembre 1946 sur l’assurance-vieillesse et survivants1 pour permettre l’échange électronique de données entre les registres officiels de personnes;

3. à la tenue des registres;

4. à la surveillance.2

3 Afin d’assurer une exacte exécution des tâches, le Conseil fédéral peut fixer des exigences minimales quant à la formation et à la formation continue des personnes qui travaillent dans le domaine de l’état civil et quant au degré d’occupation des officiers de l’état civil.3

4 Il fixe le tarif des émoluments en matière d’état civil.

5 Il détermine à quelles conditions les opérations suivantes peuvent s’effectuer de manière informatisée:

1.
l’annonce des faits relevant de l’état civil;
2.
les déclarations concernant l’état civil;
3.
les communications et l’établissement d’extraits des registres.4

1 RS 831.10
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 23 juin 2006 sur l’harmonisation de registres, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2008 (RO 2006 4165; FF 2006 439).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 20 juin 2014 sur la formation continue, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 689; FF 2013 3265).
4 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001 (Tenue informatisée des registres de l’état civil), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2004 (RO 2004 2911; FF 2001 1537).

Art. 49 C. Dispositions d’exécution / II. Droit cantonal

II. Droit cantonal

1 Les cantons définissent les arrondissements de l’état civil.

2 Ils édictent les dispositions d’exécution dans le cadre fixé par le droit fédéral.

3 Les dispositions édictées par les cantons sont soumises à l’approbation de la Confédération, à l’exclusion de celles qui concernent la rémunération des personnes qui travaillent dans le domaine de l’état civil.

Art. 50 et 51

Abrogés


  Titre deuxième: Des personnes morales

  Chapitre I: Dispositions générales

Art. 52 A. De la personnalité

A. De la personnalité

1 Les sociétés organisées corporativement, de même que les établissements ayant un but spécial et une existence propre, acquièrent la personnalité en se faisant inscrire au registre du commerce.

2 Sont dispensés de cette formalité les corporations et les établissements de droit public ainsi que les associations qui n’ont pas un but économique.1

3 Les sociétés et les établissements qui ont un but illicite ou contraire aux moeurs ne peuvent acquérir la personnalité.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 12 déc. 2014 sur la mise en oeuvre des recommandations du Groupe d’action financière, révisées en 2012, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2016 (RO 2015 1389; FF 2014 585).

Art. 53 B. Jouissance des droits civils

B. Jouissance des droits civils

Les personnes morales peuvent acquérir tous les droits et assumer toutes les obligations qui ne sont pas inséparables des conditions naturelles de l’homme, telles que le sexe, l’âge ou la parenté.

Art. 54 C. Exercice des droits civils / I. Conditions

C. Exercice des droits civils

I. Conditions

Les personnes morales ont l’exercice des droits civils dès qu’elles possèdent les organes que la loi et les statuts exigent à cet effet.

Art. 55 C. Exercice des droits civils / II. Mode

II. Mode

1 La volonté d’une personne morale s’exprime par ses organes.

2 Ceux-ci obligent la personne morale par leurs actes juridiques et par tous autres faits.

3 Les fautes commises engagent, au surplus, la responsabilité personnelle de leurs auteurs.

Art. 561D. Siège

D. Siège

Le siège des personnes morales est, sauf disposition contraire des statuts, au siège de leur administration.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).

Art. 57 E. Suppression de la personnalité / I. Destination des biens

E. Suppression de la personnalité

I. Destination des biens

1 Sauf disposition contraire de la loi, des statuts, des actes de fondation ou des organes compétents, la fortune des personnes morales dissoutes est dévolue à la corporation publique (Confédération, canton, commune) dont elles relevaient par leur but.

2 La destination primitive des biens sera maintenue dans la mesure du possible.

3 La dévolution au profit d’une corporation publique aura lieu, nonobstant toute autre disposition, si la personne morale est dissoute parce que son but était illicite ou contraire aux moeurs.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 58 E. Suppression de la personnalité / II. Liquidation

II. Liquidation

Les biens des personnes morales sont liquidés en conformité des règles applicables aux sociétés coopératives.

Art. 59 F. Réserves en faveur du droit public et du droit sur les sociétés

F. Réserves en faveur du droit public et du droit sur les sociétés

1 Le droit public de la Confédération et des cantons demeure réservé pour les corporations ou les établissements qui lui sont soumis et pour ceux qui ont un caractère ecclésiastique.

2 Les organisations corporatives qui ont un but économique sont régies par les dispositions applicables aux sociétés.

3 Les sociétés d’allmends et autres semblables continuent à être régies par le droit cantonal.


  Chapitre II: Des associations

Art. 60 A. Constitution / I. Organisation corporative

A. Constitution

I. Organisation corporative

1 Les associations politiques, religieuses, scientifiques, artistiques, de bienfaisance, de récréation ou autres qui n’ont pas un but économique acquièrent la personnalité dès qu’elles expriment dans leurs statuts la volonté d’être organisées corporativement.

2 Les statuts sont rédigés par écrit et contiennent les dispositions nécessaires sur le but, les ressources et l’organisation de l’association.

Art. 61 A. Constitution / II. Inscription au registre du commerce

II. Inscription au registre du commerce1

1 L’association dont les statuts ont été adoptés et qui a constitué sa direction peut se faire inscrire au registre du commerce.

2 Est tenue de s’inscrire toute association:

1.
qui, pour atteindre son but, exerce une industrie en la forme commerciale;
2.
qui est soumise à l’obligation de faire réviser ses comptes.2

3 Les statuts et l’état des membres de la direction sont joints à la demande d’inscription.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).

Art. 62 A. Constitution / III. Associations sans personnalité

III. Associations sans personnalité

Les associations qui ne peuvent acquérir la personnalité ou qui ne l’ont pas encore acquise sont assimilées aux sociétés simples.

Art. 63 A. Constitution / IV. Relation entre les statuts et la loi

IV. Relation entre les statuts et la loi

1 Les articles suivants sont applicables, si les statuts ne renferment pas de règles concernant l’organisation de l’association et ses rapports avec les sociétaires.

2 Les statuts ne peuvent déroger aux règles dont l’application a lieu en vertu d’une disposition impérative de la loi.

Art. 64 B. Organisation / I. Assemblée générale / 1. Attributions et convocation

B. Organisation

I. Assemblée générale

1. Attributions et convocation

1 L’assemblée générale est le pouvoir suprême de l’association.

2 Elle est convoquée par la direction.

3 La convocation a lieu dans les cas prévus par les statuts et en outre, de par la loi, lorsque le cinquième des sociétaires en fait la demande.

Art. 65 B. Organisation / I. Assemblée générale / 2. Compétences

2. Compétences

1 L’assemblée générale prononce sur l’admission et l’exclusion des membres, nomme la direction et règle les affaires qui ne sont pas du ressort d’autres organes sociaux.

2 Elle contrôle l’activité des organes sociaux et peut les révoquer en tout temps, sans préjudice de leurs droits reconnus conventionnellement.

3 Le pouvoir de révoquer existe de par la loi lorsqu’il est exercé pour de justes motifs.

Art. 66 B. Organisation / I. Assemblée générale / 3. Décisions / a. Forme

3. Décisions

a. Forme

1 Les décisions de l’association sont prises en assemblée générale.

2 La proposition à laquelle tous les sociétaires ont adhéré par écrit équivaut à une décision de l’assemblée générale.

Art. 67 B. Organisation / I. Assemblée générale / 3. Décisions / b. Droit de vote et majorité

b. Droit de vote et majorité

1 Tous les sociétaires ont un droit de vote égal dans l’assemblée générale.

2 Les décisions sont prises à la majorité des voix des membres présents.

3 Elles ne peuvent être prises en dehors de l’ordre du jour que si les statuts le permettent expressément.

Art. 68 B. Organisation / I. Assemblée générale / 3. Décisions / c. Privation du droit de vote

c. Privation du droit de vote

Tout sociétaire est de par la loi privé de son droit de vote dans les décisions relatives à une affaire ou un procès de l’association, lorsque lui-même, son conjoint ou ses parents ou alliés en ligne directe sont parties en cause.

Art. 69 B. Organisation / II. Direction / 1. Droits et devoirs en général

II. Direction

1. Droits et devoirs en général1

La direction a le droit et le devoir de gérer les affaires de l’association et de la représenter en conformité des statuts.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).

Art. 69a1B. Organisation / II. Direction / 2. Comptabilité

2. Comptabilité

La direction tient les livres de l’association. Les dispositions du code des obligations2 relatives à la comptabilité commerciale et à la présentation des comptes sont applicables par analogie.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce; RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745). Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 23 déc. 2011 (Droit comptable), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 6679; FF 2008 1407).
2 RS 220

Art. 69b1B. Organisation / III. Organe de révision

III. Organe de révision

1 L’association doit soumettre sa comptabilité au contrôle ordinaire d’un organe de révision si, au cours de deux exercices successifs, deux des valeurs suivantes sont dépassées:

1.
total du bilan: 10 millions de francs;
2.
chiffre d’affaires: 20 millions de francs;
3.
effectif: 50 emplois à plein temps en moyenne annuelle.

2 L’association doit soumettre sa comptabilité au contrôle restreint d’un organe de révision, si un membre de l’association responsable individuellement ou tenu d’effectuer des versements supplémentaires l’exige.

3 Les dispositions du code des obligations2 concernant l’organe de révision de la société anonyme sont applicables par analogie.

4 Dans les autres cas, les statuts et l’assemblée générale peuvent organiser le contrôle librement.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
2 RS 220

Art. 69c1B. Organisation / IV. Carences dans l’organisation de l’association

IV. Carences dans l’organisation de l’association

1 Lorsque l’association ne possède pas l’un des organes prescrits ou n’a plus de domicile à son siège, un membre ou un créancier peut requérir du tribunal qu’il prenne les mesures nécessaires.2

2 Le juge peut notamment fixer à l’association un délai pour régulariser sa situation; si nécessaire, il nomme un commissaire.

3 L’association supporte les frais de ces mesures. Le juge peut astreindre l’association à verser une provision à la personne nommée.

4 Pour de justes motifs, l’association peut demander au juge de révoquer une personne qu’il a nommée.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 17 mars 2017 (Droit du registre du commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2021 (RO 2020 957; FF 2015 3255).

Art. 70 C. Sociétaires / I. Entrée et sortie

C. Sociétaires

I. Entrée et sortie

1 L’association peut en tout temps recevoir de nouveaux membres.

2 Chaque sociétaire est autorisé de par la loi à sortir de l’association, pourvu qu’il annonce sa sortie six mois avant la fin de l’année civile ou, lorsqu’un exercice administratif est prévu, six mois avant la fin de celui-ci.

3 La qualité de sociétaire est inaliénable et ne passe point aux héritiers.

Art. 711C. Sociétaires / II. Cotisations

II. Cotisations

Les membres de l’association peuvent être tenus de verser des cotisations si les statuts le prévoient.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 déc. 2004 (Fixation des cotisations des membres d’associations), en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2005 (RO 2005 2117; FF 2004 4529 4537).

Art. 72 C. Sociétaires / III. Exclusion

III. Exclusion

1 Les statuts peuvent déterminer les motifs d’exclusion d’un sociétaire; ils peuvent aussi permettre l’exclusion sans indication de motifs.

2 Dans ces cas, les motifs pour lesquels l’exclusion a été prononcée ne peuvent donner lieu à une action en justice.

3 Si les statuts ne disposent rien à cet égard, l’exclusion n’est prononcée que par décision de la société et pour de justes motifs.

Art. 73 C. Sociétaires / IV. Effets de la sortie et de l’exclusion

IV. Effets de la sortie et de l’exclusion

1 Les membres sortants ou exclus perdent tout droit à l’avoir social.

2 Ils doivent leur part de cotisations pour le temps pendant lequel ils ont été sociétaires.

Art. 74 C. Sociétaires / V. Protection du but social

V. Protection du but social

La transformation du but social ne peut être imposée à aucun sociétaire.

Art. 75 C. Sociétaires / VI. Protection des droits des sociétaires

VI. Protection des droits des sociétaires

Tout sociétaire est autorisé de par la loi à attaquer en justice, dans le mois à compter du jour où il en a eu connaissance, les décisions auxquelles il n’a pas adhéré et qui violent des dispositions légales ou statutaires.

Art. 75a1Cbis. Responsabilité

Cbis. Responsabilité

Sauf disposition contraire des statuts, l’association répond seule de ses dettes, qui sont garanties par sa fortune sociale.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 déc. 2004 (Fixation des cotisations des membres d’associations), en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2005 (RO 2005 2117; FF 2004 4529 4537).

Art. 76 D. Dissolution / I. Cas / 1. Par décision de l’association

D. Dissolution

I. Cas

1. Par décision de l’association

L’association peut décider sa dissolution en tout temps.

Art. 77 D. Dissolution / I. Cas / 2. De par la loi

2. De par la loi

L’association est dissoute de plein droit lorsqu’elle est insolvable ou lorsque la direction ne peut plus être constituée statutairement.

Art. 78 D. Dissolution / I. Cas / 3. Par jugement

3. Par jugement

La dissolution est prononcée par le juge, à la demande de l’autorité compétente ou d’un intéressé, lorsque le but de l’association est illicite ou contraire aux moeurs.

Art. 79 D. Dissolution / II. Radiation de l’inscription

II. Radiation de l’inscription

Si l’association est inscrite au registre du commerce, la dissolution est déclarée par la direction ou par le juge au préposé chargé de radier.


  Chapitre III: Des fondations

Art. 80 A. Constitution / I. En général

A. Constitution

I. En général

La fondation a pour objet l’affectation de biens en faveur d’un but spécial.

Art. 81 A. Constitution / II. Forme

II. Forme

1 La fondation est constituée par acte authentique ou par disposition pour cause de mort.1

2 L’inscription au registre du commerce s’opère à teneur de l’acte de fondation et, au besoin, suivant les instructions de l’autorité de surveillance; elle indique les noms des membres de la direction.

3 L’autorité qui procède à l’ouverture de la disposition pour cause de mort avise le préposé au registre du commerce de la constitution de la fondation.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 82 A. Constitution / III. Action des héritiers et créanciers

III. Action des héritiers et créanciers

La fondation peut être attaquée, comme une donation, par les héritiers ou par les créanciers du fondateur.

Art. 831B. Organisation / I. En général

B. Organisation

I. En général

L’acte de fondation indique les organes de celle-ci et son mode d’administration.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).

Art. 83a1B. Organisation / II. Tenue des comptes

II. Tenue des comptes

L’organe suprême de la fondation tient les livres de la fondation. Les dispositions du code des obligations2 relatives à la comptabilité commerciale et à la présentation des comptes sont applicables par analogie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations; RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463). Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 23 déc. 2011 (Droit comptable), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 6679; FF 2008 1407).
2 RS 220

Art. 83b1B. Organisation / III. Organe de révision / 1. Obligation de révision et droit applicable

III. Organe de révision

1. Obligation de révision et droit applicable

1 L’organe suprême de la fondation désigne un organe de révision.

2 L’autorité de surveillance peut dispenser la fondation de l’obligation de désigner un organe de révision. Le Conseil fédéral définit les conditions de la dispense.

3 À défaut de dispositions spéciales applicables aux fondations, les dispositions du code des obligations2 concernant l’organe de révision de la société anonyme sont applicables par analogie.

4 Lorsque la fondation est tenue à un contrôle restreint, l’autorité de surveillance peut exiger un contrôle ordinaire, si cela est nécessaire pour révéler l’état du patrimoine et les résultats de la fondation.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations; RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463). Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
2 RS 220

Art. 83c1B. Organisation / III. Organe de révision / 2. Rapports avec l’autorité de surveillance

2. Rapports avec l’autorité de surveillance

L’organe de révision transmet à l’autorité de surveillance une copie du rapport de révision ainsi que de l’ensemble des communications importantes adressées à la fondation.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).

Art. 83d1B. Organisation / IV. Carences dans l’organisation de la fondation

IV. Carences dans l’organisation de la fondation

1 Lorsque l’organisation prévue par l’acte de fondation n’est pas suffisante, que la fondation ne possède pas tous les organes prescrits ou qu’un de ces organes n’est pas composé conformément aux prescriptions ou que la fondation ne possède plus de domicile à son siège, l’autorité de surveillance prend les mesures nécessaires. Elle peut notamment:2

1.
fixer un délai à la fondation pour régulariser sa situation;
2.
nommer l’organe qui fait défaut ou un commissaire.

2 Lorsque la fondation ne peut être organisée conformément à son but, l’autorité de surveillance remet les biens à une autre fondation dont le but est aussi proche que possible de celui qui avait été prévu.

3 La fondation supporte les frais de ces mesures. L’autorité de surveillance peut l’astreindre à verser une provision à la personne nommée.

4 Pour de justes motifs, la fondation peut demander à l’autorité de surveillance de révoquer une personne qu’elle a nommée.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 17 mars 2017 (Droit du registre du commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2021 (RO 2020 957; FF 2015 3255).

Art. 84 C. Surveillance

C. Surveillance

1 Les fondations sont placées sous la surveillance de la corporation publique (Confédération, canton, commune) dont elles relèvent par leur but.

1bis Les cantons peuvent soumettre les fondations dont la surveillance relève des communes au contrôle de l’autorité cantonale de surveillance.1

2 L’autorité de surveillance pourvoit à ce que les biens des fondations soient employés conformément à leur destination.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 84a1Cbis. Mesures en cas de surendettement et d’insolvabilité

Cbis. Mesures en cas de surendettement et d’insolvabilité

1 Si des raisons sérieuses laissent craindre que la fondation est surendettée ou qu’elle est insolvable à long terme, l’organe suprême de la fondation dresse un bilan intermédiaire fondé sur la valeur vénale des biens et le soumet pour examen à l’organe de révision. Si la fondation n’a pas d’organe de révision, l’organe suprême de la fondation soumet le bilan intermédiaire à l’autorité de surveillance

2 Si l’organe de révision constate que la fondation est surendettée ou qu’elle est insolvable à long terme, il remet le bilan intermédiaire à l’autorité de surveillance.

3 L’autorité de surveillance ordonne à l’organe suprême de la fondation de prendre les mesures nécessaires. S’il ne le fait pas, l’autorité de surveillance prend elle-même les mesures qui s’imposent.

4 Au besoin, l’autorité de surveillance demande que des mesures d’exécution forcée soient prises; les dispositions du droit des sociétés anonymes relatives à l’ouverture ou l’ajournement de la faillite sont applicables par analogie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 84b1

1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations; RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463). Abrogé par l’annexe ch.1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), avec effet au 1er janv. 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).

Art. 851D. Modification / I. De l’organisation

D. Modification

I. De l’organisation

L’autorité fédérale ou cantonale compétente peut, sur la proposition de l’autorité de surveillance et après avoir entendu l’organe suprême de la fondation, modifier l’organisation de celle-ci, lorsque cette mesure est absolument nécessaire pour conserver les biens ou pour maintenir le but de la fondation.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 86 D. Modification / II. Du but / 1. Sur requête de l’autorité de surveillance ou de l’organe suprême de la fondation

II. Du but

1. Sur requête de l’autorité de surveillance ou de l’organe suprême de la fondation1

1 L’autorité fédérale ou cantonale compétente peut, sur requête de l’autorité de surveillance ou de l’organe suprême de la fondation, modifier le but de celle-ci, lorsque le caractère ou la portée du but primitif a varié au point que la fondation ne répond manifestement plus aux intentions du fondateur.2

2 Peuvent être supprimées ou modifiées de la même manière et dans les mêmes circonstances les charges et conditions qui compromettent le but du fondateur.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 86a1D. Modification / II. Du but / 2. Sur requête ou en raison d’une disposition pour cause de mort du fondateur

2. Sur requête ou en raison d’une disposition pour cause de mort du fondateur

1 L’autorité fédérale ou cantonale compétente modifie, sur requête du fondateur ou en raison d’une disposition pour cause de mort prise par celui-ci, le but de la fondation lorsque l’acte de fondation réserve cette possibilité et que 10 ans au moins se sont écoulés depuis la constitution de la fondation ou depuis la dernière modification requise par le fondateur.

2 Si la fondation poursuit un but de service public ou d’utilité publique au sens de l’art. 56, let. g, de la loi fédérale du 14 décembre 1990 sur l’impôt fédéral direct2, le nouveau but doit demeurer un but de service public ou d’utilité publique.

3 Le droit d’exiger la modification du but est incessible et ne passe pas aux héritiers. Lorsque le fondateur est une personne morale, ce droit s’éteint au plus tard 20 ans après la constitution de la fondation.

4 Lorsque la fondation a été constituée par plusieurs fondateurs, ceux-ci doivent requérir la modification du but conjointement.

5 L’autorité qui procède à l’ouverture de la disposition pour cause de mort avise l’autorité de surveillance compétente de la disposition prévoyant la modification du but de la fondation.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).
2 RS 642.11

Art. 86b1D. Modification / III. Modifications accessoires de l’acte de fondation

III. Modifications accessoires de l’acte de fondation

L’autorité de surveillance peut, après avoir entendu l’organe suprême de la fondation, apporter des modifications accessoires à l’acte de fondation lorsque celles-ci sont commandées par des motifs objectivement justifiés et qu’elles ne lèsent pas les droits de tiers.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 87 E. Fondations de famille et fondations ecclésiastiques

E. Fondations de famille et fondations ecclésiastiques

1 Sous réserve des règles du droit public, les fondations de famille et les fondations ecclésiastiques ne sont pas soumises au contrôle de l’autorité de surveillance.

1bis Elles sont déliées de l’obligation de désigner un organe de révision.1

2 Les contestations de droit privé sont tranchées par le juge.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 881F. Dissolution et radiation / I. Dissolution par l’autorité compétente

F. Dissolution et radiation

I. Dissolution par l’autorité compétente

1 L’autorité fédérale ou cantonale compétente prononce la dissolution de la fondation, sur requête ou d’office lorsque:

1.
le but de la fondation ne peut plus être atteint et que la fondation ne peut être maintenue par une modification de l’acte de fondation ou
2.
le but de la fondation est devenu illicite ou contraire aux moeurs.

2 La dissolution de fondations de famille et de fondations ecclésiastiques est prononcée par le tribunal.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 891F. Dissolution et radiation / II. Requête et action en dissolution, radiation de l’inscription

II. Requête et action en dissolution, radiation de l’inscription

1 La requête ou l’action en dissolution de la fondation peut être intentée par toute personne intéressée.

2 La dissolution est communiquée au préposé au registre du commerce afin qu’il procède à la radiation de l’inscription.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 8 oct. 2004 (Droit des fondations), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 4545; FF 2003 7425 7463).

Art. 89a1G. Institutions de prévoyance en faveur du personnel

G. Institutions de prévoyance en faveur du personnel2

1 Les institutions de prévoyance en faveur du personnel constituées sous forme de fondations en vertu de l’art. 331 du code des obligations3 sont en outre régies par les dispositions suivantes.4

2 Les organes de la fondation doivent donner aux bénéficiaires les renseignements nécessaires sur l’organisation, l’activité et la situation financière de la fondation.

3 Si les travailleurs versent des contributions à la fondation, ils participent à l’administration dans la mesure au moins de ces versements. Dans la mesure du possible, ils élisent eux-mêmes des représentants choisis dans le sein du personnel.5

4 ...6

5 Les bénéficiaires peuvent exiger en justice des prestations de la fondation, lorsqu’ils lui ont versé des contributions ou que les dispositions régissant la fondation leur donnent un droit à des prestations.

6 Les fondations de prévoyance en faveur du personnel dont l’activité s’étend au domaine de la prévoyance vieillesse, survivants et invalidité et qui sont soumises à la loi du 17 décembre 1993 sur le libre passage (LFLP)7 sont en outre régies par les dispositions suivantes de la loi fédérale du 25 juin 1982 sur la prévoyance professionnelle vieillesse, survivants et invalidité (LPP)8 sur:9

1.10
la définition et les principes de la prévoyance professionnelle et le salaire ou le revenu assuré (art. 1, 33a et 33b),
2.11
l’assujettissement des personnes à l’AVS (art. 5, al. 1),
3.
les bénéficiaires de prestations de survivants (art. 20a),
3a.12
l’adaptation de la rente d’invalidité après le partage de la prévoyance professionnelle (art. 24, al. 5),
3b.13
le maintien provisoire de l’assurance et du droit aux prestations en cas de réduction ou de suppression de la rente de l’assurance-invalidité (art. 26a),
4.14
l’adaptation à l’évolution des prix des prestations réglementaires (art. 36, al. 2 à 4),
4a.15 le consentement au versement de la prestation en capital (art. 37a),
5.
la prescription des droits et la conservation des pièces (art. 41),
5a.16
 l’utilisation, le traitement et la communication du numéro d’assuré AVS (art. 48, al. 4, 85a, let. f, et 86a, al. 2, let. bbis),
6.
la responsabilité (art. 52),
7.17
l’agrément et les tâches des organes de contrôle (art. 52a à 52e),
8.18
l’intégrité et la loyauté des responsables, les actes juridiques passés avec des personnes proches et les conflits d’intérêts (art. 51b, 51c et 53a),
9.
la liquidation partielle ou totale (art. 53b à 53d),
10.19 
la résiliation de contrats (art. 53e et 53f),
11.
le fonds de garantie (art. 56, al. 1, let. c, al. 2 à 5, art. 56a, 57 et 59),
12.20
la surveillance et la haute surveillance (art. 61 à 62a et 64 à 64c),
13.21
...
14.22
la sécurité financière (art. 65, al. 1, 3 et 4, 66, al. 4, 67 et 72a à 72g),
15.
la transparence (art. 65a),
16.
les réserves (art. 65b),
17.
les contrats d’assurance entre institutions de prévoyance et institutions d’assurance (art. 68, al. 3 et 4),
18.
l’administration de la fortune (art. 71),
19.
le contentieux (art. 73 et 74),
20.
les dispositions pénales (art. 75 à 79),
21.
le rachat (art. 79b),
22.
le salaire et le revenu assurable (art. 79c),
23.
l’information des assurés (art. 86b).23

7 Les fondations de prévoyance en faveur du personnel dont l’activité s’étend au domaine de la prévoyance vieillesse, survivants et invalidité mais qui ne sont pas soumises à la LFLP, comme les fonds patronaux de prévoyance à prestations discrétionnaires et les fondations de financement, sont régies exclusivement par les dispositions suivantes de la LPP sur:

1.
l’assujettissement des personnes à l’AVS (art. 5, al. 1);
2.
l’utilisation, le traitement et la communication du numéro d’assuré AVS (art. 48, al. 4, 85a, let. f, et 86a, al. 2, let. bbis);
3.
la responsabilité (art. 52);
4.
l’agrément et les tâches de l’organe de révision (art. 52a, 52b et 52c, al. 1, let. a à d et g, 2 et 3);
5.
l’intégrité et la loyauté des responsables, les actes juridiques passés avec des personnes proches et les conflits d’intérêts (art. 51b, 51c et 53a);
6.
la liquidation totale (art. 53c);
7.
la surveillance et la haute surveillance (art. 61 à 62a et 64 à 64b);
8.
le contentieux (art. 73 et 74);
9.
les dispositions pénales (art. 75 à 79);
10.
le traitement fiscal (art. 80, 81, al. 1, et 83).24

8 Les fondations de prévoyance visées à l’al. 7 sont en outre régies par les dispositions suivantes:

1.
elles administrent leur fortune de manière à garantir la sécurité des placements, un rendement raisonnable et à disposer des liquidités nécessaires à l’exécution de leurs tâches;
2.
l’autorité de surveillance décide, sur demande du conseil de fondation, de la liquidation partielle des fonds patronaux de prévoyance à prestations discrétionnaires;
3.
elles tiennent compte, par analogie, des principes de l’égalité de traitement et de l’adéquation.25

1 Introduit par le ch. II de la LF du 21 mars 1958, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1958 (RO 1958 389; FF 1956 II 845). Jusqu’à l’entrée en vigueur de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation) le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725): art. 89bis.
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II art. 2 ch. 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1971, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1972 (RO 1971 1461; FF 1967 II 249).
3 RS 220
4 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II art. 2 ch. 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1971, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1972 (RO 1971 1461; FF 1967 II 249).
5 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II art. 2 ch. 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1971, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1972 (RO 1971 1461; FF 1967 II 249).
6 Abrogé par le ch. III de la LF du 21 juin 1996, avec effet au 1er janv. 1997 (RO 1996 3067; FF 1996 I 516 533).
7 RS 831.42
8 RS 831.40
9 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 25 sept. 2015 (Fondations de prévoyance en faveur du personnel), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2016 (RO 2016 935; FF 2014 5929 6399).
10 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Mesures destinées à faciliter la participation des travailleurs âgés au marché du travail), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 4427; FF 2007 5381).
11 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 25 sept. 2015 (Fondations de prévoyance en faveur du personnel), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2016 (RO 2016 935; FF 2014 5929 6399).
12 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 18 mars 2011 (6e révision AI, premier volet) (RO 2011 5659; FF 2010 1647). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).
13 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).
14 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 18 juin 2004, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005 (RO 2004 4635; FF 2003 5835).
15 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).
16 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 23 juin 2006 (Nouveau numéro d’assuré AVS), en vigueur depuis le 1er déc. 2007 (RO 2007 5259; FF 2006 515).
17 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 1 de la LF du 19 mars 2010 (Réforme structurelle), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 3393; FF 2007 5381).
18 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 1 de la LF du 19 mars 2010 (Réforme structurelle), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 3393; FF 2007 5381).
19 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II de la LF du 20 déc. 2006 (Changement d’institution de prévoyance), en vigueur depuis le 1er mai 2007 (RO 2007 1803; FF 2005 5571 5583).
20 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 1 de la LF du 19 mars 2010 (Réforme structurelle), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 3393; FF 2007 5381).
21 Abrogé par le ch. II 1 de la LF du 19 mars 2010 (Réforme structurelle), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 3393; FF 2007 5381).
22 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 1 de la LF du 17 déc. 2010 (Financement des institutions de prévoyance de corporations de droit public), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 3385; FF 2008 7619).
23 Introduit par le 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1982 sur la prévoyance professionnelle, vieillesse, survivants et invalidité (RO 1983 797; FF 1976 I 117). Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 3 oct. 2003 (1re révision LPP), ch. 6, 7, 10 à 12, 14 ( à l’exception de l’art. 66 al. 4), 15, 17 à 20 et 23 en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2004, ch. 3 à 5, 8 et 9 13 14 (art. 66 al. 4), 16 en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005, ch. 1, 21 et 22 en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2004 1677; FF 2000 2495).
24 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 25 sept. 2015 (Fondations de prévoyance en faveur du personnel), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2016 (RO 2016 935; FF 2014 5929 6399).
25 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 25 sept. 2015 (Fondations de prévoyance en faveur du personnel), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2016 (RO 2016 935; FF 2014 5929 6399).


  Titre deuxièmebis:2  Des fonds recueillis

Art. 89b A. Défaut d’administration

A. Défaut d’administration

1 Lorsqu’il n’est pas pourvu à la gestion ou à l’emploi de fonds recueillis publiquement dans un but d’utilité publique, l’autorité compétente prend les mesures nécessaires.

2 Elle peut charger un commissaire de l’administration des fonds recueillis ou les transmettre à une association ou à une fondation dont les buts se rapprochent autant que possible de ceux dans lesquels ils ont été recueillis.

3 Les dispositions sur la protection de l’adulte régissant les curatelles s’appliquent par analogie au commissaire.

Art. 89c B. Autorité compétente B. Autorité compétente

B. Autorité compétente

1 L’autorité compétente est celle du canton où étaient administrés la plus grande partie des biens recueillis.

2 L’autorité de surveillance des fondations est compétente, à moins que le canton n’en dispose autrement.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).2 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635). Rectifié par la CdR de l’Ass. féd. (art. 58, al. 1, LParl; RS 171.10).

  Livre deuxième: Droit de la famille

  Première partie: Des époux

  Titre troisième:1  Du mariage

  Chapitre I: Des fiançailles

Art. 90 A. Contrat de fiançailles

A. Contrat de fiançailles

1 Les fiançailles se forment par la promesse de mariage.

2 Elles n’obligent le fiancé mineur que si son représentant légal y a consenti.1

3 La loi n’accorde pas d’action pour contraindre au mariage le fiancé qui s’y refuse.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 91 B. Rupture des fiançailles / I. Présents

B. Rupture des fiançailles

I. Présents

1 Les fiancés peuvent exiger la restitution des présents qu’ils se sont faits, sous réserve des cadeaux d’usage, pour autant que la rupture ne soit pas causée par la mort de l’un d’eux.

2 Si les présents n’existent plus en nature, la restitution est régie par les dispositions relatives à l’enrichissement illégitime.

Art. 92 B. Rupture des fiançailles / II. Participation financière

II. Participation financière

Lorsqu’un des fiancés a pris de bonne foi, en vue du mariage, des dispositions occasionnant des frais ou une perte de gain, il peut exiger de l’autre une participation financière appropriée, pour autant que cela ne paraisse pas inéquitable au vu de l’ensemble des circonstances.

Art. 93 B. Rupture des fiançailles / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

Les actions découlant des fiançailles se prescrivent par un an à compter de la rupture.


  Chapitre II: Des conditions du mariage

Art. 94 A. Capacité

A. Capacité

1 Pour pouvoir contracter mariage, l’homme et la femme doivent être âgés de 18 ans révolus et capables de discernement.

2 ...1


1 Abrogé par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), avec effet au 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 95 B. Empêchements / I. Lien de parenté

B. Empêchements

I. Lien de parenté1

1 Le mariage est prohibé entre parents en ligne directe, ainsi qu’entre frères et soeurs germains, consanguins ou utérins, que la parenté repose sur la descendance ou sur l’adoption.2

2 L’adoption ne supprime pas l’empêchement résultant de la parenté qui existe entre l’adopté et ses descendants, d’une part, et sa famille naturelle, d’autre part.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).

Art. 96 B. Empêchements / II. Mariage antérieur

II. Mariage antérieur

Toute personne qui veut se remarier doit établir que son précédent mariage a été annulé ou dissous.


  Chapitre III: De la procédure préparatoire et de la célébration du mariage

Art. 97 A. Principe

A. Principe

1 Le mariage est célébré par l’officier de l’état civil au terme de la procédure préparatoire.

2 Les fiancés peuvent se marier dans l’arrondissement de l’état civil de leur choix.

3 Le mariage religieux ne peut précéder le mariage civil.

Art. 97a1Abis. Abus lié à la législation sur les étrangers

Abis. Abus lié à la législation sur les étrangers

1 L’officier de l’état civil refuse son concours lorsque l’un des fiancés ne veut manifestement pas fonder une communauté conjugale mais éluder les dispositions sur l’admission et le séjour des étrangers.

2 L’officier de l’état civil entend les fiancés; il peut requérir des renseignements auprès d’autres autorités ou de tiers.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. II 4 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 sur les étrangers, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2008 (RO 2007 5437; FF 2002 3469).

Art. 98 B. Procédure préparatoire / I. Demande

B. Procédure préparatoire

I. Demande

1 La demande en exécution de la procédure préparatoire est présentée par les fiancés auprès de l’office de l’état civil du domicile de l’un d’eux.

2 Ils comparaissent personnellement. Si les fiancés démontrent que cela ne peut manifestement pas être exigé d’eux, l’exécution de la procédure préparatoire est admise en la forme écrite.

3 Ils établissent leur identité au moyen de documents et déclarent personnellement auprès de l’office de l’état civil qu’ils remplissent les conditions du mariage; ils produisent les consentements nécessaires.

4 Les fiancés qui ne sont pas citoyens suisses doivent établir la légalité de leur séjour en Suisse au cours de la procédure préparatoire.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 12 juin 2009 (Empêcher les mariages en cas de séjour irrégulier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 3057; FF 2008 2247 2261).

Art. 99 B. Procédure préparatoire / II. Exécution et clôture de la procédure préparatoire

II. Exécution et clôture de la procédure préparatoire

1 L’office de l’état civil examine si:

1.
la demande a été déposée régulièrement;
2.
l’identité des fiancés est établie;
3.
les conditions du mariage sont remplies, notamment s’il n’existe aucun élément permettant de conclure que la demande n’est manifestement pas l’expression de la libre volonté des fiancés.1

2 Lorsque ces exigences sont remplies, il communique aux fiancés la clôture de la procédure préparatoire et le délai légal pour la célébration du mariage.2

3 Dans le cadre du droit cantonal et d’entente avec les fiancés, il fixe le moment de la célébration du mariage ou, s’il en est requis, il délivre une autorisation de célébrer le mariage dans un autre arrondissement de l’état civil.

4 L’office de l’état civil communique à l’autorité compétente l’identité des fiancés qui n’ont pas établi la légalité de leur séjour en Suisse.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2012 concernant les mesures de lutte contre les mariages forcés, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2013 (RO 2013 1035; FF 2011 2045).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 28 sept. 2018, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2020 (RO 2019 3813; FF 2017 6395).
3 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 12 juin 2009 (Empêcher les mariages en cas de séjour irrégulier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 3057; FF 2008 2247 2261).

Art. 1001B. Procédure préparatoire / III. Délais

III. Délais

Le mariage peut être célébré dans les trois mois qui suivent la communication de la clôture de la procédure préparatoire.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 28 sept. 2018, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2020 (RO 2019 3813; FF 2017 6395).

Art. 101 C. Célébration du mariage / I. Lieu

C. Célébration du mariage

I. Lieu

1 Le mariage est célébré dans la salle des mariages de l’arrondissement de l’état civil choisi par les fiancés.

2 Si la procédure préparatoire a eu lieu dans un autre arrondissement de l’état civil, les fiancés doivent présenter une autorisation de célébrer le mariage.

3 Le mariage peut être célébré dans un autre lieu si les fiancés démontrent que leur déplacement à la salle des mariages ne peut manifestement pas être exigé.

Art. 102 C. Célébration du mariage / II. Forme

II. Forme

1 Le mariage est célébré publiquement, en présence de deux témoins majeurs et capables de discernement.

2 L’officier de l’état civil demande séparément à la fiancée et au fiancé s’ils veulent s’unir par les liens du mariage.

3 Lorsque les fiancés ont répondu par l’affirmative, ils sont déclarés unis par les liens du mariage, en vertu de leur consentement mutuel.

Art. 103 D. Dispositions d’exécution

D. Dispositions d’exécution

Le Conseil fédéral et les cantons, dans le cadre de leur compétence, édictent les dispositions d’exécution.


  Chapitre IV: De l’annulation du mariage

Art. 104 A. Principe

A. Principe

Le mariage célébré par un officier de l’état civil ne peut être annulé qu’à raison de l’un des motifs prévus dans le présent chapitre.

Art. 105 B. Causes absolues / I. Cas

B. Causes absolues

I. Cas

Le mariage doit être annulé:

1.
lorsqu’un des époux était déjà marié au moment de la célébration et que le précédent mariage n’a pas été dissous par le divorce ou par le décès de son conjoint;
2.
lorsqu’un des époux était incapable de discernement au moment de la célébration et qu’il n’a pas recouvré la capacité de discernement depuis lors;
3.1
lorsque le mariage était prohibé en raison de la nature d’un lien de parenté;
4.2
lorsque l’un des époux ne veut pas fonder une communauté conjugale mais éluder les dispositions sur l’admission et le séjour des étrangers;
5.3
lorsque le mariage a été conclu en violation de la libre volonté d’un des époux;
6.4
lorsque l’un des époux est mineur, à moins que son intérêt supérieur ne commande de maintenir le mariage.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2006 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).
2 Introduit par l’annexe ch. II 4 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 sur les étrangers, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2008 (RO 2007 5437; FF 2002 3469).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2012 concernant les mesures de lutte contre les mariages forcés, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2013 (RO 2013 1035; FF 2011 2045).
4 Introduit par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2012 concernant les mesures de lutte contre les mariages forcés, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2013 (RO 2013 1035; FF 2011 2045).

Art. 106 B. Causes absolues / II. Action

II. Action

1 L’action est intentée d’office par l’autorité cantonale compétente du domicile des époux; elle peut l’être également par toute personne intéressée. Dans la mesure où cela est compatible avec leurs attributions, les autorités fédérales ou cantonales informent l’autorité compétente pour intenter action lorsqu’elles ont des raisons de croire qu’un mariage est entaché d’un vice entraînant la nullité.1

2 L’annulation d’un mariage déjà dissous ne se poursuit pas d’office; elle peut néanmoins être demandée par toute personne intéressée.

3 L’action peut être intentée en tout temps.


1 Phrase introduite par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2012 concernant les mesures de lutte contre les mariages forcés, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2013 (RO 2013 1035; FF 2011 2045).

Art. 107 C. Causes relatives / I. Cas

C. Causes relatives

I. Cas

Un époux peut demander l’annulation du mariage:

1.
lorsqu’il était incapable de discernement pour une cause passagère lors de la célébration;
2.
lorsqu’il a déclaré par erreur consentir à la célébration, soit qu’il n’ait pas voulu se marier, soit qu’il n’ait pas voulu épouser la personne qui est devenue son conjoint;
3.
lorsqu’il a contracté mariage en ayant été à dessein induit en erreur au sujet de qualités personnelles essentielles de son conjoint.
4.1
...

1 Abrogé par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2012 concernant les mesures de lutte contre les mariages forcés, avec effet au 1er juil. 2013 (RO 2013 1035; FF 2011 2045).

Art. 108 C. Causes relatives / II. Action

II. Action

1 Le demandeur doit intenter l’action dans le délai de six mois à compter du jour où il a découvert la cause d’annulation ou de celui où la menace a été écartée, mais en tout cas dans les cinq ans qui suivent la célébration du mariage.

2 Les héritiers n’ont pas qualité pour agir; un héritier peut toutefois poursuivre la procédure déjà ouverte au moment du décès.

Art. 109 D. Effets du jugement

D. Effets du jugement

1 L’annulation du mariage ne produit ses effets qu’après avoir été déclarée par le juge; jusqu’au jugement, le mariage a tous les effets d’un mariage valable, à l’exception des droits successoraux du conjoint survivant.

2 Les dispositions relatives au divorce s’appliquent par analogie aux effets du jugement d’annulation en ce qui concerne les époux et les enfants.

3 La présomption de paternité du mari cesse lorsque le mariage est annulé du fait qu’il a été contracté pour éluder les dispositions sur l’admission et le séjour des étrangers.1


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. II 4 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 sur les étrangers, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2008 (RO 2007 5437; FF 2002 3469).

Art. 1101

1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).


  Titre quatrième:2  Du divorce et de la séparation de corps

  Chapitre I: Des conditions du divorce

Art. 1111A. Divorce sur requête commune / I. Accord complet

A. Divorce sur requête commune

I. Accord complet

1 Lorsque les époux demandent le divorce par une requête commune et produisent une convention complète sur les effets de leur divorce, accompagnée des documents nécessaires et de leurs conclusions communes relatives aux enfants, le juge les entend séparément et ensemble. L’audition peut avoir lieu en plusieurs séances.

2 Le juge s’assure que les époux ont déposé leur requête en divorce et conclu leur convention après mûre réflexion et de leur plein gré et que la convention et les conclusions relatives aux enfants peuvent être ratifiées; il prononce alors le divorce.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 25 sept. 2009 (Délai de réflexion dans la procédure de divorce sur requête commune), en vigueur depuis le 1er fév. 2010 (RO 2010 281; FF 2008 1767 1783).

Art. 112 A. Divorce sur requête commune / II. Accord partiel

II. Accord partiel

1 Les époux peuvent demander le divorce par une requête commune et déclarer qu’ils confient au juge le soin de régler les effets du divorce sur lesquels subsiste un désaccord.

2 Ils sont entendus, comme en cas d’accord complet, sur leur volonté de divorcer, sur les effets du divorce qui font l’objet d’un accord et sur leur décision de faire régler les autres effets par le juge.

3 ...1


1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 1131

1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 1141B. Divorce sur demande unilatérale / I. Après suspension de la vie commune

B. Divorce sur demande unilatérale

I. Après suspension de la vie commune

Un époux peut demander le divorce lorsque, au début de la litispendance ou au jour du remplacement de la requête par une demande unilatérale, les conjoints ont vécu séparés pendant deux ans au moins.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 (Délai de séparation en droit du divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2004 (RO 2004 2161; FF 2003 3490 5310).

Art. 1151B. Divorce sur demande unilatérale / II. Rupture du lien conjugal

II. Rupture du lien conjugal

Un époux peut demander le divorce avant l’expiration du délai de deux ans, lorsque des motifs sérieux qui ne lui sont pas imputables rendent la continuation du mariage insupportable.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 (Délai de séparation en droit du divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2004 (RO 2004 2161; FF 2003 3490 5310).

Art. 1161

1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).


  Chapitre II: De la séparation de corps

Art. 117 A. Conditions et procédure

A. Conditions et procédure

1 La séparation de corps peut être demandée aux mêmes conditions que le divorce.

2 ...1

3 Le jugement prononçant la séparation de corps n’a pas d’incidences sur le droit de demander le divorce.


1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 118 B. Effets de la séparation

B. Effets de la séparation

1 La séparation de corps entraîne de plein droit la séparation de biens.

2 Pour le surplus, les dispositions relatives aux mesures protectrices de l’union conjugale sont applicables par analogie.


  Chapitre III: Des effets du divorce

Art. 1191A. Nom

A. Nom

L’époux qui a changé de nom lors de la conclusion du mariage conserve ce nom après le divorce; il peut toutefois déclarer en tout temps à l’officier de l’état civil vouloir reprendre son nom de célibataire.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 120 B. Régime matrimonial et succession

B. Régime matrimonial et succession

1 La liquidation du régime matrimonial est soumise aux dispositions sur le régime matrimonial.

2 Les époux divorcés cessent d’être les héritiers légaux l’un de l’autre et perdent tous les avantages résultant de dispositions pour cause de mort faites avant la litispendance de la procédure de divorce.

Art. 121 C. Logement de la famille

C. Logement de la famille

1 Lorsque la présence d’enfants ou d’autres motifs importants le justifient, le juge peut attribuer à l’un des époux les droits et les obligations qui résultent du contrat de bail portant sur le logement de la famille, pour autant que cette décision puisse raisonnablement être imposée à l’autre conjoint.

2 L’époux qui n’est plus locataire répond solidairement du loyer jusqu’à l’expiration du bail ou jusqu’au terme de congé prévu par le contrat ou la loi, mais dans tous les cas pour deux ans au plus; lorsque sa responsabilité a été engagée pour le paiement du loyer, il peut compenser le montant versé avec la contribution d’entretien due à son conjoint, par acomptes limités au montant du loyer mensuel.

3 Dans les mêmes conditions, le juge peut attribuer à l’un des époux un droit d’habitation de durée limitée sur le logement de la famille qui appartient à l’autre conjoint, moyennant une indemnité équitable ou une déduction équitable de la contribution d’entretien. Lorsque des faits nouveaux importants l’exigent, le droit d’habitation est restreint ou supprimé.

Art. 1221D. Prévoyance professionnelle / I. Principe

D. Prévoyance professionnelle

I. Principe

Les prétentions de prévoyance professionnelle acquises durant le mariage et jusqu’à l’introduction de la procédure de divorce sont partagées entre les époux.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).

Art. 1231D. Prévoyance professionnelle / II. Partage des prestations de sortie

II. Partage des prestations de sortie

1 Les prestations de sortie acquises, y compris les avoirs de libre passage et les versements anticipés pour la propriété du logement, sont partagées par moitié.

2 L’al. 1 ne s’applique pas aux versements uniques issus de biens propres de par la loi.

3 Les prestations de sortie à partager se calculent conformément aux art. 15 à 17 et 22a ou 22b de la loi du 17 décembre 1993 sur le libre passage2.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).
2 RS 831.42

Art. 1241D. Prévoyance professionnelle / III. Partage en cas de perception d’une rente d’invalidité avant l’âge réglementaire de la retraite

III. Partage en cas de perception d’une rente d’invalidité avant l’âge réglementaire de la retraite

1 Si, au moment de l’introduction de la procédure de divorce, l’un des époux perçoit une rente d’invalidité et qu’il n’a pas encore atteint l’âge réglementaire de la retraite, le montant auquel il aurait droit en vertu de l’art. 2, al. 1ter, de la loi du 17 décembre 1993 sur le libre passage2 en cas de suppression de sa rente est considéré comme prestation de sortie.

2 Les dispositions relatives au partage des prestations de sortie s’appliquent par analogie.

3 Le Conseil fédéral détermine quels sont les cas dans lesquels le montant visé à l’al. 1 ne peut pas être utilisé pour le partage parce que la rente d’invalidité est réduite pour cause de surindemnisation.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).
2 RS 831.42

Art. 124a1D. Prévoyance professionnelle / IV. Partage en cas de perception d’une rente d’invalidité après l’âge réglementaire de la retraite ou d’une rente de vieillesse

IV. Partage en cas de perception d’une rente d’invalidité après l’âge réglementaire de la retraite ou d’une rente de vieillesse

1 Si, au moment de l’introduction de la procédure de divorce, l’un des époux perçoit une rente d’invalidité alors qu’il a déjà atteint l’âge réglementaire de la retraite ou perçoit une rente de vieillesse, le juge apprécie les modalités du partage. Il tient compte en particulier de la durée du mariage et des besoins de prévoyance de chacun des époux.

2 La part de rente attribuée au conjoint créancier est convertie en rente viagère. L’institution de prévoyance du conjoint débiteur lui verse cette dernière ou la transfère dans sa prévoyance professionnelle.

3 Le Conseil fédéral règle:

1. la conversion technique de la part de rente attribuée au conjoint créancier en une rente viagère;
2.
la manière de procéder lorsque les prestations de vieillesse sont différées ou que la rente d’invalidité est réduite pour cause de surindemnisation.

1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).

Art. 124b1D. Prévoyance professionnelle / V. Exceptions

V. Exceptions

1 Les époux peuvent, dans une convention sur les effets du divorce, s’écarter du partage par moitié ou renoncer au partage de la prévoyance professionnelle, à condition qu’une prévoyance vieillesse et invalidité adéquate reste assurée.

2 Le juge attribue moins de la moitié de la prestation de sortie au conjoint créancier ou n’en attribue aucune pour de justes motifs. C’est le cas en particulier lorsque le partage par moitié s’avère inéquitable en raison:

1.
de la liquidation du régime matrimonial ou de la situation économique des époux après le divorce;
2.
des besoins de prévoyance de chacun des époux, compte tenu notamment de leur différence d’âge.

3 Le juge peut ordonner l’attribution de plus de la moitié de la prestation de sortie au conjoint créancier lorsque celui-ci prend en charge des enfants communs après le divorce et que le conjoint débiteur dispose encore d’une prévoyance vieillesse et invalidité adéquate.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).

Art. 124c1D. Prévoyance professionnelle / VI. Compensation des prétentions réciproques

VI. Compensation des prétentions réciproques

1 Les prétentions réciproques des époux à des prestations de sortie ou à des parts de rente sont compensées entre elles. La compensation des prétentions à une rente a lieu avant la conversion de la part de rente attribuée au conjoint créancier en une rente viagère.

2 Les prestations de sortie ne peuvent être compensées par des parts de rente que si les époux et leurs institutions de prévoyance respectives y consentent.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).

Art. 124d1D. Prévoyance professionnelle / VII. Exécution ne pouvant être raisonnablement exigée

VII. Exécution ne pouvant être raisonnablement exigée

Si l’exécution du partage au moyen de la prévoyance professionnelle ne peut être raisonnablement exigée compte tenu des besoins de prévoyance de chacun des époux, le conjoint débiteur est redevable au conjoint créancier d’une prestation en capital.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).

Art. 124e1D. Prévoyance professionnelle / VIII. Exécution impossible

VIII. Exécution impossible

1 Si l’exécution du partage au moyen de la prévoyance professionnelle s’avère impossible, le conjoint débiteur est redevable au conjoint créancier d’une indemnité équitable sous la forme d’une prestation en capital ou d’une rente.

2 À la demande du conjoint débiteur, un jugement suisse peut être adapté lorsque des prétentions de prévoyance existant à l’étranger ont été compensées par une indemnité équitable au sens de l’al. 1 et que ces prétentions de prévoyance ont par la suite été partagées en vertu d’une décision étrangère contraignante pour le débiteur étranger des prestations de prévoyance.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).

Art. 125 E. Entretien après le divorce / I. Conditions

E. Entretien après le divorce

I. Conditions

1 Si l’on ne peut raisonnablement attendre d’un époux qu’il pourvoie lui-même à son entretien convenable, y compris à la constitution d’une prévoyance vieillesse appropriée, son conjoint lui doit une contribution équitable.

2 Pour décider si une contribution d’entretien est allouée et pour en fixer, le cas échéant, le montant et la durée, le juge retient en particulier les éléments suivants:

1.
la répartition des tâches pendant le mariage;
2.
la durée du mariage;
3.
le niveau de vie des époux pendant le mariage;
4.
l’âge et l’état de santé des époux;
5.
les revenus et la fortune des époux;
6.
l’ampleur et la durée de la prise en charge des enfants qui doit encore être assurée;
7.
la formation professionnelle et les perspectives de gain des époux, ainsi que le coût probable de l’insertion professionnelle du bénéficiaire de l’entretien;
8.
les expectatives de l’assurance-vieillesse et survivants et de la prévoyance professionnelle ou d’autres formes de prévoyance privée ou publique, y compris le résultat prévisible du partage des prestations de sortie.

3 L’allocation d’une contribution peut exceptionnellement être refusée en tout ou en partie lorsqu’elle s’avère manifestement inéquitable, en particulier parce que le créancier:

1.
a gravement violé son obligation d’entretien de la famille;
2.
a délibérément provoqué la situation de nécessité dans laquelle il se trouve;
3.
a commis une infraction pénale grave contre le débiteur ou un de ses proches.
Art. 126 E. Entretien après le divorce / II. Mode de règlement

II. Mode de règlement

1 Le juge alloue la contribution d’entretien sous la forme d’une rente et fixe le moment à partir duquel elle est due.

2 Lorsque des circonstances particulières le justifient, il peut imposer un règlement définitif en capital plutôt qu’une rente.

3 Il peut subordonner l’obligation de contribuer à l’entretien à certaines conditions.

Art. 127 E. Entretien après le divorce / III. Rente / 1. Dispositions spéciales

III. Rente

1. Dispositions spéciales

Par convention, les époux peuvent exclure complètement ou partiellement la modification ultérieure d’une rente fixée d’un commun accord.

Art. 128 E. Entretien après le divorce / III. Rente / 2. Indexation

2. Indexation

Le juge peut décider que la contribution d’entretien sera augmentée ou réduite d’office en fonction de variations déterminées du coût de la vie.

Art. 129 E. Entretien après le divorce / III. Rente / 3. Modification par le juge

3. Modification par le juge

1 Si la situation du débiteur ou du créancier change notablement et durablement, la rente peut être diminuée, supprimée ou suspendue pour une durée déterminée; une amélioration de la situation du créancier n’est prise en compte que si une rente permettant d’assurer son entretien convenable a pu être fixée dans le jugement de divorce.

2 Le créancier peut demander l’adaptation de la rente au renchérissement pour l’avenir, lorsque les revenus du débiteur ont augmenté de manière imprévisible après le divorce.

3 Dans un délai de cinq ans à compter du divorce, le créancier peut demander l’allocation d’une rente ou son augmentation lorsque le jugement de divorce constate qu’il n’a pas été possible de fixer une rente permettant d’assurer l’entretien convenable du créancier, alors que la situation du débiteur s’est améliorée depuis lors.

Art. 130 E. Entretien après le divorce / III. Rente / 4. Extinction de par la loi

4. Extinction de par la loi

1 L’obligation d’entretien s’éteint au décès du débiteur ou du créancier.

2 Sauf convention contraire, elle s’éteint également lors du remariage du créancier.

Art. 1311E. Entretien après le divorce / IV. Exécution / 1. Aide au recouvrement

IV. Exécution

1. Aide au recouvrement

1 Lorsque le débiteur néglige son obligation d’entretien, un office spécialisé désigné par le droit cantonal aide de manière adéquate, et en règle générale gratuitement, le créancier qui le demande à obtenir l’exécution des prestations d’entretien.

2 Le Conseil fédéral définit les prestations d’aide au recouvrement.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 131a1E. Entretien après le divorce / IV. Exécution / 2. Avances

2. Avances

1 Il appartient au droit public de régler le versement d’avances lorsque le débiteur ne satisfait pas à son obligation d’entretien.

2 La prétention à la contribution d’entretien passe avec tous les droits qui lui sont rattachés à la collectivité publique lorsque celle-ci assume l’entretien du créancier.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 132 E. Entretien après le divorce / IV. Exécution / 3. Avis aux débiteurs et fourniture de sûretés

3. Avis aux débiteurs et fourniture de sûretés1

1 Lorsque le débiteur ne satisfait pas à son obligation d’entretien, le juge peut ordonner à ses débiteurs d’opérer tout ou partie de leurs paiements entre les mains du créancier.

2 Lorsque le débiteur persiste à négliger son obligation d’entretien ou qu’il y a lieu d’admettre qu’il se prépare à fuir, qu’il dilapide sa fortune ou la fait disparaître, le juge peut l’astreindre à fournir des sûretés appropriées pour les contributions d’entretien futures.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 1331F. Sort des enfants / I. Droits et devoirs des père et mère

F. Sort des enfants

I. Droits et devoirs des père et mère

1 Le juge règle les droits et les devoirs des père et mère conformément aux dispositions régissant les effets de la filiation. Cette réglementation porte notamment sur:

1.
l’autorité parentale;
2.
la garde de l’enfant;
3.
les relations personnelles (art. 273) ou la participation de chaque parent à la prise en charge de l’enfant;
4.
la contribution d’entretien.

2 Le juge tient compte de toutes les circonstances importantes pour le bien de l’enfant; il prend en considération une éventuelle requête commune des parents et, autant que possible, l’avis de l’enfant.

3 Il peut fixer la contribution d’entretien pour une période allant au—delà de l’accès à la majorité.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 134 F. Sort des enfants / II. Faits nouveaux

II. Faits nouveaux

1 À la requête du père ou de la mère, de l’enfant ou de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant, l’attribution de l’autorité parentale doit être modifiée lorsque des faits nouveaux importants l’exigent pour le bien de l’enfant.

2 Les conditions se rapportant à la modification des autres droits et devoirs des père et mère sont définies par les dispositions relatives aux effets de la filiation.1

3 En cas d’accord entre les père et mère, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant est compétente pour modifier l’attribution de l’autorité parentale et de la garde ainsi que pour ratifier la convention relative à l’entretien de l’enfant. Dans les autres cas, la décision appartient au juge compétent pour modifier le jugement de divorce.2

4 Lorsqu’il statue sur la modification de l’autorité parentale, de la garde ou de la contribution d’entretien d’un enfant mineur, le juge modifie au besoin la manière dont les relations personnelles ou la participation de chaque parent à sa prise en charge ont été réglées; dans les autres cas, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant est compétente en la matière.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 135 à 1491

1 Abrogés par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 150 à 158

Abrogés


  Titre cinquième:3  Des effets généraux du mariage

Art. 159 A. Union conjugale; droits et devoirs des époux

A. Union conjugale; droits et devoirs des époux

1 La célébration du mariage crée l’union conjugale.

2 Les époux s’obligent mutuellement à en assurer la prospérité d’un commun accord et à pourvoir ensemble à l’entretien et à l’éducation des enfants.

3 Ils se doivent l’un à l’autre fidélité et assistance.

Art. 1601B. Nom

B. Nom

1 Chacun des époux conserve son nom.

2 Les fiancés peuvent toutefois déclarer à l’officier de l’état civil vouloir porter un nom de famille commun; ils peuvent choisir entre le nom de célibataire de l’un ou de l’autre.

3 Les fiancés qui conservent leur nom choisissent lequel de leurs deux noms de célibataire leurs enfants porteront. L’officier de l’état civil peut les libérer de cette obligation dans des cas dûment motivés.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 1611C. Droit de cité

C. Droit de cité

Chacun des époux conserve son droit de cité cantonal et communal.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 162 D. Demeure commune

D. Demeure commune

Les époux choisissent ensemble la demeure commune.

Art. 163 E. Entretien de la famille / I. En général

E. Entretien de la famille

I. En général

1 Mari et femme contribuent, chacun selon ses facultés, à l’entretien convenable de la famille.

2 Ils conviennent de la façon dont chacun apporte sa contribution, notamment par des prestations en argent, son travail au foyer, les soins qu’il voue aux enfants ou l’aide qu’il prête à son conjoint dans sa profession ou son entreprise.

3 Ce faisant, ils tiennent compte des besoins de l’union conjugale et de leur situation personnelle.

Art. 164 E. Entretien de la famille / II. Montant à libre disposition

II. Montant à libre disposition

1 L’époux qui voue ses soins au ménage ou aux enfants ou qui aide l’autre dans sa profession ou son entreprise a le droit de recevoir régulièrement de son conjoint un montant équitable dont il puisse disposer librement.

2 Dans la détermination de ce montant, il faut considérer les revenus propres de l’époux créancier ainsi que le devoir du débiteur d’assurer l’avenir de la famille et de pourvoir aux besoins de sa profession ou de son entreprise.

Art. 165 E. Entretien de la famille / III. Contribution extraordinaire d’un époux

III. Contribution extraordinaire d’un époux

1 Lorsqu’un époux a collaboré à la profession ou à l’entreprise de son conjoint dans une mesure notablement supérieure à ce qu’exige sa contribution à l’entretien de la famille, il a droit à une indemnité équitable.

2 Il en va de même lorsqu’un époux, par ses revenus ou sa fortune, a contribué à l’entretien de la famille dans une mesure notablement supérieure à ce qu’il devait.

3 Un époux ne peut élever ces prétentions lorsqu’il a fourni sa contribution extraordinaire en vertu d’un contrat de travail, de prêt ou de société ou en vertu d’un autre rapport juridique.

Art. 166 F. Représentation de l’union conjugale

F. Représentation de l’union conjugale

1 Chaque époux représente l’union conjugale pour les besoins courants de la famille pendant la vie commune.

2 Au-delà des besoins courants de la famille, un époux ne représente l’union conjugale que:

1.
lorsqu’il y a été autorisé par son conjoint ou par le juge;
2.
lorsque l’affaire ne souffre aucun retard et que le conjoint est empêché par la maladie, l’absence ou d’autres causes semblables de donner son consentement.

3 Chaque époux s’oblige personnellement par ses actes et il oblige solidairement son conjoint en tant qu’il n’excède pas ses pouvoirs d’une manière reconnaissable pour les tiers.

Art. 167 G. Profession et entreprise des époux

G. Profession et entreprise des époux

Dans le choix de sa profession ou de son entreprise et dans l’exercice de ces activités, chaque époux a égard à la personne de son conjoint et aux intérêts de l’union conjugale.

Art. 168 H. Actes juridiques des époux / I. En général

H. Actes juridiques des époux

I. En général

Chaque époux peut, sauf disposition légale contraire, faire tous actes juridiques avec son conjoint et avec les tiers.

Art. 169 H. Actes juridiques des époux / II. Logement de la famille

II. Logement de la famille

1 Un époux ne peut, sans le consentement exprès de son conjoint, ni résilier le bail, ni aliéner la maison ou l’appartement familial, ni restreindre par d’autres actes juridiques les droits dont dépend le logement de la famille.

2 S’il n’est pas possible de recueillir ce consentement ou s’il est refusé sans motif légitime, l’époux intéressé peut en appeler au juge.

Art. 170 J. Devoir de renseigner

J. Devoir de renseigner

1 Chaque époux peut demander à son conjoint qu’il le renseigne sur ses revenus, ses biens et ses dettes.

2 Le juge peut astreindre le conjoint du requérant ou des tiers à fournir les renseignements utiles et à produire les pièces nécessaires.

3 Est réservé le secret professionnel des avocats, des notaires, des médecins, des ecclésiastiques et de leurs auxiliaires.

Art. 171 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / I. Offices de consultation

K. Protection de l’union conjugale

I. Offices de consultation

Les cantons veillent à ce que les conjoints puissent dans les difficultés de leur vie d’époux s’adresser, ensemble ou séparément, à des offices de consultation conjugale ou familiale.

Art. 172 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 1. En général

II. Mesures judiciaires

1. En général

1 Lorsqu’un époux ne remplit pas ses devoirs de famille ou que les conjoints sont en désaccord sur une affaire importante pour l’union conjugale, ils peuvent, ensemble ou séparément, requérir l’intervention du juge.

2 Le juge rappelle les époux à leurs devoirs et tente de les concilier; il peut requérir, avec leur accord, le concours de personnes qualifiées ou leur conseiller de s’adresser à un office de consultation conjugale ou familiale.

3 Au besoin, le juge prend, à la requête d’un époux, les mesures prévues par la loi. La disposition relative à la protection de la personnalité en cas de violence, de menaces ou de harcèlement est applicable par analogie.1


1 Phrase introduite par le ch. I de la LF du 23 juin 2006 (Protection de la personnalité en cas de violence, de menaces ou de harcèlement), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2007 (RO 2007 137; FF 2005 6437 6461).

Art. 173 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 2. Pendant la vie commune / a. Contributions pécuniaires

2. Pendant la vie commune

a. Contributions pécuniaires

1 À la requête d’un époux, le juge fixe les contributions pécuniaires dues pour l’entretien de la famille.

2 De même, à la requête d’un des époux, le juge fixe le montant dû à celui d’entre eux qui voue ses soins au ménage ou aux enfants ou qui aide son conjoint dans sa profession ou son entreprise.

3 Ces prestations peuvent être réclamées pour l’avenir et pour l’année qui précède l’introduction de la requête.

Art. 174 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 2. Pendant la vie commune / b. Retrait du pouvoir de représenter l’union conjugale

b. Retrait du pouvoir de représenter l’union conjugale

1 Lorsqu’un époux excède son droit de représenter l’union conjugale ou se montre incapable de l’exercer, le juge peut, à la requête de son conjoint, lui retirer tout ou partie de ses pouvoirs.

2 Le requérant ne peut porter ce retrait à la connaissance des tiers que par avis individuels.

3 Le retrait des pouvoirs n’est opposable aux tiers de bonne foi qu’après avoir été publié sur l’ordre du juge.

Art. 175 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 3. En cas de suspension de la vie commune / a. Causes

3. En cas de suspension de la vie commune

a. Causes

Un époux est fondé à refuser la vie commune aussi longtemps que sa personnalité, sa sécurité matérielle ou le bien de la famille sont gravement menacés.

Art. 176 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 3. En cas de suspension de la vie commune / b. Organisation de la vie séparée

b. Organisation de la vie séparée

1 À la requête d’un époux et si la suspension de la vie commune est fondée, le juge:1

1.2
fixe les contributions d’entretien à verser respectivement aux enfants et à l’époux;
2.
prend les mesures en ce qui concerne le logement et le mobilier de ménage;
3.
ordonne la séparation de biens si les circonstances le justifient.

2 La requête peut aussi être formée par un époux lorsque la vie commune se révèle impossible, notamment parce que son conjoint la refuse sans y être fondé.

3 Lorsqu’il y a des enfants mineurs, le juge ordonne les mesures nécessaires, d’après les dispositions sur les effets de la filiation.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 176a1K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 4. Exécution / a. Aide au recouvrement et avances

4. Exécution

a. Aide au recouvrement et avances

Les dispositions du droit du divorce et du droit des effets de la filiation relatives à l’aide au recouvrement et aux avances sont applicables.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 177 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 4. Exécution / b. Avis aux débiteurs

b. Avis aux débiteurs1

Lorsqu’un époux ne satisfait pas à son devoir d’entretien, le juge peut prescrire aux débiteurs de cet époux d’opérer tout ou partie de leurs paiements entre les mains de son conjoint.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 178 K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 5. Restrictions du pouvoir de disposer

5. Restrictions du pouvoir de disposer

1 Dans la mesure nécessaire pour assurer les conditions matérielles de la famille ou l’exécution d’obligations pécuniaires découlant du mariage, le juge peut, à la requête de l’un des époux, restreindre le pouvoir de l’autre de disposer de certains de ses biens sans le consentement de son conjoint.

2 Le juge ordonne les mesures de sûreté appropriées.

3 Lorsque le juge interdit à un époux de disposer d’un immeuble, il en fait porter la mention au registre foncier.

Art. 1791K. Protection de l’union conjugale / II. Mesures judiciaires / 6. Faits nouveaux

6. Faits nouveaux

1 À la requête d’un époux, le juge ordonne les modifications commandées par les faits nouveaux et lève les mesures prises lorsque les causes qui les ont déterminées n’existent plus. Les dispositions relatives à la modification des droits et devoirs parentaux en cas de divorce sont applicables par analogie.2

2 Lorsque les époux reprennent la vie commune, les mesures ordonnées en vue de la vie séparée sont caduques, à l’exception de la séparation de biens et des mesures de protection de l’enfant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 1801

1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).


  Titre sixième:4  Du régime matrimonial

  Chapitre I: Dispositions générales

Art. 181 A. Régime ordinaire

A. Régime ordinaire

Les époux sont placés sous le régime de la participation aux acquêts, à moins qu’ils n’aient adopté un autre régime par contrat de mariage ou qu’ils ne soient soumis au régime matrimonial extraordinaire.

Art. 182 B. Contrat de mariage / I. Choix du régime

B. Contrat de mariage

I. Choix du régime

1 Le contrat de mariage peut être passé avant ou après la célébration du mariage.

2 Les parties ne peuvent adopter un régime, le révoquer ou le modifier que dans les limites de la loi.

Art. 183 B. Contrat de mariage / II. Capacité des parties

II. Capacité des parties

1 Les personnes capables de discernement peuvent seules conclure un contrat de mariage.

2 Les mineurs et les personnes majeures dont la curatelle s’étend à la conclusion d’un contrat de mariage doivent être autorisés par leur représentant légal.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 184 B. Contrat de mariage / III. Forme du contrat de mariage

III. Forme du contrat de mariage

Le contrat de mariage est reçu en la forme authentique et il est signé par les parties et, le cas échéant, par le représentant légal.

Art. 185 C. Régime extraordinaire / I. À la demande d’un époux / 1. Jugement

C. Régime extraordinaire

I. À la demande d’un époux

1. Jugement

1 À la demande d’un époux fondée sur de justes motifs, le juge prononce la séparation de biens.

2 Il y a notamment justes motifs:

1.
lorsque le conjoint est insolvable ou que sa part aux biens communs a été saisie;
2.
lorsque le conjoint met en péril les intérêts du requérant ou ceux de la communauté;
3.
lorsque le conjoint refuse indûment de donner le consentement requis à un acte de disposition sur des biens communs;
4.
lorsque le conjoint refuse de renseigner le requérant sur ses biens, ses revenus ou ses dettes ou sur l’état des biens communs;
5.
lorsque le conjoint est incapable de discernement de manière durable.

3 Lorsqu’un époux est incapable de discernement de manière durable, son représentant légal peut demander que la séparation de biens soit prononcée pour ce motif également.

Art. 1861C. Régime extraordinaire / I. À la demande d’un époux / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 187 C. Régime extraordinaire / I. À la demande d’un époux / 3. Révocation

3. Révocation

1 Par contrat de mariage, les époux peuvent en tout temps adopter à nouveau leur régime antérieur ou convenir d’un autre régime.

2 Lorsque les motifs qui justifiaient la séparation de biens ont disparu, le juge peut, à la demande d’un époux, prescrire le rétablissement du régime antérieur.

Art. 188 C. Régime extraordinaire / II. En cas d’exécution forcée / 1. Faillite

II. En cas d’exécution forcée

1. Faillite

Les époux vivant sous un régime de communauté sont soumis de plein droit au régime de la séparation de biens dès que l’un d’eux est déclaré en faillite.

Art. 189 C. Régime extraordinaire / II. En cas d’exécution forcée / 2. Saisie / a. Jugement

2. Saisie

a. Jugement

Lorsqu’un époux vit sous un régime de communauté et que sa part est saisie pour une dette propre, l’autorité de surveillance de la poursuite peut requérir le juge d’ordonner la séparation de biens.

Art. 190 C. Régime extraordinaire / II. En cas d’exécution forcée / 2. Saisie / b. Demande

b. Demande1

1 La demande est dirigée contre les deux époux.

2 ...2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).
2 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 191 C. Régime extraordinaire / II. En cas d’exécution forcée / 3. Révocation

3. Révocation

1 Lorsque le débiteur a désintéressé ses créanciers, le juge peut, à la requête d’un époux, prescrire le rétablissement du régime de communauté.

2 Par contrat de mariage, les époux peuvent adopter le régime de la participation aux acquêts.

Art. 192 C. Régime extraordinaire / III. Liquidation du régime antérieur

III. Liquidation du régime antérieur

Les époux procèdent à la liquidation consécutive à la séparation de biens conformément aux règles de leur régime antérieur, sauf dispositions légales contraires.

Art. 193 D. Protection des créanciers

D. Protection des créanciers

1 L’adoption ou la modification d’un régime matrimonial ainsi que les liquidations entre époux ne peuvent soustraire à l’action des créanciers d’un conjoint ou de la communauté les biens sur lesquels ils pouvaient exercer leurs droits.

2 L’époux auquel ces biens ont passé est personnellement tenu de payer lesdits créanciers, mais il peut se libérer de sa responsabilité dans la mesure où il établit que les biens reçus ne suffisent pas.

Art. 1941E. ...

E. ...


1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 195 F. Administration des biens d’un époux par l’autre

F. Administration des biens d’un époux par l’autre

1 Lorsqu’un époux confie expressément ou tacitement l’administration de ses biens à son conjoint, les règles du mandat sont applicables, sauf convention contraire.

2 Les dispositions sur le règlement des dettes entre époux sont réservées.

Art. 195a G. Inventaire

G. Inventaire

1 Chaque époux peut demander en tout temps à son conjoint de concourir à la confection d’un inventaire de leurs biens par acte authentique.

2 L’exactitude de cet inventaire est présumée lorsqu’il a été dressé dans l’année à compter du jour où les biens sont entrés dans une masse.


  Chapitre II: Du régime ordinaire de la participation aux acquêts

Art. 196 A. Propriété / I. Composition

A. Propriété

I. Composition

Le régime de la participation aux acquêts comprend les acquêts et les biens propres de chaque époux.

Art. 197 A. Propriété / II. Acquêts

II. Acquêts

1 Sont acquêts les biens acquis par un époux à titre onéreux pendant le régime.

2 Les acquêts d’un époux comprennent notamment:

1.
le produit de son travail;
2.
les sommes versées par des institutions de prévoyance en faveur du personnel ou par des institutions d’assurance ou de prévoyance sociale;
3.
les dommages-intérêts dus à raison d’une incapacité de travail;
4.
les revenus de ses biens propres;
5.
les biens acquis en remploi de ses acquêts.
Art. 198 A. Propriété / III. Biens propres / 1. Légaux

III. Biens propres

1. Légaux

Sont biens propres de par la loi:

1.
les effets d’un époux exclusivement affectés à son usage personnel;
2.
les biens qui lui appartiennent au début du régime ou qui lui échoient ensuite par succession ou à quelque autre titre gratuit;
3.
les créances en réparation d’un tort moral;
4.
les biens acquis en remploi des biens propres.
Art. 199 A. Propriété / III. Biens propres / 2. Conventionnels

2. Conventionnels

1 Par contrat de mariage, les époux peuvent convenir que des biens d’acquêts affectés à l’exercice d’une profession ou à l’exploitation d’une entreprise font partie des biens propres.

2 Les époux peuvent en outre convenir par contrat de mariage que des revenus de biens propres ne formeront pas des acquêts.

Art. 200 A. Propriété / IV. Preuve

IV. Preuve

1 Quiconque allègue qu’un bien appartient à l’un ou à l’autre des époux est tenu d’en établir la preuve.

2 À défaut de cette preuve, le bien est présumé appartenir en copropriété aux deux époux.

3 Tout bien d’un époux est présumé acquêt, sauf preuve du contraire.

Art. 201 B. Administration, jouissance et disposition

B. Administration, jouissance et disposition

1 Chaque époux a l’administration, la jouissance et la disposition de ses acquêts et de ses biens propres, dans les limites de la loi.

2 Lorsqu’un bien appartient en copropriété aux deux époux, aucun d’eux ne peut, sauf convention contraire, disposer de sa part sans le consentement de l’autre.

Art. 202 C. Dettes envers les tiers

C. Dettes envers les tiers

Chaque époux répond de ses dettes sur tous ses biens.

Art. 203 D. Dettes entre époux

D. Dettes entre époux

1 Le régime n’a pas d’effet sur l’exigibilité des dettes entre les époux.

2 Cependant, lorsque le règlement d’une dette ou la restitution d’une chose exposent l’époux débiteur à des difficultés graves qui mettent en péril l’union conjugale, celui-ci peut solliciter des délais de paiement, à charge de fournir des sûretés si les circonstances le justifient.

Art. 204 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / I. Moment de la dissolution

E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime

I. Moment de la dissolution

1 Le régime est dissous au jour du décès d’un époux ou au jour du contrat adoptant un autre régime.

2 S’il y a divorce, séparation de corps, nullité de mariage ou séparation de biens judiciaire, la dissolution du régime rétroagit au jour de la demande.

Art. 205 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / II. Reprises de biens et règlement des dettes / 1. En général

II. Reprises de biens et règlement des dettes

1. En général

1 Chaque époux reprend ceux de ses biens qui sont en possession de son conjoint.

2 Lorsqu’un bien est en copropriété, un époux peut demander, en sus des autres mesures prévues par la loi, que ce bien lui soit attribué entièrement s’il justifie d’un intérêt prépondérant, à charge de désintéresser son conjoint.

3 Les époux règlent leurs dettes réciproques.

Art. 206 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / II. Reprises de biens et règlement des dettes / 2. Part à la plus—value

2. Part à la plus—value

1 Lorsqu’un époux a contribué sans contrepartie correspondante à l’acquisition, à l’amélioration ou à la conservation de biens de son conjoint qui se retrouvent à la liquidation avec une plus-value, sa créance est proportionnelle à sa contribution et elle se calcule sur la valeur actuelle des biens; en cas de moins-value, il peut en tout cas réclamer le montant de ses investissements.

2 Si l’un des biens considérés a été aliéné auparavant, la créance est immédiatement exigible et elle se calcule sur la valeur de réalisation du bien à l’époque de l’aliénation.

3 Par convention écrite, les époux peuvent écarter ou modifier la part à la plus-value d’un bien.

Art. 207 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / III. Détermination du bénéfice de chaque époux / 1. Dissociation des acquêts et des biens propres

III. Détermination du bénéfice de chaque époux

1. Dissociation des acquêts et des biens propres

1 Les acquêts et les biens propres de chaque époux sont disjoints dans leur composition au jour de la dissolution du régime.

2 Le capital versé à un époux par une institution de prévoyance ou à raison de la perte de sa capacité de travail est compté dans les biens propres à concurrence de la valeur capitalisée de la rente qui eût appartenu à cet époux à la dissolution du régime.

Art. 208 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / III. Détermination du bénéfice de chaque époux / 2. Réunions aux acquêts

2. Réunions aux acquêts

1 Sont réunis aux acquêts, en valeur:

1.
les biens qui en faisaient partie et dont l’époux a disposé par libéralités entre vifs sans le consentement de son conjoint dans les cinq années antérieures à la dissolution du régime, à l’exception des présents d’usage;
2.
les aliénations de biens d’acquêts qu’un époux a faites pendant le régime dans l’intention de compromettre la participation de son conjoint.

2 ...1


1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 209 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / III. Détermination du bénéfice de chaque époux / 3. Récompenses entre acquêts et biens propres

3. Récompenses entre acquêts et biens propres

1 Il y a lieu à récompense, lors de la liquidation, entre les acquêts et les biens propres d’un même époux lorsqu’une dette grevant l’une des masses a été payée de deniers provenant de l’autre.

2 Une dette grève la masse avec laquelle elle est en rapport de connexité ou, dans le doute, les acquêts.

3 Lorsqu’une masse a contribué à l’acquisition, à l’amélioration ou à la conservation de biens appartenant à l’autre masse, la récompense, en cas de plus-value ou de moins-value, est proportionnelle à la contribution fournie et elle se calcule sur la valeur de ces biens à la liquidation ou à l’époque de leur aliénation.

Art. 210 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / III. Détermination du bénéfice de chaque époux / 4. Bénéfice

4. Bénéfice

1 Des acquêts de chaque époux, réunions et récompenses comprises, on déduit toutes les dettes qui les grèvent pour dégager le bénéfice.

2 Il n’est pas tenu compte d’un déficit.

Art. 211 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / IV. Valeur d’estimation / 1. Valeur vénale

IV. Valeur d’estimation

1. Valeur vénale

À la liquidation du régime matrimonial, les biens sont estimés à leur valeur vénale.

Art. 212 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / IV. Valeur d’estimation / 2. Valeur de rendement / a. En général

2. Valeur de rendement

a. En général

1 Lorsque l’époux propriétaire d’une entreprise agricole continue de l’exploiter personnellement ou lorsque le conjoint survivant ou un descendant est en droit d’exiger qu’elle lui soit attribuée entièrement, la part à la plus-value et la créance de participation se calculent sur la base de la valeur de rendement.

2 Lorsque l’époux propriétaire de l’entreprise agricole, ou ses héritiers, peuvent de leur côté réclamer au conjoint une part à la plus-value ou une participation au bénéfice, la créance ne peut porter que sur ce qui aurait été dû si l’entreprise avait été estimée à sa valeur vénale.

3 Les dispositions du droit successoral sur l’estimation et sur la part des cohéritiers au gain sont applicables par analogie.

Art. 213 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / IV. Valeur d’estimation / 2. Valeur de rendement / b. Circonstances particulières

b. Circonstances particulières

1 La valeur d’attribution peut être équitablement augmentée en raison de circonstances particulières.

2 Ces circonstances sont notamment les besoins d’entretien du conjoint survivant, le prix d’acquisition de l’entreprise agricole, y compris les investissements, ou la situation financière de l’époux auquel elle appartient.

Art. 214 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / IV. Valeur d’estimation / 3. Moment de l’estimation

3. Moment de l’estimation

1 Les acquêts existant à la dissolution sont estimés à leur valeur à l’époque de la liquidation.

2 Les biens sujets à réunion sont estimés à leur valeur au jour de leur aliénation.

Art. 215 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / V. Participation au bénéfice / 1. Légale

V. Participation au bénéfice

1. Légale

1 Chaque époux ou sa succession a droit à la moitié du bénéfice de l’autre.

2 Les créances sont compensées.

Art. 216 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / V. Participation au bénéfice / 2. Conventionnelle / a. En général

2. Conventionnelle

a. En général

1 Par contrat de mariage, les époux peuvent convenir d’une autre participation au bénéfice.

2 Ces conventions ne peuvent porter atteinte à la réserve des enfants non communs et de leurs descendants.

Art. 217 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / V. Participation au bénéfice / 2. Conventionnelle / b. En cas de divorce, de séparation de corps, de nullité de mariage ou de séparation de biens judiciaire

b. En cas de divorce, de séparation de corps, de nullité de mariage ou de séparation de biens judiciaire

En cas de dissolution du régime pour cause de divorce, de séparation de corps, de nullité de mariage ou de séparation de biens judiciaire, les clauses qui modifient la participation légale au bénéfice ne s’appliquent pas, à moins que le contrat de mariage ne prévoie expressément le contraire.

Art. 218 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VI. Règlement de la créance de participation et de la part à la plus-value / 1. Sursis au paiement

VI. Règlement de la créance de participation et de la part à la plus-value

1. Sursis au paiement

1 Lorsque le règlement immédiat de la créance de participation et de la part à la plus-value expose l’époux débiteur à des difficultés graves, celui-ci peut solliciter des délais de paiement.

2 Sauf convention contraire, il doit des intérêts dès la clôture de la liquidation et peut être tenu de fournir des sûretés si les circonstances le justifient.

Art. 219 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VI. Règlement de la créance de participation et de la part à la plus-value / 2. Logement et mobilier de ménage

2. Logement et mobilier de ménage

1 Pour assurer le maintien de ses conditions de vie, le conjoint survivant peut demander qu’un droit d’usufruit ou d’habitation sur la maison ou l’appartement conjugal qu’occupaient les époux et qui appartenait au défunt lui soit attribué en imputation sur sa créance de participation; les clauses contraires du contrat de mariage sont réservées.

2 Aux mêmes conditions, il peut demander l’attribution du mobilier de ménage en propriété.

3 À la demande du conjoint survivant ou des autres héritiers légaux, le conjoint survivant peut, si les circonstances le justifient, se voir attribuer, en lieu et place de l’usufruit ou du droit d’habitation, la propriété de la maison ou de l’appartement.

4 Le conjoint survivant ne peut faire valoir ces droits sur les locaux dans lesquels le défunt exerçait une profession ou exploitait une entreprise s’ils sont nécessaires à un descendant pour continuer cette activité; les dispositions du droit successoral paysan sont réservées.

Art. 220 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VI. Règlement de la créance de participation et de la part à la plus-value / 3. Action contre des tiers

3. Action contre des tiers

1 Si les biens, qui appartiennent à l’époux débiteur ou à sa succession lors de la liquidation ne couvrent pas la créance de participation, l’époux créancier ou ses héritiers peuvent rechercher pour le découvert les tiers qui ont bénéficié d’aliénations sujettes à réunion.

2 L’action s’éteint après une année à compter du jour où l’époux créancier ou ses héritiers ont connu la lésion et, dans tous les cas, après dix ans dès la dissolution du régime.

3 Pour le surplus, les dispositions sur l’action successorale en réduction sont applicables par analogie.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).


  Chapitre III: De la communauté de biens

Art. 221 A. Propriété / I. Composition

A. Propriété

I. Composition

Le régime de la communauté de biens se compose des biens communs et des biens propres de chaque époux.

Art. 222 A. Propriété / II. Biens communs / 1. Communauté universelle

II. Biens communs

1. Communauté universelle

1 La communauté universelle se compose de tous les biens et revenus des époux qui ne sont pas biens propres de par la loi.

2 La communauté appartient indivisément aux deux époux.

3 Aucun d’eux ne peut disposer de sa part aux biens communs.

Art. 223 A. Propriété / II. Biens communs / 2. Communautés réduites / a. Communauté d’acquêts

2. Communautés réduites

a. Communauté d’acquêts

1 Par contrat de mariage, les époux peuvent convenir que la communauté sera réduite aux acquêts.

2 Les revenus des biens propres entrent dans les biens communs.

Art. 224 A. Propriété / II. Biens communs / 2. Communautés réduites / b. Autres communautés

b. Autres communautés

1 Par contrat de mariage, les époux peuvent convenir d’exclure de la communauté certains biens ou espèces de biens, notamment les immeubles, le produit du travail d’un époux ou les biens qui servent à l’exercice de sa profession ou à l’exploitation de son entreprise.

2 Sauf convention contraire, les revenus de ces biens n’entrent pas dans la communauté.

Art. 225 A. Propriété / III. Biens propres

III. Biens propres

1 Les biens propres sont constitués par contrat de mariage, par des libéralités provenant de tiers ou par l’effet de la loi.

2 Les biens propres de chaque époux comprennent de par la loi les effets exclusivement affectés à son usage personnel, ainsi que ses créances en réparation d’un tort moral.

3 La réserve héréditaire d’un époux ne peut être constituée en biens propres par des parents si, d’après le contrat de mariage, elle doit entrer dans les biens communs.

Art. 226 A. Propriété / IV. Preuve

IV. Preuve

Tout bien est présumé commun s’il n’est prouvé qu’il est bien propre de l’un ou de l’autre époux.

Art. 227 B. Gestion et disposition / I. Biens communs / 1. Administration ordinaire

B. Gestion et disposition

I. Biens communs

1. Administration ordinaire

1 Les époux gèrent les biens communs dans l’intérêt de l’union conjugale.

2 Dans les limites de l’administration ordinaire, chaque époux peut engager la communauté et disposer des biens communs.

Art. 228 B. Gestion et disposition / I. Biens communs / 2. Administration extraordinaire

2. Administration extraordinaire

1 Au-delà de l’administration ordinaire, les époux ne peuvent engager la communauté et disposer des biens communs que conjointement ou avec le consentement l’un de l’autre.

2 Ce consentement est présumé au profit des tiers, à moins que ceux-ci ne sachent ou ne doivent savoir qu’il n’a pas été donné.

3 Les dispositions sur la représentation de l’union conjugale sont réservées.

Art. 229 B. Gestion et disposition / I. Biens communs / 3. Profession ou entreprise commune

3. Profession ou entreprise commune

Lorsqu’un époux, avec le consentement de son conjoint et au moyen des biens communs, exerce seul une profession ou exploite seul une entreprise, il peut accomplir tous les actes qui entrent dans l’exercice de ces activités.

Art. 230 B. Gestion et disposition / I. Biens communs / 4. Répudiation et acquisition de successions

4. Répudiation et acquisition de successions

1 Un époux ne peut, sans le consentement de son conjoint, répudier une succession qui entrerait dans les biens communs ni accepter une succession insolvable.

2 S’il n’est pas possible de recueillir ce consentement ou s’il est refusé sans motif légitime, l’époux peut en appeler au juge.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 231 B. Gestion et disposition / I. Biens communs / 5. Responsabilité et frais de gestion

5. Responsabilité et frais de gestion

1 L’époux qui fait des actes de gestion pour la communauté encourt envers elle la responsabilité d’un mandataire à la dissolution du régime.

2 Les frais de gestion grèvent les biens communs.

Art. 232 B. Gestion et disposition / II. Biens propres

II. Biens propres

1 Chaque époux a l’administration et la disposition de ses biens propres, dans les limites de la loi.

2 Si les revenus entrent dans les biens propres, les frais de gestion de ceux-ci grèvent les biens propres.

Art. 233 C. Dettes envers les tiers / I. Dettes générales

C. Dettes envers les tiers

I. Dettes générales

Chaque époux répond sur ses biens propres et sur les biens communs:

1.
des dettes qu’il a contractées dans les limites de son pouvoir de représenter l’union conjugale et d’administrer les biens communs;
2.
des dettes qu’il a faites dans l’exercice d’une profession ou dans l’exploitation d’une entreprise si ces activités sont exercées au moyen de biens communs, ou si leurs revenus tombent dans ces biens;
3.
des dettes qui obligent aussi personnellement le conjoint;
4.
des dettes à l’égard desquelles les époux sont convenus avec un tiers que le débiteur répondra aussi sur les biens communs.
Art. 234 C. Dettes envers les tiers / II. Dettes propres

II. Dettes propres

1 Pour toutes les autres dettes chaque époux ne répond que sur ses biens propres et sur la moitié de la valeur des biens communs.

2 L’action fondée sur l’enrichissement de la communauté est réservée.

Art. 235 D. Dettes entre époux

D. Dettes entre époux

1 Le régime n’a pas d’effet sur l’exigibilité des dettes entre les époux.

2 Cependant, lorsque le règlement d’une dette ou la restitution d’une chose exposent l’époux débiteur à des difficultés graves qui mettent en péril l’union conjugale, celui-ci peut solliciter des délais de paiement, à charge de fournir des sûretés si les circonstances le justifient.

Art. 236 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / I. Moment de la dissolution

E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime

I. Moment de la dissolution

1 Le régime est dissous au jour du décès d’un époux, au jour du contrat adoptant un autre régime ou au jour de la déclaration de faillite d’un époux.

2 S’il y a divorce, séparation de corps, nullité de mariage ou séparation de biens judiciaire, la dissolution du régime rétroagit au jour de la demande.

3 La composition des biens communs et des biens propres est arrêtée au jour de la dissolution.

Art. 237 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / II. Attribution aux biens propres

II. Attribution aux biens propres

Le capital versé à un époux par une institution de prévoyance ou à raison de la perte de sa capacité de travail et qui est entré dans les biens communs est compté dans les biens propres à concurrence de la valeur capitalisée de la rente qui eût appartenu à cet époux à la dissolution du régime.

Art. 238 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / III. Récompenses entre biens communs et biens propres

III. Récompenses entre biens communs et biens propres

1 Il y a lieu à récompense, lors de la liquidation, entre les biens communs et les biens propres de chaque époux lorsqu’une dette grevant l’une des masses a été payée de deniers provenant de l’autre.

2 Une dette grève la masse avec laquelle elle est en rapport de connexité ou, dans le doute, les biens communs.

Art. 239 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / IV. Part à la plus-value

IV. Part à la plus-value

Lorsque les biens propres d’un époux ou les biens communs ont contribué à l’acquisition, à l’amélioration ou à la conservation d’un bien appartenant à une autre masse, les dispositions du régime de la participation aux acquêts relatives aux cas de plus-value ou de moins-value sont applicables par analogie.

Art. 240 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / V. Valeur d’estimation

V. Valeur d’estimation

Les biens communs existant à la dissolution sont estimés à leur valeur à l’époque de la liquidation.

Art. 241 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VI. Partage / 1. En cas de décès ou d’adoption d’un autre régime

VI. Partage

1. En cas de décès ou d’adoption d’un autre régime

1 Lorsque la communauté de biens prend fin par le décès d’un époux ou par l’adoption d’un autre régime, elle se partage par moitié entre les époux ou leurs héritiers.

2 Par contrat de mariage les époux peuvent convenir d’un partage autre que par moitié.

3 Ces conventions ne peuvent porter atteinte à la réserve des descendants.

Art. 242 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VI. Partage / 2. Dans les autres cas

2. Dans les autres cas

1 En cas de divorce, de séparation de corps, de nullité de mariage ou de séparation de biens légale ou judiciaire, chacun des époux reprend ceux des biens communs qui auraient formé ses biens propres sous le régime de la participation aux acquêts.

2 Les biens communs restants sont partagés par moitié entre les époux.

3 Les clauses qui modifient le partage légal ne s’appliquent pas, à moins que le contrat de mariage ne prévoie expressément le contraire.

Art. 243 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VII. Mode et procédure de partage / 1. Biens propres

VII. Mode et procédure de partage

1. Biens propres

Lorsque la communauté de biens prend fin par le décès d’un époux, le conjoint survivant peut demander que les biens qui eussent été ses biens propres sous le régime de la participation aux acquêts lui soient attribués en imputation sur sa part.

Art. 244 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VII. Mode et procédure de partage / 2. Logement et mobilier de ménage

2. Logement et mobilier de ménage

1 Lorsque la maison ou l’appartement qu’occupaient les époux, ou du mobilier de ménage, étaient compris dans les biens communs, le conjoint survivant peut demander que la propriété de ces biens lui soit attribuée en imputation sur sa part.

2 À la demande du conjoint survivant ou des autres héritiers légaux de l’époux défunt, le conjoint survivant peut, si les circonstances le justifient, se voir attribuer, en lieu et place de la propriété, un usufruit ou un droit d’habitation.

3 Si la communauté de biens prend fin autrement que par le décès, chacun des époux peut former les mêmes demandes s’il justifie d’un intérêt prépondérant à l’attribution.

Art. 245 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VII. Mode et procédure de partage / 3. Autres biens

3. Autres biens

Chacun des époux peut aussi demander que d’autres biens communs lui soient attribués en imputation sur sa part, s’il justifie d’un intérêt prépondérant.

Art. 246 E. Dissolution et liquidation du régime / VII. Mode et procédure de partage / 4. Autres règles de partage

4. Autres règles de partage

Pour le surplus, les dispositions sur le partage de la copropriété et sur le mode et la procédure du partage successoral sont applicables par analogie.


  Chapitre IV: De la séparation de biens

Art. 247 A. Administration, jouissance et disposition / I. En général

A. Administration, jouissance et disposition

I. En général

Chaque époux a l’administration, la jouissance et la disposition de ses biens, dans les limites de la loi.

Art. 248 A. Administration, jouissance et disposition / II. Preuve

II. Preuve

1 Quiconque allègue qu’un bien appartient à l’un ou à l’autre des époux est tenu d’en établir la preuve.

2 À défaut de cette preuve, le bien est présumé appartenir en copropriété aux deux époux.

Art. 249 B. Dettes envers les tiers

B. Dettes envers les tiers

Chaque époux répond de ses dettes sur tous ses biens.

Art. 250 C. Dettes entre époux

C. Dettes entre époux

1 Le régime n’a pas d’effet sur l’exigibilité des dettes entre les époux.

2 Cependant, lorsque le règlement d’une dette ou la restitution d’une chose exposent l’époux débiteur à des difficultés graves qui mettent en péril l’union conjugale, celui-ci peut solliciter des délais de paiement, à charge de fournir des sûretés si les circonstances le justifient.

Art. 251 D. Attribution d’un bien en copropriété

D. Attribution d’un bien en copropriété

Lorsqu’un bien est en copropriété, un époux peut, à la dissolution du régime, demander, en sus des autres mesures prévues par la loi, que ce bien lui soit attribué entièrement s’il justifie d’un intérêt prépondérant, à charge de désintéresser son conjoint.


  Deuxième partie: Des parents

  Titre septième: De l’établissement de la filiation5 

  Chapitre I: Dispositions générales6 

Art. 2521A. Établissement de la filiation en général

A. Établissement de la filiation en général

1 À l’égard de la mère, la filiation résulte de la naissance.

2 À l’égard du père, elle est établie par son mariage avec la mère, par reconnaissance ou par jugement.

3 La filiation résulte en outre de l’adoption.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2531B. ...

B. ...


1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 2541

1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).


  Chapitre II: De la paternité du mari7 

Art. 2551A. Présomption

A. Présomption

1 L’enfant né pendant le mariage a pour père le mari.

2 En cas de décès du mari, celui-ci est réputé être le père si l’enfant est né soit dans les trois cents jours qui suivent le décès, soit après les trois cents jours s’il est prouvé qu’il a été conçu avant le décès du mari.

3 Si le mari est déclaré absent, il est réputé être le père de l’enfant né dans les trois cents jours qui suivent le danger de mort ou les dernières nouvelles.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 2561B. Désaveu / I. Qualité pour agir

B. Désaveu

I. Qualité pour agir

1 La présomption de paternité peut être attaquée devant le juge:

1.
par le mari;
2.
par l’enfant, si la vie commune des époux a pris fin pendant sa minorité.

2 L’action du mari est intentée contre l’enfant et la mère, celle de l’enfant contre le mari et la mère.

3 Le mari ne peut intenter l’action s’il a consenti à la conception par un tiers. La loi fédérale du 18 décembre 1998 sur la procréation médicalement assistée2 est réservée en ce qui concerne l’action en désaveu de l’enfant3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 RS 810.11
3 Nouvelle teneur selon l’art. 39 de la LF du 18 déc. 1998 sur la procréation médicalement assistée, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 3055; FF 1996 III 197).

Art. 256a1B. Désaveu / II. Moyen / 1. Enfant conçu pendant le mariage

II. Moyen

1. Enfant conçu pendant le mariage

1 Lorsque l’enfant a été conçu pendant le mariage, le demandeur doit établir que le mari n’est pas le père.

2 L’enfant né cent quatre-vingts jours au moins après la célébration du mariage ou trois cents jours au plus après sa dissolution par suite de décès est présumé avoir été conçu pendant le mariage.2


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 256b1B. Désaveu / II. Moyen / 2. Enfant conçu avant le mariage ou pendant la suspension de la vie commune

2. Enfant conçu avant le mariage ou pendant la suspension de la vie commune

1 Lorsque l’enfant a été conçu avant la célébration du mariage ou lorsqu’au moment de la conception la vie commune était suspendue, le demandeur n’a pas à prouver d’autre fait à l’appui de l’action.

2 Toutefois, dans ce cas également, la paternité du mari est présumée lorsqu’il est rendu vraisemblable qu’il a cohabité avec sa femme à l’époque de la conception.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 256c1B. Désaveu / III. Délai

III. Délai

1 Le mari doit intenter action au plus tard un an après qu’il a connu la naissance et le fait qu’il n’est pas le père ou qu’un tiers a cohabité avec la mère à l’époque de la conception, mais en tout cas dans les cinq ans depuis la naissance.

2 L’action de l’enfant doit être intentée au plus tard une année après qu’il a atteint l’âge de la majorité.

3 L’action peut être intentée après l’expiration du délai lorsque de justes motifs rendent le retard excusable.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2571C. Conflit de présomptions

C. Conflit de présomptions

1 Lorsqu’un enfant est né dans les trois cents jours qui suivent la dissolution du mariage par suite de décès et que sa mère a contracté un nouveau mariage, le second mari est réputé être le père.2

2 Si cette présomption est écartée, le premier mari est réputé être le père.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 2581D. Action des père et mère

D. Action des père et mère

1 Lorsque le mari est décédé ou devenu incapable de discernement avant l’expiration du délai, l’action en désaveu peut être intentée par son père ou par sa mère.

2 Les dispositions sur le désaveu par le mari sont applicables par analogie.

3 Le délai d’une année pour intenter l’action commence à courir au plus tôt lorsque le père ou la mère a appris le décès ou l’incapacité de discernement du mari.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2591E. Mariage des père et mère

E. Mariage des père et mère

1 Lorsque les père et mère se marient, les dispositions concernant l’enfant né pendant le mariage sont applicables par analogie à l’enfant né avant leur mariage, dès que la paternité du mari est établie par une reconnaissance ou un jugement.

2 La reconnaissance peut être attaquée:

1.
par la mère;
2.
par l’enfant ou, après sa mort, par ses descendants, si la vie commune des époux a pris fin pendant sa minorité ou si la reconnaissance a eu lieu après qu’il a atteint l’âge de 12 ans révolus;
3.
par la commune d’origine ou de domicile du mari;
4.
par le mari.

3 Les dispositions sur la contestation de la reconnaissance sont applicables par analogie.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Chapitre III: De la reconnaissance et du jugement de paternité8 

Art. 2601A. Reconnaissance / I. Conditions et forme

A. Reconnaissance

I. Conditions et forme

1 Lorsque le rapport de filiation existe seulement avec la mère, le père peut reconnaître l’enfant.

2 Le consentement du représentant légal est nécessaire si l’auteur de la reconnaissance est mineur ou s’il est sous curatelle de portée générale ou encore si l’autorité de protection de l’adulte en a décidé ainsi.2

3 La reconnaissance a lieu par déclaration devant l’officier de l’état civil ou par testament ou, lorsqu’une action en constatation de paternité est pendante, devant le juge.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 260a1A. Reconnaissance / II. Action en contestation / 1. Qualité pour agir

II. Action en contestation

1. Qualité pour agir

1 La reconnaissance peut être attaquée en justice par tout intéressé, en particulier par la mère, par l’enfant et, s’il est décédé, par ses descendants, ainsi que par la commune d’origine ou la commune de domicile de l’auteur de la reconnaissance.

2 L’action n’est ouverte à l’auteur de la reconnaissance que s’il l’a faite en croyant qu’un danger grave et imminent le menaçait lui-même, ou l’un de ses proches, dans sa vie, sa santé, son honneur ou ses biens, ou s’il était dans l’erreur concernant sa paternité.

3 L’action est intentée contre l’auteur de la reconnaissance et contre l’enfant lorsque ceux-ci ne l’intentent pas eux-mêmes.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 260b1A. Reconnaissance / II. Action en contestation / 2. Moyen

2. Moyen

1 Le demandeur doit prouver que l’auteur de la reconnaissance n’est pas le père de l’enfant.

2 Toutefois, la mère et l’enfant n’ont à fournir cette preuve que si l’auteur de la reconnaissance rend vraisemblable qu’il a cohabité avec la mère à l’époque de la conception.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 260c1A. Reconnaissance / II. Action en contestation / 3. Délai

3. Délai

1 Le demandeur doit intenter l’action dans le délai d’un an à compter du jour où il a appris que la reconnaissance a eu lieu et que son auteur n’est pas le père ou qu’un tiers a cohabité avec la mère à l’époque de la conception, ou à compter du jour où l’erreur a été découverte ou de celui où la menace a été écartée, mais en tout cas dans les cinq ans depuis la reconnaissance.

2 Dans tous les cas, l’action de l’enfant peut encore être intentée dans l’année après qu’il a atteint l’âge de la majorité.

3 L’action peut être intentée après l’expiration du délai lorsque de justes motifs rendent le retard excusable.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2611B. Action en paternité / I. Qualité pour agir

B. Action en paternité

I. Qualité pour agir

1 La mère et l’enfant peuvent intenter action pour que la filiation soit constatée à l’égard du père.

2 L’action est intentée contre le père ou, s’il est décédé, contre ses descendants ou à leur défaut, dans l’ordre, contre ses père et mère, contre ses frères et soeurs ou contre l’autorité compétente de son dernier domicile.

3 Lorsque le père est décédé, le juge informe l’épouse que l’action a été intentée afin qu’elle puisse sauvegarder ses intérêts.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2621B. Action en paternité / II. Présomption

II. Présomption

1 La paternité est présumée lorsque, entre le trois centième et le cent quatre-vingtième jour avant la naissance de l’enfant, le défendeur a cohabité avec la mère.

2 La paternité est également présumée lorsque l’enfant a été conçu avant le trois centième jour ou après le cent quatre-vingtième jour avant la naissance et que le défendeur a cohabité avec la mère à l’époque de la conception.

3 La présomption cesse lorsque le défendeur prouve que sa paternité est exclue ou moins vraisemblable que celle d’un tiers.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2631B. Action en paternité / III. Délai

III. Délai

1 L’action peut être intentée avant ou après la naissance de l’enfant, mais au plus tard:

1.
par la mère, une année après la naissance;
2.
par l’enfant, une année après qu’il a atteint l’âge de la majorité.

2 S’il existe déjà un rapport de filiation avec un autre homme, l’action peut en tout cas être intentée dans l’année qui suit la dissolution de ce rapport.

3 L’action peut être intentée après l’expiration du délai lorsque de justes motifs rendent le retard excusable.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Chapitre IV:9  De l’adoption

Art. 2641A. Adoption de mineurs / I. Conditions générales

A. Adoption de mineurs

I. Conditions générales

1 Un enfant mineur peut être adopté si le ou les adoptants lui ont fourni des soins et ont pourvu à son éducation pendant au moins un an et si toutes les circonstances permettent de prévoir que l’établissement d’un lien de filiation servira le bien de l’enfant sans porter une atteinte inéquitable à la situation d’autres enfants du ou des adoptants.

2 Une adoption n’est possible que si le ou les adoptants, vu leur âge et leur situation personnelle, paraissent à même de prendre l’enfant en charge jusqu’à sa majorité.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 264a1A. Adoption de mineurs / II. Adoption conjointe

II. Adoption conjointe

1 Des époux peuvent adopter un enfant conjointement s’ils font ménage commun depuis au moins trois ans et sont tous deux âgés de 28 ans révolus.

2 Des exceptions à la condition de l’âge minimal sont possibles si le bien de l’enfant le commande. Les époux doivent motiver la demande de dérogation.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 264b1A. Adoption de mineurs / III. Adoption par une personne seule

III. Adoption par une personne seule

1 Une personne qui n’est ni mariée ni liée à une autre par un partenariat enregistré peut adopter un enfant seule si elle a 28 ans révolus.

2 Une personne mariée âgée de 28 ans révolus peut adopter un enfant seule lorsque son conjoint est devenu incapable de discernement de manière durable, qu’il est absent depuis plus de deux ans sans résidence connue ou que la séparation de corps a été prononcée depuis plus de trois ans.

3 Une personne âgée de 28 ans révolus qui est liée à une autre par un partenariat enregistré peut adopter un enfant seule lorsque son partenaire est devenu incapable de discernement de manière durable ou qu’il est absent depuis plus de deux ans sans résidence connue.

4 Des exceptions à la condition de l’âge minimal sont possibles si le bien de l’enfant le commande. L’adoptant doit motiver la demande de dérogation.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 264c1A. Adoption de mineurs / IV. Adoption de l’enfant du conjoint ou du partenaire

IV. Adoption de l’enfant du conjoint ou du partenaire

1 Une personne peut adopter l’enfant:

1.
de son conjoint;
2.
de son partenaire enregistré, ou
3.
de la personne avec laquelle elle mène de fait une vie de couple.

2 Le couple doit faire ménage commun depuis au moins trois ans.

3 Les personnes qui mènent de fait une vie de couple ne doivent être ni mariées ni liées par un partenariat enregistré.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 264d1A. Adoption de mineurs / V. Différence d’âge

V. Différence d’âge

1 La différence d’âge entre l’enfant et le ou les adoptants ne peut pas être inférieure à seize ans ni supérieure à 45 ans.

2 Des exceptions sont possibles si le bien de l’enfant le commande. Le ou les adoptants doivent motiver la demande de dérogation.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 2651A. Adoption de mineurs / VI. Consentement de l’enfant et de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant

VI. Consentement de l’enfant et de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant

1 Si l’enfant est capable de discernement, son consentement à l’adoption est requis.

2 Lorsque l’enfant est sous tutelle ou curatelle, le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant est requis, même s’il est capable de discernement.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 265a1A. Adoption de mineurs / VII. Consentement des parents / 1. Forme

VII. Consentement des parents2

1. Forme

1 L’adoption requiert le consentement du père et de la mère de l’enfant.

2 Le consentement est déclaré, par écrit ou oralement, à l’autorité de protection de l’enfant du domicile ou du lieu de séjour des parents ou de l’enfant et il doit être consigné au procès-verbal.

3 Il est valable, même s’il ne nomme pas le ou les adoptants ou si ces derniers ne sont pas encore désignés.3


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 265b1A. Adoption de mineurs / VII. Consentement des parents / 2. Moment

2. Moment

1 Le consentement ne peut être donné avant six semaines à compter de la naissance de l’enfant.

2 Il peut être révoqué dans les six semaines qui suivent sa réception.

3 S’il est renouvelé après avoir été révoqué, il est définitif.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).

Art. 265c1A. Adoption de mineurs / VII. Consentement des parents / 3. Renoncement au consentement / a. Conditions

3. Renoncement au consentement

a. Conditions

Il peut être fait abstraction du consentement d’un des parents lorsqu’il est inconnu, absent depuis longtemps sans résidence connue ou incapable de discernement de manière durable.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 265d1A. Adoption de mineurs / VII. Consentement des parents / 3. Renoncement au consentement / b. Décision

b. Décision

1 Lorsque l’enfant est accueilli en vue d’une future adoption et que le consentement d’un des parents fait défaut, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant du domicile de celui-ci décide, sur requête du tuteur ou du curateur, d’un organisme de placement ou du ou des adoptants, et en règle générale au préalable, si l’on peut faire abstraction de ce consentement.2

2 Dans les autres cas, c’est au moment de l’adoption qu’une décision sera prise à ce sujet.

3 ...3


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).
3 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), avec effet au 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 2661B. Adoption de majeurs

B. Adoption de majeurs

1 Une personne majeure peut être adoptée:

1.
si elle a besoin de l’assistance permanente d’autrui en raison d’une infirmité physique, mentale ou psychique et que le ou les adoptants lui ont fourni des soins pendant au moins un an;
2.
lorsque, durant sa minorité, le ou les adoptants lui ont fourni des soins et ont pourvu à son éducation pendant au moins un an, ou
3.
pour d’autres justes motifs, lorsqu’elle a fait ménage commun pendant au moins un an avec le ou les adoptants.

2 Au surplus, les dispositions sur l’adoption de mineurs s’appliquent par analogie, à l’exception de celle sur le consentement des parents.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 2671C. Effets / I. En général

C. Effets

I. En général

1 L’enfant acquiert le statut juridique d’un enfant du ou des parents adoptifs.

2 Les liens de filiation antérieurs sont rompus.

3 Les liens de filiation ne sont pas rompus à l’égard de la personne avec laquelle le parent adoptif:

1.
est marié;
2.
est lié par un partenariat enregistré;
3.
mène de fait une vie de couple.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 267a1C. Effets / II. Nom

II. Nom

1 Un nouveau prénom peut être donné à l’enfant mineur lors de l’adoption conjointe ou de l’adoption par une personne seule s’il existe des motifs légitimes. L’enfant est entendu personnellement et de manière appropriée au préalable par l’autorité compétente ou un tiers nommé à cet effet, pour autant que son âge ou d’autres justes motifs ne s’y opposent pas. Si l’enfant est âgé de douze ans révolus, son consentement au changement de prénom est requis.

2 Le nom de l’enfant est déterminé par les dispositions relatives aux effets de la filiation. Celles-ci s’appliquent par analogie en cas d’adoption de l’enfant par le partenaire enregistré de sa mère ou de son père.

3 L’autorité compétente peut autoriser une personne majeure qui fait l’objet d’une demande d’adoption à conserver son nom de famille s’il existe des motifs légitimes.

4 Le changement de nom d’une personne majeure qui fait l’objet d’une demande d’adoption n’affecte en rien le nom porté par des personnes tierces lorsque celui-ci dérive du nom précédemment porté par la personne majeure, sauf si lesdites personnes acceptent expressément un changement de nom.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 267b1C. Effets / III. Droit de cité

III. Droit de cité

Le droit de cité de l’enfant mineur est déterminé par les dispositions relatives aux effets de la filiation.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 2681D. Procédure / I. En général

D. Procédure

I. En général

1 L’adoption est prononcée par l’autorité cantonale compétente du domicile des parents adoptifs.

2 Les conditions de l’adoption doivent être réunies dès le dépôt de la requête.2

3 Lorsqu’une requête est déposée, la mort ou l’incapacité de discernement du ou des adoptants ne fait pas obstacle à l’adoption si la réalisation des autres conditions ne s’en trouve pas compromise.3

4 Lorsque l’enfant devient majeur après le dépôt de la requête, les dispositions sur l’adoption de mineurs restent applicables si les conditions étaient réalisées auparavant.4

5 La décision d’adoption contient toutes les indications nécessaires à l’inscription au registre de l’état civil du prénom, du nom de famille et du droit de cité de la personne adoptée.5


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).
4 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).
5 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268a1D. Procédure / II. Enquête

II. Enquête

1 L’adoption ne peut être prononcée avant qu’une enquête portant sur toutes les circonstances essentielles n’ait été faite, au besoin avec le concours d’experts.

2 L’enquête doit porter notamment sur la personnalité et la santé du ou des adoptants et de l’enfant, leurs relations, l’aptitude du ou des adoptants à éduquer l’enfant, leur situation économique, leurs mobiles et les conditions familiales, ainsi que sur l’évolution du lien nourricier.2

3 ...3


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).
3 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), avec effet au 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268abis1D. Procédure / III. Droit de l’enfant d’être entendu

III. Droit de l’enfant d’être entendu

1 L’enfant est entendu personnellement et de manière appropriée par l’autorité cantonale compétente pour la procédure d’adoption ou par un tiers nommé à cet effet, pour autant que son âge ou d’autres justes motifs ne s’y opposent pas.

2 L’audition fait l’objet d’un procès-verbal.

3 L’enfant capable de discernement peut recourir contre le refus de l’entendre.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268ater1D. Procédure / IV. Représentation de l’enfant

IV. Représentation de l’enfant

1 L’autorité cantonale compétente pour la procédure d’adoption ordonne, si nécessaire, la représentation de l’enfant et désigne une personne expérimentée dans le domaine de l’assistance et en matière juridique.

2 Elle doit le faire si l’enfant capable de discernement le demande.

3 L’enfant capable de discernement peut recourir contre le refus de désigner un représentant.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268aquater1D. Procédure / V. Prise en considération de l’opinion de membres de la parenté

V. Prise en considération de l’opinion de membres de la parenté

1 Lorsque le ou les adoptants ont des descendants, leur opinion doit être prise en considération.

2 Avant l’adoption d’une personne majeure, l’opinion des personnes suivantes doit en outre être prise en considération:

1.
conjoint ou partenaire enregistré de la personne qui fait l’objet de la demande d’adoption;
2.
parents biologiques de la personne qui fait l’objet de la demande d’adoption, et
3.
descendants de la personne qui fait l’objet de la demande d’adoption, pour autant que leur âge ou d’autres justes motifs ne s’y opposent pas.

3 La décision d’adoption doit être autant que possible communiquée à ces personnes.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268b1Dbis. Secret de l’adoption

Dbis. Secret de l’adoption

1 L’enfant adopté et les parents adoptifs ont droit au respect du secret de l’adoption.

2 Si l’enfant adopté est mineur, les informations permettant de l’identifier ou d’identifier ses parents adoptifs ne peuvent être révélées aux parents biologiques que s’il est capable de discernement et que les parents adoptifs et l’enfant y ont consenti.

3 Lorsque l’enfant adopté est devenu majeur, les informations permettant de l’identifier peuvent être révélées aux parents biologiques et à leurs descendants directs s’il y a consenti.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268c1Dter. Informations sur l’adoption, les parents biologiques et leurs descendants

Dter. Informations sur l’adoption, les parents biologiques et leurs descendants

1 Les parents adoptifs informent l’enfant qu’il a été adopté en tenant compte de son âge et de son degré de maturité.

2 L’enfant mineur a le droit d’obtenir sur ses parents biologiques les informations qui ne permettent pas de les identifier. Il n’a le droit d’obtenir des informations sur leur identité que s’il peut faire valoir un intérêt légitime.

3 L’enfant devenu majeur peut exiger en tout temps de connaître l’identité de ses parents biologiques et les autres informations les concernant. En outre, il peut demander des informations concernant les descendants directs des parents biologiques si lesdits descendants sont majeurs et y ont consenti.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 22 juin 2001 relative à la Conv. de La Haye sur l’adoption et aux mesures de protection de l’enfant en cas d’adoption internationale (RO 2002 3988; FF 1999 5129). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268d1Dquater. Service cantonal d’information et services de recherche

Dquater. Service cantonal d’information et services de recherche

1 L’autorité cantonale compétente pour la procédure d’adoption communique les informations relatives aux parents biologiques, à leurs descendants directs et à l’enfant.

2 Elle avise la personne concernée qu’elle a reçu une demande d’information à son sujet et requiert dans la mesure nécessaire son consentement à la prise de contact. Elle peut mandater un service de recherche spécialisé.

3 Si la personne concernée refuse de rencontrer l’auteur de la demande, l’autorité ou le service de recherche mandaté en avise ce dernier et l’informe des droits de la personnalité de ladite personne.

4 Les cantons désignent un service qui conseille, à leur demande, les parents biologiques, leurs descendants directs et l’enfant.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 268e1Dquinquies. Relations personnelles avec les parents biologiques

Dquinquies. Relations personnelles avec les parents biologiques

1 Les parents adoptifs et les parents biologiques peuvent convenir que ces derniers ont le droit d’entretenir avec l’enfant mineur les relations personnelles indiquées par les circonstances. Cette convention et ses modifications sont soumises à l’approbation de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant du domicile de celui-ci. L’enfant est entendu avant la prise de décision personnellement et de manière appropriée par l’autorité de protection de l’enfant ou un tiers nommé à cet effet, pour autant que son âge ou d’autres justes motifs ne s’y opposent pas. S’il est capable de discernement, son consentement est requis.

2 Si le bien de l’enfant est menacé ou en cas de divergence sur l’application de la convention, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant statue.

3 L’enfant peut refuser en tout temps le contact avec ses parents biologiques. En outre, les parents adoptifs n’ont pas le droit de fournir des informations aux parents biologiques contre son gré.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 2691E. Action en annulation / I. Motifs / 1. Défaut de consentement

E. Action en annulation

I. Motifs

1. Défaut de consentement

1 Lorsque, sans motif légal, un consentement n’a pas été demandé, les personnes habilitées à le donner peuvent attaquer l’adoption devant le juge, si le bien de l’enfant ne s’en trouve pas sérieusement compromis.

2 Ce droit n’appartient toutefois pas aux parents s’ils peuvent recourir au Tribunal fédéral contre la décision.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).

Art. 269a1E. Action en annulation / I. Motifs / 2. Autres vices

2. Autres vices

1 Lorsque l’adoption est entachée d’autres vices, d’un caractère grave, tout intéressé, notamment la commune d’origine ou de domicile, peut l’attaquer.

2 L’action est toutefois exclue, si le vice a entre-temps été écarté ou s’il ne concerne que des prescriptions de procédure.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).

Art. 269b1E. Action en annulation / II. Délai

II. Délai

L’action doit être intentée dans les six mois à compter du jour où le motif en a été découvert et, dans tous les cas, dans les deux ans depuis l’adoption.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).

Art. 269c1F. Activité d’intermédiaire en vue d’adoption

F. Activité d’intermédiaire en vue d’adoption

1 La Confédération exerce la surveillance sur l’activité d’intermédiaire en vue d’adoption.

2 Celui qui exerce l’activité d’intermédiaire à titre professionnel ou en relation avec sa profession est soumis à autorisation; le placement par l’autorité de protection de l’enfant est réservé.2

3 Le Conseil fédéral édicte les dispositions d’exécution; il règle en outre, s’agissant des conditions d’autorisation et de la surveillance, la collaboration avec les autorités cantonales compétentes en matière de placement d’enfants en vue d’adoption.

4 ...3


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 22 juin 2001 relative à la Conv. de La Haye sur l’adoption et aux mesures de protection de l’enfant en cas d’adoption internationale, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2003 (RO 2002 3988; FF 1999 5129).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 15 de la LF du 17 juin 2005 sur le TAF, avec effet au 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2006 2197; FF 2001 4000).


  Titre huitième: Des effets de la filiation10 

  Chapitre I: De la communauté entre les père et mère et les enfants11 

Art. 2701A. Nom / I. Enfant de parents mariés

A. Nom

I. Enfant de parents mariés

1 L’enfant de conjoints qui portent des noms différents acquiert celui de leurs deux noms de célibataire qu’ils ont choisi de donner à leurs enfants communs lors de la conclusion du mariage.

2 Les parents peuvent toutefois demander conjointement, dans l’année suivant la naissance du premier enfant, que l’enfant prenne le nom de célibataire de l’autre conjoint.

3 L’enfant de conjoints qui portent un nom de famille commun acquiert ce nom.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 270a1A. Nom / II. Enfant dont la mère n’est pas mariée avec le père

II. Enfant dont la mère n’est pas mariée avec le père

1 Lorsque l’autorité parentale est exercée de manière exclusive par l’un des parents, l’enfant acquiert le nom de célibataire de celui-ci. Lorsque l’autorité parentale est exercée de manière conjointe, les parents choisissent lequel de leurs deux noms de célibataire leurs enfants porteront.

2 Lorsque l’autorité parentale conjointe a été instituée après la naissance du premier enfant, les parents peuvent, dans le délai d’une année à partir de son institution, déclarer à l’officier de l’état civil que l’enfant porte le nom de célibataire de l’autre parent. Cette déclaration vaut pour tous les enfants communs, indépendamment de l’attribution de l’autorité parentale.

3 Si aucun des parents n’exerce l’autorité parentale, l’enfant acquiert le nom de célibataire de la mère.

4 Les changements d’attribution de l’autorité parentale n’ont pas d’effet sur le nom. Les dispositions relatives au changement de nom sont réservées.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité; RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 270b1A. Nom / III. Consentement de l’enfant

III. Consentement de l’enfant

Si l’enfant a douze ans révolus, il n’est plus possible de changer son nom sans son consentement.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 2711B. Droit de cité

B. Droit de cité

1 L’enfant acquiert le droit de cité cantonal et communal du parent dont il porte le nom.

2 L’enfant mineur qui prend le nom de l’autre parent acquiert en lieu et place de son droit de cité cantonal et communal antérieur celui de ce parent.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 2721C. Devoirs réciproques

C. Devoirs réciproques

Les père et mère et l’enfant se doivent mutuellement l’aide, les égards et le respect qu’exige l’intérêt de la famille.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2731D. Relations personnelles / I. Père, mère et enfant / 1. Principe

D. Relations personnelles

I. Père, mère et enfant

1. Principe

1 Le père ou la mère qui ne détient pas l’autorité parentale ou la garde ainsi que l’enfant mineur ont réciproquement le droit d’entretenir les relations personnelles indiquées par les circonstances.

2 Lorsque l’exercice ou le défaut d’exercice de ce droit est préjudiciable à l’enfant, ou que d’autres motifs l’exigent, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant peut rappeler les père et mère, les parents nourriciers ou l’enfant à leurs devoirs et leur donner des instructions.

3 Le père ou la mère peut exiger que son droit d’entretenir des relations personnelles avec l’enfant soit réglé.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 2741D. Relations personnelles / I. Père, mère et enfant / 2. Limites

2. Limites

1 Le père et la mère doivent veiller à ne pas perturber les relations de l’enfant avec l’autre parent et à ne pas rendre l’éducation plus difficile.

2 Si les relations personnelles compromettent le développement de l’enfant, si les père et mère qui les entretiennent violent leurs obligations, s’ils ne se sont pas souciés sérieusement de l’enfant ou s’il existe d’autres justes motifs, le droit d’entretenir ces relations peut leur être refusé ou retiré.

3 Si les père et mère ont consenti à l’adoption de leur enfant ou s’il peut être fait abstraction de leur consentement, le droit aux relations personnelles cesse lorsque l’enfant est placé en vue d’une adoption.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 274a1D. Relations personnelles / II. Tiers

II. Tiers

1 Dans des circonstances exceptionnelles, le droit d’entretenir des relations personnelles peut aussi être accordé à d’autres personnes, en particulier à des membres de la parenté, à condition que ce soit dans l’intérêt de l’enfant.

2 Les limites du droit aux relations personnelles des père et mère sont applicables par analogie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2751D. Relations personnelles / III. For et compétence

III. For et compétence

1 L’autorité de protection de l’enfant du domicile de l’enfant est compétente pour prendre les mesures nécessaires concernant les relations personnelles; la même compétence appartient en outre à l’autorité de protection de l’enfant du lieu de séjour de l’enfant si celle-ci a pris des mesures de protection en sa faveur ou qu’elle se prépare à en prendre.

2 Le juge qui statue sur l’autorité parentale, la garde et la contribution d’entretien selon les dispositions régissant le divorce et la protection de l’union conjugale règle également les relations personnelles.2

3 Si des mesures concernant le droit du père et de la mère n’ont pas encore été prises, les relations personnelles ne peuvent être entretenues contre la volonté de la personne qui a l’autorité parentale ou à qui la garde de l’enfant est confiée.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 275a1E. Information et renseignements

E. Information et renseignements

1 Le père ou la mère qui ne détient pas l’autorité parentale sera informé des événements particuliers survenant dans la vie de l’enfant et entendu avant la prise de décisions importantes pour le développement de celui-ci.

2 Il peut, tout comme le détenteur de l’autorité parentale, recueillir auprès de tiers qui participent à la prise en charge de l’enfant, notamment auprès de ses enseignants ou de son médecin, des renseignements sur son état et son développement.

3 Les dispositions limitant le droit aux relations personnelles avec l’enfant et la compétence en la matière s’appliquent par analogie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).


  Chapitre II: De l’obligation d’entretien des père et mère12 

Art. 2761A. En général / I. Objet et étendue

A. En général

I. Objet et étendue2

1 L’entretien est assuré par les soins, l’éducation et des prestations pécuniaires.3

2 Les père et mère contribuent ensemble, chacun selon ses facultés, à l’entretien convenable de l’enfant et assument en particulier les frais de sa prise en charge, de son éducation, de sa formation et des mesures prises pour le protéger.4

3 Les père et mère sont déliés de leur obligation d’entretien dans la mesure où l’on peut attendre de l’enfant qu’il subvienne à son entretien par le produit de son travail ou par ses autres ressources.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
4 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 276a1A. En général / II. Priorité de l’obligation d’entretien à l’égard de l’enfant mineur

II. Priorité de l’obligation d’entretien à l’égard de l’enfant mineur

1 L’obligation d’entretien envers un enfant mineur prime les autres obligations d’entretien du droit de la famille.

2 Dans des cas dûment motivés, le juge peut déroger à cette règle, en particulier pour éviter de porter préjudice à l’enfant majeur qui a droit à une contribution d’entretien.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 2771B. Durée

B. Durée

1 L’obligation d’entretien des père et mère dure jusqu’à la majorité de l’enfant.

2 Si, à sa majorité, l’enfant n’a pas encore de formation appropriée, les père et mère doivent, dans la mesure où les circonstances permettent de l’exiger d’eux, subvenir à son entretien jusqu’à ce qu’il ait acquis une telle formation, pour autant qu’elle soit achevée dans les délais normaux.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1de la LF du 7 oct. 1994, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 1093).

Art. 2781C. Parents mariés

C. Parents mariés

1 Pendant le mariage, les père et mère supportent les frais d’entretien conformément aux dispositions du droit du mariage.

2 Chaque époux est tenu d’assister son conjoint de façon appropriée dans l’accomplissement de son obligation d’entretien envers les enfants nés avant le mariage.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2791D. Action / I. Qualité pour agir

D. Action

I. Qualité pour agir2

1 L’enfant peut agir contre son père et sa mère, ou contre les deux ensemble, afin de leur réclamer l’entretien pour l’avenir et pour l’année qui précède l’ouverture de l’action.

2 et 3 ...3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).
3 Abrogés par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 280 à 2841D. Action / II. et III ...

II. et III ...


1 Abrogés par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 2851D. Action / IV. Détermination de la contribution d’entretien / 1. Contribution des père et mère

IV. Détermination de la contribution d’entretien

1. Contribution des père et mère

1 La contribution d’entretien doit correspondre aux besoins de l’enfant ainsi qu’à la situation et aux ressources de ses père et mère; il est tenu compte de la fortune et des revenus de l’enfant.

2 La contribution d’entretien sert aussi à garantir la prise en charge de l’enfant par les parents et les tiers.

3 Elle doit être versée d’avance. Le juge fixe les échéances de paiement.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 285a1D. Action / IV. Détermination de la contribution d’entretien / 2. Autres prestations destinées à l’entretien de l’enfant

2. Autres prestations destinées à l’entretien de l’enfant

1 Les allocations familiales versées à la personne tenue de pourvoir à l’entretien de l’enfant doivent être payées en sus de la contribution d’entretien.

2 Les rentes d’assurances sociales et les autres prestations destinées à l’entretien de l’enfant qui reviennent à la personne tenue de pourvoir à son entretien doivent être payées en sus de la contribution d’entretien, sauf décision contraire du juge.

3 Les rentes d’assurances sociales ou les autres prestations destinées à l’entretien de l’enfant qui reviennent par la suite au père ou à la mère en raison de son âge ou de son invalidité et en remplacement du revenu d’une activité doivent être versées à l’enfant; le montant de la contribution d’entretien versée jusqu’alors est réduit d’office en conséquence.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 2861D. Action / V. Faits nouveaux / 1. En général

V. Faits nouveaux

1. En général2

1 Le juge peut ordonner que la contribution d’entretien soit augmentée ou réduite dès que des changements déterminés interviennent dans les besoins de l’enfant, les ressources des père et mère ou le coût de la vie.

2 Si la situation change notablement, le juge modifie ou supprime la contribution d’entretien à la demande du père, de la mère ou de l’enfant.

Le juge peut contraindre les parents à verser une contribution spéciale lorsque des besoins extraordinaires imprévus de l’enfant le requièrent.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 286a1D. Action / V. Faits nouveaux / 2. Situations de déficit

2. Situations de déficit

1 Lorsqu’une convention d’entretien approuvée ou une décision relative à la contribution d’entretien indique qu’il n’a pas été possible de fixer une contribution permettant d’assurer l’entretien convenable de l’enfant, et que la situation du parent débiteur s’est améliorée de manière exceptionnelle depuis lors, l’enfant peut exiger de ce parent le versement des montants qui auraient été nécessaires pour assurer son entretien convenable pendant les cinq dernières années où l’entretien était dû.

2 La créance doit être réclamée dans le délai d’une année à partir de la connaissance de l’amélioration exceptionnelle de la situation du parent débiteur.

3 Elle passe avec tous les droits qui lui sont rattachés à l’autre parent ou à la collectivité publique, lorsque ce parent ou la collectivité publique ont assumé la part manquante de l’entretien convenable.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 2871E. Convention concernant l’obligation d’entretien / I. Contributions périodiques

E. Convention concernant l’obligation d’entretien

I. Contributions périodiques

1 Les conventions relatives aux contributions d’entretien n’obligent l’enfant qu’après avoir été approuvées par l’autorité de protection de l’enfant.

2 Les contributions d’entretien fixées par convention peuvent être modifiées, à moins qu’une telle modification n’ait été exclue avec l’approbation de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant.

3 Si la convention est conclue dans une procédure judiciaire, le juge est compétent pour l’approbation.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 287a1E. Convention concernant l’obligation d’entretien / II. Contenu de la convention relative aux contributions d’entretien

II. Contenu de la convention relative aux contributions d’entretien

La convention qui fixe les contributions d’entretien indique:

a.
les éléments du revenu et de la fortune de chaque parent et de chaque enfant pris en compte dans le calcul;
b.
le montant attribué à chaque enfant;
c.
le montant nécessaire pour assurer l’entretien convenable de chaque enfant;
d.
si et dans quelle mesure les contributions doivent être adaptées aux variations du coût de la vie.

1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 2881E. Convention concernant l’obligation d’entretien / III. Indemnité unique

III. Indemnité unique2

1 Si l’intérêt de l’enfant le justifie, les parties peuvent convenir que l’obligation d’entretien sera exécutée par le versement d’une indemnité unique.

2 La convention ne lie l’enfant que:

1.
lorsqu’elle a été approuvée par l’autorité de protection de l’enfant ou, si elle a été conclue dans une procédure judiciaire, par le juge, et
2.
lorsque l’indemnité a été versée à l’office qu’ils ont désigné.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 2891F. Paiement / I. Créancier

F. Paiement

I. Créancier

1 Les contributions d’entretien sont dues à l’enfant et sont versées durant sa minorité à son représentant légal ou au parent qui en assume la garde, sauf si le juge en décide autrement.2

2 La prétention à la contribution d’entretien passe avec tous les droits qui lui sont rattachés à la collectivité publique lorsque celle-ci assume l’entretien de l’enfant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 2901F. Paiement / II. Exécution / 1. Aide au recouvrement

II. Exécution

1. Aide au recouvrement

1 Lorsque le père ou la mère néglige son obligation d’entretien, un office spécialisé désigné par le droit cantonal aide de manière adéquate et gratuitement l’enfant ou l’autre parent qui le demande à obtenir l’exécution des prestations d’entretien.

2 Le Conseil fédéral définit les prestations d’aide au recouvrement.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 2911F. Paiement / II. Exécution / 2. Avis aux débiteurs

2. Avis aux débiteurs

Lorsque les père et mère négligent de prendre soin de l’enfant, le juge peut prescrire à leurs débiteurs d’opérer tout ou partie de leurs paiements entre les mains du représentant légal de l’enfant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2921F. Paiement / III. Sûretés

III. Sûretés

Lorsque les père et mère persistent à négliger leur obligation d’entretien ou qu’il y a lieu d’admettre qu’ils se préparent à fuir, dilapident leur fortune ou la font disparaître, le juge peut les astreindre à fournir des sûretés appropriées pour les contributions d’entretien futures.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2931G. Droit public

G. Droit public

1 Le droit public détermine, sous réserve de la dette alimentaire des parents, à qui incombent les frais de l’entretien lorsque ni les père et mère ni l’enfant ne peuvent les assumer.

2 Le droit public règle en outre le versement d’avances pour l’entretien de l’enfant lorsque les père et mère ne satisfont pas à leur obligation d’entretien.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2941H. Parents nourriciers

H. Parents nourriciers

1 À moins que le contraire n’ait été convenu ou ne résulte clairement des circonstances, les parents nourriciers ont droit à une rémunération équitable.

2 La gratuité est présumée lorsqu’il s’agit d’enfants de proches parents ou d’enfants accueillis en vue de leur adoption.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 2951J. Droits de la mère non mariée

J. Droits de la mère non mariée

1 La mère non mariée peut demander au père de l’enfant ou à ses héritiers, au plus tard dans l’année qui suit la naissance, de l’indemniser:2

1.
des frais de couches;
2.
des frais d’entretien, au moins pour quatre semaines avant et au moins pour huit semaines après la naissance;
3.
des autres dépenses occasionnées par la grossesse et l’accouchement, y compris le premier trousseau de l’enfant.

2 Pour des raisons d’équité, le juge peut allouer tout ou partie de ces indemnités, même si la grossesse a pris fin prématurément.

3 Dans la mesure où les circonstances le justifient, les prestations de tiers auxquelles la mère a droit en vertu de la loi ou d’un contrat sont imputées sur ces indemnités.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).


  Chapitre III: De l’autorité parentale13 

Art. 2961A. En général

A. En général

1 L’autorité parentale sert le bien de l’enfant.

2 L’enfant est soumis, pendant sa minorité, à l’autorité parentale conjointe de ses père et mère.

3 Les parents mineurs ou sous curatelle de portée générale n’ont pas l’autorité parentale. Celle-ci revient aux parents lorsqu’ils deviennent majeurs. Lorsque la curatelle de portée générale est levée, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant statue sur l’attribution de l’autorité parentale selon le bien de l’enfant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 2971Abis. Décès d’un parent

Abis. Décès d’un parent

1 En cas de décès de l’un des détenteurs de l’autorité parentale conjointe, l’autorité parentale revient au survivant.

2 En cas de décès du parent qui a l’exercice exclusif de l’autorité parentale, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant attribue l’autorité parentale au parent survivant ou nomme un tuteur selon le bien de l’enfant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 2981Ater. Divorce et autres procédures matrimoniales

Ater. Divorce et autres procédures matrimoniales

1 Dans le cadre d’une procédure de divorce ou d’une procédure de protection de l’union conjugale, le juge confie à l’un des parents l’autorité parentale exclusive si le bien de l’enfant le commande.

2 Lorsqu’aucun accord entre les parents ne semble envisageable sur ce point, le juge peut aussi se limiter à statuer sur la garde de l’enfant ainsi que sur les relations personnelles ou la participation de chaque parent à sa prise en charge.

2bis Lorsqu’il statue sur la garde de l’enfant, les relations personnelles ou la participation de chaque parent à la prise en charge de l’enfant, le juge tient compte du droit de l’enfant d’entretenir régulièrement des relations personnelles avec ses deux parents.2

2ter Lorsque l’autorité parentale est exercée conjointement, le juge examine, selon le bien de l’enfant, la possibilité de la garde alternée, si le père, la mère ou l’enfant la demande.3

3 Il invite l’autorité de protection de l’enfant à nommer un tuteur si aucun des deux parents n’est apte à assumer l’exercice de l’autorité parentale.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
3 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 298a1Aquater. Reconnaissance et jugement de paternité / I. Déclaration commune des parents

Aquater. Reconnaissance et jugement de paternité

I. Déclaration commune des parents

1 Si la mère n’est pas mariée avec le père et que le père reconnaît l’enfant, ou si le lien de filiation est constaté par décision de justice et que l’autorité parentale conjointe n’est pas encore instituée au moment de la décision de justice, les parents obtiennent l’autorité parentale conjointe sur la base d’une déclaration commune.

2 Les parents confirment dans la déclaration commune:

1.
qu’ils sont disposés à assumer conjointement la responsabilité de l’enfant;
2.
qu’ils se sont entendus sur la garde de l’enfant, sur les relations personnelles ou la participation de chaque parent à sa prise en charge ainsi que sur la contribution d’entretien.

3 Avant de déposer leur déclaration, les parents peuvent demander conseil à l’autorité de protection de l’enfant.

4 Si les parents déposent leur déclaration en même temps que la reconnaissance de l’enfant, la déclaration est reçue par l’officier de l’état civil. S’ils la déposent plus tard, elle est reçue par l’autorité de protection de l’enfant du lieu de domicile de l’enfant.

5 Jusqu’au dépôt de la déclaration, l’enfant est soumis à l’autorité parentale exclusive de la mère.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 298b1Aquater. Reconnaissance et jugement de paternité / II. Décision de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant

II. Décision de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant

1 Lorsqu’un parent refuse de déposer une déclaration commune, l’autre parent peut s’adresser à l’autorité de protection de l’enfant du lieu de domicile de l’enfant.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’enfant institue l’autorité parentale conjointe à moins que le bien de l’enfant ne commande que la mère reste seule détentrice de l’autorité parentale ou que cette dernière soit attribuée exclusivement au père.

3 Lorsqu’elle statue sur l’autorité parentale, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant règle également les autres points litigieux. L’action alimentaire, à intenter devant le juge compétent, est réservée; dans ce cas, le juge statue aussi sur l’autorité parentale et sur les autres points concernant le sort des enfants.2

3bis Lorsqu’elle statue sur la garde de l’enfant, les relations personnelles ou la participation de chaque parent à la prise en charge de l’enfant, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant tient compte du droit de l’enfant d’entretenir régulièrement des relations personnelles avec ses deux parents.3

3ter Lorsque l’autorité parentale est exercée conjointement, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant examine, selon le bien de l’enfant, la possibilité de la garde alternée, si le père, la mère ou l’enfant la demande.4

4 Si la mère est mineure ou sous curatelle de portée générale, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant attribue l’autorité parentale au père ou nomme un tuteur selon le bien de l’enfant.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
2 Nouvelle teneur de la phrase selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
3 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
4 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 298c1Aquater. Reconnaissance et jugement de paternité / III. Action en paternité

III. Action en paternité

Lorsqu’un jugement constatant la paternité a été rendu, le juge prononce l’autorité parentale conjointe à moins que le bien de l’enfant ne commande que la mère reste seule détentrice de l’autorité parentale ou que celle-ci soit attribuée exclusivement au père.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 298d1Aquater. Reconnaissance et jugement de paternité / IV. Faits nouveaux

IV. Faits nouveaux

1 À la requête de l’un des parents ou de l’enfant ou encore d’office, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant modifie l’attribution de l’autorité parentale lorsque des faits nouveaux importants le commandent pour le bien de l’enfant.

2 Elle peut aussi se limiter à statuer sur la garde de l’enfant, les relations personnelles ou la participation de chaque parent à sa prise en charge.

3 L’action en modification de la contribution d’entretien, à intenter devant le juge compétent, est réservée; dans ce cas, le juge modifie au besoin la manière dont l’autorité parentale et les autres points concernant le sort des enfants ont été réglés.2


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 298e1Aquinquies. Faits nouveaux après l’adoption de l’enfant du partenaire en cas de vie de couple de fait

Aquinquies. Faits nouveaux après l’adoption de l’enfant du partenaire en cas de vie de couple de fait

Si une personne a adopté un enfant alors qu’elle mène de fait une vie de couple avec la mère ou le père de celui-ci et que des faits nouveaux importants surviennent, la disposition sur les faits nouveaux en cas de reconnaissance et de jugement de paternité s’applique par analogie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 2991Asexies. Beaux-parents

Asexies. Beaux-parents 2

Chaque époux est tenu d’assister son conjoint de façon appropriée dans l’exercice de l’autorité parentale à l’égard des enfants de l’autre et de le représenter lorsque les circonstances l’exigent.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 3001Asepties. Parents nourriciers

Asepties. Parents nourriciers 2

1 Lorsqu’un enfant est confié aux soins de tiers, ceux-ci, sous réserve d’autres mesures, représentent les père et mère dans l’exercice de l’autorité parentale en tant que cela est indiqué pour leur permettre d’accomplir correctement leur tâche.

2 Les parents nourriciers seront entendus avant toute décision importante.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 3011B. Contenu / I. En général

B. Contenu

I. En général

1 Les père et mère déterminent les soins à donner à l’enfant, dirigent son éducation en vue de son bien et prennent les décisions nécessaires, sous réserve de sa propre capacité.

1bis Le parent qui a la charge de l’enfant peut prendre seul:

1.
les décisions courantes ou urgentes;
2.
d’autres décisions, si l’autre parent ne peut être atteint moyennant un effort raisonnable.2

2 L’enfant doit obéissance à ses père et mère, qui lui accordent la liberté d’organiser sa vie selon son degré de maturité et tiennent compte autant que possible de son avis pour les affaires importantes.

3 L’enfant ne peut quitter la communauté domestique sans l’assentiment de ses père et mère; il ne peut pas non plus leur être enlevé sans cause légitime.

4 Les père et mère choisissent le prénom de l’enfant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 301a1B. Contenu / II. Détermination du lieu de résidence

II. Détermination du lieu de résidence

1 L’autorité parentale inclut le droit de déterminer le lieu de résidence de l’enfant.

2 Un parent exerçant conjointement l’autorité parentale ne peut modifier le lieu de résidence de l’enfant qu’avec l’accord de l’autre parent ou sur décision du juge ou de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant dans les cas suivants:

a.
le nouveau lieu de résidence se trouve à l’étranger;
b.
le déménagement a des conséquences importantes pour l’exercice de l’autorité parentale par l’autre parent et pour les relations personnelles.

3 Un parent exerçant seul l’autorité parentale qui souhaite modifier le lieu de résidence de l’enfant doit informer en temps utile l’autre parent.

4 Un parent qui souhaite modifier son propre lieu de résidence a le même devoir d’information.

5 Si besoin est, les parents s’entendent, dans le respect du bien de l’enfant, pour adapter le régime de l’autorité parentale, la garde, les relations personnelles et la contribution d’entretien. S’ils ne peuvent pas s’entendre, la décision appartient au juge ou à l’autorité de protection de l’enfant.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 3021B. Contenu / III. Éducation

III. Éducation2

1 Les père et mère sont tenus d’élever l’enfant selon leurs facultés et leurs moyens et ils ont le devoir de favoriser et de protéger son développement corporel, intellectuel et moral.

2 Ils doivent donner à l’enfant, en particulier à celui qui est atteint de déficiences physiques ou mentales, une formation générale et professionnelle appropriée, correspondant autant que possible à ses goûts et à ses aptitudes.

3 À cet effet, ils doivent collaborer de façon appropriée avec l’école et, lorsque les circonstances l’exigent, avec les institutions publiques et d’utilité publique de protection de la jeunesse.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 3031B. Contenu / IV. Éducation religieuse

IV. Éducation religieuse2

1 Les père et mère disposent de l’éducation religieuse de l’enfant.

2 Sont nulles toutes conventions qui limiteraient leur liberté à cet égard.

3 L’enfant âgé de 16 ans révolus a le droit de choisir lui-même sa confession.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 3041B. Contenu / V. Représentation / 1. À l’égard de tiers / a. En général

V. Représentation

1. À l’égard de tiers

a. En général2

1 Les père et mère sont, dans les limites de leur autorité parentale, les représentants légaux de leurs enfants à l’égard des tiers.

2 Lorsque les père et mère sont tous deux détenteurs de l’autorité parentale, les tiers de bonne foi peuvent présumer que chaque parent agit avec le consentement de l’autre.3

3 Les père et mère ne peuvent procéder à des cautionnements ni créer des fondations ou effectuer des donations au nom de l’enfant, à l’exception des présents d’usage.4


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
4 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3051B. Contenu / V. Représentation / 1. À l’égard de tiers / b. Statut juridique de l’enfant

b. Statut juridique de l’enfant2

1 L’enfant capable de discernement soumis à l’autorité parentale peut s’engager par ses propres actes dans les limites prévues par le droit des personnes et exercer ses droits strictement personnels.3

2 L’enfant qui s’oblige est tenu sur ses propres biens, sans égard aux droits d’administration et de jouissance des père et mère.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3061B. Contenu / V. Représentation / 2. À l’égard de la famille

2. À l’égard de la famille

1 L’enfant soumis à l’autorité parentale peut, s’il est capable de discernement, agir pour la famille du consentement de ses père et mère; dans ce cas, il n’est pas tenu lui-même, mais il oblige ses père et mère.

2 Si les père et mère sont empêchés d’agir ou si, dans une affaire, leurs intérêts entrent en conflit avec ceux de l’enfant, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant nomme un curateur ou prend elle-même les mesures nécessaires.2

3 L’existence d’un conflit d’intérêts entraîne de plein droit la fin des pouvoirs des père et mère pour l’affaire en cause.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3071C. Protection de l’enfant / I. Mesures protectrices

C. Protection de l’enfant

I. Mesures protectrices

1 L’autorité de protection de l’enfant prend les mesures nécessaires pour protéger l’enfant si son développement est menacé et que les père et mère n’y remédient pas d’eux-mêmes ou soient hors d’état de le faire.

2 Elle y est également tenue dans les mêmes circonstances à l’égard des enfants placés chez des parents nourriciers ou vivant, dans d’autres cas, hors de la communauté familiale de leur père et mère.

3 Elle peut, en particulier, rappeler les père et mère, les parents nourriciers ou l’enfant à leurs devoirs, donner des indications ou instructions relatives au soin, à l’éducation et à la formation de l’enfant, et désigner une personne ou un office qualifiés qui aura un droit de regard et d’information.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3081C. Protection de l’enfant / II. Curatelle

II. Curatelle2

1 Lorsque les circonstances l’exigent, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant nomme un curateur qui assiste les père et mère de ses conseils et de son appui dans la prise en charge de l’enfant.3

2 Elle peut conférer au curateur certains pouvoirs tels que celui de représenter l’enfant pour établir sa filiation paternelle et pour faire valoir sa créance alimentaire et d’autres droits, ainsi que la surveillance des relations personnelles.4

3 L’autorité parentale peut être limitée en conséquence.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
4 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 3091

1 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), avec effet au 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 3101C. Protection de l’enfant / III. Retrait du droit de déterminer le lieu de résidence

III. Retrait du droit de déterminer le lieu de résidence2

1 Lorsqu’elle ne peut éviter autrement que le développement de l’enfant ne soit compromis, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant retire l’enfant aux père et mère ou aux tiers chez qui il se trouve et le place de façon appropriée.

2 À la demande des père et mère ou de l’enfant, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant prend les mêmes mesures lorsque les rapports entre eux sont si gravement atteints que le maintien de l’enfant dans la communauté familiale est devenu insupportable et que, selon toute prévision, d’autres moyens seraient inefficaces.

3 Lorsqu’un enfant a vécu longtemps chez des parents nourriciers, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant peut interdire aux père et mère de le reprendre s’il existe une menace sérieuse que son développement soit ainsi compromis.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 3111C. Protection de l’enfant / IV. Retrait de l’autorité parentale / 1. D’office

IV. Retrait de l’autorité parentale

1. D’office2

1 Si d’autres mesures de protection de l’enfant sont demeurées sans résultat ou paraissent d’emblée insuffisantes, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant prononce le retrait de l’autorité parentale:3

1. 4
lorsque, pour cause d’inexpérience, de maladie, d’infirmité, d’absence, de violence ou d’autres motifs analogues, les père et mère ne sont pas en mesure d’exercer correctement l’autorité parentale;
2.
lorsque les père et mère ne se sont pas souciés sérieusement de l’enfant ou qu’ils ont manqué gravement à leurs devoirs envers lui.

2 Si le père et la mère sont déchus de l’autorité parentale, un tuteur est nommé à l’enfant.

3 Lorsque le contraire n’a pas été ordonné expressément, les effets du retrait s’étendent aux enfants nés après qu’il a été prononcé.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
4 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 3121C. Protection de l’enfant / IV. Retrait de l’autorité parentale / 2. Avec le consentement des parents

2. Avec le consentement des parents2

L’autorité de protection de l’enfant prononce le retrait de l’autorité parentale:3

1.
lorsque les père et mère le demandent pour de justes motifs;
2.
lorsqu’ils ont donné leur consentement à l’adoption future de l’enfant par des tiers anonymes.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3131C. Protection de l’enfant / V. Faits nouveaux

V. Faits nouveaux

1 Lors de faits nouveaux, les mesures prises pour protéger l’enfant doivent être adaptées à la nouvelle situation.

2 L’autorité parentale ne peut pas être rétablie avant un an à compter du retrait.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3141C. Protection de l’enfant / VI. Procédure / 1. En général

VI. Procédure

1. En général

1 Les dispositions de la procédure devant l’autorité de protection de l’adulte sont applicables par analogie.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’enfant peut, si elle l’estime utile, exhorter les parents de l’enfant à tenter une médiation.

3 Lorsque l’autorité de protection de l’enfant institue une curatelle, elle doit mentionner dans le dispositif de la décision les tâches du curateur et éventuellement les limites apportées à l’exercice de l’autorité parentale.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 314a1C. Protection de l’enfant / VI. Procédure / 2. Audition de l’enfant

2. Audition de l’enfant

1 L’enfant est entendu personnellement, de manière appropriée, par l’autorité de protection de l’enfant ou le tiers qui en a été chargé, à moins que son âge ou d’autres justes motifs ne s’y opposent.

2 Seuls les résultats de l’audition qui sont nécessaires à la décision sont consignés au procès-verbal. Les parents en sont informés.

3 L’enfant capable de discernement peut attaquer le refus d’être entendu par voie de recours.


1 Introduit par le ch. II de la LF du 6 oct. 1978 (RO 1980 31; FF 1977 III 1). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 314abis1C. Protection de l’enfant / VI. Procédure / 3. Représentation de l’enfant

3. Représentation de l’enfant

1 L’autorité de protection de l’enfant ordonne, si nécessaire, la représentation de l’enfant et désigne un curateur expérimenté en matière d’assistance et dans le domaine juridique.

2 Elle examine si elle doit instituer une curatelle, en particulier lorsque:

1.
la procédure porte sur le placement de l’enfant;
2.
les personnes concernées déposent des conclusions différentes relatives à l’attribution de l’autorité parentale ou à des questions importantes concernant les relations personnelles avec l’enfant.

3 Le curateur peut faire des propositions et agir en justice.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 314b1C. Protection de l’enfant / VI. Procédure / 4. Placement dans une institution fermée ou dans un établissement psychiatrique

4. Placement dans une institution fermée ou dans un établissement psychiatrique

1 Lorsque l’enfant est placé dans une institution fermée ou dans un établissement psychiatrique, les dispositions de la protection de l’adulte sur le placement à des fins d’assistance sont applicables par analogie.

2 Si l’enfant est capable de discernement, il peut lui-même en appeler au juge contre la décision de placement.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 314c1C. Protection de l’enfant / VI. Procédure / 5. Droit d’aviser l’autorité

5. Droit d’aviser l’autorité

1 Toute personne a le droit d’aviser l’autorité de protection de l’enfant que l’intégrité physique, psychique ou sexuelle d’un enfant semble menacée.

2 Les personnes soumises au secret professionnel en vertu du code pénal2 ont elles aussi le droit d’aviser l’autorité lorsque l’intérêt de l’enfant le justifie. Cette disposition ne s’applique pas aux auxiliaires soumis au secret professionnel en vertu du code pénal.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Protection de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 2947; FF 2015 3111).
2 RS 311.0

Art. 314d1C. Protection de l’enfant / VI. Procédure / 6. Obligation d’aviser l’autorité

6. Obligation d’aviser l’autorité

1 Les personnes ci-après, dans la mesure où elles ne sont pas soumises au secret professionnel en vertu du code pénal2, sont tenues d’aviser l’autorité de protection de l’enfant lorsque des indices concrets existent que l’intégrité physique, psychique ou sexuelle de l’enfant est menacée et qu’elles ne peuvent pas remédier à la situation dans le cadre de leur activité:

1.
les professionnels de la médecine, de la psychologie, des soins, de la prise en charge et du service social, les éducateurs, les enseignants, les intervenants du domaine de la religion et du domaine du sport, lorsqu’ils sont en contact régulier avec les enfants dans l’exercice de leur activité professionnelle;
2.
les personnes ayant connaissance d’un tel cas dans l’exercice de leur fonction officielle.

2 Toute personne qui transmet l’annonce à son supérieur hiérarchique est réputée satisfaire à l’obligation d’aviser l’autorité.

3 Les cantons peuvent prévoir d’autres obligations d’aviser l’autorité.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Protection de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 2947; FF 2015 3111).
2 RS 311.0

Art. 314e1C. Protection de l’enfant / VI. Procédure / 7. Collaboration et assistance administrative

7. Collaboration et assistance administrative

1 Les personnes parties à la procédure et les tiers sont tenus de collaborer à l’établissement des faits. L’autorité de protection de l’enfant prend les mesures nécessaires pour sauvegarder les intérêts dignes de protection. En cas de nécessité, elle ordonne que l’obligation de collaborer soit accomplie sous la contrainte.

2 Les personnes soumises au secret professionnel en vertu du code pénal2 ont le droit de collaborer sans se faire délier au préalable du secret professionnel. Cette disposition ne s’applique pas aux auxiliaires soumis au secret professionnel en vertu du code pénal.

3 Les personnes soumises au secret professionnel en vertu du code pénal sont tenues de collaborer si l’intéressé les y a autorisées ou que l’autorité supérieure ou l’autorité de surveillance les a déliées du secret professionnel à la demande de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant. L’art. 13 de la loi du 23 juin 2000 sur les avocats3 est réservé.

4 Les autorités administratives et les tribunaux fournissent les documents nécessaires, établissent les rapports officiels et communiquent les informations requises, à moins que des intérêts dignes de protection ne s’y opposent.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Protection de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 2947; FF 2015 3111).
2 RS 311.0
3 RS 935.61

Art. 3151C. Protection de l’enfant / VII. For et compétence / 1. En général

VII. For et compétence

1. En général2

1 Les mesures de protection de l’enfant sont ordonnées par l’autorité de protection de l’enfant du domicile de l’enfant.3

2 Lorsque l’enfant vit chez des parents nourriciers ou, d’une autre manière, hors de la communauté familiale des père et mère, ou lorsqu’il y a péril en la demeure, les autorités du lieu où se trouve l’enfant sont également compétentes.

3 Lorsque cette autorité ordonne une mesure de protection de l’enfant, elle en avise l’autorité du domicile.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 315a1C. Protection de l’enfant / VII. For et compétence / 2. Dans une procédure matrimoniale / a. Compétence du juge

2. Dans une procédure matrimoniale

a. Compétence du juge

1 Le juge chargé de régler les relations des père et mère avec l’enfant selon les dispositions régissant le divorce ou la protection de l’union conjugale prend également les mesures nécessaires à la protection de ce dernier et charge l’autorité de protection de l’enfant de leur exécution.2

2 Le juge peut aussi modifier, en fonction des circonstances, les mesures de protection de l’enfant qui ont déjà été prises.

3 L’autorité de protection de l’enfant demeure toutefois compétente pour:3

1.
poursuivre une procédure de protection de l’enfant introduite avant la procédure judiciaire;
2.
prendre les mesures immédiatement nécessaires à la protection de l’enfant lorsqu’il est probable que le juge ne pourra pas les prendre à temps.

1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 315b1C. Protection de l’enfant / VII. For et compétence / 2. Dans une procédure matrimoniale / b. Modification des mesures judiciaires

b. Modification des mesures judiciaires

1 Le juge est compétent pour modifier les mesures judiciaires relatives à l’attribution et à la protection des enfants:

1.
dans la procédure de divorce;
2.
dans la procédure en modification du jugement de divorce, selon les dispositions régissant le divorce;
3.
dans la procédure en modification des mesures protectrices de l’union conjugale; les dispositions qui régissent le divorce s’appliquent par analogie.

2 Dans les autres cas, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant est compétente.2


1 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3161C. Protection de l’enfant / VIII. Surveillance des enfants placés chez des parents nourriciers

VIII. Surveillance des enfants placés chez des parents nourriciers

1 Le placement d’enfants auprès de parents nourriciers est soumis à l’autorisation et à la surveillance de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant ou d’un autre office du domicile des parents nourriciers, désigné par le droit cantonal.

1bis Lorsqu’un enfant est placé en vue de son adoption, une autorité cantonale unique est compétente.2

2 Le Conseil fédéral édicte des prescriptions d’exécution.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 22 juin 2001 relative à la Conv. de La Haye sur l’adoption et aux mesures de protection de l’enfant en cas d’adoption internationale, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2003 (RO 2002 3988; FF 1999 5129).

Art. 3171C. Protection de l’enfant / IX. Collaboration dans la protection de la jeunesse

IX. Collaboration dans la protection de la jeunesse

Les cantons assurent, par des dispositions appropriées, une collaboration efficace des autorités et services chargés des mesures de droit civil pour la protection de l’enfance, du droit pénal des mineurs et d’autres formes d’aide à la jeunesse.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Chapitre IV: Des biens des enfants14 

Art. 3181A. Administration

A. Administration

1 Les père et mère administrent les biens de l’enfant aussi longtemps qu’ils ont l’autorité parentale.

2 En cas de décès de l’un des parents, le parent survivant est tenu de remettre un inventaire des biens de l’enfant à l’autorité de protection de l’enfant.2

3 Lorsque l’autorité de protection de l’enfant le juge opportun au vu du genre ou de l’importance des biens de l’enfant et de la situation personnelle des père et mère, elle ordonne l’établissement d’un inventaire ou la remise périodique de comptes et de rapports.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3191B. Utilisation des revenus

B. Utilisation des revenus

1 Les père et mère peuvent utiliser les revenus des biens de l’enfant pour son entretien, son éducation et sa formation et, dans la mesure où cela est équitable, pour les besoins du ménage.

2 Le surplus passe dans les biens de l’enfant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3201C. Prélèvements sur les biens de l’enfant

C. Prélèvements sur les biens de l’enfant

1 Les versements en capital, dommages-intérêts et autres prestations semblables peuvent être utilisés par tranches pour l’entretien de l’enfant, autant que les besoins courants l’exigent.

2 Lorsque cela est nécessaire pour subvenir à l’entretien, à l’éducation ou à la formation de l’enfant, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant peut permettre aux père et mère de prélever sur les autres biens de l’enfant la contribution qu’elle fixera.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3211D. Biens libérés / I. Biens remis par stipulation

D. Biens libérés

I. Biens remis par stipulation

1 Les père et mère ne peuvent pas disposer des revenus des libéralités faites à l’enfant pour que le montant en soit placé à intérêt ou sur carnet d’épargne ou sous la condition expresse que les père et mère ne les utiliseront pas.

2 Ces libéralités ne sont soustraites à l’administration des père et mère que si le disposant l’a expressément ordonné lorsqu’il les a faites.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3221D. Biens libérés / II. Réserve héréditaire

II. Réserve héréditaire

1 La réserve de l’enfant peut aussi, par disposition pour cause de mort, être soustraite à l’administration des père et mère.

2 Si le disposant remet l’administration à un tiers, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant peut astreindre celui-ci à présenter périodiquement un rapport et des comptes.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3231D. Biens libérés / III. Produit du travail, fonds professionnel

III. Produit du travail, fonds professionnel

1 L’enfant a l’administration et la jouissance du produit de son travail et de ceux de ses biens que les père et mère lui remettent pour exercer une profession ou une industrie.

2 Lorsque l’enfant vit en ménage commun avec ses père et mère, ceux-ci peuvent exiger qu’il contribue équitablement à son entretien.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3241E. Protection des biens de l’enfant / I. Mesures protectrices

E. Protection des biens de l’enfant

I. Mesures protectrices

1 Si une administration diligente n’est pas suffisamment assurée, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant prend les mesures nécessaires pour protéger les biens de l’enfant.

2 Elle peut, en particulier, donner des instructions concernant l’administration et, lorsque les comptes et le rapport périodiques ne suffisent pas, exiger une consignation ou des sûretés.

3 Pour la procédure, le for et la compétence, les dispositions sur la protection de l’enfant sont applicables par analogie.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3251E. Protection des biens de l’enfant / II. Retrait de l’administration

II. Retrait de l’administration

1 S’il n’y a pas d’autre façon d’empêcher que les biens de l’enfant soient mis en péril, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant en confie l’administration à un curateur.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’enfant agit de même lorsque les biens de l’enfant qui ne sont pas administrés par les père et mère sont mis en péril.

3 S’il est à craindre que les revenus des biens de l’enfant ou les montants prélevés sur ces biens ne soient pas utilisés conformément à la loi, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant peut également en confier l’administration à un curateur.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 3261F. Fin de l’administration / I. Restitution

F. Fin de l’administration

I. Restitution

Dès que l’autorité parentale ou l’administration des père et mère prend fin, les biens sont remis, selon un décompte final, à l’enfant majeur ou à son représentant légal.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3271F. Fin de l’administration / II. Responsabilité

II. Responsabilité

1 Les père et mère répondent, de la même manière qu’un mandataire, de la restitution des biens de l’enfant.

2 Ils doivent le prix de vente des biens aliénés de bonne foi.

3 Ils ne sont tenus à aucune indemnité pour les prélèvements qu’ils étaient en droit de faire pour l’enfant ou pour le ménage.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).


  Chapitre V:15  Des mineurs sous tutelle

Art. 327a A. Principe

A. Principe

L’autorité de protection de l’enfant nomme un tuteur lorsque l’enfant n’est pas soumis à l’autorité parentale.

Art. 327b B. Statut juridique / I. De l’enfant

B. Statut juridique

I. De l’enfant

Le statut juridique de l’enfant sous tutelle est le même que celui de l’enfant soumis à l’autorité parentale.

Art. 327c B. Statut juridique / II. Du tuteur

II. Du tuteur

1 Le tuteur a les mêmes droits que les parents.

2 Les dispositions de la protection de l’adulte, notamment celles sur la nomination du curateur, l’exercice de la curatelle et le concours de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte sont applicables par analogie.

3 Lorsque l’enfant est placé dans une institution fermée ou dans un établissement psychiatrique, les dispositions de la protection de l’adulte sur le placement à des fins d’assistance sont applicables par analogie.


  Titre neuvième: De la famille

  Chapitre I: De la dette alimentaire

Art. 3281A. Débiteurs

A. Débiteurs

1 Chacun, pour autant qu’il vive dans l’aisance, est tenu de fournir des aliments à ses parents en ligne directe ascendante et descendante, lorsque, à défaut de cette assistance, ils tomberaient dans le besoin.

2 L’obligation d’entretien des père et mère et du conjoint ou du partenaire enregistré est réservée.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).

Art. 329 B. Demande d’aliments

B. Demande d’aliments

1 L’action alimentaire est intentée contre les débiteurs dans l’ordre de leurs droits de succession; elle tend aux prestations nécessaires à l’entretien du demandeur et compatibles avec les ressources de l’autre partie.

1bis L’action alimentaire est exclue lorsque la situation de besoin trouve son origine dans une limitation de l’activité lucrative due à la prise en charge des enfants.1

2 Si en raison de circonstances particulières, il paraît inéquitable d’exiger d’un débiteur qu’il s’acquitte de ses obligations, le juge peut réduire ou supprimer la dette alimentaire.2

3 Les dispositions concernant l’action alimentaire de l’enfant et le transfert de son droit à l’entretien à la collectivité publique sont applicables par analogie.3


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 330 C. Entretien des enfants trouvés

C. Entretien des enfants trouvés

1 L’enfant trouvé est entretenu par la commune dans laquelle il a été incorporé.

2 Lorsque son origine vient à être constatée, la commune peut exiger de ceux des parents qui lui doivent des aliments et, subsidiairement, de la corporation publique tenue de l’assister, le remboursement des dépenses faites pour son entretien.


  Chapitre II: De l’autorité domestique

Art. 331 A. Conditions

A. Conditions

1 L’autorité domestique sur les personnes vivant en ménage commun appartient à celui qui est le chef de la famille en vertu de la loi, d’un contrat ou de l’usage.

2 Cette autorité s’étend sur tous ceux qui font ménage commun en qualité de parents ou d’alliés, ou aux termes d’un contrat individuel de travail en qualité de travailleurs ou dans une qualité analogue.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II art. 2 ch. 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1971, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1972 (RO 1971 1461; FF 1967 II 249).

Art. 332 B. Effets / I. Ordre intérieur

B. Effets

I. Ordre intérieur1

1 Les personnes vivant en ménage commun sont soumises à l’ordre de la maison, qui doit être établi de manière à tenir équitablement compte des intérêts de chacun.

2 Elles jouissent, en particulier, de la liberté qui leur est nécessaire pour leur éducation, leur profession ou leurs besoins religieux.

3 Le chef de famille veille à la conservation et à la sûreté de leurs effets avec la même diligence que s’il s’agissait des siens propres.


1 Dans les textes allemand «Hausordnung und Fürsorge» et italien «ordine interno et cura».

Art. 333 B. Effets / II. Responsabilité

II. Responsabilité

1 Le chef de la famille est responsable du dommage causé par les mineurs, par les personnes sous curatelle de portée générale ou par les personnes atteintes d’une déficience mentale ou de troubles psychiques placés sous son autorité, à moins qu’il ne justifie les avoir surveillés de la manière usitée et avec l’attention commandée par les circonstances.1

2 Il est tenu de pourvoir à ce que les personnes de la maison atteintes d’une déficience mentale ou de troubles psychiques ne s’exposent pas ni n’exposent autrui à péril ou dommage.2

3 Il s’adresse au besoin à l’autorité compétente pour provoquer les mesures nécessaires.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 3341B. Effets / III. Créance des enfants et petits-enfants / 1. Conditions

III. Créance des enfants et petits-enfants

1. Conditions

1 Les enfants ou petits-enfants majeurs qui vivent en ménage commun avec leurs parents ou grands-parents et leur consacrent leur travail ou leurs revenus ont droit de ce chef à une indemnité équitable.

2 En cas de contestation, le juge décide du montant, de la garantie et des modalités du paiement de cette indemnité.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 6 oct. 1972, en vigueur depuis le 15 fév. 1973 (RO 1973 93; FF 1970 I 813, 1971 I 753).

Art. 334bis1B. Effets / III. Créance des enfants et petits-enfants / 2. Réclamation

2. Réclamation

1 L’indemnité équitable due aux enfants ou aux petits-enfants peut être réclamée dès le décès du bénéficiaire des prestations correspondantes.

2 Elle peut être réclamée déjà du vivant du débiteur lorsqu’une saisie ou une faillite est prononcée contre lui, lorsque le ménage commun qu’il formait avec le créancier prend fin ou lorsque l’entreprise passe en d’autres mains.

3 Elle est imprescriptible, mais elle doit être réclamée au plus tard lors du partage de la succession du débiteur.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 6 oct. 1972, en vigueur depuis le 15 fév. 1973 (RO 1973 93; FF 1970 I 813, 1971 I 753).


  Chapitre III: Des biens de famille

Art. 335 A. Fondations de famille

A. Fondations de famille

1 Des fondations de famille peuvent être créées conformément aux règles du droit des personnes ou des successions; elles seront destinées au paiement des frais d’éducation, d’établissement et d’assistance des membres de la famille ou à des buts analogues.

2 La constitution de fidéicommis de famille est prohibée.

Art. 336 B. Indivision / I. Constitution / 1. Conditions

B. Indivision

I. Constitution

1. Conditions

Des parents peuvent convenir de créer une indivision, soit en y laissant tout ou partie d’un héritage, soit en y mettant d’autres biens.

Art. 337 B. Indivision / I. Constitution / 2. Forme

2. Forme

L’indivision ne peut être constituée valablement que par un acte authentique portant la signature de tous les indivis ou de leurs représentants.

Art. 338 B. Indivision / II. Durée

II. Durée

1 L’indivision est convenue à terme ou pour un temps indéterminé.

2 Elle peut, dans ce dernier cas, être dénoncée par chaque indivis moyennant un avertissement préalable de six mois.

3 S’il s’agit d’une exploitation agricole, la dénonciation n’est admissible que pour le terme usuel du printemps ou de l’automne.

Art. 339 B. Indivision / III. Effets / 1. Exploitation commune

III. Effets

1. Exploitation commune

1 Les membres de l’indivision la font valoir en commun.

2 Leurs droits sont présumés égaux.

3 Les indivis ne peuvent, tant que dure l’indivision, ni demander leur part, ni en disposer.

Art. 340 B. Indivision / III. Effets / 2. Direction et représentation / a. En général

2. Direction et représentation

a. En général

1 L’indivision est administrée en commun par tous les ayants droit.

2 Chacun d’eux peut faire des actes de simple administration sans le concours des autres.

Art. 341 B. Indivision / III. Effets / 2. Direction et représentation / b. Compétences du chef de l’indivision

b. Compétences du chef de l’indivision

1 Les indivis peuvent désigner l’un d’eux comme chef de l’indivision.

2 Le chef de l’indivision la représente dans tous les actes qui la concernent et il dirige l’exploitation.

3 Le fait que les autres indivis sont exclus du droit de représenter l’indivision n’est opposable aux tiers de bonne foi que si le représentant unique a été inscrit au registre du commerce.

Art. 342 B. Indivision / III. Effets / 3. Biens communs et biens personnels

3. Biens communs et biens personnels

1 Les biens compris dans l’indivision sont la propriété commune des indivis.

2 Les membres de l’indivision sont solidairement tenus des dettes.

3 Les autres biens d’un indivis et ceux qu’il acquiert pendant l’indivision, à titre de succession ou à quelque autre titre gratuit, rentrent, sauf stipulation contraire, dans son patrimoine personnel.

Art. 343 B. Indivision / IV. Dissolution / 1. Cas

IV. Dissolution

1. Cas

L’indivision cesse:

1.
par convention ou dénonciation;
2.
par l’expiration du temps pour lequel elle a été constituée, sauf le cas de prolongation tacite;
3.
lorsque la part d’un indivis est réalisée après saisie;
4.
par la faillite d’un indivis;
5.
à la demande d’un indivis fondée sur de justes motifs.
Art. 344 B. Indivision / IV. Dissolution / 2. Dénonciation, insolvabilité, mariage

2. Dénonciation, insolvabilité, mariage

1 Si l’indivision est dénoncée, si un indivis est déclaré en faillite ou si, sa part ayant été saisie, la réalisation en est requise, les autres membres de l’indivision peuvent la continuer après avoir liquidé les droits de leur coindivis ou désintéressé ses créanciers.

2 L’indivis qui se marie peut demander la liquidation de ses droits, sans dénonciation préalable.

Art. 345 B. Indivision / IV. Dissolution / 3. Décès

3. Décès

1 Lors du décès d’un indivis, ses héritiers, s’ils ne sont pas eux-mêmes membres de l’indivision, ne peuvent demander que la liquidation de ses droits.

2 Si le défunt laisse pour héritiers des descendants, ceux-ci peuvent être admis en son lieu et place dans l’indivision, du consentement des autres indivis.

Art. 346 B. Indivision / IV. Dissolution / 4. Partage

4. Partage

1 Le partage de l’indivision a lieu ou les parts de liquidation s’établissent sur les biens communs, dans l’état où ils se trouvaient lorsque la cause de dissolution s’est produite.

2 Ni le partage, ni la liquidation ne peuvent être provoqués en temps inopportun.

Art. 347 B. Indivision / V. Indivision en participation / 1. Conditions

V. Indivision en participation

1. Conditions

1 L’exploitation de l’indivision et sa représentation peuvent être conventionnellement remises à un seul indivis, qui sera tenu de verser annuellement à chacun des autres une part du bénéfice net.

2 Sauf stipulation contraire, cette part est déterminée équitablement, d’après le rendement moyen des biens indivis au cours d’une période suffisamment longue et en tenant compte des prestations du gérant.

Art. 348 B. Indivision / V. Indivision en participation / 2. Dissolution

2. Dissolution

1 Lorsque le gérant n’exploite pas convenablement les biens communs ou ne remplit pas ses engagements envers ses coindivis, ceux-ci peuvent requérir la dissolution.

2 Chacun des indivis peut, pour de justes motifs, demander au juge qu’il l’autorise à participer à l’exploitation du gérant, en tenant compte des dispositions relatives au partage successoral.

3 Les règles concernant l’indivision avec exploitation commune sont d’ailleurs applicables à l’indivision en participation.

Art. 349 à 3581

1 Abrogés par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, avec effet au 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 3591

1 Abrogé par le ch. II 21 de la LF du 15 déc. 1989 relative à l’approbation d’actes législatifs des cantons par la Confédération, avec effet au 1er fév. 1991 (RO 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1293).


  Troisième partie:16  De la protection de l’adulte

  Titre dixième: Des mesures personnelles anticipées et des mesures appliquées de plein droit

  Chapitre I: Des mesures personnelles anticipées

  Sous-chapitre I: Du mandat pour cause d’inaptitude

Art. 360 A. Principe

A. Principe

1 Toute personne ayant l’exercice des droits civils (mandant) peut charger une personne physique ou morale (mandataire) de lui fournir une assistance personnelle, de gérer son patrimoine ou de la représenter dans les rapports juridiques avec les tiers au cas où elle deviendrait incapable de discernement.

2 Le mandant définit les tâches qu’il entend confier au mandataire et peut prévoir des instructions sur la façon de les exécuter.

3 Il peut prévoir des solutions de remplacement pour le cas où le mandataire déclinerait le mandat, ne serait pas apte à le remplir ou le résilierait.

Art. 361 B. Constitution et révocation / I. Constitution

B. Constitution et révocation

I. Constitution

1 Le mandat pour cause d’inaptitude est constitué en la forme olographe ou authentique.

2 Le mandat olographe doit être écrit en entier, daté et signé de la main du mandant.

3 Le mandant peut demander à l’office de l’état civil d’inscrire la constitution et le lieu de dépôt du mandat dans la banque de données centrale. Le Conseil fédéral édicte les dispositions nécessaires, notamment en matière d’accès aux données.

Art. 362 B. Constitution et révocation / II. Révocation

II. Révocation

1 Le mandant peut révoquer le mandat en tout temps dans l’une des formes prévues pour sa constitution.

2 Il peut également le révoquer par la suppression de l’acte.

3 Le mandat pour cause d’inaptitude qui ne révoque pas expressément un mandat précédent le remplace dans la mesure où il n’en constitue pas indubitablement le complément.

Art. 363 C. Constatation de la validité et acceptation

C. Constatation de la validité et acceptation

1 Lorsque l’autorité de protection de l’adulte apprend qu’une personne est devenue incapable de discernement et qu’elle ignore si celle-ci a constitué un mandat pour cause d’inaptitude, elle s’informe auprès de l’office de l’état civil.

2 S’il existe un mandat pour cause d’inaptitude, elle examine:

1.
si le mandat a été constitué valablement;
2.
si les conditions de sa mise en oeuvre sont remplies;
3.
si le mandataire est apte à le remplir;
4.
si elle doit prendre d’autres mesures de protection de l’adulte.

3 Si le mandataire accepte le mandat, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte le rend attentif aux devoirs découlant des règles du code des obligations1 sur le mandat et lui remet un document qui fait état de ses compétences.


1 RS 220

Art. 364 D. Interprétation et complètement

D. Interprétation et complètement

Le mandataire peut demander à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte d’interpréter le mandat et de le compléter sur des points accessoires.

Art. 365 E. Exécution

E. Exécution

1 Le mandataire représente le mandant dans les limites du mandat pour cause d’inaptitude et s’acquitte de ses tâches avec diligence et selon les règles du code des obligations1 sur le mandat.

2 S’il y a lieu de régler des affaires qui ne sont pas couvertes par le mandat ou s’il existe un conflit d’intérêts entre le mandant et le mandataire, celui-ci sollicite immédiatement l’intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.

3 En cas de conflit d’intérêts, les pouvoirs du mandataire prennent fin de plein droit.


1 RS 220

Art. 366 F. Rémunération et frais

F. Rémunération et frais

1 Lorsque le mandat pour cause d’inaptitude ne contient pas de disposition sur la rémunération du mandataire, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte fixe une indemnisation appropriée si cela apparaît justifié au regard de l’ampleur des tâches à accomplir ou si les prestations du mandataire font habituellement l’objet d’une rémunération.

2 La rémunération et le remboursement des frais justifiés sont à la charge du mandant.

Art. 367 G. Résiliation

G. Résiliation

1 Le mandataire peut résilier le mandat en tout temps, en informant par écrit l’autorité de protection de l’adulte, moyennant un délai de deux mois.

2 Il peut le résilier avec effet immédiat pour de justes motifs.

Art. 368 H. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

H. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

1 Si les intérêts du mandant sont compromis ou risquent de l’être, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte prend les mesures nécessaires d’office ou sur requête d’un proche du mandant.

2 Elle peut notamment donner des instructions au mandataire, lui ordonner d’établir un inventaire des biens du mandant, de présenter périodiquement des comptes et des rapports ou lui retirer ses pouvoirs en tout ou en partie.

Art. 369 I. Recouvrement de la capacité de discernement

I. Recouvrement de la capacité de discernement

1 Le mandat pour cause d’inaptitude cesse de produire ses effets de plein droit en cas de rétablissement de la capacité de discernement du mandant.

2 Si les intérêts du mandant sont de ce fait compromis, le mandataire est tenu de continuer à remplir les tâches qui lui ont été confiées jusqu’à ce que le mandant puisse défendre ses intérêts lui-même.

3 Le mandant est lié par les opérations que le mandataire fait avant d’avoir connaissance de l’extinction de son mandat, comme si le mandat produisait encore ses effets.


  Sous-chapitre II: Des directives anticipées du patient

Art. 370 A. Principe

A. Principe

1 Toute personne capable de discernement peut déterminer, dans des directives anticipées, les traitements médicaux auxquels elle consent ou non au cas où elle deviendrait incapable de discernement.

2 Elle peut également désigner une personne physique qui sera appelée à s’entretenir avec le médecin sur les soins médicaux à lui administrer et à décider en son nom au cas où elle deviendrait incapable de discernement. Elle peut donner des instructions à cette personne.

3 Elle peut prévoir des solutions de remplacement pour le cas où la personne désignée déclinerait le mandat, ne serait pas apte à le remplir ou le résilierait.

Art. 371 B. Constitution et révocation

B. Constitution et révocation

1 Les directives anticipées sont constituées en la forme écrite; elles doivent être datées et signées par leur auteur.

2 L’auteur de directives anticipées peut faire inscrire la constitution et le lieu du dépôt des directives sur sa carte d’assuré. Le Conseil fédéral édicte les dispositions nécessaires, notamment en matière d’accès aux données.

3 La disposition régissant la révocation du mandat pour cause d’inaptitude s’applique par analogie aux directives anticipées.

Art. 372 C. Survenance de l’incapacité de discernement

C. Survenance de l’incapacité de discernement

1 Lorsqu’un médecin traite un patient incapable de discernement et qu’il ignore si celui-ci a rédigé des directives anticipées, il s’informe de leur existence en consultant la carte d’assuré du patient. Les cas d’urgence sont réservés.

2 Le médecin respecte les directives anticipées du patient, sauf si elles violent des dispositions légales, ou si des doutes sérieux laissent supposer qu’elles ne sont pas l’expression de sa libre volonté ou qu’elles ne correspondent pas à sa volonté présumée dans la situation donnée.

3 Le cas échéant, le médecin consigne dans le dossier médical du patient les motifs pour lesquels il n’a pas respecté les directives anticipées.

Art. 373 D. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

D. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

1 Tout proche du patient peut en appeler par écrit à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte lorsque:

1.
les directives anticipées du patient ne sont pas respectées;
2.
les intérêts du patient sont compromis ou risquent de l’être;
3.
les directives anticipées ne sont pas l’expression de la libre volonté du patient.

2 La disposition régissant l’intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte dans le cadre du mandat pour cause d’inaptitude s’applique par analogie aux directives anticipées.


  Chapitre II: Des mesures appliquées de plein droit aux personnes incapables de discernement

  Sous-chapitre I: De la représentation par le conjoint ou par le partenaire enregistré

Art. 374 A. Conditions et étendue du pouvoir de représentation

A. Conditions et étendue du pouvoir de représentation

1 Lorsqu’une personne frappée d’une incapacité de discernement n’a pas constitué de mandat pour cause d’inaptitude et que sa représentation n’est pas assurée par une curatelle, son conjoint ou son partenaire enregistré dispose du pouvoir légal de représentation s’il fait ménage commun avec elle ou s’il lui fournit une assistance personnelle régulière.

2 Le pouvoir de représentation porte:

1.
sur tous les actes juridiques habituellement nécessaires pour satisfaire les besoins de la personne incapable de discernement;
2.
sur l’administration ordinaire de ses revenus et de ses autres biens;
3.
si nécessaire, sur le droit de prendre connaissance de sa correspondance et de la liquider.

3 Pour les actes juridiques relevant de l’administration extraordinaire des biens, le conjoint ou le partenaire enregistré doit requérir le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.

Art. 375 B. Exercice du pouvoir de représentation

B. Exercice du pouvoir de représentation

Les dispositions du code des obligations1 sur le mandat sont applicables par analogie à l’exercice du pouvoir de représentation.


1 RS 220

Art. 376 C. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

C. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

1 S’il existe des doutes sur la réalisation des conditions de la représentation, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte statue sur le pouvoir de représentation; le cas échéant, elle remet au conjoint ou au partenaire enregistré un document qui fait état de ses compétences.

2 Si les intérêts de la personne incapable de discernement sont compromis ou risquent de l’être, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte retire, en tout ou en partie, le pouvoir de représentation au conjoint ou au partenaire enregistré ou institue une curatelle, d’office ou sur requête d’un proche de la personne incapable de discernement.


  Sous-chapitre II: De la représentation dans le domaine médical

Art. 377 A. Plan de traitement

A. Plan de traitement

1 Lorsqu’une personne incapable de discernement doit recevoir des soins médicaux sur lesquels elle ne s’est pas déterminée dans des directives anticipées, le médecin traitant établit le traitement avec la personne habilitée à la représenter dans le domaine médical.

2 Le médecin traitant renseigne la personne habilitée à représenter la personne incapable de discernement sur tous les aspects pertinents du traitement envisagé, notamment sur ses raisons, son but, sa nature, ses modalités, ses risques et effets secondaires, son coût, ainsi que sur les conséquences d’un défaut de traitement et sur l’existence d’autres traitements.

3 Dans la mesure du possible, la personne incapable de discernement est associée au processus de décision.

4 Le plan de traitement doit être adapté à l’évolution de la médecine et à l’état de la personne concernée.

Art. 378 B. Représentants

B. Représentants

1 Sont habilités à représenter la personne incapable de discernement et à consentir ou non aux soins médicaux que le médecin envisage de lui administrer ambulatoirement ou en milieu institutionnel, dans l’ordre:

1.
la personne désignée dans les directives anticipées ou dans un mandat pour cause d’inaptitude;
2.
le curateur qui a pour tâche de la représenter dans le domaine médical;
3.
son conjoint ou son partenaire enregistré, s’il fait ménage commun avec elle ou s’il lui fournit une assistance personnelle régulière;
4.
la personne qui fait ménage commun avec elle et qui lui fournit une assistance personnelle régulière;
5.
ses descendants, s’ils lui fournissent une assistance personnelle régulière;
6.
ses père et mère, s’ils lui fournissent une assistance personnelle régulière;
7.
ses frères et soeurs, s’ils lui fournissent une assistance personnelle régulière.

2 En cas de pluralité des représentants, le médecin peut, de bonne foi, présumer que chacun d’eux agit avec le consentement des autres.

3 En l’absence de directives anticipées donnant des instructions, le représentant décide conformément à la volonté présumée et aux intérêts de la personne incapable de discernement.

Art. 379 C. Cas d’urgence

C. Cas d’urgence

En cas d’urgence, le médecin administre les soins médicaux conformément à la volonté présumée et aux intérêts de la personne incapable de discernement.

Art. 380 D. Traitement des troubles psychiques

D. Traitement des troubles psychiques

Le traitement des troubles psychiques d’une personne incapable de discernement placée dans un établissement psychiatrique est régi par les règles sur le placement à des fins d’assistance.

Art. 381 E. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

E. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte institue une curatelle de représentation lorsqu’il n’y a pas de personne habilitée à représenter la personne incapable de discernement ou qu’aucune personne habilitée à le faire n’accepte de la représenter.

2 Elle désigne le représentant ou institue une curatelle de représentation lorsque:

1.
le représentant ne peut être déterminé clairement;
2.
les représentants ne sont pas tous du même avis;
3.
les intérêts de la personne incapable de discernement sont compromis ou risquent de l’être.

3 Elle agit d’office ou à la demande du médecin ou d’une autre personne proche de la personne incapable de discernement.


  Sous-chapitre III: De la personne résidant dans un établissement médico—social

Art. 382 A. Contrat d’assistance

A. Contrat d’assistance

1 L’assistance apportée à une personne incapable de discernement résidant pendant une période prolongée dans un établissement médico-social ou dans un home (institutions) doit faire l’objet d’un contrat écrit qui établit les prestations à fournir par l’institution et leur coût.

2 Les souhaits de la personne concernée doivent, dans la mesure du possible, être pris en considération lors de la détermination des prestations à fournir par l’institution.

3 Les dispositions sur la représentation dans le domaine médical s’appliquent par analogie à la représentation de la personne incapable de discernement lors de la conclusion, de la modification ou de la résiliation du contrat d’assistance.

Art. 383 B. Mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement / I. Conditions

B. Mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement

I. Conditions

1 L’institution ne peut restreindre la liberté de mouvement d’une personne incapable de discernement que si des mesures moins rigoureuses ont échoué ou apparaissent a priori insuffisantes et que cette restriction vise:

1.
à prévenir un grave danger menaçant la vie ou l’intégrité corporelle de la personne concernée ou d’un tiers;
2.
à faire cesser une grave perturbation de la vie communautaire.

2 La personne concernée doit être informée au préalable de la nature de la mesure, de ses raisons, de sa durée probable, ainsi que du nom de la personne qui prendra soin d’elle durant cette période. Le cas d’urgence est réservé.

3 La mesure doit être levée dès que possible; dans tous les cas, sa justification sera reconsidérée à intervalles réguliers.

Art. 384 B. Mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement / II. Protocole et devoir d’information

II. Protocole et devoir d’information

1 Toute mesure limitant la liberté de mouvement fait l’objet d’un protocole. Celui-ci contient notamment le nom de la personne ayant décidé la mesure ainsi que le but, le type et la durée de la mesure.

2 La personne habilitée à représenter la personne concernée dans le domaine médical doit être avisée de la mesure; elle peut prendre connaissance du protocole en tout temps.

3 Les personnes exerçant la surveillance de l’institution sont également habilitées à prendre connaissance du protocole.

Art. 385 B. Mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement / III. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

III. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

1 La personne concernée ou l’un de ses proches peut, en tout temps, en appeler par écrit à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte au siège de l’institution contre la mesure limitant la liberté de mouvement.

2 Si l’autorité de protection de l’adulte constate que la mesure n’est pas conforme à la loi, elle la modifie, la lève, ou ordonne une autre mesure. Si nécessaire, elle en informe l’autorité de surveillance de l’institution.

3 Toute requête sollicitant une décision de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte doit lui être transmise immédiatement.

Art. 386 C. Protection de la personnalité

C. Protection de la personnalité

1 L’institution protège la personnalité de la personne incapable de discernement et favorise autant que possible ses relations avec des personnes de l’extérieur.

2 Lorsque la personne concernée est privée de toute assistance extérieure, l’institution en avise l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.

3 Le libre choix du médecin est garanti, à moins que de justes motifs ne s’y opposent.

Art. 387 D. Surveillance des institutions

D. Surveillance des institutions

Les cantons assujettissent les institutions qui accueillent des personnes incapables de discernement à une surveillance, à moins que celle-ci ne soit déjà prescrite par une réglementation fédérale.


  Titre onzième: Des mesures prises par l’autorité

  Chapitre I: Des principes généraux

Art. 388 A. But

A. But

1 Les mesures prises par l’autorité de protection de l’adulte garantissent l’assistance et la protection de la personne qui a besoin d’aide.

2 Elles préservent et favorisent autant que possible leur autonomie.

Art. 389 B. Subsidiarité et proportionnalité

B. Subsidiarité et proportionnalité

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte ordonne une mesure:

1.
lorsque l’appui fourni à la personne ayant besoin d’aide par les membres de sa famille, par d’autres proches ou par des services privés ou publics ne suffit pas ou semble a priori insuffisant;
2.
lorsque le besoin d’assistance et de protection de la personne incapable de discernement n’est pas ou pas suffisamment garanti par une mesure personnelle anticipée ou par une mesure appliquée de plein droit.

2 Une mesure de protection de l’adulte n’est ordonnée par l’autorité que si elle est nécessaire et appropriée.


  Chapitre II: Des curatelles

  Sous-chapitre I: Dispositions générales

Art. 390 A. Conditions

A. Conditions

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte institue une curatelle lorsqu’une personne majeure:

1.
est partiellement ou totalement empêchée d’assurer elle-même la sauvegarde de ses intérêts en raison d’une déficience mentale, de troubles psychiques ou d’un autre état de faiblesse qui affecte sa condition personnelle;
2.
est, en raison d’une incapacité passagère de discernement ou pour cause d’absence, empêchée d’agir elle-même et qu’elle n’a pas désigné de représentant pour des affaires qui doivent être réglées.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte prend en considération la charge que la personne concernée représente pour ses proches et pour les tiers ainsi que leur besoin de protection.

3 Elle institue la curatelle d’office ou à la requête de la personne concernée ou d’un proche.

Art. 391 B. Tâches

B. Tâches

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte détermine, en fonction des besoins de la personne concernée, les tâches à accomplir dans le cadre de la curatelle.

2 Ces tâches concernent l’assistance personnelle, la gestion du patrimoine et les rapports juridiques avec les tiers.

3 Sans le consentement de la personne concernée, le curateur ne peut prendre connaissance de sa correspondance ni pénétrer dans son logement qu’avec l’autorisation expresse de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.

Art. 392 C. Renonciation à instituer une curatelle

C. Renonciation à instituer une curatelle

Lorsque l’institution d’une curatelle paraît manifestement disproportionnée, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte peut:

1.
assumer elle-même les tâches à accomplir, notamment consentir à un acte juridique;
2.
donner mandat à un tiers d’accomplir des tâches particulières;
3.
désigner une personne ou un office qualifiés qui auront un droit de regard et d’information dans certains domaines.

  Sous-chapitre II: Types de curatelle

Art. 393 A. Curatelle d’accompagnement

A. Curatelle d’accompagnement

1 Une curatelle d’accompagnement est instituée, avec le consentement de la personne qui a besoin d’aide, lorsque celle-ci doit être assistée pour accomplir certains actes.

2 La curatelle d’accompagnement ne limite pas l’exercice des droits civils de la personne concernée.

Art. 394 B. Curatelle de représentation / I. En général

B. Curatelle de représentation

I. En général

1 Une curatelle de représentation est instituée lorsque la personne qui a besoin d’aide ne peut accomplir certains actes et doit de ce fait être représentée.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte peut limiter en conséquence l’exercice des droits civils de la personne concernée.

3 Même si la personne concernée continue d’exercer tous ses droits civils, elle est liée par les actes du curateur.

Art. 395 B. Curatelle de représentation / II. Gestion du patrimoine

II. Gestion du patrimoine

1 Lorsque l’autorité de protection de l’adulte institue une curatelle de représentation ayant pour objet la gestion du patrimoine, elle détermine les biens sur lesquels portent les pouvoirs du curateur. Elle peut soumettre à la gestion tout ou partie des revenus ou de la fortune, ou l’ensemble des biens.

2 À moins que l’autorité de protection de l’adulte n’en décide autrement, les pouvoirs de gestion du curateur s’étendent à l’épargne constituée sur la base des revenus et du produit de la fortune gérée.

3 Sans limiter l’exercice des droits civils de la personne concernée, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte peut la priver de la faculté d’accéder à certains éléments de son patrimoine.

4 Si l’autorité de protection de l’adulte prive la personne concernée de la faculté de disposer d’un immeuble, elle en fait porter la mention au registre foncier.

Art. 396 C. Curatelle de coopération

C. Curatelle de coopération

1 Une curatelle de coopération est instituée lorsque, pour sauvegarder les intérêts d’une personne qui a besoin d’aide, il est nécessaire de soumettre certains de ses actes à l’exigence du consentement du curateur.

2 L’exercice des droits civils de la personne concernée est limité de plein droit par rapport à ces actes.

Art. 397 D. Combinaison de curatelles

D. Combinaison de curatelles

Les curatelles d’accompagnement, de représentation et de coopération peuvent être combinées.

Art. 398 E. Curatelle de portée générale

E. Curatelle de portée générale

1 Une curatelle de portée générale est instituée lorsqu’une personne a particulièrement besoin d’aide, en raison notamment d’une incapacité durable de discernement.

2 Elle couvre tous les domaines de l’assistance personnelle, de la gestion du patrimoine et des rapports juridiques avec les tiers.

3 La personne concernée est privée de plein droit de l’exercice des droits civils.


  Sous-chapitre III: De la fin de la curatelle

Art. 399

1 La curatelle prend fin de plein droit au décès de la personne concernée.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte lève la curatelle si elle n’est plus justifiée, d’office ou à la requête de la personne concernée ou de l’un de ses proches.


  Sous-chapitre IV: Du curateur

Art. 400 A. Nomination / I. Conditions générales

A. Nomination

I. Conditions générales

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte nomme curateur une personne physique qui possède les aptitudes et les connaissances nécessaires à l’accomplissement des tâches qui lui seront confiées, qui dispose du temps nécessaire et qui les exécute en personne. Elle peut nommer plusieurs personnes si des circonstances particulières le justifient.

2 La personne nommée ne peut l’être qu’avec son accord.1

3 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte veille à ce que le curateur reçoive les instructions, les conseils et le soutien dont il a besoin pour accomplir ses tâches.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 29 sept. 2017, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 2801; FF 2017 1661 3011).

Art. 401 A. Nomination / II. Souhaits de la personne concernée ou de ses proches

II. Souhaits de la personne concernée ou de ses proches

1 Lorsque la personne concernée propose une personne comme curateur, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte accède à son souhait pour autant que la personne proposée remplisse les conditions requises et accepte la curatelle.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte prend autant que possible en considération les souhaits des membres de la famille ou d’autres proches.

3 Elle tient compte autant que possible des objections que la personne concernée soulève à la nomination d’une personne déterminée.

Art. 402 A. Nomination / III. Curatelle confiée à plusieurs personnes

III. Curatelle confiée à plusieurs personnes

1 Lorsque la curatelle est confiée à plusieurs personnes, celles-ci l’exercent en commun ou selon les attributions confiées par l’autorité de protection de l’adulte à chacune d’elles.

2 Plusieurs personnes ne peuvent toutefois être chargées sans leur consentement d’exercer en commun la même curatelle.

Art. 403 B. Empêchement et conflit d’intérêts

B. Empêchement et conflit d’intérêts

1 Si le curateur est empêché d’agir ou si, dans une affaire, ses intérêts entrent en conflit avec ceux de la personne concernée, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte nomme un substitut ou règle l’affaire elle-même.

2 L’existence d’un conflit d’intérêts entraîne de plein droit la fin des pouvoirs du curateur dans l’affaire en cause.

Art. 404 C. Rémunération et frais

C. Rémunération et frais

1 Le curateur a droit à une rémunération appropriée et au remboursement des frais justifiés; ces sommes sont prélevées sur les biens de la personne concernée. S’il s’agit d’un curateur professionnel, elles échoient à son employeur.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte fixe la rémunération. Elle tient compte en particulier de l’étendue et de la complexité des tâches confiées au curateur.

3 Les cantons édictent les dispositions d’exécution et règlent la rémunération et le remboursement des frais lorsque les sommes afférentes ne peuvent être prélevées sur les biens de la personne concernée.


  Sous-chapitre V: De l’exercice de la curatelle

Art. 405 A. Entrée en fonction du curateur

A. Entrée en fonction du curateur

1 Le curateur réunit les informations nécessaires à l’accomplissement de sa tâche et prend personnellement contact avec la personne concernée.

2 Si la curatelle englobe la gestion du patrimoine, il dresse sans délai, en collaboration avec l’autorité de protection de l’adulte, un inventaire des valeurs patrimoniales qu’il doit gérer.

3 Si les circonstances le justifient, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte peut ordonner un inventaire public. Cet inventaire a envers les créanciers les mêmes effets que le bénéfice d’inventaire en matière de succession.

4 Les tiers sont tenus de fournir toutes les informations requises pour l’établissement de l’inventaire.

Art. 406 B. Relations avec la personne concernée

B. Relations avec la personne concernée

1 Le curateur sauvegarde les intérêts de la personne concernée, tient compte, dans la mesure du possible, de son avis et respecte sa volonté d’organiser son existence comme elle l’entend.

2 Il s’emploie à établir une relation de confiance avec elle, à prévenir une détérioration de son état de faiblesse ou à en atténuer les effets.

Art. 407 C. Autonomie de la personne concernée

C. Autonomie de la personne concernée

La personne concernée capable de discernement, même privée de l’exercice des droits civils, peut s’engager par ses propres actes dans les limites prévues par le droit des personnes et exercer ses droits strictement personnels.

Art. 408 D. Gestion du patrimoine / I. Tâches

D. Gestion du patrimoine

I. Tâches

1 Le curateur chargé de la gestion du patrimoine administre les biens de la personne concernée avec diligence et effectue les actes juridiques liés à la gestion.

2 Il peut notamment:

1.
assurer la réception, avec effet libératoire, des prestations dues par les tiers;
2.
régler les dettes dans la mesure où cela est indiqué;
3.
représenter, si nécessaire, la personne concernée pour ses besoins ordinaires.

3 Le Conseil fédéral édicte les dispositions relatives au placement et à la préservation des biens.

Art. 409 D. Gestion du patrimoine / II. Montants à disposition

II. Montants à disposition

Le curateur met à la libre disposition de la personne concernée des montants appropriés qui sont prélevés sur les biens de celle-ci.

Art. 410 D. Gestion du patrimoine / III. Comptes

III. Comptes

1 Le curateur tient les comptes et les soumet à l’approbation de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte aux périodes fixées par celle-ci, mais au moins tous les deux ans.

2 Il renseigne la personne concernée sur les comptes et lui en remet une copie à sa demande.

Art. 411 E. Rapport d’activité

E. Rapport d’activité

1 Aussi souvent qu’il est nécessaire, mais au moins tous les deux ans, le curateur remet à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte un rapport sur son activité et sur l’évolution de la situation de la personne concernée.

2 Dans la mesure du possible, il associe la personne concernée à l’élaboration du rapport; il lui en remet une copie à sa demande.

Art. 412 F. Affaires particulières

F. Affaires particulières

1 Le curateur ne peut, au nom de la personne concernée, procéder à des cautionnements ni créer des fondations ou effectuer des donations, à l’exception des présents d’usage.

2 Dans la mesure du possible, il s’abstient d’aliéner tout bien qui revêt une valeur particulière pour la personne concernée ou pour sa famille.

Art. 413 G. Devoir de diligence et obligation de conserver le secret

G. Devoir de diligence et obligation de conserver le secret

1 Le curateur accomplit ses tâches avec le même devoir de diligence qu’un mandataire au sens du code des obligations1.

2 Il est tenu au secret, à moins que des intérêts prépondérants ne s’y opposent.

3 Lorsque l’exécution des tâches qui lui sont confiées l’exige, il doit informer des tiers de l’existence d’une curatelle.


1 RS 220

Art. 414 H. Faits nouveaux

H. Faits nouveaux

Le curateur informe sans délai l’autorité de protection de l’adulte des faits nouveaux qui justifient la modification ou la levée de la curatelle.


  Sous-chapitre VI: Du concours de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

Art. 415 A. Examen des comptes et des rapports

A. Examen des comptes et des rapports

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte approuve ou refuse les comptes; au besoin, elle exige des rectifications.

2 Elle examine les rapports du curateur et exige au besoin des compléments.

3 Elle prend, si nécessaire, les mesures propres à sauvegarder les intérêts de la personne concernée.

Art. 416 B. Actes nécessitant le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte / I. De par la loi

B. Actes nécessitant le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

I. De par la loi

1 Lorsque le curateur agit au nom de la personne concernée, il doit requérir le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte pour:

1.
liquider le ménage et résilier le contrat de bail du logement de la personne concernée;
2.
conclure ou résilier des contrats de longue durée relatifs au placement de la personne concernée;
3.
accepter ou répudier une succession lorsqu’une déclaration expresse est nécessaire, et conclure ou résilier un pacte successoral ou un contrat de partage successoral;
4.
acquérir ou aliéner des immeubles, les grever de gages ou d’autres droits réels ou construire au-delà des besoins de l’administration ordinaire;
5.
acquérir, aliéner ou mettre en gage d’autres biens, ou les grever d’usufruit si ces actes vont au-delà de l’administration ou de l’exploitation ordinaires;
6.
contracter ou accorder un prêt important et souscrire des engagements de change;
7.
conclure ou résilier des contrats dont l’objet est une rente viagère, un entretien viager ou une assurance sur la vie, sauf s’ils sont conclus dans le cadre de la prévoyance professionnelle liée à un contrat de travail;
8.
acquérir ou liquider une entreprise, ou entrer dans une société engageant une responsabilité personnelle ou un capital important;
9.
faire une déclaration d’insolvabilité, plaider, transiger, compromettre ou conclure un concordat, sous réserve des mesures provisoires prises d’urgence par le curateur.

2 Le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte n’est pas nécessaire si la personne concernée est capable de discernement, que l’exercice de ses droits civils n’est pas restreint par la curatelle et qu’elle donne son accord.

3 Les contrats passés entre la personne concernée et le curateur sont soumis à l’approbation de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte, à moins qu’il ne s’agisse d’un mandat gratuit donné par la personne concernée.

Art. 417 B. Actes nécessitant le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte / II. Sur décision

II. Sur décision

En cas de justes motifs, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte peut décider que d’autres actes lui seront soumis pour approbation.

Art. 418 B. Actes nécessitant le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte / III. Défaut de consentement

III. Défaut de consentement

L’acte juridique accompli sans le consentement de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte n’a, à l’égard de la personne concernée, que les effets prévus par le droit des personnes en cas de défaut du consentement du représentant légal.


  Sous-chapitre VII: De l’intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

Art. 419

La personne concernée, l’un de ses proches ou toute personne qui a un intérêt juridique peut en appeler à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte contre les actes ou les omissions du curateur, ou ceux du tiers ou de l’office mandatés par l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.


  Sous-chapitre VIII: De la curatelle confiée à des proches

Art. 420

Lorsque la curatelle est confiée au conjoint, au partenaire enregistré, aux père et mère, à un descendant, à un frère ou à une soeur de la personne concernée ou à la personne menant de fait une vie de couple avec elle, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte peut, si les circonstances le justifient, les dispenser en totalité ou en partie de l’obligation de remettre un inventaire, d’établir des rapports et des comptes périodiques et de requérir son consentement pour certains actes.


  Sous-chapitre IX: De la fin des fonctions du curateur

Art. 421 A. De plein droit

A. De plein droit

Les fonctions du curateur prennent fin de plein droit:

1.
à l’échéance de la durée fixée par l’autorité de protection de l’adulte, si elles n’ont pas été reconduites;
2.
lorsque la curatelle a pris fin;
3.
en cas de fin des rapports de travail du curateur professionnel;
4.
en cas de mise sous curatelle, d’incapacité de discernement ou de décès du curateur.
Art. 422 B. Libération / I. Sur requête du curateur

B. Libération

I. Sur requête du curateur

1 Le curateur a le droit d’être libéré de ses fonctions au plus tôt après une période de quatre ans.

2 Il est libéré avant cette échéance s’il fait valoir de justes motifs.

Art. 423 B. Libération / II. Autres cas

II. Autres cas

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte libère le curateur de ses fonctions:

1.
s’il n’est plus apte à remplir les tâches qui lui sont confiées;
2.
s’il existe un autre juste motif de libération.

2 La personne concernée ou l’un de ses proches peut demander que le curateur soit libéré de ses fonctions.

Art. 424 C. Gestion transitoire

C. Gestion transitoire

Le curateur est tenu d’assurer la gestion des affaires dont le traitement ne peut être différé jusqu’à l’entrée en fonction de son successeur, à moins que l’autorité de protection de l’adulte n’en décide autrement. Cette disposition ne s’applique pas au curateur professionnel.

Art. 425 D. Rapport et comptes finaux

D. Rapport et comptes finaux

1 Au terme de ses fonctions, le curateur adresse à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte un rapport final et, le cas échéant, les comptes finaux. L’autorité peut dispenser le curateur professionnel de cette obligation si ses rapports de travail prennent fin.

2 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte examine et approuve le rapport final et les comptes finaux de la même façon que les rapports et les comptes périodiques.

3 Elle adresse le rapport et les comptes finaux à la personne concernée ou à ses héritiers et, le cas échéant, au nouveau curateur; elle rend ces personnes attentives aux dispositions sur la responsabilité.

4 En outre, elle leur communique la décision qui libère le curateur de ses fonctions ou celle qui refuse l’approbation du rapport final ou des comptes finaux.


  Chapitre III: Du placement à des fins d’assistance

Art. 426 A. Mesures / I. Placement à des fins d’assistance ou de traitement

A. Mesures

I. Placement à des fins d’assistance ou de traitement

1 Une personne peut être placée dans une institution appropriée lorsque, en raison de troubles psychiques, d’une déficience mentale ou d’un grave état d’abandon, l’assistance ou le traitement nécessaires ne peuvent lui être fournis d’une autre manière.

2 La charge que la personne concernée représente pour ses proches et pour des tiers ainsi que leur protection sont prises en considération.

3 La personne concernée est libérée dès que les conditions du placement ne sont plus remplies.

4 La personne concernée ou l’un de ses proches peut demander sa libération en tout temps. La décision doit être prise sans délai.

Art. 427 A. Mesures / II. Maintien d’une personne entrée de son plein gré

II. Maintien d’une personne entrée de son plein gré

1 Toute personne qui souhaite quitter l’institution dans laquelle elle est entrée de son plein gré en raison de troubles psychiques peut être retenue sur ordre du médecin-chef de l’institution pendant trois jours au plus:

1.
si elle met en danger sa vie ou son intégrité corporelle;
2.
si elle met gravement en danger la vie ou l’intégrité corporelle d’autrui.

2 Ce délai échu, elle peut quitter l’institution, à moins qu’une décision exécutoire de placement n’ait été ordonnée.

3 La personne concernée est informée par écrit de son droit d’en appeler au juge.

Art. 428 B. Compétence en matière de placement et de libération / I. Autorité de protection de l’adulte

B. Compétence en matière de placement et de libération

I. Autorité de protection de l’adulte

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte est compétente pour ordonner le placement d’une personne ou sa libération.

2 Elle peut, dans des cas particuliers, déléguer à l’institution sa compétence de libérer la personne concernée.

Art. 429 B. Compétence en matière de placement et de libération / II. Médecins / 1. Compétence

II. Médecins

1. Compétence

1 Les cantons peuvent désigner des médecins qui, outre l’autorité de protection de l’adulte, sont habilités à ordonner un placement dont la durée est fixée par le droit cantonal. Cette durée ne peut dépasser six semaines.

2 Le placement prend fin au plus tard au terme du délai prévu par le droit cantonal, à moins que l’autorité de protection de l’adulte ne le prolonge par une décision exécutoire.

3 La décision de libérer la personne placée appartient à l’institution.

Art. 430 B. Compétence en matière de placement et de libération / II. Médecins / 2. Procédure

2. Procédure

1 Le médecin examine lui-même la personne concernée et l’entend.

2 La décision de placer la personne concernée mentionne au moins:

1.
le lieu et la date de l’examen médical;
2.
le nom du médecin qui a ordonné le placement;
3.
les résultats de l’examen, les raisons et le but du placement;
4.
les voies de recours.

3 Le recours n’a pas d’effet suspensif, à moins que le médecin ou le juge ne l’accorde.

4 Un exemplaire de la décision de placer la personne concernée lui est remis en mains propres, un autre à l’institution lors de son admission.

5 Dans la mesure du possible, le médecin communique par écrit la décision de placer la personne dans une institution à l’un de ses proches et l’informe de la possibilité de recourir contre cette décision.

Art. 431 C. Examen périodique

C. Examen périodique

1 Dans les six mois qui suivent le placement, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte examine si les conditions du maintien de la mesure sont encore remplies et si l’institution est toujours appropriée.

2 Elle effectue un deuxième examen au cours des six mois qui suivent. Par la suite, elle effectue l’examen aussi souvent que nécessaire, mais au moins une fois par an.

Art. 432 D. Personne de confiance

D. Personne de confiance

Toute personne placée dans une institution a le droit de faire appel à une personne de son choix qui l’assistera pendant la durée de son séjour et jusqu’au terme des procédures en rapport avec celui-ci.

Art. 433 E. Soins médicaux en cas de troubles psychiques / I. Plan de traitement

E. Soins médicaux en cas de troubles psychiques

I. Plan de traitement

1 Lorsqu’une personne est placée dans une institution pour y subir un traitement en raison de troubles psychiques, le médecin traitant établit un plan de traitement écrit avec elle et, le cas échéant, sa personne de confiance.

2 Le médecin traitant renseigne la personne concernée et sa personne de confiance sur tous les éléments essentiels du traitement médical envisagé; l’information porte en particulier sur les raisons, le but, la nature, les modalités, les risques et les effets secondaires du traitement, ainsi que sur les conséquences d’un défaut de soins et sur l’existence d’autres traitements.

3 Le plan de traitement est soumis au consentement de la personne concernée. Si elle est incapable de discernement, le médecin traitant prend en considération d’éventuelles directives anticipées.

4 Le plan de traitement est adapté à l’évolution de la médecine et à l’état de la personne concernée.

Art. 434 E. Soins médicaux en cas de troubles psychiques / II. Traitement sans consentement

II. Traitement sans consentement

1 Si le consentement de la personne concernée fait défaut, le médecin-chef du service concerné peut prescrire par écrit les soins médicaux prévus par le plan de traitement lorsque:

1.
le défaut de traitement met gravement en péril la santé de la personne concernée ou la vie ou l’intégrité corporelle d’autrui;
2.
la personne concernée n’a pas la capacité de discernement requise pour saisir la nécessité du traitement;
3.
il n’existe pas de mesures appropriées moins rigoureuses.

2 La décision est communiquée par écrit à la personne concernée et à sa personne de confiance; elle indique les voies de recours.

Art. 435 E. Soins médicaux en cas de troubles psychiques / III. Cas d’urgence

III. Cas d’urgence

1 En cas d’urgence, les soins médicaux indispensables peuvent être administrés immédiatement si la protection de la personne concernée ou celle d’autrui l’exige.

2 Lorsque l’institution sait comment la personne entend être traitée, elle prend en considération sa volonté.

Art. 436 E. Soins médicaux en cas de troubles psychiques / IV. Entretien de sortie

IV. Entretien de sortie

1 S’il existe un risque de récidive, le médecin traitant essaie de prévoir avec la personne concernée, avant sa sortie de l’institution, quelle sera la prise en charge thérapeutique en cas de nouveau placement.

2 L’entretien de sortie est consigné par écrit.

Art. 437 E. Soins médicaux en cas de troubles psychiques / V. Droit cantonal

V. Droit cantonal

1 Le droit cantonal règle la prise en charge de la personne concernée à sa sortie de l’institution.

2 Il peut prévoir des mesures ambulatoires.

Art. 438 F. Mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement

F. Mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement

Les règles sur les mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement d’une personne résidant dans une institution s’appliquent par analogie aux mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement de la personne placée dans une institution à des fins d’assistance. La possibilité d’en appeler au juge est réservée.

Art. 439 G. Appel au juge

G. Appel au juge

1 La personne concernée ou l’un de ses proches peut en appeler par écrit au juge en cas:

1.
de placement ordonné par un médecin;
2.
de maintien par l’institution;
3.
de rejet d’une demande de libération par l’institution;
4.
de traitement de troubles psychiques sans le consentement de la personne concernée;
5.
d’application de mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement de la personne concernée.

2 Le délai d’appel est de dix jours à compter de la date de la notification de la décision. Pour les mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement, il peut en être appelé au juge en tout temps.

3 Les dispositions régissant la procédure devant l’instance judiciaire de recours sont applicables par analogie.

4 Toute requête d’un contrôle judiciaire doit être transmise immédiatement au juge compétent.


  Titre douzième: De l’organisation de la protection de l’adulte

  Chapitre I: Des autorités et de la compétence à raison du lieu

Art. 440 A. Autorité de protection de l’adulte

A. Autorité de protection de l’adulte

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte est une autorité interdisciplinaire. Elle est désignée par les cantons.

2 Elle prend ses décisions en siégeant à trois membres au moins. Les cantons peuvent prévoir des exceptions pour des affaires déterminées.

3 Elle fait également office d’autorité de protection de l’enfant.

Art. 441 B. Autorité de surveillance

B. Autorité de surveillance

1 Les cantons désignent la ou les autorités de surveillance.

2 Le Conseil fédéral peut édicter des dispositions en matière de surveillance.

Art. 442 C. Compétence à raison du lieu

C. Compétence à raison du lieu

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte compétente est celle du lieu de domicile de la personne concernée. Lorsqu’une procédure est en cours, la compétence demeure acquise jusqu’à son terme.

2 Lorsqu’il y a péril en la demeure, l’autorité du lieu où réside la personne concernée est également compétente. Si elle a ordonné une mesure, elle en informe l’autorité du lieu de domicile.

3 L’autorité du lieu où la majeure partie du patrimoine est administrée ou a été dévolue à la personne concernée est également compétente pour instituer une curatelle si la personne est empêchée d’agir pour cause d’absence.

4 Les cantons peuvent décréter que leurs ressortissants domiciliés sur leur territoire sont soumis à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte de leur lieu d’origine à la place de celle de leur lieu de domicile, si les communes d’origine ont la charge d’assister en totalité ou en partie les personnes dans le besoin.

5 Si une personne faisant l’objet d’une mesure de protection change de domicile, la compétence est transférée immédiatement à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte du nouveau lieu de domicile, à moins qu’un juste motif ne s’y oppose.


  Chapitre II: Procédure

  Sous-chapitre I: Devant l’autorité de protection de l’adulte

Art. 443 A. Droit et obligation d’aviser l’autorité

A. Droit et obligation d’aviser l’autorité

1 Toute personne a le droit d’aviser l’autorité de protection de l’adulte qu’une personne semble avoir besoin d’aide. Les dispositions sur le secret professionnel sont réservées.

2 Toute personne qui, dans l’exercice de sa fonction officielle, a connaissance d’un tel cas est tenue d’en informer l’autorité si elle ne peut pas remédier à la situation dans le cadre de son activité. Les dispositions relatives au secret professionnel sont réservées.1

3 Les cantons peuvent prévoir d’autres obligations d’aviser l’autorité.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Protection de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 2947; FF 2015 3111).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Protection de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 2947; FF 2015 3111).

Art. 444 B. Examen de la compétence

B. Examen de la compétence

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte examine d’office si l’affaire relève de sa compétence.

2 Si elle s’estime incompétente, elle transmet l’affaire dans les plus brefs délais à l’autorité qu’elle considère compétente.

3 Si elle a des doutes sur sa compétence, elle procède à un échange de vues avec l’autorité qu’elle estime compétente.

4 Si les deux autorités ne peuvent se mettre d’accord, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte qui a été saisie en premier lieu de l’affaire soumet la question de sa compétence à l’instance judiciaire de recours.

Art. 445 C. Mesures provisionnelles

C. Mesures provisionnelles

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte prend, d’office ou à la demande d’une personne partie à la procédure, toutes les mesures provisionnelles nécessaires pendant la durée de la procédure. Elle peut notamment ordonner une mesure de protection de l’adulte à titre provisoire.

2 En cas d’urgence particulière, elle peut prendre des mesures provisionnelles sans entendre les personnes parties à la procédure. En même temps, elle leur donne la possibilité de prendre position; elle prend ensuite une nouvelle décision.

3 Toute décision relative aux mesures provisionnelles peut faire l’objet d’un recours dans les dix jours à compter de sa notification.

Art. 446 D. Maximes de la procédure

D. Maximes de la procédure

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte établit les faits d’office.

2 Elle procède à la recherche et à l’administration des preuves nécessaires. Elle peut charger une tierce personne ou un service d’effectuer une enquête. Si nécessaire, elle ordonne un rapport d’expertise.

3 Elle n’est pas liée par les conclusions des personnes parties à la procédure.

4 Elle applique le droit d’office.

Art. 447 E. Droit d’être entendu

E. Droit d’être entendu

1 La personne concernée doit être entendue personnellement, à moins que l’audition personnelle ne paraisse disproportionnée.

2 En cas de placement à des fins d’assistance, elle est en général entendue par l’autorité de protection de l’adulte réunie en collège.

Art. 448 F. Obligation de collaborer et assistance administrative

F. Obligation de collaborer et assistance administrative

1 Les personnes parties à la procédure et les tiers sont tenus de collaborer à l’établissement des faits. L’autorité de protection de l’adulte prend les mesures nécessaires pour sauvegarder les intérêts dignes de protection. En cas de nécessité, elle ordonne que l’obligation de collaborer soit accomplie sous la contrainte.

2 Les médecins, les dentistes, les pharmaciens, les sages-femmes, les chiropraticiens et les psychologues ainsi que leurs auxiliaires ne sont tenus de collaborer que si l’intéressé les y a autorisés ou que l’autorité supérieure ou l’autorité de surveillance les a déliés du secret professionnel à leur demande ou à celle de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.1

3 Sont dispensés de l’obligation de collaborer les ecclésiastiques, les avocats, les défenseurs en justice, les médiateurs ainsi que les précédents curateurs nommés pour la procédure.

4 Les autorités administratives et les tribunaux sont tenus de fournir les documents nécessaires, d’établir les rapports officiels et de communiquer les informations requises, à moins que des intérêts dignes de protection ne s’y opposent.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Protection de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 2947; FF 2015 3111).

Art. 449 G. Expertise effectuée dans une institution

G. Expertise effectuée dans une institution

1 Si l’expertise psychiatrique est indispensable et qu’elle ne peut être effectuée de manière ambulatoire, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte place, à cet effet, la personne concernée dans une institution appropriée.

2 Les dispositions sur la procédure relatives au placement à des fins d’assistance sont applicables par analogie.

Art. 449a H. Représentation

H. Représentation

Si nécessaire, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte ordonne la représentation de la personne concernée dans la procédure et désigne curateur une personne expérimentée en matière d’assistance et dans le domaine juridique.

Art. 449b I. Consultation du dossier

I. Consultation du dossier

1 Les personnes parties à la procédure ont le droit de consulter le dossier, pour autant qu’aucun intérêt prépondérant ne s’y oppose.

2 Lorsque l’autorité refuse à une personne partie à la procédure le droit de consulter une pièce du dossier, elle ne peut se prévaloir de cette pièce que si elle lui en a révélé, oralement ou par écrit, les éléments importants pour l’affaire.

Art. 449c J. Obligation de communiquer

J. Obligation de communiquer

L’autorité de protection de l’adulte communique à l’office de l’état civil:

1.
tout placement d’une personne sous curatelle de portée générale en raison d’une incapacité durable de discernement;
2.
tout mandat pour cause d’inaptitude dont fait l’objet une personne devenue durablement incapable de discernement.

  Sous-chapitre II: Devant l’instance judiciaire de recours

Art. 450 A. Objet du recours et qualité pour recourir

A. Objet du recours et qualité pour recourir

1 Les décisions de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte peuvent faire l’objet d’un recours devant le juge compétent.

2 Ont qualité pour recourir:

1.
les personnes parties à la procédure;
2.
les proches de la personne concernée;
3.
les personnes qui ont un intérêt juridique à l’annulation ou à la modification de la décision attaquée.

3 Le recours doit être dûment motivé et interjeté par écrit auprès du juge.

Art. 450a B. Motifs

B. Motifs

1 Le recours peut être formé pour:

1.
violation du droit;
2.
constatation fausse ou incomplète des faits pertinents;
3.
inopportunité de la décision.

2 Le déni de justice ou le retard injustifié peuvent également faire l’objet d’un recours.

Art. 450b C. Délais

C. Délais

1 Le délai de recours est de 30 jours à compter de la notification de la décision. Ce délai s’applique également aux personnes ayant qualité pour recourir auxquelles la décision ne doit pas être notifiée.

2 Dans le domaine du placement à des fins d’assistance, le délai est de dix jours à compter de la notification de la décision.

3 Le déni de justice ou le retard injustifié peut faire l’objet d’un recours en tout temps.

Art. 450c D. Effet suspensif

D. Effet suspensif

Le recours est suspensif, à moins que l’autorité de protection de l’adulte ou l’instance judiciaire de recours n’en décide autrement.

Art. 450d E. Consultation de la première instance et reconsidération

E. Consultation de la première instance et reconsidération

1 L’instance judiciaire de recours donne à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte l’occasion de prendre position.

2 Au lieu de prendre position, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte peut reconsidérer sa décision.

Art. 450e F. Dispositions spéciales concernant le placement à des fins d’assistance

F. Dispositions spéciales concernant le placement à des fins d’assistance

1 Le recours formé contre une décision prise dans le domaine du placement à des fins d’assistance ne doit pas être motivé.

2 Il n’a pas d’effet suspensif, sauf si l’autorité de protection de l’adulte ou l’instance judiciaire de recours l’accorde.

3 La décision relative à des troubles psychiques doit être prise sur la base d’un rapport d’expertise.

4 L’instance judiciaire de recours, en règle générale réunie en collège, entend la personne concernée. Elle ordonne si nécessaire sa représentation et désigne un curateur expérimenté en matière d’assistance et dans le domaine juridique.

5 L’instance judiciaire de recours statue en règle générale dans les cinq jours ouvrables suivant le dépôt du recours.


  Sous-chapitre III: Disposition commune

Art. 450f

En outre, si les cantons n’en disposent pas autrement, les dispositions de la procédure civile s’appliquent par analogie.


  Sous-chapitre IV: Exécution

Art. 450g

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte exécute les décisions sur demande ou d’office.

2 Si l’autorité de protection de l’adulte ou l’instance judiciaire de recours ont déjà ordonné les mesures d’exécution dans la décision, celle-ci est exécutable immédiatement.

3 La personne chargée de l’exécution peut, en cas de nécessité, demander le concours de la police. Les mesures de contrainte directes doivent, en règle générale, faire l’objet d’un avertissement.


  Chapitre III: Du rapport à l’égard des tiers et de l’obligation de collaborer

Art. 451 A. Secret et information

A. Secret et information

1 L’autorité de protection de l’adulte est tenue au secret, à moins que des intérêts prépondérants ne s’y opposent.

2 Toute personne dont l’intérêt est rendu vraisemblable peut exiger de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte qu’elle lui indique si une personne déterminée fait l’objet d’une mesure de protection et quels en sont les effets.

Art. 452 B. Effet des mesures à l’égard des tiers

B. Effet des mesures à l’égard des tiers

1 L’existence d’une mesure de protection de l’adulte est opposable même aux tiers de bonne foi.

2 Lorsqu’une curatelle entraîne une limitation de l’exercice des droits civils de la personne concernée, elle doit être communiquée aux débiteurs de celle-ci, lesquels ne peuvent alors se libérer valablement qu’en mains du curateur. L’existence de la curatelle ne peut être opposée aux débiteurs de bonne foi qui n’en ont pas été informés.

3 La personne faisant l’objet d’une mesure de protection de l’adulte qui s’est faussement donnée pour capable répond envers les tiers du dommage qu’elle leur a causé.

Art. 453 C. Obligation de collaborer

C. Obligation de collaborer

1 S’il existe un réel danger qu’une personne ayant besoin d’aide mette en danger sa vie ou son intégrité corporelle ou commette un crime ou un délit qui cause un grave dommage corporel, moral ou matériel à autrui, l’autorité de protection de l’adulte, les services concernés et la police sont tenus de collaborer.

2 Dans un tel cas, les personnes liées par le secret de fonction ou le secret professionnel sont autorisées à communiquer les informations nécessaires à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte.


  Chapitre IV: De la responsabilité

Art. 454 A. Principe

A. Principe

1 Toute personne qui, dans le cadre de mesures prises par l’autorité de protection de l’adulte, est lésée par un acte ou une omission illicites a droit à des dommages-intérêts et, pour autant que la gravité de l’atteinte le justifie, à une somme d’argent à titre de réparation morale.

2 Les mêmes droits appartiennent au lésé lorsque l’autorité de protection de l’adulte ou l’autorité de surveillance ont agi de manière illicite dans les autres domaines de la protection de l’adulte.

3 La responsabilité incombe au canton; la personne lésée n’a aucun droit à réparation envers l’auteur du dommage.

4 L’action récursoire contre l’auteur du dommage est régie par le droit cantonal.

Art. 455 B. Prescription

B. Prescription

1 L’action en dommages-intérêts ou en paiement d’une somme d’argent à titre de réparation morale se prescrit conformément aux dispositions du code des obligations1 sur les actes illicites.2

2 Si le fait dommageable résulte d’un acte punissable de la personne qui en est l’auteur, l’action se prescrit au plus tôt à l’échéance du délai de prescription de l’action pénale. Si la prescription de l’action pénale ne court plus parce qu’un jugement de première instance a été rendu, l’action civile se prescrit au plus tôt par trois ans à compter de la notification du jugement.3

3 Lorsque la personne a été lésée du fait qu’une mesure à caractère durable a été ordonnée ou exécutée, la prescription de l’action contre le canton ne court pas avant que la mesure n’ait pris fin ou qu’elle n’ait été transférée à un autre canton.


1 RS 220
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2018 (Révision du droit de la prescription), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2020 (RO 2018 5343; FF 2014 221).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2018 (Révision du droit de la prescription), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2020 (RO 2018 5343; FF 2014 221).

Art. 456 C. Responsabilité selon les règles du mandat C. Responsabilité selon les règles du mandat

C. Responsabilité selon les règles du mandat

La responsabilité du mandataire pour cause d’inaptitude, de l’époux ou du partenaire enregistré de la personne incapable de discernement ou de la personne habilitée à la représenter dans le domaine médical, lorsqu’ils n’agissent pas en qualité de curateurs, se détermine selon les dispositions du code des obligations1 applicables au mandat.


1 RS 220


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 3 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179). Voir aussi les art. 8 à 8b tit. fin.4 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179). Voir aussi les art. 9 à 11a tit. fin.5 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).6 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).7 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).8 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).9 Anciennement chap. III.10 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).11 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).12 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).13 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).14 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).15 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).16 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

  Livre troisième: Des successions

  Première partie: Des héritiers

  Titre treizième: Des héritiers légaux

Art. 457 A. Les parents / I. Les descendants

A. Les parents

I. Les descendants

1 Les héritiers les plus proches sont les descendants.

2 Les enfants succèdent par tête.

3 Les enfants prédécédés sont représentés par leurs descendants, qui succèdent par souche à tous les degrés.

Art. 458 A. Les parents / II. La parentèle des père et mère

II. La parentèle des père et mère

1 Les héritiers du défunt qui n’a pas laissé de postérité sont le père et la mère.

2 Ils succèdent par tête.

3 Le père et la mère prédécédés sont représentés par leurs descendants, qui succèdent par souche à tous les degrés.

4 À défaut d’héritiers dans l’une des lignes, toute la succession est dévolue aux héritiers de l’autre.

Art. 459 A. Les parents / III. La parentèle des grands-parents

III. La parentèle des grands-parents

1 Les héritiers du défunt qui n’a laissé ni postérité, ni père, ni mère, ni descendants d’eux, sont les grands-parents.

2 Ils succèdent par tête, dans chacune des deux lignes.

3 Le grand-parent prédécédé est représenté par ses descendants, qui succèdent par souche à tous les degrés.

4 En cas de décès sans postérité d’un grand-parent de la ligne paternelle ou maternelle, sa part échoit aux héritiers de la même ligne.

5 En cas de décès sans postérité des grands-parents d’une ligne, toute la succession est dévolue aux héritiers de l’autre.

Art. 4601A. Les parents / IV. Derniers héritiers

IV. Derniers héritiers

Parmi les parents, les derniers héritiers sont les grands-parents et leur postérité.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 4611

1 Abrogé par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, avec effet au 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1). Voir toutefois l’art. 12a du tit. fin.

Art. 4621B. Conjoint survivant, partenaire enregistré survivant

B. Conjoint survivant, partenaire enregistré survivant2

Le conjoint ou le partenaire enregistré survivant a droit:3

1.
en concours avec les descendants, à la moitié de la succession;
2.
en concours avec le père, la mère ou leur postérité, aux trois quarts;
3.
à défaut du père, de la mère ou de leur postérité, à la succession tout entière.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).

Art. 463 et 4641

1 Abrogés par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, avec effet au 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 4651C. ...

C. ...


1 Abrogé par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, avec effet au 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).

Art. 4661D. Canton et commune

D. Canton et commune

À défaut d’héritiers, la succession est dévolue au canton du dernier domicile du défunt ou à la commune désignée par la législation de ce canton.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).


  Titre quatorzième: Des dispositions pour cause de mort

  Chapitre I: De la capacité de disposer

Art. 467 A. Par testament

A. Par testament

Toute personne capable de discernement et âgée de 18 ans révolus a la faculté de disposer de ses biens par testament, dans les limites et selon les formes établies par la loi.

Art. 4681B. Dans un pacte successoral

B. Dans un pacte successoral

1 Pour conclure un pacte successoral, le disposant doit être capable de discernement et avoir au moins 18 ans.

2 Les personnes dont la curatelle s’étend à la conclusion d’un pacte successoral doivent être autorisées par leur représentant légal.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 469 C. Dispositions nulles

C. Dispositions nulles

1 Sont nulles toutes dispositions que leur auteur a faites sous l’empire d’une erreur, d’un dol, d’une menace ou d’une violence.

2 Elles sont toutefois maintenues, s’il ne les a pas révoquées dans l’année après qu’il a découvert le dol ou l’erreur, ou après qu’il a cessé d’être sous l’empire de la menace ou de la violence.

3 En cas d’erreur manifeste dans la désignation de personnes ou de choses, les dispositions erronées sont rectifiées d’après la volonté réelle de leur auteur, si cette volonté peut être constatée avec certitude.


  Chapitre II: De la quotité disponible

Art. 470 A. Quotité disponible / I. Son étendue

A. Quotité disponible

I. Son étendue

1 Celui qui laisse des descendants, ses père et mère, son conjoint ou son partenaire enregistré, a la faculté de disposer pour cause de mort de ce qui excède le montant de leur réserve.1

2 En dehors de ces cas, il peut disposer de toute la succession.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).

Art. 4711A. Quotité disponible / II. Réserve

II. Réserve

La réserve est:

1.
pour un descendant, des trois quarts de son droit de succession;
2.
pour le père ou la mère, de la moitié;
3.2
pour le conjoint ou le partenaire enregistré survivant, de la moitié.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).

Art. 4721A. Quotité disponible / III. ...

III. ...


1 Abrogé par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, avec effet au 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 473 A. Quotité disponible / IV. Libéralités en faveur du conjoint survivant

IV. Libéralités en faveur du conjoint survivant

1 L’un des conjoints peut, par disposition pour cause de mort, laisser au survivant l’usufruit de toute la part dévolue à leurs enfants communs.1

2 Cet usufruit tient lieu du droit de succession attribué par la loi au conjoint survivant en concours avec ces descendants. Outre cet usufruit, la quotité disponible est d’un quart de la succession.2

3 Si le conjoint survivant se remarie, son usufruit cesse de grever pour l’avenir la partie de la succession qui, au décès du testateur, n’aurait pas pu être l’objet du legs d’usufruit selon les règles ordinaires sur les réserves des descendants.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001, en vigueur depuis le 1er mars 2002 (RO 2002 269; FF 2001 1057 1901 1999).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001, en vigueur depuis le 1er mars 2002 (RO 2002 269; FF 2001 1057 1901 1999).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 474 A. Quotité disponible / V. Calcul de la quotité disponible / 1. Déduction des dettes

V. Calcul de la quotité disponible

1. Déduction des dettes

1 La quotité disponible se calcule suivant l’état de la succession au jour du décès.

2 Sont déduits de l’actif les dettes, les frais funéraires, les frais de scellés et d’inventaire et l’entretien pendant un mois des personnes qui faisaient ménage commun avec le défunt.

Art. 475 A. Quotité disponible / V. Calcul de la quotité disponible / 2. Libéralités entre vifs

2. Libéralités entre vifs

Les libéralités entre vifs s’ajoutent aux biens existants, dans la mesure où elles sont sujettes à réduction.

Art. 476 A. Quotité disponible / V. Calcul de la quotité disponible / 3. Assurances en cas de décès

3. Assurances en cas de décès

Les assurances en cas de décès constituées sur la tête du défunt et qu’il a contractées ou dont il a disposé en faveur d’un tiers, par acte entre vifs ou pour cause de mort, ou qu’il a cédées gratuitement à une tierce personne de son vivant, ne sont comprises dans la succession que pour la valeur de rachat calculée au moment de la mort.

Art. 477 B. Exhérédation / I. Causes

B. Exhérédation

I. Causes

L’héritier réservataire peut être déshérité par disposition pour cause de mort:

1.1
lorsqu’il a commis une infraction pénale grave contre le défunt ou l’un de ses proches;
2.
lorsqu’il a gravement failli aux devoirs que la loi lui impose envers le défunt ou sa famille.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 478 B. Exhérédation / II. Effets

II. Effets

1 L’exhérédé ne peut ni réclamer une part de la succession, ni intenter l’action en réduction.

2 Sa part est dévolue, lorsque le défunt n’en a pas autrement disposé, aux héritiers légaux de ce dernier, comme si l’exhérédé ne lui avait pas survécu.

3 Les descendants de l’exhérédé ont droit à leur réserve comme s’il était prédécédé.

Art. 479 B. Exhérédation / III. Fardeau de la preuve

III. Fardeau de la preuve

1 L’exhérédation n’est valable que si le défunt en a indiqué la cause dans l’acte qui l’ordonne.

2 La preuve de l’exactitude de cette indication sera faite, en cas de contestation de la part de l’exhérédé, par l’héritier ou le légataire qui profite de l’exhérédation.

3 Si cette preuve n’est pas faite ou si la cause de l’exhérédation n’est pas indiquée, les volontés du défunt seront exécutées dans la mesure du disponible, à moins qu’elles ne soient la conséquence d’une erreur manifeste sur la cause même de l’exhérédation.

Art. 480 B. Exhérédation / IV. Exhérédation d’un insolvable

IV. Exhérédation d’un insolvable

1 Le descendant contre lequel il existe des actes de défaut de biens peut être exhérédé pour la moitié de sa réserve, à condition que cette moitié soit attribuée à ses enfants nés ou à naître.

2 L’exhérédation devient caduque à la demande de l’exhérédé si, lors de l’ouverture de la succession, il n’existe plus d’actes de défaut de biens ou si le montant total des sommes pour lesquelles il en existe encore n’excède pas le quart de son droit héréditaire.


  Chapitre III: Des modes de disposer

Art. 481 A. En général

A. En général

1 Les dispositions par testament ou pacte successoral peuvent comprendre tout ou partie du patrimoine, dans les limites de la quotité disponible.

2 Les biens dont le défunt n’a point disposé passent à ses héritiers légaux.

Art. 482 B. Charges et conditions

B. Charges et conditions

1 Les dispositions peuvent être grevées de charges et de conditions, dont tout intéressé a le droit de requérir l’exécution dès que les dispositions elles-mêmes ont déployé leurs effets.

2 Est nulle toute disposition grevée de charges ou de conditions illicites ou contraires aux moeurs.

3 Sont réputées non écrites les charges et conditions qui n’ont pas de sens ou qui sont purement vexatoires pour des tiers.

4 La libéralité pour cause de mort faite à un animal est réputée charge de prendre soin de l’animal de manière appropriée.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).

Art. 483 C. Institution d’héritier

C. Institution d’héritier

1 Un ou plusieurs héritiers peuvent être institués pour l’universalité ou une quote-part de la succession.

2 Toute disposition portant sur l’universalité ou une quote-part de la succession est réputée institution d’héritier.

Art. 484 D. Legs / I. Objet

D. Legs

I. Objet

1 Le disposant peut faire, à titre de legs, des libéralités qui n’emportent pas d’institution d’héritier.

2 Il pourra soit léguer un objet dépendant de la succession ou l’usufruit de tout ou partie de celle-ci, soit astreindre ses héritiers ou légataires à faire, sur la valeur des biens, des prestations en faveur d’une personne ou à la libérer d’une obligation.

3 Le débiteur du legs d’une chose déterminée qui ne se retrouve pas dans la succession est libéré, à moins que le contraire ne résulte de la disposition.

Art. 485 D. Legs / II. Délivrance

II. Délivrance

1 La chose léguée est délivrée dans son état au jour de l’ouverture de la succession, avec ses détériorations et ses accroissements, libre ou grevée de charges.

2 Le débiteur du legs a les droits et les obligations d’un gérant d’affaires pour impenses et détériorations postérieures à l’ouverture de la succession.

Art. 486 D. Legs / III. Rapport entre legs et succession

III. Rapport entre legs et succession

1 Les legs qui excédent soit les forces de la succession, soit la libéralité faite au débiteur des legs, soit la quotité disponible, peuvent être réduits proportionnellement.

2 Les legs sont maintenus, même quand ceux qui les doivent ne survivent pas au disposant, sont déclarés indignes ou répudient.

3 L’héritier légal ou institué a le droit, même en cas de répudiation, de réclamer le legs qui lui a été fait.

Art. 487 E. Substitutions vulgaires

E. Substitutions vulgaires

Le disposant peut désigner une ou plusieurs personnes qui recueilleront la succession ou le legs si l’héritier ou le légataire prédécède ou répudie.

Art. 488 F. Substitutions fidéicommissaires / I. Désignation des appelés

F. Substitutions fidéicommissaires

I. Désignation des appelés

1 Le disposant a la faculté de grever l’héritier institué de l’obligation de rendre la succession à un tiers, l’appelé.

2 La même charge ne peut être imposée à l’appelé.

3 Ces règles s’appliquent aux legs.

Art. 489 F. Substitutions fidéicommissaires / II. Ouverture de la substitution

II. Ouverture de la substitution

1 La substitution s’ouvre, sauf disposition contraire, à la mort du grevé.

2 Lorsqu’un autre terme a été fixé et qu’il n’est pas échu au décès du grevé, la succession passe aux héritiers de celui-ci, à charge par eux de fournir des sûretés.

3 La succession est définitivement acquise aux héritiers du grevé dès le moment où, pour une cause quelconque, la dévolution ne peut plus s’accomplir en faveur de l’appelé.

Art. 490 F. Substitutions fidéicommissaires / III. Sûretés

III. Sûretés

1 L’autorité compétente fait dresser inventaire de la succession échue au grevé.

2 Sauf dispense expresse de la part du disposant, la succession n’est délivrée au grevé que s’il fournit des sûretés; lorsqu’elle comprend des immeubles, les sûretés peuvent consister dans l’annotation au registre foncier de la charge de restitution.

3 Il y a lieu de pourvoir à l’administration d’office de la succession, lorsque le grevé ne peut fournir des sûretés ou qu’il compromet les droits de l’appelé.

Art. 491 F. Substitutions fidéicommissaires / IV. Effets de la substitution / 1. Envers le grevé

IV. Effets de la substitution

1. Envers le grevé

1 Le grevé acquiert la succession comme tout autre héritier institué.

2 Il devient propriétaire, à charge de restitution.

Art. 492 F. Substitutions fidéicommissaires / IV. Effets de la substitution / 2. Envers l’appelé

2. Envers l’appelé

1 La substitution s’ouvre en faveur de l’appelé, lorsqu’il est vivant à l’échéance de la charge de restitution.

2 En cas de prédécès de l’appelé, les biens substitués sont, sauf dispositions contraires, dévolus au grevé.

3 L’appelé succède au disposant, lorsque le grevé meurt avant ce dernier, est indigne ou répudie.

Art. 492a1F. Substitutions fidéicommissaires / V. Descendants incapables de discernement

V. Descendants incapables de discernement

1 Si un descendant est durablement incapable de discernement et qu’il ne laisse ni descendant ni conjoint, le disposant peut ordonner une substitution fidéicommissaire pour le surplus.

2 La substitution s’éteint de plein droit si le descendant, contre toute attente, devient capable de discernement.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 493 G. Fondations

G. Fondations

1 La quotité disponible peut être consacrée, en totalité ou en partie, à une fondation.

2 La fondation n’est toutefois valable que si elle satisfait aux exigences de la loi.

Art. 494 H. Pactes successoraux / I. Institution d’héritier et legs

H. Pactes successoraux

I. Institution d’héritier et legs

1 Le disposant peut s’obliger, dans un pacte successoral, à laisser sa succession ou un legs à l’autre partie contractante ou à un tiers.

2 Il continue à disposer librement de ses biens.

3 Peuvent être attaquées toutefois les dispositions pour cause de mort et les donations inconciliables avec les engagements résultant du pacte successoral.

Art. 495 H. Pactes successoraux / II. Pacte de renonciation / 1. Portée

II. Pacte de renonciation

1. Portée

1 Le disposant peut conclure, à titre gratuit ou onéreux, un pacte de renonciation à succession avec l’un de ses héritiers.

2 Le renonçant perd sa qualité d’héritier.

3 Le pacte est, sauf clause contraire, opposable aux descendants du renonçant.

Art. 496 H. Pactes successoraux / II. Pacte de renonciation / 2. Loyale échute

2. Loyale échute

1 La renonciation est non avenue lorsque, pour une cause quelconque, les héritiers institués dans l’acte en lieu et place du renonçant ne recueillent pas la succession.

2 La renonciation au profit de cohéritiers est réputée n’avoir d’effet qu’à l’égard des héritiers de l’ordre formé par les descendants de l’auteur commun le plus proche et ne confère aucun droit aux héritiers plus éloignés.

Art. 497 H. Pactes successoraux / II. Pacte de renonciation / 3. Droits des créanciers héréditaires

3. Droits des créanciers héréditaires

Le renonçant et ses héritiers peuvent, si la succession est insolvable au moment où elle s’ouvre et si les héritiers du défunt n’en acquittent pas les dettes, être recherchés par les créanciers héréditaires, jusqu’à concurrence des biens qu’ils ont reçus en vertu du pacte successoral au cours des cinq années antérieures à la mort du disposant et dont ils se trouvent encore enrichis lors de la dévolution.


  Chapitre IV: De la forme des dispositions pour cause de mort

Art. 498 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 1. En général

A. Testaments

I. Formes

1. En général

Les testaments peuvent être faits soit par acte public, soit dans la forme olographe, soit dans la forme orale.

Art. 499 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 2. Testament public / a. Rédaction de l’acte

2. Testament public

a. Rédaction de l’acte

Le testament public est reçu, avec le concours de deux témoins, par un notaire, un fonctionnaire ou toute autre personne ayant qualité à cet effet d’après le droit cantonal.

Art. 500 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 2. Testament public / b. Concours de l’officier public

b. Concours de l’officier public

1 Le disposant indique ses volontés à l’officier public; celui-ci les écrit lui-même ou les fait écrire et les donne ensuite à lire au testateur.

2 L’acte sera signé du disposant.

3 Il sera en outre daté et signé par l’officier public.

Art. 501 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 2. Testament public / c. Concours des témoins

c. Concours des témoins

1 Aussitôt l’acte daté et signé, le testateur déclare aux deux témoins, par-devant l’officier public, qu’il l’a lu et que cet acte renferme ses dernières volontés.

2 Par une attestation signée d’eux et ajoutée à l’acte, les témoins certifient que le testateur a fait cette déclaration en leur présence et leur a paru capable de disposer.

3 Le testateur peut ne pas donner connaissance du contenu de l’acte aux témoins.

Art. 502 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 2. Testament public / d. Testateur qui n’a ni lu ni signé

d. Testateur qui n’a ni lu ni signé

1 Si le disposant ne lit ni ne signe lui-même son testament, l’officier public lui en donne lecture en présence des deux témoins et le testateur déclare ensuite que l’acte contient ses dernières volontés.

2 Les témoins certifient, par une attestation signée d’eux, non seulement que le testateur leur a fait la déclaration ci-dessus et leur a paru capable de disposer, mais que l’acte lui a été lu en leur présence par l’officier public.

Art. 503 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 2. Testament public / e. Personnes concourant à l’acte

e. Personnes concourant à l’acte

1 Ne peuvent concourir à la rédaction du testament en qualité d’officier public ou de témoins les personnes qui n’ont pas l’exercice des droits civils, qui sont privées de leurs droits civiques1 par un jugement pénal ou qui ne savent ni lire ni écrire; ne peuvent non plus y concourir les descendants, ascendants, frères et soeurs du testateur, leurs conjoints et le conjoint du testateur même.

2 L’officier public instrumentant et les témoins, de même que leurs descendants, ascendants, frères et soeurs ou conjoints, ne peuvent recevoir de libéralités dans le testament.


1 La privation des droits civiques en vertu d’un jugement pénal est abolie (voir RO 1971 777; FF 1965 I 569 et RO 1975 55; FF 1974 I 1397).

Art. 504 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 2. Testament public / f. Dépôt de l’acte

f. Dépôt de l’acte

Les cantons pourvoient à ce que les officiers publics conservent en original ou en copie les testaments qu’ils ont reçus, ou les remettent en dépôt à une autorité chargée de ce soin.

Art. 505 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 3. Forme olographe

3. Forme olographe

1 Le testament olographe est écrit en entier, daté et signé de la main du testateur; la date consiste dans la mention de l’année, du mois et du jour où l’acte a été dressé.1

2 Les cantons pourvoient à ce que l’acte, ouvert ou clos, puisse être remis à une autorité chargée d’en recevoir le dépôt.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 23 juin 1995, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 4882; FF 1994 III 519, V 594).

Art. 506 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 4. Forme orale / a. Les dernières dispositions

4. Forme orale

a. Les dernières dispositions

1 Le testament peut être fait en la forme orale, lorsque, par suite de circonstances extraordinaires, le disposant est empêché de tester dans une autre forme; ainsi, en cas de danger de mort imminent, de communications interceptées, d’épidémie ou de guerre.

2 Le testateur déclare ses dernières volontés à deux témoins, qu’il charge d’en dresser ou faire dresser acte.

3 Les causes d’incapacité des témoins sont les mêmes que pour le testament public.

Art. 507 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 4. Forme orale / b. Mesures subséquentes

b. Mesures subséquentes

1 L’un des témoins écrit immédiatement les dernières volontés, les date en indiquant le lieu, l’année, le mois et le jour, les signe, les fait signer par l’autre témoin et tous deux remettent cet écrit sans délai entre les mains d’une autorité judiciaire, en affirmant que le testateur, qui leur a paru capable de disposer, leur a déclaré ses dernières volontés dans les circonstances particulières où ils les ont reçues.

2 Les deux témoins peuvent aussi en faire dresser procès-verbal par l’autorité judiciaire, sous la même affirmation que ci-dessus.

3 Si les dernières dispositions émanent d’un militaire au service, un officier du rang de capitaine ou d’un rang supérieur peut remplacer l’autorité judiciaire.

Art. 508 A. Testaments / I. Formes / 4. Forme orale / c. Caducité

c. Caducité

Le testament oral cesse d’être valable, lorsque quatorze jours se sont écoulés depuis que le testateur a recouvré la liberté d’employer l’une des autres formes.

Art. 509 A. Testaments / II. Révocation et suppression / 1. Révocation

II. Révocation et suppression

1. Révocation

1 Le disposant peut révoquer son testament en tout temps, à la condition d’observer l’une des formes prescrites pour tester.

2 La révocation peut être totale ou partielle.

Art. 510 A. Testaments / II. Révocation et suppression / 2. Suppression de l’acte

2. Suppression de l’acte

1 Le disposant peut révoquer son testament par la suppression de l’acte.

2 Lorsque l’acte est supprimé par cas fortuit ou par la faute d’un tiers et qu’il n’est pas possible d’en rétablir exactement ni intégralement le contenu, le testament cesse d’être valable; tous dommages-intérêts demeurent réservés.

Art. 511 A. Testaments / II. Révocation et suppression / 3. Acte postérieur

3. Acte postérieur

1 Les dispositions postérieures qui ne révoquent pas expressément les précédentes les remplacent dans la mesure où elles n’en constituent pas indubitablement des clauses complémentaires.

2 Le legs d’une chose déterminée est caduc, lorsqu’il est inconciliable avec un acte par lequel le testateur a disposé ultérieurement de cette chose.

Art. 512 B. Pacte successoral / I. Forme

B. Pacte successoral

I. Forme

1 Le pacte successoral n’est valable que s’il est reçu dans la forme du testament public.

2 Les parties contractantes déclarent simultanément leur volonté à l’officier public; elles signent l’acte par-devant lui et en présence de deux témoins.

Art. 513 B. Pacte successoral / II. Résiliation et annulation / 1. Entre vifs / a. Par contrat ou dans la forme d’un testament

II. Résiliation et annulation

1. Entre vifs

a. Par contrat ou dans la forme d’un testament

1 Le pacte successoral peut être résilié en tout temps par une convention écrite des parties.

2 Le disposant peut annuler de son chef l’institution d’héritier ou le legs, lorsque après la conclusion du pacte l’héritier ou le légataire se rend coupable envers lui d’un acte qui serait une cause d’exhérédation.

3 Cette annulation se fait dans l’une des formes prescrites pour les testaments.

Art. 514 B. Pacte successoral / II. Résiliation et annulation / 1. Entre vifs / b. Pour cause d’inexécution

b. Pour cause d’inexécution

Celui à qui le pacte confère la faculté de réclamer des prestations entre vifs peut le résilier en conformité du droit des obligations, si les prestations ne sont pas faites ou garanties selon ce qu’il avait été convenu.

Art. 515 B. Pacte successoral / II. Résiliation et annulation / 2. En cas de survie du disposant

2. En cas de survie du disposant

1 Le pacte successoral est résilié de plein droit, lorsque l’héritier ou le légataire ne survit pas au disposant.

2 Toutefois, les héritiers du prédécédé peuvent, sauf clause contraire, répéter contre le disposant son enrichissement au jour du décès.

Art. 516 C. Quotité disponible réduite

C. Quotité disponible réduite

Les libéralités par testament ou pacte successoral ne sont point annulées si, dans la suite, la faculté de disposer de leur auteur subit une diminution; elles sont simplement réductibles.


  Chapitre V: Des exécuteurs testamentaires

Art. 517 A. Désignation

A. Désignation

1 Le testateur peut, par une disposition testamentaire, charger de l’exécution de ses dernières volontés une ou plusieurs personnes capables d’exercer les droits civils.

2 Les exécuteurs testamentaires sont avisés d’office du mandat qui leur a été conféré et ils ont quatorze jours pour déclarer s’ils entendent l’accepter; leur silence équivaut à une acceptation.

3 Ils ont droit à une indemnité équitable.

Art. 518 B. Étendue des pouvoirs

B. Étendue des pouvoirs

1 Si le disposant n’en a ordonné autrement, les exécuteurs testamentaires ont les droits et les devoirs de l’administrateur officiel d’une succession.

2 Ils sont chargés de faire respecter la volonté du défunt, notamment de gérer la succession, de payer les dettes, d’acquitter les legs et de procéder au partage conformément aux ordres du disposant ou suivant la loi.

3 Lorsque plusieurs exécuteurs testamentaires ont été désignés, ils sont réputés avoir reçu un mandat collectif.


  Chapitre VI: De la nullité et de la réduction des dispositions du défunt

Art. 519 A. De l’action en nullité / I. Incapacité de disposer, caractère illicite ou immoral de la disposition

A. De l’action en nullité

I. Incapacité de disposer, caractère illicite ou immoral de la disposition

1 Les dispositions pour cause de mort peuvent être annulées:

1.
lorsqu’elles sont faites par une personne incapable de disposer au moment de l’acte;
2.
lorsqu’elles ne sont pas l’expression d’une volonté libre;
3.
lorsqu’elles sont illicites ou contraires aux moeurs, soit par elles-mêmes, soit par les conditions dont elles sont grevées.

2 L’action peut être intentée par tout héritier ou légataire intéressé.

Art. 520 A. De l’action en nullité / II. Vices de forme / 1. En général

II. Vices de forme

1. En général1

1 Les dispositions entachées d’un vice de forme sont annulées.

2 Si le vice de forme réside dans le concours à l’acte de personnes qui ont reçu elles-mêmes ou dont les membres de la famille ont reçu quelque chose dans le testament, ces libéralités sont seules annulées.

3 L’action en nullité est soumise aux règles applicables en matière d’incapacité de disposer.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 23 juin 1995, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 4882; FF 1994 III 519, V 594).

Art. 520a1A. De l’action en nullité / II. Vices de forme / 2. En cas de testament olographe

2. En cas de testament olographe

Lorsque l’indication de l’année, du mois ou du jour de l’établissement d’un testament olographe fait défaut ou est inexacte, le testament ne peut être annulé que s’il est impossible de déterminer d’une autre manière les données temporelles requises en l’espèce, et que la date est nécessaire pour juger de la capacité de tester de l’auteur de l’acte, de la priorité entre plusieurs dispositions successives ou de toute autre question relative à la validité du testament.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 23 juin 1995, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 4882; FF 1994 III 519, V 594).

Art. 521 A. De l’action en nullité / III. Prescription

III. Prescription

1 L’action se prescrit par un an à compter du jour où le demandeur a eu connaissance de la disposition et de la cause de nullité; dans tous les cas, par dix ans dès la date de l’ouverture de l’acte.

2 Elle ne se prescrit que par trente ans contre le défendeur de mauvaise foi, lorsque les dispositions sont nulles en raison soit de leur caractère illicite ou immoral, soit de l’incapacité de leur auteur.

3 La nullité peut être opposée en tout temps par voie d’exception.

Art. 522 B. De l’action en réduction / I. Conditions / 1. En général

B. De l’action en réduction

I. Conditions

1. En général

1 Les héritiers qui ne reçoivent pas le montant de leur réserve ont l’action en réduction jusqu’à due concurrence contre les libéralités qui excédent la quotité disponible.

2 Les clauses relatives aux lots des héritiers légaux sont tenues pour de simples règles de partage, si la disposition ne révèle pas une intention contraire de son auteur.

Art. 523 B. De l’action en réduction / I. Conditions / 2. Libéralités en faveur de réservataires

2. Libéralités en faveur de réservataires

Les libéralités faites par disposition pour cause de mort à quelques-uns des héritiers réservataires, et qui dépassent la quotité disponible, sont réductibles entre cohéritiers proportionnellement au montant de ce qui excède leur réserve.

Art. 524 B. De l’action en réduction / I. Conditions / 3. Droit des créanciers d’un héritier

3. Droit des créanciers d’un héritier

1 L’action en réduction passe, jusqu’à concurrence de la perte subie, à la masse en faillite de l’héritier lésé dans sa réserve ou aux créanciers possédant contre celui-ci, lors de l’ouverture de la succession, un acte de défaut de biens, si cet héritier ne l’intente pas après avoir été sommé de le faire; ils peuvent l’introduire de leur chef et dans le même délai que lui.

2 Pareille faculté leur appartient à l’égard d’une exhérédation que l’exhérédé renonce à attaquer.

Art. 525 B. De l’action en réduction / II. Effets / 1. En général

II. Effets

1. En général

1 La réduction s’opère au marc le franc contre tous les héritiers institués et les autres personnes gratifiées, si la disposition ne révèle pas une intention contraire de son auteur.

2 Sous cette même condition et si les libéralités faites à une personne chargée d’acquitter des legs sont sujettes à réduction, cette personne peut demander que les legs dont elle est débitrice soient proportionnellement réduits.

Art. 526 B. De l’action en réduction / II. Effets / 2. Legs d’une chose déterminée

2. Legs d’une chose déterminée

Lorsque le legs d’une chose déterminée qui ne peut être partagée sans perdre de sa valeur est soumis à réduction, le légataire a le droit soit de se faire délivrer la chose contre remboursement de l’excédent, soit de réclamer le disponible.

Art. 527 B. De l’action en réduction / II. Effets / 3. À l’égard des libéralités entre vifs / a. Cas

3. À l’égard des libéralités entre vifs

a. Cas

Sont sujettes à réduction comme les libéralités pour cause de mort:

1.
les libéralités entre vifs faites à titre d’avancement d’hoirie sous forme de dot, d’établissement ou d’abandon de biens, quand elles ne sont pas soumises au rapport;
2.
celles qui sont faites à titre de liquidation anticipée de droits héréditaires;
3.
les donations que le disposant pouvait librement révoquer et celles qui sont exécutées dans les cinq années antérieures à son décès, les présents d’usage exceptés;
4.
les aliénations faites par le défunt dans l’intention manifeste d’éluder les règles concernant la réserve.
Art. 528 B. De l’action en réduction / II. Effets / 3. À l’égard des libéralités entre vifs / b. Restitution

b. Restitution

1 Le bénéficiaire de bonne foi n’est tenu de restituer que la valeur de son enrichissement au jour de l’ouverture de la succession.

2 Si la partie gratifiée dans un pacte successoral a subi une réduction, elle est autorisée à répéter une part proportionnelle des contre-prestations faites au disposant.

Art. 529 B. De l’action en réduction / II. Effets / 4. Assurances en cas de décès

4. Assurances en cas de décès

Les assurances en cas de décès constituées sur la tête du défunt et qu’il a contractées ou dont il a disposé en faveur d’un tiers par acte entre vifs ou pour cause de mort, ou qu’il a cédées gratuitement à une tierce personne de son vivant, sont sujettes à réduction pour leur valeur de rachat.

Art. 530 B. De l’action en réduction / II. Effets / 5. À l’égard des libéralités d’usufruit ou de rente

5. À l’égard des libéralités d’usufruit ou de rente

Les héritiers de celui qui a grevé sa succession d’usufruits ou de rentes au point que, selon la durée présumable de ces droits, leur valeur capitalisée excéderait la quotité disponible, ont le choix de les faire réduire jusqu’à due concurrence ou de se libérer par l’abandon du disponible.

Art. 5311B. De l’action en réduction / II. Effets / 6. En cas de substitution

6. En cas de substitution

Toutes clauses de substitution sont nulles à l’égard de l’héritier, dans la mesure où elles grèvent sa réserve; la disposition sur les descendants incapables de discernement est réservée.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 532 B. De l’action en réduction / III. De l’ordre des réductions

III. De l’ordre des réductions

La réduction s’exerce en première ligne sur les dispositions pour cause de mort, puis sur les libéralités entre vifs, en remontant de la libéralité la plus récente à la plus ancienne jusqu’à ce que la réserve soit reconstituée.

Art. 533 B. De l’action en réduction / IV. Prescription

IV. Prescription

1 L’action en réduction se prescrit par un an à compter du jour où les héritiers connaissent la lésion de leur réserve et, dans tous les cas, par dix ans, qui courent, à l’égard des dispositions testamentaires, dès l’ouverture de l’acte et, à l’égard d’autres dispositions, dès que la succession est ouverte.

2 Lorsque l’annulation d’une disposition en a fait revivre une précédente, les délais ne courent que du moment où la nullité a été prononcée.

3 La réduction peut être opposée en tout temps par voie d’exception.


  Chapitre VII: Actions dérivant des pactes successoraux

Art. 534 A. Droits en cas de transfert entre vifs des biens

A. Droits en cas de transfert entre vifs des biens

1 L’héritier que le disposant a, de son vivant, mis en possession de ses biens en vertu d’un pacte successoral peut en faire dresser un inventaire avec sommation publique.

2 Si le disposant ne lui a pas transféré tous ses biens ou s’il en a acquis de nouveaux, le pacte successoral ne s’étend, toutes clauses contraires réservées, qu’aux biens dont le transfert a eu lieu.

3 Dans la mesure où il y a eu transfert entre vifs, les droits et obligations dérivant du contrat passent, toutes clauses contraires réservées, à la succession de l’héritier institué.

Art. 535 B. Réduction et restitution / I. Réduction

B. Réduction et restitution

I. Réduction

1 Lorsque les prestations que le disposant a faites entre vifs à l’héritier renonçant excédent la quotité disponible, la réduction peut en être demandée par les autres héritiers.

2 N’est cependant sujet à réduction que le montant de ce qui excède la réserve du renonçant.

3 Les prestations sont imputées au renonçant d’après les règles applicables en matière de rapport.

Art. 536 B. Réduction et restitution / II. Restitution

II. Restitution

Le renonçant obligé par la réduction à restituer tout ou partie des prestations que le disposant lui a faites, a la faculté d’opter entre cette restitution et le rapport de tout ce qu’il a reçu; dans ce dernier cas, il intervient au partage comme s’il n’avait pas renoncé.


  Deuxième partie: De la dévolution

  Titre quinzième: De l’ouverture de la succession

Art. 537 A. Cause de l’ouverture

A. Cause de l’ouverture

1 La succession s’ouvre par la mort.

2 Les libéralités et les partages entre vifs sont appréciés, en tant qu’ils intéressent la succession, selon l’état de celle-ci au jour de son ouverture.

Art. 538 B. Lieu de l’ouverture

B. Lieu de l’ouverture1

1 La succession s’ouvre au dernier domicile du défunt, pour l’ensemble des biens.

2 ...2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).
2 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 539 C. Effets de l’ouverture / I. Capacité de recevoir / 1. Jouissance des droits civils

C. Effets de l’ouverture

I. Capacité de recevoir

1. Jouissance des droits civils

1 Peuvent être héritiers et acquérir par testament ou pacte successoral tous ceux qui ne sont pas légalement incapables de recevoir.

2 Les libéralités faites dans un but déterminé à un groupe de personnes qui n’a pas la personnalité civile sont acquises à ces personnes individuellement, sous la charge de les appliquer au but prescrit ou, si cela n’est pas possible, constituées en fondations.

Art. 540 C. Effets de l’ouverture / I. Capacité de recevoir / 2. Indignité / a. Causes

2. Indignité

a. Causes

1 Sont indignes d’être héritiers ou d’acquérir par disposition pour cause de mort:

1.
celui qui, à dessein et sans droit, a donné ou tenté de donner la mort au défunt;
2.
celui qui, à dessein et sans droit, a mis le défunt dans un état d’incapacité permanente de tester;
3.
celui qui, par dol, menace ou violence, a induit le défunt soit à faire, soit à révoquer une disposition de dernière volonté, ou qui l’en a empêché;
4.
celui qui a dissimulé ou détruit à dessein et sans droit une dernière disposition du défunt, dans des circonstances telles que celui-ci n’a pu la refaire.

2 Le pardon fait cesser l’indignité.

Art. 541 C. Effets de l’ouverture / I. Capacité de recevoir / 2. Indignité / b. Effets à l’égard des descendants

b. Effets à l’égard des descendants

1 L’indignité est personnelle.

2 Les descendants de l’indigne succèdent comme si leur auteur était prédécédé.

Art. 542 C. Effets de l’ouverture / II. Le point de survie / 1. Les héritiers

II. Le point de survie

1. Les héritiers

1 Ne peut être héritier que celui qui survit au défunt et qui a la capacité de succéder.

2 Les droits de l’héritier décédé après l’ouverture de la succession passent à ses héritiers.

Art. 543 C. Effets de l’ouverture / II. Le point de survie / 2. Les légataires

2. Les légataires

1 Le légataire a droit à la chose léguée lorsqu’il survit au défunt et a la capacité de succéder.

2 S’il prédécède, son legs profite à celui qui eût été chargé de l’acquitter, à moins que la preuve ne soit faite qu’une intention contraire du disposant résulte de l’acte.

Art. 544 C. Effets de l’ouverture / II. Le point de survie / 3. Les enfants conçus

3. Les enfants conçus

1 L’enfant conçu est capable de succéder, s’il naît vivant.

1bis Si la sauvegarde des intérêts de l’enfant l’exige, l’autorité de protection de l’enfant nomme un curateur.1

2 L’enfant mort-né ne succède pas.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 545 C. Effets de l’ouverture / II. Le point de survie / 4. En cas de substitution

4. En cas de substitution

1 L’hérédité elle-même, ou une chose en dépendant, peut être laissée par une clause de substitution à une personne qui n’est pas vivante lors de l’ouverture de la succession.

2 Les héritiers légaux ont la qualité de grevés, si le défunt n’en a pas disposé autrement.

Art. 546 D. Déclaration d’absence / I. Succession d’un absent / 1. Envoi en possession et sûretés

D. Déclaration d’absence

I. Succession d’un absent

1. Envoi en possession et sûretés

1 Lorsqu’une personne est déclarée absente, les héritiers ou autres bénéficiaires fourniront des garanties, avant l’envoi en possession, pour assurer la restitution éventuelle des biens soit à des tiers ayant des droits préférables, soit à l’absent lui-même.

2 Ces garanties sont fournies, en cas de disparition de l’absent dans un danger de mort, pour cinq ans, en cas de disparition sans nouvelles, pour quinze ans, et, au plus, jusqu’à l’époque où l’absent aurait atteint l’âge de 100 ans.

3 Les cinq ans courent dès l’envoi en possession, les quinze ans dès les dernières nouvelles.

Art. 547 D. Déclaration d’absence / I. Succession d’un absent / 2. Restitution

2. Restitution

1 Les envoyés en possession sont tenus de rendre la succession à l’absent lorsqu’il vient à reparaître ou aux tiers qui font valoir des droits préférables; les règles de la possession sont applicables dans l’un ou l’autre cas.

2 S’ils sont de bonne foi, ils ne sont tenus à restitution envers les tiers ayant des droits préférables que pendant le délai de l’action en pétition d’hérédité.

Art. 548 D. Déclaration d’absence / II. Droit de succession d’un absent

II. Droit de succession d’un absent

1 Il y a lieu de faire administrer d’office la part de l’héritier absent dont ni l’existence ni la mort au jour de l’ouverture de la succession ne peuvent être prouvées.

2 Ceux auxquels la part de l’héritier absent serait dévolue à son défaut peuvent, un an après l’événement dans lequel il a disparu en danger de mort ou cinq ans après les dernières nouvelles, demander au juge qu’il prononce la déclaration d’absence et ensuite l’envoi en possession.

3 Cette part sera délivrée selon les règles applicables à l’envoi en possession des héritiers d’un absent.

Art. 549 D. Déclaration d’absence / III. Corrélation entre les deux cas

III. Corrélation entre les deux cas

1 Lorsque les héritiers d’un absent ont obtenu l’envoi en possession de ses biens et qu’une succession lui est dévolue, ses cohéritiers peuvent invoquer le bénéfice de cet envoi et sont dispensés de requérir à nouveau la déclaration d’absence pour se faire délivrer les biens qui lui sont échus.

2 Les héritiers de l’absent peuvent de même invoquer le bénéfice d’une déclaration d’absence prononcée à la requête de ses cohéritiers.

Art. 550 D. Déclaration d’absence / IV. Procédure d’office

IV. Procédure d’office

1 La déclaration d’absence est prononcée d’office, à la requête de l’autorité compétente, lorsque les biens de la personne disparue ou sa part dans une succession ont été administrés d’office pendant dix ans, ou lorsque cette personne aurait atteint l’âge de 100 ans.

2 Si aucun ayant droit ne se présente dans le délai de la sommation, les biens passent au canton ou à la commune qui succéderait à défaut d’héritiers, ou, si l’absent n’a jamais été domicilié en Suisse, à son canton d’origine.

3 Le canton ou la commune en demeure responsable envers l’absent ou les tiers ayant des droits préférables, selon les mêmes règles que les envoyés en possession.


  Titre seizième: Des effets de la dévolution

  Chapitre I: Des mesures de sûreté

Art. 551 A. En général

A. En général

1 L’autorité compétente est tenue de prendre d’office les mesures nécessaires pour assurer la dévolution de l’hérédité.1

2 Ces mesures sont notamment, dans les cas prévus par la loi, l’apposition des scellés, l’inventaire, l’administration d’office et l’ouverture des testaments.

3 ...2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).
2 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, avec effet au 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 552 B. Apposition des scellés

B. Apposition des scellés

Les scellés sont apposés dans les cas prévus par la législation cantonale.

Art. 553 C. Inventaire

C. Inventaire

1 L’autorité fait dresser un inventaire:

1.
lorsqu’un héritier mineur est placé sous tutelle ou doit l’être;
2.
en cas d’absence prolongée d’un héritier qui n’a pas désigné de représentant;
3.
à la demande d’un héritier ou de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte;
4.
lorsqu’un héritier majeur est placé sous curatelle de portée générale ou doit l’être.1

2 L’inventaire est dressé conformément à la législation cantonale et, en règle générale, dans les deux mois à compter du décès.

3 La législation cantonale peut prescrire l’inventaire dans d’autres cas.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 554 D. Administration d’office de la succession / I. En général

D. Administration d’office de la succession

I. En général

1 L’autorité ordonne l’administration d’office de la succession:

1.
en cas d’absence prolongée d’un héritier qui n’a pas laissé de fondé de pouvoirs, si cette mesure est commandée par l’intérêt de l’absent;
2.
lorsque aucun de ceux qui prétendent à la succession ne peut apporter une preuve suffisante de ses droits ou s’il est incertain qu’il y ait un héritier;
3.
lorsque tous les héritiers du défunt ne sont pas connus;
4.
dans les autres cas prévus par la loi.

2 S’il y a un exécuteur testamentaire désigné, l’administration de l’hérédité lui est remise.

3 Si une personne placée sous une curatelle englobant la gestion du patrimoine décède, le curateur administre la succession, à moins qu’il n’en soit ordonné autrement.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 555 D. Administration d’office de la succession / II. Quand les héritiers sont inconnus

II. Quand les héritiers sont inconnus

1 Lorsque l’autorité ignore si le défunt a laissé des héritiers ou lorsqu’elle n’a pas la certitude de les connaître tous, elle invite les ayants droit, par sommation dûment publiée, à faire leur déclaration d’héritier dans l’année.

2 La succession passe au canton ou à la commune, si l’autorité ne reçoit aucune déclaration dans ce délai et s’il n’y a pas d’héritiers connus d’elle; l’action en pétition d’hérédité demeure réservée.

Art. 556 E. Ouverture des testaments / I. Obligation de les communiquer

E. Ouverture des testaments

I. Obligation de les communiquer

1 Le testament découvert lors du décès est remis sans délai à l’autorité compétente, même s’il paraît entaché de nullité.

2 Sont tenus, dès qu’ils ont connaissance du décès, de satisfaire à cette obligation, sous leur responsabilité personnelle: l’officier public qui a dressé acte ou reçu dépôt d’un testament et quiconque en a accepté la garde ou en a trouvé un parmi les effets du testateur.

3 Après la remise du testament, l’autorité envoie les héritiers légaux en possession provisoire des biens ou ordonne l’administration d’office; si possible, les intéressés seront entendus.

Art. 557 E. Ouverture des testaments / II. Ouverture

II. Ouverture

1 Le testament est ouvert par l’autorité compétente dans le mois qui suit la remise de l’acte.

2 Les héritiers connus de l’autorité sont appelés à l’ouverture.

3 Si le défunt a laissé plusieurs testaments, ils sont tous déposés entre les mains de l’autorité et celle-ci procède à leur ouverture.

Art. 558 E. Ouverture des testaments / III. Communication aux ayants droit

III. Communication aux ayants droit

1 Tous ceux qui ont des droits dans la succession reçoivent, aux frais de celle-ci, copie des clauses testamentaires qui les concernent.

2 Ceux qui n’ont pas de domicile connu sont prévenus par sommation dûment publiée.

Art. 559 E. Ouverture des testaments / IV. Délivrance des biens

IV. Délivrance des biens

1 Après l’expiration du mois qui suit la communication aux intéressés, les héritiers institués dont les droits n’ont pas été expressément contestés par les héritiers légaux ou par les personnes gratifiées dans une disposition plus ancienne peuvent réclamer de l’autorité une attestation de leur qualité d’héritiers; toutes actions en nullité et en pétition d’hérédité demeurent réservées.

2 Le cas échéant, l’administrateur de la succession sera chargé en même temps de leur délivrer celle-ci.


  Chapitre II: De l’acquisition de la succession

Art. 560 A. Acquisition / I. Héritiers

A. Acquisition

I. Héritiers

1 Les héritiers acquièrent de plein droit l’universalité de la succession dès que celle-ci est ouverte.

2 Ils sont saisis des créances et actions, des droits de propriété et autres droits réels, ainsi que des biens qui se trouvaient en la possession du défunt, et ils sont personnellement tenus de ses dettes; le tout sous réserve des exceptions prévues par la loi.

3 L’effet de l’acquisition par les héritiers institués remonte au jour du décès du disposant et les héritiers légaux sont tenus de leur rendre la succession selon les règles applicables au possesseur.

Art. 5611A. Acquisition / II ...

II ...


1 Abrogé par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, avec effet au 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 562 A. Acquisition / III. Légataires / 1. Acquisition du legs

III. Légataires

1. Acquisition du legs

1 Les légataires ont une action personnelle contre les débiteurs des legs ou, faute de débiteurs spécialement désignés, contre les héritiers légaux ou institués.

2 Cette action leur appartient, si une intention contraire ne résulte pas du testament, dès que les débiteurs des legs ont accepté la succession ou ne peuvent plus la répudier.

3 Les héritiers qui ne satisfont pas à leurs obligations envers les légataires peuvent être actionnés soit en délivrance des biens légués, soit en dommages-intérêts si le legs consiste dans l’exécution d’un acte quelconque.

Art. 563 A. Acquisition / III. Légataires / 2. Objet du legs

2. Objet du legs

1 Sauf disposition contraire, les legs d’usufruits, de même que les legs de rentes ou d’autres prestations périodiques, sont soumis aux règles concernant les droits réels et les obligations.

2 Lorsque le legs consiste dans une assurance en cas de décès constituée sur la tête du disposant, le légataire peut faire valoir directement ses droits.

Art. 564 A. Acquisition / III. Légataires / 3. Droits des créanciers

3. Droits des créanciers

1 Les droits des créanciers du défunt priment ceux des légataires.

2 Les créanciers personnels de l’héritier ont les mêmes droits que ceux du défunt, lorsque le débiteur accepte purement et simplement la succession.

Art. 565 A. Acquisition / III. Légataires / 4. Réduction

4. Réduction

1 Les héritiers qui, après la délivrance des legs, paient des dettes héréditaires à eux inconnues auparavant ont le droit d’exercer une répétition proportionnelle contre les légataires, dans la mesure où ils auraient pu réclamer la réduction des legs.

2 Les légataires ne peuvent toutefois être recherchés au delà de leur enrichissement au jour de la répétition.

Art. 566 B. Répudiation / I. Déclaration à cet effet / 1. Faculté de répudier

B. Répudiation

I. Déclaration à cet effet

1. Faculté de répudier

1 Les héritiers légaux ou institués ont la faculté de répudier la succession.

2 La succession est censée répudiée, lorsque l’insolvabilité du défunt était notoire ou officiellement constatée à l’époque du décès.

Art. 567 B. Répudiation / I. Déclaration à cet effet / 2. Délai / a. En général

2. Délai

a. En général

1 Le délai pour répudier est de trois mois.

2 Il court, pour les héritiers légaux, dès le jour où ils ont connaissance du décès, à moins qu’ils ne prouvent n’avoir connu que plus tard leur qualité d’héritiers; pour les institués, dès le jour où ils ont été prévenus officiellement de la disposition faite en leur faveur.

Art. 568 B. Répudiation / I. Déclaration à cet effet / 2. Délai / b. En cas d’inventaire

b. En cas d’inventaire

Lorsqu’un inventaire a été dressé à titre de mesure conservatoire, le délai de répudiation commence à courir pour tous les héritiers dès le jour où la clôture de l’inventaire a été portée à leur connaissance par l’autorité.

Art. 569 B. Répudiation / I. Déclaration à cet effet / 3. Transmission du droit de répudier

3. Transmission du droit de répudier

1 Le droit de répudier de celui qui meurt avant d’avoir opté passe à ses héritiers.

2 Dans ce cas, le délai pour répudier court dès le jour où ils ont su que la succession était échue à leur auteur et il expire au plus tôt à la fin du délai pour répudier sa propre succession.

3 Si la succession répudiée est dévolue à des héritiers qui n’y avaient pas droit auparavant, le délai pour répudier ne court à leur égard que du jour où ils ont connaissance de la répudiation.

Art. 570 B. Répudiation / I. Déclaration à cet effet / 4. Forme

4. Forme

1 La répudiation se fait par une déclaration écrite ou verbale de l’héritier à l’autorité compétente.

2 Elle doit être faite sans condition ni réserve.

3 L’autorité tient un registre des répudiations.

Art. 571 B. Répudiation / II. Déchéance du droit de répudier

II. Déchéance du droit de répudier

1 Les héritiers qui ne répudient pas dans le délai fixé acquièrent la succession purement et simplement.

2 Est déchu de la faculté de répudier l’héritier qui, avant l’expiration du délai, s’immisce dans les affaires de la succession, fait des actes autres que les actes nécessités par la simple administration et la continuation de ces affaires, divertit ou recèle des biens de l’hérédité.

Art. 572 B. Répudiation / III. Répudiation d’un des cohéritiers

III. Répudiation d’un des cohéritiers

1 Lorsque le défunt n’a pas laissé de dispositions pour cause de mort et que l’un de ses héritiers répudie, la part du renonçant est dévolue comme s’il n’avait pas survécu.

2 S’il existe des dispositions pour cause de mort, la part de l’héritier institué qui répudie passe aux héritiers légaux les plus proches du défunt, lorsque les dispositions ne révèlent pas une intention contraire de leur auteur.

Art. 573 B. Répudiation / IV. Répudiation de tous les héritiers les plus proches / 1. En général

IV. Répudiation de tous les héritiers les plus proches

1. En général

1 La succession répudiée par tous les héritiers légaux du rang le plus proche est liquidée par l’office des faillites.

2 Le solde de la liquidation, après paiement des dettes, revient aux ayants droit, comme s’ils n’avaient pas répudié.

Art. 574 B. Répudiation / IV. Répudiation de tous les héritiers les plus proches / 2. Droit du conjoint survivant

2. Droit du conjoint survivant

Lorsque la succession est répudiée par les descendants, le conjoint survivant en est avisé par l’autorité et il a un mois pour accepter.

Art. 575 B. Répudiation / IV. Répudiation de tous les héritiers les plus proches / 3. Répudiation au profit d’héritiers éloignés

3. Répudiation au profit d’héritiers éloignés

1 En répudiant la succession, les héritiers peuvent demander qu’avant la liquidation les héritiers venant immédiatement après eux soient mis en demeure de se prononcer.

2 En pareil cas, ces derniers sont officiellement avisés de la répudiation; leur défaut d’acceptation dans le mois équivaut à une répudiation.

Art. 576 B. Répudiation / V. Prorogation des délais

V. Prorogation des délais

L’autorité compétente peut, pour de justes motifs, accorder une prolongation de délai ou fixer un nouveau délai aux héritiers légaux et institués.

Art. 577 B. Répudiation / VI. Répudiation du legs

VI. Répudiation du legs

La répudiation du legs profite à celui qui le doit, si la disposition ne révèle pas une intention contraire de son auteur.

Art. 578 B. Répudiation / VII. Protection des droits des créanciers de l’héritier

VII. Protection des droits des créanciers de l’héritier

1 Lorsqu’un héritier obéré répudie dans le but de porter préjudice à ses créanciers, ceux-ci ou la masse en faillite ont le droit d’attaquer la répudiation dans les six mois, à moins que des sûretés ne leur soient fournies.

2 Il y a lieu à liquidation officielle, si la nullité de la répudiation a été prononcée.

3 L’excédent actif est destiné en première ligne à payer les créanciers demandeurs; il sert ensuite à payer les autres créanciers et le solde revient aux héritiers en faveur desquels la répudiation avait eu lieu.

Art. 579 B. Répudiation / VIII. Responsabilité en cas de répudiation

VIII. Responsabilité en cas de répudiation

1 Les créanciers d’une succession insolvable peuvent rechercher les héritiers, nonobstant leur répudiation, dans la mesure où ceux-ci ont reçu du défunt, pendant les cinq ans qui ont précédé le décès, des biens qui eussent été sujets à rapport en cas de partage.

2 Aucune action n’est accordée aux créanciers en raison des prestations usuelles d’établissement par mariage ou des frais d’éducation et d’instruction.

3 Les héritiers de bonne foi ne sont tenus que dans la mesure de leur enrichissement.


  Chapitre III: Du bénéfice d’inventaire

Art. 580 A. Conditions

A. Conditions

1 L’héritier qui a la faculté de répudier peut réclamer le bénéfice d’inventaire.

2 Sa requête sera présentée à l’autorité compétente dans le délai d’un mois; les formes à observer sont celles de la répudiation.

3 La requête de l’un des héritiers profite aux autres.

Art. 581 B. Procédure / I. Inventaire

B. Procédure

I. Inventaire

1 L’inventaire est dressé par l’autorité compétente selon les règles fixées par la législation cantonale; il comporte un état de l’actif et du passif de la succession, avec estimation de tous les biens.

2 Celui qui possède des renseignements sur la situation financière du défunt doit sous sa responsabilité les donner à l’autorité, si elle l’en requiert.

3 Les héritiers sont tenus, en particulier, de signaler à l’autorité les dettes de la succession à eux connues.

Art. 582 B. Procédure / II. Sommation publique

II. Sommation publique

1 L’autorité chargée de l’inventaire fait les sommations publiques nécessaires pour inviter les créanciers et les débiteurs du défunt, y compris les créanciers en vertu de cautionnements, à produire leurs créances et à déclarer leurs dettes dans un délai déterminé.

2 Elle rend les créanciers attentifs aux suites légales du défaut de production.

3 Le délai est d’un mois au moins à partir de la première publication.

Art. 583 B. Procédure / III. Créances et dettes inventoriées d’office

III. Créances et dettes inventoriées d’office

1 Les créances et les dettes qui résultent des registres publics ou des papiers du défunt sont inventoriées d’office.

2 Les créanciers et les débiteurs sont avisés de l’inventaire.

Art. 584 B. Procédure / IV. Résultat

IV. Résultat

1 L’inventaire est clos après l’expiration du délai et peut être consulté pendant un mois au moins par les intéressés.

2 Les frais sont supportés par la succession et, en cas d’insuffisance de celle-ci, par les héritiers qui ont requis l’inventaire.

Art. 585 C. Situation des héritiers pendant l’inventaire / I. Administration

C. Situation des héritiers pendant l’inventaire

I. Administration

1 Ne seront faits, pendant l’inventaire, que les actes nécessaires d’administration.

2 Si l’autorité permet que les affaires du défunt soient continuées par l’un des héritiers, les autres peuvent exiger des sûretés.

Art. 586 C. Situation des héritiers pendant l’inventaire / II. Poursuites et procès; prescription

II. Poursuites et procès; prescription

1 Pendant l’inventaire, les dettes de la succession ne peuvent faire l’objet d’aucune poursuite.

2 ...1

3 Sauf les cas d’urgence, les procès en cours sont suspendus et il n’en peut être intenté de nouveaux.


1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2018 (Révision du droit de la prescription), avec effet au 1er janv. 2020 (RO 2018 5343; FF 2014 221).

Art. 587 D. Effets / I. Délai pour prendre parti

D. Effets

I. Délai pour prendre parti

1 Après la clôture de l’inventaire, chaque héritier est sommé de prendre parti dans le délai d’un mois.

2 L’autorité compétente peut proroger le délai pour de nouvelles estimations, pour le règlement de contestations et dans d’autres cas analogues, si la prorogation est justifiée par les circonstances.

Art. 588 D. Effets / II. Déclaration de l’héritier

II. Déclaration de l’héritier

1 L’héritier a, pendant le délai fixé, la faculté de répudier, de requérir la liquidation officielle, d’accepter la succession sous bénéfice d’inventaire ou de l’accepter purement et simplement.

2 Son silence équivaut à l’acceptation sous bénéfice d’inventaire.

Art. 589 D. Effets / III. Effets de l’acceptation sous bénéfice d’inventaire / 1. Responsabilité d’après l’inventaire

III. Effets de l’acceptation sous bénéfice d’inventaire

1. Responsabilité d’après l’inventaire

1 En cas d’acceptation bénéficiaire, la succession passe à l’héritier avec les dettes constatées par l’inventaire.

2 Les effets de ce transfert remontent au jour de l’ouverture de la succession.

3 L’héritier répond, tant sur les biens de la succession que sur ses propres biens, des dettes portées à l’inventaire.

Art. 590 D. Effets / III. Effets de l’acceptation sous bénéfice d’inventaire / 2. Responsabilité au delà de l’inventaire

2. Responsabilité au delà de l’inventaire

1 Les créanciers du défunt qui ne figurent pas à l’inventaire pour avoir négligé de produire en temps utile ne peuvent rechercher l’héritier ni personnellement ni sur les biens de la succession.

2 L’héritier demeure toutefois obligé, jusqu’à concurrence de son enrichissement, envers les créanciers qui ont omis de produire sans leur faute ou dont les créances, quoique produites, n’ont pas été portées à l’inventaire.

3 Dans tous les cas, les créanciers peuvent faire valoir leurs droits, en tant que ceux-ci sont garantis par des gages grevant les biens de la succession.

Art. 591 E. Responsabilité en vertu de cautionnements

E. Responsabilité en vertu de cautionnements

Les cautionnements du défunt sont portés séparément à l’inventaire; les héritiers n’en répondent, même s’ils ont accepté purement et simplement, que jusqu’à concurrence du dividende qui serait échu aux cautionnements en cas de liquidation du passif héréditaire selon les règles de la faillite.

Art. 592 F. Successions dévolues au canton ou à la commune

F. Successions dévolues au canton ou à la commune

Toute succession dévolue au canton ou à la commune est inventoriée d’office selon les règles ci-dessus et l’héritier n’est responsable que jusqu’à concurrence de son émolument.


  Chapitre IV: De la liquidation officielle

Art. 593 A. Conditions / I. À la requête d’un héritier

A. Conditions

I. À la requête d’un héritier

1 L’héritier peut, au lieu de répudier ou d’accepter sous bénéfice d’inventaire, requérir la liquidation officielle de la succession.

2 Il n’est pas fait droit à cette demande, si l’un des héritiers accepte purement et simplement.

3 En cas de liquidation officielle, les héritiers ne répondent pas des dettes de la succession.

Art. 594 A. Conditions / II. À la requête des créanciers du défunt

II. À la requête des créanciers du défunt

1 Les créanciers du défunt qui ont des raisons sérieuses de craindre qu’ils ne soient pas payés peuvent requérir la liquidation officielle dans les trois mois à partir du décès ou de l’ouverture du testament, si, à leur demande, ils ne sont pas désintéressés ou n’obtiennent pas des sûretés.

2 Les légataires sont autorisés, dans les mêmes circonstances, à requérir des mesures conservatoires pour la sauvegarde de leurs droits.

Art. 595 B. Procédure / I. Administration

B. Procédure

I. Administration

1 La liquidation officielle est faite par l’autorité compétente, qui peut aussi charger de ce soin un ou plusieurs administrateurs.

2 Elle s’ouvre par un inventaire, avec sommation publique.

3 L’administrateur est placé sous le contrôle de l’autorité et les héritiers peuvent recourir à celle-ci contre les mesures projetées ou prises par lui.

Art. 596 B. Procédure / II. Mode ordinaire de liquidation

II. Mode ordinaire de liquidation

1 La liquidation comprend le règlement des affaires courantes du défunt, l’exécution de ses obligations, le recouvrement des créances, l’acquittement des legs dans la mesure de l’actif et, en tant que besoin, la reconnaissance judiciaire de ses droits et de ses engagements, ainsi que la réalisation des biens.

2 La vente des immeubles du défunt se fait aux enchères publiques, à moins que tous les héritiers ne soient d’accord qu’elle ait lieu de gré à gré.

3 Les héritiers peuvent demander que tout ou partie des objets ou du numéraire qui ne sont pas nécessaires pour liquider la succession leur soient délivrés déjà pendant la liquidation.

Art. 597 B. Procédure / III. Liquidation selon les règles de la faillite

III. Liquidation selon les règles de la faillite

La liquidation des successions insolvables se fait par l’office selon les règles de la faillite.


  Chapitre V: De l’action en pétition d’hérédité

Art. 598 A. Conditions

A. Conditions

1 L’action en pétition d’hérédité appartient à quiconque se croit autorisé à faire valoir, comme héritier légal ou institué, sur une succession ou sur des biens qui en dépendent, des droits préférables à ceux du possesseur.

2 ...1


1 Abrogé par l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, avec effet au 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 599 B. Effets

B. Effets

1 Le possesseur restitue selon les règles de la possession, au demandeur qui obtient gain de cause, la succession ou les biens qui en dépendent.

2 Le défendeur ne peut opposer la prescription acquisitive à l’action en pétition d’hérédité.

Art. 600 C. Prescription

C. Prescription

1 L’action en pétition d’hérédité se prescrit contre le possesseur de bonne foi par un an à compter du jour où le demandeur a eu connaissance de son droit préférable et de la possession du défendeur; en tout cas, par dix ans, qui courent dès le décès ou dès l’ouverture du testament.

2 Elle ne se prescrit que par trente ans contre le possesseur de mauvaise foi.

Art. 601 D. Action du légataire

D. Action du légataire

L’action du légataire se prescrit par dix ans à compter soit du jour où il a été avisé de la libéralité, soit du jour où son legs devient exigible postérieurement à l’avis.


  Titre dix-septième: Du partage

  Chapitre I: De la succession avant le partage

Art. 602 A. Effets de l’ouverture de la succession / I. Communauté héréditaire

A. Effets de l’ouverture de la succession

I. Communauté héréditaire

1 S’il y a plusieurs héritiers, tous les droits et obligations compris dans la succession restent indivis jusqu’au partage.

2 Les héritiers sont propriétaires et disposent en commun des biens qui dépendent de la succession, sauf les droits de représentation et d’administration réservés par le contrat ou la loi.

3 À la demande de l’un des héritiers, l’autorité compétente peut désigner un représentant de la communauté héréditaire jusqu’au moment du partage.

Art. 603 A. Effets de l’ouverture de la succession / II. Responsabilité des héritiers

II. Responsabilité des héritiers

1 Les héritiers sont tenus solidairement des dettes du défunt.

2 Pour autant qu’elle n’excède pas les possibilités de la succession, l’indemnité équitable due aux enfants ou aux petits-enfants à raison de prestations fournies au ménage commun qu’ils formaient avec le défunt, est comprise dans les dettes de celui-ci.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 6 oct. 1972, en vigueur depuis le 15 fév. 1973 (RO 1973 93; FF 1970 I 813, 1971 I 753).

Art. 604 B. Action en partage

B. Action en partage

1 Chaque héritier a le droit de demander en tout temps le partage de la succession, à moins qu’il ne soit conventionnellement ou légalement tenu de demeurer dans l’indivision.

2 À la requête d’un héritier, le juge peut ordonner qu’il soit sursis provisoirement au partage de la succession ou de certains objets, si la valeur des biens devait être notablement diminuée par une liquidation immédiate.

3 Les cohéritiers d’un insolvable peuvent, aussitôt la succession ouverte, requérir des mesures conservatoires pour la sauvegarde de leurs droits.

Art. 605 C. Ajournement du partage

C. Ajournement du partage

1 S’il y a lieu de prendre en considération les droits d’un enfant conçu, le partage est ajourné jusqu’à la naissance.

2 En tant qu’elle en a besoin pour son entretien, la mère a droit dans l’intervalle à la jouissance des biens indivis.

Art. 606 D. Droits de ceux qui faisaient ménage commun avec le défunt

D. Droits de ceux qui faisaient ménage commun avec le défunt

Les héritiers qui, à l’époque du décès, étaient logés et nourris dans la demeure et aux frais du défunt peuvent exiger que la succession supporte ces charges pendant un mois.


  Chapitre II: Du mode de partage

Art. 607 A. En général

A. En général

1 Les héritiers légaux partagent d’après les mêmes règles entre eux et avec les héritiers institués.

2 Ils conviennent librement du mode de partage, à moins qu’il n’en soit ordonné autrement.

3 Les héritiers possesseurs de biens de la succession ou débiteurs du défunt sont tenus de fournir à cet égard des renseignements précis lors du partage.

Art. 608 B. Règles de partage / I. Dispositions du défunt

B. Règles de partage

I. Dispositions du défunt

1 Le disposant peut, par testament ou pacte successoral, prescrire à ses héritiers certaines règles pour le partage et la formation des lots.

2 Ces règles sont obligatoires pour les héritiers, sous réserve de rétablir, le cas échéant, l’égalité des lots à laquelle le disposant n’aurait pas eu l’intention de porter atteinte.

3 L’attribution d’un objet de la succession à l’un des héritiers n’est pas réputée legs, mais simple règle de partage, si la disposition ne révèle pas une intention contraire de son auteur.

Art. 609 B. Règles de partage / II. Concours de l’autorité

II. Concours de l’autorité

1 Tout créancier qui acquiert ou saisit la part échue à un héritier, ou qui possède contre lui un acte de défaut de biens, peut demander que l’autorité intervienne au partage en lieu et place de cet héritier.

2 La législation cantonale peut prescrire dans d’autres cas encore l’intervention de l’autorité au partage.

Art. 610 C. Mode du partage / I. Égalité des droits des héritiers

C. Mode du partage

I. Égalité des droits des héritiers

1 Sauf disposition contraire, les héritiers ont dans le partage un droit égal à tous les biens de la succession.

2 Ils sont tenus de se communiquer, sur leur situation envers le défunt, tous les renseignements propres à permettre une égale et juste répartition.

3 Chaque héritier peut demander que les dettes soient payées ou garanties avant le partage.

Art. 611 C. Mode du partage / II. Composition des lots

II. Composition des lots

1 Il est procédé à la composition d’autant de lots qu’il y a d’héritiers ou de souches copartageantes.

2 Faute par les héritiers de s’entendre, chacun d’eux peut demander que l’autorité compétente forme les lots; celle-ci tient compte des usages locaux, de la situation personnelle des héritiers et des voeux de la majorité.

3 Les héritiers conviennent de l’attribution des lots; sinon, les lots sont tirés au sort.

Art. 612 C. Mode du partage / III. Attribution et vente de certains biens héréditaires

III. Attribution et vente de certains biens héréditaires

1 Les biens de la succession qui ne peuvent être partagés sans subir une diminution notable de leur valeur sont attribués à l’un des héritiers.

2 Les biens sur le partage ou l’attribution desquels les héritiers ne peuvent s’entendre sont vendus et le prix en est réparti.

3 La vente se fait aux enchères, si l’un des héritiers le demande; en pareil cas, faute par ces derniers de s’entendre, l’autorité compétente ordonne que les enchères seront publiques ou qu’elles n’auront lieu qu’entre héritiers.

Art. 612a1C. Mode du partage / IV. Attribution du logement et du mobilier de ménage au conjoint survivant

IV. Attribution du logement et du mobilier de ménage au conjoint survivant

1 Lorsque la succession comprend la maison ou l’appartement qu’occupaient les époux ou du mobilier de ménage, le conjoint survivant peut demander que la propriété de ces biens lui soit attribuée en imputation sur sa part.

2 À la demande du conjoint survivant ou des autres héritiers légaux, le conjoint survivant peut, si les circonstances le justifient, se voir attribuer, en lieu et place de la propriété, un usufruit ou un droit d’habitation.

3 Le conjoint survivant ne peut faire valoir ces droits sur les locaux dans lesquels le défunt exerçait une profession ou exploitait une entreprise s’ils sont nécessaires à un descendant pour continuer cette activité; les dispositions du droit successoral paysan sont réservées.

4 Le présent article s’applique par analogie aux partenaires enregistrés.2


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).
2 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 8 de la LF du 18 juin 2004 sur le partenariat, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2007 (RO 2005 5685; FF 2003 1192).

Art. 613 D. Règles relatives à certains objets / I. Objets formant un tout, papiers de famille

D. Règles relatives à certains objets

I. Objets formant un tout, papiers de famille

1 Les objets qui par leur nature forment un tout ne sont point partagés, si l’un des héritiers s’y oppose.

2 Les papiers de famille et les choses qui ont une valeur d’affection ne sont pas vendus, si l’un des héritiers s’y oppose.

3 Si ces derniers ne peuvent s’entendre, l’autorité décide de la vente ou de l’attribution de ces objets avec ou sans imputation, en tenant compte des usages locaux et, à défaut d’usages, de la situation personnelle des héritiers.

Art. 613a1D. Règles relatives à certains objets / Ibis. Inventaire

Ibis. Inventaire

Si, au décès du fermier d’une entreprise agricole, l’un de ses héritiers poursuit seul le bail, celui-ci peut demander que l’ensemble des biens meubles (bétail, matériel, provisions, etc.) lui soit attribué, en imputation sur sa part héréditaire, à la valeur qu’ils représentent pour l’exploitation.


1 Introduit par l’art. 92 ch. 1. de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 614 D. Règles relatives à certains objets / II. Créances du défunt contre l’héritier

II. Créances du défunt contre l’héritier

Les créances que le défunt avait contre l’un des héritiers sont imputées sur la part de celui-ci.

Art. 615 D. Règles relatives à certains objets / III. Biens de la succession grevés de gages

III. Biens de la succession grevés de gages

L’héritier auquel sont attribués des biens grevés de gages pour des dettes du défunt sera chargé de ces dettes.

Art. 6161

1 Abrogés par l’art. 92 ch. 1 de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, avec effet au 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 6171D. Règles relatives à certains objets / IV. Immeubles / 1. Reprise / a. Valeur d’imputation

IV. Immeubles

1. Reprise

a. Valeur d’imputation

Les immeubles doivent être imputés sur les parts héréditaires à la valeur vénale qu’ils ont au moment du partage.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’art. 92 ch. 1 de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 618 D. Règles relatives à certains objets / IV. Immeubles / 1. Reprise / b. Procédure

b. Procédure

1 Lorsque les héritiers ne peuvent se mettre d’accord sur le prix d’attribution, il est fixé par des experts officiels.1

2 ...2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).
2 Abrogé par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 6 oct. 1972, avec effet au 15 fév. 1973 (RO 1973 93; FF 1970 I 813. 1971 I 753).

Art. 6191D. Règles relatives à certains objets / V. Entreprises et immeubles agricoles

V. Entreprises et immeubles agricoles

La reprise et l’imputation des entreprises et des immeubles agricoles sont régies par la loi fédérale du 4 octobre 1991 sur le droit foncier rural2.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’art. 92 ch. 1 de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).
2 RS 211.412.11

Art. 620 à 6251

1 Abrogés par l’art. 92 ch. 1 de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, avec effet au 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).


  Chapitre III: Des rapports

Art. 626 A. Obligation de rapporter

A. Obligation de rapporter

1 Les héritiers légaux sont tenus l’un envers l’autre au rapport de toutes les libéralités entre vifs reçues à titre d’avancement d’hoirie.

2 Sont assujettis au rapport, faute par le défunt d’avoir expressément disposé le contraire, les constitutions de dot, frais d’établissement, abandons de biens, remises de dettes et autres avantages semblables faits en faveur de descendants.

Art. 627 B. Rapport en cas d’incapacité ou de répudiation

B. Rapport en cas d’incapacité ou de répudiation

1 Lorsqu’un héritier perd sa qualité avant ou après l’ouverture de la succession, ceux qui prennent sa part sont soumis au rapport en son lieu et place.

2 Le descendant est tenu de rapporter les libéralités faites à ses ascendants, même si elles ne lui sont point parvenues.

Art. 628 C. Conditions / I. En nature ou en moins prenant

C. Conditions

I. En nature ou en moins prenant

1 L’héritier a le choix de rapporter en nature les biens reçus ou d’en imputer la valeur, même lorsque les libéralités excédent le montant de sa part héréditaire.

2 Les autres dispositions du défunt et les droits dérivant de l’action en réduction demeurent réservés.

Art. 629 C. Conditions / II. Libéralités excédant la portion héréditaire

II. Libéralités excédant la portion héréditaire

1 Lorsque les libéralités excédent le montant de la part héréditaire, l’excédent, sous réserve de l’action en réduction, n’est pas sujet au rapport, si la preuve peut être faite que telle était la volonté du disposant.

2 La dispense de rapport est présumée à l’égard des frais d’établissement faits, dans la mesure usitée, au profit de descendants, lors de leur mariage.

Art. 630 C. Conditions / III. Mode de calcul

III. Mode de calcul

1 Le rapport a lieu d’après la valeur des libéralités au jour de l’ouverture de la succession ou d’après le prix de vente des choses antérieurement aliénées.

2 Relativement aux fruits perçus, aux impenses et aux détériorations, les héritiers ont les droits et les obligations du possesseur.

Art. 631 D. Frais d’éducation

D. Frais d’éducation

1 Les dépenses faites pour l’éducation et l’instruction des enfants ne sont rapportables, si une intention contraire du défunt n’est pas prouvée, que dans la mesure où elles excédent les frais usuels.

2 Les enfants qui ne sont pas élevés au moment du décès ou qui sont infirmes prélèvent une indemnité équitable lors du partage.

Art. 632 E. Présents d’usage

E. Présents d’usage

Les présents d’usage ne sont pas sujets au rapport.

Art. 6331

1 Abrogé par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 6 oct. 1972, avec effet au 15 fév. 1973 (RO 1973 93; FF 1970 I 813. 1971 I 753).


  Chapitre IV: De la clôture et des effets du partage

Art. 634 A. Clôture du partage / I. Convention de partage

A. Clôture du partage

I. Convention de partage

1 Le partage oblige les héritiers dès que les lots ont été composés et reçus ou que l’acte de partage a été passé.

2 Cet acte n’est valable que s’il est fait en la forme écrite.

Art. 635 A. Clôture du partage / II. Convention sur parts héréditaires

II. Convention sur parts héréditaires

1 La forme écrite est nécessaire pour les cessions de droits successifs entre cohéritiers.1

2 Les conventions passées entre l’un des cohéritiers et un tiers ne donnent à celui-ci aucun droit d’intervenir dans le partage; le tiers ne peut prétendre qu’à la part attribuée à son cédant.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 636 A. Clôture du partage / III. Pactes sur successions non ouvertes

III. Pactes sur successions non ouvertes

1 Sont nuls et de nul effet tous contrats passés au sujet d’une succession non ouverte, par un héritier avec ses cohéritiers ou un tiers, sans le concours et l’assentiment de celui dont l’hérédité a fait l’objet de la convention.

2 Les prestations faites en vertu d’une semblable convention sont sujettes à répétition.

Art. 637 B. Garantie entre cohéritiers / I. Obligations en résultant

B. Garantie entre cohéritiers

I. Obligations en résultant

1 Les cohéritiers demeurent, après le partage, garants les uns envers les autres selon les règles de la vente.

2 Ils se garantissent l’existence des créances réparties entre eux et répondent, comme cautions simples, de la solvabilité des débiteurs jusqu’à concurrence de la somme pour laquelle ces créances ont été comptées au partage, à moins toutefois qu’il ne s’agisse de papiers-valeurs cotés à la bourse.

3 L’action en garantie se prescrit par un an; le délai court dès le partage ou dès l’exigibilité des créances, si elle est postérieure au partage.

Art. 638 B. Garantie entre cohéritiers / II. Rescision du partage

II. Rescision du partage

Le partage peut être rescindé pour les mêmes causes que les autres contrats.

Art. 639 C. Responsabilité envers les tiers / I. Solidarité

C. Responsabilité envers les tiers

I. Solidarité

1 Les héritiers sont tenus solidairement, même après le partage et sur tous leurs biens, des dettes de la succession, à moins que les créanciers de celles-ci n’aient consenti expressément ou tacitement à la division ou à la délégation de ces dettes.

2 La solidarité cesse toutefois après cinq ans; le délai court dès le partage ou dès l’exigibilité des créances, si elle est postérieure au partage.

Art. 640 C. Responsabilité envers les tiers / II. Recours entre héritiers C. Responsabilité envers les tiers / II. Recours entre héritiers

II. Recours entre héritiers

1 L’héritier qui a payé une dette dont il n’a pas été chargé ou une part de dette supérieure à celle pour laquelle il s’est obligé, a un droit de recours contre ses cohéritiers.

2 Ce recours s’exerce en première ligne contre l’héritier qui s’est chargé de la dette lors du partage.

3 Les héritiers contribuent d’ailleurs, sauf stipulation contraire, au paiement des dettes en proportion de leur part héréditaire.

  Livre quatrième: Des droits réels

  Première partie: De la propriété

  Titre dix-huitième: Dispositions générales

Art. 641 A. Éléments du droit de propriété / I. En général

A. Éléments du droit de propriété

I. En général1

1 Le propriétaire d’une chose a le droit d’en disposer librement, dans les limites de la loi.

2 Il peut la revendiquer contre quiconque la détient sans droit et repousser toute usurpation.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).

Art. 641a1A. Éléments du droit de propriété / II. Animaux

II. Animaux

1 Les animaux ne sont pas des choses.

2 Sauf disposition contraire, les dispositions s’appliquant aux choses sont également valables pour les animaux.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).

Art. 642 B. Étendue du droit de propriété / I. Les parties intégrantes

B. Étendue du droit de propriété

I. Les parties intégrantes

1 Le propriétaire d’une chose l’est de tout ce qui en fait partie intégrante.

2 En fait partie intégrante ce qui, d’après l’usage local, constitue un élément essentiel de la chose et n’en peut être séparé sans la détruire, la détériorer ou l’altérer.

Art. 643 B. Étendue du droit de propriété / II. Les fruits naturels

II. Les fruits naturels

1 Le propriétaire d’une chose l’est également des fruits naturels de celle-ci.

2 Ces fruits sont les produits périodiques et tout ce que l’usage autorise à tirer de la chose suivant sa destination.

3 Les fruits naturels font partie intégrante de la chose jusqu’à leur séparation.

Art. 644 B. Étendue du droit de propriété / III. Les accessoires / 1. Définition

III. Les accessoires

1. Définition

1 Tout acte de disposition relatif à la chose principale s’étend aux accessoires, si le contraire n’a été réservé.

2 Sont des accessoires les objets mobiliers qui, d’après l’usage local ou la volonté clairement manifestée du propriétaire de la chose principale, sont affectés d’une manière durable à l’exploitation, à la jouissance ou à la garde de celle-ci et qu’il y a joints, adaptés ou rattachés pour le service de la chose.

3 Les accessoires ne perdent pas leur qualité lorsqu’ils sont séparés temporairement de la chose principale.

Art. 645 B. Étendue du droit de propriété / III. Les accessoires / 2. Exception

2. Exception

Les effets mobiliers qui ne sont affectés que temporairement à l’usage du possesseur de la chose principale ou ne sont destinés qu’à être consommés par lui, ceux qui sont étrangers à la nature particulière de la chose et ceux qui ne sont rattachés à celle-ci que pour être gardés ou déposés à fin de vente ou de bail, ne peuvent avoir la qualité d’accessoires.

Art. 646 C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 1. Rapports entre les copropriétaires

C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose

I. Copropriété

1. Rapports entre les copropriétaires

1 Lorsque plusieurs personnes ont, chacune pour sa quote-part, la propriété d’une chose qui n’est pas matériellement divisée, elles en sont copropriétaires.

2 Leurs quotes-parts sont présumées égales.

3 Chacun des copropriétaires a les droits et les charges du propriétaire en raison de sa part, qu’il peut aliéner ou engager et que ses créanciers peuvent saisir.

Art. 6471C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 2. Règlement d’utilisation et d’administration

2. Règlement d’utilisation et d’administration

1 Les copropriétaires peuvent convenir d’un règlement d’utilisation et d’administration dérogeant aux dispositions légales et y prévoir que celui-ci peut être modifié à la majorité des copropriétaires.2

1bis La modification des dispositions du règlement d’utilisation et d’administration relatives à l’attribution de droits d’usage particulier doit en outre être approuvée par les copropriétaires directement concernés.3

2 Le règlement ne peut supprimer ou limiter le droit de chaque copropriétaire:

1.
de demander que les actes d’administration indispensables au maintien de la valeur et de l’utilité de la chose soient exécutés et, au besoin, ordonnés par le juge;
2.
de prendre lui-même, aux frais des copropriétaires, les mesures urgentes requises pour préserver la chose d’un dommage imminent ou s’aggravant.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 647a1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 3. Actes d’administration courante

3. Actes d’administration courante

1 Chaque copropriétaire a qualité pour faire les actes d’administration courante, tels que réparations d’entretien, travaux de culture et de récolte, garde et surveillance de courte durée, de même que pour conclure des contrats à cet effet et exercer les attributions découlant de ces contrats, de baux à loyer et à ferme ou de contrats d’entreprises, y compris le pouvoir de payer et d’encaisser des sommes d’argent pour l’ensemble des copropriétaires.

2 Par une décision prise à la majorité de tous les copropriétaires, la compétence de faire les actes d’administration courante peut être réglée autrement, sous réserve des dispositions de la loi relatives aux mesures nécessaires et urgentes.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 647b1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 4. Actes d’administration plus importants

4. Actes d’administration plus importants

1 Une décision prise à la majorité de tous les copropriétaires, représentant en outre, leurs parts réunies, plus de la moitié de la chose, est nécessaire pour les actes d’administration plus importants, notamment les changements de culture ou d’utilisation, la conclusion ou la résiliation de baux à loyer et à ferme, la participation à des améliorations du sol et la désignation d’un administrateur dont les attributions ne seront pas limitées aux actes d’administration courante.

2 Sont réservées les dispositions sur les travaux de construction nécessaires.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 647c1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 5. Travaux de construction / a. Nécessaires

5. Travaux de construction

a. Nécessaires

Une décision prise à la majorité de tous les copropriétaires est nécessaire pour les travaux d’entretien, de réparation et de réfection qu’exige le maintien de la valeur et de l’utilité de la chose, sauf s’il s’agit d’actes d’administration courante que chacun d’eux peut faire.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 647d1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 5. Travaux de construction / b. Utiles

b. Utiles

1 Les travaux de réfection et de transformation destinés à augmenter la valeur de la chose ou à améliorer son rendement ou son utilité sont décidés à la majorité de tous les copropriétaires représentant en outre, leurs parts réunies, plus de la moitié de la chose.

2 Les modifications ayant pour effet de gêner notablement et durablement, pour un copropriétaire, l’usage ou la jouissance de la chose selon sa destination actuelle ou qui en compromettent le rendement ne peuvent pas être exécutées sans son consentement.

3 Lorsque des modifications entraîneraient pour un copropriétaire des dépenses qui ne sauraient lui être imposées, notamment parce qu’elles sont disproportionnées à la valeur de sa part, elles ne peuvent être exécutées sans son consentement que si les autres copropriétaires se chargent de sa part des frais, en tant qu’elle dépasse le montant qui peut lui être demandé.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 647e1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 5. Travaux de construction / c. Pour l’embellissement et la commodité

c. Pour l’embellissement et la commodité

1 Les travaux de construction destinés exclusivement à embellir la chose, à en améliorer l’aspect ou à en rendre l’usage plus aisé ne peuvent être exécutés qu’avec le consentement de tous les copropriétaires.

2 Si ces travaux sont décidés à la majorité de tous les copropriétaires représentant en outre, leurs parts réunies, plus de la moitié de la chose, ils peuvent aussi être exécutés malgré l’opposition d’un copropriétaire dont le droit d’usage et de jouissance n’est pas entravé durablement de ce fait, pourvu que les autres copropriétaires l’indemnisent de l’atteinte temporaire portée à son droit et se chargent de sa part de frais.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 6481C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 6. Actes de disposition

6. Actes de disposition

1 Chaque copropriétaire peut veiller aux intérêts communs; il jouit de la chose et en use dans la mesure compatible avec le droit des autres.

2 Le concours de tous est nécessaire pour les aliénations, constitutions de droits réels ou changements dans la destination de la chose, à moins qu’ils n’aient unanimement établi d’autres règles à cet égard.

3 Si des parts de copropriété sont grevées de droits de gage ou de charges foncières, les copropriétaires ne peuvent plus grever la chose elle-même de tels droits.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 6491C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 7. Contribution aux frais et charges

7. Contribution aux frais et charges

1 Les frais d’administration, impôts et autres charges résultant de la copropriété ou grevant la chose commune sont supportés, sauf disposition contraire, par tous les copropriétaires en raison de leurs parts.

2 Si l’un des copropriétaires paie au delà de sa part, il a recours contre les autres dans la même proportion.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 649a1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 8. Opposabilité; mention au registre foncier

8. Opposabilité; mention au registre foncier2

Le règlement d’utilisation et d’administration convenu par les copropriétaires, les mesures administratives prises par eux, de même que les décisions et ordonnances judiciaires, sont aussi opposables à l’ayant cause d’un copropriétaire et à l’acquéreur d’un droit réel sur une part de copropriété.

2 Ils peuvent être mentionnés au registre foncier en cas de copropriété d’un immeuble.3


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 649b1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 9. Exclusion de la communauté / a. Copropriétaire

9. Exclusion de la communauté

a. Copropriétaire

1 Le copropriétaire peut être exclu de la communauté par décision judiciaire lorsque, par son comportement ou celui de personnes auxquelles il a cédé l’usage de la chose ou dont il répond, des obligations envers tous les autres ou certains copropriétaires sont si gravement enfreintes que l’on ne peut exiger d’eux la continuation de la communauté.

2 Si la communauté ne comprend que deux copropriétaires, chacun d’eux peut intenter action; dans les autres cas et sauf convention contraire, une autorisation votée à la majorité de tous les copropriétaires, non compris le défendeur, est nécessaire.

3 Le juge qui prononce l’exclusion condamne le défendeur à aliéner sa part de copropriété et, à défaut d’exécution dans le délai fixé, ordonne la vente aux enchères publiques de la part, les dispositions relatives à la réalisation forcée des immeubles étant applicables, à l’exclusion de celles qui régissent la fin de la copropriété.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 649c1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 9. Exclusion de la communauté / b. Titulaires d’autres droits

b. Titulaires d’autres droits

Les dispositions relatives à l’exclusion d’un copropriétaire s’appliquent par analogie à l’usufruitier et au titulaire d’autres droits de jouissance sur une part de copropriété s’il s’agit de droits réels ou de droits personnels annotés au registre foncier.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 6501C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 10. Fin de la copropriété / a. Action en partage

10. Fin de la copropriété

a. Action en partage

1 Chacun des copropriétaires a le droit d’exiger le partage, s’il n’est tenu de demeurer dans l’indivision en vertu d’un acte juridique, par suite de la constitution d’une propriété par étages ou en raison de l’affectation de la chose à un but durable.

2 Le partage peut être exclu par convention pour 50 ans au plus; s’il s’agit d’immeubles, la convention doit, pour être valable, être reçue en la forme authentique et elle peut être annotée au registre foncier.2

3 Le partage ne doit pas être provoqué en temps inopportun.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 651 C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 10. Fin de la copropriété / b. Mode de partage

b. Mode de partage

1 La copropriété cesse par le partage en nature, par la vente de gré à gré ou aux enchères avec répartition subséquente du prix, ou par l’acquisition que l’un ou plusieurs des copropriétaires font des parts des autres.

2 Si les copropriétaires ne s’entendent pas sur le mode du partage, le juge ordonne le partage en nature et, si la chose ne peut être divisée sans diminution notable de sa valeur, la vente soit aux enchères publiques, soit entre les copropriétaires.

3 Dans le cas de partage en nature, l’inégalité des parts peut être compensée par des soultes.

Art. 651a1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / I. Copropriété / 10. Fin de la copropriété / c. Animaux vivant en milieu domestique

c. Animaux vivant en milieu domestique

1 Lorsqu’il s’agit d’animaux qui vivent en milieu domestique et ne sont pas gardés dans un but patrimonial ou de gain, le juge attribue en cas de litige la propriété exclusive à la partie qui, en vertu des critères appliqués en matière de protection des animaux, représente la meilleure solution pour l’animal.

2 Le juge peut condamner l’attributaire de l’animal à verser à l’autre partie une indemnité équitable; il en fixe librement le montant.

3 Le juge prend les mesures provisionnelles nécessaires, en particulier pour le placement provisoire de l’animal.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).

Art. 652 C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / II. Propriété commune / 1. Cas

II. Propriété commune

1. Cas

Lorsque plusieurs personnes formant une communauté en vertu de la loi ou d’un contrat sont propriétaires d’une chose, le droit de chacune s’étend à la chose entière.

Art. 653 C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / II. Propriété commune / 2. Effets

2. Effets

1 Les droits et les devoirs des communistes sont déterminés par les règles de la communauté légale ou conventionnelle qui les unit.

2 À défaut d’autre règle, les droits des communistes, en particulier celui de disposer de la chose, ne peuvent être exercés qu’en vertu d’une décision unanime.

3 Le partage et le droit de disposer d’une quote-part sont exclus aussi longtemps que dure la communauté.

Art. 654 C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / II. Propriété commune / 3. Fin

3. Fin

1 La propriété commune s’éteint par l’aliénation de la chose ou la fin de la communauté.

2 Le partage s’opère, sauf disposition contraire, comme en matière de copropriété.

Art. 654a1C. Propriété de plusieurs sur une chose / III. Propriété de plusieurs sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles

III. Propriété de plusieurs sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles

La dissolution de la propriété de plusieurs sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles est en outre régie par la loi fédérale du 4 octobre 1991 sur le droit foncier rural2.


1 Introduit par l’art. 92 ch. 1. de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).
2 RS 211.412.11


  Titre dix-neuvième: De la propriété foncière

  Chapitre I: De l’objet, de l’acquisition et de la perte de la propriété foncière

Art. 6551A. Objet / I. Immeuble

A. Objet

I. Immeuble2

1 La propriété foncière a pour objet les immeubles.

2 Sont immeubles dans le sens de la présente loi:

1.
les biens-fonds;
2.
les droits distincts et permanents, immatriculés au registre foncier;
3.
les mines;
4.
les parts de copropriété d’un immeuble.

3 Une servitude sur un immeuble peut être immatriculée comme droit distinct et permanent aux conditions suivantes:

1.
elle n’est établie ni en faveur d’un fonds dominant ni exclusivement en faveur d’une personne déterminée;
2.
elle est établie pour 30 ans au moins ou pour une durée indéterminée.3

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 655a1A. Objet / II. Propriété dépendante

II. Propriété dépendante

1 Un immeuble peut être rattaché à un autre immeuble de telle manière que le propriétaire de l’immeuble principal soit également propriétaire de l’immeuble qui lui est lié. L’immeuble dépendant partage le sort de l’immeuble principal et ne peut être ni aliéné, ni mis en gage, ni grevé d’un autre droit réel séparément.

2 Le droit de préemption légal des copropriétaires et le droit d’exiger le partage ne peuvent être invoqués lorsque la chose a été affectée à un but durable.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 656 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / I. Inscription

B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière

I. Inscription

1 L’inscription au registre foncier est nécessaire pour l’acquisition de la propriété foncière.

2 Celui qui acquiert un immeuble par occupation, succession, expropriation, exécution forcée ou jugement en devient toutefois propriétaire avant l’inscription, mais il n’en peut disposer dans le registre foncier qu’après que cette formalité a été remplie.

Art. 657 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 1. Actes translatifs de propriété

II. Modes d’acquisition

1. Actes translatifs de propriété

1 Les contrats ayant pour objet le transfert de la propriété ne sont valables que s’ils sont reçus en la forme authentique.

2 Les dispositions pour cause de mort et le contrat de mariage demeurent soumis aux formes qui leur sont propres.

Art. 658 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 2. Occupation

2. Occupation

1 Un immeuble immatriculé ne peut être acquis par occupation que s’il résulte du registre foncier que cet immeuble est devenu chose sans maître.

2 L’occupation des portions du sol qui ne sont pas immatriculées est soumise aux règles concernant les choses sans maître.

Art. 659 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 3. Formation de nouvelles terres

3. Formation de nouvelles terres

1 Les terres utilisables qui se forment dans les régions sans maître par alluvions, remblais, glissements de terrain, changements de cours ou de niveau des eaux publiques, ou d’autre manière encore, appartiennent au canton dans lequel elles se trouvent.

2 Le droit cantonal peut attribuer ces terres aux propriétaires des fonds contigus.

3 Celui qui prouve que des parties de son immeuble en ont été détachées a le droit de les reprendre dans un délai convenable.

Art. 660 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 4. Glissements de terrain / a. En général

4. Glissements de terrain

a. En général1

1 Les glissements de terrain ne modifient pas les limites des immeubles.

2 Les terres et les autres objets ainsi transportés d’un immeuble sur un autre sont soumis aux règles concernant les épaves ou l’accession.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 660a1B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 4. Glissements de terrain / b. Permanents

b. Permanents

1 Le principe selon lequel les glissements de terrain ne modifient pas les limites des immeubles ne s’applique pas aux territoires en mouvement permanent désignés comme tels par les cantons.

2 Lors de la désignation de ces territoires, la nature des immeubles concernés doit être prise en considération.

3 L’indication qu’un immeuble appartient à un tel territoire doit être communiquée de manière appropriée aux intéressés et mentionnée au registre foncier.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 660b1B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 4. Glissements de terrain / c. Nouvelle fixation des limites

c. Nouvelle fixation des limites

1 Lorsqu’à la suite d’un glissement de terrain une limite n’est plus appropriée, le propriétaire foncier touché peut demander qu’elle soit de nouveau fixée.

2 La plus-value ou la moins-value qui en résulte doit être compensée.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 661 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 5. Prescription / a. Ordinaire

5. Prescription

a. Ordinaire

Les droits de celui qui a été inscrit sans cause légitime au registre foncier comme propriétaire d’un immeuble ne peuvent plus être contestés lorsqu’il a possédé l’immeuble de bonne foi, sans interruption et paisiblement pendant dix ans.

Art. 662 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 5. Prescription / b. Extraordinaire

b. Extraordinaire

1 Celui qui a possédé pendant trente ans sans interruption, paisiblement et comme propriétaire, un immeuble non immatriculé, peut en requérir l’inscription à titre de propriétaire.

2 Le possesseur peut, sous les mêmes conditions, exercer le même droit à l’égard d’un immeuble dont le registre foncier ne révèle pas le propriétaire ou dont le propriétaire était mort ou déclaré absent au début du délai de trente ans.

3 Toutefois, l’inscription n’a lieu que sur l’ordre du juge et si aucune opposition ne s’est produite pendant un délai fixé par sommation officielle, ou si les oppositions ont été écartées.

Art. 663 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 5. Prescription / c. Délais

c. Délais

Les règles admises pour la prescription des créances s’appliquent à la computation des délais, à l’interruption et à la suspension de la prescription acquisitive.

Art. 664 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / II. Modes d’acquisition / 6. Choses sans maître et biens du domaine public

6. Choses sans maître et biens du domaine public

1 Les choses sans maître et les biens du domaine public sont soumis à la haute police de l’État sur le territoire duquel ils se trouvent.

2 Sauf preuve contraire, les eaux publiques, de même que les régions impropres à la culture, rochers, éboulis, névés, glaciers et les sources en jaillissant, ne rentrent pas dans le domaine privé.

3 La législation cantonale règle l’occupation des choses sans maître, ainsi que l’exploitation et le commun usage des biens du domaine public, tels que routes, places, cours d’eau et lits de rivières.

Art. 665 B. Acquisition de la propriété foncière / III. Droit à l’inscription

III. Droit à l’inscription

1 Celui qui est au bénéfice d’un titre d’acquisition peut exiger que le propriétaire fasse opérer l’inscription; en cas de refus, il peut demander au juge l’attribution du droit de propriété.

2 L’occupation, l’héritage, l’expropriation, l’exécution forcée et le jugement autorisent l’acquéreur à réclamer l’inscription de son chef.

3 Les mutations qui résultent par l’effet de la loi d’une communauté de biens ou de sa dissolution sont inscrites au registre foncier à la réquisition d’un des époux.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 666 C. Perte de la propriété foncière

C. Perte de la propriété foncière

1 La propriété foncière s’éteint par la radiation de l’inscription et par la perte totale de l’immeuble.

2 En cas d’expropriation pour cause d’utilité publique, le moment où la propriété s’éteint est déterminé par les lois spéciales de la Confédération et des cantons.

Art. 666a1D. Mesures judiciaires / I. Propriétaire introuvable

D. Mesures judiciaires

I. Propriétaire introuvable

1 Lorsque la personne inscrite au registre foncier en qualité de propriétaire ne peut être identifiée ou que son domicile est inconnu, ou que le nom ou le domicile de l’un ou de plusieurs de ses héritiers sont inconnus, le juge peut, sur requête, ordonner les mesures nécessaires.

2 Le juge peut en particulier nommer un représentant. Sur demande, il fixe l’étendue de son pouvoir de représentation. Si le juge n’ordonne rien d’autre, ce pouvoir se limite à des mesures conservatoires.

3 Sont habilités à requérir des mesures:

1.
toute personne ayant un intérêt digne de protection;
2.
l’office du registre foncier du lieu de situation de l’immeuble.

4 Les mesures ordonnées n’interrompent pas le délai de prescription acquisitive extraordinaire.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 666b1D. Mesures judiciaires / II. Absence des organes prescrits

II. Absence des organes prescrits

Lorsqu’une personne morale ou une autre entité juridique inscrites au registre foncier en tant que propriétaire ne dispose plus des organes prescrits, toute personne ayant un intérêt digne de protection ou l’office du registre foncier du lieu de situation de l’immeuble sont habilités à requérir du juge qu’il ordonne les mesures nécessaires en relation avec l’immeuble.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).


  Chapitre II: Des effets de la propriété foncière

Art. 667 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / I. En général

A. Étendue de la propriété foncière

I. En général

1 La propriété du sol emporte celle du dessus et du dessous, dans toute la hauteur et la profondeur utiles à son exercice.

2 Elle comprend, sous réserve des restrictions légales, les constructions, les plantations et les sources.

Art. 668 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / II. Limites / 1. Indication des limites

II. Limites

1. Indication des limites

1 Les limites des immeubles sont déterminées par le plan et par la démarcation sur le terrain.

2 S’il y a contradiction entre les limites du plan et celles du terrain, l’exactitude des premières est présumée.

3 La présomption ne s’applique pas aux territoires en mouvement permanent désignés comme tels par les cantons.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 669 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / II. Limites / 2. Obligation de borner

2. Obligation de borner

Lorsque les limites sont incertaines, chaque propriétaire est tenu, à la réquisition du voisin, de prêter son concours en vue de les fixer soit par la rectification du plan, soit par la démarcation sur le terrain.

Art. 670 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / II. Limites / 3. Démarcations communes

3. Démarcations communes

Les clôtures servant à la démarcation de deux immeubles, telles que murs, haies, barrières, qui se trouvent sur la limite, sont présumées appartenir en copropriété aux deux voisins.

Art. 671 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / III. Constructions sur le fonds / 1. Fonds et matériaux / a. Propriété

III. Constructions sur le fonds

1. Fonds et matériaux

a. Propriété

1 Lorsqu’un propriétaire emploie les matériaux d’autrui pour construire sur son propre fonds, ou qu’un tiers emploie ses propres matériaux sur le fonds d’autrui, ces matériaux deviennent partie intégrante de l’immeuble.

2 Toutefois, si les matériaux ont été employés sans l’assentiment de leur propriétaire, celui-ci peut les revendiquer et en exiger la séparation aux frais du propriétaire du fonds, pourvu qu’il n’en résulte pas un dommage excessif.

3 Si la construction a été faite sans l’assentiment du propriétaire du fonds, il peut exiger, sous la même réserve, que les matériaux soient enlevés aux frais du constructeur.

Art. 672 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / III. Constructions sur le fonds / 1. Fonds et matériaux / b. Indemnités

b. Indemnités

1 Lorsque la séparation n’a pas lieu, le propriétaire du fonds est tenu de payer pour les matériaux une indemnité équitable.

2 Si les constructions ont été faites de mauvaise foi par le propriétaire du fonds, il peut être condamné à la réparation intégrale du dommage.

3 Si elles ont été faites de mauvaise foi par le propriétaire des matériaux, l’indemnité pourra ne pas excéder la valeur minimale des constructions pour le propriétaire du fonds.

Art. 673 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / III. Constructions sur le fonds / 1. Fonds et matériaux / c. Attribution de la propriété du fonds

c. Attribution de la propriété du fonds

Si la valeur des constructions excède évidemment celle du fonds, la partie qui est de bonne foi peut demander que la propriété du tout soit attribuée au propriétaire des matériaux, contre paiement d’une indemnité équitable.

Art. 674 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / III. Constructions sur le fonds / 2. Constructions empiétant sur le fonds d’autrui

2. Constructions empiétant sur le fonds d’autrui

1 Les constructions et autres ouvrages qui empiètent sur le fonds voisin restent partie intégrante de l’autre fonds, lorsque le propriétaire de celui-ci est au bénéfice d’un droit réel.

2 Ces empiétements peuvent être inscrits comme servitudes au registre foncier.

3 Lorsque le propriétaire lésé, après avoir eu connaissance de l’empiétement, ne s’y est pas opposé en temps utile, l’auteur des constructions et autres ouvrages peut demander, s’il est de bonne foi et si les circonstances le permettent, que l’empiétement à titre de droit réel ou la surface usurpée lui soient attribués contre paiement d’une indemnité équitable.

Art. 675 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / III. Constructions sur le fonds / 3. Droit de superficie

3. Droit de superficie

1 Les constructions et autres ouvrages établis au-dessus ou au-dessous d’un fonds, ou unis avec lui de quelque autre manière durable, peuvent avoir un propriétaire distinct, à la condition d’être inscrits comme servitudes au registre foncier.

2 Les divers étages d’une maison ne peuvent être l’objet d’un droit de superficie.

Art. 676 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / III. Constructions sur le fonds / 4. Conduites

4. Conduites1

1 Les conduites de desserte et d’évacuation qui se trouvent hors du fonds pour lequel elles sont établies sont, sauf disposition contraire, réputées faire partie de l’entreprise dont elles proviennent ou à laquelle elles conduisent et appartenir au propriétaire de celle-ci.2

2 Lorsque le droit de les établir ne résulte pas des règles applicables aux rapports de voisinage, ces conduites ne grèvent de droits réels le fonds d’autrui que si elles sont constituées en servitudes.

3 La servitude est constituée dès l’établissement de la conduite si celle-ci est apparente. Dans le cas contraire, elle est constituée par son inscription au registre foncier.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 677 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / III. Constructions sur le fonds / 5. Constructions mobilières

5. Constructions mobilières

1 Les constructions légères, telles que chalets, boutiques, baraques, élevées sur le fonds d’autrui sans intention de les y établir à demeure, appartiennent aux propriétaires de ces choses.

2 Elles ne sont pas inscrites au registre foncier.

Art. 678 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / IV. Plantations

IV. Plantations

1 Si quelqu’un a mis dans son fonds des plantes appartenant à autrui ou ses propres plantes dans le fonds d’un tiers, les intéressés ont les mêmes droits et obligations que dans le cas de constructions élevées avec des matériaux étrangers ou de constructions mobilières.

2 Une servitude correspondant au droit de superficie sur des plantes isolées ou des plantations peut être établie pour dix ans au moins et pour 100 ans au plus.1

3 Le propriétaire grevé peut demander le rachat de la servitude avant l’expiration de la durée convenue s’il a conclu avec l’ayant droit un contrat de bail à ferme sur l’utilisation du sol et que ce contrat est résilié. Le juge décide des conséquences pécuniaires en tenant compte de toutes les circonstances.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 juin 2003, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2004 (RO 2003 4121; FF 2002 4395).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 juin 2003, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2004 (RO 2003 4121; FF 2002 4395).

Art. 679 A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / V. Responsabilité du propriétaire / 1. En cas d’excès du droit de propriété

V. Responsabilité du propriétaire

1. En cas d’excès du droit de propriété1

Celui qui est atteint ou menacé d’un dommage parce qu’un propriétaire excède son droit, peut actionner ce propriétaire pour qu’il remette les choses en l’état ou prenne des mesures en vue d’écarter le danger, sans préjudice de tous dommages-intérêts.

2 Lorsqu’une construction ou une installation prive l’immeuble voisin de certaines de ses qualités, le propriétaire ne peut être actionné que si les dispositions régissant la construction ou l’installation en vigueur lors de leur édification n’ont pas été respectées.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 679a1A. Étendue de la propriété foncière / V. Responsabilité du propriétaire / 2. En cas d’exploitation licite d’un fonds

2. En cas d’exploitation licite d’un fonds

Lorsque, par l’exploitation licite de son fonds, notamment par des travaux de construction, un propriétaire cause temporairement à un voisin des nuisances inévitables et excessives entraînant un dommage, le voisin ne peut exiger du propriétaire du fonds que le versement de dommages-intérêts.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 680 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / I. En général

B. Restriction de la propriété foncière

I. En général

1 Les restrictions légales de la propriété existent sans qu’il y ait lieu de les inscrire au registre foncier.

2 Elles ne peuvent être supprimées ou modifiées que par un acte authentique et une inscription.

3 Les restrictions établies dans l’intérêt public ne peuvent être ni modifiées, ni supprimées.

Art. 6811B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / II. Quant au droit d’aliénation; droits de préemption légaux / 1. Principes

II. Quant au droit d’aliénation; droits de préemption légaux

1. Principes

1 Les droits de préemption légaux peuvent aussi être exercés en cas de réalisation forcée, mais seulement lors des enchères mêmes et aux conditions de l’adjudication; au demeurant, les droits de préemption légaux peuvent être invoqués aux conditions applicables aux droits de préemption conventionnels.

2 Le droit de préemption est caduc lorsque l’immeuble est aliéné à une personne qui est titulaire d’un droit de préemption de même rang ou de rang préférable.

3 Les droits de préemption légaux ne sont ni transmissibles par succession ni cessibles. Ils priment les droits de préemption conventionnels.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 681a1B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / II. Quant au droit d’aliénation; droits de préemption légaux / 2. Exercice

2. Exercice

1 Le vendeur doit informer les titulaires du droit de préemption de la conclusion du contrat de vente et de son contenu.

2 Si le titulaire entend exercer son droit, il doit l’invoquer dans les trois mois à compter du moment où il a eu connaissance de la conclusion du contrat et de son contenu, mais au plus tard deux ans après l’inscription du nouveau propriétaire au registre foncier.

3 Dans ces délais, le titulaire peut invoquer son droit contre tout propriétaire de l’immeuble.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 681b1B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / II. Quant au droit d’aliénation; droits de préemption légaux / 3. Modification, renonciation

3. Modification, renonciation

1 La convention supprimant ou modifiant un droit de préemption légal n’est valable que si elle est passée en la forme authentique. Elle peut être annotée au registre foncier lorsque le droit de préemption appartient au propriétaire actuel d’un autre immeuble.

2 Après la survenance du cas de préemption, le titulaire peut renoncer par écrit à exercer un droit de préemption légal.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 6821B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / II. Quant au droit d’aliénation; droits de préemption légaux / 4. En cas de copropriété et de droit de superficie

4. En cas de copropriété et de droit de superficie2

1 Les copropriétaires ont un droit de préemption contre tout acquéreur d’une part qui n’est pas copropriétaire. Lorsque plusieurs copropriétaires font valoir leur droit de préemption, la part leur est attribuée en proportion de leur part de copropriété au moment de l’attribution.3

2 Le propriétaire d’un fonds grevé d’un droit de superficie distinct et permanent a également un droit de préemption légal contre tout acquéreur du droit de superficie; le superficiaire a le même droit de préemption contre tout acquéreur du fonds, dans la mesure où le fonds est mis à contribution par l’exercice du droit de superficie.

3 ...4


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).
4 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, avec effet au 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 682a1B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / II. Quant au droit d’aliénation; droits de préemption légaux / 5. Droits de préemption sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles

5. Droits de préemption sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles

Les droits de préemption sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles sont en outre régis par la loi fédérale du 4 octobre 1991 sur le droit foncier rural2.


1 Introduit par l’art. 92 ch. 1. de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).
2 RS 211.412.11

Art. 6831

1 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, avec effet au 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 684 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 1. Atteintes excessives

III. Rapport de voisinage

1. Atteintes excessives1

1 Le propriétaire est tenu, dans l’exercice de son droit, spécialement dans ses travaux d’exploitation industrielle, de s’abstenir de tout excès au détriment de la propriété du voisin.

2 Sont interdits en particulier la pollution de l’air, les mauvaises odeurs, le bruit, les vibrations, les rayonnements ou la privation de lumière ou d’ensoleillement qui ont un effet dommageable et qui excédent les limites de la tolérance que se doivent les voisins d’après l’usage local, la situation et la nature des immeubles.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 685 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 2. Fouilles et constructions / a. Règle

2. Fouilles et constructions

a. Règle

1 Le propriétaire qui fait des fouilles ou des constructions ne doit pas nuire à ses voisins en ébranlant leur terrain, en l’exposant à un dommage ou en compromettant les ouvrages qui s’y trouvent.

2 Les dispositions légales concernant les empiétements sur fonds d’autrui s’appliquent aux constructions contraires aux règles sur les rapports de voisinage.

Art. 686 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 2. Fouilles et constructions / b. Dispositions réservées au droit cantonal

b. Dispositions réservées au droit cantonal

1 La législation cantonale peut déterminer les distances que les propriétaires sont tenus d’observer dans les fouilles ou les constructions.

2 Elle peut établir d’autres règles encore pour les constructions.

Art. 687 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 3. Plantes / a. Règle

3. Plantes

a. Règle

1 Tout propriétaire a le droit de couper et de garder les branches et racines qui avancent sur son fonds, si elles lui portent préjudice et si, après réclamation, le voisin ne les enlève pas dans un délai convenable.

2 Le propriétaire qui laisse des branches d’arbres avancer sur ses bâtiments ou ses cultures a droit aux fruits de ces branches.

3 Ces règles ne s’appliquent pas aux forêts limitrophes.

Art. 688 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 3. Plantes / b. Dispositions réservées au droit cantonal

b. Dispositions réservées au droit cantonal

La législation cantonale peut déterminer la distance que les propriétaires sont tenus d’observer dans leurs plantations, selon les diverses espèces de plantes et d’immeubles; elle peut, d’autre part, obliger les voisins à souffrir que les branches et les racines d’arbres fruitiers avancent sur leurs fonds, comme aussi régler ou supprimer le droit du propriétaire aux fruits pendant sur son terrain.

Art. 689 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 4. Écoulement des eaux

4. Écoulement des eaux

1 Le propriétaire est tenu de recevoir sur son fonds les eaux qui s’écoulent naturellement du fonds supérieur, notamment celles de pluie, de neige ou de sources non captées.

2 Aucun des voisins ne peut modifier cet écoulement naturel au détriment de l’autre.

3 L’eau qui s’écoule sur le fonds inférieur et qui lui est nécessaire ne peut être retenue que dans la mesure où elle est indispensable au fonds supérieur.

Art. 690 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 5. Drainage

5. Drainage

1 Le propriétaire d’un fonds est tenu de recevoir sans indemnité les eaux provenant du drainage du fonds supérieur, si elles s’écoulaient déjà naturellement sur son terrain.

2 S’il éprouve un dommage de ce fait, il peut exiger du propriétaire du fonds supérieur qu’il établisse à ses propres frais une conduite à travers le fonds inférieur.

Art. 691 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 6. Lignes et conduites traversant un fonds / a. Obligation de les tolérer

6. Lignes et conduites traversant un fonds

a. Obligation de les tolérer1

1 Le propriétaire d’un fonds est tenu, contre réparation intégrale du dommage, de permettre l’établissement à travers son fonds des lignes ou des conduites de desserte et d’évacuation permettant de viabiliser un autre fonds s’il est impossible ou excessivement coûteux d’équiper celui-ci autrement.2

2 La faculté d’établir ces ouvrages sur fonds d’autrui ne peut être dérivée du droit de voisinage dans les cas soumis à la législation cantonale ou fédérale en matière d’expropriation pour cause d’utilité publique.

3 Ces raccordements sont inscrits comme servitudes au registre foncier aux frais de l’ayant droit, sur requête de l’ayant droit ou du propriétaire grevé. Le droit de conduite est opposable à un acquéreur de bonne foi, même en l’absence d’inscription.3


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 692 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 6. Lignes et conduites traversant un fonds / b. Sauvegarde des intérêts du propriétaire grevé

b. Sauvegarde des intérêts du propriétaire grevé

1 Le propriétaire grevé peut exiger que ses intérêts soient pris équitablement en considération.

2 Dans des circonstances extraordinaires et si les ouvrages consistent en conduites aériennes, il peut demander qu’une portion convenable du terrain sur lequel ces conduites seront établies lui soit achetée à un prix qui le dédommage entièrement.

Art. 693 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 6. Lignes et conduites traversant un fonds / c. Faits nouveaux

c. Faits nouveaux

1 Si les choses se modifient, le propriétaire peut exiger que les installations soient déplacées conformément à ses intérêts.

2 Les frais de ce déplacement sont, dans la règle, à la charge de l’autre partie.

3 Toutefois, le propriétaire grevé peut être tenu, si cette obligation est justifiée par des circonstances spéciales, de payer une part équitable des frais.

Art. 694 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 7. Droits de passage / a. Passage nécessaire

7. Droits de passage

a. Passage nécessaire

1 Le propriétaire qui n’a qu’une issue insuffisante sur la voie publique peut exiger de ses voisins qu’ils lui cèdent le passage nécessaire, moyennant pleine indemnité.

2 Ce droit s’exerce en premier lieu contre le voisin à qui le passage peut être le plus naturellement réclamé en raison de l’état antérieur des propriétés et des voies d’accès, et, au besoin, contre celui sur le fonds duquel le passage est le moins dommageable.

3 Le passage nécessaire sera fixé en ayant égard aux intérêts des deux parties.

Art. 695 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 7. Droits de passage / b. Autres passages

b. Autres passages

La législation cantonale peut régler la faculté réciproque des propriétaires d’emprunter le fonds voisin pour travaux d’exploitation, de réparation ou de construction sur leur propre fonds; elle peut régir aussi les droits de charrue, d’abreuvoir, de passage en saison morte de dévalage et autres droits analogues.

Art. 696 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 7. Droits de passage / c. Mention au registre

c. Mention au registre

1 Les droits de passage directement établis par la loi sont dispensés de l’inscription.

2 Toutefois, il en est fait mention au registre s’ils sont permanents.

Art. 697 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 8. Clôtures

8. Clôtures

1 Chaque propriétaire supporte les frais de clôture de son fonds, sous réserve des règles applicables aux clôtures communes.

2 L’obligation de clore les fonds et le mode de clôture sont régis par le droit cantonal.

Art. 698 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / III. Rapport de voisinage / 9. Entretien d’ouvrages

9. Entretien d’ouvrages

Les ouvrages nécessaires à l’exercice des droits de voisinage sont à la charge des propriétaires en raison de l’intérêt de chacun d’eux.

Art. 699 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / IV. Droit d’accès sur le fonds d’autrui / 1. Forêts et pâturages

IV. Droit d’accès sur le fonds d’autrui

1. Forêts et pâturages

1 Chacun a libre accès aux forêts et pâturages d’autrui et peut s’approprier baies, champignons et autres menus fruits sauvages, conformément à l’usage local, à moins que l’autorité compétente n’ait édicté, dans l’intérêt des cultures, des défenses spéciales limitées à certains fonds.

2 La législation cantonale peut déterminer la mesure en laquelle il est permis de pénétrer dans le fonds d’autrui pour la chasse ou la pêche.

Art. 700 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / IV. Droit d’accès sur le fonds d’autrui / 2. Recherches des épaves, etc.

2. Recherches des épaves, etc.

1 Lorsque, par l’effet de l’eau, du vent, des avalanches, de toute autre force naturelle ou par cas fortuit, des objets quelconques sont entraînés sur le fonds d’un tiers, ou que des animaux, tels que bestiaux, essaims d’abeilles, volailles, poissons, s’y transportent, le propriétaire de l’immeuble doit en permettre la recherche et l’enlèvement aux ayants droit.

2 S’il en résulte un dommage, il peut réclamer une indemnité et exercer de ce chef un droit de rétention.

Art. 701 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / IV. Droit d’accès sur le fonds d’autrui / 3. Cas de nécessité

3. Cas de nécessité

1 Si quelqu’un ne peut se préserver ou préserver autrui d’un dommage imminent ou d’un danger présent qu’en portant atteinte à la propriété d’un tiers, celui-ci est tenu de souffrir cette atteinte, pourvu qu’elle soit de peu d’importance en comparaison du dommage ou du danger qu’il s’agit de prévenir.

2 Le propriétaire peut, s’il a subi un préjudice, réclamer une indemnité équitable.

Art. 702 B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / V. Restrictions de droit public / 1. En général

V. Restrictions de droit public

1. En général

Est réservé le droit de la Confédération, des cantons et des communes d’apporter dans l’intérêt public d’autres restrictions à la propriété foncière, notamment en ce qui concerne la police sanitaire, la police des constructions, du feu, des forêts et des routes, les chemins de halage, le bornage et les signaux trigonométriques, les améliorations du sol, le morcellement des fonds, les réunions parcellaires de fonds ruraux ou de terrains à bâtir, les mesures destinées à la conservation des antiquités et des curiosités naturelles ou à la protection des sites et des sources d’eaux minérales.

Art. 7031B. Restriction de la propriété foncière / V. Restrictions de droit public / 2. Améliorations du sol

2. Améliorations du sol

1 Lorsque des améliorations du sol (corrections de cours d’eau, dessèchements, irrigations, reboisements, chemins, réunions parcellaires, etc.) ne peuvent être exécutées que par une communauté de propriétaires, et que les ouvrages nécessaires à cet effet sont décidés par la majorité des intéressés possédant plus de la moitié du terrain, les autres sont tenus d’adhérer à cette décision. Les propriétaires intéressés qui ne prennent pas part à la décision seront réputés y adhérer. L’adhésion sera mentionnée au registre foncier.

2 Les cantons règlent la procédure. Ils doivent, en particulier pour les réunions parcellaires, édicter des règles détaillées.

3 La législation cantonale peut alléger les conditions auxquelles le présent code soumet l’exécution de ces travaux et appliquer par analogie les mêmes règles aux terrains à bâtir et aux territoires en mouvement permanent.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’art. 121 de la LF du 3 oct. 1951 sur l’agriculture, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1954 (RO 1953 1095; FF 1951 II 141).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 704 C. Sources / I. Propriété et servitude

C. Sources

I. Propriété et servitude

1 Les sources sont une partie intégrante du fonds et la propriété n’en peut être acquise qu’avec celle du sol où elles jaillissent.

2 Le droit à des sources jaillissant sur fonds d’autrui est constitué en servitude par son inscription au registre foncier.

3 Les eaux souterraines sont assimilées aux sources.

Art. 705 C. Sources / II. Dérivation

II. Dérivation

1 Le droit de dériver des sources peut, dans l’intérêt public, être soumis à certaines conditions, restreint ou supprimé par la législation cantonale.

2 Le Conseil fédéral prononce sans recours dans les conflits qui se produisent entre cantons.

Art. 706 C. Sources / III. Sources coupées / 1. Indemnité

III. Sources coupées

1. Indemnité

1 Est passible de dommages-intérêts celui qui cause un préjudice au propriétaire ou à l’ayant droit, en coupant, même partiellement, ou en souillant, par des fouilles, constructions ou travaux quelconques, des sources déjà utilisées dans une mesure considérable ou captées en vue de leur utilisation.

2 Lorsque le dommage n’a été causé ni à dessein, ni par négligence, ou lorsqu’il est imputable à une faute de la partie lésée, le juge appréciera si une indemnité est due et il en fixera, le cas échéant, le montant et la nature.

Art. 707 C. Sources / III. Sources coupées / 2. Rétablissement des lieux

2. Rétablissement des lieux

1 Si des sources indispensables soit pour l’exploitation ou l’habitation d’un immeuble, soit pour un service d’alimentation, sont coupées ou souillées, le rétablissement de l’état antérieur peut être exigé dans la mesure du possible.

2 Ce rétablissement ne peut être exigé, dans les autres cas, que s’il est justifié par des circonstances spéciales.

Art. 708 C. Sources / IV. Sources communes

IV. Sources communes

1 Lorsque plusieurs sources voisines appartenant à des propriétaires différents ont un même bassin d’alimentation et forment ainsi un même groupe, chaque propriétaire peut demander que les sources soient captées en commun et distribuées entre tous les ayants droit proportionnellement à leur jouissance antérieure.

2 Les ayants droit supportent les frais des installations communes dans la mesure de leur intérêt.

3 En cas d’opposition de l’un d’eux, chacun des ayants droit peut faire pour sa source les travaux rationnels de captage et d’adduction, même s’il en résultait une diminution du débit des autres sources, et il n’est tenu à indemnité de ce chef que dans la mesure où les travaux ont augmenté le débit de sa propre source.

Art. 709 C. Sources / V. Usage des sources

V. Usage des sources

La législation cantonale peut accorder à des voisins ou à d’autres personnes le droit d’utiliser, notamment pour y puiser de l’eau et abreuver le bétail, les sources, fontaines et ruisseaux qui sont propriété privée.

Art. 710 C. Sources / VI. Fontaine nécessaire

VI. Fontaine nécessaire

1 Le propriétaire qui ne peut se procurer qu’au prix de travaux et de frais excessifs l’eau nécessaire à sa maison et à son fonds, a le droit d’exiger d’un voisin qu’il lui cède contre pleine indemnité l’eau dont celui-ci n’a pas besoin.

2 Les intérêts de la partie cédante seront essentiellement pris en considération.

3 La modification des dispositions prises peut être demandée, si des circonstances nouvelles se produisent.

Art. 711 C. Sources / VII. Expropriation / 1. Des sources

VII. Expropriation

1. Des sources

1 Le propriétaire de sources, fontaines ou ruisseaux n’ayant pour lui aucune utilité, ou qu’une utilité sans rapport avec leur valeur, est tenu de les céder contre pleine indemnité pour des services d’alimentation, d’hydrantes ou autres entreprises d’intérêt général.

2 L’indemnité pourra consister dans la distribution d’une partie de l’eau ainsi obtenue.

Art. 712 C. Sources / VII. Expropriation / 2. Du sol

2. Du sol

L’expropriation du terrain situé autour de sources qui dépendent d’un service d’alimentation peut être demandée dans la mesure où elle est nécessaire pour empêcher que ces sources ne soient souillées.


  Chapitre III: De la propriété par étages1 

Art. 712a A. Éléments et objets / I. Éléments

A. Éléments et objets

I. Éléments

1 Les parts de copropriété d’un immeuble peuvent être constituées en propriété par étages, de manière que chaque copropriétaire a le droit exclusif d’utiliser et d’aménager intérieurement des parties déterminées d’un bâtiment.

2 Le copropriétaire a le pouvoir d’administrer, d’utiliser et d’aménager ses locaux dans la mesure où il ne restreint pas l’exercice du droit des autres copropriétaires, n’endommage pas les parties, ouvrages et installations communs du bâtiment, n’entrave pas leur utilisation ou n’en modifie pas l’aspect extérieur.

3 Il est tenu d’entretenir ses locaux de manière à maintenir l’état et l’aspect irréprochables du bâtiment.

Art. 712b A. Éléments et objets / II. Objet

II. Objet

1 Peuvent être l’objet du droit exclusif les étages ou parties d’étages qui, constitués en appartements ou en locaux commerciaux ou autres, forment un tout disposant d’un accès propre, la possibilité d’englober des locaux annexes distincts étant réservée.

2 Le copropriétaire ne peut pas acquérir le droit exclusif sur:

1.
le bien-fonds et, le cas échéant, le droit de superficie en vertu duquel le bâtiment a été construit;
2.
les parties importantes pour l’existence, la disposition et la solidité du bâtiment ou des locaux d’autres copropriétaires ou qui déterminent la forme extérieure et l’aspect du bâtiment;
3.
les ouvrages et installations qui servent aussi aux autres copropriétaires pour l’usage de leurs locaux.

3 Les copropriétaires peuvent, dans l’acte constitutif de la propriété par étages, ou dans une convention ultérieure soumise à la même forme, déclarer communes encore d’autres parties du bâtiment; à ce défaut elles sont présumées être l’objet du droit exclusif.

Art. 712c A. Éléments et objets / III. Actes de disposition

III. Actes de disposition

1 Le copropriétaire n’a pas le droit de préemption légal contre tout tiers acquéreur d’une part, mais un droit de préemption peut être créé dans l’acte constitutif de la propriété par étages ou par convention ultérieure et annoté au registre foncier.

2 L’acte constitutif ou une convention ultérieure peut prévoir qu’un étage ne sera valablement aliéné, grevé d’un usufruit ou d’un droit d’habitation ou loué que si les autres copropriétaires n’ont pas, en vertu d’une décision prise à la majorité, formé opposition dans les quatorze jours après avoir reçu communication de l’opération.

3 L’opposition est sans effet si elle n’est pas fondée sur un juste motif.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 712d B. Constitution et fin / I. Acte constitutif

B. Constitution et fin

I. Acte constitutif

1 La propriété par étages est constituée par inscription au registre foncier.

2 L’inscription peut être requise:

1.
en vertu d’un contrat par lequel les copropriétaires conviennent de soumettre leurs parts au régime de la propriété par étages;
2.
en vertu d’une déclaration du propriétaire du bien-fonds ou du titulaire d’un droit de superficie distinct et permanent, relative à la création de parts de copropriété selon le régime de la propriété par étages.

3 L’acte juridique n’est valable que s’il est passé en la forme authentique ou, s’il s’agit d’un testament ou d’un acte de partage successoral, en la forme prescrite par le droit des successions.

Art. 712e B. Constitution et fin / II. Délimitation et quotes-parts

II. Délimitation et quotes-parts1

1 L’acte constitutif doit indiquer la délimitation des étages ou parties d’étage et, en quotes-parts ayant un dénominateur commun, la part de la valeur du bien-fonds ou du droit de superficie que représente chaque étage ou partie d’étage.2

2 Les parts ne peuvent être modifiées qu’avec le consentement de toutes les personnes directement intéressées et l’approbation de l’assemblée des copropriétaires; toutefois, chaque copropriétaire peut demander une rectification si sa part a été, par erreur, fixée inexactement ou devient inexacte par suite de modifications apportées au bâtiment ou à ses entours.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 712f B. Constitution et fin / III. Fin

III. Fin

1 La propriété par étages prend fin par la perte du bien-fonds ou l’extinction du droit de superficie et la radiation de l’inscription au registre foncier.

2 La radiation peut être demandée en vertu d’une convention mettant fin à la propriété par étages ou, à ce défaut, par tout copropriétaire qui réunit entre ses mains toutes les parts, sous réserve du consentement des personnes ayant sur des étages des droits réels qui ne peuvent être transférés sans inconvénient sur l’immeuble entier.

3 Chaque copropriétaire peut demander la dissolution de la propriété par étages à l’une des conditions suivantes:

1.
le bâtiment est détruit pour plus de la moitié de sa valeur et une reconstruction serait pour lui une charge difficile à supporter;
2.
le bâtiment est une propriété par étages depuis plus de 50 ans et ne peut plus être utilisé selon sa destination en raison de sa dégradation.1

4 Les copropriétaires qui entendent maintenir la communauté peuvent cependant éviter la dissolution en désintéressant les autres.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 712g C. Administration et utilisation / I. Dispositions applicables

C. Administration et utilisation

I. Dispositions applicables

1 Les règles de la copropriété s’appliquent à la compétence pour procéder à des actes d’administration et à des travaux de construction.

2 Si ces règles ne s’y opposent pas, elles peuvent être remplacées par des dispositions différentes prévues dans l’acte constitutif ou adoptées à l’unanimité par tous les copropriétaires.

3 Pour le reste, chaque copropriétaire peut exiger qu’un règlement d’administration et d’utilisation, valable dès qu’il a été adopté par la majorité des copropriétaires représentant en outre plus de la moitié de la valeur des parts, soit établi et mentionné au registre foncier; même si le règlement figure dans l’acte constitutif, il peut être modifié par décision de cette double majorité.

4 Toute modification de l’attribution réglementaire des droits d’usage particulier doit en outre être approuvée par les propriétaires d’étages directement concernés.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 712h C. Administration et utilisation / II. Frais et charges communs / 1. Définition et répartition

II. Frais et charges communs

1. Définition et répartition

1 Les copropriétaires contribuent aux charges communes et aux frais de l’administration commune proportionnellement à la valeur de leurs parts.

2 Constituent en particulier de tels charges et frais:

1.
les dépenses nécessitées par l’entretien courant, par les réparations et réfections des parties communes du bien-fonds et du bâtiment, ainsi que des ouvrages et installations communs;
2.
les frais d’administration, y compris l’indemnité versée à l’administrateur;
3.
les contributions de droit public et impôts incombant à l’ensemble des copropriétaires;
4.
les intérêts et annuités à payer aux créanciers titulaires de gages sur le bien-fonds ou envers lesquels les copropriétaires se sont engagés solidairement.

3 Si certaines parties du bâtiment, certains ouvrages ou installations ne servent que très peu ou pas du tout à certains copropriétaires, il en est tenu compte dans la répartition des frais.

Art. 712i C. Administration et utilisation / II. Frais et charges communs / 2. Garantie des contributions / a. Hypothèque légale

2. Garantie des contributions

a. Hypothèque légale

1 Pour garantir son droit aux contributions des trois dernières années, la communauté peut requérir l’inscription d’une hypothèque sur la part de chaque copropriétaire actuel.

2 L’administrateur ou, à défaut d’administrateur, chaque copropriétaire autorisé par une décision prise à la majorité des copropriétaires ou par le juge, ainsi que le créancier en faveur duquel la contribution est saisie peuvent requérir l’inscription.

3 Pour le reste, les dispositions relatives à la constitution de l’hypothèque légale des artisans et entrepreneurs s’appliquent par analogie.

Art. 712k C. Administration et utilisation / II. Frais et charges communs / 2. Garantie des contributions / b. Droit de rétention

b. Droit de rétention

Pour garantir son droit aux contributions des trois dernières années, la communauté a sur les meubles qui garnissent les locaux d’un copropriétaire et qui servent soit à leur aménagement soit à leur usage le même droit de rétention qu’un bailleur.

Art. 712l C. Administration et utilisation / III. Exercice des droits civils

III. Exercice des droits civils

1 La communauté acquiert, en son nom, les avoirs résultant de sa gestion, notamment les contributions des copropriétaires et les disponibilités qui en sont tirées, comme le fonds de rénovation.

2 Elle peut, en son nom, actionner ou être actionnée en justice, ainsi que poursuivre et être poursuivie.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).

Art. 712m D. Organisation / I. Assemblée des copropriétaires / 1. Compétence et statut juridique

D. Organisation

I. Assemblée des copropriétaires

1. Compétence et statut juridique

1 Outre celles qui sont mentionnées dans d’autres dispositions, l’assemblée des copropriétaires a notamment les attributions suivantes:

1.
régler les affaires administratives qui ne sont pas de la compétence de l’administrateur;
2.
nommer l’administrateur et surveiller son activité;
3.
désigner un comité ou un délégué, auquel elle peut confier des tâches administratives, notamment celles de conseiller l’administrateur, contrôler sa gestion et soumettre à l’assemblée un rapport et des propositions à ce sujet;
4.
approuver chaque année le devis des frais annuels, les comptes et la répartition des frais entre les copropriétaires;
5.
décider la création d’un fonds de rénovation pour les travaux d’entretien et de réfection;
6.
assurer le bâtiment contre l’incendie et d’autres risques et conclure les assurances responsabilité civile usuelles, en outre obliger le copropriétaire qui a fait des dépenses extraordinaires pour aménager ses locaux à payer une part de prime supplémentaire, sauf s’il a conclu une assurance complémentaire pour son propre compte.

2 Sauf dispositions spéciales de la loi, les règles applicables aux organes de l’association et à la contestation de ses décisions s’appliquent à l’assemblée des copropriétaires et au comité.

Art. 712n D. Organisation / I. Assemblée des copropriétaires / 2. Convocation et présidence

2. Convocation et présidence

1 L’assemblée des copropriétaires est convoquée et présidée par l’administrateur, si elle n’en a pas décidé autrement.

2 Les décisions doivent être l’objet d’un procès-verbal que conserve l’administrateur ou le copropriétaire qui assume la présidence.

Art. 712o D. Organisation / I. Assemblée des copropriétaires / 3. Exercice du droit de vote

3. Exercice du droit de vote

1 Lorsque plusieurs personnes sont propriétaires en commun d’un étage, elles n’ont qu’une voix et l’expriment par un représentant.

2 De même, le copropriétaire et l’usufruitier d’un étage s’entendent sur l’exercice du droit de vote sinon l’usufruitier vote sur toutes les questions d’administration, exception faite des travaux de constructions qui sont seulement utiles ou servent à l’embellissement ou à la commodité.

Art. 712p D. Organisation / I. Assemblée des copropriétaires / 4. Quorum

4. Quorum

1 L’assemblée des copropriétaires peut délibérer valablement si la moitié de tous les copropriétaires, mais au moins deux, représentant en outre au moins la moitié de la valeur des parts, sont présents ou représentés.

2 Si l’assemblée n’atteint pas le quorum, une seconde assemblée est convoquée, qui peut se tenir au plus tôt dix jours après la première.

3 La nouvelle assemblée peut délibérer valablement si le tiers de tous les copropriétaires, mais deux au moins, sont présents ou représentés.

Art. 712q D. Organisation / II. Administrateur / 1. Nomination

II. Administrateur

1. Nomination

1 Si l’assemblée des copropriétaires n’arrive pas à nommer l’administrateur, chaque copropriétaire peut demander au juge de le nommer.

2 Le même droit appartient à celui qui a un intérêt légitime, notamment à un créancier gagiste ou un assureur.

Art. 712r D. Organisation / II. Administrateur / 2. Révocation

2. Révocation

1 L’assemblée des copropriétaires peut révoquer en tout temps l’administrateur, sous réserve de dommages-intérêts éventuels.

2 Si au mépris de justes motifs, l’assemblée refuse de révoquer l’administrateur, tout copropriétaire peut, dans le mois, demander au juge de prononcer la révocation.

3 L’administrateur nommé par le juge ne peut pas être révoqué sans l’assentiment de celui-ci avant le terme fixé à ses fonctions.

Art. 712s D. Organisation / II. Administrateur / 3. Attributions / a. Exécution des dispositions et des décisions sur l’administration et l’utilisation

3. Attributions

a. Exécution des dispositions et des décisions sur l’administration et l’utilisation

1 L’administrateur exécute tous les actes d’administration commune, conformément aux dispositions de la loi et du règlement ainsi qu’aux décisions de l’assemblée des copropriétaires; il prend de son propre chef toutes les mesures urgentes requises pour empêcher ou réparer un dommage.

2 Il répartit les charges et frais communs entre les copropriétaires, leur adresse facture, encaisse leurs contributions, gère et utilise correctement les fonds qu’il détient.

3 Il veille à ce que, dans l’exercice des droits exclusifs et dans l’utilisation des parties et installations communes du bien-fonds et du bâtiment, la loi, le règlement de la communauté et le règlement de maison soient observés.

Art. 712t D. Organisation / II. Administrateur / 3. Attributions / b. Représentation envers les tiers

b. Représentation envers les tiers

1 L’administrateur représente la communauté et les copropriétaires envers les tiers, pour toutes les affaires qui relèvent de l’administration commune et entrent dans ses attributions légales.

2 Sauf en procédure sommaire, l’administrateur ne peut agir en justice comme demandeur ou défendeur sans autorisation préalable de l’assemblée des copropriétaires, sous réserve des cas d’urgence pour lesquels l’autorisation peut être demandée ultérieurement.

3 Les déclarations, sommations, jugements et décisions destinés à l’ensemble des copropriétaires peuvent être notifiés valablement à l’administrateur, à son domicile ou au lieu de situation de la chose.


  Titre vingtième: De la propriété mobilière

Art. 713 A. Objet de la propriété mobilière

A. Objet de la propriété mobilière

La propriété mobilière a pour objet les choses qui peuvent se transporter d’un lieu dans un autre, ainsi que les forces naturelles qui sont susceptibles d’appropriation et ne sont pas comprises dans les immeubles.

Art. 714 B. Modes d’acquisition / I. Tradition / 1. Transfert de la possession

B. Modes d’acquisition

I. Tradition

1. Transfert de la possession

1 La mise en possession est nécessaire pour le transfert de la propriété mobilière.

2 Celui qui, étant de bonne foi, est mis à titre de propriétaire en possession d’un meuble en acquiert la propriété, même si l’auteur du transfert n’avait pas qualité pour l’opérer; la propriété lui est acquise dès qu’il est protégé selon les règles de la possession.

Art. 715 B. Modes d’acquisition / I. Tradition / 2. Pacte de réserve de propriété / a. En général

2. Pacte de réserve de propriété

a. En général

1 Le pacte en vertu duquel l’aliénateur se réserve la propriété d’un meuble transféré à l’acquéreur n’est valable que s’il a été inscrit au domicile actuel de ce dernier, dans un registre public tenu par l’office des poursuites.

2 Le pacte de réserve de propriété est prohibé dans le commerce du bétail.

Art. 716 B. Modes d’acquisition / I. Tradition / 2. Pacte de réserve de propriété / b. Ventes par acomptes

b. Ventes par acomptes

Ceux qui font des ventes par acomptes ne peuvent revendiquer les objets vendus sous réserve de propriété qu’à la condition de restituer les acomptes reçus, sous déduction d’un loyer équitable et d’une indemnité d’usure.

Art. 717 B. Modes d’acquisition / I. Tradition / 3. Constitut possessoire

3. Constitut possessoire

1 Lorsque celui qui aliène une chose la retient à un titre spécial, le transfert de la propriété n’est pas opposable aux tiers, s’il a eu pour but de les léser ou d’éluder les règles concernant le gage mobilier.

2 Le juge apprécie.

Art. 718 B. Modes d’acquisition / II. Occupation / 1. Choses sans maître

II. Occupation

1. Choses sans maître

Celui qui prend possession d’une chose sans maître, avec la volonté d’en devenir propriétaire, en acquiert la propriété.

Art. 719 B. Modes d’acquisition / II. Occupation / 2. Animaux échappés

2. Animaux échappés

1 Les animaux captifs n’ont plus de maître dès qu’ils recouvrent la liberté, si leur propriétaire ne fait, pour les reprendre, des recherches immédiates et ininterrompues.

2 Les animaux apprivoisés qui sont retournés définitivement à l’état sauvage n’ont également plus de maître.

3 Les essaims d’abeilles ne deviennent pas choses sans maître par le seul fait de pénétrer dans le fonds d’autrui.

Art. 720 B. Modes d’acquisition / III. Choses trouvées / 1. Publicité et recherches / a. En général

III. Choses trouvées

1. Publicité et recherches

a. En général1

1 Celui qui trouve une chose perdue est tenu d’en informer le propriétaire et, s’il ne le connaît pas, d’aviser la police ou de prendre les mesures de publicité et de faire les recherches commandées par les circonstances.

2 Il est tenu d’aviser la police, lorsque la valeur de la chose est manifestement supérieure à 10 francs.

3 Celui qui trouve une chose dans une maison habitée ou dans des locaux et installations affectés à un service public doit la déposer entre les mains du maître de la maison, du locataire ou du personnel chargé de la surveillance.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).

Art. 720a1B. Modes d’acquisition / III. Choses trouvées / 1. Publicité et recherches / b. Animaux

b. Animaux

1 Sous réserve de l’art. 720, al. 3, celui qui trouve un animal perdu est tenu d’en informer le propriétaire ou, à défaut, l’autorité compétente.

2 Les cantons désignent l’autorité au sens de l’al. 1.2


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).
2 Cet al. entre en vigueur le 1er avr. 2004.

Art. 721 B. Modes d’acquisition / III. Choses trouvées / 2. Garde de la chose et vente aux enchères

2. Garde de la chose et vente aux enchères

1 La chose trouvée doit être gardée avec le soin nécessaire.

2 Elle peut être vendue aux enchères publiques avec la permission de l’autorité compétente, lorsque la garde en est dispendieuse, que la chose même est exposée à une prompte détérioration ou qu’elle est restée plus d’une année entre les mains de la police ou dans un dépôt public; les enchères sont précédées de publications.

3 Le prix de vente remplace la chose.

Art. 722 B. Modes d’acquisition / III. Choses trouvées / 3. Acquisition de la propriété, restitution

3. Acquisition de la propriété, restitution

1 La chose est acquise à celui qui l’a trouvée et qui a satisfait à ses obligations, si le propriétaire ne peut être découvert dans les cinq ans à compter de l’avis à la police ou des mesures de publicité.

1bis Lorsqu’il s’agit d’animaux qui vivent en milieu domestique et ne sont pas gardés dans un but patrimonial ou de gain, le délai est de deux mois.1

1ter Lorsque la personne qui a trouvé l’animal le confie à un refuge avec la volonté d’en abandonner définitivement la possession, le refuge peut disposer librement de l’animal deux mois après que celui-ci lui a été confié.2

2 Lorsqu’elle est restituée au propriétaire, celui qui l’a trouvée a droit au remboursement de tous ses frais et à une gratification équitable.

3 Si la chose a été trouvée dans une maison habitée ou dans des locaux et installations affectés à un service public, le maître de la maison, le locataire ou l’établissement ont les obligations de celui qui a trouvé la chose, mais ne peuvent réclamer une gratification.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).

Art. 723 B. Modes d’acquisition / III. Choses trouvées / 4. Trésor

4. Trésor

1 Sont considérées comme trésor les choses précieuses dont il paraît certain, au moment de leur découverte, qu’elles sont enfouies ou cachées depuis longtemps et n’ont plus de propriétaire.

2 Le trésor devient propriété de celui auquel appartient l’immeuble ou le meuble dans lequel il a été trouvé; demeurent réservées les dispositions concernant les objets qui offrent un intérêt scientifique.

3 Celui qui l’a découvert a droit à une gratification équitable, qui n’excédera pas la moitié de la valeur du trésor.

Art. 724 B. Modes d’acquisition / III. Choses trouvées / 5. Objets ayant une valeur scientifique

5. Objets ayant une valeur scientifique

1 Les curiosités naturelles et les antiquités qui n’appartiennent à personne et qui offrent un intérêt scientifique sont la propriété du canton sur le territoire duquel elles ont été trouvées.1

1bis Elles ne peuvent être aliénées sans l’autorisation des autorités cantonales compétentes. Elles ne peuvent faire l’objet d’une prescription acquisitive ni être acquises de bonne foi. L’action en revendication est imprescriptible.2

2 Le propriétaire dans le fonds duquel sont trouvées des choses semblables est obligé de permettre les fouilles nécessaires, moyennant qu’il soit indemnisé du préjudice causé par ces travaux.

3 L’auteur de la découverte et de même, s’il s’agit d’un trésor, le propriétaire a droit à une indemnité équitable, qui n’excédera pas la valeur de la chose.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’art. 32 ch. 1 de la LF du 20 juin 2003 sur le transfert des biens culturels, en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2005 (RO 2005 1869; FF 2002 505).
2 Introduit par l’art. 32 ch. 1 de la LF du 20 juin 2003 sur le transfert des biens culturels, en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2005 (RO 2005 1869; FF 2002 505).

Art. 725 B. Modes d’acquisition / IV. Épaves

IV. Épaves

1 Les règles concernant les choses trouvées sont applicables à celles qui, par la violence de l’eau, du vent, des avalanches, de toute autre force naturelle ou par cas fortuit, sont amenées en la puissance d’autrui et aux animaux étrangers qui s’y transportent.

2 L’essaim d’abeilles qui se réfugie dans une ruche occupée appartenant à autrui est acquis sans indemnité au propriétaire de la ruche.

Art. 726 B. Modes d’acquisition / V. Spécification

V. Spécification

1 Lorsqu’une personne a travaillé ou transformé une matière qui ne lui appartenait pas, la chose nouvelle est acquise à l’ouvrier, si l’industrie est plus précieuse que la matière, sinon, au propriétaire de celle-ci.

2 Si l’ouvrier n’était pas de bonne foi, le juge peut attribuer la chose nouvelle au propriétaire de la matière, même si l’industrie est plus précieuse.

3 Demeurent réservées les actions en dommages-intérêts et celles qui dérivent de l’enrichissement.

Art. 727 B. Modes d’acquisition / VI. Adjonction et mélange

VI. Adjonction et mélange

1 Lorsque des choses appartenant à divers propriétaires ont été mélangées ou unies de telle sorte qu’il n’est plus possible de les séparer sans détérioration notable, ou qu’au prix d’un travail et de frais excessifs, les intéressés deviennent copropriétaires de la chose nouvelle en raison de la valeur qu’avaient ses parties au moment du mélange ou de l’adjonction.

2 Si, dans le mélange ou l’union de deux choses, l’une ne peut être considérée que comme l’accessoire de l’autre, la chose nouvelle est acquise au propriétaire de la partie principale.

3 Demeurent réservées les actions en dommages-intérêts et celles qui dérivent de l’enrichissement.

Art. 728 B. Modes d’acquisition / VII. Prescription acquisitive

VII. Prescription acquisitive

1 Celui qui de bonne foi, à titre de propriétaire, paisiblement et sans interruption, a possédé pendant cinq ans la chose d’autrui en devient propriétaire par prescription.

1bis Lorsqu’il s’agit d’animaux qui vivent en milieu domestique et ne sont pas gardés dans un but patrimonial ou de gain, le délai est de deux mois.1

1ter Sauf exception prévue par la loi, le délai de prescription acquisitive pour les biens culturels au sens de l’art. 2, al. 1, de la loi du 20 juin 2003 sur le transfert des biens culturels2 est de 30 ans.3

2 La prescription n’est pas interrompue par la perte involontaire de la possession, pourvu que celle-ci soit recouvrée dans l’année ou par une action intentée dans le même délai.

3 Les règles établies pour la prescription des créances s’appliquent à la computation des délais, à l’interruption et à la suspension de la prescription acquisitive.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463; FF 2002 3885 5418).
2 RS 444.1
3 Introduit par l’art. 32 ch. 1 de la LF du 20 juin 2003 sur le transfert des biens culturels, en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2005 (RO 2005 1869; FF 2002 505).

Art. 729 C. Perte de la propriété mobilière

C. Perte de la propriété mobilière

La propriété mobilière ne s’éteint point par la perte de la possession, tant que le propriétaire n’a pas fait abandon de son droit ou que la chose n’a pas été acquise par un tiers.


  Deuxième partie: Des autres droits réels

  Titre vingt et unième: Des servitudes et des charges foncières

  Chapitre I: Des servitudes foncières

Art. 730 A. Objet des servitudes

A. Objet des servitudes

1 La servitude est une charge imposée sur un immeuble en faveur d’un autre immeuble et qui oblige le propriétaire du fonds servant à souffrir, de la part du propriétaire du fonds dominant, certains actes d’usage, ou à s’abstenir lui-même d’exercer certains droits inhérents à la propriété.

2 Une obligation de faire ne peut être rattachée qu’accessoirement à une servitude. Cette obligation ne lie l’acquéreur du fonds dominant ou du fonds servant que si elle résulte d’une inscription au registre foncier.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 731 B. Constitution et extinction des servitudes / I. Constitution / 1. Inscription

B. Constitution et extinction des servitudes

I. Constitution

1. Inscription

1 L’inscription au registre foncier est nécessaire pour la constitution des servitudes.

2 Les règles de la propriété sont applicables, sauf disposition contraire, à l’acquisition et à l’inscription.

3 La prescription acquisitive des servitudes n’est possible qu’à l’égard des immeubles dont la propriété elle-même peut s’acquérir de cette manière.

Art. 7321B. Constitution et extinction des servitudes / I. Constitution / 2. Acte constitutif

2. Acte constitutif

1 L’acte constitutif d’une servitude n’est valable que s’il a été passé en la forme authentique.

2 La servitude doit être dessinée sur un extrait de plan du registre foncier lorsque son exercice se limite à une partie de l’immeuble et que le lieu où elle s’exerce n’est pas décrit avec suffisamment de précision dans le titre.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 733 B. Constitution et extinction des servitudes / I. Constitution / 3. Servitude sur son propre fonds

3. Servitude sur son propre fonds

Le propriétaire de deux fonds a le droit de grever l’un de servitudes en faveur de l’autre.

Art. 734 B. Constitution et extinction des servitudes / II. Extinction / 1. En général

II. Extinction

1. En général

La servitude s’éteint par la radiation de l’inscription et par la perte totale du fonds servant ou du fonds dominant.

Art. 735 B. Constitution et extinction des servitudes / II. Extinction / 2. Réunion des fonds

2. Réunion des fonds

1 Lorsque les deux fonds sont réunis dans la même main, le propriétaire peut faire radier la servitude.

2 La servitude subsiste comme droit réel tant que la radiation n’a pas eu lieu.

Art. 736 B. Constitution et extinction des servitudes / II. Extinction / 3. Libération judiciaire

3. Libération judiciaire

1 Le propriétaire grevé peut exiger la radiation d’une servitude qui a perdu toute utilité pour le fonds dominant.

2 Il peut obtenir la libération totale ou partielle d’une servitude qui ne conserve qu’une utilité réduite, hors de proportion avec les charges imposées au fonds servant.

Art. 737 C. Effets des servitudes / I. Étendue / 1. En général

C. Effets des servitudes

I. Étendue

1. En général

1 Celui à qui la servitude est due peut prendre toutes les mesures nécessaires pour la conserver et pour en user.

2 Il est tenu d’exercer son droit de la manière la moins dommageable.

3 Le propriétaire grevé ne peut en aucune façon empêcher ou rendre plus incommode l’exercice de la servitude.

Art. 738 C. Effets des servitudes / I. Étendue / 2. En vertu de l’inscription

2. En vertu de l’inscription

1 L’inscription fait règle, en tant qu’elle désigne clairement les droits et les obligations dérivant de la servitude.

2 L’étendue de celle-ci peut être précisée, dans les limites de l’inscription, soit par son origine, soit par la manière dont la servitude a été exercée pendant longtemps, paisiblement et de bonne foi.

Art. 739 C. Effets des servitudes / I. Étendue / 3. Besoins nouveaux du fonds dominant

3. Besoins nouveaux du fonds dominant

Les besoins nouveaux du fonds dominant n’entraînent aucune aggravation de la servitude.

Art. 740 C. Effets des servitudes / I. Étendue / 4. Droit cantonal et usages locaux

4. Droit cantonal et usages locaux

Les droits de passage, tels que le passage à pied ou à char, ou en saison morte, ou à travers champs, la sortie des bois, les droits de pacage, d’affouage, d’abreuvage, d’irrigation et autres semblables, ont, sauf disposition spéciale, l’étendue que leur assignent la législation cantonale et l’usage des lieux.

Art. 740a1C. Effets des servitudes / I. Étendue / 5. Pluralité d’ayants droit

5. Pluralité d’ayants droit

1 Lorsque plusieurs ayants droit participent par une servitude de même rang et de même contenu à une installation commune, les règles de la copropriété sont, sauf convention contraire, applicables par analogie.

2 Le droit de quitter la communauté par renonciation à la servitude peut être exclu pour 30 ans au plus par une convention passée dans la forme prescrite pour l’acte constitutif de la servitude. Cette convention peut être annotée au registre foncier.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 741 C. Effets des servitudes / II. Charge d’entretien

II. Charge d’entretien

1 Le propriétaire du fonds dominant entretient les ouvrages nécessaires à l’exercice de la servitude.

2 Si ces ouvrages sont également utiles au propriétaire grevé, la charge de l’entretien incombe aux deux parties, en proportion de leur intérêt. Une convention dérogeant à ce principe n’oblige l’acquéreur du fonds dominant ou du fonds servant que si elle résulte des pièces justificatives du registre foncier.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 742 C. Effets des servitudes / III. Transport de la charge

III. Transport de la charge1

1 Lorsque la servitude ne s’exerce que sur une partie du fonds servant, le propriétaire grevé peut, s’il y a intérêt et s’il se charge des frais, exiger qu’elle soit transportée dans un autre endroit où elle ne s’exercerait pas moins commodément.

2 Il a cette faculté, même si l’assiette primitive de la servitude figure au registre foncier.

3 ...2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Abrogé par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 7431C. Effets des servitudes / IV. Division d’un fonds

IV. Division d’un fonds

1 Si le fonds servant ou le fonds dominant sont divisés, la servitude subsiste sur toutes les parcelles.

2 Si, selon les pièces justificatives ou les circonstances, l’exercice de la servitude se limite à certaines parcelles, cette servitude doit être radiée sur les parcelles non concernées.

3 La procédure d’épuration obéit aux dispositions sur la radiation et la modification des inscriptions au registre foncier.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 7441

1 Abrogé par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).


  Chapitre II: Des autres servitudes, en particulier de l’usufruit

Art. 745 A. De l’usufruit / I. Son objet

A. De l’usufruit

I. Son objet

1 L’usufruit peut être établi sur des meubles, des immeubles, des droits ou un patrimoine.

2 Il confère à l’usufruitier, sauf disposition contraire, un droit de jouissance complet sur la chose.

3 L’usufruit d’un immeuble peut être limité à une partie définie d’un bâtiment ou de l’immeuble.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 juin 2003, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2004 (RO 2003 4121; FF 2002 4395).

Art. 746 A. De l’usufruit / II. Constitution de l’usufruit / 1. En général

II. Constitution de l’usufruit

1. En général

1 L’usufruit des choses mobilières et des créances s’établit par leur transfert à l’usufruitier, celui des immeubles par l’inscription au registre foncier.

2 Les règles concernant la propriété sont applicables, sauf dispositions contraires, à l’acquisition de l’usufruit tant mobilier qu’immobilier et à l’inscription.

Art. 7471A. De l’usufruit / II. Constitution de l’usufruit / 2. ...

2. ...


1 Abrogé par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, avec effet au 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 748 A. De l’usufruit / III. Extinction de l’usufruit / 1. Causes d’extinction

III. Extinction de l’usufruit

1. Causes d’extinction

1 L’usufruit s’éteint par la perte totale de la chose et en outre, s’il s’agit d’immeubles, par la radiation de l’inscription, lorsque celle-ci est nécessaire pour l’établir.

2 D’autres causes d’extinction, telles que l’échéance du terme, la renonciation et la mort de l’usufruitier, ne confèrent au propriétaire, en matière d’usufruit immobilier, que le droit d’exiger la radiation.

3 L’usufruit légal s’éteint avec la cause qui lui a donné naissance.

Art. 749 A. De l’usufruit / III. Extinction de l’usufruit / 2. Durée de l’usufruit

2. Durée de l’usufruit

1 L’usufruit s’éteint par la mort de l’usufruitier et, si l’usufruitier est une personne morale, par la dissolution de celle-ci.

2 Toutefois, l’usufruit des personnes morales ne peut durer plus de cent ans.

Art. 750 A. De l’usufruit / III. Extinction de l’usufruit / 3. Contre-valeur de la chose détruite

3. Contre-valeur de la chose détruite

1 Le propriétaire n’est pas tenu de rétablir la chose détruite.

2 S’il la rétablit, l’usufruit renaît.

3 L’usufruit s’étend à la contre-valeur qui a remplacé la chose détruite, notamment en cas d’assurance et d’expropriation pour cause d’utilité publique.

Art. 751 A. De l’usufruit / III. Extinction de l’usufruit / 4. Restitution / a. Obligation

4. Restitution

a. Obligation

Le possesseur est tenu de rendre la chose au propriétaire dès que l’usufruit a pris fin.

Art. 752 A. De l’usufruit / III. Extinction de l’usufruit / 4. Restitution / b. Responsabilité

b. Responsabilité

1 L’usufruitier répond de la perte et de la dépréciation de la chose, s’il ne prouve pas que le dommage est survenu sans sa faute.

2 Il remplace les choses qu’il a consommées sans en avoir le droit.

3 Il ne doit aucune indemnité pour la dépréciation causée par l’usage normal de la chose.

Art. 753 A. De l’usufruit / III. Extinction de l’usufruit / 4. Restitution / c. Impenses

c. Impenses

1 L’usufruitier qui a fait des impenses ou de nouveaux ouvrages sans y être obligé peut réclamer une indemnité à la cessation de l’usufruit, selon les règles de la gestion d’affaires.

2 S’il a fait des installations pour lesquelles le propriétaire refuse de l’indemniser, il a le droit de les enlever, à charge de rétablir l’état antérieur.

Art. 754 A. De l’usufruit / III. Extinction de l’usufruit / 5. Prescription des indemnités

5. Prescription des indemnités

Les droits du propriétaire en raison de changements ou de dépréciations, ceux de l’usufruitier pour ses impenses et la faculté qu’il a d’enlever les installations par lui faites, se prescrivent par une année dès la restitution de la chose.

Art. 755 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 1. Droits de l’usufruitier / a. En général

IV. Effets de l’usufruit

1. Droits de l’usufruitier

a. En général

1 L’usufruitier a la possession, l’usage et la jouissance de la chose.

2 Il en a aussi la gestion.

3 Il observe, dans l’exercice de ses droits, les règles d’une bonne administration.

Art. 756 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 1. Droits de l’usufruitier / b. Fruits naturels

b. Fruits naturels

1 Les fruits naturels parvenus à maturité pendant la durée de l’usufruit appartiennent à l’usufruitier.

2 Le propriétaire ou l’usufruitier qui pourvoit à la culture peut exiger pour ses impenses, de celui qui a récolté, une indemnité équitable, qui n’excédera pas la valeur de la récolte.

3 Les parties intégrantes de la chose qui ne sont pas des fruits ou des produits restent acquises au propriétaire.

Art. 757 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 1. Droits de l’usufruitier / c. Intérêts

c. Intérêts

Les intérêts des capitaux soumis à l’usufruit et les autres revenus périodiques sont acquis à l’usufruitier du jour où son droit commence jusqu’à celui où il prend fin, même s’ils ne sont exigibles que plus tard.

Art. 758 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 1. Droits de l’usufruitier / d. Cession de l’usufruit

d. Cession de l’usufruit

1 L’usufruitier dont le droit n’est pas éminemment personnel peut en transférer l’exercice à un tiers.

2 Dans ce cas, le propriétaire peut agir directement contre le cessionnaire.

Art. 759 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 2. Droits du nu-propriétaire / a. Surveillance

2. Droits du nu-propriétaire

a. Surveillance

Le propriétaire peut s’opposer à tout acte d’usage illicite ou non conforme à la nature de la chose.

Art. 760 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 2. Droits du nu-propriétaire / b. Droit d’exiger des sûretés

b. Droit d’exiger des sûretés

1 Le propriétaire qui prouve que ses droits sont en péril peut exiger des sûretés de l’usufruitier.

2 Il peut en exiger, même sans faire cette preuve et avant la délivrance, si l’usufruit porte sur des choses consomptibles ou des papiers-valeurs.

3 Si l’usufruit a pour objet des papiers-valeurs, le dépôt des titres suffit.

Art. 761 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 2. Droits du nu-propriétaire / c. Sûretés dans les cas de donations et d’usufruits légaux

c. Sûretés dans les cas de donations et d’usufruits légaux

1 Des sûretés ne peuvent être réclamées du donateur qui s’est réservé l’usufruit de la chose donnée.

2 En matière d’usufruits légaux, l’obligation de fournir des sûretés est soumise à des règles spéciales.

Art. 762 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 2. Droits du nu-propriétaire / d. Suites du défaut de fournir des sûretés

d. Suites du défaut de fournir des sûretés

Si l’usufruitier ne fournit pas des sûretés dans un délai suffisant, qui lui sera fixé à cet effet, ou si, malgré l’opposition du propriétaire, il continue à faire un usage illicite de la chose, le juge lui retire jusqu’à nouvel ordre la possession des biens pour les remettre à un curateur.

Art. 763 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 3. Inventaire

3. Inventaire

Le propriétaire et l’usufruitier peuvent exiger en tout temps qu’un inventaire authentique des biens sujets à l’usufruit soit dressé à frais communs.

Art. 764 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 4. Obligations de l’usufruitier / a. Conservation de la chose

4. Obligations de l’usufruitier

a. Conservation de la chose

1 L’usufruitier est tenu de conserver la substance de la chose et de faire lui-même les réparations et réfections ordinaires d’entretien.

2 Si des travaux plus importants ou d’autres mesures sont indispensables à la conservation de la chose, l’usufruitier est tenu d’en aviser le propriétaire et de les souffrir.

3 Il peut y pourvoir lui-même, aux frais du propriétaire, si ce dernier ne fait pas le nécessaire.

Art. 765 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 4. Obligations de l’usufruitier / b. Dépenses d’entretien, impôts et autres charges

b. Dépenses d’entretien, impôts et autres charges

1 L’usufruitier supporte les frais ordinaires d’entretien et les dépenses d’exploitation de la chose, ainsi que les intérêts des dettes dont elle est grevée, et il est tenu d’acquitter les impôts et autres redevances; le tout en proportion de la durée de son droit.

2 Si les impôts ou d’autres redevances sont acquittés par le propriétaire, l’usufruitier l’en indemnise dans la mesure indiquée.

3 Les autres charges incombent au propriétaire, qui peut toutefois, pour les payer, réaliser des biens sujets à l’usufruit, si les fonds nécessaires ne lui sont à sa demande avancés gratuitement par l’usufruitier.

Art. 766 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 4. Obligations de l’usufruitier / c. Intérêts des dettes d’un patrimoine

c. Intérêts des dettes d’un patrimoine

L’usufruitier d’un patrimoine paie les intérêts des dettes qui le grèvent, mais il peut demander, si les circonstances l’y autorisent, à être dispensé de cette obligation; dans ce cas, sa jouissance est réduite au surplus des biens après acquittement des dettes.

Art. 767 A. De l’usufruit / IV. Effets de l’usufruit / 4. Obligations de l’usufruitier / d. Assurances

d. Assurances

1 L’usufruitier est tenu d’assurer la chose, dans l’intérêt du propriétaire, contre l’incendie et d’autres risques, en tant que cette mesure rentre d’après l’usage local dans celles que commande une bonne administration.

2 Il paie les primes pour la durée de sa jouissance; cette obligation lui incombe également, si l’usufruit comprend des choses déjà assurées.

Art. 768 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 1. Immeubles / a. Quant aux fruits

V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit

1. Immeubles

a. Quant aux fruits

1 L’usufruitier d’un immeuble doit veiller à ce que la jouissance de la chose ne soit pas excessive.

2 Les fruits indûment perçus appartiennent au propriétaire.

Art. 769 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 1. Immeubles / b. Destination de la chose

b. Destination de la chose

1 L’usufruitier ne doit apporter à la destination de l’immeuble aucun changement qui puisse causer un préjudice notable au propriétaire.

2 Il ne peut, en particulier, ni transformer, ni essentiellement modifier la chose soumise à l’usufruit.

3 Il ne peut ouvrir des carrières, marnières ou tourbières, ni commencer l’exploitation d’autres choses semblables qu’après avis donné au propriétaire et que si la destination du fonds n’est pas essentiellement modifiée.

Art. 770 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 1. Immeubles / c. Forêts

c. Forêts

1 L’usufruitier d’une forêt a le droit d’en jouir dans les limites d’un aménagement rationnel.

2 Le propriétaire et l’usufruitier peuvent exiger que l’exploitation soit réglée par un aménagement tenant compte de leurs droits.

3 Lorsque, par suite de tempêtes, chutes de neige, incendie, invasion d’insectes, ou pour d’autres causes, il y a lieu de réaliser une quantité de bois notablement supérieure à la jouissance ordinaire, l’exploitation est réduite de manière à réparer graduellement le dommage ou l’aménagement est adapté aux circonstances nouvelles; le prix du bois réalisé au delà de la jouissance ordinaire est placé à intérêt et sert à compenser la diminution du rendement.

Art. 771 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 1. Immeubles / d. Mines

d. Mines

L’usufruit des choses dont la jouissance consiste dans l’extraction de parties intégrantes du sol, notamment celui des mines, est soumis aux règles concernant l’usufruit des forêts.

Art. 772 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 2. Choses consomptibles et choses évaluées

2. Choses consomptibles et choses évaluées

1 Les choses qui se consomment par l’usage deviennent, sauf disposition contraire, la propriété de l’usufruitier, qui demeure comptable de leur valeur au début de l’usufruit.

2 À moins que le contraire n’ait été prévu, l’usufruitier peut disposer librement des autres choses mobilières estimées lors de leur remise, mais il devient comptable de leur valeur s’il exerce ce droit.

3 L’usufruitier peut rendre au propriétaire des choses de même espèce et qualité, s’il s’agit d’un matériel d’exploitation agricole, d’un troupeau, d’un fonds de marchandises ou d’autres choses semblables.

Art. 773 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 3. Créances / a. Étendue de la jouissance

3. Créances

a. Étendue de la jouissance

1 L’usufruit d’une créance donne le droit d’en percevoir les revenus.

2 Toute dénonciation de remboursement, tout acte de disposition concernant les papiers-valeurs soumis à l’usufruit doivent être faits par le propriétaire et l’usufruitier conjointement; le débiteur dénonce le remboursement à l’un et à l’autre.

3 Lorsque la créance est compromise, le propriétaire et l’usufruitier ont le droit d’exiger l’adhésion l’un de l’autre aux mesures commandées par une bonne gestion.

Art. 774 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 3. Créances / b. Remboursements et remplois

b. Remboursements et remplois

1 Le débiteur qui n’a pas été autorisé à se libérer entre les mains soit du propriétaire, soit de l’usufruitier, doit payer à tous les deux conjointement ou consigner.

2 L’objet de la prestation, notamment le capital remboursé, est soumis à la jouissance de l’usufruitier.

3 Le propriétaire et l’usufruitier ont le droit d’exiger que les capitaux soient placés en titres sûrs et productifs d’intérêts.

Art. 775 A. De l’usufruit / V. Cas spéciaux d’usufruit / 3. Créances / c. Droit au transfert des créances

c. Droit au transfert des créances

1 L’usufruitier peut exiger, dans les trois mois à compter du début de l’usufruit, la cession des créances et papiers-valeurs sujets à son droit.

2 Si la cession a lieu, il devient débiteur envers le propriétaire de la valeur des créances et papiers-valeurs au moment du transfert et il est tenu de fournir des sûretés de ce chef, à moins que le propriétaire n’ait renoncé à en réclamer.

3 Si le propriétaire n’a pas renoncé à exiger des sûretés, le transfert de la propriété n’a lieu qu’après qu’elles ont été fournies.

Art. 776 B. Droit d’habitation / I. En général

B. Droit d’habitation

I. En général

1 Le droit d’habitation est le droit de demeurer dans une maison ou d’en occuper une partie.

2 Il est incessible et ne passe point aux héritiers.

3 Les règles de l’usufruit sont applicables, sauf disposition contraire de la loi.

Art. 777 B. Droit d’habitation / II. Étendue du droit d’habitation

II. Étendue du droit d’habitation

1 L’étendue du droit d’habitation est réglée en général par les besoins personnels de celui auquel il appartient.

2 Ce droit comprend, s’il n’a été expressément limité à la personne de celui à qui il a été concédé, la faculté pour ce dernier d’habiter l’immeuble grevé avec sa famille et les gens de sa maison.

3 Celui qui possède un droit d’habitation sur une partie seulement d’un bâtiment jouit des installations destinées à l’usage commun.

Art. 778 B. Droit d’habitation / III. Charges

III. Charges

1 L’ayant droit est chargé des réparations ordinaires d’entretien, s’il a la jouissance exclusive de la maison ou de l’appartement.

2 Si le droit d’habitation s’exerce en commun avec le propriétaire, les frais d’entretien incombent à ce dernier.

Art. 779 C. Droit de superficie / I. Objet et immatriculation au registre foncier

C. Droit de superficie

I. Objet et immatriculation au registre foncier1

1 Le propriétaire peut établir en faveur d’un tiers une servitude lui conférant le droit d’avoir ou de faire des constructions soit sur le fonds grevé, soit au-dessous.

2 Sauf convention contraire, ce droit est cessible et passe aux héritiers.

3 Si cette servitude a le caractère d’un droit distinct et permanent, elle peut être immatriculée comme immeuble au registre foncier.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779a1C. Droit de superficie / II. Acte constitutif

II. Acte constitutif

1 L’acte constitutif d’un droit de superficie n’est valable que s’il a été passé en la forme authentique.

2 La rente du droit de superficie et les éventuelles autres dispositions contractuelles doivent être passées en la forme authentique lorsqu’il est prévu de les annoter au registre foncier.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 779b1C. Droit de superficie / III. Contenu, étendue et annotation

III. Contenu, étendue et annotation2

1 Les dispositions contractuelles sur les effets et l’étendue du droit de superficie, notamment sur la situation, la structure, le volume et la destination des constructions, ainsi que sur l’utilisation des surfaces non bâties mises à contribution par l’exercice du droit, sont obligatoires pour tout acquéreur du droit de superficie et de l’immeuble grevé.

2 Si les parties en conviennent, d’autres dispositions contractuelles peuvent être annotées au registre foncier.3


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 779c1C. Droit de superficie / IV. Effets à l’expiration de la durée / 1. Retour des constructions

IV. Effets à l’expiration de la durée

1. Retour des constructions

À l’expiration du droit de superficie, les constructions font retour au propriétaire du fonds et deviennent partie intégrante de ce fonds.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779d1C. Droit de superficie / IV. Effets à l’expiration de la durée / 2. Indemnité

2. Indemnité

1 Pour les constructions lui faisant retour, le propriétaire du fonds verse au superficiaire une indemnité équitable qui constitue cependant, pour les créanciers en faveur desquels le droit de superficie était grevé de gage, une garantie pour le solde de leurs créances et qui ne peut pas être versée au superficiaire sans leur consentement.

2 Si l’indemnité n’est ni versée ni garantie, le superficiaire ou un créancier en faveur duquel le droit de superficie était grevé de gage peut exiger qu’au lieu du droit de superficie radié une hypothèque de même rang soit inscrite en garantie de l’indemnité due.

3 L’inscription doit se faire au plus tard trois mois après l’expiration du droit de superficie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779e1

1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993). Abrogé par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 779f1C. Droit de superficie / V. Retour anticipé / 1. Conditions

V. Retour anticipé

1. Conditions

Si le superficiaire excède gravement son droit réel ou viole gravement des obligations contractuelles, le propriétaire peut provoquer le retour anticipé en demandant le transfert à son nom du droit de superficie avec tous les droits et charges qui y sont attachés.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779g1C. Droit de superficie / V. Retour anticipé / 2. Exercice du droit de retour

2. Exercice du droit de retour

1 Le droit de retour ne peut être exercé que moyennant une indemnité équitable pour les constructions qui font retour au propriétaire, la faute du superficiaire pouvant justifier la réduction de l’indemnité.

2 Le droit de superficie n’est transféré au propriétaire que si l’indemnité a été versée ou garantie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779h1C. Droit de superficie / V. Retour anticipé / 3. Autres cas d’application

3. Autres cas d’application

Les dispositions concernant l’exercice du droit de retour s’appliquent à tout moyen que le propriétaire s’est réservé de mettre fin prématurément au droit de superficie ou d’en demander la rétrocession en cas de violation de ses obligations par le superficiaire.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779i1C. Droit de superficie / VI. Garantie de la rente du droit de superficie / 1. Droit d’exiger la constitution d’une hypothèque

VI. Garantie de la rente du droit de superficie

1. Droit d’exiger la constitution d’une hypothèque

1 Le propriétaire peut demander à tout superficiaire actuel de garantir la rente du droit de superficie au moyen d’une hypothèque grevant pour trois annuités au maximum le droit de superficie immatriculé au registre foncier.

2 Si la rente ne consiste pas en annuités égales, l’inscription de l’hypothèque légale peut être requise pour le montant qui, la rente étant uniformément répartie, représente trois annuités.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779k1C. Droit de superficie / VI. Garantie de la rente du droit de superficie / 2. Inscription

2. Inscription

1 L’hypothèque peut être inscrite en tout temps pendant la durée du droit de superficie et, en cas de réalisation forcée, elle n’est pas radiée.

2 Les dispositions relatives à la constitution de l’hypothèque des artisans et entrepreneurs s’appliquent par analogie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 779l1C. Droit de superficie / VII. Durée maximum

VII. Durée maximum

1 Le droit de superficie ne peut pas être constitué pour plus de cent ans comme droit distinct.

2 Il peut en tout temps être prolongé, en la forme prescrite pour sa constitution, pour une nouvelle durée maximum de cent ans, mais tout engagement pris d’avance à ce sujet est nul.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 mars 1965, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 1965 (RO 1965 449; FF 1963 I 993).

Art. 780 D. Droit à une source sur fonds d’autrui

D. Droit à une source sur fonds d’autrui

1 Le droit à une source sur fonds d’autrui oblige le propriétaire de ce fonds à permettre l’appropriation et la dérivation de l’eau.

2 Sauf convention contraire, ce droit est cessible et passe aux héritiers.

3 Si la servitude a le caractère d’un droit distinct et permanent, elle peut être immatriculée comme immeuble au registre foncier.

Art. 781 E. Autres servitudes

E. Autres servitudes

1 Le propriétaire peut établir, en faveur d’une personne quelconque ou d’une collectivité, d’autres servitudes sur son fonds, à la condition que le fonds se prête à une jouissance déterminée, par exemple, pour des exercices de tir ou pour un passage.

2 Ces droits sont incessibles, sauf convention contraire, et l’étendue en est réglée sur les besoins ordinaires de l’ayant droit.

3 Les dispositions concernant les servitudes foncières sont d’ailleurs applicables.

Art. 781a1F. Mesures judiciaires

F. Mesures judiciaires

Si le propriétaire est introuvable ou que les organes prescrits d’une personne morale ou d’une autre entité juridique font défaut, les dispositions sur les mesures judiciaires sont applicables par analogie aux ayants droit d’une servitude inscrits au registre foncier.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).


  Chapitre III: Des charges foncières

Art. 782 A. Objet de la charge foncière

A. Objet de la charge foncière

1 La charge foncière assujettit envers un tiers le propriétaire actuel d’un fonds à certaines prestations pour lesquelles il n’est tenu que sur son immeuble.

2 La charge peut être due au propriétaire actuel d’un autre fonds.

3 Sous réserve des charges foncières de droit public, les prestations doivent être en corrélation avec l’économie du fonds grevé ou se rattacher aux besoins de l’exploitation du fonds dominant.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 783 B. Constitution et extinction / I. Constitution / 1. Acquisition et inscription

B. Constitution et extinction

I. Constitution

1. Acquisition et inscription

1 L’inscription au registre foncier est nécessaire à l’établissement des charges foncières.

2 L’inscription indique une somme déterminée en monnaie suisse comme valeur de la charge; si cette dernière consiste en prestations périodiques, sa valeur, à défaut d’autre estimation, est égale à vingt fois le montant des prestations annuelles.

3 Sauf disposition contraire, l’acquisition et l’inscription des charges foncières sont soumises aux règles concernant la propriété immobilière.

Art. 7841B. Constitution et extinction / I. Constitution / 2. Charges foncières de droit public

2. Charges foncières de droit public

Les dispositions sur les hypothèques légales du droit cantonal sont applicables par analogie à la constitution des charges foncières de droit public et à leurs effets à l’égard des tiers de bonne foi.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 7851

1 Abrogé par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 786 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 1. En général

II. Extinction

1. En général

1 La charge foncière s’éteint par la radiation de l’inscription et par la perte totale de l’immeuble grevé.

2 La renonciation, le rachat et les autres causes d’extinction donnent au propriétaire du fonds grevé le droit d’exiger du créancier qu’il consente à la radiation.

Art. 787 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Rachat / a. Droit du créancier de l’exiger

2. Rachat

a. Droit du créancier de l’exiger

1 Le créancier peut demander le rachat de la charge foncière, lorsqu’une convention l’y autorise et, en outre:

1.1
si l’immeuble grevé est divisé et que le créancier n’accepte pas le report de la dette sur les parcelles;
2.
si le propriétaire diminue la valeur de l’immeuble sans offrir des sûretés en échange;
3.
s’il n’a pas acquitté ses prestations de trois années consécutives.

2 Si le créancier demande le rachat de la charge foncière à cause de la division de l’immeuble, il doit, dans le délai d’un mois à compter du jour où le report de la dette est devenu définitif, dénoncer la charge foncière avec effet après douze mois.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 788 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Rachat / b. Droit du débiteur de l’opérer

b. Droit du débiteur de l’opérer

1 Le débiteur peut demander le rachat, lorsqu’une convention l’y autorise et, en outre:

1.
si le contrat constitutif de la charge foncière n’est pas observé par l’autre partie;
2.
trente ans après l’établissement de la charge, même si elle avait été établie pour un temps plus long ou déclarée irrachetable.

2 Lorsque le rachat a lieu après trente ans, le débiteur doit le dénoncer, dans tous les cas, un an d’avance.

3 La charge foncière qui se rattache à une servitude perpétuelle n’est pas rachetable.

Art. 789 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Rachat / c. Prix du rachat

c. Prix du rachat

Le rachat s’opère pour la somme inscrite au registre foncier comme valeur de la charge, sauf le droit de prouver que la valeur réelle est inférieure à cette somme.

Art. 790 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Imprescriptibilité

3. Imprescriptibilité

1 La charge foncière est imprescriptible.

2 Les prestations exigibles se prescrivent dès qu’elles sont devenues dette personnelle du propriétaire grevé.

Art. 791 C. Effets / I. Droit du créancier

C. Effets

I. Droit du créancier

1 La charge foncière ne donne aucune créance personnelle contre le débiteur, mais seulement le droit d’être payé sur le prix de l’immeuble grevé.

2 Chaque prestation devient dette personnelle trois ans après l’époque de son exigibilité et cesse alors d’être garantie par l’immeuble.

Art. 792 C. Effets / II. Nature de la dette

II. Nature de la dette

1 Lorsque l’immeuble change de propriétaire, l’acquéreur est de plein droit débiteur des prestations qui font l’objet de la charge foncière.

2 Si l’immeuble grevé est divisé, les propriétaires des parcelles deviennent débiteurs de la charge foncière. Les dispositions sur la division des immeubles grevés d’hypothèques s’appliquent au report de la dette sur les parcelles.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).


  Titre vingt-deuxième: Du gage immobilier

  Chapitre I: Dispositions générales

Art. 793 A. Conditions / I. Formes du gage immobilier

A. Conditions

I. Formes du gage immobilier

1 Le gage immobilier peut être constitué sous la forme d’une hypothèque ou d’une cédule hypothécaire.1

2 Toute autre forme est prohibée.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 794 A. Conditions / II. Créance garantie / 1. Capital

II. Créance garantie

1. Capital

1 Le gage immobilier ne peut être constitué que pour une créance déterminée, dont le montant sera indiqué en monnaie suisse.

2 Si la créance est indéterminée, les parties indiquent une somme fixe représentant le maximum de la garantie immobilière.

Art. 795 A. Conditions / II. Créance garantie / 2. Intérêts

2. Intérêts

1 Le service de l’intérêt est réglé librement par les parties, sous réserve des dispositions légales contre l’usure.

2 La législation cantonale peut fixer le maximum du taux de l’intérêt autorisé pour les créances garanties par un immeuble.

Art. 796 A. Conditions / III. Objet du gage / 1. Immeubles qui peuvent être constitués en gage

III. Objet du gage

1. Immeubles qui peuvent être constitués en gage

1 Le gage immobilier n’est constitué que sur des immeubles immatriculés au registre foncier.

2 La législation cantonale peut soumettre à des règles particulières ou même prohiber l’engagement des immeubles du domaine public, des allmends ou des pâturages qui appartiennent à des corporations et celui des droits de jouissance attachés à ces biens.

Art. 797 A. Conditions / III. Objet du gage / 2. Désignation / a. De l’immeuble unique

2. Désignation

a. De l’immeuble unique

1 L’immeuble grevé doit être spécialement désigné lors de la constitution du gage.

2 Les parcelles d’un immeuble ne peuvent être grevées de gages, tant que la division n’a pas été portée au registre foncier.

Art. 798 A. Conditions / III. Objet du gage / 2. Désignation / b. Des divers immeubles grevés

b. Des divers immeubles grevés

1 Plusieurs immeubles peuvent être constitués en gage pour la même créance, lorsqu’ils appartiennent au même propriétaire ou à des codébiteurs solidaires.

2 Dans tous les autres cas de gage constitué sur plusieurs immeubles pour une même créance, chacun des immeubles doit être grevé pour une part déterminée de celle-ci.

3 La répartition de la garantie se fait, sauf convention contraire, proportionnellement à la valeur des divers immeubles.

Art. 798a1A. Conditions / III. Objet du gage / 3. Immeubles agricoles

3. Immeubles agricoles

L’engagement des immeubles agricoles est en outre régi par la loi fédérale du 4 octobre 1991 sur le droit foncier rural2.


1 Introduit par l’art. 92 ch. 1. de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 sur le droit foncier rural, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1410; FF 1988 III 889).
2 RS 211.412.11

Art. 799 B. Constitution et extinction / I. Constitution / 1. Inscription

B. Constitution et extinction

I. Constitution

1. Inscription

1 Le gage immobilier est constitué par l’inscription au registre foncier; demeurent réservées les exceptions prévues par la loi.

2 L’acte constitutif du gage immobilier n’est valable que s’il est passé en la forme authentique.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 800 B. Constitution et extinction / I. Constitution / 2. Si l’immeuble est propriété de plusieurs

2. Si l’immeuble est propriété de plusieurs

1 Chacun des copropriétaires d’un immeuble peut grever sa quote-part d’un droit de gage.

2 Dans les cas de propriété commune, l’immeuble ne peut être grevé d’un gage qu’en totalité et au nom de tous les communistes.

Art. 801 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction

II. Extinction

1 Le gage immobilier s’éteint par la radiation de l’inscription et par la perte totale de l’immeuble.

2 L’extinction, dans les cas d’expropriation pour cause d’utilité publique, est régie par les lois spéciales de la Confédération et des cantons.

Art. 802 B. Constitution et extinction / III. Dans les cas de réunions parcellaires / 1. Déplacement de la garantie

III. Dans les cas de réunions parcellaires

1. Déplacement de la garantie

1 Lorsque des réunions parcellaires sont opérées avec le concours ou sous la surveillance d’autorités publiques, les gages grevant les immeubles cédés passent, en conservant leur rang, sur les immeubles reçus en échange.

2 Si un immeuble en remplace plusieurs qui sont grevés pour des créances différentes ou qui ne sont pas tous grevés, les droits de gage transférés sur l’immeuble le frappent pour sa contenance nouvelle et conservent, si possible, leur rang primitif.

Art. 803 B. Constitution et extinction / III. Dans les cas de réunions parcellaires / 2. Dénonciation par le débiteur

2. Dénonciation par le débiteur

Le débiteur peut racheter, au moment de l’opération, et moyennant un avertissement préalable de trois mois, les droits de gage grevant les immeubles compris dans une réunion parcellaire.

Art. 804 B. Constitution et extinction / III. Dans les cas de réunions parcellaires / 3. Indemnité en argent

3. Indemnité en argent

1 Lorsqu’une indemnité est payée pour un immeuble grevé de droits de gage, elle se distribue entre les créanciers selon leur rang ou au marc le franc s’ils sont de même rang.

2 L’indemnité ne peut être payée au débiteur sans l’assentiment des créanciers, si elle est de plus d’un vingtième de la créance garantie ou si le nouvel immeuble ne constitue pas une sûreté suffisante.

Art. 805 C. Effets / I. Étendue du droit du créancier

C. Effets

I. Étendue du droit du créancier

1 Le gage immobilier frappe l’immeuble avec ses parties intégrantes et ses accessoires.

2 Les objets désignés expressément comme accessoires dans l’acte d’affectation et mentionnés au registre foncier, notamment les machines ou un mobilier d’hôtel, sont présumés tels, s’il n’est pas prouvé que cette qualité ne peut leur être attribuée aux termes de la loi.

3 Les droits des tiers sur les accessoires demeurent réservés.

Art. 806 C. Effets / II. Loyers et fermages

II. Loyers et fermages

1 Le gage grevant un immeuble donné à bail comprend également les loyers ou fermages qui ont couru, depuis la poursuite en réalisation de gage commencée par le créancier ou la déclaration de faillite du débiteur, jusqu’au moment de la réalisation.

2 Ce droit n’est opposable aux locataires et fermiers qu’après la notification à eux faite de la poursuite ou après la publication de la faillite.

3 Les actes juridiques du propriétaire relativement à des loyers ou des fermages non échus, ou la saisie de ces prestations par d’autres créanciers, ne sont pas opposables au créancier qui a poursuivi en réalisation de son gage avant l’époque où loyers et fermages sont devenus exigibles.

Art. 807 C. Effets / III. Imprescriptibilité

III. Imprescriptibilité

L’inscription d’un gage immobilier rend la créance imprescriptible.

Art. 808 C. Effets / IV. Sûretés / 1. Dépréciation de l’immeuble / a. Mesures conservatoires

IV. Sûretés

1. Dépréciation de l’immeuble

a. Mesures conservatoires

1 Lorsque le propriétaire diminue la valeur de l’immeuble grevé, le créancier peut lui faire intimer par le juge l’ordre de cesser tous actes dommageables.

2 Le créancier peut être autorisé par le juge à prendre les mesures nécessaires et il a même le droit, s’il y a péril en la demeure, de les prendre de son chef.

3 Les frais lui sont dus par le propriétaire et le remboursement lui est garanti par un droit de gage sur l’immeuble. Ce droit de gage naît sans inscription au registre foncier et prime toute charge inscrite sur l’immeuble.1

4 S’il dépasse 1000 francs et s’il n’a pas été inscrit dans les quatre mois à compter de la fin des mesures, le droit de gage ne peut être opposé aux tiers qui se sont fondés de bonne foi sur le registre foncier.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 809 C. Effets / IV. Sûretés / 1. Dépréciation de l’immeuble / b. Sûretés et rétablissement de l’état antérieur

b. Sûretés et rétablissement de l’état antérieur

1 En cas de dépréciation de l’immeuble, le créancier peut exiger de son débiteur des sûretés ou le rétablissement de l’état antérieur.

2 Il peut aussi demander des sûretés s’il existe un danger de dépréciation.

3 Il est en droit de réclamer un remboursement suffisant pour sa garantie, lorsque le débiteur ne s’exécute pas dans le délai fixé par le juge.

Art. 810 C. Effets / IV. Sûretés / 2. Dépréciation sans la faute du propriétaire

2. Dépréciation sans la faute du propriétaire

1 Les dépréciations qui se produisent sans la faute du propriétaire ne confèrent au créancier le droit d’exiger des sûretés ou le remboursement partiel, que dans la mesure où le propriétaire est indemnisé pour le dommage subi.

2 Toutefois, le créancier est autorisé à prendre des mesures pour parer aux dépréciations ou pour les empêcher. Les frais lui sont garantis par un droit de gage sur l’immeuble même, mais sans que le propriétaire en soit personnellement tenu. Ce droit de gage naît sans inscription au registre foncier et prime toute charge inscrite sur l’immeuble.1

3 S’il dépasse 1000 francs et qu’il n’a pas été inscrit au registre foncier dans les quatre mois à compter de la fin des mesures, le droit de gage ne peut être opposé aux tiers qui se sont fondés de bonne foi sur le registre foncier.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 811 C. Effets / IV. Sûretés / 3. Aliénation de petites parcelles

3. Aliénation de petites parcelles

Lorsque le propriétaire de l’immeuble grevé en aliène une parcelle d’une valeur inférieure au vingtième de la créance, le créancier ne peut refuser le dégrèvement de cette parcelle, pourvu qu’un acompte proportionnel lui soit payé ou que le reste de l’immeuble lui offre une garantie suffisante.

Art. 812 C. Effets / V. Constitution ultérieure de droits réels

V. Constitution ultérieure de droits réels

1 Le propriétaire de l’immeuble constitué en gage ne peut renoncer valablement à la faculté de le grever d’autres droits réels.

2 Le gage immobilier prime toutes servitudes ou charges foncières dont l’immeuble pourrait être grevé postérieurement sans que le créancier en eût permis la constitution; elles sont radiées, si, lors de la réalisation du gage, leur existence lèse le créancier antérieur.

3 À l’égard toutefois des créanciers postérieurement inscrits, l’ayant droit peut, en cas de réalisation, exiger que la valeur de la servitude ou de la charge foncière lui soit payée par préférence.

Art. 813 C. Effets / VI. Case hypothécaire / 1. Effets

VI. Case hypothécaire

1. Effets

1 La garantie fournie par le gage immobilier est attachée à la case hypothécaire que lui assigne l’inscription.

2 Des droits de gage peuvent être constitués en deuxième rang ou en rang quelconque, moyennant que le montant par lequel ils sont primés soit indiqué dans l’inscription.

Art. 814 C. Effets / VI. Case hypothécaire / 2. Ordre

2. Ordre

1 Lorsque des gages de rang différent sont constitués sur un immeuble, la radiation de l’un d’eux ne fait pas avancer le créancier postérieur dans la case libre.

2 Le propriétaire a la faculté de constituer un nouveau droit de gage en lieu et place de celui qui a été radié.

3 Les conventions donnant aux créanciers postérieurs le droit de profiter des cases libres n’ont d’effet réel que si elles sont annotées au registre foncier.

Art. 815 C. Effets / VI. Case hypothécaire / 3. Cases libres

3. Cases libres

Lorsqu’un droit de gage a été constitué en rang postérieur et qu’il n’en existe pas d’autre qui le prime, ou que le débiteur n’a pas disposé d’un titre de gage antérieur, ou que la créance antérieure n’atteint pas le montant inscrit, le prix de l’immeuble est en cas de réalisation attribué aux créanciers garantis, selon leur rang et sans égard aux cases libres.

Art. 816 C. Effets / VII. Réalisation du droit de gage / 1. Mode de la réalisation

VII. Réalisation du droit de gage

1. Mode de la réalisation

1 Faute par le débiteur de satisfaire à ses obligations, le créancier a le droit de se payer sur le prix de l’immeuble.

2 Est nulle toute clause qui autoriserait le créancier à s’approprier l’immeuble à défaut de paiement.

3 Si plusieurs immeubles sont constitués en gage pour la même créance, le créancier doit en poursuivre simultanément la réalisation; celle-ci n’aura toutefois lieu que dans la mesure jugée nécessaire par l’office des poursuites.

Art. 817 C. Effets / VII. Réalisation du droit de gage / 2. Distribution du prix

2. Distribution du prix

1 Le prix de vente de l’immeuble est distribué entre les créanciers selon leur rang.

2 Les créanciers de même rang concourent au marc le franc.

Art. 818 C. Effets / VII. Réalisation du droit de gage / 3. Étendue de la garantie

3. Étendue de la garantie

1 Le gage immobilier garantit au créancier:

1.
le capital;
2.
les frais de poursuite et les intérêts moratoires;
3.1 les intérêts de trois années échus au moment de l’ouverture de la faillite ou de la réquisition de vente et ceux qui ont couru depuis la dernière échéance; la cédule hypothécaire ne garantit au créancier que les intérêts effectivement dus.

2 Le taux primitif de l’intérêt ne peut dans la suite être porté à plus du 5 % au préjudice des créanciers postérieurs.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 8191C. Effets / VII. Réalisation du droit de gage / 4. Garanties pour impenses nécessaires

4. Garanties pour impenses nécessaires

1 Les impenses nécessaires que le créancier fait pour la conservation de l’immeuble, notamment en acquittant les primes d’assurance dues par le propriétaire, sont garanties par un droit de gage sur l’immeuble. Ce droit de gage naît sans inscription au registre foncier et prime toute charge inscrite sur l’immeuble.

2 S’il dépasse 1000 francs et qu’il n’a pas été inscrit au registre foncier dans les quatre mois à compter de l’accomplissement de l’acte en question, le droit de gage ne peut être opposé aux tiers qui se sont fondés de bonne foi sur le registre foncier.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 820 C. Effets / VIII. Droit de gage en cas d’améliorations du sol / 1. Rang

VIII. Droit de gage en cas d’améliorations du sol

1. Rang

1 Lorsqu’un immeuble rural a augmenté de valeur par suite d’une amélioration du sol exécutée avec le concours d’autorités publiques, le propriétaire peut le grever pour sa part de frais, en faveur de son créancier, d’un droit de gage, qui est inscrit au registre foncier et qui prime toutes les autres charges inscrites sur le fonds.

2 Le propriétaire ne peut grever son fonds que pour les deux tiers au plus de ses frais, lorsque l’amélioration du sol a été exécutée sans subside de l’État.

Art. 821 C. Effets / VIII. Droit de gage en cas d’améliorations du sol / 2. Extinction de la créance et du gage

2. Extinction de la créance et du gage

1 Dans les cas d’améliorations du sol exécutées sans subside de l’État, la dette inscrite sera amortie par des annuités qui ne peuvent être inférieures à 5 % du capital.

2 Le droit de gage s’éteint, tant pour la créance que pour chaque annuité, trois ans après qu’elles sont devenues exigibles, et les créanciers postérieurs avancent selon leur rang.

Art. 822 C. Effets / IX. Droit à l’indemnité d’assurance

IX. Droit à l’indemnité d’assurance

1 Les indemnités d’assurance exigibles ne peuvent être payées au propriétaire que du consentement de tous les créanciers ayant un droit de gage sur l’immeuble.

2 Elles sont cependant versées contre sûretés suffisantes au propriétaire, pour le rétablissement de l’immeuble grevé.

3 Demeurent réservées les règles du droit cantonal en matière d’assurance contre l’incendie.

Art. 8231C. Effets / X. Créancier introuvable

X. Créancier introuvable

Lorsque le créancier gagiste ne peut être identifié ou que son domicile est inconnu, le juge peut, sur requête du débiteur ou d’autres intéressés, ordonner les mesures nécessaires dans les cas où l’intervention personnelle du créancier est prévue par la loi et où il y a lieu de prendre d’urgence une décision.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).


  Chapitre II: De l’hypothèque

Art. 824 A. But et nature

A. But et nature

1 L’hypothèque peut être constituée pour sûreté d’une créance quelconque, actuelle, future ou simplement éventuelle.

2 L’immeuble grevé peut ne pas appartenir au débiteur.

Art. 825 B. Constitution et extinction / I. Constitution

B. Constitution et extinction

I. Constitution

1 L’hypothèque constituée même pour sûreté de créances d’un montant indéterminé ou variable reçoit une case fixe et garde son rang, nonobstant toutes fluctuations de la somme garantie.

2 Le bureau du registre foncier délivre un extrait au créancier qui en fait la demande; cet extrait, exclusivement destiné à faire preuve de l’inscription, n’est pas un papier-valeur.

3 L’extrait peut être remplacé par un certificat d’inscription sur le contrat.

Art. 826 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 1. Radiation

II. Extinction

1. Radiation

Lorsque la créance est éteinte, le propriétaire de l’immeuble grevé a le droit d’exiger du créancier qu’il consente à la radiation.

Art. 827 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 2. Droit du propriétaire qui n’est pas tenu personnellement

2. Droit du propriétaire qui n’est pas tenu personnellement

1 Le propriétaire qui n’est pas personnellement tenu de la dette hypothécaire peut dégrever son immeuble aux mêmes conditions que celles faites au débiteur pour éteindre la créance.

2 Il est subrogé aux droits du créancier qu’il désintéresse.

Art. 828 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Purge hypothécaire / a. Conditions et procédure

3. Purge hypothécaire

a. Conditions et procédure

1 Lorsqu’un immeuble est grevé au delà de sa valeur de dettes dont l’acquéreur n’est pas tenu personnellement, la législation cantonale peut autoriser ce dernier à purger avant toute poursuite les hypothèques inscrites, en versant aux créanciers le prix d’achat ou, en cas d’acquisition à titre gratuit, la somme à laquelle il évalue l’immeuble.

2 Il fait, par écrit et six mois d’avance, son offre aux créanciers de purger les hypothèques inscrites.

3 Le montant offert est réparti entre les créanciers suivant leur rang.

Art. 829 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Purge hypothécaire / b. Enchères publiques

b. Enchères publiques

1 Les créanciers ont le droit, dans le mois à compter de l’offre de purge, d’exiger la vente du gage aux enchères publiques contre l’avance des frais; les enchères ont lieu, après publication, dans le mois1 à compter du jour où elles ont été requises.

2 Si un prix supérieur au montant offert a été obtenu, ce prix est réparti entre les créanciers.

3 Les frais des enchères sont à la charge de l’acquéreur, si le prix a été supérieur au montant offert; sinon, à la charge du créancier qui les a requises.


1 L’expression «dans le mois» correspond aux textes allemand et italien. La faute de rédaction dans le texte français du RO, où il était écrit «dans le deuxième mois», provenait d’un oubli manifeste qui s’est produit au cours de la procédure parlementaire.

Art. 830 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 3. Purge hypothécaire / c. Estimation officielle

c. Estimation officielle

La législation cantonale peut remplacer les enchères publiques par une estimation officielle, qui fait règle pour la répartition entre les créanciers.

Art. 831 B. Constitution et extinction / II. Extinction / 4. Dénonciation

4. Dénonciation

Lorsque le propriétaire n’est pas personnellement tenu, la dénonciation du remboursement par le créancier ne lui est opposable que si elle a eu lieu tant à son égard qu’à l’égard du débiteur.

Art. 832 C. Effets de l’hypothèque / I. Propriété et gage / 1. Aliénation totale

C. Effets de l’hypothèque

I. Propriété et gage

1. Aliénation totale

1 L’aliénation de l’immeuble hypothéqué n’apporte, sauf convention contraire, aucun changement à l’obligation du débiteur et à la garantie.

2 Toutefois, si l’acquéreur s’est chargé de la dette, le débiteur primitif est libéré à moins que le créancier ne lui déclare par écrit, dans l’année, qu’il entend ne pas renoncer à ses droits contre lui.

Art. 833 C. Effets de l’hypothèque / I. Propriété et gage / 2. Parcellement

2. Parcellement

1 Si une portion de l’immeuble grevé est vendue ou si l’aliénation porte sur un d’entre plusieurs immeubles grevés appartenant au même propriétaire, ou si l’immeuble est divisé, la garantie, sauf convention contraire, est répartie proportionnellement à la valeur des diverses fractions du gage.

2 Le créancier qui n’accepte pas cette répartition peut, dans le mois à compter du jour où elle est devenue définitive, exiger le remboursement dans l’année.

3 Lorsque les acquéreurs se chargent de la portion de dettes assignée sur leurs parcelles, le débiteur primitif est libéré, à moins que le créancier ne lui déclare par écrit, dans l’année, qu’il entend ne pas renoncer à ses droits contre lui.

Art. 834 C. Effets de l’hypothèque / I. Propriété et gage / 3. Avis au créancier

3. Avis au créancier

1 Si l’acquéreur se charge de la dette, le conservateur du registre en avise le créancier.

2 Celui-ci doit faire sa déclaration dans l’année à compter de cet avis.

Art. 835 C. Effets de l’hypothèque / II. Cession de la créance

II. Cession de la créance

L’inscription au registre foncier n’est pas nécessaire pour valider la cession des créances garanties par une hypothèque.

Art. 8361D. Hypothèques légales / I. De droit cantonal

D. Hypothèques légales

I. De droit cantonal

1 Lorsque le droit cantonal accorde au créancier une prétention à l’établissement d’un droit de gage immobilier pour des créances en rapport direct avec l’immeuble grevé, ce droit est constitué par son inscription au registre foncier.

2 Si des hypothèques légales dépassant 1000 francs naissent sans inscription au registre foncier en vertu du droit cantonal et qu’elles ne sont pas inscrites au registre foncier dans les quatre mois à compter de l’exigibilité de la créance sur laquelle elles se fondent ou au plus tard dans les deux ans à compter de la naissance de la créance, elles ne peuvent être opposées, après le délai d’inscription, aux tiers qui se sont fondés de bonne foi sur le registre foncier.

3 Les réglementations cantonales plus restrictives sont réservées.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 8371D. Hypothèques légales / II. De droit privé fédéral / 1. Cas

II. De droit privé fédéral

1. Cas

1 Peuvent requérir l’inscription d’une hypothèque légale:

1.
le vendeur d’un immeuble, sur cet immeuble en garantie de la créance;
2.
les cohéritiers et autres indivis, sur les immeubles ayant appartenu à la communauté, en garantie des créances résultant du partage;
3.
les artisans et entrepreneurs employés à la construction ou à la destruction de bâtiments ou d’autres ouvrages, au montage d’échafaudages, à la sécurisation d’une excavation ou à d’autres travaux semblables, sur l’immeuble pour lequel ils ont fourni des matériaux et du travail ou du travail seulement, que leur débiteur soit le propriétaire foncier, un artisan ou un entrepreneur, un locataire, un fermier ou une autre personne ayant un droit sur l’immeuble.

2 Si le débiteur de la créance est un locataire, un fermier ou une autre personne ayant un droit sur l’immeuble, les artisans et entrepreneurs n’ont le droit de requérir l’inscription d’une hypothèque légale que si le propriétaire foncier a donné son accord à l’exécution des travaux.

3 L’ayant droit ne peut renoncer d’avance à ces hypothèques légales.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 838 D. Hypothèques légales / II. De droit privé fédéral / 2. Vendeur, cohéritiers, indivis

2. Vendeur, cohéritiers, indivis

L’hypothèque légale du vendeur, des cohéritiers ou des indivis sera inscrite au plus tard dans les trois mois qui suivent le transfert de la propriété.

Art. 8391D. Hypothèques légales / II. De droit privé fédéral / 3. Artisans et entrepreneurs / a. Inscription

3. Artisans et entrepreneurs

a. Inscription

1 L’hypothèque des artisans et des entrepreneurs peut être inscrite à partir du jour où ils se sont obligés à exécuter le travail ou les ouvrages promis.

2 L’inscription doit être obtenue au plus tard dans les quatre mois qui suivent l’achèvement des travaux.

3 Elle n’a lieu que si le montant du gage est établi par la reconnaissance du propriétaire ou par le juge; elle ne peut être requise si le propriétaire fournit des sûretés suffisantes au créancier.

4 Si l’immeuble fait incontestablement partie du patrimoine administratif et que la dette ne résulte pas de ses obligations contractuelles, le propriétaire répond envers les artisans et les entrepreneurs des créances reconnues ou constatées par jugement, conformément aux règles sur le cautionnement simple, pour autant que les créanciers aient fait valoir leur créance par écrit au plus tard dans les quatre mois qui suivent l’achèvement des travaux en se prévalant du cautionnement légal.

5 Si l’appartenance de l’immeuble au patrimoine administratif est contestée, l’artisan ou l’entrepreneur peut requérir une inscription provisoire de son droit de gage au registre foncier au plus tard dans les quatre mois qui suivent l’achèvement des travaux.

6 S’il est constaté sur la base d’un jugement que l’immeuble fait partie du patrimoine administratif, l’inscription provisoire du gage est radiée. Pour autant que les conditions prévues à l’al. 4 soient remplies, le cautionnement légal la remplace. Le délai est réputé sauvegardé par l’inscription provisoire du droit de gage.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 840 D. Hypothèques légales / II. De droit privé fédéral / 3. Artisans et entrepreneurs / b. Rang

b. Rang

Les artisans et entrepreneurs au bénéfice d’hypothèques légales séparément inscrites concourent entre eux à droit égal, même si les inscriptions sont de dates différentes.

Art. 841 D. Hypothèques légales / II. De droit privé fédéral / 3. Artisans et entrepreneurs / c. Privilège

c. Privilège

1 Si les artisans et entrepreneurs subissent une perte lors de la réalisation de leurs gages, les créanciers de rang antérieur les indemnisent sur leur propre part de collocation, déduction faite de la valeur du sol, dans la mesure où ces créanciers pouvaient reconnaître que la constitution de leurs gages porterait préjudice aux artisans et entrepreneurs.

2 Les créanciers de rang antérieur qui cèdent leurs titres de gage immobilier répondent envers les artisans et entrepreneurs du montant dont ceux-ci se trouvent frustrés par la cession.

3 Dès que le début des travaux a été mentionné au registre foncier sur l’avis d’un ayant droit, et jusqu’à la fin du délai d’inscription, aucun gage immobilier ne peut être inscrit, si ce n’est sous forme d’hypothèque.


  Chapitre III:2  De la cédule hypothécaire

Art. 842 A. Dispositions générales / I. But; rapport avec la créance de base

A. Dispositions générales

I. But; rapport avec la créance de base

1 La cédule hypothécaire est une créance personnelle garantie par un gage immobilier.

2 Sauf convention contraire, la créance résultant de la cédule hypothécaire coexiste, le cas échéant, avec la créance à garantir issue du rapport de base entre le créancier et le débiteur.

3 Le débiteur reste libre, s’agissant de la créance qui résulte de la cédule, de faire valoir les exceptions personnelles issues du rapport de base à l’égard du créancier et de ses successeurs, s’ils ne sont pas de bonne foi.

Art. 843 A. Dispositions générales / II. Types

II. Types

La cédule hypothécaire prend la forme d’une cédule hypothécaire de registre ou d’une cédule hypothécaire sur papier.

Art. 844 A. Dispositions générales / III. Droit du propriétaire qui n’est pas personnellement tenu

III. Droit du propriétaire qui n’est pas personnellement tenu

1 Le propriétaire qui n’est pas personnellement tenu est soumis aux règles applicables en matière d’hypothèques.

2 Il peut opposer au créancier toutes les exceptions du débiteur.

Art. 845 A. Dispositions générales / IV. Aliénation, division

IV. Aliénation, division

Les effets de l’aliénation et de la division de l’immeuble sont régis en matière de cédules hypothécaires par les dispositions applicables aux hypothèques.

Art. 846 A. Dispositions générales / V. Créance de la cédule hypothécaire et conventions accessoires / 1. En général

V. Créance de la cédule hypothécaire et conventions accessoires

1. En général

1 La créance qui résulte de la cédule hypothécaire ne peut renvoyer au rapport de base ni comporter de condition ou de contre-prestation.

2 La cédule hypothécaire peut contenir des conventions accessoires portant sur l’intérêt, l’amortissement et la dénonciation ainsi que d’autres clauses accessoires concernant la créance qui résulte de la cédule hypothécaire. Il peut alors être renvoyé à une convention séparée.

Art. 847 A. Dispositions générales / V. Créance de la cédule hypothécaire et conventions accessoires / 2. Dénonciation

2. Dénonciation

1 Sauf convention contraire, la cédule hypothécaire peut être dénoncée par le créancier ou le débiteur pour la fin d’un mois moyennant un préavis de six mois.

2 Une telle convention ne peut prévoir pour le créancier un délai de dénonciation inférieur à trois mois, à moins que le débiteur ne soit en demeure pour le paiement de l’amortissement ou des intérêts.

Art. 848 A. Dispositions générales / VI. Protection de la bonne foi

VI. Protection de la bonne foi

La teneur de l’inscription fait règle pour la créance résultant de la cédule hypothécaire et le droit de gage à l’égard de toute personne de bonne foi.

Art. 849 A. Dispositions générales / VII. Exceptions du débiteur

VII. Exceptions du débiteur

1 Le débiteur ne peut faire valoir que les exceptions dérivant de l’inscription au registre foncier, celles qu’il a personnellement contre le créancier poursuivant, ou, dans le cas de la cédule hypothécaire sur papier, celles dérivant du titre.

2 Les conventions qui contiennent des clauses accessoires relatives à la créance résultant de la cédule hypothécaire ne sont opposables aux tiers de bonne foi que si elles sont inscrites au registre foncier; dans le cas de la cédule hypothécaire sur papier, elles doivent également résulter du titre.

Art. 850 A. Dispositions générales / VIII. Fondé de pouvoirs

VIII. Fondé de pouvoirs

1 Un fondé de pouvoirs peut être nommé lors de la création d’une cédule hypothécaire. Il est chargé de payer et d’encaisser, de recevoir des communications, de consentir des dégrèvements et de manière générale de sauvegarder, en toute diligence et impartialité, les droits tant du créancier que du débiteur et du propriétaire.

2 Le nom du fondé de pouvoirs doit figurer au registre foncier et sur le titre de gage.

3 Si les pouvoirs s’éteignent et que les intéressés ne peuvent s’entendre, le juge prend les mesures nécessaires.

Art. 851 A. Dispositions générales / IX. Lieu de paiement

IX. Lieu de paiement

1 Sauf convention contraire, le débiteur doit effectuer tous les paiements au domicile du créancier.

2 Si le créancier n’a pas de domicile connu ou s’il change de domicile d’une manière préjudiciable au débiteur, ce dernier peut se libérer en consignant ces paiements, à son propre domicile ou au domicile antérieur du créancier, entre les mains de l’autorité compétente.

Art. 852 A. Dispositions générales / X. Modifications

X. Modifications

1 Si la cédule hypothécaire est modifiée en faveur du débiteur, notamment si celui-ci paie un acompte, il peut demander au créancier qu’il consente à l’inscription des modifications au registre foncier.

2 Dans le cas des cédules hypothécaires sur papier, l’office du registre foncier inscrit les modifications sur le titre.

3 À défaut d’inscription au registre foncier ou sur le titre, les modifications survenues ne sont pas opposables à l’acquéreur de bonne foi de la cédule hypothécaire.

Art. 853 A. Dispositions générales / XI. Paiement intégral

XI. Paiement intégral

Lorsque la dette contenue dans la cédule hypothécaire a été intégralement remboursée, le débiteur peut exiger du créancier:

1.
s’agissant d’une cédule hypothécaire de registre, qu’il en consente le transfert en son nom;
2.
s’agissant d’une cédule hypothécaire sur papier, qu’il lui remette le titre non annulé.
Art. 854 A. Dispositions générales / XII. Extinction / 1. À défaut de créancier

XII. Extinction

1. À défaut de créancier

1 S’il n’y a pas de créancier ou que le créancier renonce à son droit de gage, le débiteur a le choix de faire radier l’inscription ou de la laisser subsister au registre foncier.

2 Le débiteur peut aussi réemployer la cédule hypothécaire.

Art. 855 A. Dispositions générales / XII. Extinction / 2. Radiation

2. Radiation

La cédule hypothécaire sur papier ne peut être radiée du registre avant la cancellation ou l’annulation judiciaire du titre.

Art. 856 A. Dispositions générales / XIII. Sommation au créancier de se faire connaître

XIII. Sommation au créancier de se faire connaître

1 Lorsque le créancier d’une cédule hypothécaire est resté inconnu pendant dix ans et que les intérêts n’ont pas été réclamés durant cette période, le propriétaire de l’immeuble grevé peut requérir du juge qu’il somme publiquement le créancier de se faire connaître dans les six mois.

2 Si le créancier ne se fait pas connaître dans les six mois et qu’il résulte de l’enquête que, selon toute vraisemblance, la dette n’existe plus, le juge ordonne:

1.
dans le cas de la cédule hypothécaire de registre, la radiation du droit de gage au registre foncier;
2.
dans le cas de la cédule hypothécaire sur papier, son annulation et la radiation du droit de gage au registre foncier.
Art. 857 B. Cédule hypothécaire de registre / I. Constitution

B. Cédule hypothécaire de registre

I. Constitution

1 La cédule hypothécaire de registre est constituée par l’inscription au registre foncier.

2 Elle est inscrite au nom du créancier ou du propriétaire.

Art. 858 B. Cédule hypothécaire de registre / II. Transfert

II. Transfert

1 Le transfert de la cédule hypothécaire de registre a lieu par l’inscription du nouveau créancier au registre foncier sur la base d’une déclaration écrite de l’ancien créancier.

2 Le débiteur ne peut exécuter sa prestation avec effet libératoire qu’entre les mains de celui qui, lors du paiement, est inscrit au registre en tant que créancier.

Art. 859 B. Cédule hypothécaire de registre / III. Mise en gage, saisie et usufruit

III. Mise en gage, saisie et usufruit

1 La constitution d’un droit de gage mobilier sur une cédule hypothécaire de registre a lieu par l’inscription au registre foncier du titulaire du droit sur la base d’une déclaration écrite du créancier inscrit.

2 La saisie a lieu par l’inscription au registre foncier de la restriction du droit de disposer.

3 L’usufruit est constitué par l’inscription au registre foncier.

Art. 860 C. Cédule hypothécaire sur papier / I. Constitution / 1. Inscription

C. Cédule hypothécaire sur papier

I. Constitution

1. Inscription

1 Un titre est délivré pour toute cédule hypothécaire sur papier inscrite au registre foncier.

2 La cédule hypothécaire sur papier peut indiquer comme créancier le porteur ou une personne déterminée, notamment le propriétaire lui-même.

3 L’inscription produit ses effets avant la création du titre.

Art. 861 C. Cédule hypothécaire sur papier / I. Constitution / 2. Titre de gage

2. Titre de gage

1 La cédule hypothécaire sur papier est dressée par l’office du registre foncier.

2 Elle n’est valable qu’avec la signature du conservateur du registre foncier. Le Conseil fédéral arrête les formes applicables au titre.

3 La cédule hypothécaire ne peut être délivrée au créancier ou à son représentant qu’avec le consentement exprès du débiteur et du propriétaire de l’immeuble grevé.

Art. 862 C. Cédule hypothécaire sur papier / II. Protection de la bonne foi

II. Protection de la bonne foi

1 La teneur de la cédule hypothécaire sur papier dressée en due forme fait règle à l’égard de toute personne qui s’est fondée de bonne foi sur le titre.

2 Le registre foncier fait foi si le titre n’est pas conforme à l’inscription ou qu’il n’existe pas d’inscription.

3 L’acquéreur de bonne foi du titre a cependant droit, selon les règles établies pour le registre foncier, à la réparation du dommage qu’il a subi.

Art. 863 C. Cédule hypothécaire sur papier / III. Droits du créancier / 1. Exercice

III. Droits du créancier

1. Exercice

1 La créance qui résulte d’une cédule hypothécaire ne peut être ni aliénée, ni donnée en gage, ni faire l’objet d’une autre disposition, si ce n’est au moyen du titre.

2 La faculté de faire valoir la créance est réservée en cas d’annulation judiciaire du titre ou lorsque le titre n’a pas encore été dressé.

Art. 864 C. Cédule hypothécaire sur papier / III. Droits du créancier / 2. Transfert

2. Transfert

1 La remise du titre à l’acquéreur est nécessaire pour le transfert de la créance constatée par une cédule hypothécaire.

2 Si le titre est nominatif, le transfert opéré et le nom de l’acquéreur y sont mentionnés.

Art. 865 C. Cédule hypothécaire sur papier / IV. Annulation

IV. Annulation

1 Lorsqu’un titre est perdu ou qu’il a été détruit sans intention d’éteindre la dette, le créancier peut requérir du juge qu’il en prononce l’annulation et en exige le paiement ou, si la créance n’est pas encore exigible, qu’il délivre un nouveau titre.

2 L’annulation a lieu de la manière prescrite pour les titres au porteur; le délai d’opposition est de six mois.

3 Le débiteur a pareillement le droit de faire prononcer l’annulation d’un titre acquitté qui ne peut être représenté.

Art. 866 à 874

Abrogés


  Chapitre IV: Des émissions de titres fonciers

Art. 875 A. Obligations foncières

A. Obligations foncières

Des obligations nominatives ou au porteur peuvent être garanties par un gage immobilier:

1.
en constituant une hypothèque ou une cédule hypothécaire pour la totalité de l’emprunt et en désignant un représentant des créanciers et du débiteur;
2.
en constituant un gage immobilier pour la totalité de l’emprunt au profit de l’établissement chargé de l’émission et en grevant la créance ainsi garantie d’un gage en faveur des obligataires.
Art. 876 à 8831

1 Abrogés par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).


  Titre vingt-troisième: Du gage mobilier

  Chapitre I: Du nantissement et du droit de rétention

Art. 884 A. Nantissement / I. Constitution / 1. Possession du créancier

A. Nantissement

I. Constitution

1. Possession du créancier

1 En dehors des exceptions prévues par la loi, les choses mobilières ne peuvent être constituées en gage que sous forme de nantissement.

2 Celui qui, de bonne foi, reçoit une chose en nantissement y acquiert un droit de gage, même si l’auteur du nantissement n’avait pas qualité d’en disposer; demeurent réservés les droits dérivant pour les tiers de leur possession antérieure.

3 Le droit de gage n’existe pas, tant que le constituant garde exclusivement la maîtrise effective de la chose.

Art. 885 A. Nantissement / I. Constitution / 2. Engagement du bétail

2. Engagement du bétail

1 Des droits de gage sur le bétail peuvent être constitués, sans transfert de possession, par une inscription dans un registre public et un avis donné à l’office des poursuites, pour garantir les créances d’établissements de crédit et de sociétés coopératives qui ont obtenu de l’autorité compétente du canton où ils ont leur siège le droit de faire de semblables opérations.

2 La tenue du registre est réglée par une ordonnance du Conseil fédéral.1

3 Les cantons peuvent percevoir des émoluments pour les inscriptions au registre et les opérations qui leur sont liées; ils désignent les arrondissements et les fonctionnaires chargés de la tenue du registre.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 886 A. Nantissement / I. Constitution / 3. Droit de gage subséquent

3. Droit de gage subséquent

Le propriétaire peut constituer un droit de gage subséquent, à la condition d’en donner avis par écrit au créancier nanti et de l’informer en outre qu’il ait à remettre la chose à l’autre créancier une fois la dette payée.

Art. 887 A. Nantissement / I. Constitution / 4. Engagement par le créancier

4. Engagement par le créancier

Le créancier ne peut engager la chose dont il est nanti qu’avec le consentement de celui dont il la tient.

Art. 888 A. Nantissement / II. Extinction / 1. Perte de la possession

II. Extinction

1. Perte de la possession

1 Le nantissement s’éteint dès que le créancier cesse de posséder le gage et qu’il ne peut le réclamer de tiers possesseurs.

2 Les effets du nantissement sont suspendus tant que le constituant garde exclusivement la maîtrise effective de la chose du consentement du créancier.

Art. 889 A. Nantissement / II. Extinction / 2. Restitution

2. Restitution

1 Le créancier doit restituer la chose à l’ayant droit, lorsque son gage est éteint par le paiement ou pour une autre cause.

2 Il n’est tenu de rendre tout ou partie du gage qu’après avoir été intégralement payé.

Art. 890 A. Nantissement / II. Extinction / 3. Responsabilité du créancier

3. Responsabilité du créancier

1 Le créancier répond de la dépréciation ou de la perte du gage, à moins qu’il ne prouve que le dommage est survenu sans sa faute.

2 Il doit la réparation intégrale du dommage, s’il a de son chef aliéné ou engagé la chose reçue en nantissement.

Art. 891 A. Nantissement / III. Effets / 1. Droits du créancier

III. Effets

1. Droits du créancier

1 Le créancier qui n’est pas désintéressé a le droit de se payer sur le prix provenant de la réalisation du gage.

2 Le nantissement garantit au créancier le capital, les intérêts conventionnels, les frais de poursuite et les intérêts moratoires.

Art. 892 A. Nantissement / III. Effets / 2. Étendue du gage

2. Étendue du gage

1 Le gage grève la chose et ses accessoires.

2 Sauf convention contraire, le créancier rend les fruits naturels de la chose au débiteur dès qu’ils ont cessé d’en faire partie intégrante.

3 Le gage s’étend aux fruits qui, lors de la réalisation, font partie intégrante de la chose.

Art. 893 A. Nantissement / III. Effets / 3. Rang des droits de gage

3. Rang des droits de gage

1 Les créanciers sont payés selon leur rang, lorsque la chose est grevée de plusieurs droits de gage.

2 Le rang est déterminé par la date de la constitution des gages.

Art. 894 A. Nantissement / III. Effets / 4. Pacte commissoire

4. Pacte commissoire

Est nulle toute clause qui autoriserait le créancier à s’approprier le gage faute de paiement.

Art. 895 B. Droit de rétention / I. Condition

B. Droit de rétention

I. Condition

1 Le créancier qui, du consentement du débiteur, se trouve en possession de choses mobilières ou de papiers-valeurs appartenant à ce dernier, a le droit de les retenir jusqu’au paiement, à la condition que sa créance soit exigible et qu’il y ait un rapport naturel de connexité entre elle et l’objet retenu.

2 Cette connexité existe pour les commerçants dès que la possession de la chose et la créance résultent de leurs relations d’affaires.

3 Le droit de rétention s’étend même aux choses qui ne sont pas la propriété du débiteur, pourvu que le créancier les ait reçues de bonne foi; demeurent réservés les droits dérivant pour les tiers de leur possession antérieure.

Art. 896 B. Droit de rétention / II. Exceptions

II. Exceptions

1 Le droit de rétention ne peut s’exercer sur des choses qui, de leur nature, ne sont pas réalisables.

2 Il ne naît point, s’il est incompatible soit avec une obligation assumée par le créancier, soit avec les instructions données par le débiteur lors de la remise de la chose ou auparavant, soit avec l’ordre public.

Art. 897 B. Droit de rétention / III. En cas d’insolvabilité

III. En cas d’insolvabilité

1 Lorsque le débiteur est insolvable, le créancier peut exercer son droit de rétention même pour la garantie d’une créance non exigible.

2 Si l’insolvabilité ne s’est produite ou n’est parvenue à la connaissance du créancier que postérieurement à la remise de la chose, il peut encore exercer son droit de rétention, nonobstant les instructions données par le débiteur ou l’obligation qu’il aurait lui-même assumée auparavant de faire de la chose un usage déterminé.

Art. 898 B. Droit de rétention / IV. Effets

IV. Effets

1 Le créancier qui n’a reçu ni paiement ni garantie suffisante peut, après un avertissement préalable donné au débiteur, poursuivre comme en matière de nantissement la réalisation de la chose retenue.

2 S’il s’agit de titres nominatifs, le préposé ou l’office des faillites procède en lieu et place du débiteur aux actes nécessaires à la réalisation.


  Chapitre II: Du gage sur les créances et autres droits

Art. 899 A. En général

A. En général

1 Les créances et autres droits aliénables peuvent être constitués en gage.

2 Sauf disposition contraire, les règles du nantissement sont applicables.

Art. 900 B. Constitution / I. Créances ordinaires

B. Constitution

I. Créances ordinaires

1 L’engagement des créances qui ne sont pas constatées par un titre ou ne résultent que d’une reconnaissance de dette, a lieu par écrit et en outre, dans le dernier cas, par la remise du titre.

2 Le créancier et le constituant peuvent donner avis de l’engagement au tiers débiteur.

3 L’engagement des autres droits s’opère par écrit, en observant les formes établies pour leur transfert.

Art. 901 B. Constitution / II. Papiers-valeurs

II. Papiers-valeurs

1 L’engagement des titres au porteur s’opère par leur seule remise au créancier gagiste.

2 L’engagement d’autres papiers-valeurs ne peut avoir lieu que par la remise du titre muni d’un endossement ou d’une cession.

3 L’engagement des titres intermédiés est régi exclusivement par la loi du 3 octobre 2008 sur les titres intermédiés1.2


1 RS 957.1
2 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 3 oct. 2008 sur les titres intermédiés, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2010 (RO 2009 3577; FF 2006 8817).

Art. 902 B. Constitution / III. Titres représentatifs de marchandises et warrants

III. Titres représentatifs de marchandises et warrants

1 Le nantissement des papiers-valeurs qui représentent des marchandises emporte droit de gage sur celles-ci.

2 Lorsqu’un titre de gage spécial (warrant) a été créé indépendamment du titre qui représente les marchandises, l’engagement du warrant équivaut au nantissement de celles-ci, pourvu qu’il en soit fait mention sur le titre principal avec indication de la somme garantie et de l’échéance.

Art. 903 B. Constitution / IV. Engagement subséquent de la créance

IV. Engagement subséquent de la créance

L’engagement subséquent d’une créance déjà grevée d’un droit de gage n’est valable que si le propriétaire de la créance ou le nouveau créancier gagiste en avise par écrit le créancier gagiste antérieur.

Art. 904 C. Effets / I. Étendue du droit du créancier

C. Effets

I. Étendue du droit du créancier

1 Le gage constitué sur des créances produisant des intérêts ou d’autres revenus périodiques, tels que des dividendes, ne s’étend, sauf convention contraire, qu’aux prestations courantes, à l’exclusion de celles qui sont échues antérieurement.

2 Lorsque ces prestations accessoires sont représentées par des titres particuliers, elles ne sont comprises dans le gage, sauf stipulation contraire, que si elles ont été engagées elles-mêmes conformément à la loi.

Art. 905 C. Effets / II. Représentation d’actions et de parts sociales d’une société à responsabilité limitée données en gage

II. Représentation d’actions et de parts sociales d’une société à responsabilité limitée données en gage1

1 Les actions données en gage sont représentées dans l’assemblée générale de la société par l’actionnaire lui-même et non par le créancier gagiste.

2 Les parts sociales d’une société à responsabilité limitée données en gage sont représentées dans l’assemblée des associés par l’associé lui-même et non par le créancier gagiste.2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
2 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).

Art. 906 C. Effets / III. Administration et remboursement

III. Administration et remboursement

1 Le propriétaire de la créance engagée peut la dénoncer ou en opérer le recouvrement et le créancier gagiste a le droit de l’y contraindre, si ces mesures sont commandées par l’intérêt d’une bonne gestion.

2 Le débiteur, avisé du gage, ne peut s’acquitter entre les mains du propriétaire ou du créancier gagiste qu’avec le consentement de l’autre intéressé.

3 À défaut de ce consentement, il doit consigner.


  Chapitre III: Des prêteurs sur gages

Art. 907 A. Établissements de prêts sur gages / I. Autorisation

A. Établissements de prêts sur gages

I. Autorisation

1 Nul ne peut exercer le métier de prêteur sur gages sans l’autorisation du gouvernement cantonal.

2 La législation cantonale peut prescrire que cette autorisation ne sera accordée qu’à des établissements publics du canton ou des communes et à des entreprises d’utilité générale.

3 Elle pourra soumettre les prêteurs sur gages au paiement d’une taxe.

Art. 908 A. Établissements de prêts sur gages / II. Durée

II. Durée

1 L’autorisation n’est accordée aux établissements privés que pour un temps limité; elle peut être renouvelée.

2 Elle peut être retirée en tout temps aux prêteurs sur gages qui n’observent pas les dispositions auxquelles ils sont soumis.

Art. 909 B. Prêt sur gages / I. Constitution

B. Prêt sur gages

I. Constitution

Le droit de gage est constitué par la remise de la chose contre un reçu.

Art. 910 B. Prêt sur gages / II. Effets / 1. Vente du gage

II. Effets

1. Vente du gage

1 Lorsque le prêt n’est pas remboursé au terme convenu, le créancier peut, après avoir préalablement et publiquement sommé le débiteur de s’acquitter, faire vendre le gage par les soins de l’autorité compétente.

2 Le créancier n’a aucune action personnelle contre l’emprunteur.

Art. 911 B. Prêt sur gages / II. Effets / 2. Droit à l’excédent

2. Droit à l’excédent

1 L’excédent du prix de vente sur le montant de la créance appartient à l’emprunteur.

2 Lorsque ce dernier a contracté plusieurs dettes, elles peuvent être additionnées pour le calcul de l’excédent.

3 Le droit à l’excédent se prescrit par cinq ans à compter de la vente de la chose.

Art. 912 B. Prêt sur gages / III. Remboursement / 1. Droit de dégager la chose

III. Remboursement

1. Droit de dégager la chose

1 La chose peut être dégagée, contre restitution du reçu, tant que la vente n’a pas eu lieu.

2 Si le reçu n’est pas produit, la chose peut néanmoins être dégagée, dès l’époque de l’exigibilité, par celui qui justifie de son droit.

3 Cette faculté existe également lorsque six mois se sont écoulés depuis ladite époque, même si le prêteur s’était expressément réservé la faculté de ne rendre la chose que contre restitution du reçu.

Art. 913 B. Prêt sur gages / III. Remboursement / 2. Droits du prêteur

2. Droits du prêteur

1 Le prêteur a le droit, lors du dégagement, d’exiger l’intérêt entier du mois courant.

2 S’il s’est expressément réservé la faculté de rendre la chose à tout porteur du reçu, il peut le faire, à moins qu’il ne sache ou ne doive savoir que le porteur s’est procuré le reçu d’une manière illicite.

Art. 914 C. Achats sous pacte de réméré

C. Achats sous pacte de réméré

Ceux qui font métier d’acheter sous pacte de réméré sont assimilés aux prêteurs sur gages.

Art. 915 D. Droit cantonal

D. Droit cantonal

1 La législation cantonale peut établir d’autres règles pour l’exercice de la profession de prêteur sur gages.

2 ...1


1 Abrogé par le ch. II 21 de la LF du 15 déc. 1989 relative à l’approbation d’actes législatifs des cantons par la Confédération, avec effet au 1er fév. 1991 (RO 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1293).


  Chapitre IV ...

Art. 916 à 9181

1 Abrogés par l’art. 52 al. 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1930 sur l’émission de lettres de gage, avec effet au 1er fév. 1931 (RO 47 113; FF 1925 III 547).


  Troisième partie: De la possession et du registre foncier

  Titre vingt-quatrième: De la possession

Art. 919 A. Définition et formes / I. Définition

A. Définition et formes

I. Définition

1 Celui qui a la maîtrise effective de la chose en a la possession.

2 En matière de servitudes et charges foncières, la possession consiste dans l’exercice effectif du droit.

Art. 920 A. Définition et formes / II. Possession originaire et dérivée

II. Possession originaire et dérivée

1 Lorsque le possesseur remet la chose à un tiers pour lui conférer soit un droit de servitude ou de gage, soit un droit personnel, tous deux en ont la possession.

2 Ceux qui possèdent à titre de propriétaire ont une possession originaire, les autres une possession dérivée.

Art. 921 A. Définition et formes / III. Interruption passagère

III. Interruption passagère

La possession n’est pas perdue, lorsque l’exercice en est empêché ou interrompu par des faits de nature passagère.

Art. 922 B. Transfert / I. Entre présents

B. Transfert

I. Entre présents

1 La possession se transfère par la remise à l’acquéreur de la chose même ou des moyens qui la font passer en sa puissance.

2 La tradition est parfaite dès que la chose se trouve, de par la volonté du possesseur antérieur, en la puissance de l’acquéreur.

Art. 923 B. Transfert / II. Entre absents

II. Entre absents

La tradition est parfaite entre absents par la remise de la chose à l’acquéreur ou à son représentant.

Art. 924 B. Transfert / III. Sans tradition

III. Sans tradition

1 La possession peut s’acquérir sans tradition, lorsqu’un tiers ou l’aliénateur lui-même demeure en possession de la chose à un titre spécial.

2 Ce transfert ne produit d’effets à l’égard du tiers resté en possession que dès le moment où l’aliénateur l’en a informé.

3 Le tiers peut refuser la délivrance à l’acquéreur pour les motifs qui lui auraient permis de la refuser à l’aliénateur.

Art. 925 B. Transfert / IV. Marchandises représentées par des titres

IV. Marchandises représentées par des titres

1 Le transfert des papiers-valeurs délivrés en représentation de marchandises confiées à un voiturier ou à un entrepôt équivaut à la tradition des marchandises mêmes.

2 Si néanmoins l’acquéreur de bonne foi du titre est en conflit avec un acquéreur de bonne foi des marchandises, celui-ci a la préférence.

Art. 926 C. Portée juridique / I. Protection de la possession / 1. Droit de défense

C. Portée juridique

I. Protection de la possession

1. Droit de défense

1 Le possesseur a le droit de repousser par la force tout acte d’usurpation ou de trouble.

2 Il peut, lorsque la chose lui a été enlevée par violence ou clandestinement, la reprendre aussitôt, en expulsant l’usurpateur s’il s’agit d’un immeuble et, s’il s’agit d’une chose mobilière, en l’arrachant au spoliateur surpris en flagrant délit ou arrêté dans sa fuite.

3 Il doit s’abstenir de toutes voies de fait non justifiées par les circonstances.

Art. 927 C. Portée juridique / I. Protection de la possession / 2. Réintégrande

2. Réintégrande

1 Quiconque usurpe une chose en la possession d’autrui est tenu de la rendre, même s’il y prétend un droit préférable.

2 Cette restitution n’aura pas lieu, si le défendeur établit aussitôt un droit préférable qui l’autoriserait à reprendre la chose au demandeur.

3 L’action tend à la restitution de la chose et à la réparation du dommage.

Art. 928 C. Portée juridique / I. Protection de la possession / 3. Action en raison du trouble de la possession

3. Action en raison du trouble de la possession

1 Le possesseur troublé dans sa possession peut actionner l’auteur du trouble, même si ce dernier prétend à quelque droit sur la chose.

2 L’action tend à faire cesser le trouble, à la défense de le causer et à la réparation du dommage.

Art. 929 C. Portée juridique / I. Protection de la possession / 4. Déchéance et prescription

4. Déchéance et prescription

1 Le possesseur est déchu de son action, s’il ne réclame pas la restitution de la chose ou la cessation du trouble aussitôt après avoir connu le fait et l’auteur de l’atteinte portée à son droit.

2 Son action se prescrit par un an; ce délai court dès le jour de l’usurpation ou du trouble, même si le possesseur n’a connu que plus tard l’atteinte subie et l’auteur de celle-ci.

Art. 930 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 1. Présomption de propriété

II. Protection du droit

1. Présomption de propriété

1 Le possesseur d’une chose mobilière en est présumé propriétaire.

2 Les possesseurs antérieurs sont présumés avoir été propriétaires de la chose pendant la durée de leur possession.

Art. 931 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 2. Présomption en matière de possession dérivée

2. Présomption en matière de possession dérivée

1 Celui qui, sans la volonté d’en être propriétaire, possède une chose mobilière, peut invoquer la présomption de propriété de la personne dont il tient cette chose de bonne foi.

2 Si quelqu’un prétend posséder en vertu d’un droit personnel ou d’un droit réel autre que la propriété, l’existence du droit est présumée, mais il ne peut opposer cette présomption à celui dont il tient la chose.

Art. 932 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 3. Action contre le possesseur

3. Action contre le possesseur

Le possesseur d’une chose mobilière peut opposer à toute action dirigée contre lui la présomption qu’il est au bénéfice d’un droit préférable; demeurent réservées les dispositions concernant les actes d’usurpation ou de trouble.

Art. 933 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 4. Droit de disposition et de revendication / a. Choses confiées

4. Droit de disposition et de revendication

a. Choses confiées

L’acquéreur de bonne foi auquel une chose mobilière est transférée à titre de propriété ou d’autre droit réel par celui auquel elle avait été confiée, doit être maintenu dans son acquisition, même si l’auteur du transfert n’avait pas l’autorisation de l’opérer.

Art. 934 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 4. Droit de disposition et de revendication / b. Choses perdues ou volées

b. Choses perdues ou volées

1 Le possesseur auquel une chose mobilière a été volée ou qui l’a perdue, ou qui s’en trouve dessaisi de quelque autre manière sans sa volonté, peut la revendiquer pendant cinq ans. L’art. 722 est réservé.1

1bis L’action en revendication portant sur des biens culturels au sens de l’art. 2, al. 1, de la loi du 20 juin 2003 sur le transfert des biens culturels2 dont le propriétaire s’est trouvé dessaisi sans sa volonté se prescrit par un an à compter du moment où le propriétaire a eu connaissance du lieu où se trouve l’objet et de l’identité du possesseur, mais au plus tard par 30 ans après qu’il en a été dessaisi.3

2 Lorsque la chose a été acquise dans des enchères publiques, dans un marché ou d’un marchand d’objets de même espèce, elle ne peut plus être revendiquée ni contre le premier acquéreur, ni contre un autre acquéreur de bonne foi, si ce n’est à la condition de lui rembourser le prix qu’il a payé.

3 La restitution est soumise d’ailleurs aux règles concernant les droits du possesseur de bonne foi.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 2002 (Animaux), en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 2003 (RO 2003 463 466; FF 2002 3885 5418).
2 RS 444.1
3 Introduit par l’art. 32 ch. 1 de la LF du 20 juin 2003 sur le transfert des biens culturels, en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2005 (RO 2005 1869; FF 2002 505).

Art. 935 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 4. Droit de disposition et de revendication / c. Monnaie et titres au porteur

c. Monnaie et titres au porteur

La monnaie et les titres au porteur ne peuvent être revendiqués contre l’acquéreur de bonne foi, même si le possesseur en a été dessaisi contre sa volonté.

Art. 936 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 4. Droit de disposition et de revendication / d. En cas de mauvaise foi

d. En cas de mauvaise foi

1 Celui qui n’a pas acquis de bonne foi la possession d’une chose mobilière peut être contraint en tout temps de la restituer au possesseur antérieur.

2 Lorsque celui-ci n’est pas lui-même un acquéreur de bonne foi, il ne peut revendiquer la chose contre aucun possesseur subséquent.

Art. 937 C. Portée juridique / II. Protection du droit / 5. Présomption à l’égard des immeubles

5. Présomption à l’égard des immeubles

1 S’il s’agit d’immeubles immatriculés au registre foncier, la présomption du droit et les actions possessoires n’appartiennent qu’à la personne inscrite.

2 Celle qui a la maîtrise effective de l’immeuble peut toutefois actionner pour cause d’usurpation ou de trouble.

Art. 938 C. Portée juridique / III. Responsabilité / 1. Possesseur de bonne foi / a. Jouissance

III. Responsabilité

1. Possesseur de bonne foi

a. Jouissance

1 Le possesseur de bonne foi qui a joui de la chose conformément à son droit présumé ne doit de ce chef aucune indemnité à celui auquel il est tenu de la restituer.

2 Il ne répond ni des pertes, ni des détériorations.

Art. 939 C. Portée juridique / III. Responsabilité / 1. Possesseur de bonne foi / b. Indemnités

b. Indemnités

1 Le possesseur de bonne foi peut réclamer du demandeur en restitution le remboursement des impenses nécessaires et utiles qu’il a faites et retenir la chose jusqu’au paiement.

2 Les autres impenses ne lui donnent droit à aucune indemnité, mais il a la faculté d’enlever, avant toute restitution, ce qu’il a uni à la chose et qui peut en être séparé sans dommage, à moins que le demandeur ne lui en offre la contre-valeur.

3 Les fruits perçus par le possesseur sont imputés sur ce qui lui est dû en raison de ses impenses.

Art. 940 C. Portée juridique / III. Responsabilité / 2. Possesseur de mauvaise foi

2. Possesseur de mauvaise foi

1 Le possesseur de mauvaise foi doit restituer la chose et indemniser l’ayant droit de tout le dommage résultant de l’indue détention, ainsi que des fruits qu’il a perçus ou négligé de percevoir.

2 Il n’a de créance en raison de ses impenses que si l’ayant droit eût été dans la nécessité de les faire lui-même.

3 Il ne répond que du dommage causé par sa faute, aussi longtemps qu’il ignore à qui la chose doit être restituée.

Art. 941 C. Portée juridique / IV. Prescription

IV. Prescription

Le possesseur qui est en droit de prescrire a la faculté de joindre à sa possession celle de son auteur, si la prescription pouvait courir aussi en faveur de ce dernier.


  Titre vingt-cinquième: Du registre foncier

Art. 942 A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 1. En général

A. Organisation

I. Le registre foncier

1. En général

1 Le registre foncier donne l’état des droits sur les immeubles.

2 Il comprend le grand livre, les documents complémentaires (plan, rôle, pièces justificatives, état descriptif) et le journal.

3 Le registre foncier peut être tenu sur papier ou au moyen de l’informatique.1

4 En cas de tenue informatisée du registre foncier, les données inscrites produisent des effets juridiques si elles sont correctement enregistrées dans le système et si les appareils de l’office du registre foncier en permettent la lecture sous forme de chiffres et de lettres par des procédés techniques ou sous forme de plans.2


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 sur la signature électronique, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005 (RO 2004 5085; FF 2001 5423).
2 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 sur la signature électronique, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005 (RO 2004 5085; FF 2001 5423).

Art. 9431A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 2. Immatriculation / a. Immeubles immatriculés

2. Immatriculation

a. Immeubles immatriculés

1 Sont immatriculés comme immeubles au registre foncier:

1.
les biens-fonds;
2.
les droits distincts et permanents sur des immeubles;
3.
les mines;
4.
les parts de copropriété d’un immeuble.

2 Les conditions et le mode d’immatriculation des droits distincts et permanents, des mines et des parts de copropriété sur des immeubles sont déterminés par une ordonnance du Conseil fédéral.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. III de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989 1001; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 944 A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 2. Immatriculation / b. Immeubles non immatriculés

b. Immeubles non immatriculés

1 Les immeubles qui ne sont pas propriété privée et ceux qui servent à l’usage public ne sont immatriculés que s’il existe à leur égard des droits réels dont l’inscription doit avoir lieu, ou si l’immatriculation est prévue par la législation cantonale.

2 Lorsqu’un immeuble immatriculé se transforme en immeuble non soumis à l’immatriculation, il est éliminé du registre foncier.

3 ...1


1 Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, avec effet au 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 945 A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 3. Les registres / a. Le grand livre

3. Les registres

a. Le grand livre

1 Chaque immeuble reçoit un feuillet et un numéro distincts dans le grand livre.

2 Les formes à observer en cas de division d’un immeuble ou de réunion de plusieurs fonds sont réglées par une ordonnance du Conseil fédéral.

Art. 946 A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 3. Les registres / b. Le feuillet du registre foncier

b. Le feuillet du registre foncier

1 Les inscriptions portées dans les diverses rubriques du feuillet comprennent:

1.
la propriété;
2.
les servitudes et les charges foncières établies en faveur de l’immeuble ou sur l’immeuble;
3.
les droits de gage dont l’immeuble est grevé.

2 À la demande du propriétaire, les accessoires de l’immeuble peuvent être mentionnés sur le feuillet; ils ne sont radiés que du consentement de tous ceux dont les droits sont constatés par le registre foncier.

Art. 947 A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 3. Les registres / c. Feuillets collectifs

c. Feuillets collectifs

1 Plusieurs immeubles, même non contigus, peuvent être immatriculés sur un feuillet unique avec l’assentiment du propriétaire.

2 Les inscriptions portées sur ce feuillet étendent leurs effets, sauf pour les servitudes foncières, à tous les immeubles qui y sont réunis.

3 Le propriétaire peut demander en tout temps que certains immeubles immatriculés sur un feuillet collectif cessent d’y figurer; les droits existants demeurent réservés.

Art. 948 A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 3. Les registres / d. Journal, pièces justificatives

d. Journal, pièces justificatives

1 Les réquisitions d’inscription sont portées dans le journal à mesure qu’elles ont lieu et à la suite les unes des autres, avec l’indication de leur auteur et de leur objet.

2 Les pièces justificatives des inscriptions sont dûment classées et conservées.

3 Dans les cantons où le conservateur du registre foncier a qualité pour dresser des actes authentiques, les pièces justificatives peuvent être remplacées par un recueil des titres, dont les inscriptions ont un caractère d’authenticité.

Art. 949 A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 4. Ordonnances / a. En général

4. Ordonnances

a. En général1

1 Le Conseil fédéral arrête les formulaires du registre foncier, rend les ordonnances nécessaires et peut prescrire la tenue de registres accessoires.

2 Les cantons ont le droit d’édicter les dispositions relatives à l’inscription des droits réels sur les immeubles régis par la législation cantonale: la sanction de la Confédération demeure réservée.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 sur la signature électronique, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005 (RO 2004 5085; FF 2001 5423).

Art. 949a1A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 4. Ordonnances / b. Tenue informatisée du registre foncier

b. Tenue informatisée du registre foncier

1 Le canton qui veut tenir le registre foncier au moyen de l’informatique doit obtenir une autorisation du Département fédéral de justice et police.

2 Le Conseil fédéral règle:

1.
la procédure d’autorisation;
2.
l’étendue et les détails techniques de la tenue du registre au moyen de l’informatique, en particulier le processus par lequel les inscriptions déploient leurs effets;
3.
les conditions auxquelles, le cas échéant, les communications et les transactions conduites avec le registre foncier peuvent se faire par voie électronique;
4.
les conditions auxquelles, le cas échéant, les données du grand livre consultables sans justification d’un intérêt peuvent être mises à la disposition du public;
5.
l’accès aux données, l’enregistrement des interrogations et les conditions justifiant le retrait du droit d’accès en cas d’usage abusif;
6.
la protection des données;
7.
la conservation des données à long terme et leur archivage.

3 Le Département fédéral de justice et police ainsi que le Département fédéral de la défense, de la protection de la population et des sports définissent des modèles de données et des interfaces uniformes pour le registre foncier et pour la mensuration cadastrale.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889). Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 sur la signature électronique, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005 (RO 2004 5085; FF 2001 5423).

Art. 949b1A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 4a. ...

4a. ...


1 Pas encore en vigueur (RO 2018 4017).

Art. 949c1A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 4b. ...

4b. ...


1 Pas encore en vigueur (RO 2018 4017).

Art. 949d1A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 4c. Recours à des délégataires privés dans l’exploitation du registre foncier informatisé

4c. Recours à des délégataires privés dans l’exploitation du registre foncier informatisé

1 Les cantons qui tiennent le registre foncier au moyen de l’informatique peuvent charger des délégataires privés de l’accomplissement des tâches suivantes:

1.
garantir l’accès aux données du registre foncier selon une procédure en ligne;
2.
garantir l’accès public aux données du grand livre consultables sans justification d’un intérêt;
3.
assurer les communications et les transactions électroniques avec l’office du registre foncier.

2 Les délégataires privés sont soumis à la surveillance des cantons et à la haute surveillance de la Confédération.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 15 déc. 2017 (Enregistrement de l’état civil et registre foncier), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2019 (RO 2018 4017; FF 2014 3395).

Art. 9501A. Organisation / I. Le registre foncier / 5. Mensuration officielle

5. Mensuration officielle

1 L’immatriculation et la description de chaque immeuble dans le registre foncier s’effectuent sur la base de la mensuration officielle, notamment d’un plan du registre foncier.

2 La loi fédérale du 5 octobre 2007 sur la géoinformation2 fixe les exigences qualitatives et techniques applicables à la mensuration officielle.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. II de la LF du 5 oct. 2007 sur la géoinformation, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2008 (RO 2008 2793; FF 2006 7407).
2 RS 510.62

Art. 951 A. Organisation / II. Tenue du registre foncier / 1. Arrondissements / a. Compétence

II. Tenue du registre foncier

1. Arrondissements

a. Compétence

1 Des arrondissements sont formés pour la tenue du registre foncier.

2 Les immeubles sont immatriculés au registre de l’arrondissement dans lequel ils sont situés.

Art. 952 A. Organisation / II. Tenue du registre foncier / 1. Arrondissements / b. Immeubles situés dans plusieurs arrondissements

b. Immeubles situés dans plusieurs arrondissements

1 L’immeuble situé dans plusieurs arrondissements est immatriculé au registre de chaque arrondissement, avec renvoi au registre des autres.

2 Les réquisitions et les inscriptions constitutives de droits réels s’opèrent au registre de l’arrondissement où se trouve la plus grande partie de l’immeuble.

3 Les inscriptions faites dans ce bureau sont communiquées par le conservateur aux bureaux des autres arrondissements.

Art. 953 A. Organisation / II. Tenue du registre foncier / 2. Bureaux du registre foncier

2. Bureaux du registre foncier

1 L’organisation des bureaux du registre foncier, la formation des arrondissements, la nomination et le traitement des fonctionnaires, ainsi que la surveillance, sont réglés par les cantons.

2 Les dispositions prises par les cantons, à l’exclusion de celles qui concernent la nomination et le traitement des fonctionnaires, sont soumises à l’approbation de la Confédération.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 21 de la LF du 15 déc. 1989 relative à l’approbation d’actes législatifs des cantons par la Confédération, en vigueur depuis le 1er fév. 1991 (RO 1991 362 369: FF 1988 II 1293).

Art. 954 A. Organisation / II. Tenue du registre foncier / 3. Émoluments

3. Émoluments

1 Les cantons peuvent percevoir des émoluments pour les inscriptions au registre foncier et les travaux de mensuration qui s’y rattachent.

2 Aucun émolument n’est dû pour les inscriptions déterminées par des améliorations du sol ou par des échanges de terrains faits en vue d’arrondir une exploitation agricole.

Art. 955 A. Organisation / III. Responsabilité

III. Responsabilité1

1 Les cantons sont responsables de tout dommage résultant de la tenue du registre foncier.

2 Ils ont un droit de recours contre les fonctionnaires, les employés et les autorités de surveillance immédiate qui ont commis une faute.

3 Ils peuvent exiger une garantie de leurs fonctionnaires et employés.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 9561A. Organisation / IV. Surveillance administrative

IV. Surveillance administrative

1 La gestion des offices du registre foncier est soumise à la surveillance administrative des cantons.

2 La Confédération exerce la haute surveillance.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 956a1A. Organisation / V. Recours / 1. Qualité pour recourir

V. Recours

1. Qualité pour recourir

1 Les décisions de l’office du registre foncier peuvent faire l’objet d’un recours devant l’autorité désignée par le canton; le déni de justice ou le retard injustifié dans l’accomplissement d’un acte équivalent à des décisions.

2 À qualité pour recourir:

1.
toute personne atteinte de manière particulière par une décision de l’office du registre foncier et ayant un intérêt digne de protection à ce qu’elle soit annulée ou modifiée;
2.
l’autorité de surveillance administrative du canton dans la mesure où le droit cantonal lui accorde un droit de recours;
3.
l’autorité fédérale exerçant la haute surveillance.

3 Le recours est exclu lorsque l’inscription, la modification ou la radiation de droits réels ou d’annotations ont été portées au grand livre.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 956b1A. Organisation / V. Recours / 2. Procédure de recours

2. Procédure de recours

1 Le délai de recours devant l’instance cantonale est de 30 jours.

2 Un recours peut être interjeté en tout temps pour déni de justice ou retard injustifié dans l’accomplissement d’un acte.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 9571

1 Abrogé par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 958 B. Inscription / I. Droits à inscrire / 1. Propriété et droits réels

B. Inscription

I. Droits à inscrire

1. Propriété et droits réels

Le registre foncier est destiné à l’inscription des droits immobiliers suivants:

1.
la propriété;
2.
les servitudes et les charges foncières;
3.
les droits de gage.
Art. 959 B. Inscription / I. Droits à inscrire / 2. Annotations / a. Droits personnels

2. Annotations

a. Droits personnels

1 Les droits personnels, tels que les droits de préemption, d’emption et de réméré, les baux à ferme et à loyer, peuvent être annotés au registre foncier dans les cas expressément prévus par la loi.

2 Ils deviennent ainsi opposables à tout droit postérieurement acquis sur l’immeuble.

Art. 960 B. Inscription / I. Droits à inscrire / 2. Annotations / b. Restrictions du droit d’aliéner

b. Restrictions du droit d’aliéner

1 Les restrictions apportées au droit d’aliéner certains immeubles peuvent être annotées, lorsqu’elles résultent:

1.
d’une décision officielle, rendue pour la conservation de droits litigieux ou de prétentions exécutoires;
2.1
d’une saisie;
3.2
d’actes juridiques dont la loi autorise l’annotation, tels que la substitution fidéicommissaire.

2 Ces restrictions deviennent, par l’effet de leur annotation, opposables à tout droit postérieurement acquis sur l’immeuble.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 4 de la LF du 16 déc. 1994, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1997 (RO 1995 1227 1309; FF 1991 III 1).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 961 B. Inscription / I. Droits à inscrire / 2. Annotations / c. Inscriptions provisoires

c. Inscriptions provisoires

1 Des inscriptions provisoires peuvent être prises:

1.
par celui qui allègue un droit réel;
2.
par celui que la loi autorise à compléter sa légitimation.

2 Elles ont lieu du consentement des intéressés ou en vertu d’une décision judiciaire; elles ont pour effet que le droit, s’il est constaté plus tard, devient opposable aux tiers dès la date de l’inscription provisoire.

3 Le juge statue sur la requête et autorise l’inscription provisoire si le droit allégué lui paraît exister; il détermine exactement la durée et les effets de l’inscription et fixe, le cas échéant, un délai dans lequel le requérant fera valoir son droit en justice.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 961a1B. Inscription / I. Droits à inscrire / 2. Annotations / d. Inscription de droits de rang postérieur

d. Inscription de droits de rang postérieur

L’annotation n’empêche pas l’inscription d’un droit de rang postérieur.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 9621B. Inscription / II. Mention / 1. De restrictions de droit public à la propriété

II. Mention

1. De restrictions de droit public à la propriété

1 La collectivité publique ou une autre entité qui accomplit une tâche d’intérêt public est tenue de faire mentionner au registre foncier la restriction, fondée sur le droit public, de la propriété d’un immeuble déterminé qu’elle a décidée et qui a pour effet d’en entraver durablement l’utilisation, de restreindre durablement le pouvoir du propriétaire d’en disposer ou de créer une obligation déterminée durable à sa charge en relation avec l’immeuble.

2 Si la restriction de la propriété s’éteint, la collectivité ou l’entité concernée est tenue de requérir la radiation de la mention au registre foncier. À défaut, l’office du registre foncier peut radier la mention d’office.

3 Le Conseil fédéral fixe les domaines du droit cantonal dans lesquels les restrictions de la propriété doivent être mentionnées au registre foncier. Les cantons peuvent prévoir d’autres mentions. Ils établissent une liste des catégories de mentions concernées et la communiquent à la Confédération.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 962a1B. Inscription / II. Mention / 2. De représentants

2. De représentants

Peut être mentionnée au registre foncier l’identité:

1.
du représentant légal, à sa requête ou à celle de l’autorité compétente;
2.
de l’administrateur de la succession, du représentant des héritiers, du liquidateur officiel ou de l’exécuteur testamentaire, à sa requête, à celle d’un héritier ou à celle de l’autorité compétente;
3.
du représentant d’un propriétaire, d’un créancier gagiste ou de l’ayant droit d’une servitude introuvables, à sa requête ou à celle du juge;
4.
du représentant d’une personne morale ou d’une autre entité en cas d’absence des organes prescrits, à sa requête ou à celle du juge;
5.
de l’administrateur de la communauté des propriétaires d’étages, à sa requête, à celle de l’assemblée des propriétaires d’étages ou à celle du juge.

1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 963 B. Inscription / III. Conditions de l’inscription / 1. Réquisition / a. Pour inscrire

III. Conditions de l’inscription

1. Réquisition

a. Pour inscrire

1 Les inscriptions s’opèrent sur la déclaration écrite du propriétaire de l’immeuble auquel se rapporte leur objet.

2 Cette déclaration n’est pas nécessaire, lorsque l’acquéreur se fonde sur la loi, ou qu’il produit un jugement passé en force de chose jugée ou tout autre acte équivalent.

3 Les cantons peuvent charger les officiers publics qui ont qualité pour dresser des actes authentiques, de requérir l’inscription des actes reçus par eux.

Art. 964 B. Inscription / III. Conditions de l’inscription / 1. Réquisition / b. Pour radier

b. Pour radier

1 Les radiations ou modifications ne peuvent être faites que sur la déclaration écrite de ceux auxquels l’inscription confère des droits.

2 Cette déclaration peut être remplacée par la signature des ayants droit, apposée sur le journal.

Art. 965 B. Inscription / III. Conditions de l’inscription / 2. Légitimation / a. Validité

2. Légitimation

a. Validité

1 Aucune opération du registre foncier (inscription, modification, radiation) ne peut avoir lieu sans légitimation préalable du requérant quant à son droit de disposition et au titre sur lequel se fonde l’opération.

2 Le requérant établit son droit de disposition en prouvant son identité avec la personne légitimée aux termes du registre, ou sa qualité de représentant de cette dernière.

3 Il justifie de son titre en prouvant que les formes auxquelles la validité de celui-ci est subordonnée ont été observées.

Art. 966 B. Inscription / III. Conditions de l’inscription / 2. Légitimation / b. Complément de légitimation

b. Complément de légitimation

1 Toute réquisition doit être écartée, si la légitimation fait défaut.

2 Néanmoins, si le titre existe et s’il n’y a lieu que de compléter la légitimation, le requérant peut, avec le consentement du propriétaire ou sur ordonnance du juge, prendre une inscription provisoire.

Art. 967 B. Inscription / IV. Mode de l’inscription / 1. En général

IV. Mode de l’inscription

1. En général

1 Les inscriptions au grand livre se font dans l’ordre des réquisitions, ou dans l’ordre des actes ou déclarations signés par-devant le conservateur.

2 Un extrait de toute inscription est délivré à la demande de ceux qu’elle concerne.

3 La forme des inscriptions, des radiations et des extraits est arrêtée par une ordonnance du Conseil fédéral.

Art. 968 B. Inscription / IV. Mode de l’inscription / 2. À l’égard des servitudes

2. À l’égard des servitudes

Les servitudes sont inscrites et radiées aux feuillets du fonds dominant et du fonds servant.

Art. 969 B. Inscription / V. Avis obligatoires

V. Avis obligatoires

1 Le conservateur est tenu de communiquer aux intéressés les opérations auxquelles il procède sans qu’ils aient été prévenus; il avise en particulier de l’acquisition de la propriété par un tiers les titulaires dont le droit de préemption est annoté au registre foncier ou existe en vertu de la loi et ressort du registre foncier.1

2 Les délais pour attaquer ces opérations courent dès que les intéressés ont été avisés.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 9701C. Publicité du registre foncier / I. Communication de renseignements et consultation

C. Publicité du registre foncier

I. Communication de renseignements et consultation

1 Celui qui fait valoir un intérêt a le droit de consulter le registre foncier ou de s’en faire délivrer des extraits.

2 Toute personne a accès aux informations suivantes du grand livre:

1.
la désignation de l’immeuble et son descriptif;
2.
le nom et l’identité du propriétaire;
3.
le type de propriété et la date d’acquisition.

3 Le Conseil fédéral détermine quelles autres indications, en matière de servitudes, de charges foncières et de mentions, peuvent être mises à la disposition du public sans justification d’un intérêt particulier. Ce faisant, il tient compte de la protection de la personnalité.

4 Nul ne peut se prévaloir de ce qu’il n’a pas connu une inscription portée au registre foncier.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 sur la signature électronique, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005 (RO 2004 5085; FF 2001 5423).

Art. 970a1C. Publicité du registre foncier / II. Publications

II. Publications

1 Les cantons peuvent prévoir que les acquisitions de propriété immobilière sont publiées.

2 En cas de partage successoral, d’avancement d’hoirie, de contrat de mariage ou de liquidation du régime, la contre-prestation n’est pas publiée.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889). Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 sur la signature électronique, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2005 (RO 2004 5085; FF 2001 5423).

Art. 971 D. Effets / I. Effets du défaut d’inscription

D. Effets

I. Effets du défaut d’inscription

1 Tout droit dont la constitution est légalement subordonnée à une inscription au registre foncier, n’existe comme droit réel que si cette inscription a eu lieu.

2 L’étendue d’un droit peut être précisée, dans les limites de l’inscription, par les pièces justificatives ou de toute autre manière.

Art. 972 D. Effets / II. Effets de l’inscription / 1. En général

II. Effets de l’inscription

1. En général

1 Les droits réels naissent, prennent leur rang et reçoivent leur date par l’inscription dans le grand livre.

2 L’effet de l’inscription remonte à l’époque où elle a été faite dans le journal, moyennant que les pièces justificatives prévues par la loi aient été jointes à la demande ou, en cas d’inscription provisoire, que la légitimation complémentaire ait eu lieu en temps utile.

3 Dans les cantons où l’acte authentique est dressé par le conservateur au moyen d’une inscription dans le recueil des titres, celle-ci remplace l’inscription au journal.

Art. 973 D. Effets / II. Effets de l’inscription / 2. À l’égard des tiers de bonne foi

2. À l’égard des tiers de bonne foi

1 Celui qui acquiert la propriété ou d’autres droits réels en se fondant de bonne foi sur une inscription du registre foncier, est maintenu dans son acquisition.

2 Cette disposition ne s’applique pas aux limites des immeubles compris dans les territoires en mouvement permanent désignés comme tels par les cantons.1


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 4 oct. 1991, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1994 (RO 1993 1404; FF 1988 III 889).

Art. 974 D. Effets / II. Effets de l’inscription / 3. À l’égard des tiers de mauvaise foi

3. À l’égard des tiers de mauvaise foi

1 Lorsqu’un droit réel a été inscrit indûment, l’inscription ne peut être invoquée par les tiers qui en ont connu ou dû connaître les vices.

2 L’inscription est faite indûment, lorsqu’elle a été opérée sans droit ou en vertu d’un acte juridique non obligatoire.

3 Celui dont les droits réels ont été lésés peut invoquer directement contre les tiers de mauvaise foi l’irrégularité de l’inscription.

Art. 974a1E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / I. Épuration / 1. En cas de division d’un immeuble

E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions

I. Épuration

1. En cas de division d’un immeuble

1 Si un immeuble est divisé, les servitudes, les annotations et les mentions de chaque parcelle doivent être épurées.

2 Le propriétaire de l’immeuble à diviser indique au registre foncier les inscriptions qui doivent être radiées et celles qui doivent être reportées. À défaut, la réquisition est rejetée.

3 Lorsqu’il ressort des pièces ou des circonstances qu’une inscription ne concerne pas certaines parcelles, elle doit être radiée. La procédure suit celle de la radiation des inscriptions.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 974b1E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / I. Épuration / 2. En cas de réunion d’immeubles

2. En cas de réunion d’immeubles

1 Plusieurs immeubles appartenant au même propriétaire peuvent être réunis si aucun droit de gage ni charge foncière ne doivent être transférés sur le nouvel immeuble ou que les créanciers y consentent.

2 Lorsque des servitudes, des annotations ou des mentions grèvent ces immeubles, ceux-ci ne peuvent être réunis que si les ayants droit y consentent ou si leurs droits ne sont pas lésés à raison de la nature de la charge.

3 Lorsque des servitudes, des annotations ou des mentions sont inscrites en faveur des immeubles, ceux-ci ne peuvent être réunis que si les propriétaires des immeubles grevés y consentent ou si la réunion n’entraîne aucune aggravation de la charge.

4 Les dispositions relatives à l’épuration en cas de division de l’immeuble sont applicables par analogie.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 975 E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / II. En cas d’inscription indue

II. En cas d’inscription indue1

1 Celui dont les droits réels ont été lésés par une inscription faite ou par des inscriptions modifiées ou radiées sans cause légitime, peut en exiger la radiation ou la modification.

2 Demeurent réservés les droits acquis aux tiers de bonne foi par l’inscription, ainsi que tous dommages-intérêts.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 9761E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / III. Radiation facilitée / 1. D’inscriptions indubitablement sans valeur juridique

III. Radiation facilitée

1. D’inscriptions indubitablement sans valeur juridique

L’office du registre foncier peut radier une inscription d’office dans les cas suivants:

1.
elle est limitée dans le temps et a perdu toute valeur juridique par suite de l’écoulement du délai;
2.
elle concerne un droit qui ne peut ni être cédé, ni passer aux héritiers d’un titulaire décédé;
3.
elle ne peut pas concerner le fonds en question, compte tenu de sa localisation;
4.
elle concerne un fonds qui a disparu.

1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 976a1E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / III. Radiation facilitée / 2. D’autres inscriptions / a. En général

2. D’autres inscriptions

a. En général

1 Lorsqu’une inscription est très vraisemblablement dépourvue de valeur juridique, en particulier parce que les pièces justificatives ou les circonstances indiquent qu’elle ne concerne pas l’immeuble en question, toute personne grevée peut en requérir la radiation.

2 Si l’office du registre foncier tient la requête pour justifiée, il communique à l’ayant droit qu’il procédera à la radiation sauf opposition de sa part dans les 30 jours.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 976b1E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / III. Radiation facilitée / 2. D’autres inscriptions / b. En cas d’opposition

b. En cas d’opposition

1 Si l’ayant droit fait opposition, l’office du registre foncier, sur demande de la personne grevée, réexamine la requête en radiation.

2 Lorsque l’office du registre foncier conclut que, malgré l’opposition, la requête est fondée, il communique à l’ayant droit qu’il procédera à la radiation au grand livre si, dans un délai de trois mois à compter de la communication, ce dernier n’introduit pas une action judiciaire en vue de constater que l’inscription a une valeur juridique.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 976c1E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / III. Radiation facilitée / 3. Procédure d’épuration publique

3. Procédure d’épuration publique

1 Lorsque, dans un périmètre déterminé, les relations de fait ou de droit ont changé et qu’en conséquence, un grand nombre de servitudes, d’annotations ou de mentions sont devenues caduques en tout ou en grande partie ou que la situation est devenue incertaine, l’autorité désignée par le canton peut ordonner l’épuration sur ce périmètre.

2 Cette mesure est mentionnée aux feuillets des immeubles concernés.

3 Les cantons règlent les modalités et la procédure. Ils peuvent faciliter davantage cette épuration des servitudes ou adopter des dispositions dérogeant au droit fédéral.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 977 E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / IV. Rectifications E. Radiation et modification des inscriptions / IV. Rectifications

IV. Rectifications1

1 Si le consentement écrit des intéressés fait défaut, le conservateur ne peut procéder à aucune rectification sans une décision du juge.

2 La rectification peut être remplacée par la radiation de l’inscription inexacte et une inscription nouvelle.

3 Les simples erreurs d’écriture sont rectifiées d’office, en conformité d’une ordonnance du Conseil fédéral.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).


1 Introduit par le ch. II de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 1 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

  Titre final: De l’entrée en vigueur et de l’application du code civil

  Chapitre I: De l’application du droit ancien et du droit nouveau

Art. 1 A. Principes généraux / I. Non-rétroactivité des lois

A. Principes généraux

I. Non-rétroactivité des lois

1 Les effets juridiques de faits antérieurs à l’entrée en vigueur du code civil continuent à être régis par les dispositions du droit fédéral ou cantonal sous l’empire duquel ces faits se sont passés.

2 En conséquence, la force obligatoire et les effets des actes accomplis avant le 1er janvier 1912 restent soumis, même après cette date, à la loi en vigueur à l’époque où ces actes ont eu lieu.

3 Au contraire, les faits postérieurs au 1er janvier 1912 sont régis par le présent code, sous réserve des exceptions prévues par la loi.

Art. 2 A. Principes généraux / II. Rétroactivité / 1. Ordre public et bonnes moeurs

II. Rétroactivité

1. Ordre public et bonnes moeurs

1 Les règles du code civil établies dans l’intérêt de l’ordre public et des moeurs sont applicables, dès leur entrée en vigueur, à tous les faits pour lesquels la loi n’a pas prévu d’exception.

2 En conséquence, ne peuvent plus, dès l’entrée en vigueur du code civil, recevoir aucune application les règles de l’ancien droit qui, d’après le droit nouveau, sont contraires à l’ordre public ou aux moeurs.

Art. 3 A. Principes généraux / II. Rétroactivité / 2. Empire de la loi

2. Empire de la loi

Les cas réglés par la loi indépendamment de la volonté des parties sont soumis à la loi nouvelle, après l’entrée en vigueur du code civil, même s’ils remontent à une époque antérieure.

Art. 4 A. Principes généraux / II. Rétroactivité / 3. Droits non acquis

3. Droits non acquis

Les effets juridiques de faits qui se sont passés sous l’empire de la loi ancienne, mais dont il n’est pas résulté de droits acquis avant la date de l’entrée en vigueur du code civil, sont régis dès cette date par la loi nouvelle.

Art. 5 B. Droit des personnes / I. Exercice des droits civils

B. Droit des personnes

I. Exercice des droits civils

1 L’exercice des droits civils est régi, dans tous les cas, par les dispositions de la présente loi.

2 Toutefois, les personnes qui, à teneur de l’ancienne loi, étaient capables d’exercer leurs droits civils lors de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle, mais qui ne le seraient plus à teneur de celle-ci, ne subissent aucune diminution de leur capacité.

Art. 6 B. Droit des personnes / II. Déclaration d’absence

II. Déclaration d’absence

1 La déclaration d’absence est régie par la loi nouvelle dès l’entrée en vigueur du code civil.

2 Les déclarations de mort ou d’absence prononcées sous l’empire de la loi ancienne déploient après l’entrée en vigueur du présent code les mêmes effets que la déclaration d’absence de la loi nouvelle; subsistent toutefois les effets antérieurs de ces mesures accomplis en conformité de la loi ancienne, tels que la dévolution de l’hérédité ou la dissolution du mariage.

3 Si une procédure à fin de déclaration d’absence était en cours lors de l’entrée en vigueur du code civil, elle est reprise dès l’origine selon les règles de ce code, sauf à imputer le temps qui s’est écoulé dans l’intervalle; à la demande des intéressés, il est néanmoins loisible de la continuer suivant les formes et en observant les délais de la loi ancienne.

Art. 6a1B. Droit des personnes / IIa. Banque de données centrale de l’état civil

IIa. Banque de données centrale de l’état civil

1 Le Conseil fédéral règle la transition de la tenue conventionnelle à la tenue informatisée des registres.

2 La Confédération prend en charge les frais d’investissement, jusqu’à concurrence de 5 millions de francs.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 5 oct. 2001 (Tenue informatisée des registres de l’état civil), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2004 (RO 2004 2911; FF 2001 1537).

Art. 6b1B. Droit des personnes / III. Personnes morales / 1. En général

III. Personnes morales

1. En général2

1 Les sociétés organisées corporativement et les établissements ou les fondations qui ont acquis la personnalité en vertu de la loi ancienne la conservent sous l’empire du présent code, même s’ils ne pouvaient l’acquérir à teneur de ses dispositions.

2 Les personnes morales existantes dont la loi nouvelle subordonne la constitution à une inscription dans un registre public n’en doivent pas moins se faire inscrire, dans les cinq ans à compter de l’entrée en vigueur du code civil, même si la loi ancienne ne prévoyait pas cette formalité; faute par elles de s’inscrire dans les cinq ans, elles perdent leur qualité de personnes morales.

2bis Les fondations ecclésiastiques et les fondations de famille non inscrites au registre du commerce à la date d’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 12 décembre 2014 (art. 52, al. 2) gardent leur qualité de personnes morales. Elles doivent procéder à leur inscription au registre du commerce dans un délai de cinq ans. Le Conseil fédéral tient compte de la situation particulière des fondations ecclésiastiques lors de la fixation des exigences relatives à l’inscription au registre du commerce.3

3 L’étendue de la personnalité est déterminée dans tous les cas par la loi nouvelle, aussitôt après l’entrée en vigueur du présent code.


1 Anciennement art. 7, puis 6a.
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
3 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 12 déc. 2014 sur la mise en oeuvre des recommandations du Groupe d’action financière, révisées en 2012, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2016 (RO 2015 1389; FF 2014 585).

Art. 6c1B. Droit des personnes / III. Personnes morales / 2. Comptabilité et organe de révision

2. Comptabilité et organe de révision

Les dispositions de la modification du 16 décembre 20052 concernant la comptabilité et l’organe de révision sont applicables dès l’exercice qui commence avec l’entrée en vigueur de la présente loi ou qui la suit.


1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 1 de la LF du 16 déc. 2005 (Droit de la société à responsabilité limitée; adaptation des droits de la société anonyme, de la société coopérative, du registre du commerce et des raisons de commerce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janvier 2008 (RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745).
2RO 2007 4791; FF 2002 2949, 2004 3745

Art. 6d1B. Droit des personnes / IV. Protection de la personnalité contre la violence, les menaces et le harcèlement

IV. Protection de la personnalité contre la violence, les menaces et le harcèlement

Les procédures pendantes sont soumises au nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 14 décembre 2018.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 14 déc. 2018 sur l’amélioration de la protection des victimes de violence, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2020 (RO 2019 2273; FF 2017 6913).

Art. 71C. Droit de la famille / I. Mariage

C. Droit de la famille

I. Mariage

1 Le mariage est régi par le nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 26 juin 19982.

2 Dès l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit, les mariages entachés d’une cause de nullité selon l’ancien droit ne peuvent être annulés qu’en vertu du nouveau droit, le temps qui s’est écoulé avant cette date étant pris en compte pour le calcul des délais.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1

Art. 7a1C. Droit de la famille / Ibis. Divorce / 1. Principe

Ibis. Divorce

1. Principe

1 Le divorce est régi par le nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 26 juin 19982.

2 La loi ne rétroagit pas à l’égard des mariages valablement dissous en conformité avec l’ancien droit; les nouvelles dispositions sur l’exécution sont applicables aux rentes et aux indemnités en capital destinées à compenser la perte du droit à l’entretien ou versées à titre d’assistance.

3 La modification du jugement de divorce rendu selon l’ancien droit est régie par l’ancien droit, sous réserve des dispositions relatives aux enfants et à la procédure.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1

Art. 7b1C. Droit de la famille / Ibis. Divorce / 2. Procès en divorce pendants

2. Procès en divorce pendants

1 Les procès en divorce pendants qui doivent être jugés par une instance cantonale sont soumis au nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 26 juin 19982.

2 Les parties peuvent présenter de nouvelles conclusions sur les questions touchées par la modification du droit applicable; les points du jugement qui ne font pas l’objet d’un recours sont définitifs, pour autant qu’ils n’aient pas de lien matériel si étroit avec des questions encore ouvertes qu’ils justifient une appréciation globale.

3 Le Tribunal fédéral applique l’ancien droit, lorsque la décision attaquée a été prononcée avant l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 26 juin 1998; il en va de même en cas de renvoi à l’autorité cantonale.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).
2RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1

Art. 7c1C. Droit de la famille / Ibis. Divorce / 3. Délai de séparation dans les procès en divorce pendants

3. Délai de séparation dans les procès en divorce pendants

Dans les procès en divorce pendants lors de l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 19 décembre 20032 dont connaît une instance cantonale, le délai de séparation selon le nouveau droit est déterminant.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 déc. 2003 (Délai de séparation en droit du divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er juin 2004 (RO 2004 2161 2162; FF 2003 3490 5310).
2RO 2004 2161

Art. 7d1C. Droit de la famille / Ibis. Divorce / 4. Prévoyance professionnelle

4. Prévoyance professionnelle

1 Le traitement de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce est régi par le nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 19 juin 2015.

2 Les procès en divorce pendants devant une instance cantonale sont soumis au nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 19 juin 2015.

3 Lorsque la décision attaquée a été prononcée avant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 19 juin 2015, le Tribunal fédéral applique l’ancien droit; il en va de même en cas de renvoi à l’autorité cantonale.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).

Art. 7e1C. Droit de la famille / Ibis. Divorce / 5. Conversion de rentes existantes

5. Conversion de rentes existantes

1 Lorsque le tribunal, dans le cas d’un divorce prononcé conformément à l’ancien droit après la survenance d’un cas de prévoyance, a attribué au conjoint créancier une indemnité sous la forme d’une rente qui ne s’éteint qu’au décès du conjoint débiteur ou du conjoint créancier, ce dernier peut demander au tribunal, dans un délai d’un an à compter de l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 19 juin 2015, qu’une rente viagère au sens de l’art. 124a lui soit attribuée en lieu et place si le conjoint débiteur perçoit une rente de vieillesse ou une rente d’invalidité après l’âge réglementaire de la retraite.

2 Pour les décisions étrangères, la compétence se détermine conformément à l’art. 64 de la loi fédérale du 18 décembre 1987 sur le droit international privé2.

3 La rente au sens de l’ancien droit vaut comme part de rente attribuée.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 19 juin 2015 (Partage de la prévoyance professionnelle en cas de divorce), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 2313; FF 2013 4341).
2 RS 291

Art. 81C. Droit de la famille / Iter. Effets généraux du mariage / 1. Principe

Iter. Effets généraux du mariage

1. Principe

Les effets généraux du mariage sont régis par le nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 5 octobre 1984.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 4 de la LF du 26 juin 1998, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2000 (RO 1999 1118; FF 1996 I 1).

Art. 8a1C. Droit de la famille / Iter. Effets généraux du mariage / 2. Nom

2. Nom

Le conjoint qui, lors de la conclusion du mariage, a changé de nom avant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 30 septembre 2011 du présent code peut déclarer en tout temps à l’officier de l’état civil vouloir reprendre son nom de célibataire.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 8b1C. Droit de la famille / Iter. Effets généraux du mariage / 3. Droit de cité

3. Droit de cité

Dans le délai d’une année à compter de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle, la femme suisse qui s’est mariée sous l’ancien droit peut déclarer à l’autorité compétente de son ancien canton d’origine vouloir reprendre le droit de cité qu’elle possédait lorsqu’elle était célibataire.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 91C. Droit de la famille / II. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés avant le 1er janvier 1912

II. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés avant le 1er janvier 1912

Les effets pécuniaires des mariages célébrés avant le 1er janvier 1912 sont régis par les dispositions du code civil, entré en vigueur à cette date sur l’application du droit ancien et du droit nouveau.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 9a1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 1. En général

IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 19122

1. En général

1 Le régime matrimonial des époux mariés à l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 5 octobre 1984 est, sauf disposition contraire, soumis au droit nouveau.

2 Les effets pécuniaires des mariages qui ont été dissous avant l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 5 octobre 1984 restent soumis à l’ancien droit.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).
2 Pour l’application du droit transitoire, voir aussi les anciennes disp. du tit. 6e, à la fin du code civil.

Art. 9b1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 2. Passage de l’union des biens au régime de la participation aux acquêts / a. Sort des biens

2. Passage de l’union des biens au régime de la participation aux acquêts

a. Sort des biens

1 Les époux qui étaient jusqu’alors mariés sous le régime de l’union des biens sont soumis au régime de la participation aux acquêts dans leurs rapports entre eux et avec les tiers.

2 Les biens de chaque époux entrent dorénavant dans ses biens propres ou ses acquêts selon le caractère que leur attribuent les règles de la loi nouvelle; les biens réservés constitués par contrat de mariage deviennent des biens propres.

3 La femme reprend la propriété de ses apports passés dans la propriété du mari ou, à défaut, exerce la récompense correspondante.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 9c1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 2. Passage de l’union des biens au régime de la participation aux acquêts / b. Privilèges

b. Privilèges

Les dispositions de l’ancienne loi sur la créance de la femme du chef de ses apports non représentés dans l’exécution forcée contre le mari demeurent applicables pendant dix ans dès l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 9d1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 2. Passage de l’union des biens au régime de la participation aux acquêts / c. Liquidation du régime sous l’empire de la loi nouvelle

c. Liquidation du régime sous l’empire de la loi nouvelle

1 Après l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle, la liquidation se fait entre les époux pour toute la durée de l’ancien et du nouveau régime ordinaire selon les dispositions sur la participation aux acquêts, à moins que les époux n’aient, au moment de cette entrée en vigueur, déjà liquidé leur ancien régime d’après les dispositions de l’union des biens.

2 Chaque époux peut, avant l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle, signifier à son conjoint, par écrit, que leur ancien régime sera liquidé conformément aux dispositions de l’ancienne loi.

3 Si un régime matrimonial est dissous par suite de l’admission d’une demande formée avant l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle, la liquidation a aussi lieu conformément à la loi ancienne.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 9e1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 3. Maintien de l’union des biens

3. Maintien de l’union des biens

1 Les époux qui vivaient sous le régime ordinaire de l’union des biens, sans l’avoir modifié par contrat de mariage, peuvent, par une déclaration écrite commune présentée au préposé au registre des régimes matrimoniaux de leur domicile au plus tard dans l’année à compter de l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit, convenir de demeurer soumis à ce régime; le préposé au registre tient une liste officielle de ces déclarations, que chacun peut consulter.

2 Ce contrat n’est opposable aux tiers que s’ils en ont ou devaient en avoir connaissance.

3 Les biens réservés des époux sont désormais soumis aux dispositions sur la séparation de biens de la loi nouvelle.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 9f1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 4. Maintien de la séparation de biens légale ou judiciaire

4. Maintien de la séparation de biens légale ou judiciaire

Les époux qui étaient placés sous le régime de la séparation de biens légale ou judiciaire sont désormais soumis aux dispositions nouvelles sur la séparation de biens.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 101C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 5. Contrats de mariage / a. En général

5. Contrats de mariage

a. En général

1 Lorsque les époux ont conclu un contrat de mariage sous l’empire du code civil, ce contrat demeure en vigueur et leur régime matrimonial reste, sous réserve des dispositions sur les biens réservés, les effets à l’égard des tiers et sur la séparation de biens conventionnelle contenues dans ce titre final, soumis dans son ensemble aux dispositions de l’ancien droit.

2 Les biens réservés des époux sont désormais soumis aux dispositions sur la séparation de biens de la loi nouvelle.

3 Les conventions modifiant la répartition du bénéfice ou du déficit dans le régime de l’union des biens ne peuvent porter atteinte à la réserve des enfants non communs et de leurs descendants.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 10a1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 5. Contrats de mariage / b. Effets à l’égard des tiers

b. Effets à l’égard des tiers

1 Ces régimes ne sont opposables aux tiers que s’ils en ont ou devaient en avoir connaissance.

2 Si le contrat de mariage ne produisait pas d’effets à l’égard des tiers, les époux sont désormais soumis dans leurs rapports avec eux au régime de la participation aux acquêts.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 10b1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 5. Contrats de mariage / c. Soumission au droit nouveau

c. Soumission au droit nouveau

1 Lorsque les époux qui sont soumis à l’union des biens ont modifié ce régime par un contrat de mariage, ils peuvent, par une déclaration écrite commune présentée au préposé au registre des régimes matrimoniaux de leur domicile au plus tard dans l’année à compter de l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit, convenir de se soumettre au régime de la participation aux acquêts.

2 Dans ce cas, la répartition conventionnelle du bénéfice s’applique désormais à la somme des bénéfices des deux époux, sauf convention contraire dans un contrat de mariage.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 10c1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 5. Contrats de mariage / d. Séparation de biens conventionnelle de l’ancien droit

d. Séparation de biens conventionnelle de l’ancien droit

Les époux qui avaient adopté par contrat de mariage le régime de la séparation de biens sont désormais soumis au régime de la séparation de la loi nouvelle.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 10d1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 5. Contrats de mariage / e. Contrats de mariage conclus en vue de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle

e. Contrats de mariage conclus en vue de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle

Les contrats de mariage conclus avant l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 5 octobre 1984 et qui ne doivent produire effet que sous le nouveau droit ne sont pas soumis à l’approbation de l’autorité tutélaire2.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).
2 Actuellement : autorité de protection de l’adulte.

Art. 10e1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 5. Contrats de mariage / f. Registre des régimes matrimoniaux

f. Registre des régimes matrimoniaux

1 Dès l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 5 octobre 1984, aucune nouvelle inscription ne sera faite dans le registre des régimes matrimoniaux.

2 Le droit de consulter le registre demeure garanti.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 111C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 6. Règlement des dettes en cas de liquidation matrimoniale

6. Règlement des dettes en cas de liquidation matrimoniale

Lorsque, dans une liquidation matrimoniale consécutive à l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle, le règlement d’une dette ou la restitution d’une chose exposent l’époux débiteur à des difficultés graves, celui-ci peut solliciter des délais de paiement, à charge de fournir des sûretés si les circonstances le justifient.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 11a1C. Droit de la famille / IIbis. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés après le 1er janvier 1912 / 7. Protection des créanciers

7. Protection des créanciers

Les dispositions relatives au changement de régime matrimonial sont applicables, pour la protection des créanciers, aux modifications déterminées par l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 5 octobre 1984.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122 153 art. 1; FF 1979 II 1179).

Art. 121C. Droit de la famille / III. La filiation en général

III. La filiation en général

1 L’établissement et les effets de la filiation sont soumis à la présente loi dès son entrée en vigueur; le nom de famille et le droit de cité acquis selon l’ancien droit sont conservés.

2 Les enfants sous tutelle lors de l’entrée en vigueur de la présente loi, qui sont soumis de par la loi à l’autorité parentale selon la nouvelle législation, passent sous l’autorité de leurs père et mère au plus tard à la fin de l’année qui suit cette entrée en vigueur, à moins que le contraire n’ait été ordonné en vertu des dispositions concernant le retrait de l’autorité parentale.

3 Le transfert ou le retrait de l’autorité parentale résultant d’une décision prise par l’autorité selon le droit précédemment en vigueur demeure en force après l’entrée en vigueur de la présente loi.

4 Si l’autorité parentale n’appartient qu’à l’un des parents lors de l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 21 juin 2013, l’autre parent peut, dans le délai d’une année à compter de l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit, s’adresser à l’autorité compétente pour lui demander de prononcer l’autorité parentale conjointe. L’art. 298b est applicable par analogie.2

5 Le parent auquel l’autorité parentale a été retirée lors d’un divorce ne peut s’adresser seul au tribunal compétent que si le divorce a été prononcé dans les cinq ans précédant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 21 juin 2013.34


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).
2 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).
3 Rectifié par la CdR de l’Ass. féd. (art. 58, al. 1, LParl; RS 171.10).
4 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 21 juin 2013 (Autorité parentale), en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2014 (RO 2014 357; FF 2011 8315).

Art. 12a1C. Droit de la famille / IIIbis. Adoption / 1. Maintien de l’ancien droit

IIIbis. Adoption

1. Maintien de l’ancien droit

1 L’adoption prononcée avant l’entrée en vigueur des nouvelles dispositions de la loi fédérale du 30 juin 1972 modifiant le code civil demeure soumise au droit entré en vigueur le 1er janvier 19122; les consentements qui, selon ce droit, ont été donnés valablement restent valables dans tous les cas.

2 Les personnes âgées de moins de 20 ans au moment de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 7 octobre 1994 peuvent encore, même si elles ont accédé à la majorité, être adoptées selon les dispositions applicables aux adoptions de mineurs, pour autant que la demande soit déposée dans les deux ans qui suivent l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale et avant leur vingtième anniversaire.3


1 Introduit par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 30 juin 1972, en vigueur depuis le 1er avr. 1973 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222).
2 Art. 465 CC, dans la teneur du 1er janv. 1912: 1 L’adopté et ses descendants ont envers l’adoptant le même droit de succession que les descendants légitimes. 2 L’adoption ne confère à l’adoptant et à ses parents aucun droit sur la succession de l’adopté.
3 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 7 oct. 1994, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 1093).

Art. 12b1C. Droit de la famille / IIIbis. Adoption / 2. Procédures pendantes

2. Procédures pendantes

Le nouveau droit est applicable aux procédures d’adoption pendantes au moment de l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 17 juin 2016.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 12c1C. Droit de la famille / IIIbis. Adoption / 3. Soumission au nouveau droit

3. Soumission au nouveau droit

Les dispositions de la modification du 17 juin 2016 relatives au secret de l’adoption, à la communication d’informations sur les parents biologiques et leurs descendants et à la possibilité de convenir de relations personnelles entre les parents biologiques et l’enfant s’appliquent également aux adoptions prononcées avant l’entrée en vigueur de cette modification et aux procédures pendantes au moment de son entrée en vigueur.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 3 de la LF du 30 juin 1972 (RO 1972 2873; FF 1971 I 1222). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 12cbis1

1 Introduit par l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 22 juin 2001 relative à la Conv. de La Haye sur l’adoption et aux mesures de protection de l’enfant en cas d’adoption internationale (RO 2002 3988; FF 1999 5129). Abrogé par le ch. I de la LF du 17 juin 2016 (Droit de l’adoption), avec effet au 1er janv. 2018 (RO 2017 3699; FF 2015 835).

Art. 12d1C. Droit de la famille / IIIter. Contestation de la légitimation

IIIter. Contestation de la légitimation

Les dispositions de la présente loi relatives à la contestation de la reconnaissance après mariage des père et mère s’appliquent par analogie à la contestation d’une légitimation intervenue selon le droit précédemment en vigueur.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 131C. Droit de la famille / IV. Action en paternité / 1. Actions pendantes

IV. Action en paternité

1. Actions pendantes

1 Une action pendante lors de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle est jugée d’après celle-ci.

2 Les effets survenus jusqu’à l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle se déterminent d’après la loi ancienne.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 13a1C. Droit de la famille / IV. Action en paternité / 2. Nouvelles actions

2. Nouvelles actions

1 Si l’obligation du père de verser des prestations pécuniaires a pris naissance avant l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle en vertu. d’une décision judiciaire ou d’une convention, l’enfant qui n’a pas 10 ans révolus lors de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle peut, dans les deux ans, ouvrir l’action en paternité d’après les dispositions de la loi nouvelle.

2 Si le défendeur prouve que sa paternité est exclue ou moins vraisemblable que celle d’un tiers, les prétentions futures de l’enfant à des contributions d’entretien s’éteignent.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 25 juin 1976, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1978 (RO 1977 237; FF 1974 II 1).

Art. 13b1C. Droit de la famille / IVbis. Délai pour agir en constatation ou en contestation des rapports de filiation

IVbis. Délai pour agir en constatation ou en contestation des rapports de filiation

Celui qui accède à la majorité du fait de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi fédérale du 7 octobre 1994 peut, dans tous les cas, intenter pendant une année encore une action en constatation ou en contestation des rapports de filiation.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 7 oct. 1994, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1996 (RO 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 1093).

Art. 13c1C. Droit de la famille / IVter. Contribution d’entretien / 1. Titres d’entretien existants

IVter. Contribution d’entretien

1. Titres d’entretien existants

Les contributions d’entretien destinées à l’enfant qui ont été fixées dans une convention d’entretien approuvée ou dans une décision antérieure à l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 20 mars 2015 sont modifiées à la demande de l’enfant. Lorsqu’elles ont été fixées en même temps que les contributions d’entretien dues au parent, les contributions d’entretien dues à l’enfant peuvent être modifiées seulement si la situation change notablement.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 1 de la LF du 7 oct. 1994 (RO 1995 1126; FF 1993 I 1093). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 13cbis1C. Droit de la famille / IVter. Contribution d’entretien / 2. Procédures en cours

2. Procédures en cours

1 Les procédures en cours à l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 20 mars 2015 sont soumises au nouveau droit.

2 Le Tribunal fédéral applique l’ancien droit lorsque la décision attaquée a été prononcée avant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 20 mars 2015; il en va de même en cas de renvoi à l’autorité cantonale.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 20 mars 2015 (Entretien de l’enfant), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2015 4299; FF 2014 511).

Art. 13d1C. Droit de la famille / IVquater. Nom de l’enfant

IVquater. Nom de l’enfant

1 Si, après l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 30 septembre 2011 du présent code, les parents ne portent plus de nom commun à la suite d’une déclaration faite conformément à l’art. 8a du présent titre, ils peuvent demander, dans un délai d’une année à compter de l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit, que l’enfant acquière le nom de célibataire du parent qui a remis cette déclaration.

2 Lorsque l’autorité parentale sur un enfant dont la mère n’est pas mariée avec le père a été attribuée conjointement aux deux parents ou au père seul avant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du présent code du 30 septembre 2011, la déclaration prévue à l’art. 270a, al. 2 et 3, peut être faite dans l’année qui suit l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit.

3 L’accord de l’enfant selon l’art. 270b est réservé.


1 Introduit par le ch. I de la LF du 30 sept. 2011 (Nom et droit de cité), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2012 2569; FF 2009 6843 6851).

Art. 141C. Droit de la famille / V. Protection de l’adulte / 1. Mesures existantes

V. Protection de l’adulte

1. Mesures existantes

1 La protection de l’adulte est régie par le nouveau droit dès l’entrée en vigueur de la révision du 19 décembre 20082.

2 Les personnes privées de l’exercice des droits civils par une mesure ordonnée sous l’ancien droit sont réputées être sous curatelle de portée générale à l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit. L’autorité de protection de l’adulte procède d’office et dès que possible aux adaptations nécessaires. En matière d’autorité parentale prorogée, les parents sont dispensés de l’obligation de remettre un inventaire, d’établir des rapports et des comptes périodiques et de requérir son consentement pour certains actes aussi longtemps que l’autorité de protection de l’adulte n’en a pas décidé autrement.

3 Les autres mesures ordonnées sous l’ancien droit sont caduques au plus tard trois ans après l’entrée en vigueur de la révision du 19 décembre 2008 si l’autorité de protection de l’adulte ne les a pas transformées en mesures relevant du nouveau droit.

4 Lorsqu’un médecin, sur la base de l’art. 397b, al. 2, dans la version du 1er janvier 19813, a soumis une personne atteinte d’une maladie psychique à une privation de liberté à des fins d’assistance pour une durée illimitée, cette mesure subsiste. L’institution indique à l’autorité de protection de l’adulte six mois au plus après l’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit si elle estime que les conditions du placement sont encore remplies. L’autorité de protection de l’adulte procède aux éclaircissements nécessaires selon les dispositions sur l’examen périodique et, le cas échéant, confirme la décision de placement.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
2RO 2011 725
3 RO 1980 31

Art. 14a1C. Droit de la famille / V. Protection de l’adulte / 2. Procédures pendantes

2. Procédures pendantes

1 Les procédures pendantes à l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 19 décembre 20082 relèvent des autorités compétentes en vertu du nouveau droit.

2 Elles sont soumises au nouveau droit de procédure.

3 L’autorité décide si la procédure doit être complétée.


1 Introduit par le ch. II de la LF du 6 oct. 1978 (RO 1980 31; FF 1977 III 1). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
2RO 2011 725

Art. 15 D. Succession / I. Héritiers et dévolution

D. Succession

I. Héritiers et dévolution

1 La succession d’une personne décédée avant l’entrée en vigueur du présent code est régie, même postérieurement, par la loi ancienne; il en est ainsi des autres effets relatifs au patrimoine, lorsqu’en vertu du droit cantonal ils sont légalement inséparables de l’hérédité et résultent du décès du père, de la mère ou du conjoint.

2 Cette règle s’applique aux héritiers et à la dévolution de l’hérédité.

Art. 16 D. Succession / II. Dispositions pour cause de mort

II. Dispositions pour cause de mort

1 Lorsque des dispositions pour cause de mort ont été faites ou révoquées avant la date de l’entrée en vigueur du présent code, ni l’acte, ni la révocation émanant d’une personne capable de disposer à teneur de la législation alors en vigueur ne peuvent être attaqués postérieurement à cette date pour le motif que leur auteur est mort depuis l’application de la loi nouvelle et n’était pas capable de disposer à teneur de cette loi.

2 Un testament n’est pas annulable pour vice de forme, s’il satisfait aux règles applicables soit à l’époque où il a été rédigé, soit à la date du décès de son auteur.

3 L’action en réduction ou l’action fondée sur l’inadmissibilité du mode de disposer est régie par le présent code à l’égard de toutes les dispositions pour cause de mort dont l’auteur est décédé après l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle.

Art. 17 E. Droits réels / I. En général

E. Droits réels

I. En général

1 Les droits réels existant lors de l’entrée en vigueur du code civil sont maintenus, sous réserve des règles concernant le registre foncier.

2 Si une exception n’est pas faite dans le présent code, l’étendue de la propriété et des autres droits réels est néanmoins régie par la loi nouvelle dès son entrée en vigueur.

3 Les droits réels dont la constitution n’est plus possible à teneur de la loi nouvelle continuent à être régis par la loi ancienne.

Art. 18 E. Droits réels / II. Droit à l’inscription dans le registre foncier

II. Droit à l’inscription dans le registre foncier

1 Lorsqu’une obligation tendante à la constitution d’un droit réel est née avant l’entrée en vigueur du code civil, elle est valable si elle répond aux formes de la loi ancienne ou de la loi nouvelle.

2 L’ordonnance sur la tenue du registre foncier réglera les pièces justificatives à produire pour l’inscription de droits nés sous l’empire de la loi ancienne.

3 Lorsque l’étendue d’un droit réel a été déterminée par un acte juridique antérieur à l’entrée en vigueur du présent code, elle ne subit aucun changement du fait de la loi nouvelle, à moins qu’elle ne soit incompatible avec celle-ci.

Art. 19 E. Droits réels / III. Prescription acquisitive

III. Prescription acquisitive

1 La prescription acquisitive est régie par la loi nouvelle dès l’entrée en vigueur de celle-ci.

2 Le temps écoulé jusqu’à cette époque est proportionnellement imputé sur le délai de la loi nouvelle, lorsqu’une prescription qu’elle admet aussi a commencé à courir sous l’empire de l’ancienne loi.

Art. 201E. Droits réels / IV. Droits de propriété spéciaux / 1. Arbres plantés dans le fonds d’autrui

IV. Droits de propriété spéciaux

1. Arbres plantés dans le fonds d’autrui

1 Les droits de propriété existant sur des arbres plantés dans le fonds d’autrui sont maintenus dans les termes de la législation cantonale.

2 Les cantons ont la faculté de restreindre ces droits ou de les supprimer.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. IV de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 20bis1E. Droits réels / IV. Droits de propriété spéciaux / 2. Propriété par étages / a. Originaire

2. Propriété par étages

a. Originaire

La propriété par étages régie par l’ancien droit cantonal est soumise aux dispositions nouvelles, même si les étages ou parties d’étages ne constituent pas des appartements ou des locaux commerciaux formant un tout.


1 Introduit par le ch. IV de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 20ter1E. Droits réels / IV. Droits de propriété spéciaux / 2. Propriété par étages / b. Transformée

b. Transformée

1 Les cantons peuvent aussi soumettre aux nouvelles dispositions la propriété par étages inscrite au registre foncier dans les formes prévues par la loi entrée en vigueur le 1er janvier 1912.

2 Cette mesure aura effet dès que les inscriptions au registre foncier auront été modifiées en conséquence.


1 Introduit par le ch. IV de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 20quater1E. Droits réels / IV. Droits de propriété spéciaux / 2. Propriété par étages / c. Épuration des registres fonciers

c. Épuration des registres fonciers

En vue de soumettre à la loi nouvelle les propriétés par étages transformées et d’inscrire les propriétés par étages originaires, les cantons peuvent prescrire l’épuration des registres fonciers et édicter à cet effet des dispositions de procédure spéciales.


1 Introduit par le ch. IV de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 21 E. Droits réels / V. Servitudes foncières

V. Servitudes foncières

1 Les servitudes foncières établies avant l’entrée en vigueur du code civil subsistent sans inscription après l’introduction du registre foncier, mais ne peuvent être opposées aux tiers de bonne foi qu’à partir du moment où elles ont été inscrites.

2 Les obligations liées accessoirement à des servitudes qui ont été créées avant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 11 décembre 20091 et qui n’apparaissent que dans les pièces justificatives au registre foncier restent opposables aux tiers de bonne foi.2


1RO 2011 4637
2 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 22 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 1. Reconnaissance des titres hypothécaires actuels

VI. Gage immobilier

1. Reconnaissance des titres hypothécaires actuels

1 Les titres hypothécaires existant avant l’entrée en vigueur du présent code sont reconnus, sans qu’il soit nécessaire de les modifier dans le sens de la loi nouvelle.

2 Les cantons ont néanmoins la faculté de prescrire que les titres hypothécaires actuels seront dressés à nouveau, dans un délai déterminé, conformément aux dispositions du présent code.

Art. 23 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 2. Constitution de droits de gage

2. Constitution de droits de gage

1 Les gages immobiliers constitués après l’entrée en vigueur du code civil ne peuvent l’être que suivant les formes admises par la loi nouvelle.

2 Les formes prévues par les anciennes lois cantonales restent applicables jusqu’à l’introduction du registre foncier.

Art. 24 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 3. Titres acquittés

3. Titres acquittés

1 L’acquittement ou la modification d’un titre, le dégrèvement et d’autres opérations analogues sont régis par la loi nouvelle dès son entrée en vigueur.

2 Les formes à observer demeurent soumises au droit cantonal jusqu’à l’introduction du registre foncier.

Art. 25 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 4. Étendue du gage

4. Étendue du gage

1 L’étendue de la charge hypothécaire se détermine, pour tous les gages immobiliers, conformément à la loi nouvelle.

2 Toutefois, lorsque certains objets ont été par convention spéciale valablement affectés de gage avec l’immeuble grevé, cette affectation n’est pas modifiée par la loi nouvelle, même si lesdits objets ne pouvaient être engagés dans ces conditions à teneur du code civil.

Art. 26 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 5. Droits et obligations dérivant du gage immobilier / a. En général

5. Droits et obligations dérivant du gage immobilier

a. En général

1 En tant qu’ils sont de nature contractuelle, les droits et obligations du créancier et du débiteur se règlent conformément à la loi ancienne pour les gages immobiliers existant lors de l’entrée en vigueur du présent code.

2 La loi nouvelle est au contraire applicable aux effets juridiques qui naissent de plein droit et qui ne peuvent être modifiés par convention.

3 Si le gage porte sur plusieurs immeubles, ceux-ci demeurent grevés en conformité de la loi ancienne.

Art. 27 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 5. Droits et obligations dérivant du gage immobilier / b. Mesures conservatoires

b. Mesures conservatoires

Les droits du créancier pendant la durée du gage, spécialement la faculté de prendre des mesures conservatoires, sont régis par la loi nouvelle, pour tous les gages immobiliers, à compter de l’entrée en vigueur du code civil; il en est de même des droits du débiteur.

Art. 28 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 5. Droits et obligations dérivant du gage immobilier / c. Dénonciation, transfert

c. Dénonciation, transfert

La dénonciation des créances garanties par des gages immobiliers et le transfert des titres sont régis par la loi ancienne pour tous les droits de gage constitués avant l’entrée en vigueur du présent code; demeurent réservées les règles impératives de la loi nouvelle.

Art. 29 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 6. Rang

6. Rang

1 Jusqu’à l’immatriculation des immeubles dans le registre foncier, le rang des gages immobiliers se règle selon la loi ancienne.

2 Après l’introduction du registre foncier, le rang sera déterminé en conformité du présent code.

Art. 30 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 7. Case hypothécaire

7. Case hypothécaire

1 Les règles du code civil sur la case fixe et sur le droit du créancier postérieur de profiter des cases libres sont applicables dès l’introduction du registre foncier et, dans tous les cas, cinq ans après l’entrée en vigueur du code; les droits particuliers garantis au créancier demeurent réservés.

2 Les cantons peuvent établir des dispositions transitoires complémentaires.1


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 21 de la LF du 15 déc. 1989 relative à l’approbation d’actes législatifs des cantons par la Confédération, en vigueur depuis le 1er fév. 1991 (RO 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1293).

Art. 31 et 321E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 8. ...

8. ...


1 Abrogés par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), avec effet au 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 33 E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 9. Assimilation entre droits de gage de l’ancienne et de la nouvelle loi

9. Assimilation entre droits de gage de l’ancienne et de la nouvelle loi

1 Les lois introductives du code civil dans les cantons peuvent prescrire, d’une manière générale ou à certains égards, que telle forme de gage de la loi ancienne est assimilée à l’une des formes de la loi nouvelle.

2 Le présent code s’applique dès son entrée en vigueur aux gages immobiliers pour lesquels l’assimilation a été prévue.

3 ...1


1 Abrogé par le ch. II 21 de la LF du 15 déc. 1989 relative à l’approbation d’actes législatifs des cantons par la Confédération, avec effet au 1er fév. 1991 (RO 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1293).

Art. 33a1E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 10. Persistance de l’ancienne loi pour les anciens types de droits de gage

10. Persistance de l’ancienne loi pour les anciens types de droits de gage

1 Les cédules hypothécaires émises en série et les lettres de rente restent inscrites au registre foncier.

2 Elles continuent à être régies par l’ancien droit.

3 Le droit cantonal peut prévoir la conversion des lettres de rente créées sous l’empire du droit fédéral ou du droit antérieur en types de gage connus du droit en vigueur. Cette transformation peut justifier la création, pour des montants de peu d’importance, d’une dette personnelle du propriétaire de l’immeuble engagé.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 33b1E. Droits réels / VI. Gage immobilier / 11. Transformation du type de cédule hypothécaire

11. Transformation du type de cédule hypothécaire

Le propriétaire foncier et les ayants droit d’une cédule hypothécaire peuvent demander en commun par écrit qu’une cédule hypothécaire sur papier émise avant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 11 décembre 20092 soit transformée en une cédule hypothécaire de registre.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2RO 2011 4637

Art. 34 E. Droits réels / VII. Gage mobilier / 1. Forme

VII. Gage mobilier

1. Forme

1 La validité des gages mobiliers constitués après l’entrée en vigueur du présent code est subordonnée aux formes prescrites par la loi nouvelle.

2 Les gages constitués antérieurement et selon d’autres formes s’éteignent après l’expiration d’un délai de six mois; ce délai commence à courir, pour les créances exigibles, dès l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle et, pour les autres, dès leur exigibilité ou dès la date pour laquelle le remboursement peut être dénoncé.

Art. 35 E. Droits réels / VII. Gage mobilier / 2. Effets

2. Effets

1 Les effets du gage mobilier, les droits et les obligations du créancier gagiste, du constituant et du débiteur sont déterminés, à partir de l’entrée en vigueur du code civil, par les dispositions de la loi nouvelle, même si le gage a pris naissance auparavant.

2 Tout pacte commissoire conclu antérieurement est sans effet dès l’entrée en vigueur du présent code.

Art. 36 E. Droits réels / VIII. Droits de rétention

VIII. Droits de rétention

1 Les droits de rétention reconnus par la loi nouvelle s’étendent également aux objets qui, avant son entrée en vigueur, se trouvaient à la disposition du créancier.

2 Ils garantissent de même les créances nées avant l’application de la loi nouvelle.

3 Les effets de droits de rétention qui ont pris naissance sous l’empire de la loi ancienne sont régis par le code civil.

Art. 37 E. Droits réels / IX. Possession

IX. Possession

La possession est régie par le présent code dès l’entrée en vigueur de celui-ci.

Art. 38 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 1. Établissement

X. Registre foncier

1. Établissement

1 Le Conseil fédéral fixe le calendrier de l’introduction du registre foncier après consultation des cantons. Il peut déléguer cette compétence au département ou à l’office compétent.1

2 ...2


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. II de la LF du 5 oct. 2007 sur la géoinformation, en vigueur depuis le 1er juil. 2008 (RO 2008 2793; FF 2006 7407).
2 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. II de la LF du 5 oct. 2007 sur la géoinformation, avec effet au 1er juil. 2008 (RO 2008 2793; FF 2006 7407).

Art. 391E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 2. Mensuration officielle / a. ...

2. Mensuration officielle

a. ...


1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. II de la LF du 5 oct. 2007 sur la géoinformation, avec effet au 1er juil. 2008 (RO 2008 2793; FF 2006 7407).

Art. 40 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 2. Mensuration officielle / b. Introduction du registre foncier avant la mensuration

b. Introduction du registre foncier avant la mensuration

1 La mensuration du sol précédera, dans la règle, l’introduction du registre foncier.

2 Toutefois, et avec l’assentiment de la Confédération, le registre foncier pourra être introduit auparavant, s’il existe un état des immeubles suffisamment exact.

Art. 41 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 2. Mensuration officielle / c. Délais pour la mensuration et l’introduction du registre foncier

c. Délais pour la mensuration et l’introduction du registre foncier

1 ...1

2 La mensuration du sol et l’introduction du registre foncier pourront avoir lieu successivement dans les différentes parties du canton.


1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. II de la LF du 5 oct. 2007 sur la géoinformation, avec effet au 1er juil. 2008 (RO 2008 2793; FF 2006 7407).

Art. 421

1 Abrogé par l’annexe ch. II de la LF du 5 oct. 2007 sur la géoinformation, avec effet au 1er juil. 2008 (RO 2008 2793; FF 2006 7407).

Art. 43 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 3. Inscription des droits réels / a. Mode de l’inscription

3. Inscription des droits réels

a. Mode de l’inscription

1 Lors de l’introduction du registre foncier, les droits réels antérieurement constitués devront être inscrits.

2 Une sommation publique invitera tous les intéressés à les faire connaître et inscrire.

3 Les droits réels inscrits dans les registres publics conformément à la loi ancienne seront portés d’office au registre foncier, à moins qu’ils ne soient incompatibles avec la loi nouvelle.

Art. 44 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 3. Inscription des droits réels / b. Conséquences du défaut d’inscription

b. Conséquences du défaut d’inscription

1 Les droits réels qui n’auront pas été inscrits n’en restent pas moins valables, mais ne peuvent être opposés aux tiers qui s’en sont remis de bonne foi aux énonciations du registre foncier.

2 La législation fédérale ou cantonale pourra prévoir l’abolition complète, après sommation publique et à partir d’une date déterminée, de tous les droits réels non inscrits au registre foncier.

3 Les charges foncières de droit public et les hypothèques légales de droit cantonal non inscrites qui existaient avant l’entrée en vigueur de la modification du 11 décembre 20091 sont encore opposables aux tiers qui se sont fondés de bonne foi sur le registre foncier pendant les dix ans qui suivent l’entrée en vigueur de cette modification.2


1RO 2011 4637
2 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 451E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 4. Droits réels abolis

4. Droits réels abolis

1 Les droits réels qui ne peuvent plus être constitués à teneur des dispositions relatives au registre foncier (propriété d’arbres plantés dans le fonds d’autrui, antichrèse, etc.) ne seront pas inscrits, mais simplement mentionnés d’une manière suffisante.

2 Lorsque ces droits s’éteignent pour une cause quelconque, ils ne peuvent plus être rétablis.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. IV de la LF du 19 déc. 1963, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1965 (RO 1964 989; FF 1962 II 1445).

Art. 46 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 5. Ajournement de l’introduction du registre foncier

5. Ajournement de l’introduction du registre foncier

1 L’introduction du registre foncier prévu par le présent code peut être ajournée par les cantons, avec l’autorisation du Conseil fédéral; à la condition toutefois que les formes de publicité de la législation cantonale, complétées ou non, suffisent pour consacrer les effets que la loi nouvelle attache au registre.

2 Les formes de la loi cantonale qui doivent déployer ces effets seront exactement désignées.

Art. 47 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 6. Entrée en vigueur du régime des droits réels avant l’établissement du registre foncier

6. Entrée en vigueur du régime des droits réels avant l’établissement du registre foncier

Les règles du présent code concernant les droits réels sont applicables, d’une manière générale, même avant l’établissement du registre foncier.

Art. 48 E. Droits réels / X. Registre foncier / 7. Formes du droit cantonal

7. Formes du droit cantonal

1 Dès que les dispositions concernant les droits réels seront en vigueur et avant l’introduction du registre foncier, les cantons pourront désigner les formalités susceptibles de produire immédiatement les effets attachés au registre (homologation, inscription dans un livre foncier ou un registre des hypothèques et servitudes).

2 Les cantons peuvent prescrire que ces formalités produiront même avant l’introduction du registre foncier les effets attachés au registre relativement à la constitution, au transfert, à la modification et à l’extinction des droits réels.

3 D’autre part, les effets du registre en faveur des tiers de bonne foi ne sont pas reconnus aussi longtemps que le registre foncier n’est pas introduit dans un canton ou qu’il n’y est pas suppléé par quelque autre institution en tenant lieu.

Art. 491F. Prescription

F. Prescription

1 Lorsque le nouveau droit prévoit des délais de prescription plus longs que l’ancien droit, le nouveau droit s’applique dès lors que la prescription n’est pas échue en vertu de l’ancien droit.

2 Lorsque le nouveau droit prévoit des délais de prescription plus courts que l’ancien droit, l’ancien droit s’applique.

3 L’entrée en vigueur du nouveau droit est sans effets sur le début des délais de prescription en cours, à moins que la loi n’en dispose autrement.

4 Au surplus, la prescription est régie par le nouveau droit dès son entrée en vigueur.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 3 de la LF du 15 juin 2018 (Révision du droit de la prescription), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2020 (RO 2018 5343; FF 2014 221).

Art. 50 G. Forme des contrats

G. Forme des contrats

Les contrats conclus avant l’entrée en vigueur du code civil demeurent valables, même si les formes observées ne répondaient pas à celles de la loi nouvelle.


  Chapitre II: Mesures d’exécution

Art. 51 A. Abrogation du droit civil cantonal

A. Abrogation du droit civil cantonal

Sauf disposition contraire du droit fédéral, toutes les lois civiles des cantons sont abrogées à partir de l’entrée en vigueur du présent code.

Art. 52 B. Règles complémentaires des cantons / I. Droits et devoirs des cantons

B. Règles complémentaires des cantons

I. Droits et devoirs des cantons

1 Les cantons établissent les règles complémentaires prévues pour l’application du code civil, notamment en ce qui concerne les compétences des autorités et l’organisation des offices de l’état civil, des tutelles1 et du registre foncier.

2 Ils sont tenus de les établir, et ils peuvent le faire, à titre provisoire, dans des ordonnances d’exécution toutes les fois que les règles complémentaires du droit cantonal sont nécessaires pour l’application du code civil.2

3 Les règles cantonales portant sur le droit des registres sont soumises à l’approbation de la Confédération.3

4 Les autres règles cantonales doivent être portées à la connaissance de l’Office fédéral de la justice.4


1 Actuellement «les autorités de protection de l’adulte» (voir art. 440).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 21 de la LF du 15 déc. 1989 relative à l’approbation d’actes législatifs des cantons par la Confédération, en vigueur depuis le 1er fév. 1991 (RO 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1293).
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).
4 Introduit par le ch. II 21 de la LF du 15 déc. 1989 relative à l’approbation d’actes législatifs des cantons par la Confédération (RO 1991 362; FF 1988 II 1293). Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 19 déc. 2008 (Protection de l’adulte, droit des personnes et droit de la filiation), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2013 (RO 2011 725; FF 2006 6635).

Art. 53 B. Règles complémentaires des cantons / II. Règles établies par le pouvoir fédéral à défaut des cantons

II. Règles établies par le pouvoir fédéral à défaut des cantons

1 Si un canton ne prend pas en temps utile les dispositions complémentaires indispensables, le Conseil fédéral rend provisoirement, en son lieu et place, les ordonnances nécessaires et porte le fait à la connaissance de l’Assemblée fédérale.

2 Le code civil fait loi, si un canton n’exerce pas son droit d’établir des règles complémentaires qui ne sont pas indispensables.

Art. 54 C. Désignation des autorités compétentes

C. Désignation des autorités compétentes

1 Lorsque le code civil fait mention de l’autorité compétente, les cantons la désignent parmi les autorités existantes ou parmi celles qu’ils jugent à propos d’instituer.

2 Si la loi ne fait pas mention expresse soit du juge, soit d’une autorité administrative, les cantons ont la faculté de désigner comme compétente, à leur choix, une autorité de l’ordre administratif ou judiciaire.

3 Les cantons règlent la procédure, à moins que le code de procédure civile du 19 décembre 20081 ne soit applicable.2


1 RS 272
2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe 1 ch. II 3 du CPC du 19 déc. 2008, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2011 (RO 2010 1739; FF 2006 6841).

Art. 55 D. Forme authentique / I. En général

D. Forme authentique

I. En général1

1 Les cantons déterminent pour leur territoire les modalités de la forme authentique.

2 Ils établissent également les règles à suivre pour la rédaction des actes authentiques dans une langue étrangère.


1 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I 2 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).

Art. 55a1D. Forme authentique / II. Supports électroniques

II. Supports électroniques

1 Les cantons peuvent autoriser les officiers publics à établir des expéditions électroniques des actes qu’ils instrumentent.

2 Ils peuvent également autoriser les officiers publics à certifier que les documents qu’ils établissent sous la forme électronique sont conformes à des originaux figurant sur un support papier et à attester l’authenticité de signatures par la voie électronique.

3 L’officier public doit utiliser une signature électronique qualifiée reposant sur un certificat qualifié d’un fournisseur de services de certification reconnu au sens de la loi du 18 mars 2016 sur la signature électronique2.3

4 Le Conseil fédéral édicte des dispositions d’exécution en vue d’assurer l’interopérabilité des systèmes informatiques et l’intégrité, l’authenticité et la sécurité des données.


1 Introduit par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 11 déc. 2009 (Cédule hypothécaire de registre et droits réels), en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2012 (RO 2011 4637; FF 2007 5015).
2 RS 943.03
3 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. II 3 de la L du 18 mars 2016 sur la signature électronique, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2017 (RO 2016 4651; FF 2014 957).

Art. 561E. Concessions hydrauliques

E. Concessions hydrauliques

Les règles suivantes sont applicables en matière de concessions hydrauliques, jusqu’à ce que la Confédération ait légiféré dans ce domaine:

Les concessions octroyées sur des eaux publiques pour trente ans au moins ou pour une durée indéterminée, sans être constituées en servitudes au profit d’un fonds, peuvent être immatriculées au registre foncier à titre de droits distincts et permanents.


1 Voir actuellement l’art. 59 de la LF du 22 déc. 1916 sur l’utilisation des forces hydrauliques (RS 721.80).

Art. 571F. à H. ...

F. à H. ...


1 Abrogé par l’art. 53 al. 1 let. b de la LF du 8 nov. 1934 sur les banques et les caisses d’épargne, avec effet au 1er mars 1935 (RO 51 121 et RS 10 325; FF 1934 I 172).

Art. 581J. Poursuite pour dettes et faillite

J. Poursuite pour dettes et faillite

La loi fédérale du 11 avril 1889 sur la poursuite pour dettes et la faillite2 est modifiée comme suit à partir de l’entrée en vigueur du présent code:

...3


1 Nouvelle numérotation des quatre derniers articles, par suite de l’abrogation des art. 58 et 59 du texte original, selon le ch. I des disp. trans. CO, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1912 (RO 27 321; RS 2 189; FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).
2 RS 281.1
3 Les mod. peuvent être consultées au RO 24 245. Pour la teneur des art. 132bis, 141 al. 3 et 258 al. 4, voir RO 24 245 tit. fin. art. 60.

Art. 591K. Application du droit suisse et du droit étranger

K. Application du droit suisse et du droit étranger

1 La loi fédérale du 25 juin 1891 sur les rapports de droit civil des citoyens établis ou en séjour2 continue à régir les Suisses à l’étranger et les étrangers en Suisse, ainsi que les conflits de lois cantonales.

2 ...3

3 La loi fédérale du 25 juin 18914 est complétée comme suit:

...5


1 Nouvelle numérotation des quatre derniers articles, par suite de l’abrogation des art. 58 et 59 du texte original, selon le ch. I des disp. trans. CO, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1912 (RO 27 321; RS 2 189; FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).
2 [RS 2 727; RO 1972 2873 ch. II 1, 1977 237 ch. II 1, 1986 122 ch. II 1. RO 1988 1776 annexe ch. I let. a]. Voir actuellement la LF du 18 déc. 1987 sur le droit international privé (RS 291).
3 Abrogé par le ch. I 2 de la LF du 5 oct. 1984, avec effet au 1er janv. 1988 (RO 1986 122; FF 1979 II 1179).
4 [RS 2 727; RO 1972 2873 ch. II 1, 1977 237 ch. II 1, 1986 122 ch. II 1. RO 1988 1776 annexe ch. I let. a]. Voir actuellement la LF du 18 déc. 1987 sur le droit international privé (RS 291).
5 Les mod. peuvent être consultées au RO 24 245.

Art. 6012L. Droit civil fédéral abrogé

L. Droit civil fédéral abrogé

1 Sont abrogées, à partir de l’entrée en vigueur du présent code, toutes les dispositions contraires des lois civiles fédérales.

2 Sont notamment abrogés:

La loi fédérale du 24 décembre 1874 concernant l’état civil, la tenue des registres qui s’y rapportent et le mariage3;

La loi fédérale du 22 juin 1881 sur la capacité civile4;

Le code fédéral des obligations du 14 juin 18815.

3 Demeurent en vigueur les lois spéciales concernant les chemins de fer, les postes, les télégraphes et téléphones, l’hypothèque et la liquidation forcée des chemins de fer, le travail dans les fabriques, la responsabilité civile des fabricants et autres chefs d’industrie, de même que toutes les lois se rapportant au droit des obligations et aux transactions mobilières et qui ont été promulguées en complément du code fédéral du 14 juin 1881.


1 Nouvelle numérotation des quatre derniers articles, par suite de l’abrogation des art. 58 et 59 du texte original, selon le ch. I des disp. trans. CO, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1912 (RO 27 321; RS 2 189; FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).
2 Nouvelle teneur selon le ch. I des disp. trans. CO, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1912 (RO 27 321; RS 2 189; FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).
3 [RO 1 471]
4 [RO 5 504]
5 [RO 5 577, 11 449; RS 2 776 art. 103 al. 1]

Art. 611M. Dispositions finales M. Dispositions finales

M. Dispositions finales

1 Le code civil entrera en vigueur le 1er janvier 1912.

2 Le Conseil fédéral peut, avec l’autorisation de l’Assemblée fédérale, mettre en vigueur avant cette date l’une ou l’autre des dispositions du présent code.


1 Nouvelle numérotation des quatre derniers articles, par suite de l’abrogation des art. 58 et 59 du texte original, selon le ch. I des disp. trans. CO, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 1912 (RO 27 321; RS 2 189; FF 1905 II 1, 1909 III 747, 1911 I 695).

  Teneur des anciennes dispositions du titre sixième1 

  Titre sixième: Du régime matrimonial

  Chapitre I: Dispositions générales

Art. 178 A. Régime légal ordinaire

A. Régime légal ordinaire

Les époux sont placés sous le régime de l’union des biens, à moins qu’ils n’aient adopté un autre régime par contrat de mariage ou qu’ils ne soient soumis au régime matrimonial extraordinaire.

Art. 179 B. Régime conventionnel / I. Choix du régime

B. Régime conventionnel

I. Choix du régime

1 Le contrat de mariage peut être passé avant ou après la célébration du mariage.

2 Les parties sont tenues d’adopter dans leur contrat l’un des régimes prévus par la présente loi.

3 Le contrat conclu pendant le mariage ne peut porter atteinte aux droits que les tiers avaient sur les biens des époux.

Art. 180 B. Régime conventionnel / II. Capacités des parties

II. Capacités des parties

1 Les personnes capables de discernement peuvent seules conclure, modifier ou révoquer un contrat de mariage.

2 Le mineur et l’interdit doivent être autorisés par leur représentant légal.

Art. 181 B. Régime conventionnel / III. Forme du contrat de mariage

III. Forme du contrat de mariage

1 Le contrat de mariage sera reçu en la forme authentique et signé tant des parties que de leur représentant légal; ces règles s’appliquent aux modifications et à la révocation du contrat.

2 Les conventions matrimoniales passées pendant le mariage sont soumises en outre à l’approbation de l’autorité tutélaire1.

3 Elles deviennent opposables aux tiers en conformité des dispositions relatives au registre des régimes matrimoniaux.


1 Actuellement «autorité de protection de l’adulte».

Art. 182 C. Régime extraordinaire / I. Séparation de biens légale

C. Régime extraordinaire

I. Séparation de biens légale

1 Les époux sont soumis de plein droit au régime de la séparation de biens dès que les créanciers de l’un d’eux subissent une perte dans sa faillite.

2 Lorsqu’une personne dont les créanciers sont porteurs d’actes de défaut de biens se marie, le régime des époux est celui de la séparation de biens, à la condition que l’un d’eux le fasse inscrire, avant le mariage, dans le registre des régimes matrimoniaux.

Art. 183 C. Régime extraordinaire / II. Séparation de biens judiciaire / 1. À la demande de la femme

II. Séparation de biens judiciaire

1. À la demande de la femme

La séparation de biens est prononcée par le juge, à la demande de la femme:

1.
lorsque le mari néglige de pourvoir à l’entretien de sa femme et de ses enfants;
2.
lorsqu’il ne fournit pas les sûretés requises pour les apports de la femme;
3.
en cas d’insolvabilité du mari ou de la communauté.
Art. 184 C. Régime extraordinaire / II. Séparation de biens judiciaire / 2. À la demande du mari

2. À la demande du mari

La séparation de biens est prononcée par le juge à la demande du mari:

1.
en cas d’insolvabilité de la femme;
2.
lorsque la femme refuse indûment de donner à son mari l’autorisation dont il a besoin, en vertu de la loi ou du contrat, pour disposer des biens matrimoniaux;
3.
lorsque la femme a demandé des sûretés pour ses apports.
Art. 185 C. Régime extraordinaire / II. Séparation de biens judiciaire / 3. À la demande des créanciers

3. À la demande des créanciers

La séparation de biens est prononcée par le juge, si elle est demandée par le créancier qui a subi une perte dans la saisie faite contre l’un des époux.

Art. 186 C. Régime extraordinaire / III. Date de la séparation de biens

III. Date de la séparation de biens

1 La séparation de biens pour cause de faillite date de la délivrance des actes de défaut de biens et rétroagit au jour de l’acquisition pour tout ce qui échoit aux époux à titre de succession ou autrement après la déclaration de faillite.

2 Le jugement qui prononce la séparation de biens rétroagit au jour de la demande.

3 La séparation de biens par suite de faillite ou de jugement est communiquée d’office, en vue de son inscription, au fonctionnaire préposé à la tenue du registre des régimes matrimoniaux.

Art. 187 C. Régime extraordinaire / IV. Révocation de la séparation de biens

IV. Révocation de la séparation de biens

1 La séparation de biens pour cause de faillite ou de perte en cas de saisie n’est pas révoquée par le seul fait que l’époux débiteur a désintéressé ses créanciers.

2 Toutefois, le juge peut, à la requête de l’un des époux, prescrire le rétablissement du régime matrimonial antérieur.

3 Cette décision est communiquée d’office, en vue de son inscription, au fonctionnaire préposé à la tenue du registre des régimes matrimoniaux.

Art. 188 D. Modification du régime / I. Garantie des droits des créanciers

D. Modification du régime

I. Garantie des droits des créanciers

1 Les liquidations entre époux et les changements de régime matrimonial ne peuvent soustraire à l’action des créanciers d’un conjoint ou de la communauté les biens sur lesquels ils pouvaient exercer leurs droits.

2 L’époux auquel ces biens ont passé est personnellement tenu de payer lesdits créanciers; il peut toutefois se libérer de sa responsabilité dans la mesure où il établit que les biens reçus ne suffisent pas.

3 Ce que la femme retire par son intervention dans la faillite du mari ou sa participation à la saisie demeure soustrait à l’action des créanciers du mari, à moins qu’ils ne soient aussi créanciers de la femme.

Art. 189 D. Modification du régime / II. Liquidation en cas de séparation de biens

II. Liquidation en cas de séparation de biens

1 Lorsque la séparation de biens a lieu pendant le mariage, les biens matrimoniaux rentrent, sous réserve des droits des créanciers, dans le patrimoine personnel du mari et de la femme.

2 Le bénéfice est réparti entre les époux suivant les règles du régime matrimonial antérieur; le déficit est à la charge du mari, à moins que celui-ci n’établisse qu’il a été causé par la femme.

3 La femme peut exiger des sûretés pour ses biens restés à la disposition du mari pendant la liquidation.

Art. 190 E. Biens réservés / I. Constitution / 1. En général

E. Biens réservés

I. Constitution

1. En général

1 Les biens réservés sont constitués par contrat de mariage, par des libéralités provenant de tiers ou par l’effet de la loi.

2 Ils ne peuvent comprendre la réserve héréditaire de l’un des époux.

Art. 191 E. Biens réservés / I. Constitution / 2. Biens réservés par l’effet de la loi

2. Biens réservés par l’effet de la loi

Sont biens réservés de par la loi:

1.
les effets exclusivement destinés à l’usage personnel d’un des époux;
2.
les biens de la femme qui servent à l’exercice de sa profession ou de son industrie;
3.
le produit du travail de la femme en dehors de son activité domestique.
Art. 192 E. Biens réservés / II. Effets

II. Effets

1 Les biens réservés sont soumis aux règles de la séparation de biens, notamment pour la contribution de la femme aux charges du mariage.

2 La femme doit, en tant que besoin, affecter le produit de son travail au paiement des frais du ménage.

Art. 193 E. Biens réservés / III. Preuve

III. Preuve

La qualité de bien réservé doit être établie par le conjoint qui l’allègue.


  Chapitre II: De l’union des biens

Art. 194 A. Propriété / I. Biens matrimoniaux

A. Propriété

I. Biens matrimoniaux

1 Les biens que les époux possédaient au moment de la célébration du mariage et ceux qu’ils acquièrent par la suite constituent les biens matrimoniaux.

2 En sont exceptés les biens réservés de la femme.

Art. 195 A. Propriété / II. Propres des époux

II. Propres des époux

1 Les biens matrimoniaux qui appartenaient à la femme lors de la conclusion du mariage ou qui lui échoient pendant le mariage par succession ou à quelque autre titre gratuit, constituent ses apports et demeurent sa propriété.

2 Le mari est propriétaire de ses apports et de tous les autres biens matrimoniaux qui ne sont pas des apports de la femme.

3 Les revenus de la femme, à partir de leur exigibilité, et les fruits naturels de ses apports, après leur séparation, deviennent propriété du mari, sauf les règles concernant les biens réservés.

Art. 196 A. Propriété / III. Preuve

III. Preuve

1 Le conjoint qui se prévaut du fait qu’un bien est un apport de la femme, doit l’établir.

2 Les acquisitions faites pendant le mariage en remploi des biens de la femme sont réputées apports de celle-ci.

Art. 197 A. Propriété / IV. Inventaire / 1. Forme et force probante

IV. Inventaire

1. Forme et force probante

1 Le mari et la femme peuvent demander en tout temps la confection d’un inventaire authentique de leurs apports.

2 L’exactitude de l’inventaire est présumée, lorsqu’il a été dressé dans les six mois à compter du jour où les biens ont été apportés.

Art. 198 A. Propriété / IV. Inventaire / 2. Effet de l’estimation

2. Effet de l’estimation

1 Lorsque les époux ont dressé un inventaire estimatif, l’estimation constatée par acte authentique fait règle entre eux pour la valeur des biens non représentés.

2 Le prix de vente fait règle lorsque, pendant le mariage, les apports ont été aliénés de bonne foi au-dessous de l’estimation.

Art. 199 A. Propriété / V. Apports de la femme passant en propriété au mari

V. Apports de la femme passant en propriété au mari

Dans les six mois à compter du jour où les biens de la femme ont été apportés, les époux ont la faculté de convenir, en observant les formes du contrat de mariage, que la propriété de ces apports passera au mari pour le prix d’estimation et que la créance acquise de ce chef à la femme demeurera invariable.

Art. 200 B. Administration, jouissance, droit de disposition / I. Administration

B. Administration, jouissance, droit de disposition

I. Administration

1 Le mari administre les biens matrimoniaux.

2 Les frais de gestion sont à sa charge.

3 La femme n’a le pouvoir d’administrer que dans la mesure où elle a qualité pour représenter l’union conjugale.

Art. 201 B. Administration, jouissance, droit de disposition / II. Jouissance

II. Jouissance

1 Le mari a la jouissance des apports de la femme et il encourt de ce chef la même responsabilité que l’usufruitier.

2 L’estimation à l’inventaire n’aggrave pas cette responsabilité.

3 L’argent de la femme, ses autres biens fongibles et ses titres au porteur non individualisés appartiennent au mari, qui devient débiteur de leur valeur.

Art. 202 B. Administration, jouissance, droit de disposition / III. Droit de disposition / 1. Du mari

III. Droit de disposition

1. Du mari

1 Le mari ne peut, en dehors des actes de simple administration, disposer sans le consentement de la femme des apports de celle-ci qui n’ont point passé en sa propriété.

2 Ce consentement est toutefois présumé au profit des tiers, à moins que ces derniers ne sachent ou ne doivent savoir qu’il n’a pas été donné, ou à moins qu’il ne s’agisse de biens que chacun peut reconnaître comme appartenant à la femme.

Art. 203 B. Administration, jouissance, droit de disposition / III. Droit de disposition / 2. De la femme / a. En général

2. De la femme

a. En général

La femme peut disposer des biens matrimoniaux dans la mesure où elle a qualité pour représenter l’union conjugale.

Art. 204 B. Administration, jouissance, droit de disposition / III. Droit de disposition / 2. De la femme / b. Répudiation de successions

b. Répudiation de successions

1 La femme ne peut répudier une succession qu’avec le consentement du mari.

2 Si ce consentement lui est refusé, elle peut recourir à l’autorité tutélaire1.


1 Actuellement «autorité de protection de l’adulte».

Art. 205 C. Garantie des apports de la femme

C. Garantie des apports de la femme

1 Le mari est tenu, à la demande de la femme, de la renseigner en tout temps sur l’état des biens par elle apportés.

2 La femme peut en tout temps requérir des sûretés du mari.

3 L’action révocatoire de la loi fédérale du 11 avril 1889 sur la poursuite pour dettes et la faillite1 demeure réservée.


1 RS 281.1

Art. 206 D. Dettes / I. Responsabilité du mari

D. Dettes

I. Responsabilité du mari

Le mari est tenu:

1.
de ses dettes antérieures au mariage;
2.
de ses dettes nées pendant le mariage;
3.
des dettes contractées par la femme représentant l’union conjugale.
Art. 207 D. Dettes / II. Responsabilité de la femme / 1. Sur tous ses biens

II. Responsabilité de la femme

1. Sur tous ses biens

1 La femme est tenue sur tous ses biens, sans égard aux droits que le régime matrimonial confère au mari:

1.
de ses dettes antérieures au mariage;
2.
des dettes qu’elle a faites avec le consentement du mari, ou en faveur de celui-ci avec l’approbation de l’autorité tutélaire1;
3.
des dettes qu’elle contracte dans l’exercice régulier d’une profession ou d’une industrie;
4.
des dettes grevant les successions à elle échues;
5.
des dettes résultant de ses actes illicites.

2 La femme n’est tenue des dettes contractées par le mari ou par elle pour l’entretien du ménage commun, qu’en cas d’insolvabilité du mari.


1 Actuellement «autorité de protection de l’adulte».

Art. 208 D. Dettes / II. Responsabilité de la femme / 2. Sur ses biens réservés

2. Sur ses biens réservés

1 La femme n’est tenue pendant et après le mariage que jusqu’à concurrence de la valeur de ses biens réservés:

1.
des dettes qu’elle a contractées en restreignant sa responsabilité dans cette mesure;
2.
de celles qu’elle a faites sans le consentement du mari;
3.
de celles qu’elle a faites en outrepassant son droit de représenter l’union conjugale.

2 L’action fondée sur l’enrichissement illégitime demeure réservée.

Art. 209 E. Récompenses / I. Exigibilité

E. Récompenses

I. Exigibilité

1 Il y a lieu à récompense, par chacun des époux, en raison de dettes grevant les apports de l’un et payées de deniers provenant des apports de l’autre; sauf les exceptions prévues par la loi, la récompense n’est exigible qu’à la dissolution de l’union des biens.

2 Les récompenses sont exigibles pendant le mariage, lorsque des dettes qui grèvent les biens réservés de l’épouse ont été payées de deniers provenant des biens matrimoniaux et lorsque des dettes qui grèvent les biens matrimoniaux l’ont été de deniers provenant des biens réservés.

Art. 210 E. Récompenses / II. Faillite du mari et saisie / 1. Droits de la femme

II. Faillite du mari et saisie

1. Droits de la femme

1 La femme peut réclamer, dans la faillite du mari, les récompenses dues en raison de ses apports non représentés et participer de ce chef aux saisies faites contre lui.

2 Les créances du mari sont compensées.

3 La femme reprend, à titre de propriétaire, ceux de ses apports qui existent en nature.

Art. 211 E. Récompenses / II. Faillite du mari et saisie / 2. Privilège

2. Privilège

1 La femme qui n’a pas été désintéressée jusqu’à concurrence de la moitié de ses apports par la reprise de ceux-ci ou garantie dans la même mesure par des sûretés, obtient un privilège conformément à la loi fédérale du 11 avril 1889 sur la poursuite pour dettes et la faillite1 pour le reste de cette moitié.

2 Sont nulles la cession de ce privilège et la renonciation qui pourrait y être faite au profit de certains créanciers.


1 RS 281.1

Art. 212 F. Dissolution de l’union des biens / I. Décès de la femme

F. Dissolution de l’union des biens

I. Décès de la femme

1 Au décès de la femme, ses apports sont dévolus à ses héritiers, sous réserve des droits successoraux du mari.

2 Le mari doit auxdits héritiers la valeur des apports non représentés, dans la mesure où il en est responsable et sauf imputation de ses créances contre la femme.

Art. 213 F. Dissolution de l’union des biens / II. Décès du mari

II. Décès du mari

Au décès du mari, la femme reprend ses apports et peut se faire indemniser par les héritiers en raison des biens non représentés.

Art. 214 F. Dissolution de l’union des biens / III. Bénéfice et déficit

III. Bénéfice et déficit

1 Le bénéfice restant après le prélèvement des apports appartient pour un tiers à la femme ou à ses descendants et, pour le surplus, au mari ou à ses héritiers.

2 Le déficit est à la charge du mari ou de ses héritiers, en tant que la preuve n’est pas faite qu’il a été causé par la femme.

3 Le contrat de mariage peut prévoir une autre répartition du bénéfice et du déficit.


  Chapitre III: De la communauté de biens

Art. 215 A. Communauté universelle / I. Biens matrimoniaux

A. Communauté universelle

I. Biens matrimoniaux

1 La communauté universelle se compose de tous les biens et revenus tant du mari que de la femme; elle appartient indivisément aux deux époux.

2 Ni le mari, ni la femme ne peuvent disposer de leur part.

3 Celui des époux qui prétend qu’un bien ne rentre pas dans la communauté doit en faire la preuve.

Art. 216 A. Communauté universelle / II. Administration / 1. En général

II. Administration

1. En général

1 Le mari administre la communauté.

2 Les frais de gestion sont à la charge de la communauté.

3 La femme n’a le pouvoir d’administrer que dans la mesure où elle a qualité pour représenter l’union conjugale.

Art. 217 A. Communauté universelle / II. Administration / 2. Actes de disposition / a. En général

2. Actes de disposition

a. En général

1 Le mari et la femme ne peuvent, en dehors des actes de simple administration, disposer des biens de la communauté que conjointement ou avec le consentement l’un de l’autre.

2 Ce consentement est présumé au profit des tiers, à moins que ceux-ci ne sachent ou ne doivent savoir qu’il n’a pas été donné, ou à moins qu’il ne s’agisse de biens que chacun peut reconnaître comme appartenant à la communauté.

Art. 218 A. Communauté universelle / II. Administration / 2. Actes de disposition / b. Répudiation de successions

b. Répudiation de successions

1 L’un des époux ne peut pendant le mariage répudier une succession sans le consentement de l’autre.

2 Si ce consentement lui est refusé, il peut recourir à l’autorité tutélaire1.


1 Actuellement «autorité de protection de l’adulte».

Art. 219 A. Communauté universelle / III. Dettes / 1. Responsabilité du mari

III. Dettes

1. Responsabilité du mari

Le mari est tenu personnellement et sur les biens communs:

1.
des dettes des époux antérieures au mariage;
2.
des dettes contractées par la ferme représentant l’union conjugale;
3.
de toutes les autres dettes faites pendant le mariage, soit par le mari, soit par la femme à la charge de la communauté.
Art. 220 A. Communauté universelle / III. Dettes / 2. Responsabilité de la femme / a. Sur ses biens et sur les biens communs

2. Responsabilité de la femme

a. Sur ses biens et sur les biens communs

1 La femme et la communauté sont tenues:

1.
des dettes de la femme antérieures au mariage;
2.
des dettes qu’elle a faites avec le consentement du mari, ou en faveur de celui-ci avec l’approbation de l’autorité tutélaire1;
3.
des dettes qu’elle contracte dans l’exercice régulier d’une profession ou d’une industrie;
4.
des dettes grevant les successions à elle échues;
5.
des dettes résultant de ses actes illicites.

2 La femme n’est tenue des dettes contractées par le mari ou par elle pour l’entretien du ménage commun, que si les biens de la communauté ne suffisent pas à les payer.

3 Elle n’est pas tenue personnellement des autres dettes de la communauté.


1 Actuellement «autorité de protection de l’adulte».

Art. 221 A. Communauté universelle / III. Dettes / 2. Responsabilité de la femme / b. Sur la valeur de ses biens réservés

b. Sur la valeur de ses biens réservés

1 La femme n’est tenue pendant et après le mariage que jusqu’à concurrence de la valeur de ses biens réservés:

1.
des dettes qu’elle a contractées en restreignant sa responsabilité dans cette mesure;
2.
de celles qu’elle a faites sans le consentement du mari,
3.
de celles qu’elle a faites en outrepassant son droit de représenter l’union conjugale.

2 L’action fondée sur l’enrichissement illégitime demeure réservée.

Art. 222 A. Communauté universelle / III. Dettes / 3. Exécution forcée

3. Exécution forcée

Pendant la durée de la communauté, toutes poursuites fondées sur des dettes communes sont dirigées contre le mari.

Art. 223 A. Communauté universelle / IV. Récompenses / 1. En général

IV. Récompenses

1. En général

1 Il n’y a pas lieu à récompense entre époux, lorsque des dettes de la communauté ont été payées de deniers communs.

2 Les récompenses en raison de dettes communes payées de deniers provenant des biens réservés, ou de dettes grevant ces biens et payées de deniers communs, sont exigibles déjà pendant le mariage.

Art. 224 A. Communauté universelle / IV. Récompenses / 2. Créance de la femme

2. Créance de la femme

1 La femme peut, dans la faillite du mari ou la saisie faite sur les biens de la communauté, réclamer le montant de ses apports; elle jouit, pour la moitié de cette créance, d’un privilège conformément à la loi fédérale du 11 avril 1889 sur la poursuite pour dettes et la faillite1.

2 Sont nulles la cession de ce privilège et la renonciation qui pourrait y être faite au profit de certains créanciers.


1 RS 281.1

Art. 225 A. Communauté universelle / V. Dissolution de la communauté / 1. Partage / a. Légal

V. Dissolution de la communauté

1. Partage

a. Légal

1 Au décès de l’un des époux, la moitié de la communauté est dévolue au conjoint survivant.

2 L’autre moitié passe aux héritiers du défunt, sous réserve des droits successoraux de l’autre époux.

3 Le conjoint survivant indigne de succéder ne peut faire valoir dans la communauté plus de droits que ceux qui lui appartiendraient en cas de divorce.

Art. 226 A. Communauté universelle / V. Dissolution de la communauté / 1. Partage / b. Conventionnel

b. Conventionnel

1 Le contrat de mariage peut prévoir un mode de partage autre que le partage par moitié.

2 Les descendants du conjoint prédécédé ont droit, dans tous les cas, au quart des biens communs existant lors du décès.

Art. 227 A. Communauté universelle / V. Dissolution de la communauté / 2. Responsabilité du survivant

2. Responsabilité du survivant

1 Le mari survivant reste personnellement tenu de toutes les dettes de la communauté.

2 La femme survivante se libère, en répudiant la communauté, des dettes communes dont elle n’est pas personnellement tenue.

3 En cas d’acceptation, la femme reste obligée, mais elle peut se libérer de sa responsabilité dans la mesure où elle établit que les biens reçus ne suffisent pas à désintéresser les créanciers.

Art. 228 A. Communauté universelle / V. Dissolution de la communauté / 3. Attribution des apports

3. Attribution des apports

Le conjoint survivant peut demander que les biens entrés de son chef dans la communauté lui soient attribués en imputation sur sa part.

Art. 229 B. Communauté prolongée / I. Cas

B. Communauté prolongée

I. Cas

1 Le conjoint survivant peut prolonger la communauté avec les enfants issus du mariage.

2 Si les enfants sont mineurs, la prolongation doit être approuvée par l’autorité tutélaire1.

3 En cas de prolongation, l’exercice des droits successoraux est suspendu jusqu’à la dissolution de la communauté.


1 Actuellement «autorité de protection de l’enfant».

Art. 230 B. Communauté prolongée / II. Biens de communauté

II. Biens de communauté

1 La communauté comprend, outre les biens communs, les revenus et les gains des parties; les biens réservés en sont exceptés.

2 Sont biens réservés, sauf disposition contraire, les biens acquis pendant la communauté prolongée, par le conjoint survivant ou par les enfants, à titre de succession ou à quelque autre titre gratuit.

3 L’exécution forcée est exclue entre les membres de la communauté, de la même manière qu’entre époux.

Art. 231 B. Communauté prolongée / III. Administration et représentation

III. Administration et représentation

1 La communauté prolongée est administrée et représentée par le conjoint survivant, si les enfants sont mineurs.

2 S’ils sont majeurs, d’autres règles peuvent être établies par convention.

Art. 232 B. Communauté prolongée / IV. Dissolution / 1. Par les intéressés

IV. Dissolution

1. Par les intéressés

1 Le conjoint survivant peut en tout temps dissoudre la communauté prolongée.

2 En tout temps aussi, les enfants majeurs peuvent en sortir individuellement ou collectivement.

3 La même faculté est accordée à l’autorité tutélaire agissant au nom des enfants mineurs.

Art. 233 B. Communauté prolongée / IV. Dissolution / 2. De par la loi

2. De par la loi

1 La communauté prolongée est dissoute de plein droit:

1.
par le décès ou par le mariage du conjoint survivant;
2.
par la faillite de celui-ci ou des enfants.

2 En cas de faillite d’un seul des enfants, les autres intéressés peuvent demander son exclusion.

3 En cas de faillite du père ou de saisie faite sur les biens communs, les enfants peuvent exercer les droits de leur mère décédée.

Art. 234 B. Communauté prolongée / IV. Dissolution / 3. Par jugement

3. Par jugement

1 Le créancier qui a subi une perte dans la saisie faite contre l’époux ou contre un enfant, peut requérir du juge la dissolution de la communauté.

2 Si la requête est formée par le créancier d’un enfant, les autres intéressés peuvent demander l’exclusion de leur coindivis.

Art. 235 B. Communauté prolongée / IV. Dissolution / 4. Par suite de mariage ou décès d’un enfant

4. Par suite de mariage ou décès d’un enfant

1 Lorsqu’un enfant se marie, les autres intéressés peuvent demander son exclusion.

2 Lorsqu’un enfant meurt, ils peuvent demander l’exclusion de ses descendants.

3 La part de l’enfant décédé sans postérité reste bien commun, sauf les droits des héritiers qui ne font point partie de la communauté.

Art. 236 B. Communauté prolongée / IV. Dissolution / 5. Partage ou liquidation

5. Partage ou liquidation

1 En cas de dissolution de la communauté prolongée ou d’exclusion de l’un des enfants, le partage ou la liquidation des droits de l’enfant exclu portent sur les biens existant au moment où l’un de ces faits s’est produit.

2 Le conjoint survivant conserve ses droits de succession sur les parts des enfants.

3 La liquidation et le partage ne doivent pas avoir lieu en temps inopportun.

Art. 237 C. Communauté réduite / I. Avec stipulation de séparation de biens

C. Communauté réduite

I. Avec stipulation de séparation de biens

1 Les époux peuvent modifier la communauté en stipulant par contrat de mariage que certains biens ou certaines espèces de biens, notamment les immeubles, en seront exclus.

2 Les biens exclus sont soumis aux règles de la séparation de biens.

Art. 238 C. Communauté réduite / II. Avec stipulation d’union des biens

II. Avec stipulation d’union des biens

1 Les époux peuvent stipuler par contrat de mariage que les biens exclus de la communauté et appartenant à la femme seront soumis aux règles de l’union des biens.

2 Cette stipulation est présumée, lorsque la femme remet au mari, par contrat de mariage, l’administration et la jouissance de ses biens.

Art. 239 C. Communauté réduite / III. Communauté d’acquêts / 1. Son étendue

III. Communauté d’acquêts

1. Son étendue

1 Les époux peuvent stipuler par contrat de mariage que la communauté sera réduite aux acquêts.

2 Les biens acquis pendant le mariage, sauf à titre de remploi, forment les acquêts et sont soumis aux règles de la communauté.

3 Les apports de chacun des époux, y compris ce qui échoit à ces derniers pendant le mariage, sont soumis aux règles de l’union des biens.

Art. 240 C. Communauté réduite / III. Communauté d’acquêts / 2. Partage

2. Partage

1 Le bénéfice existant lors de la dissolution de la communauté appartient par moitié à chacun des conjoints ou à ses héritiers.

2 Le déficit est à la charge du mari ou de ses héritiers, en tant que la preuve n’est pas faite qu’il a été causé par la femme.

3 Le contrat de mariage peut prévoir une autre répartition du bénéfice et du déficit.


  Chapitre IV: De la séparation de biens

Art. 241 A. Effets généraux

A. Effets généraux

1 La séparation de biens légale ou judiciaire s’applique à tout le patrimoine des époux.

2 Il en est de même de la séparation conventionnelle, sauf clause contraire du contrat.

Art. 242 B. Propriété, administration et jouissance

B. Propriété, administration et jouissance

1 Chacun des époux conserve la propriété, l’administration et la jouissance de ses biens.

2 Lorsque la femme remet l’administration de ses biens au mari, il y a lieu de présumer qu’elle renonce à lui en demander compte pendant le mariage et qu’elle lui abandonne la totalité des revenus pour subvenir aux charges du mariage.

3 La femme ne peut renoncer valablement à son droit de reprendre en tout temps l’administration de ses biens.

Art. 243 C. Dettes / I. En général

C. Dettes

I. En général

1 Le mari est tenu personnellement de ses dettes antérieures au mariage et des dettes contractées pendant le mariage, soit par lui-même, soit par la femme représentant l’union conjugale.

2 La femme est tenue de ses dettes antérieures au mariage et de celles qui naissent à sa charge pendant le mariage.

3 Elle est tenue, en cas d’insolvabilité du mari, des dettes contractées par lui ou par elle pour l’entretien du ménage commun.

Art. 244 C. Dettes / II. Faillite du mari et saisie faite contre lui

II. Faillite du mari et saisie faite contre lui

1 La femme ne peut revendiquer aucun privilège dans la faillite de son mari, ni dans la saisie faite contre lui, même si elle lui avait confié l’administration de ses biens.

2 Les dispositions concernant la dot demeurent réservées.

Art. 245 D. Revenus et gains

D. Revenus et gains

Chaque époux a droit aux revenus de ses biens et au produit de son travail.

Art. 246 E. Contribution des époux aux charges du mariage

E. Contribution des époux aux charges du mariage

1 Le mari peut exiger que la femme contribue dans une mesure équitable aux charges du mariage.

2 En cas de dissentiment au sujet de cette contribution chacun des conjoints peut demander qu’elle soit fixée par l’autorité compétente.

3 Le mari n’est tenu à aucune restitution en raison des prestations de la femme.

Art. 247 F. Dot

F. Dot

2 Les époux peuvent stipuler, par contrat de mariage, qu’une partie des biens de la femme sera constituée en dot au profit du mari pour subvenir aux charges du mariage.

2 Les biens ainsi abandonnés au mari sont soumis, sauf convention contraire, aux règles de l’union des biens.


  Chapitre V: Du registre des régimes matrimoniaux

Art. 248 A. Effets de l’inscription

A. Effets de l’inscription

1 Les contrats de mariage, les décisions judiciaires concernant le régime matrimonial et les actes juridiques intervenus entre époux au sujet des apports de la femme ou des biens communs, ne déploient d’effets à l’égard des tiers qu’après leur inscription au registre des régimes matrimoniaux et leur publication.

2 Les héritiers des époux ne sont pas considérés comme des tiers.

Art. 249 B. Inscription / I. Objet

B. Inscription

I. Objet

1 Sont inscrites au registre les clauses que les époux entendent rendre opposables aux tiers.

2 À moins que la loi n’en dispose autrement ou que le contrat n’exclue expressément l’inscription, celle-ci peut être requise par chacun des époux.

Art. 250 B. Inscription / II. Lieu

II. Lieu

1 L’inscription a lieu dans le registre du domicile du mari.

2 Si le mari transporte son domicile dans un autre arrondissement, l’inscription doit y être aussi faite dans les trois mois.

3 L’inscription précédente n’a plus d’effet trois mois après le changement de domicile.

Art. 251 C. Tenue du registre C. Tenue du registre

C. Tenue du registre

1 Le registre des régimes matrimoniaux est tenu par le préposé au registre du commerce, à moins que les cantons n’en chargent d’autres fonctionnaires et ne créent des arrondissements particuliers.

2 Le registre est public; des extraits sont délivrés à quiconque en fait la demande.

3 La publication du contrat de mariage mentionne simplement le régime matrimonial adopté par les époux.


1 RS 2 3. Encore applicables comme droit transitoire, dans la mesure où les art. 9a et s. du tit. fin. (révision du droit matrimonial, du 5 oct. 1984) le prévoient.

  Table des matières

A. Application de la loi Art. 1

I. Devoirs généraux Art. 2

II. Bonne foi Art. 3

III. Pouvoir d’appréciation du juge Art. 4

I. Droit civil et usages locaux Art. 5

II. Droit public des cantons Art. 6

D. Dispositions générales du droit des obligations Art. 7

I. Fardeau de la preuve Art. 8

II. Titres publics Art. 9

Art. 10

I. Jouissance des droits civils Art. 11

1. Son objet Art. 12

2. Ses conditions

a. En général Art. 13

b. Majorité Art. 14

c. ... Art. 15

d. Discernement Art. 16

1. En général Art. 17

2. Absence de discernement Art. 18

3.Personnes capables de discernement qui n’ont pas l’exercice des droits civils

a. Principe Art. 19

b. Consentement du représentant légal Art. 19a

c. Défaut de consentement Art. 19b

4. Droits strictement personnels Art. 19c

IIIbis. Exercice restreint des droits civils Art. 19d

1. Parenté Art. 20

2. Alliance Art. 21

1. Droit de cité Art. 22

2. Domicile

a. Définition Art. 23

b. Changement de domicile ou séjour Art. 24

c.Domicile des mineurs Art. 25

d. Domicile des majeurs sous curatelle de portée générale Art. 26

I. Contre des engagements excessifs Art. 27

1. Principe Art. 28

2. Actions

a. En général Art. 28a

b. Violence, menaces ou harcèlement Art. 28b

3. ... Art. 28c à 28f

4. Droit de réponse

a. Principe Art. 28g

b. Forme et contenu Art. 28h

c. Procédure Art. 28i

d. Modalités de la diffusion Art. 28k

e. Recours au juge Art. 28l

1. Protection du nom Art. 29

2. Changement de nom

a. En général Art. 30

b. En cas de décès d’un des époux Art. 30a

I. Naissance et mort Art. 31

1. Fardeau de la preuve Art. 32

2. Moyens de preuve

a. En général Art. 33

b. Indices de mort Art. 34

1. En général Art. 35

2. Procédure Art. 36

3. Requête devenue sans objet Art. 37

4. Effets Art. 38

I. Généralités Art. 39

II. Obligation de déclarer Art. 40

III. Preuves de données non litigieuses Art. 41

1. Par le juge Art. 42

2. Par les autorités de l’état civil Art. 43

V. Protection et divulgation des données Art. 43a

1. Officiers de l’état civil Art. 44

2. Autorités de surveillance Art. 45

Ia. Système d’information central de personnes Art. 45a

II. Responsabilité Art. 46

III. Mesures disciplinaires Art. 47

I. Droit fédéral Art. 48

II. Droit cantonal Art. 49

Art. 50 et 51

A. De la personnalité Art. 52

B. Jouissance des droits civils Art. 53

I. Conditions Art. 54

II. Mode Art. 55

D. Siège Art. 56

I. Destination des biens Art. 57

II. Liquidation Art. 58

F. Réserves en faveur du droit public et du droit sur les sociétés Art. 59

I. Organisation corporative Art. 60

II. Inscription au registre du commerce Art. 61

III. Associations sans personnalité Art. 62

IV. Relation entre les statuts et la loi Art. 63

1. Attributions et convocation Art. 64

2. Compétences Art. 65

3. Décisions

a. Forme Art. 66

b. Droit de vote et majorité Art. 67

c. Privation du droit de vote Art. 68

1. Droits et devoirs en général Art. 69

2. Comptabilité Art. 69a

III. Organe de révision Art. 69b

IV. Carences dans l’organisation de l’association Art. 69c

I. Entrée et sortie Art. 70

II. Cotisations Art. 71

III. Exclusion Art. 72

IV. Effets de la sortie et de l’exclusion Art. 73

V. Protection du but social Art. 74

VI. Protection des droits des sociétaires Art. 75

Cbis. Responsabilité Art. 75a

1. Par décision de l’association Art. 76

2. De par la loi Art. 77

3. Par jugement Art. 78

II. Radiation de l’inscription Art. 79

I. En général Art. 80

II. Forme Art. 81

III. Action des héritiers et créanciers Art. 82

I. En général Art. 83

II. Tenue des comptes Art. 83a

1. Obligation de révision et droit applicable Art. 83b

2. Rapports avec l’autorité de surveillance Art. 83c

IV. Carences dans l’organisation de la fondation Art. 83d

C. Surveillance Art. 84

Cbis. Mesures en cas de surendettement et d’insolvabilité Art. 84a

Abrogé Art. 84b

I. De l’organisation Art. 85

1. Sur requête de l’autorité de surveillance ou de l’organe suprême de la fondation Art. 86

2. Sur requête ou en raison d’une disposition pour cause de mort du fondateur Art. 86a

III. Modifications accessoires de l’acte de fondation Art. 86b

E. Fondations de famille et fondations ecclésiastiques Art. 87

I. Dissolution par l’autorité compétente Art. 88

II. Requête et action en dissolution, radiation de l’inscription Art. 89

G. Institutions de prévoyance en faveur du personnel Art. 89a

A. Défaut d’administration Art. 89b

B. Autorité compétente Art. 89c

A. Contrat de fiançailles Art. 90

I. Présents Art. 91

II. Participation financière Art. 92

III. Prescription Art. 93

A. Capacité Art. 94

I. Lien de parenté Art. 95

II. Mariage antérieur Art. 96

A. Principe Art. 97

Abis. Abus lié à la législation sur les étrangers Art. 97a

I. Demande Art. 98

II. Exécution et clôture de la procédure préparatoire Art. 99

III. Délais Art. 100

I. Lieu Art. 101

II. Forme Art. 102

D. Dispositions d’exécution Art. 103

A. Principe Art. 104

I. Cas Art. 105

II. Action Art. 106

I. Cas Art. 107

II. Action Art. 108

D. Effets du jugement Art. 109

Abrogé Art. 110

I. Accord complet Art. 111

II. Accord partiel Art. 112

AbrogéII. Accord partiel Art. 113

I. Après suspension de la vie commune Art. 114

II. Rupture du lien conjugal Art. 115

Abrogé Art. 116

A. Conditions et procédure Art. 117

B. Effets de la séparation Art. 118

A. Nom Art. 119

B. Régime matrimonial et succession Art. 120

C. Logement de la famille Art. 121

I. Principe Art. 122

II. Partage des prestations de sortie Art. 123

III. Partage en cas de perception d’une rente d’invalidité avant l’âge règlementaire de la retraite Art. 124

IV. Partage en cas de perception d’une rente d’invalidité après l’âge règlementaire de la retraite ou d’une rente de vieillesse Art. 124a

V. Exception Art. 124b

VI. Compensation des prétentions réciproques Art. 124c

VII. Exécution ne pouvant être raisonnablement exigée Art. 124d

VIII. Exécution impossible Art. 124e

I. Conditions Art. 125

II. Mode de règlement Art. 126

1. Dispositions spéciales Art. 127

2. Indexation Art. 128

3. Modification par le juge Art. 129

4. Extinction de par la loi Art. 130

1. Aide au recouvrement Art. 131

2. Avances Art. 131a

3. Avis aux débiteurs et fourniture de sûretés Art. 132

I. Droits et devoirs des père et mère Art. 133

II. Faits nouveaux Art. 134

Abrogés Art. 135 à 149

Abrogés Art. 150 à 158

A. Union conjugale; droits et devoirs des époux Art. 159

B. Nom Art. 160

C. Droit de cité Art. 161

D. Demeure commune Art. 162

I. En général Art. 163

II. Montant à libre disposition Art. 164

III. Contribution extraordinaire d’un époux Art. 165

F. Représentation de l’union conjugale Art. 166

G. Profession et entreprise des époux Art. 167

I. En général Art. 168

II. Logement de la famille Art. 169

J. Devoir de renseigner Art. 170

I. Offices de consultation Art. 171

1. En général Art. 172

2. Pendant la vie commune

a. Contributions pécuniaires Art. 173

b. Retrait du pouvoir de représenter l’union conjugale Art. 174

3. En cas de suspension de la vie commune

a. Causes Art. 175

b. Organisation de la vie séparée Art. 176

4. Exécution

a. Aide au recouvrement et avances Art. 176a

b. Avis aux débiteurs Art. 177

5. Restrictions du pouvoir de disposer Art. 178

6. Faits nouveaux Art. 179

Abrogé Art. 180

A. Régime ordinaire Art. 181

I. Choix du régime Art. 182

II. Capacité des parties Art. 183

III. Forme du contrat de mariage Art. 184

1. Jugement Art. 185

2. ... Art. 186

3. Révocation Art. 187

1. Faillite Art. 188

2. Saisie

a. Jugement Art. 189

b. Demande Art. 190

3. Révocation Art. 191

III. Liquidation du régime antérieur Art. 192

D. Protection des créanciers Art. 193

E. ... Art. 194

F. Administration des biens d’un époux par l’autre Art. 195

G. Inventaire Art. 195a

I. Composition Art. 196

II. Acquêts Art. 197

1. Légaux Art. 198

2. Conventionnels Art. 199

IV. Preuve Art. 200

B. Administration, jouissance et disposition Art. 201

C. Dettes envers les tiers Art. 202

D. Dettes entre époux Art. 203

I. Moment de la dissolution Art. 204

1. En général Art. 205

2. Part à la plus-value Art. 206

1. Dissociation des acquêts et des biens propres Art. 207

2. Réunions aux acquêts Art. 208

3. Récompenses entre acquêts et biens propres Art. 209

4. Bénéfice Art. 210

1. Valeur vénale Art. 211

2. Valeur de rendement

a. En général Art. 212

b. Circonstances particulières Art. 213

3. Moment de l’estimation Art. 214

1. Légale Art. 215

2. Conventionnelle

a. En général Art. 216

b. En cas de divorce, de séparation de corps, de nullité de mariage ou de séparation de biens judiciaire Art. 217

1. Sursis au paiement Art. 218

2. Logement et mobilier de ménage Art. 219

3. Action contre des tiers Art. 220

I. Composition Art. 221

1. Communauté universelle Art. 222

2. Communautés réduites

a. Communauté d’acquêts Art. 223

b. Autres communautés Art. 224

III. Biens propres Art. 225

IV. Preuve Art. 226

1. Administration ordinaire Art. 227

2. Administration extraordinaire Art. 228

3. Profession ou entreprise commune Art. 229

4. Répudiation et acquisition de successions Art. 230

5. Responsabilité et frais de gestion Art. 231

II. Biens propres Art. 232

I. Dettes générales Art. 233

II. Dettes propres Art. 234

D. Dettes entre époux Art. 235

I. Moment de la dissolution Art. 236

II. Attribution aux biens propres Art. 237

III. Récompenses entre biens communs et biens propres Art. 238

IV. Part à la plus-value Art. 239

V. Valeur d’estimation Art. 240

1. En cas de décès ou d’adoption d’un autre régime Art. 241

2. Dans les autres cas Art. 242

1. Biens propres Art. 243

2. Logement et mobilier de ménage Art. 244

3. Autres biens Art. 245

4. Autres règles de partage Art. 246

I. En général Art. 247

II. Preuve Art. 248

B. Dettes envers les tiers Art. 249

C. Dettes entre époux Art. 250

D. Attribution d’un bien en copropriété Art. 251

A. Établissement de la filiation en général Art. 252

B. ... Art. 253

Abrogé Art. 254

A. Présomption Art. 255

I. Qualité pour agir Art. 256

1. Enfant conçu pendant le mariage Art. 256a

2. Enfant conçu avant le mariage ou pendant la suspension de la vie commune Art. 256b

III. Délai Art. 256c

C. Conflit de présomptions Art. 257

D. Action des père et mère Art. 258

E. Mariage des père et mère Art. 259

I. Conditions et forme Art. 260

1. Qualité pour agir Art. 260a

2. Moyen Art. 260b

3. Délai Art. 260c

I. Qualité pour agir Art. 261

II. Présomption Art. 262

III. Délai Art. 263

I. Conditions générales Art. 264

II. Adoption conjointe Art. 264a

III. Adoption par une personne seule Art. 264b

IV. Adoption de l’enfant du conjoint ou du partenaire Art. 264c

V. Différence d’âge Art. 264d

VI. Consentement de l’enfant et de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant Art. 265

1. Forme Art. 265a

2. Moment Art. 265b

3. Renoncement au consentement

a. Conditions Art. 265c

b. Décision Art. 265d

B. Adoption de majeurs Art. 266

I. En général Art. 267

II. Nom Art. 267a

III. Droit de cité Art. 267b

I. En général Art. 268

II. Enquête Art. 268a

III. Droit de l’enfant d’être entendu Art. 268abis

IV. Représentation de l’enfant Art. 268ater

V. Prise en considération de l’opinion de membres de la parenté Art. 268aquater

Dbis. Secret de l’adoption Art. 268b

Dter. Informations sur l’adoption, les parents biologiques et leurs descendants Art. 268c

Dquater. Service cantonal d’information et services de recherche Art. 268d

Dquinquies. Relations personnelles avec les parents biologiques Art. 268e

1. Défaut de consentement Art. 269

2. Autres vices Art. 269a

II. Délai Art. 269b

F. Activité d’intermédiaire en vue d’adoption Art. 269c

I. Enfant de parents mariés Art. 270

II. Enfant dont la mère n’est pas mariée avec le père Art. 270a

III. Consentement de l’enfant Art. 270b

B. Droit de cité Art. 271

C. Devoirs réciproques Art. 272

1. Principe Art. 273

2. Limites Art. 274

II. Tiers Art. 274a

III. For et compétence Art. 275

E. Information et renseignements Art. 275a

I. Objet et étendue Art. 276

II. Priorité de l’obligation d’entretien à l’égard de l’enfant mineur Art. 276a

B. Durée Art. 277

C. Parents mariés Art. 278

I. Qualité pour agir Art. 279

II. et III ... Art. 280 à 284

1. Contribution des père et mère Art. 285

2. Autres prestations destinées à l’entretien de l’enfant Art. 285a

V. Faits nouveaux

1. En général Art. 286

2. Situations de déficit Art. 286a

I. Contributions périodiques Art. 287

II. Contenu de la convention relative aux contributions d’entretien Art. 287a

III. Indemnité unique Art. 288

I. Créancier Art. 289

1. Aide au recouvrement Art. 290

2. Avis aux débiteurs Art. 291

III. Sûretés Art. 292

G. Droit public Art. 293

H. Parents nourriciers Art. 294

J. Droits de la mère non mariée Art. 295

A. En général Art. 296

Abis. Décès d’un parent Art. 297

Ater. Divorce et autres procédures matrimoniales Art. 298

I. Déclaration commune des parents Art. 298a

II. Décision de l’autorité de protection de l’enfant Art. 298b

III. Action en paternité Art. 298c

IV. Faits nouveaux Art. 298d

Aquinquies. Faits nouveaux après l’adoption de l’enfant du partenaire en cas de vie de couple de fait Art. 298e

Asexies. Beaux-parents Art. 299

Asepties. Parents nourriciers Art. 300

I. En général Art. 301

II. Détermination du lieu de résidence Art. 301a

III. Éducation Art. 302

IV. Éducation religieuse Art. 303

1. À l’égard de tiers

a. En général Art. 304

b.Statut juridique de l’enfant Art. 305

2. À l’égard de la famille Art. 306

I. Mesures protectrices Art. 307

II. Curatelle Art. 308

Abrogé Art. 309

III. Retrait du droit de déterminer le lieu de résidence Art. 310

1. D’office Art. 311

2. Avec le consentement des parents Art. 312

V. Faits nouveaux Art. 313

1. En général Art. 314

2. Audition de l’enfant Art. 314a

3. Représentation de l’enfant Art. 314abis

4. Placement dans une institution fermée ou dans un établissement psychiatrique Art. 314b

5. Droit d’aviser l’autorité Art. 314c

6. Obligation d’aviser l’autorité Art. 314d

7. Collaboration et assistance administrative Art. 314e

1. En général Art. 315

2. Dans une procédure matrimoniale

a. Compétence du juge Art. 315a

b. Modification des mesures judiciaires Art. 315b

VIII. Surveillance des enfants placés chez des parents nourriciers Art. 316

IX. Collaboration dans la protection de la jeunesse Art. 317

A. Administration Art. 318

B. Utilisation des revenus Art. 319

C. Prélèvements sur les biens de l’enfant Art. 320

I. Biens remis par stipulation Art. 321

II. Réserve héréditaire Art. 322

III. Produit du travail, fonds professionnel Art. 323

I. Mesures protectrices Art. 324

II. Retrait de l’administration Art. 325

I. Restitution Art. 326

II. Responsabilité Art. 327

A. Principe Art. 327a

I. De l’enfant Art. 327b

II. Du tuteur Art. 327c

A. Débiteurs Art. 328

B. Demande d’aliments Art. 329

C. Entretien des enfants trouvés Art. 330

A. Conditions Art. 331

I. Ordre intérieur Art. 332

II. Responsabilité Art. 333

1. Conditions Art. 334

2. Réclamation Art. 334bis

A. Fondations de famille Art. 335

1. Conditions Art. 336

2. Forme Art. 337

II. Durée Art. 338

1. Exploitation commune Art. 339

2. Direction et représentation

a. En général Art. 340

b. Compétences du chef de l’indivision Art. 341

3. Biens communs et biens personnels Art. 342

1. Cas Art. 343

2. Dénonciation, insolvabilité, mariage Art. 344

3. Décès Art. 345

4. Partage Art. 346

1. Conditions Art. 347

2. Dissolution Art. 348

Abrogés Art. 349 à 358

Abrogé Art. 359

A. Principe Art. 360

I. Constitution Art. 361

II. Révocation Art. 362

C. Constatation de la validité et acceptation Art. 363

D. Interprétation et complètement Art. 364

E. Exécution Art. 365

F. Rémunération et frais Art. 366

G. Résiliation Art. 367

H. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte Art. 368

I. Recouvrement de la capacité de discernement Art. 369

A. Principe Art. 370

B. Constitution et révocation Art. 371

C. Survenance de l’incapacité de discernement Art. 372

D. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte Art. 373

A. Conditions et étendue du pouvoir de représentation Art. 374

B. Exercice du pouvoir de représentation Art. 375

C. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte Art. 376

A. Plan de traitement Art. 377

B. Représentants Art. 378

C. Cas d’urgence Art. 379

D. Traitement des troubles psychiques Art. 380

E. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte Art. 381

A. Contrat d’assistance Art. 382

I. Conditions Art. 383

II. Protocole et devoir d’information Art. 384

III. Intervention de l’autorité de protection de l’adulte Art. 385

C. Protection de la personnalité Art. 386

D. Surveillance des institutions Art. 387

A. But Art. 388

B. Subsidiarité et proportionnalité Art. 389

A. Conditions Art. 390

B. Tâches Art. 391

C. Renonciation à instituer une curatelle Art. 392

A. Curatelle d’accompagnement Art. 393

I. En général Art. 394

II. Gestion du patrimoine Art. 395

C. Curatelle de coopération Art. 396

D. Combinaison de curatelles Art. 397

E. Curatelle de portée générale Art. 398

Abrogé Art. 399

I. Conditions générales Art. 400

II. Souhaits de la personne concernée ou de ses proches Art. 401

III. Curatelle confiée à plusieurs personnes Art. 402

B. Empêchement et conflit d’intérêts Art. 403

C. Rémunération et frais Art. 404

A. Entrée en fonction du curateur Art. 405

B. Relations avec la personne concernée Art. 406

C. Autonomie de la personne concernée Art. 407

I. Tâches Art. 408

II. Montants à disposition Art. 409

III. Comptes Art. 410

E. Rapport d’activité Art. 411

F. Affaires particulières Art. 412

G. Devoir de diligence et obligation de conserver le secret Art. 413

H. Faits nouveaux Art. 414

A. Examen des comptes et des rapports Art. 415

I. De par la loi Art. 416

II. Sur décision Art. 417

III. Défaut de consentement Art. 418

Abrogé Art. 419

Abrogé Art. 420

A. De plein droit Art. 421

I. Sur requête du curateur Art. 422

II. Autres cas Art. 423

C. Gestion transitoire Art. 424

D. Rapport et comptes finaux Art. 425

I. Placement à des fins d’assistance ou de traitement Art. 426

II. Maintien d’une personne entrée de son plein gré Art. 427

I. Autorité de protection de l’adulte Art. 428

1. Compétence Art. 429

2. Procédure Art. 430

C. Examen périodique Art. 431

D. Personne de confiance Art. 432

I. Plan de traitement Art. 433

II. Traitement sans consentement Art. 434

III. Cas d’urgence Art. 435

IV. Entretien de sortie Art. 436

V. Droit cantonal Art. 437

F. Mesures limitant la liberté de mouvement Art. 438

G. Appel au juge Art. 439

A. Autorité de protection de l’adulte Art. 440

B. Autorité de surveillance Art. 441

C. Compétence à raison du lieu Art. 442

A. Droit et obligation d’aviser l’autorité Art. 443

B. Examen de la compétence Art. 444

C. Mesures provisionnelles Art. 445

D. Maximes de la procédure Art. 446

E. Droit d’être entendu Art. 447

F. Obligation de collaborer et assistance administrative Art. 448

G. Expertise effectuée dans une institution Art. 449

H. Représentation Art. 449a

I. Consultation du dossier Art. 449b

J. Obligation de communiquer Art. 449c

A. Objet du recours et qualité pour recourir Art. 450

B. Motifs Art. 450a

C. Délais Art. 450b

D. Effet suspensif Art. 450c

E. Consultation de la première instance et reconsidération Art. 450d

F. Dispositions spéciales concernant le placement à des fins d’assistance Art. 450e

Abrogé Art. 450f

Abrogé Art. 450g

A. Secret et information Art. 451

B. Effet des mesures à l’égard des tiers Art. 452

C. Obligation de collaborer Art. 453

A. Principe Art. 454

B. Prescription Art. 455

C. Responsabilité selon les règles du mandat Art. 456

I. Les descendants Art. 457

II. La parentèle des père et mère Art. 458

III. La parentèle des grands- parents Art. 459

IV. Derniers héritiers Art. 460

Abrogé Art. 461

B. Conjoint survivant, partenaire enregistré survivant Art. 462

Abrogés Art. 463 et 464

C. ... Art. 465

D. Canton et commune Art. 466

A. Par testament Art. 467

B. Dans un pacte successoral Art. 468

C. Dispositions nulles Art. 469

I. Son étendue Art. 470

II. Réserve Art. 471

III. ... Art. 472

IV. Libéralités en faveur du conjoint survivant Art. 473

1. Déduction des dettes Art. 474

2. Libéralités entre vifs Art. 475

3. Assurances en cas de décès Art. 476

I. Causes Art. 477

II. Effets Art. 478

III. Fardeau de la preuve Art. 479

IV. Exhérédation d’un insolvable Art. 480

A. En général Art. 481

B. Charges et conditions Art. 482

C. Institution d’héritier Art. 483

I. Objet Art. 484

II. Délivrance Art. 485

III. Rapport entre legs et succession Art. 486

E. Substitutions vulgaires Art. 487

I. Désignation des appelés Art. 488

II. Ouverture de la substitution Art. 489

III. Sûretés Art. 490

1. Envers le grevé Art. 491

2. Envers l’appelé Art. 492

V. Descendants incapables de discernement Art. 492a

G. Fondations Art. 493

I. Institution d’héritier et legs Art. 494

1. Portée Art. 495

2. Loyale échute Art. 496

3. Droits des créanciers héréditaires Art. 497

1. En général Art. 498

2. Testament public

a. Rédaction de l’acte Art. 499

b. Concours de l’officier public Art. 500

c. Concours des témoins Art. 501

d. Testateur qui n’a ni lu ni signé Art. 502

e. Personnes concourant à l’acte Art. 503

f. Dépôt de l’acte Art. 504

3. Forme olographe Art. 505

4. Forme orale

a. Les dernières dispositions Art. 506

b. Mesures subséquentes Art. 507

c. Caducité Art. 508

1. Révocation Art. 509

2. Suppression de l’acte Art. 510

3. Acte postérieur Art. 511

I. Forme Art. 512

1. Entre vifs

a. Par contrat ou dans la forme d’un testament Art. 513

b. Pour cause d’inexécution Art. 514

2. En cas de survie du disposant Art. 515

C. Quotité disponible réduite Art. 516

A. Désignation Art. 517

B. Étendue des pouvoirs Art. 518

I. Incapacité de disposer, caractère illicite ou immoral de la disposition Art. 519

1. En général Art. 520

2. En cas de testament olographe Art. 520a

III. Prescription Art. 521

1. En général Art. 522

2. Libéralités en faveur de réservataires Art. 523

3. Droit des créanciers d’un héritier Art. 524

1. En général Art. 525

2. Legs d’une chose déterminée Art. 526

3. À l’égard des libéralités entre vifs

a. Cas Art. 527

b. Restitution Art. 528

4. Assurances en cas de décès Art. 529

5. À l’égard des libéralités d’usufruit ou de rente Art. 530

6. En cas de substitution Art. 531

III. De l’ordre des réductions Art. 532

IV. Prescription Art. 533

A. Droits en cas de transfert entre vifs des biens Art. 534

I. Réduction Art. 535

II. Restitution Art. 536

A. Cause de l’ouverture Art. 537

B. Lieu de l’ouverture Art. 538

1. Jouissance des droits civils Art. 539

2. Indignité

a. Causes Art. 540

b. Effets à l’égard des descendants Art. 541

1. Les héritiers Art. 542

2. Les légataires Art. 543

3. Les enfants conçus Art. 544

4. En cas de substitution Art. 545

1. Envoi en possession et sûretés Art. 546

2. Restitution Art. 547

II. Droit de succession d’un absent Art. 548

III. Corrélation entre les deux cas Art. 549

IV. Procédure d’office Art. 550

A. En général Art. 551

B. Apposition des scellés Art. 552

C. Inventaire Art. 553

I. En général Art. 554

II. Quand les héritiers sont inconnus Art. 555

I. Obligation de les communiquer Art. 556

II. Ouverture Art. 557

III. Communication aux ayants droit Art. 558

IV. Délivrance des biens Art. 559

I. Héritiers Art. 560

II ... Art. 561

1. Acquisition du legs Art. 562

2. Objet du legs Art. 563

3. Droits des créanciers Art. 564

4. Réduction Art. 565

1. Faculté de répudier Art. 566

2. Délai

a. En général Art. 567

b. En cas d’inventaire Art. 568

3. Transmission du droit de répudier Art. 569

4. Forme Art. 570

II. Déchéance du droit de répudier Art. 571

III. Répudiation d’un des cohéritiers Art. 572

1. En général Art. 573

2. Droit du conjoint survivant Art. 574

3. Répudiation au profit d’héritiers éloignés Art. 575

V. Prorogation des délais Art. 576

VI. Répudiation du legs Art. 577

VII. Protection des droits des créanciers de l’héritier Art. 578

VIII. Responsabilité en cas de répudiation Art. 579

A. Conditions Art. 580

I. Inventaire Art. 581

II. Sommation publique Art. 582

III. Créances et dettes inventoriées d’office Art. 583

IV. Résultat Art. 584

I. Administration Art. 585

II. Poursuites et procès; prescription Art. 586

I. Délai pour prendre parti Art. 587

II. Déclaration de l’héritier Art. 588

1. Responsabilité d’après l’inventaire Art. 589

2. Responsabilité au delà de l’inventaire Art. 590

E. Responsabilité en vertu de cautionnements Art. 591

F. Successions dévolues au canton ou à la commune Art. 592

I. À la requête d’un héritier Art. 593

II. À la requête des créanciers du défunt Art. 594

I. Administration Art. 595

II. Mode ordinaire de liquidation Art. 596

III. Liquidation selon les règles de la faillite Art. 597

A. Conditions Art. 598

B. Effets Art. 599

C. Prescription Art. 600

D. Action du légataire Art. 601

I. Communauté héréditaire Art. 602

II. Responsabilité des héritiers Art. 603

B. Action en partage Art. 604

C. Ajournement du partage Art. 605

D. Droits de ceux qui faisaient ménage commun avec le défunt Art. 606

A. En général Art. 607

I. Dispositions du défunt Art. 608

II. Concours de l’autorité Art. 609

I. Égalité des droits des héritiers Art. 610

II. Composition des lots Art. 611

III. Attribution et vente de certains biens héréditaires Art. 612

IV. Attribution du logement et du mobilier de ménage au conjoint survivant Art. 612a

I. Objets formant un tout, papiers de famille Art. 613

Ibis. Inventaire Art. 613a

II. Créances du défunt contre l’héritier Art. 614

III. Biens de la succession grevés de gages Art. 615

Abrogé Art. 616

1. Reprise

a. Valeur d’imputation Art. 617

b. Procédure Art. 618

V. Entreprises et immeubles agricoles Art. 619

Abrogés Art. 620 à 625

A. Obligation de rapporter Art. 626

B. Rapport en cas d’incapacité ou de répudiation Art. 627

I. En nature ou en moins prenant Art. 628

II. Libéralités excédant la portion héréditaire Art. 629

III. Mode de calcul Art. 630

D. Frais d’éducation Art. 631

E. Présents d’usage Art. 632

Abrogé Art. 633

I. Convention de partage Art. 634

II. Convention sur parts héréditaires Art. 635

III. Pactes sur successions non ouvertes Art. 636

I. Obligations en résultant Art. 637

II. Rescision du partage Art. 638

I. Solidarité Art. 639

II. Recours entre héritiers Art. 640

I. En général Art. 641

II. Animaux Art. 641a

I. Les parties intégrantes Art. 642

II. Les fruits naturels Art. 643

1. Définition Art. 644

2. Exception Art. 645

1. Rapports entre les copropriétaires Art. 646

2. Règlement d’utilisation et d’administration Art. 647

3. Actes d’administration courante Art. 647a

4. Actes d’administration plus importants Art. 647b

5. Travaux de construction

a. Nécessaires Art. 647c

b. Utiles Art. 647d

c. Pour l’embellissement et la commodité Art. 647e

6. Actes de disposition Art. 648

7. Contribution aux frais et charges Art. 649

8. Opposabilité; mention au registre foncier Art. 649a

9. Exclusion de la communauté

a. Copropriétaire Art. 649b

b. Titulaires d’autres droits Art. 649c

10. Fin de la copropriété

a. Action en partage Art. 650

b. Mode de partage Art. 651

c. Animaux vivant en milieu domestique Art. 651a

1. Cas Art. 652

2. Effets Art. 653

3. Fin Art. 654

III. Propriété de plusieurs sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles Art. 654a

I. Immeuble Art. 655

II. Propriété dépendante Art. 655a

I. Inscription Art. 656

1. Actes translatifs de propriété Art. 657

2. Occupation Art. 658

3. Formation de nouvelles terres Art. 659

4. Glissements de terrain

a. En général Art. 660

b. Permanents Art. 660a

c. Nouvelle fixation des limites Art. 660b

5. Prescription

a. Ordinaire Art. 661

b. Extraordinaire Art. 662

c. Délais Art. 663

6. Choses sans maître et biens du domaine public Art. 664

III. Droit à l’inscription Art. 665

C. Perte de la propriété foncière Art. 666

I. Propriétaire introuvable Art. 666a

II. Absence des organes prescrits Art. 666b

I. En général Art. 667

1. Indication des limites Art. 668

2. Obligation de borner Art. 669

3. Démarcations communes Art. 670

1. Fonds et matériaux

a. Propriété Art. 671

b. Indemnités Art. 672

c. Attribution de la propriété du fonds Art. 673

2. Constructions empiétant sur le fonds d’autrui Art. 674

3. Droit de superficie Art. 675

4. Conduites Art. 676

5. Constructions mobilières Art. 677

IV. Plantations Art. 678

1. En cas d’excès du droit de propriété Art. 679

2. En cas d’exploitation licite d’un fonds Art. 679a

I. En général Art. 680

1. Principes Art. 681

2. Exercice Art. 681a

3. Modification, renonciation Art. 681b

4. En cas de copropriété et de droit de superficie Art. 682

5. Droits de préemption sur les entreprises et les immeubles agricoles Art. 682a

Abrogé Art. 683

1. Atteintes excessives Art. 684

2. Fouilles et constructions

a. Règle Art. 685

b. Dispositions réservées au droit cantonal Art. 686

3. Plantes

a. Règle Art. 687

b. Dispositions réservées au droit cantonal Art. 688

4. Écoulement des eaux Art. 689

5. Drainage Art. 690

6. Lignes et conduites traversant un fonds

a. Obligation de les tolérer Art. 691

b. Sauvegarde des intérêts du propriétaire grevé Art. 692

c. Faits nouveaux Art. 693

7. Droits de passage

a. Passage nécessaire Art. 694

b. Autres passages Art. 695

c. Mention au registre Art. 696

8. Clôtures Art. 697

9. Entretien d’ouvrages Art. 698

1. Forêts et pâturages Art. 699

2. Recherches des épaves, etc. Art. 700

3. Cas de nécessité Art. 701

1. En général Art. 702

2. Améliorations du sol Art. 703

I. Propriété et servitude Art. 704

II. Dérivation Art. 705

1. Indemnité Art. 706

2. Rétablissement des lieux Art. 707

IV. Sources communes Art. 708

V. Usage des sources Art. 709

VI. Fontaine nécessaire Art. 710

1. Des sources Art. 711

2. Du sol Art. 712

I. Éléments Art. 712a

II. Objet Art. 712b

III. Actes de disposition Art. 712c

I. Acte constitutif Art. 712d

II. Délimitation et quotes-parts Art. 712e

III. Fin Art. 712f

I. Dispositions applicables Art. 712g

1. Définition et répartition Art. 712h

2. Garantie des contributions

a. Hypothèque légale Art. 712i

b. Droit de rétention Art. 712k

III. Exercice des droits civils Art. 712l

1. Compétence et statut juridique Art. 712m

2. Convocation et présidence Art. 712n

3. Exercice du droit de vote Art. 712o

4. Quorum Art. 712p

1. Nomination Art. 712q

2. Révocation Art. 712r

3. Attributions

a. Exécution des dispositions et des décisions sur l’administration et l’utilisation Art. 712s

b. Représentation envers les tiers Art. 712t

A. Objet de la propriété mobilière Art. 713

1. Transfert de la possession Art. 714

2. Pacte de réserve de propriété

a. En général Art. 715

b. Ventes par acomptes Art. 716

3. Constitut possessoire Art. 717

1. Choses sans maître Art. 718

2. Animaux échappés Art. 719

1. Publicité et recherches

a. En général Art. 720

b. Animaux Art. 720a

2. Garde de la chose et vente aux enchères Art. 721

3. Acquisition de la propriété, restitution Art. 722

4. Trésor Art. 723

5. Objets ayant une valeur scientifique Art. 724

IV. Épaves Art. 725

V. Spécification Art. 726

VI. Adjonction et mélange Art. 727

VII. Prescription acquisitive Art. 728

C. Perte de la propriété mobilière Art. 729

A. Objet des servitudes Art. 730

1. Inscription Art. 731

2. Acte constitutif Art. 732

3. Servitude sur son propre fonds Art. 733

1. En général Art. 734

2. Réunion des fonds Art. 735

3. Libération judiciaire Art. 736

1. En général Art. 737

2. En vertu de l’inscription Art. 738

3. Besoins nouveaux du fonds dominant Art. 739

4. Droit cantonal et usages locaux Art. 740

5. Pluralité d’ayants droit Art. 740a

II. Charge d’entretien Art. 741

III. Transport de la charge Art. 742

IV. Division d’un fonds Art. 743

Art. 744

I. Son objet Art. 745

1. En général Art. 746

2. ... Art. 747

1. Causes d’extinction Art. 748

2. Durée de l’usufruit Art. 749

3. Contre-valeur de la chose détruite Art. 750

4. Restitution

a. Obligation Art. 751

b. Responsabilité Art. 752

c. Impenses Art. 753

5. Prescription des indemnités Art. 754

1. Droits de l’usufruitier

a. En général Art. 755

b. Fruits naturels Art. 756

c. Intérêts Art. 757

d. Cession de l’usufruit Art. 758

2. Droits du nu-propriétaire

a. Surveillance Art. 759

b. Droit d’exiger des sûretés Art. 760

c. Sûretés dans les cas de donations et d’usufruits légaux Art. 761

d. Suites du défaut de fournir des sûretés Art. 762

3. Inventaire Art. 763

4. Obligations de l’usufruitier

a. Conservation de la chose Art. 764

b. Dépenses d’entretien, impôts et autres charges Art. 765

c. Intérêts des dettes d’un patrimoine Art. 766

d. Assurances Art. 767

1. Immeubles

a. Quant aux fruits Art. 768

b. Destination de la chose Art. 769

c. Forêts Art. 770

d. Mines Art. 771

2. Choses consomptibles et choses évaluées Art. 772

3. Créances

a. Étendue de la jouissance Art. 773

b. Remboursements et remplois Art. 774

c. Droit au transfert des créances Art. 775

I. En général Art. 776

II. Étendue du droit d’habitation Art. 777

III. Charges Art. 778

I. Objet et immatriculation au registre foncier Art. 779

II. Acte constitutif Art. 779a

III. Contenu, étendue et annotation Art. 779b

1. Retour des constructions Art. 779c

2. Indemnité Art. 779d

Abrogé Art. 779e

1. Conditions Art. 779f

2. Exercice du droit de retour Art. 779g

3. Autres cas d’application Art. 779h

1. Droit d’exiger la constitution d’une hypothèque Art. 779i

2. Inscription Art. 779k

VII. Durée maximum Art. 779l

D. Droit à une source sur fonds d’autrui Art. 780

E. Autres servitudes Art. 781

F. Mesures judiciaires Art. 781a

A. Objet de la charge foncière Art. 782

1. Acquisition et inscription Art. 783

2. Charges foncières de droit public Art. 784

Abrogé Art. 785

1. En général Art. 786

2. Rachat

a. Droit du créancier de l’exiger Art. 787

b. Droit du débiteur de l’opérer Art. 788

c. Prix du rachat Art. 789

3. Imprescriptibilité Art. 790

I. Droit du créancier Art. 791

II. Nature de la dette Art. 792

I. Formes du gage immobilier Art. 793

1. Capital Art. 794

2. Intérêts Art. 795

1. Immeubles qui peuvent être constitués en gage Art. 796

2. Désignation

a. De l’immeuble unique Art. 797

b. Des divers immeubles grevés Art. 798

3. Immeubles agricoles Art. 798a

1. Inscription Art. 799

2. Si l’immeuble est propriété de plusieurs Art. 800

II. Extinction Art. 801

1. Déplacement de la garantie Art. 802

2. Dénonciation par le débiteur Art. 803

3. Indemnité en argent Art. 804

I. Étendue du droit du créancier Art. 805

II. Loyers et fermages Art. 806

III. Imprescriptibilité Art. 807

1. Dépréciation de l’immeuble

a. Mesures conservatoires Art. 808

b. Sûretés et rétablissement de l’état antérieur Art. 809

2. Dépréciation sans la faute du propriétaire Art. 810

3. Aliénation de petites parcelles Art. 811

V. Constitution ultérieure de droits réels Art. 812

1. Effets Art. 813

2. Ordre Art. 814

3. Cases libres Art. 815

1. Mode de la réalisation Art. 816

2. Distribution du prix Art. 817

3. Étendue de la garantie Art. 818

4. Garanties pour impenses nécessaires Art. 819

1. Rang Art. 820

2. Extinction de la créance et du gage Art. 821

IX. Droit à l’indemnité d’assurance Art. 822

X. Créancier introuvable Art. 823

A. But et nature Art. 824

I. Constitution Art. 825

1. Radiation Art. 826

2. Droit du propriétaire qui n’est pas tenu personnellement Art. 827

3. Purge hypothécaire

a. Conditions et procédure Art. 828

b. Enchères publiques Art. 829

c. Estimation officielle Art. 830

4. Dénonciation Art. 831

1. Aliénation totale Art. 832

2. Parcellement Art. 833

3. Avis au créancier Art. 834

II. Cession de la créance Art. 835

I. De droit cantonal Art. 836

1. Cas Art. 837

2. Vendeur, cohéritiers, indivis Art. 838

3. Artisans et entrepreneurs

a. Inscription Art. 839

b. Rang Art. 840

c. Privilège Art. 841

I. But; rapport avec la créance de base Art. 842

II. Types Art. 843

III. Droit du propriétaire qui n’est pas personnellement tenu Art. 844

IV. Aliénation, division Art. 845

1. En général Art. 846

2. Dénonciation Art. 847

VI. Protection de la bonne foi Art. 848

VII. Exceptions du débiteur Art. 849

VIII. Fondé de pouvoirs Art. 850

IX. Lieu de paiement Art. 851

X. Modifications Art. 852

XI. Paiement intégral Art. 853

1. À défaut de créancier Art. 854

2. Radiation Art. 855

XIII. Sommation au créancier de se faire connaître Art. 856

I. Constitution Art. 857

II. Transfert Art. 858

III. Mise en gage, saisie et usufruit Art. 859

1. Inscription Art. 860

2. Titre de gage Art. 861

II. Protection de la bonne foi Art. 862

1. Exercice Art. 863

2. Transfert Art. 864

IV. Annulation Art. 865

Abrogés Art. 866 à 874

A. Obligations foncières Art. 875

Abrogés Art. 876 à 883

1. Possession du créancier Art. 884

2. Engagement du bétail Art. 885

3. Droit de gage subséquent Art. 886

4. Engagement par le créancier Art. 887

1. Perte de la possession Art. 888

2. Restitution Art. 889

3. Responsabilité du créancier Art. 890

1. Droits du créancier Art. 891

2. Étendue du gage Art. 892

3. Rang des droits de gage Art. 893

4. Pacte commissoire Art. 894

I. Condition Art. 895

II. Exceptions Art. 896

III. En cas d’insolvabilité Art. 897

IV. Effets Art. 898

A. En général Art. 899

I. Créances ordinaires Art. 900

II. Papiers- valeurs Art. 901

III. Titres représentatifs de marchandises et warrants Art. 902

IV. Engagement subséquent de la créance Art. 903

I. Étendue du droit du créancier Art. 904

II. Représentation d’actions et de parts sociales d’une société à responsabilité limitée données en gage Art. 905

III. Administration et remboursement Art. 906

I. Autorisation Art. 907

II. Durée Art. 908

I. Constitution Art. 909

1. Vente du gage Art. 910

2. Droit à l’excédent Art. 911

1. Droit de dégager la chose Art. 912

2. Droits du prêteur Art. 913

C. Achats sous pacte de réméré Art. 914

D. Droit cantonal Art. 915

Abrogés Art. 916 à 918

I. Définition Art. 919

II. Possession originaire et dérivée Art. 920

III. Interruption passagère Art. 921

I. Entre présents Art. 922

II. Entre absents Art. 923

III. Sans tradition Art. 924

IV. Marchandises représentées par des titres Art. 925

1. Droit de défense Art. 926

2. Réintégrande Art. 927

3. Action en raison du trouble de la possession Art. 928

4. Déchéance et prescription Art. 929

1. Présomption de propriété Art. 930

2. Présomption en matière de possession dérivée Art. 931

3. Action contre le possesseur Art. 932

4. Droit de disposition et de revendication

a. Choses confiées Art. 933

b. Choses perdues ou volées Art. 934

c. Monnaie et titres au porteur Art. 935

d. En cas de mauvaise foi Art. 936

5. Présomption à l’égard des immeubles Art. 937

1. Possesseur de bonne foi

a. Jouissance Art. 938

b. Indemnités Art. 939

2. Possesseur de mauvaise foi Art. 940

IV. Prescription Art. 941

1. En général Art. 942

2. Immatriculation

a. Immeubles immatriculés Art. 943

b. Immeubles non immatriculés Art. 944

3. Les registres

a. Le grand livre Art. 945

b. Le feuillet du registre foncier Art. 946

c. Feuillets collectifs Art. 947

d. Journal, pièces justificatives Art. 948

4. Ordonnances

a. En général Art. 949

b. Tenue informatisée du registre foncier Art. 949a

4a. ... Art. 949b

4b. ... Art. 949c

4c. Recours à des délégataires privés dans l’exploitation du registre foncier informatisé Art. 949d

5. Mensuration officielle Art. 950

1. Arrondissements

a. Compétence Art. 951

b. Immeubles situés dans plusieurs arrondissements Art. 952

2. Bureaux du registre foncier Art. 953

3. Émoluments Art. 954

III. Responsabilité Art. 955

IV. Surveillance administrative Art. 956

1. Qualité pour recourir Art. 956a

2. Procédure de recours Art. 956b

Abrogé Art. 957

1. Propriété et droits réels Art. 958

2. Annotations

a. Droits personnels Art. 959

b. Restrictions du droit d’aliéner Art. 960

c. Inscriptions provisoires Art. 961

d. Inscription de droits de rang postérieur Art. 961a

1. De restrictions de droit public à la propriété Art. 962

2. De représentants Art. 962a

1. Réquisition

a. Pour inscrire Art. 963

b. Pour radier Art. 964

2. Légitimation

a. Validité Art. 965

b. Complément de légitimation Art. 966

1. En général Art. 967

2. À l’égard des servitudes Art. 968

V. Avis obligatoires Art. 969

I. Communication de renseignements et consultation Art. 970

II. Publications Art. 970a

I. Effets du défaut d’inscription Art. 971

1. En général Art. 972

2. À l’égard des tiers de bonne foi Art. 973

3. À l’égard des tiers de mauvaise foi Art. 974

1. En cas de division d’un immeuble Art. 974a

2. En cas de réunion d’immeubles Art. 974b

II. En cas d’inscription indue Art. 975

1. D’inscriptions indubitablement sans valeur juridique Art. 976

2. D’autres inscriptions

a. En général Art. 976a

b. En cas d’opposition Art. 976b

3. Procédure d’épuration publique Art. 976c

IV. Rectifications Art. 977

I. Non-rétroactivité des lois Art. 1

1. Ordre public et bonnes moeurs Art. 2

2. Empire de la loi Art. 3

3. Droits non acquis Art. 4

I. Exercice des droits civils Art. 5

II. Déclaration d’absence Art. 6

IIa. Banque de données centrale de l’état civil Art. 6a

1. En général Art. 6b

2. Comptabilité et organe de révision Art. 6c

IV. Protection de la personnalité contre la violence, les menaces et le harcèlement Art. 6d

I. Mariage Art. 7

1. Principe Art. 7a

2. Procès en divorce pendants Art. 7b

3. Délai de séparation dans les procès en divorce pendants Art. 7c

4. Prévoyance professionnelle Art. 7d

5. Conversion de rentes existantes Art. 7e

1. Principe Art. 8

2. Nom Art. 8a

3. Droit de cité Art. 8b

II. Régime matrimonial des époux mariés avant le 1er janvier 1912 Art. 9

1. En général Art. 9a

2. Passage de l’union des biens au régime de la participation aux acquêts

a. Sort des biens Art. 9b

b. Privilèges Art. 9c

c. Liquidation du régime sous l’empire de la loi nouvelle Art. 9d

3. Maintien de l’union des biens Art. 9e

4. Maintien de la séparation de biens légale ou judiciaire Art. 9f

5. Contrats de mariage

a. En général Art. 10

b. Effets à l’égard des tiers Art. 10a

c. Soumission au droit nouveau Art. 10b

d. Séparation de biens conventionnelle de l’ancien droit Art. 10c

e. Contrats de mariage conclus en vue de l’entrée en vigueur de la loi nouvelle Art. 10d

f. Registre des régimes matrimoniaux Art. 10e

6. Règlement des dettes en cas de liquidation matrimoniale Art. 11

7. Protection des créanciers Art. 11a

III. La filiation en général Art. 12

1. Maintien de l’ancien droit Art. 12a

2. Procédures pendantes Art. 12b

3. Soumission au nouveau droit Art. 12c

4. Abrogé Art. 12cbis

IIIter. Contestation de la légitimation Art. 12d

1. Actions pendantes Art. 13

2. Nouvelles actions Art. 13a

IVbis. Délai pour agir en constatation ou en contestation des rapports de filiation Art. 13b

IVter. Contribution d’entretien

1. Titres d’entretien existants Art. 13c

2. Procédures en cours Art. 13cbis

IVquater. Nom de l’enfant Art. 13d

1. Mesures existantes Art. 14

2. Procédures pendantes Art. 14a

I. Héritiers et dévolution Art. 15

II. Dispositions pour cause de mort Art. 16

I. En général Art. 17

II. Droit à l’inscription dans le registre foncier Art. 18

III. Prescription acquisitive Art. 19

1. Arbres plantés dans le fonds d’autrui Art. 20

2. Propriété par étages

a. Originaire Art. 20bis

b. Transformée Art. 20ter

c. Épuration des registres fonciers Art. 20quater

V. Servitudes foncières Art. 21

1. Reconnaissance des titres hypothécaires actuels Art. 22

2. Constitution de droits de gage Art. 23

3. Titres acquittés Art. 24

4. Étendue du gage Art. 25

5. Droits et obligations dérivant du gage immobilier

a. En général Art. 26

b. Mesures conservatoires Art. 27

c. Dénonciation, transfert Art. 28

6. Rang Art. 29

7. Case hypothécaire Art. 30

8. ... Art. 31 et 32

9. Assimilation entre droits de gage de l’ancienne et de la nouvelle loi Art. 33

10. Persistance de l’ancienne loi pour les anciens types de droits de gage Art. 33a

11. Transformation du type de cédule hypothécaire Art. 33b

1. Forme Art. 34

2. Effets Art. 35

VIII. Droits de rétention Art. 36

IX. Possession Art. 37

1. Établissement Art. 38

2. Mensuration officielle

a. ... Art. 39

b. Introduction du registre foncier avant la mensuration Art. 40

c. Délais pour la mensuration et l’introduction du registre foncier Art. 41

Abrogé Art. 42

3. Inscription des droits réels

a. Mode de l’inscription Art. 43

b. Conséquences du défaut d’inscription Art. 44

4. Droits réels abolis Art. 45

5. Ajournement de l’introduction du registre foncier Art. 46

6. Entrée en vigueur du régime des droits réels avant l’établissement du registre foncier Art. 47

7. Formes du droit cantonal Art. 48

F. Prescription Art. 49

G. Forme des contrats Art. 50

A. Abrogation du droit civil cantonal Art. 51

I. Droits et devoirs des cantons Art. 52

II. Règles établies par le pouvoir fédéral à défaut des cantons Art. 53

C. Désignation des autorités compétentes Art. 54

I. En général Art. 55

II. Supports électroniques Art. 55a

E. Concessions hydrauliques Art. 56

F. à H. ... Art. 57

J. Poursuite pour dettes et faillite Art. 58

K. Application du droit suisse et du droit étranger Art. 59

L. Droit civil fédéral abrogé Art. 60

M. Dispositions finales Art. 61

A. Régime légal ordinaire Art. 178

I. Choix du régime Art. 179

II. Capacités des parties Art. 180

III. Forme du contrat de mariage Art. 181

I. Séparation de biens légale Art. 182

1. À la demande de la femme Art. 183

2. À la demande du mari Art. 184

3. À la demande des créanciers Art. 185

III. Date de la séparation de biens Art. 186

IV. Révocation de la séparation de biens Art. 187

I. Garantie des droits des créanciers Art. 188

II. Liquidation en cas de séparation de biens Art. 189

1. En général Art. 190

2. Biens réservés par l’effet de la loi Art. 191

II. Effets Art. 192

III. Preuve Art. 193

I. Biens matrimoniaux Art. 194

II. Propres des époux Art. 195

III. Preuve Art. 196

1. Forme et force probante Art. 197

2. Effet de l’estimation Art. 198

V. Apports de la femme passant en propriété au mari Art. 199

I. Administration Art. 200

II. Jouissance Art. 201

1. Du mari Art. 202

2. De la femme

a. En général Art. 203

b. Répudiation de successions Art. 204

C. Garantie des apports de la femme Art. 205

I. Responsabilité du mari Art. 206

1. Sur tous ses biens Art. 207

2. Sur ses biens réservés Art. 208

I. Exigibilité Art. 209

1. Droits de la femme Art. 210

2. Privilège Art. 211

I. Décès de la femme Art. 212

II. Décès du mari Art. 213

III. Bénéfice et déficit Art. 214

I. Biens matrimoniaux Art. 215

1. En général Art. 216

2. Actes de disposition

a. En général Art. 217

b. Répudiation de successions Art. 218

1. Responsabilité du mari Art. 219

2. Responsabilité de la femme

a. Sur ses biens et sur les biens communs Art. 220

b. Sur la valeur de ses biens réservés Art. 221

3. Exécution forcée Art. 222

1. En général Art. 223

2. Créance de la femme Art. 224

1. Partage

a. Légal Art. 225

b. Conventionnel Art. 226

2. Responsabilité du survivant Art. 227

3. Attribution des apports Art. 228

I. Cas Art. 229

II. Biens de communauté Art. 230

III. Administration et représentation Art. 231

1. Par les intéressés Art. 232

2. De par la loi Art. 233

3. Par jugement Art. 234

4. Par suite de mariage ou décès d’un enfant Art. 235

5. Partage ou liquidation Art. 236

I. Avec stipulation de séparation de biens Art. 237

II. Avec stipulation d’union des biens Art. 238

1. Son étendue Art. 239

2. Partage Art. 240

A. Effets généraux Art. 241

B. Propriété, administration et jouissance Art. 242

I. En général Art. 243

II. Faillite du mari et saisie faite contre lui Art. 244

D. Revenus et gains Art. 245

E. Contribution des époux aux charges du mariage Art. 246

F. Dot Art. 247

A. Effets de l’inscription Art. 248

I. Objet Art. 249

II. Lieu Art. 250

C. Tenue du registre Art. 251


 RO 24 245, 27 200 et RS 2 3


1 [RS 1 3]. À la disp. mentionnée correspond actuellement l’art. 122 de la Cst. du 18 avr. 1999 (RS 101).2 Nouvelle teneur selon l’annexe ch. 2 de la LF du 24 mars 2000 sur les fors, en vigueur depuis le 1er janv. 2001 (RO 2000 2355; FF 1999 2591).3 FF 1904 IV 1, 1907 VI 402



Ceci n'est pas une publication officielle. Seule la publication opérée par la Chancellerie fédérale fait foi. Ordonnance sur les publications officielles, OPubl.
Droit-bilingue.ch (2009-2021) - A propos
Page générée le: 2021-01-16T19:35:04
A partir de: http://www.admin.ch/opc/en/classified-compilation/19070042/index.html
Script écrit en Powered by Perl